Yamaha DM2000 El manual del propietario

Marca: Yamaha

Modelo: DM2000

Categoría: Controladores de DJ

Tipo: El manual del propietario

Owner’s Manual

Keep This Manual For Future Reference.

WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED

IMPORTANT

THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN

ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE:

GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH

BLUE : NEUTRAL

BROWN : LIVE

As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may

not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in

your plug, proceed as follows:

The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be

connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E

or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN and YELLOW.

The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal

which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK.

The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the

terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED.

* This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE

MUSIC (U.K.) LTD.

FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.)

1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC

requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product.

2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST

be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA.

3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with

these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with

other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may

cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all

installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the

problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on

different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in

is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer

authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service

Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620

The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries.

NEDERLAND THE NETHERLANDS

● Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen

back-up.

● Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de

batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde

van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service

Afdeiing:

Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing

Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT

Te l. 030-2828425

● Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA.

● This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory

back-up.

● For the removal of the battery at the moment of the

disposal at the end of the service life please consult your

retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows:

Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center

Address: Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL

UTRECHT

Te l: 030-2828425

● Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small

chemical waste.

ADVARSEL!

Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig

håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri

af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte

batteri tilbage til leverandoren.

VARNING

Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd

samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som

rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren.

Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens

instruktion.

VAROITUS

Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti

asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan

laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä

käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden

mukaisesti.

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Important Information

Warnings

•Connect this unit’s power cord only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this Owner’s Man-

ual or as marked on the unit. Failure to do so is a ﬁre and electrical shock hazard.

•Do not allow water to enter this unit or allow the unit to become wet. Fire or electrical shock

may result.

•Do not place heavy objects, including this unit, on top of the power cord. A damaged power

cord is a ﬁre and electrical shock hazard. In particular, be careful not to place heavy objects

on a power cord covered by a carpet.

•Do not place a container with liquid or small metal objects on top of this unit. Liquid or

metal objects inside this unit are a ﬁre and electrical shock hazard.

•This unit is equipped with a dedicated ground connection to prevent electrical shock.

Before connecting the power plug to an AC outlet, be sure to ground the unit. If the power

cord has a three-pin plug, it will provide sufﬁcient grounding so long as the AC outlet is

grounded correctly.

•Do not scratch, bend, twist, pull, or heat the power cord. A damaged power cord is a ﬁre

and electrical shock hazard.

•Do not remove the unit’s cover. You could receive an electrical shock. If you think internal

inspection, maintenance, or repair is necessary, contact your dealer.

•Do not modify the unit. Doing so is a ﬁre and electrical shock hazard.

•If lightning begins to occur, turn off the power switch of the unit as soon as possible, and

unplug the power cable plug from the electrical outlet.

•If there is a possibility of lightning, do not touch the power cable plug if it is still connected.

Doing so may be an electrical shock hazard.

•Use only the included power cord for this unit. Using other types may be a ﬁre and electrical

shock hazard.

•The DM2000 has six rear-panel slots for installing mini-YGDAI cards. For technical rea-

sons, certain card combinations are not supported. Before installing any cards, check the

Yamaha web site to if your card is compatible. Installing cards that are not endorsed by

Yamaha may cause electrical shock, ﬁre, or damage to the unit.

•If the power cord is damaged (i.e., cut or a bare wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a

replacement. Using the unit with a damaged power cord is a ﬁre and electrical shock hazard.

•If you notice any abnormality, such as smoke, odor, or noise, or if a foreign object or liquid

gets inside the unit, turn it off immediately. Remove the power cord from the AC outlet.

Consult your dealer for repair. Using the unit in this condition is a ﬁre and electrical shock

hazard.

• Should this unit be dropped or the cabinet be damaged, turn the power switch off, remove

the power plug from the AC outlet, and contact your dealer. If you continue using the unit

without heeding this instruction, ﬁre or electrical shock may result.

Cautions

•Keep this unit away from the following locations:

—Locations exposed to oil splashes or steam, such as near cooking stoves, humidiﬁers, etc.

—Unstable surfaces, such as a wobbly table or slope.

—Locations exposed to excessive heat, such as inside a car with all the windows closed, or

places that receive direct sunlight.

—Locations subject to excessive humidity or dust accumulation.

•Hold the power cord plug when disconnecting it from an AC outlet. Never pull the cord. A

damaged power cord is a potential ﬁre and electrical shock hazard.

•Do not touch the power plug with wet hands. Doing so is a potential electrical shock hazard.

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

•This unit has ventilation holes along the front underside and at the rear to prevent the inter-

nal temperature from rising too high. Do not block them. Blocked ventilation holes are a

ﬁre hazard. In particular, do not operate the unit while it’s on its side, is upside down, or

while it’s covered with a cloth or dust sheet.

•If you are using the optional MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge, do not hold only the MB2000

when you move the entire unit. Otherwise, the meter angle may be deformed or damaged,

the main unit may malfunction, or you may be injured if the unit falls.

•This unit is heavy. Use two or more people to carry it.

•When you transport or move the DM2000 with the MB2000 attached, do not permit

impact or stress on the cable connector that connects the MB2000 to the DM2000. Other-

wise, malfunction may occur.

•To relocate the unit, turn the power switch off, remove the power plug from the AC outlet,

and remove all connecting cables. Damaged cables may cause ﬁre or electrical shock.

•If you know you will not use this unit for a long period of time, such as when going on vaca-

tion, remove the power plug from the AC outlet. Leaving it connected is a potential ﬁre haz-

ard.

•The inside of the unit should be cleaned periodically. Dust accumulation inside the unit

may cause malfunction and is a potential ﬁre hazard. Consult your dealer for information

about cleaning.

•To prevent electrical shock when cleaning the unit, remove the power plug from the AC out-

let.

Operating Notes

• XLR-type connectors are wired as follows: pin 1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–).

•Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows: sleeve–ground, tip–send, and ring–return.

•The performance of components with moving contacts, such switches, rotary controls, fad-

ers, and connectors, deteriorates over time. The rate of deterioration depends on the oper-

ating environment and is unavoidable. Consult your dealer about replacing defective

components.

•Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce noise. If noise occurs, use the telephone

away from the unit.

•If the message “WARNING Low Battery!” appears when you turn on this unit, contact your

dealer as soon as possible about replacing the internal data backup battery. The unit will still

operate correctly, but data other than the presets will be lost.

•Before replacing the batteries, back up your data to a memory card, or another unit by using

MIDI Bulk Dump.

•The digital circuits of this unit may induce a slight noise into nearby radios and TVs. If noise

occurs, relocate the affected equipment.

•When connecting D-sub cables, be sure to tighten the screws on both sides of the connector

securely. To disconnect the cable, loosen the screws completely, then remove the cable by

holding the connector part. Do not remove the plug by pulling the cable while the screws

are still attached. Otherwise, the connector may be damaged, leading to malfunction.

•When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some

devices may output noise, so turn down your power amps beforehand, otherwise your

speakers may be damaged.

iii

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

SmartMedia Handling Precautions

•The CARD slot is for use with SmartMedia only. Never attempt to insert any other type of

storage media.

•Use only SmartMedia of the type speciﬁed in this

Owner’s Manual

•Store SmartMedia in a place free from extreme temperatures, humidity, dust, and dirt.

•Always store SmartMedia in its original case.

•Write only on the designated area.

•When handling SmartMedia, be careful not to touch the gold contacts. Fingerprints,

smudges, scratches, or dirt can affect performance.

• Fingerprints and dust should be removed by wiping gently using a soft, dry cloth. Do not

use benzene, thinner, cleaning detergent, or a chemical cloth.

•If SmartMedia is stored in a cold place (e.g., overnight in a car), and then moved to a

warmer environment, or if the temperature rises sharply, condensation may form on the

surface, which may affect performance. In this case, the SmartMedia should be allowed to

acclimatize for about one hour before use.

•Insert SmartMedia carefully into the CARD slot, with the gold contacts facing upward.

•Do not bend or twist SmartMedia.

•Do not under any circumstances attempt to use SmartMedia that is cracked or warped.

Doing so may seriously damage the CARD slot.

•Do not remove SmartMedia while saving or loading data. Doing so may cause data lose.

• Data stored on SmartMedia can be protected against inadvertent overwriting by attaching

a write-protect sticker (supplied with SmartMedia).

Interference

The DM2000 uses high-frequency digital circuits that may cause interference on radio and

television equipment located nearby. If interference is a problem, relocate the affected

equipment. Using a mobile telephone near the unit may induce noise. In this case use the

telephone away from the unit.

DM2000 Exclusion of Certain Responsibility

Manufacturer, importer, or dealer shall not be liable for any incidental damages including

personal injury or any other damages caused by improper use or operation of the DM2000.

Trademarks

ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are reg-

istered trademarks of Alesis Corporation. Apogee is a trademark of Apogee Electronics, Inc.

Apple, Mac, and Power Macintosh are registered trademarks and Mac OS is a trademark of

Apple Corporation, Inc. HUI is a trademark of Mackie Designs, Inc. Intel and Pentium are

registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Nuendo is a registered trademark of Steinberg

Media Technologies AG. Pro Tools is a trademark or registered trademark of Digidesign

and/or Avid Technology, Inc. SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba, Corp. Sony is a regis-

tered trademark of Sony Corporation, Inc. Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tas-

cam and Teac are registered trademarks of Teac Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are

registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Inc. Waves is a trademark of Waves, Inc.

Yamaha is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of

their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged.

No part of the DM2000, its software, or this

Owner’s Manual

may be reproduced or distrib-

uted in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Cor-

poration.

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Yamaha Web Site

Further information about the DM2000, related products, and other Yamaha professional

audio equipment is available on the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at:

<http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>.

Package Contents

• DM2000 Digital Production Console

• CD-ROM

•Power cord

•This manual

Optional Extras

• MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge

• SP2000 Wooden Side Panels

•LA1800 Light Gooseneck

• mini YGDAI I/O cards

About this Owner’s Manual

This

Owner’s Manual

covers the DM2000 Digital Production Console.

All the information you need in order to operate the DM2000 Digital Production Console

is contained in this manual. Use the table of contents to familiarize yourself with the man-

ual’s organization and to locate tasks and topics, and use the index to locate speciﬁc infor-

mation. Before diving in, it’s recommend that you read the “Operating Basics” chapter,

starting on page 35.

Each chapter of this manual discusses a speciﬁc section or function of the DM2000. The

Input and Output Channels are explained in the following chapters: “Input Channels,” “Bus

Outs,” “Aux Sends,” “Matrix Sends,” and “Stereo Out.” Where possible, these chapters have

been organized in order of signal ﬂow, from input through to output.

Functions such as EQ and Delay are common to all channels. Rather than repeat the same

information over and over, these functions are explained once in the “Common Channel

Functions” chapter, which starts on page 103. The Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends,

Matrix Sends, and Stereo Out chapters contain cross-references to the relevant sections of

the “Common Channel Functions” chapter.

Conventions Used in this Manual

The DM2000 features two types of button: physical buttons that you can press (e.g., ENTER

and DISPLAY) and buttons that appear on the display pages. References to physical buttons

are enclosed in square brackets, for example, “press the [ENTER] button.” References to dis-

play page buttons are not emphasized, for example, “press the ENTER button.”

Display pages can be selected by using the [DISPLAY] buttons or the Left Tab Scroll, Right

Tab Scroll, and F1–4 buttons below the display. In order to simplify explanations, only the

[DISPLAY] button method is mentioned in the procedures. See “Selecting Display Pages”

on page 36 for details on all the ways in which pages can be selected.

Installing the DM2000

The DM2000 should be placed on a strong and stable surface, somewhere that complies

with the warnings and cautions listed in the previous sections.

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Contents

1 Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1

2 Control Surface & Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4

Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29

3 Operating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Turning On & Off the DM2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

About the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35

Selecting Display Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 36

Display History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Display Page Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Parameter Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Confirmation Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37

Title Edit Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Using a Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 38

Channel Strip Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 39

Selecting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 42

Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 43

Selecting Fader Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 44

Selecting Encoder Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45

Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46

4 Analog I/O & the AD Input Section . . . . . . . . . . . 48

AD Input Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 48

Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Control Room Monitor Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Studio Monitor Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

2TR Analog INs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 49

5 Digital I/O & Cascading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

Wordclocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50

2TR Digital Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 52

2TR Digital Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

2TR In/Out Sampling Rate Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 53

Slot I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 54

Dithering Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 57

Cascading Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 58

6 Input & Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Input Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61

Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 63

Naming Input & Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 66

Patch Select Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

Patching with the Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 67

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

7 Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Patching Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Metering Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Reversing the Signal Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68

Gating Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69

Attenuating Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

EQ’ing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 70

Grouping Input Channel EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Input Channel Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Compressing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 71

Grouping Input Channel Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Delaying Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Muting Input Channels (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 72

Grouping Input Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 73

Setting Input Channel Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Grouping Input Channel Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 74

Routing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 75

Panning Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 76

Using Surround Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77

Sending Input Channels to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 80

Soloing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Direct Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Pairing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Using MS Decoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Viewing Input Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Copying Input Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

Naming Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 81

8 Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Stereo Out Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Patching the Stereo Out to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Routing Input Channels to the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Metering the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Monitoring the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Attenuating the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

EQ’ing the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Grouping Master EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Stereo Out Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82

Compressing the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Grouping Master Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Muting the Stereo Out (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Setting the Stereo Out Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Grouping Master Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Sending the Stereo Out to the Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 83

Balancing the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Delaying the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Inserting GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Viewing Stereo Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Copying Stereo Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

Naming the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 84

vii

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

9 Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Patching Bus Outs to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Routing Input Channels to Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Metering Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Monitoring Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Attenuating Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

EQ’ing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Grouping Master EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Bus Out Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Compressing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Grouping Master Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85

Muting Bus Outs (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Setting Bus Out Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Grouping Master Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Sending Bus Outs to Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Delaying Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Inserting GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Soloing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Pairing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 86

Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Viewing Bus Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Copying Bus Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

Naming Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 87

10 Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Patching Aux Send Masters to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Setting the Aux Send Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88

Setting Aux Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 89

Muting Aux Sends (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Aux Send Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 90

Viewing Aux Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 92

Panning Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 94

Metering Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Monitoring Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Attenuating Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

EQ’ing Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Grouping Master EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Aux Send Master Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Compressing Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Grouping Master Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Muting Aux Send Masters (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 95

Settings Aux Send Master Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Grouping Master Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Sending Aux Sends to Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Delaying Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Inserting GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Soloing Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Pairing Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Viewing Aux Send Master Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Copying Aux Send Master Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

Naming Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 96

viii

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

11 Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Patching Matrix Send Masters to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Setting Matrix Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97

Muting Matrix Sends (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Matrix Send Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 98

Panning Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Viewing Matrix Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 99

Metering Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Monitoring Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Attenuating Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

EQ’ing Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Grouping Master EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Matrix Send Master Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Compressing Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 100

Grouping Master Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Muting Matrix Send Masters (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Setting Matrix Send Master Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Grouping Master Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Balancing Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 101

Delaying Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Soloing Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Inserting GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Viewing Matrix Send Master Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Copying Matrix Send Master Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

Naming Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 102

12 Common Channel Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103

Attenuating Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 106

Using EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 107

Grouping Output Channel EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 110

Using Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 111

Compressing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 113

Grouping Output Channel Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 116

Delaying Channel Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 117

Soloing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 118

Pairing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 120

Grouping Output Channel Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 122

Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 123

Viewing Channel Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 124

Viewing Channel Fader Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 125

Copying Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 129

Naming Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 130

13 Monitoring & Talkback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Control Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132

Studio Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 133

Surround Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 134

Using Talkback & Slate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 138

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

14 Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

About the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

General Library Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139

Channel Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140

Input Patch Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

Output Patch Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141

GEQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Effects Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142

Bus to Stereo Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143

Gate Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144

Comp Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145

EQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146

Automix Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

Surround Monitor Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147

15 Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

About the Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Patching Effects Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Preset Effects & Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148

Editing Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150

About Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Configuring Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152

Editing Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153

About the GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

Editing GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155

16 Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

About Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157

Auto Scene Memory Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158

Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159

Using the Scene Memory Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160

Fading Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161

Recalling Scenes Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162

Sorting Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163

17 Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

About Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

What’s Recorded in an Automix? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164

Automix Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165

AUTOMIX Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168

Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Automix Memory Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169

Fader Edit Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170

Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171

Creating a Time Signature Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Recording an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172

Rerecording Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173

Parameter Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174

Punching In & Out Individual Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175

Playing Back an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176

Editing Events Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

18 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

MIDI & the DM2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

MIDI I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182

MIDI Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 183

MIDI Channel Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 184

Assigning Scenes to Program Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 185

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 186

Using Bulk Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 187

19 Pro Tools Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Configuring Windows Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Configuring Macintosh Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Configuring the DM2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188

Configuring Pro Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 189

Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 190

Scrolling Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Assigning Inputs to Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 203

Assigning Outputs to Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Setting Channel Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 204

Muting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Panning Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Soloing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 205

Assigning Send Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Configuring Sends as Pre or Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 206

Setting Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Muting Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Panning Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 207

Flip Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 208

Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 209

Editing Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 210

Bypassing Individual Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Bypassing all Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 211

Resetting Faders, Sends, Panpots & Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Navigating the Edit Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 212

Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Making Fine Adjustments to the Selected Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 213

Scrub & Shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 214

Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 215

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

20 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

About Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Assigning Targets to Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217

Configuring User Defined Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218

Using User Defined Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219

About Machine Control (MMC & P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Configuring Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220

Configuring the REMOTE Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Transport Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221

Using Shuttle & Scrub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Using the Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222

Setting the Locate Memories, Pre-roll, Post-roll & Roll-back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224

Arming Machine Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225

Configuring MTR Track Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Configuring Master Track Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226

Configuring Track Arming Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227

GPI (General Purpose Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228

Controlling AD824 A/D Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229

21 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Using the User Defined Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230

Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231

Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234

Using the Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Checking the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238

Initializing the DM2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239

Appendix A: Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

USER DEFINED KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240

USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Input Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242

Initial Input Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246

Output Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247

Initial Output Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255

Initial Input Channel Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256

Initial Output Channel Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257

Initial Input Port Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258

Initial Output Port Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260

GPI Trigger Source List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261

Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264

Preset EQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292

Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296

xii

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Appendix B: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

General Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301

Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 307

Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 309

Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 310

Analog Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Analog Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 311

Digital Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

Digital Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 312

I/O Slot Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Control I/O Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 313

Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 314

Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 316

Appendix C: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Scene Memory to Program Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 318

MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Format Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 319

Appendix D: Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333

SP2000 Wooden Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335

Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336

Welcome

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

1 Welcome

Thank you for choosing the Yamaha DM2000 Digital Production Console.

Designed with production in mind, the DM2000 Digital Production Console offers

24-bit/96 kHz digital audio processing without compromise, comprehensive surround

mixing and monitoring, including bass management and down mixing, and hands-on con-

trol of popular DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) systems.

Sonic Spec

• Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling A/D converters

• Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling D/A converters

• 20 Hz–40 kHz (0.5, –1.5 dB) frequency response at 96 kHz sampling rate

• 108 dB typical dynamic range (AD Input to Stereo Out)

• 32-bit internal signal processing (58-bit accumulator)

Channel Architecture

• 96 Input Channels, with Direct Outs

•8 Bus Outs, with to Stereo Out routing for subgrouping

• 12 Aux Sends

•4 stereo Matrix Sends (22 x 8 matrix)

•Stereo Out

•Channels can be named for easy identiﬁcation

•Channel library with 127 user memories

•Copy and paste channel settings

I/O Architecture

• 24 analog mic/line inputs on balanced XLRs and phone jacks (plus 48 V phantom)

• 24 analog inserts on individual in/out phone jacks

• 48 inputs, 48 outputs via six mini-YGDAI slots and optional I/O cards, which

offer a variety

of analog and digital I/O options, with support for all the popular digital audio inter-

connect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, Tascam TDIF-1, and mLAN.

•8 assignable Omni outputs

•2 AES/EBU, 1 Coaxial 2-track digital input

•2 AES/EBU, 1 Coaxial 2-track digital output

•2 analog 2-track inputs

• XLR and phone jack stereo outputs

• Large and small control room outputs

•Dedicated studio monitor outputs

• AES/EBU and Coaxial I/O sampling rate converters for connecting 44.1/48 kHz legacy dig-

ital audio equipment

•Double channel digital I/O for use with legacy 44.1/48 kHz multitrack recorders

•Cascade ports for cascading up to four DM2000s (i.e., 384 Input Channels)

Chapter 1—Welcome

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

I/O Patching

•Any available input port can be patched to the Input Channels, Insert Ins, or Effects inputs

•Direct Outs, Insert Outs, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out can be

patched to any output port

•Input and output ports can be named for easy identiﬁcation

•Patches can be stored in the Input and Output Patch libraries

EQ & GEQ

•4-band parametric EQ on all Input and Output Channels

• EQ library with 40 presets, 160 user memories

•Six 31-band graphic equalizers that can be patched into Output Channels

• GEQ library with 128 user memories

Groups & Pairs

•Horizontal and vertical pairing of Input Channels

•Horizontal pairing of Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Surround Pan

•8 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel Fader groups

•8 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel Mute groups

•4 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel EQ groups

•4 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel Compressor groups

Effects

•8 internal effects processors

• Effects library with 52 presets, 76 user memories

•Multichannel effects for surround sound processing

•Joystick control of early reﬂections and reverb with the Reverb 5.1 effect

•Optional Waves 56K effects plug-in card

•User deﬁned plug-ins for external effects control via MIDI, with Learn function

Dynamics

• Gates on all 96 Input Channels

• Gate library with 4 presets, 124 user memories

•Compressors on all Input Channels and Out Channels (126 in total)

•Compressor library with 36 presets, 92 user memories

Automation

•Dynamic automation of virtually all mix parameters, with 1/4-frame accuracy

•Automix library with 16 memories

•Snapshot style automation with 99 Scene memories, recallable via MIDI or Automix

•Individual fade time settings for all Input and Output faders

•Scene and library recalls

•Punch in/out entire channels with dedicated [AUTO] buttons, or individual parameters

• Editing fader moves with Fader Return, Fader Takeover, Absolute/Relative modes

• Ofﬂine event editing includes, erase, copy, move/merge, trim, duplicate, delete, and insert

Welcome

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Surround Sound

•3-1 and 5.1 Surround modes

•Joystick control

•Bass management

•Down mixing

•Surround monitor speaker alignment functions

•Surround monitor library with 32 user memories

Remote Control

•Control and manage your DM2000 from your Mac or PC by using the bundled Studio

Manager software

•Remote Layers for external equipment control, including predeﬁned targets for controlling

DAW systems, and user deﬁned targets for controlling MIDI equipment, with Learn func-

tion

•Comprehensive machine control via MMC or P2, including transport, track arming,

jog/shuttle, and built-in locator with eight Locate memories, all with independent control

of master and MTR machines

•Assignable GPI (General Purpose Interface) port for external control and “Recording” light

•Remote control of head amps and phantom on up to 12 Yamaha AD824 A/D Converters

MIDI

• Standard MIDI ports, USB TO HOST port, SERIAL TO HOST port, or mLAN MIDI I/O

• USB, SERIAL, and mLAN offer multiport operation

•Scene recall, mix parameter control, Bulk Dump, MTC and MIDI Clock for Automix syn-

chronization, MMC for external machine control

Control Surface

• 25 touch-sensitive 100-mm motorized faders (touch sense used to select channels or punch

faders in/out during Automix recording)

•Use the faders to set channel levels or Aux/Matrix Send levels

•Use the 24 Encoders to control Pan, Aux/Matrix Send levels, or user assigned parameters

•Channels arranged into four Input Layers, Master Layer, and four Remote Layers

• 320 x 240 dot LCD display with ﬂuorescent backlight

•Fluorescent channel strip displays, showing channel names, Encoder status, routing, etc

•Complete hands-on control of all channel functions via the SELECTED CHANNEL section

•2-digit Scene memory display

•4 EQ displays for frequency, gain, and Q

• 16 user-deﬁnable buttons make light work of repetitive tasks

•Display History buttons for quick access to recently viewed display pages

•SmartMedia card slot for Automix, Scene, library, and setup data storage and transfer

•Optional PS/2-compatible keyboard for quick title entry

Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

2 Control Surface & Rear Panel

Control Surface

CH01 CH02 CH03 CH04 CH05 CH06 CH07 CH08 CH09 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24

ROUTING

STEREOFOLLOW PAN DIRECT

GATE ON COMP ON

GATE

COMP

RANGE

RATIO

ATT ACK

DECAY

RELEASETHRESHOLD

THRESHOLD HOLD

LINK GRAB EFFECT

EVEN

EQUALIZER

CHANNEL

COPY

PASTE

EQ ON

AT T.

kHz

LOW

SELECTED CHANNEL

PHASE / INSERT

INSERT ON

AUX/MATRIX SEND

DELAY

TIME

MIX

LEVEL

AUX 1 /MATRIX 1

AUX 5

AUX 9

AUX 2 /MATRIX 2

AUX 6

AUX 10

AUX 3 /MATRIX 3

AUX 7

AUX 11

AUX 4 /MATRIX 4

AUX 8

AUX 12

DYNA MICS

PAN/SURROUND

HIGH

BANK

GATE / COMP

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

TALKBACK LEVEL

PAD

12 13 14 15

910 21 22 23 24

18 19 20

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

PHONES

LEVEL

PHONES

STUDIO

LEVEL

010

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SEL

INC

STUDIO

CONTROL

ROOM

STEREO

AUX 11 AUX 12

CONTROL ROOM

SOLO

CLEAR

SOLO CONTRAST

2TR D1 2TR A1

2TR D2 2TR A2

2TRD3STEREO

ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2

DIMMER

SMALL

MONO

SURROUND

MONITOR LEVEL

SLATE

TALKBACK

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

REMOTE 3

REMOTE 4

LAYER

STEREO

MONITOR

STEREO

REC

REW

FF STOP PLAY

AUTO

ENTER

CONTROL ROOM LEVEL

DEC

DATA DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAI R GROUP INPUT

PATCH

OUTPUT

PATC H

DISPLAY ACCESS

INTERNAL

EFFECTS

1234

5678

F1 F2 F3

1234

CARD

3.3V

CHANNEL

INSERTS

BUS

GRAPHIC

EQUALIZERS

TALKBACK

USER DEFINED KEYS

STORERECALL

SCENE MEM ORY

OVERWRITE

AUTOMIX

ABCD

MASTERALL CLEAR

12 45678

910 12131415

21 22 23 2417 18 2019

TRACK ARMING

TRACK ARMING GROUP

BACK FORWARD

SHUTTLE

DISPLAY HISTORY

SCRUB

12345678

910111213141516

FADER ON

PAN

EQAUX AUX

ENABLE

REC ABORT/

UNDO

AUTO-

REC

RETURN

RELATIVE

TOUCH

SENSE

AUX 2AUX 1 AUX 3 AU X 4

AUX 6AUX 5 AUX 7

AUX 10AUX 9 AUX 11

AUX 8

AUX 12

AUX SELECT

AUX / MTRX

FADER

PAN

ASSIGN 4ASSIGN 3

MATRIX SELECT

DISPLAY

MATRIX2 MATRIX 4MATRIX 3

SUSPEND WRITE TOUCH LATCH READ TRIM OFF

ASSIGN 2ASSIGN 1

PAN SENDLEVEL

INSERTSEND ASSIGNOUTPUTINPUT

MASTER

ODD

PLUG INS

EFFECTS / PLUG INS

87654321

MATRIX1

910111213141516 1718192021222324

87654321 910111213141516 1718192021222324

HIGH MIDLOW MID

124

25 48

49 72

73 96

010

STEREO

SURROUND

LOCATE MEMORY

LOCATOR

12345678

ONLINE

AUDITION

LOOP

MASTER

PRE POST

ROLL

BACK

IN OUT MTR

END QUICK

PUNCH

REHEARSAL

SET

RETURN

TO ZERO

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

SMALL

TRIM

0010

ENCODER MODE

FADER MODE

48V

100

SURROUND

10.04.001.00125

AD Input Section (p. 5)

Channel strips (p. 5)

LOCATOR

(p. 21)

SmartMedia

CARD Slot (p. 6)

MATRIX SELECT

(p. 6)

AUX SELECT

(p. 7)

ENCODER

MODE (p. 7)

FADER MODE

(p. 8)

DISPLAY ACCESS (p. 8)

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS

(p. 9)

Display Section (p. 11)

SELECTED CHANNEL Section (p. 12)

LAYER (p. 18)

STEREO (p. 18)

TRACK ARM-

ING (p. 19)

Data Entry &

Transport (p. 23)

Monitor, Phones &

Talkback Section

(p. 25)

MONITOR Sec-

tion (p. 26)

SCENE MEM-

ORY (p. 19)

AUTOMIX

(p. 20)

USER DEFINED

KEYS (p. 21)

CHANNEL COPY (p. 17)

Control Surface

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

AD Input Section

AD Input #1 is shown here.

+48V ON/OFF switches

These switches turn on and off the +48 V phantom power feed to each INPUT A

(XLR-type connector). Phantom power is typically used to power condenser-type

microphones or direct boxes. See “Phantom Power” on page 48 for more information.

PAD switches

These switches turn on and off the 26 dB pad (attenuator) for each AD Input. See

“Pad” on page 48 for more information.

GAIN controls

These controls adjust the gain of the AD Input Head Amps. They have an input sensi-

tivity of –16 dB to –60 dB or +10 dB to –34 dB when Pad is on. See “Gain” on page 48

for more information.

PEAK indicators

These indicators light up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping. See “PEAK

& SIGNAL Indicators” on page 48 for more information.

SIGNAL indicators

These indicators light up when the input signal level is 20 dB below nominal. See

“PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators” on page 48 for more information.

INSERT ON/OFF switches

These switches are for turning on and off the AD Input inserts. See “AD Inserts” on

page 49 for more information.

Channel strips

Channel strip #1 is shown here.

The function of each channel strip depends on the currently selected Layer. See

“Selecting Layers” on page 42 for more information.

A Encoders

These controls are used to edit Input and Output Channel parameters. Their exact

operation depends on the currently selected Encoder mode and Layer. There are two

preset Encoder modes, Pan and Aux/Mtrx, and four assignable modes, with over 40

parameters to choose from. See “Selecting Encoder Modes” on page 45 for more

information.

The Encoders feature push switches that are used to punch the parameter currently

assigned to the Encoders in and out during Automix recording. See “Punching In &

Out Individual Parameters” on page 175 for more information.

B AUTO buttons

These buttons are used to set Automix recording and playback for each channel.

Their exact operation depends on the currently selected Layer. Their indicators light

up orange in Record-Ready mode, red while recording, and green during playback.

See “Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons” on page 169 for more information.

C SEL buttons

These buttons are used to select Input and Output Channels for editing with the

SELECTED CHANNEL section. Their exact operation depends on the currently

selected Layer. The [SEL] button indicator of the currently selected channel lights up.

See “Selecting Channels” on page 43 for more information. They are also used to dis-

play the Long channel names. See “Channel Names” on page 41 for more informa-

tion. The [SEL] buttons can also be used to pair channels, and to add and remove

channels to and from the EQ, Comp, Fader, and Mute groups.

PAD

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

48V

CH01

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

6 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

D SOLO buttons

These buttons are used to solo Channels. The [SOLO] button indicators of channels that

are soloed light up. See “Soloing Channels” on page 118 for more information.

E ON buttons

These buttons are used to mute Input and Output Channels. Their exact operation depends

on the currently selected Layer. The [ON] button indicators of channels that are on light up.

F Channel strip displays

These ﬂuorescent displays graphically display the value of the Input or Output Channel

parameter currently assigned to the Encoders. They also display routing settings, and the

on/off status of the EQ, Insert, Delay, Comp, and Gate functions. They also display Long

and Short channel names and indicate the currently selected channel. See “Channel Strip

Displays” on page 39 for more information.

G Channel faders

These 100 mm touch-sensitive motorized faders are used to set the levels of Input Channels,

Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Matrix Sends. Their exact operation depends on the currently

selected Fader mode and Layer. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 44 for more informa-

tion. Faders can be grouped for simultaneous operation. See “Grouping Input Channel

Faders” on page 74 and “Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more informa-

tion.

Faders can also be used to select Input and Output Channels. See “Auto Channel Select &

Touch Sense Select” on page 44 for more information. They can also be used to punch chan-

nels in and out during Automix recording. See “Punching In & Out Individual Parameters”

on page 175 for more information.

SmartMedia CARD Slot

This CARD slot is for use with SmartMedia (3.3 V), which can be

used to store DM2000 data, including Setups, Scenes, Automixes,

Libraries, and so on. See “Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia” on

page 231 for more information.

MATRIX SELECT

A MATRIX SELECT DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the following pages: Matrix Send, Matrix Send Pan, and Matrix

View. See “Matrix Sends” on page 97 for more information.

B MATRIX 1–4 buttons

These buttons are used to select Matrix Sends when sending Bus Out, Aux Send, and Stereo

Out signals to Matrix Sends. The button indicator of the currently selected Matrix Send

lights up. See “Matrix Sends” on page 97 for more information.

CARD

3.3V

MATRIX SELECT

DISPLAY

MATRIX 2 MATRIX 4MATRIX 3

MATRIX 1

Control Surface 7

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

AUX SELECT

AUX SELECT DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the following pages: Aux Send, Aux Send Pan, and Input Chan-

nel Aux View. See “Aux Sends” on page 88 for more information.

B AUX 1–12 buttons

These buttons are used to select Aux Sends when sending Input Channel signals to Aux

Sends. The button indicator of the currently selected Aux Send lights up. If the currently

selected Aux Send is paired, the indicator of its partner ﬂashes. See “Aux Sends” on page 88

for more information. These buttons can also be used to pair Aux Sends. See “Pairing Chan-

nels” on page 120 for more information.

ENCODER MODE

The small text labels below the ASSIGN buttons apply to the DAW Remote Layer. See

“About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information.

A ENCODER MODE DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the Encoder Mode Assign page. See “Selecting Encoder Modes”

on page 45 for more information.

B PAN button

This button is used to select the Pan Encoder mode. Its indicator lights up when this mode

is selected. In this mode, the Encoders function as Pan controls when an Input Channel

Layer is selected. When the Master Layer is selected, Encoders 21–24 function as Matrix

Send Balance controls. The other Encoders are inactive. See “Selecting Encoder Modes” on

page 45 for more information.

C AUX/MTRX button

This button is used to select the Aux/Mtrx Encoder mode. Its indicator lights up when this

mode is selected. In this mode, the Encoders function as Aux Send level controls when an

Input Channel Layer is selected. When the Master Layer is selected, Encoders 1–20 function

as Matrix Send level controls. See “Selecting Encoder Modes” on page 45.

D ASSIGN 1–4 buttons

These buttons are used to select the assignable Encoder modes. The button indicator for the

currently selected mode lights up. When an assignable mode is selected, the function of the

Encoders depends on the assigned parameter. Up to four parameters, from a list of over 40,

can be assigned to these four buttons. See “Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE

Assign Buttons” on page 46 for more information.

AUX 2AUX 1 AUX 3 AUX 4

AUX 6AUX 5 AUX 7

AUX 10AUX 9 AUX 11

AUX 8

AUX 12

AUX SELECT

DISPLAY

AUX / MTRX

PAN

ASSIGN 4ASSIGN 3

DISPLAY

ASSIGN 2ASSIGN 1

PAN SEND LEVEL

INSERTSEND ASSIGNOUTPUTINPUT

2 3

ENCODER MODE

8 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

FADER MODE

A FADER button

This button selects Fader mode, in which the faders control Input or Output Channel levels,

depending on the currently selected Layer. Its indicator lights up when this mode is selected.

See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 44 for more information.

B AUX/MTRX button

This button selects the Aux/Mtrx Fader mode, in which the faders control Aux Send or

Matrix Send levels, depending on the currently selected Layer. Its indicator lights up when

this mode is selected. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 44 for more information.

DISPLAY ACCESS

DATA button

This button is used to select the Save, Load, and File pages, which are used to save and load

DM2000 data to SmartMedia. See “Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia” on page 231 for

more information.

B DIO button

This button is used to select the following pages: Word Clock Select, Dither, Cascade In,

Cascade Out, Sampling Rate Converter, and Higher Sample Rate Data Format. See “Digital

I/O & Cascading” on page 50 for more information.

C SETUP button

This button is used to select the following pages: Preferences 1, Preferences 2, Preferences 3,

MIDI/TO HOST Setup, GPI Setup, Input Port Name, Output Port Name, Time Reference,

Time Signature, and the Remote Port Setup.

D UTILITY button

This button is used to select the following pages: Oscillator, Channel Status Monitor, and

Battery Check.

E REMOTE button

This button is used to select the Remote pages. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for

more information.

F MIDI button

This button is used to select the following pages: MIDI Setup, Program Change Assign

Ta ble, Control Change Assign Table, and Bulk Dump. See “MIDI” on page 182 for more

information.

AUX / MTRXFADER

FADER MODE

1 2

DATA DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR GROUP INPUT

PATCH

OUTPUT

PATCH

1 2 3 4

J K L

DISPLAY ACCESS

Control Surface 9

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

G METER button

This button is used to select the following pages: Input Channel Meter, Master Meter, Effect

Input/Output Meter, Effect 1-2 Input/Output Meter, Effect 1–8 Input/Output Meter, Stereo

Meter, and Metering Position. See “Metering” on page 103 for more information.

H VIEW button

This button is used to select the following pages: Parameter View, Fader View, and Channel

Library. See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124, “Viewing Channel Fader

Settings” on page 125, and “Channel Library” on page 140 for more information.

I PAIR button

This button is used to select the Input and Output Pair pages. See “Pairing Channels” on

page 120 for more information.

J GROUP button

This button is used to select the following pages: Fader group, Mute group, Output Fader

group, Output Mute group, Input Equalizer Link, Output Equalizer Link, Input Comp

Link, and the Output Comp Link.

K INPUT PATCH button

This button is used to select the following pages: Input Channel Patch, Input Channel Insert

In Patch, Effects 1-2 Input Patch, Effects 3–8 Input Patch, Input Channel Name, and Input

Patch Library. See “Input Patching” on page 61 for more information.

L OUTPUT PATCH button

This button is used to select the following pages: Slot Output Patch, Omni Out Patch, Out-

put Insert In Patch, Input Channel Direct Out Destination, 2TR Out Digital, Graphic

Equalizer Insert, Output Channel Name, and Output Patch Library. See “Output Patching”

on page 63 for more information.

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the following pages: Effects Edit, Effects Library, Graphic

Equalizer Edit, Graphic Equalizer Library, Plug-In Setup, and Plug-In Edit. See “Internal

Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs” on page 148 for more information.

B INTERNAL EFFECTS button

This button is used to select the internal effects processors in conjunction with the

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] buttons. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Editing

Effects” on page 150 for more information.

C GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS button

This button is used to select the GEQs in conjunction with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–6]

buttons. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Editing GEQs” on page 155 for more

information.

INTERNAL

EFFECTS

1234

5678

CHANNEL

INSERTS

GRAPHIC

EQUALIZERS

DISPLAY

PLUG INS

2 3 4 5

EFFECTS / PLUG INS

1234

10 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

D PLUG-INS button

This button is used to select the Plug-Ins in conjunction with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS

[1–8] buttons. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Editing Plug-Ins” on page 153

for more information.

E CHANNEL INSERTS button

If an internal effects processor or Y56K card effects chain is inserted in the currently selected

channel, the relevant Effects Edit or Plug-In Edit page appears when this button is pressed,

and its indicator lights up. In addition, the corresponding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] but-

ton indicator ﬂashes. If it’s a Y56K that is inserted, the [PLUG-INS] button indicator also

ﬂashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button indicator

ﬂashes. A warning message appears if there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected

channel. See “Editing Effects” on page 150 and “Editing Plug-Ins” on page 153 for more

information.

F EFFECTS/PLUG-INS 1–8 buttons

These buttons are used to select the internal effects processors, GEQs, and Plug-Ins in con-

junction with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [INTERNAL EFFECTS], [GRAPHIC EQUALIZ-

ERS], and [PLUG-INS] buttons. The button indicator of the currently selected internal

effects processor, GEQ, or Plug-In lights up. Since there are six GEQs, buttons [7] and [8]

are inactive when the [GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS] button’s indicator is lit. When the

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button indicator is lit, all of these buttons are

inactive.

G Parameter Up/Down buttons

These buttons are used to select the rows of internal effects processor and Plug-In parame-

ters for editing with Parameter controls 1–4. The parameters in the currently selected row

appear highlighted. Up to 16 parameters can be displayed at a time. If more are available,

an up or down arrow is displayed. See “Editing Effects” on page 150 and “Editing Plug-Ins”

on page 153 for more information.

H Parameter controls 1–4

These are rotary controls and push switches. The rotary controls are used to edit the param-

eters of the currently selected internal effects processor, Plug-In, or GEQ. When the Effects

Edit page is selected, they control the currently selected row of parameters, rows being

selected by the Parameter Up/Down buttons. When the Graphic Equalizer Edit page is

selected, Parameter control #1 selects the frequency bands and Parameter control #4 sets the

gain of the selected band. Parameter controls #2 and #3 are inactive. See “Editing Effects”

on page 150, “Editing Plug-Ins” on page 153, and “Editing GEQs” on page 155 for more

information.

The push switches are used to punch the Effects or Plug-In parameters currently being con-

trolled by the rotary controls in and out during Automix recording. See “Punching In & Out

Individual Parameters” on page 175 for more information.

Control Surface 11

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Display Section

Display

This 320 x 240 dot display with ﬂuorescent backlight displays pages, information on the

currently selected Scene and channel, the sampling rate, and more. See “About the Display”

on page 35 for more information.

B Contrast control

This control is used to adjust the contrast of the display.

C F1–F4 buttons

These buttons are used to select the pages whose tabs are currently visible. See “Selecting

Display Pages” on page 36 for more information.

D Left Tab Scroll button

This button, which is active only when the left Tab Scroll arrow is displayed, is used to dis-

play the tabs of pages available to the left of the currently selected page. See “Selecting Dis-

play Pages” on page 36 for more information.

E Right Tab Scroll button

This button, which is active only when the right Tab Scroll arrow is displayed, is used to dis-

play the tabs of pages available to the right of the currently selected page. See “Selecting Dis-

play Pages” on page 36 for more information.

F1 F2 F3

12 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

SELECTED CHANNEL Section

The subsections of the SELECTED CHANNEL section are explained below.

ROUTING

A ROUTING DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the following pages: Input Channel Routing, Bus to Stereo, and

Bus to Stereo Library. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 and “Sending Bus Outs to

the Stereo Out” on page 87 for more information.

B FOLLOW PAN button

This button determines whether or not the currently selected Input Channel’s pan setting

is applied to the Bus Outs. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Routing Input

Channels” on page 75 for more information.

C STEREO button

This button is used to route the currently selected Input Channel to the Stereo Out. Its indi-

cator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 for more infor-

mation.

D DIRECT button

This button is used to route the currently selected Input Channel to its Direct Out. Its indi-

cator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 for more infor-

mation.

ROUTING

STEREOFOLLOW PAN DIRECT

GATE ON COMP ON

GATE

COMP

RANGE

RATIO

ATTA CK

DECAY

RELEASETHRESHOLD

THRESHOLD HOLD

LINK GRAB EFFECT

EVEN

EQUALIZER

CHANNEL

COPY

PASTE

EQ ON

AT T.

kHz

LOW

SELECTED CHANNEL

PHASE / INSERT

INSERT ON

AUX/MATRIX SEND

DELAY

TIME

MIX

LEVEL

AUX 1 /MATRIX 1

AUX 5

AUX 9

AUX 2 /MATRIX 2

AUX 6

AUX 10

AUX 3 /MATRIX 3

AUX 7

AUX 11

AUX 4 /MATRIX 4

AUX 8

AUX 12

DYNAMICS

PAN/SURROUND

HIGH

BANK

GATE / COMP

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

DISPLAY

ODD

HIGH MIDLOW MID

10.04.001.00125

ROUTING

STEREOFOLLOW PAN DIRECT

DISPLAY

3 4

Control Surface 13

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

E ROUTING 1–8 buttons

These buttons are used to route the currently selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs. The

button indicators of Bus Outs to which the Input Channel is routed light up. See “Routing

Input Channels” on page 75 for more information.

PHASE/INSERT

A PHASE/INSERT DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the Input Channel Phase and Insert pages. See “Reversing the

Signal Phase” on page 68 and “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information.

B Phase [ ] button

This button is used to reverse the signal phase of the currently selected Input Channel. Its

indicator lights up when the phase is reversed. See “Reversing the Signal Phase” on page 68

for more information.

C INSERT ON button

This button is used to turn on and off the Insert of the currently selected channel. Its indi-

cator lights up when the Insert is on. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information.

DELAY

A DELAY DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the Delay pages. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117

for more information.

B ON button

This button is used to turn on and off the Delay of the currently selected channel. Its indi-

cator lights up when the Delay function is on. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117

for more information.

C TIME control

This control is used to set the delay time of the currently selected channel’s Delay function.

See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information.

D FB/MIX indicators

These indicators show whether the FB/MIX control is set to control Feedback Gain or Feed-

back Mix. The FB indicator lights up when it’s set to control Feedback Gain; the MIX indi-

cator, when its set to control Feedback Mix. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for

more information.

E FB/MIX control

This is a rotary control and push switch. When the currently selected channel is an Input

Channel, the push switch can be used to select either Feedback Gain (FB) or Feedback Mix

(MIX). The rotary control is used to set the Feedback Gain or Feedback Mix, as selected by

the push switch. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information.

PHASE / INSERT

INSERT ON

DISPLAY

2 3

DELAY

TIME

MIX

DISPLAY

2 3 4 5

14 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

AUX/MATRIX SEND

A AUX/MATRIX SEND DISPLAY button

The pages selected by this button depends on the type of channel currently selected. If it’s

an Input Channel, it selects the Aux Send, Aux Send Pan, and Input Channel Aux View

pages. If it’s an Output Channel, it selects the Matrix Send, Matrix Send Pan, and Matrix

View pages.

B BANK button

This button is used to select Aux 1–4/Matrix 1–4, Aux 5–8, or Aux 9–12 for use with the

AUX/MATRIX LEVEL controls and [ON] buttons. When an Output Channel is selected,

the Aux 1–4/Matrix 1–4 bank is selected automatically and cannot be changed. See “Using

the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL Controls” on page 89 for more

information.

C Bank indicators

These indicators show which bank of Aux/Matrix Sends has been selected by the [BANK]

button. When an Output Channel is selected, the Aux 1–4/Matrix 1–4 bank is selected auto-

matically and cannot be changed.

D LEVEL controls

These controls are used to set the levels of the Aux or Matrix Send currently selected by the

[BANK] button. If the currently selected channel is an Input Channel, they control Aux

Send levels. If it’s a Bus Out, Aux Send, or the Stereo Out, they control Matrix Send levels.

See “Setting Aux Send Levels” on page 89 and “Setting Matrix Send Levels” on page 97 for

more information.

E ON buttons

These buttons are used to mute the Aux/Matrix Sends currently selected by the [BANK]

button. The button indicators of channels that are on light up. If the currently selected

channel is an Input Channel, they mute Aux Sends. If the currently selected channel is a Bus

Out, Aux Send, or the Stereo Out, they mute Matrix Sends. See “Muting Aux Sends

(ON/OFF)” on page 90 and “Muting Matrix Sends (ON/OFF)” on page 98 for more infor-

mation.

DYNAMICS

A DYNAMICS DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the following pages: Gate Edit, Gate Library, Comp Edit, and

Comp Library. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69 and “Compressing Channels” on

page 113 for more information.

AUX/MATRIX SEND

LEVEL

AUX 1 /MATRIX 1

AUX 5

AUX 9

AUX 2 /MATRIX 2

AUX 6

AUX 10

AUX 3 /MATRIX 3

AUX 7

AUX 11

AUX 4 /MATRIX 4

AUX 8

AUX 12

BANK

DISPLAY

GATE ON COMP ON

GATE

COMP

RANGE

RATIO

ATTA CK

DECAY

RELEASETHRESHOLD

THRESHOLD HOLD

DYNAMICS

GATE / COMP

GAIN

DISPLAY

4 5 6

2 3

Control Surface 15

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

B GATE/COMP button

This button is used to set the rotary controls for either Gate or Compressor operation.

When an Output Channel is selected, Compressor is selected automatically and cannot be

changed. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69 and “Compressing Channels” on

page 113 for more information.

C THRESHOLD, RANGE, ATTACK, DECAY, HOLD (THRESHOLD, RATIO, ATTACK,

RELEASE, GAIN) controls

When the GATE/COMP button is set to GATE, these controls set the Threshold, Range,

Attack, Decay, and Hold parameters of the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate. When

it’s set to COMP, they set the Threshold, Ratio, Attack, Release, and Gain parameters of the

currently selected channel’s Compressor. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69 and

“Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information.

D GATE ON button

This button is used to turn the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate on and off. Its indi-

cator lights up when the Gate is on. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69 for more infor-

mation.

E COMP ON button

This button is used to turn the currently selected channel’s Compressor on and off. Its indi-

cator lights up when the Compressor is on. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for

more information.

F GATE/COMP indicators

These indicators show whether the rotary controls are set to control either a Gate or a Com-

pressor. The GATE indicator lights up when they’re set to control a Gate; the COMP indi-

cator, when they’re set to control a Compressor. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69

and “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information.

PAN/SURROUND

A PAN/SURROUND DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the Input Channel Pan pages, the Surround Mode page, and

the Surround Edit pages. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 76 and “Using Surround

Pan” on page 77.

B L & R buttons

These buttons can be used to select horizontally or vertically partnered Input or Output

Channels. They can be used to select the left and right channels when a Matrix Send or the

Stereo Out is selected. For Input Channels, in Individual Pan mode, the [L] button indica-

tor lights up when an odd/left channel is selected; the [R] button indicator, when an

even/right channel is selected. In Gang or Inverse Gang Pan mode, the button indicator of

the other channel in the pair ﬂashes when its partner is selected.

C PAN display

This 10-segment display indicates the pan position of the currently selected Input Channel.

When pan is set to center, the center two segments light up. When a Matrix Send or the Ste-

reo Out is selected, it displays the balance.

LINK GRAB EFFECT

EVEN

PAN/SURROUND

DISPLAY

ODD

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

16 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

D PAN control

This rotary control is used to pan the currently selected Input Channel. When a Matrix

Send or the Stereo Out is selected, it is used to set the balance. For Input Channels in Gang

or Inverse Gang Pan mode, horizontally or vertically paired Input Channels are panned

simultaneously. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 76, “Balancing the Stereo Out” on

page 84, and “Balancing Matrix Send Masters” on page 101.

E LINK button

This button, which is enabled only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected, is

used to link the PAN control and the Joystick so that either control can be used for normal

and surround panning. It’s a global setting that applies to all Input Channels. Its indicator

lights up when the PAN control and Joystick are linked. If the Joystick is set to control effects

(i.e., the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit), this button is disabled. See “Panning Input

Channels” on page 76 and “Using Surround Pan” on page 77 for more information.

F GRAB button

This button, which is enabled only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected, is

used to turn on and off Joystick control for the currently selected Input Channel. Its indi-

cator lights up when Grab is on. When Grab is on, the Joystick can be used to control the

currently selected Input Channel’s surround pan position. When turned off, the Joystick

does not control surround pan. If the PAN control and the Joystick are linked (i.e., the

[LINK] button indicator is lit), Grab is turned off if the PAN control is adjusted. If the Joy-

stick is set to control effects (i.e., the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit), this button is dis-

abled.

G EFFECT button

This button is used to select the Joystick for parameter control of the Reverb 5.1 effect. Its

indicator lights up when Reverb 5.1 effect control is on, and the Joystick cannot be used for

surround panning. See “REVERB 5.1” on page 286 for more information.

H Joystick

This control can be used for surround panning, normal panning, or parameter control of

the Reverb 5.1 effect. When the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit, the Joystick controls the

Reverb 5.1 effect. See “REVERB 5.1” on page 286 for more information. When the

[EFFECT] button indicator is off and the [GRAB] button indicator is on, the Joystick con-

trols surround panning of the currently selected Input Channel. When the [EFFECT] but-

ton and [GRAB] button indicators are both off, the Joystick can still be used for surround

panning if the Auto Grab preference is on. See “Using Surround Pan” on page 77 for more

information. When the [EFFECT] button indicator is off but the [GRAB] button and

[LINK] button indicators are both on, the Joystick can be used for normal panning in uni-

son with the PAN control. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 76 for more information.

EQUALIZER

A EQUALIZER DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the following pages: Equalizer Edit, Equalizer Library, Input

Channel Attenuator/Shifter, and Output Attenuator.

CHANNEL

COPY

PASTE

EQ ON

AT T.

kHz

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

DISPLAY

HIGH MIDLOW MID

10.04.001.00125

32 54 67

EQUALIZER

LOW

Control Surface 17

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

B EQ ON button

This button is used to turn the EQ of the currently selected channel on and off. Its indicator

lights up when the EQ is on. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information.

C ATT control

This control is used to attenuate the pre-EQ signal of the currently selected channel. See

“Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for more information.

D FREQUENCY/Q indicators

These indicators show whether each FREQUENCY/Q control is set to control frequency or

Q. The FREQUENCY indicator lights up when it’s set to control frequency; the Q indicator,

when it’s set to control Q. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information.

E FREQUENCY/Q controls

These are rotary controls and push switches. The push switches are used to select either fre-

quency or Q. The current setting is shown by the FREQUENCY/Q indicators. The rotary

controls are used to set the frequency or Q, as selected by the push switches. See “Using EQ”

on page 107 for more information.

F EQ GAIN controls

These controls are used to set the gain of each EQ band. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for

more information.

G EQ displays

Normally these displays show the frequency of each band. When the GAIN is adjusted, the

gain value is displayed. When the Q is adjusted, the Q value is displayed. If the gain or Q is

not adjusted for two seconds, the frequency value reappears. See “Using EQ” on page 107

for more information.

CHANNEL COPY

A COPY button

This button is used to copy channel settings to the Copy buffer. See “Copying Channel Set-

tings” on page 129 for more information.

B PASTE button

This button is used to paste the settings in the Copy buffer to the speciﬁed channel. See

“Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information.

CHANNEL

COPY

PASTE

18 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

LAYER

1–24, 25–48, 49–72 & 73–96 buttons

These buttons select the Input Channel Layers, which determine which Input Channels are

controlled by the channel strips. The LAYER button indicator for the currently selected

Layer lights up. See “Selecting Layers” on page 42 for more information.

B MASTER button

This button selects the Master Layer, from which the channel strips control Bus Outs, Aux

Sends, and Matrix Sends. Its indicator lights up when the Master Layer is selected. See

“Selecting Layers” on page 42 for more information.

C REMOTE 1–4 buttons

These buttons select the Remote Layers, which can be used to control external devices,

including DAWs. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. The

LAYER button indicator for the currently selected Remote Layer lights up. See “Selecting

Layers” on page 42 for more information.

STEREO

AUTO button

This button is used exclusively to set Automix recording and playback for the Stereo

Out. Its indicator lights up orange in Record-Ready mode, red while recording, and

green during playback. See “Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons” on page 169 for more

information.

B SEL button

The Stereo Out [SEL] button is used exclusively to select the Stereo Out for editing with

the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Its indicator lights up when the Stereo Out is

selected. Each time it’s pressed, the selection toggles between the Stereo Out’s left and

right channels. See “Selecting Channels” on page 43 for more information. It can also

be used to add and remove the Stereo Out to and from EQ, Comp, Fader, and Mute

groups.

C ON button

This button is used exclusively to mute the Stereo Out. Its indicator lights up when the

Stereo Out is on. See “Muting the Stereo Out (ON/OFF)” on page 83 for more informa-

tion.

D Fader

This 100 mm touch-sensitive motorized fader is used exclusively to adjust the level of

the Stereo Out. See “Setting the Stereo Out Level” on page 83 for more information. It

can be grouped with other Output Channel faders for simultaneous operation. See

“Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more information. It can also be

used to select the Stereo Out, see “Auto Channel Select & Touch Sense Select” on

page 44, or to punch the Stereo Out in and out during Automix recording. See “Punch-

ing In & Out Individual Parameters” on page 175 for more information.

1 3

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

REMOTE 3

REMOTE 4

LAYER

MASTER

124

25 48

49 72

73 96

SEL

STEREO

AUTO

Control Surface 19

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

TRACK ARMING

TRACK ARMING DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the following pages: Track Arming Group, MTR Track Arming

Conﬁguration, and Master Track Arming Conﬁguration. See “Arming Machine Tracks” on

page 225 for more information.

B TRACK ARMING 1–24 buttons

These buttons are used to arm tracks on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Their

indicators light up when tracks are armed. See “Arming Machine Tracks” on page 225 for

more information.

C TRACK ARMING GROUP A–D buttons

These buttons are used to select the track arming groups A, B, C, and D. The indicator for

the currently selected group lights up. See “Arming Machine Tracks” on page 225 for more

information.

D ALL CLEAR button

This button is used to clear all track arming on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). See

“A r ming Machine Tracks” on page 225 for more information.

E MASTER button

This button is used to select Master or MTR machines for track arming. Its indicator lights

up when Master is selected, and is off when MTR is selected. See “About Machine Control

(MMC & P2)” on page 220 for more information.

SCENE MEMORY

A SCENE MEMORY DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the following pages: Scene Memory, Input Channel Fade Time,

Output Fade Time, Recall Safe, and Scene Memory Sort. See “Scene Memories” on page 157

for more information.

B Scene memory display

This displays the number of the currently selected Scene memory. See “Scene Memories” on

page 157 for more information.

C Edit indicator

This indicates that the current mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was

recalled last. See “Edit Buffer & Edit Indicator” on page 157 for more information.

ABCD

MASTERALL CLEAR

12 45678

910 12131415

21 22 23 2417 18 2019

TRACK ARMING

TRACK ARMING GROUP

DISPLAY

543

STORERECALL

SCENE MEMORY

DISPLAY

23 4 65

20 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

D STORE button

This button is used to store the current Scene to the selected Scene memory. See “Storing &

Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page 159.

E Scene Up/Down buttons

These buttons are used to select Scene memories. Pressing the

Scene Up [ ] button incre-

ments the selection; pressing the

Scene Down [ ] button decrements the selection. Holding

down a button causes the selection to increment/decrement continuously. See “Storing &

Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page 159.

F RECALL button

This button is used to recall the selected Scene memory. See “Storing & Recalling Scenes

with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page 159.

AUTOMIX

The small text labels below the AUTOMIX buttons apply to the DAW Remote Layer. See

“About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information.

A AUTOMIX DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the following pages: Automix Main, Automix Memory, Input

Channel Fader Edit, Event Copy, and Event Edit. See “Automix” on page 164.

B ENABLE button

This button is used to enable and disable the Automix function. It works in unison with the

ENABLED/DISABLED button on the Automix Main page. See “Automix Main Page” on

page 165.

C REC button

This button is used with Automix recording. It works in unison with the REC button on the

Automix Main page. See “REC” on page 168 for more information.

D ABORT/UNDO button

This button is used to abort Automix recording or playback. It works in unison with the

ABORT button on the Automix Main page. See “ABORT” on page 168. When not recording

or playing an Automix, it’s used to undo the Automix, in unison with the UNDO button on

the Automix Main page. See “UNDO” on page 167 for more information.

E AUTO-REC button

This button is used to arm Automix Auto Recording function. It works in unison with the

AUTO REC button on the Automix Main page. See “AUTO REC” on page 168 for more

information.

F RETURN button

This button is used to select the Automix Edit Out mode. It works in unison with the EDIT

OUT RETURN buttons on the Automix Main page. See “EDIT OUT” on page 166 for more

information.

OVERWRITE

FADER ON

PAN

EQAUX AUX

ENABLE

REC ABORT/

UNDO

AUTO-

REC

RETURN

RELATIVE

TOUCH

SENSE

DISPLAY

SUSPEND WRITE TOUCH LATCH READ TRIM OFF

SURROUND

2 3 4 5 6 7 8

AUTOMIX

Control Surface 21

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

G RELATIVE button

This button is used to set the Automix Fader Edit mode. It works in unison with the FADER

EDIT buttons on the Automix Main page. See “FADER EDIT” on page 167 for more infor-

mation.

H TOUCH SENSE button

This button is used to turn on and off Fader Touch Sense for Automix recording. It works

in unison with the TOUCH SENSE buttons on the Fader Edit pages. See “Fader Edit Pages”

on page 170 for more information.

I FADER, ON, PAN, SURROUND, AUX, AUX ON & EQ buttons

These buttons are used to select the type of parameters that are recorded in an Automix.

They work in unison with their counterparts on the Automix Main and Memory pages. See

“OVERWRITE” on page 167 for more information.

USER DEFINED KEYS

USER DEFINED KEYS DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the User Deﬁned Key Assign page. See “Using the User Deﬁned

Keys” on page 230 for more information.

B USER DEFINED KEYS 1–16 buttons

Up to 16 functions, from a list of over 150, can be assigned to these buttons. See “Using the

User Deﬁned Keys” on page 230 for more information. These buttons have speciﬁc func-

tions when the DAW Remote Layer is selected. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for

more information.

LOCATOR

A LOCATOR DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the Locate Memory and Machine Conﬁguration pages. See

“Setting the Locate Memories, Pre-roll, Post-roll & Roll-back” on page 224 and “Conﬁgur-

ing Machines” on page 220 respectively for more information.

B AUDITION button

This button is used to turn on and off the Audition function on the target machine (DAW,

MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up while the Audition function is on. See “Using the Loca-

tor” on page 222 for more information.

USER DEFINED KEYS

12345678

910111213141516

DISPLAY

LOCATE MEMORY

LOCATOR

12345678

ONLINE

AUDITION

LOOP

MASTER

PRE POST

ROLL

BACK

IN OUT MTR

END QUICK

PUNCH

REHEARSAL

SET

RETURN

TO ZERO

J K L M N O P Q

56 78234

22 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

C PRE button

Pressing this button transmits a Locate command to the target machine (DAW, MMC or

P2) in order to locate the Pre-Roll point. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s

pressed. The Pre-Roll point is a predeﬁned number of seconds before the speciﬁed In point.

See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information.

D IN button

Pressing this button transmits a Locate command to the target machine (DAW, MMC or

P2) in order to locate the In point. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed. See

“Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information.

E OUT button

Pressing this button transmits a Locate command to the target machine (DAW, MMC or

P2) in order to locate the Out point. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed.

See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information.

F POST button

Pressing this button transmits a Locate command to the target machine (DAW, MMC or

P2) in order to locate the Post-Roll point. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s

pressed. The Post-Roll point is a predeﬁned number of seconds after the speciﬁed Out

point. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information.

G SET button

This button is used when specifying the eight Locate points, In point, Out point, and Return

to Zero point. Its indicator lights up while it’s pressed. See “Using the Locator” on page 222

for more information.

H MTR button

This button is used to select the MTR machine for Locator, Transport, Scrub, and Shuttle

control (MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up when MTR is selected (the [MASTER] button

indicator goes off). See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information.

I LOCATE MEMORY 1–8 buttons

Pressing these buttons transmits Locate commands to the target machine (DAW, MMC or

P2) in order to locate the Locate memory points. Their indicators light up momentarily

when they’re pressed. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information.

J RETURN TO ZERO button

Pressing this button transmits a Locate command to the target machine (DAW, MMC or

P2) in order to locate the Return to Zero point. Its indicator lights up momentarily when

it’s pressed. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information.

K END button

Pressing this button transmits a Locate command when using the DAW Remote Layer in

order to locate the end of the session. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed.

See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information.

L ONLINE button

This button is used to turn the Chase function on and off on the target machine (DAW,

MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up while the Chase function is on. See “Using the Locator”

on page 222 for more information.

M LOOP button

This button is used to turn on and off Loop Playback on the target machine (DAW, MMC

or P2). Its indicator lights up when Loop Playback is on. See “Using the Locator” on page

222 for more information.

N QUICK PUNCH button

This button is used to turn on and off the Quick Punch function on the target machine

(DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up when Quick Punch is on. See “Using the Loca-

tor” on page 222 for more information.

Control Surface 23

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

O ROLL BACK button

This button is used to roll back (i.e., rewind) the target machine (MMC or P2) from the cur-

rent position by a predeﬁned amount. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed.

See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information.

P REHEARSAL button

This button is used to turn on and off the Rehearsal function on the target machine (MMC

or P2). Its indicator lights up when Rehearsal is on. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for

more information.

Q MASTER button

This button is used to select the Master machine for Locator, Transport, Scrub, and Shuttle

control. Its indicator lights up when Master is selected (the [MTR] button indicator goes

off). See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information.

Data Entry & Transport

REW button

This button starts rewind on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up

while rewinding is in progress. See “Transport Buttons” on page 221.

B FF button

This button starts fast forward on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator

lights up while fast forwarding is in progress. See “Transport Buttons” on page 221.

C STOP button

This button stops the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up momen-

tarily when it’s pressed. See “Transport Buttons” on page 221.

D PLAY button

This button starts playback on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights

up while playback is in progress. See “Transport Buttons” on page 221.

E REC button

This button is used in conjunction with the [PLAY] button to start recording on the target

machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up while recording is in progress. See

“Transport Buttons” on page 221.

F DISPLAY HISTORY BACK/FORWARD buttons

These buttons work like the back and forward buttons on a Web browser, allowing you to

return to recently displayed pages. See “Display History” on page 37 for more information.

INC

REC

REW

FF STOP PLAY

DEC

BACK FORWARD

SHUTTLE

DISPLAY HISTORY

SCRUB

1 2 3 4 5

K L

ENTER

24 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

G SHUTTLE button

This button is used to set the Parameter wheel to Shuttle mode for machine control (DAW,

MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up when Shuttle mode is on. See “Using Shuttle & Scrub”

on page 222 for more information.

H SCRUB button

This button is used to set the Parameter wheel to Scrub mode for machine control (DAW,

MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up when Scrub mode is on. See “Using Shuttle & Scrub”

on page 222 for more information.

I DEC & INC buttons

These buttons are used to adjust parameter values. Pressing the [INC] button increases the

value of the currently selected parameter by one. Pressing the [DEC] decreases it. Pressing

and holding either button causes the parameter value to change continuously.

These buttons can also be used to set on/off-type parameters, such as EQ ON/OFF. When

such a parameter is selected, pressing the [DEC] button turns the function off, pressing the

[INC] button turns it on.

These buttons can also used to scroll through Scene and library lists.

J ENTER button

This button is used to select and ﬁnalize parameter settings, to set on/off-type parameters,

such as EQ ON/OFF, and to enter characters when titling Scenes, Effects, and so on. When

a Pan control is selected on a Pan display page, pressing this button resets the pan position

to center. For certain parameters, the [ENTER] button supports double clicking (i.e., two

quick presses).

K Parameter wheel

The Parameter wheel is used to edit parameter values, scroll through Scene and library lists,

and to position the cursor when titling Scenes, Effects, and so on. Its detented action gives

it a positive feel, allowing quick and accurate parameter editing. Turning it clockwise

increases parameter values; turning it counterclockwise decreases them. Turning it fast

allows quick parameter editing.

The Parameter wheel is also used with the Shuttle and Scroll functions. See “Using Shuttle

& Scrub” on page 222 for more information.

L Cursor buttons

These buttons are used to move the cursor around the display pages, selecting parameters

and options. The cursor appears as a ﬂashing box, making it easy to see which parameter or

option is currently selected. Holding down a cursor button moves the cursor continuously

in the respective direction.

Control Surface 25

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Monitor, Phones & Talkback Section

SMALL TRIM control

This control is used to set the level of the SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT. See

“Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information.

B STUDIO LEVEL control

This control is used to set the level of the STUDIO MONITOR OUT. See “Studio Monitor-

ing” on page 133 for more information.

C PHONES LEVEL control

This control is used to set the level of the PHONES. See “Control Room Monitoring” on

page 132 for more information.

D PHONES jack

This stereo TRS phone jack outputs the Con-

trol room signal for monitoring via a pair of

stereo headphones.

E Talkback mic

This built-in microphone is used for talkback. See “Using Talkback & Slate” on page 138 for

more information.

F TALKBACK LEVEL control

This control is used to set the level of the built-in talkback microphone. See “Using Talkback

& Slate” on page 138 for more information.

TALKBACK LEVEL

PHONES

LEVEL

PHONES

STUDIO

LEVEL

010 010

010

SMALL

TRIM

0010

1 2 3

1/4" TRS phone plug

Tip (left)

Ring (right)

Sleeve (ground)

26 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

MONITOR Section

The various subsections of the MONITOR section are explained below.

STUDIO

A MONITOR DISPLAY button

This button is used to select the following pages: Solo Setting, Control Room Setup, and

Talkback Setup. See “Conﬁguring Solo” on page 119, “Control Room Monitoring” on

page 132, and “Using Talkback & Slate” on page 138 respectively for more information.

When a Surround Pan mode is selected, the following pages can also be selected: Surround

Monitor, Surround Monitor Setup, Surround Monitor Patch, and Surround Monitor

Library. See “Surround Monitoring” on page 134 for more information.

B CONTROL ROOM button

This button selects the Control Room Monitor signal as the Studio Monitor signal source.

Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 133 for

more information.

C STEREO button

This button selects the Stereo Out signal as the Studio Monitor signal source. Its indicator

lights up when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 133 for more infor-

mation.

D AUX 11 button

This button selects Aux Send #11 as the Studio Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up

when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 133 for more information.

E AUX 12 button

This button selects Aux Send #12 as the Studio Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up

when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 133 for more information.

SOLO

A SOLO indicator

This indicator ﬂashes when one or more Channels are soloed, indicating that the Solo func-

tion is active. See “Soloing Channels” on page 118 for more information.

B SOLO CONTRAST control

This control is used to set the level balance between soloed Input Channels and the cur-

rently selected CONTROL ROOM source. It has no effect on soloed Output Channels. See

“Soloing Channels” on page 118 for more information.

C CLEAR button

This button can be used to unsolo all soloed Channels. See “Soloing Channels” on page 118

for more information.

STUDIO

CONTROL

ROOM

STEREO

AUX 11 AUX 12

CONTROL ROOM

SOLO

CLEAR

SOLO CONTRAST

2TR D1 2TR A1

2TR D2 2TR A2

2TRD3STEREO

ASSIGN 1 ASSI GN 2

DIMMER

SMALL

MONO

SURROUND

MONITOR LEVEL

SLATE

TALKBACK

MONITOR

CONTROL ROOM LEVEL

BUS

TALKBACK

DISPLAY

STEREO

SURROUND

100

STUDIO

CONTROL

ROOM

STEREO

AUX 11 AUX 12

MONITOR

DISPLAY

SOLO

CLEAR

SOLO CONTRAST

Control Surface 27

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

CONTROL ROOM

A STEREO 2TR D1 button

This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 as the Control Room Monitor

signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room

Monitoring” on page 132 for more information.

B STEREO 2TR D2 button

This button selects the

2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 2 as the Control Room Monitor sig-

nal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room

Monitoring” on page 132 for more information.

C STEREO 2TR D3 button

This button selects the

2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 3 as the Control Room Monitor sig-

nal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room

Monitoring” on page 132 for more information.

D STEREO 2TR A1 button

This button selects the

2TR IN ANALOG 1 as the Control Room Monitor signal source.

Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on

page 132 for more information.

E STEREO 2TR A2 button

This button selects the

2TR IN ANALOG 2 as the Control Room Monitor signal source.

Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on

page 132 for more information.

F STEREO button

This button selects the Stereo Out as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its indicator

lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for

more information.

G STEREO ASSIGN 1 button

This button is used to select the assigned Output Channel as the Control Room Monitor

signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Setup”

on page 133 for more information.

H STEREO ASSIGN 2 button

This button is used to select the assigned Output Channel as the Control Room Monitor

signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Setup”

on page 133 for more information.

I SURROUND BUS button

This button is used to select the Bus Outs as the Surround Monitor signal source. Its indi-

cator lights up when this source is selected. See “Surround Monitoring” on page 134 for

more information.

J SURROUND ASSIGN 1 button

This button is used to select the assigned Slot’s Inputs as the Surround Monitor signal

source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Surround Monitoring” on

page 134 for more information.

K SURROUND ASSIGN 2 button

This button is used to select the assigned Slot’s Inputs as the Surround Monitor signal

source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Surround Monitoring” on

page 134 for more information.

L SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control

This control is used to adjust the level of the Surround Monitor signals. See “Surround

Monitoring” on page 134 for more information.

CONTROL ROOM

2TR D1 2TR A1

2TR D2 2TR A2

2TRD3STEREO

ASSIGN 1 ASSI GN 2

DIMMER

SMALL

MONO

SURROUND

MONITOR LEVEL

CONTROL ROOM LEVEL

BUS

STEREO

SURROUND

100

1 4

2 5

3 6

7 8

28 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

M MONO button

This button is used to switch the Control Room Monitor signal into mono. Its indicator

lights up when mono is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more

information.

N DIMMER button

This button is used to dim the Control Room Monitor and Surround Monitor signals. Its

indicator lights up when these signals are dimmed. See “Control Room Monitoring” on

page 132 for more information.

O SMALL button

This button is used to route the Control Room Monitor signal to either the SMALL or

LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUTs. When it’s off (indicator off), the signal is

routed through to the LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUTs, and when it’s on

(indicator on), the signal is routed through to the SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR

OUTs. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information.

P CONTROL ROOM LEVEL control

This control is used to adjust the level of the Control Room Monitor signal. See “Control

Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information.

TALKBACK

A SLATE button

This button turns on the Slate function, which distributes the Talkback mic signal to all Bus

Outs, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out. See “Using Talkback & Slate” on page 138 for more

information.

B TALKBACK button

This button turns on the Talkback function, which distributes the Talkback mic signal to the

Studio Monitor Outs and any Slot or Omni Outputs speciﬁed on the Talkback Setup page.

See “Using Talkback & Slate” on page 138 for more information.

SLATE

TALKBACK

Rear Panel 29

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Rear Panel

AD Input Section (p. 30)

SLOT Section (p. 34)

Analog Master I/O Section (p. 30)

OMNI OUT Section (p. 31)

Digital I/O & Control Section (p. 32)

Power Section (p. 34)

30 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

AD Input Section

INPUT A & B (BAL) connectors

AD Inputs 1 through 24 feature balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors and balanced 1/4-inch

phone jacks, both with a nominal input range of –60 dB to +10 dB. Phantom powering

(+48 V) is supplied to the XLR-type connectors, with individual ON/OFF switches on each

input. The phone jacks, which can also be used with unbalanced phone plugs, have priority

over the XLR-type connectors, so when a phone plug is inserted, the XLR-type connector

is disconnected. These inputs can be patched individually to the Input Channels or Insert

Ins. With their high sensitivity and PAD switches, these inputs can handle a wide range of

signals, from condenser microphones to “hot” line levels. See “AD Input Section” on page

48 for more information.

B INSERT IN & OUT +4dB (BAL) connectors

These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks are used to insert

external signal processors, etc., into AD Inputs 1 through

24. They are wired: sleeve–ground, ring–cold, tip–hot. The

nominal signal level of both jacks is +4 dB. Inserts can be

turned on and off individually by using the INSERT

ON/OFF switches. See “AD Input Section” on page 48 for

more information.

Analog Master I/O Section

STUDIO MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL)

These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks, nominal output

level +4 dB, output the analog Studio Monitor signal for

monitoring in the actual studio. The source, which is

selected by using the STUDIO buttons in the MONITOR

section, can be Aux Send #11, Aux Send #12, the Stereo Out, or Control Room. The output

level is controlled by the STUDIO LEVEL control. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 133 for

more information.

Male XLR plug

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

2 (hot)

1/4" TRS phone plug

Tip (hot)

Ring (cold)

Sleeve (ground)

1/4" TRS phone plug

Tip (hot)

Ring (cold)

Sleeve (ground)

6 7

53 4

1/4" TRS phone plug

Tip (hot)

Ring (cold)

Sleeve (ground)

Rear Panel 31

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

B STEREO OUT +4 dB (BAL)

These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors, nominal

output level +4 dB, output the analog Stereo Out signal

and are typically connected the stereo inputs of a

2-track recorder. They are wired pin 1–ground, pin

2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–). See “Stereo Out Connectors” on page 82.

C SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL)

These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors, nominal

output level +4 dB, output the analog Small Control

Room Monitor signal and are typically used to feed the

control room’s nearﬁeld monitors. See “Control Room

Monitoring” on page 132 for more information.

D LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL)

These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors, nominal

output level +4 dB, output the analog Large Control

Room Monitor signal and are typically used to feed the

control room’s main monitors. See “Control Room

Monitoring” on page 132 for more information.

E 2TR IN ANALOG 1 +4 dB (BAL)

These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks, nominal input

level +4 dB, are typically used to connect the analog stereo

outputs of a 2-track recorder. Signals connected here can

be monitored via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR

OUT by pressing the CONTROL ROOM [2TR A1] button. In addition, this input can be

patched to Input Channels or Insert Ins. See “2TR Analog INs” on page 49.

F STEREO OUT –10 dBV (UNBAL)

These unbalanced phono connectors, nominal output level

–10 dBV, output the analog Stereo Out signal and are typically con-

nected to the stereo inputs of a 2-track recorder. See “Stereo Out

Connectors” on page 82.

G 2TR IN ANALOG 2 –10 dBV (UNBAL)

These unbalanced phono connectors, nominal input level

–10 dBV, are typically used to connect the analog stereo outputs of

a 2-track recorder. Signals connected here can be monitored via the

CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUTs by pressing the CONTROL

ROOM [2TR A2] button. In addition, this input can be patched to Input Channels or Insert

Ins. See “2TR Analog INs” on page 49.

OMNI OUT Section

A OMNI OUT +4dB (BAL)

These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks, nominal output

level +4 dB, provide eight analog outputs that can be

patched to the following: Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix

Sends, the Stereo Out, Insert Outs, Direct Outs, or Sur-

round Monitor Channels. See “Omni Outs” on page 49.

Female XLR plug

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

2 (hot)

Female XLR plug

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

2 (hot)

Female XLR plug

1 (ground)

3 (cold)

2 (hot)

1/4" TRS phone plug

Tip (hot)

Ring (cold)

Sleeve (ground)

Phono plug

Tip (hot)

Sleeve (ground)

Phono plug

Tip (hot)

Sleeve (ground)

1/4" TRS phone plug

Tip (hot)

Ring (cold)

Sleeve (ground)

32 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Digital I/O & Control Section

A KEYBOARD connector

A PS/2 compatible keyboard can be connected here for quick entry of scene and library

titles and channel names. See “Using a Keyboard” on page 38 for more information.

B SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT connector

This balanced XLR-3-31-type connector is used to input SMPTE timecode for synchroniz-

ing the Automix function. See “Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate” on page 171.

C MTC TIME CODE INPUT connector

This 5-pin DIN connector is used to input MTC for synchronizing the Automix function.

See “Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate” on page 171.

D USB TO HOST port

This USB port is for MIDI communication between the DM2000 and a host computer with

a USB port. See “MIDI I/O” on page 182 for more information.

E SERIAL TO HOST port

This 8-pin mini DIN port is for MIDI communication between the DM2000 and a host

computer with a serial port. See “MIDI I/O” on page 182 for more information.

F WORD CLOCK OUT 2 connector

This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal at half the clock rate of the DM2000 when

using 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz. See “Wordclock Connections” on page 50 for more information.

G WORD CLOCK OUT 1 connector

This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal at the same clock rate as the DM2000. See

“Wordclock Connections” on page 50 for more information.

H WORD CLOCK 75Ω ON/OFF termination switch

This switch applies 75Ω termination to the WORD CLOCK IN. See “Terminating External

Wordclocks” on page 52 for more information.

I WORD CLOCK IN connector

This BNC connector is for connecting an external wordclock signal. See “Selecting the

Wordclock Source” on page 51 for more information.

J 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 3

This phono connector outputs consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio, and is typically

connected to the digital stereo input of a 2-track recorder. The following signals can be

patched to this output: Stereo Out, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, Direct Outs, Insert

Outs, and Control Room. The sampling rate of the digital audio output can be set indepen-

dently of the DM2000 sampling rate by using the internal sampling rate converter. Dither

can be applied for digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems. See “2TR Digital Outs”

on page 52 for more information.

1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9J KL

N O P RQ

Rear Panel 33

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

K 2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 & 2

These XLR-3-32-type connectors output AES/EBU format digital audio, and are typically

connected to the digital stereo inputs of 2-track recorders. The following signals can be

patched to these outputs: Stereo Out, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, Direct Outs,

Insert Outs, and Control Room. The sampling rate of the digital audio output can be set

independently of the DM2000 sampling rate by using the internal sampling rate converters.

Dither can be applied for digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems. See “2TR Dig-

ital Outs” on page 52 for more information.

L 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 3

This phono connector accepts consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio, and is typically

used to connect the digital stereo output of a 2-track recorder. Signals connected here can

be monitored via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT by pressing the CONTROL

ROOM [2TR D3] button. In addition, this input can be patched to Input Channels or

Insert Ins. Unsynchronized digital audio signals can be converted by the internal sampling

rate converters. See “2TR Digital Ins” on page 53 for more information.

M 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 & 2

These XLR-3-31-type connectors accept AES/EBU format digital audio, and are typically

used to connect the digital stereo outputs of 2-track recorders. Signals connected here can

be monitored via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT by pressing the CONTROL

ROOM [2TR D1] button or [2TR D2] button. In addition, these inputs can be patched

Input Channels or Insert Ins. Unsynchronized digital audio signals can be converted by the

internal sampling rate converters. See “2TR Digital Ins” on page 53 for more information.

N METER port

This 15-pin D-sub connector is for connecting the optional MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge.

O CONTROL port

This 25-pin D-sub connector provides access to the GPI (General Purpose Interface)

through which external equipment can be triggered when speciﬁed DM2000 faders or

USER DEFINE KEYS are operated. It can also be used to control a “RECORDING” light

outside of a studio, to trigger the Solo function of an 02R Digital Recording Console, or to

turn on Talkback from an external device. See “GPI (General Purpose Interface)” on page

228 for more information.

P REMOTE port

This 9-pin D-sub connector can be used to connect an optional Yamaha AD824 AD Con-

verter, providing remote and recallable control of its head amp settings. Machines that sup-

port the Sony P2 protocol can also be controlled from the DM2000 via this port. A straight

cable should be used to connect a P2 device; a reversed cable for an AD824. See “Controlling

AD824 A/D Converters” on page 229 and “About Machine Control (MMC & P2)” on

page 220 for more information.

Q MIDI IN, OUT & THRU ports

These standard MIDI IN, OUT, and THRU ports are used to connect the DM2000 to other

MIDI equipment. Supported MIDI messages include Program Changes for Scene recall,

Control Changes and Parameter Changes for real-time parameter control, Bulk Dump for

data storage, MIDI Clock, MTC, and MMC. See “MIDI I/O” on page 182 for more infor-

mation.

R CASCADE IN & OUT ports

These 64-pin connectors can be used to cascade up to four DM2000s to create a multi-

ple-unit mixing system. The DM2000 can also be cascaded with an 02R Digital Recording

Console. See “Cascading Consoles” on page 58 for more information.

34 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Power Section

POWER ON/OFF switch

This switch is used to turn on the power to the DM2000. See “Turning On & Off the

DM2000” on page 35 for more information.

B Grounding screw

For electrical safety reasons, and correct operation of the touch-sensitive faders, it’s impor-

tant that the DM2000 is grounded properly. The supplied power cord has a three-pin plug,

and if the ground terminal of the AC outlet is grounded, then the unit will be grounded suf-

ﬁciently through the power cord. If the AC outlet does not provide a suitable ground, this

screw must be connected to a suitable ground point. Grounding is also an effective method

for eliminating hum, interference, and other noise.

C AC IN connector

This connector is used to connect the DM2000 to an AC outlet via the supplied power cord.

See “Connecting the Power Cord” on page 35 for more information.

D Cooling fan

The cooling fan expels air out through this outlet. If the airﬂow is restricted, the DM2000

may overheat, so make sure this outlet is not blocked.

SLOT Section

A SLOT 1–6

These six slots are for use with optional mini YGDAI cards, which offer a variety of analog

and digital I/O options. See “Slot I/O” on page 54 for more information. Slot inputs can be

patched to Input Channels or Insert Ins. See “Input Patching” on page 61 for more infor-

mation. The following signals can be patched to the Slot Outputs: Bus Outs, Aux Sends,

Matrix Sends, Stereo Out, Insert Outs, Direct Outs, and Surround Monitor Channels. See

“Output Patching” on page 63 for more information.

Operating Basics 35

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

3 Operating Basics

Connecting the Power Cord

Connect the socket-end of the supplied power cord to the AC IN

on the rear panel of the DM2000. Connect the plug-end to a suit-

able AC wall outlet, one that conforms to the power supply

requirements stated on the DM2000’s rear panel.

Turning On & Off the DM2000

To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers, turn on your

audio equipment in the following order (reverse this order when turn-

ing off)—sound sources, multitrack and master recorders, DM2000,

monitoring power ampliﬁers.

1 To turn on the DM2000, press the [POWER] switch.

The startup page appears for a while, and then the last selected display

page appears.

2 To turn off the DM2000, press the [POWER] switch again.

About the Display

All DM2000 mix parameters can be edited on the various display pages.

Current Scene: The number and title of the currently selected Scene memory are dis-

played here. See “Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page

159 for more information. If the selected Scene is write-protected, a padlock icon appears.

See “Using the Scene Memory Page” on page 160 for more information.

MIDI indicator: This indicator appears when the DM2000 is receiving MIDI data via the

MIDI IN port, USB TO HOST port, or SERIAL TO HOST port.

Warning: Turn off all equipment connected to the DM2000 before making any power connec-

tions.

Current Scene

EDIT indicator

MIDI indicator

Sampling rate

Page title

Page area

Page tabs

Page tab scroll arrow

Page #

Channel name

Selected

DISPLAY

Selected channel

36 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

EDIT indicator: This indicator appears when the current mix settings no longer match

those of the Scene that was recalled last. It works in unison with the Edit indicator dot on

the SCENE MEMORY display. See “Edit Buffer & Edit Indicator” on page 157 for more

information.

Selected DISPLAY: This indicates the currently selected display page group, for example,

AUX, EQ, or AUTOMIX. Display page groups are selected by using the [DISPLAY] buttons.

Sampling rate: This indicates the current sampling rate—44.1 kHz (44k), 48 kHz (48k),

88.2 kHz (88k), or 96 kHz (96k).

Selected channel: The Input or Output Channel currently selected by the [SEL] buttons

is indicated here. See “Selecting Channels” on page 43. The ﬁrst four characters are the

Channel ID (e.g., CH1–CH96, BUS1–BUS8, AUX1–AUX9, AX10–AX12, MT1L–MT4R,

ST-L, ST-R. The second four, are the channel’s Short name. See “Naming Channels” on

page 130.

Channel name: Depending on the currently selected page, this is the Long name of

either the currently selected channel or the channel selected by the cursor buttons. On some

pages, the Aux Send pages, for example, it’s possible to edit Aux Send levels without having

to select each Input Channel. Instead, Input Channel Aux Sends can be selected by using the

cursor buttons. In this case, the name displayed here is different to the name displayed in

the upper-right corner of the display.

Page title: This is the title of the currently selected page.

Page #: Depending on the group of pages currently selected, page numbers are displayed

here. For example, although you can view only one Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page at

a time, there are in fact 12 Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send pages, one for each of the 12 Aux

Sends. Page numbers are also displayed when the following page groups are selected: Matrix

Sends, Effects, and GEQ.

Page area: This area of the display is where the various display pages appear.

Page tabs: These tabs are used when selecting pages. Up to four tabs are visible at a time.

See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 36 for more information.

Page tab scroll arrows: These arrows indicate that there are more pages available. See

“Selecting Display Pages” on page 36 for more information.

Selecting Display Pages

Display pages are grouped by function, and each group of pages can be selected by

using the following [DISPLAY] buttons: MATRIX SELECT, AUX SELECT,

ENCODER MODE, EFFECTS/PLUG-INS, ROUTING, PHASE/INSERT, DELAY,

AUX/MATRIX SEND, DYNAMICS, PAN/SURROUND, EQUALIZER, TRACK

ARMING, SCENE MEMORY, AUTOMIX, USER DEFINED KEYS, LOCATOR,

MONITOR. Further page groups can be selected by using the DISPLAY ACCESS

buttons.

•The next page in the group can be selected by pressing the [DISPLAY] button.

•Previous pages can be selected by pressing and holding down the [DISPLAY] button.

•The ﬁrst page in the group can be selected by double-clicking the [DISPLAY] button.

•Pages whose tabs are currently displayed can be

selected by using the F1–F4 buttons.

If there are more pages available than the four whose

tabs are currently displayed, depending on whether they

are located to the left or right, either the left or right Tab

Scroll arrow appears. Pressing either the Left or Right

Tab Scroll button displays the tabs of these pages, which

can then be selected by using the F1–F4 buttons.

DISPLAY

F1 F2 F3

Tab Scroll arrows

Tab scroll buttons

Display History 37

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

When parameters are divided among several pages, for example, the Input Channel Atten-

uators, which are divided among four pages, the page containing the parameter for the cur-

rently selected channel is selected automatically when channels on different Layers are

selected. For example, if the Input Channel 1–24 Attenuator page is currently selected, and

then you select, say, Input Channel #25 by using the LAYER [25–48] button and [SEL] but-

ton #1, the Input Channel 25–48 Attenuator page is selected automatically.

The currently selected page in a group, and the parameter selected on that page, are remem-

bered when you select another group of pages, so when you return to that group, by press-

ing its [DISPLAY] button, that page is displayed with the same parameter selected.

The Auto Display preferences can be set so that certain pages appear automatically when a

corresponding control is adjusted. For example, if the “Auto EQUALIZER Display” prefer-

ence is on, the EQ page appears automatically when a SELECTED CHANNEL EQUAL-

IZER control is operated. See page 234 for information on the Auto Display preferences.

Display History

The Display History function works like the history function on a

We b browser, and allows you to return quickly to up to eight recently

displayed pages. Each time you view a page for more than ﬁve sec-

onds, it’s added to the Display History buffer.

Pressing the DISPLAY HISTORY [BACK] button selects the previous page in the buffer.

Pressing the DISPLAY HISTORY [FORWARD] button selects the next page in the buffer. If

there are no pages in the buffer, nothing happens when these buttons are pressed.

You can scroll forwards or backwards through all the pages in the buffer by pressing and

holding the [BACK] or [FORWARD] button respectively. Scrolling like this continuously

cycles through all the pages in the buffer. You can clear the Display History buffer by press-

ing the [BACK] and [FORWARD] buttons simultaneously.

Display Page Controls

Operation of the various buttons, rotary controls, and faders that appear on the

display pages is straightforward. The only items that require a special mention

are the parameter boxes, such as the GEQ Insert parameter box shown here.

Operation of these boxes consists of two steps. First you select a value, typically

by using the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons. Second you conﬁrm your

selection, while the value is ﬂashing, by pressing the [ENTER] button. If you

select another parameter while the value is still ﬂashing, it remains unchanged.

Parameter Windows

When a rotary control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section is operated, if the

corresponding parameter does not appear on the currently selected page, a

parameter window like the one shown here is displayed while the control is

adjusted. If the control is not adjusted for awhile, the window closes automat-

ically. If the Auto Display preference for the adjusted parameter is on, the page containing

that parameter appears instead of this parameter window.

Conﬁrmation Messages

For certain functions, the DM2000 prompts you for

conﬁrmation before executing them, as shown here.

Press YES to execute the function, or press NO to can-

cel. If no action is taken for awhile, the conﬁrmation

window closes automatically and the function is not

executed.

BACK FORWARD

DISPLAY HISTORY

38 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Title Edit Window

The Title Edit window is used to enter titles for Scene and library memories, automixes, and

so on. Depending on the item being titled, the number of characters that can be entered is

either 4, 12, or 16. The following screen shots show the available characters. The one on the

left shows uppercase characters and various punctuation marks. That on the right, lower-

case characters and numbers.

Use the cursor buttons to select characters, and the [ENTER] button to enter them into the

title. The cursor moves to the right automatically as each character is entered. The Param-

eter wheel or the arrow buttons can be used to move the cursor within the title.

Use the SHIFT LOCK button to select uppercase and lowercase characters, and use the SPC

button to enter a space. To insert a space at the cursor position and move subsequent char-

acters to the right, press the INS button. To delete the character at the cursor position, press

the DEL button.

When you’ve ﬁnished, press the OK button to enter the title, or press CANCEL to cancel

title entry.

Using a Keyboard

A PS/2 compatible keyboard can be connected to the KEYBOARD port and used

for quick title entry while the Title Edit window is displayed. Note that only 101

and 104-key U.S. keyboards are supported.

Characters, including letters, numbers, and punctuation marks, supported by the

DM2000 can be entered. Characters appear directly in the Title Edit window, the

same as when they are entered on the DM2000. The following table shows how

other keys correspond to Title Edit window functions.

Key Title Edit Window function Description

ESC

CANCEL Cancels title entry

RETURN/ENTER

OK Enters the speciﬁed title

CAPS LOCK

SHIFT LOCK Toggles between uppercase and lowercase

SHIFT

— Switches to uppercase characters

Backspace

— Deletes the character to the left

Cursor (left/right)

Left/right arrow buttons Moves the cursor within the title

INSERT

INS Toggles between insert and overwrite modes

DELETE

DEL Deletes the selected character

SPACE bar

SPACE Inserts a space at the current position

Channel Strip Displays 39

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Channel Strip Displays

The ﬂuorescent channel strip displays graphically display the value of the

Input or Output Channel parameter currently assigned to the Encoders,

routing settings, and the on/off status of the EQ, Insert, Delay, Comp,

and Gate functions. They also display the Long and Short channel names

and indicate the currently selected channel. You can adjust their bright-

ness by using the Channel Strip Display Brightness preference on

page 236.

Selected Channel

The border of the currently selected channel’s channel strip display lights

up like this.

Fader Touch Sense

When fader knobs are touched, the corresponding Touch Sense indica-

tors light up like this.

Routing Indicators

These indicators show to which Output Channels an Input Channel is

being routed: 1 through 8 being the Bus Outs, “S” being the Stereo Out,

and “D,” the Direct Out.

EQ, Insert, Delay, Comp & Gate Indicators

These indicators show whether a channel’s EQ, Insert, Delay, Comp, and

Gate functions are on or off.

Encoder Displays

Operation of the Encoder displays depends on the parameter assigned to the

Encoders, as follows.

Pan Mode

Aux/Mtrx Mode

Attenuator Parameter & Surr LFE Level

CH01

( indicates at center)

Hard left

( indicates center position)

Other position Center Hard right

( indicates nominal position) ( indicates at nominal)

Minimum (–∞) Other position Nominal Maximum

( indicates nominal position) ( indicates at nominal)

Minimum (–96 dB) Other position Nominal Maximum

40 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Delay Feedback Gain, Delay Mix & EQ Gain Parameters

On/Off & Pre/Post Parameters

EQ On/Off, Phase On/Off, Insert On/Off, EQ Type, Gate On/Off, Comp On/Off, Aux Send

On/Off, Matrix Send On/Off, Aux Send Pre/Post, Matrix Send Pre/Post.

AD824 Input Gain, Insert In Gain & Scene Fade Time Parameters

AD824 Input Gain, AD824 Insert In Gain, Scene Fade Time.

Other Parameters

Delay Time, EQ Q, EQ Frequency, Comp Threshold, Comp Ratio, Comp Attack, Comp

Release, Comp Out Gain, Comp Knee, Gate Threshold, Gate Range, Gate Attack, Gate

Hold, Gate Decay, Compander Width.

Surr Pan Wheel

No Assign

When the Encoders are assigned to the No Assign, Input Patch, Insert In Patch, Insert Out

Patch, or Direct Out parameter, the Encoder displays are inactive.

( indicates 0%, ±0 dB)

Negative value

( indicates at 0%, ±0 dB)

0%, ±0 dB Positive value

On/Pre Off/Post

(Off when Fade Time is minimum)

Minimum Other value Maximum

Minimum Other position Other position Maximum

Channel Strip Displays 41

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Channel Names

The channel strip displays also display the names or IDs of all the channels on the currently

selected Layer. Each Input and Output Channel has a ﬁxed Channel ID and Short and Long

names that you can edit. See “Naming Channels” on page 130.

You can choose whether the Short names or Channel IDs are displayed

in the preferences. See “Channel ID/Channel” on page 236.

1 To display a channel’s Long name, press and hold its [SEL] button.

After about one second, the channel’s Short name, Long name, and Channel ID are dis-

played, as shown below.

All other items in the displays are turned off while the [SEL] button is held down.

2 Release the [SEL] button when you’ve ﬁnished.

The channel strip displays return to normal.

Input Patch, Insert In Patch, Insert Out Patch & Direct Out

When the Input Patch, Insert In Patch, Insert Out Patch, or Direct Out parameter is

assigned to the Encoders, the Encoder displays show Port IDs. See “Patching with the

Encoders” on page 67 for more information.

CH01

ACGT ACOU STIC GUIT ARCH01

Short NameChannel ID Long Name

42 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Selecting Layers

Input and Output Channels are arranged into Layers, as illustrated below. There are nine

Layers altogether: four Input Channel Layers, one Master Layer (or Output Layer), and four

Remote Layers.

To select Input and Output Channels for editing with the channel

strip controls, you use the LAYER buttons to select a Layer.

The LAYER button indicator for the currently selected Layer lights

up, and the channel strip displays show the Short names/Channel

IDs of the channels on the selected Layer.

The currently selected Layer determines the function of the chan-

nel strip Encoders, [AUTO] buttons, [SEL] buttons, [SOLO] but-

tons, [ON] buttons,

channel strip displays, and faders. For

example, when Layer 1–24 is selected, [SEL] button #1 controls

Input Channel #1. When Layer 25–48 is selected, it controls Input

Channel #25. And when the Master Layer is selected, it controls

Bus Out #1.

The following table shows which Input and Output Channels are

controlled by the channel strips for each Layer.

The exact function of each channel strip fader and Encoder also depends on the currently

selected Fader mode and Encoder mode respectively. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on

page 44 and “Selecting Encoder Modes” on page 45 for more information.

Layers

Channel Strips

1–8 9–16 17–20 21–24

1-24

Input Channels 1–24

25–48

Input Channels 25–48

49–72

Input Channels 49–72

73–96

Input Channels 73–96

MASTER

Bus Out masters 1–8 Aux Send masters 1–12

Matrix

Send mas-

ters 1–4

REMOTE

1–4

Operation depends on the selected target. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217

for more information.

87654321 910111213141516 1718192021222324

Input Channels [1–24]

Input Channels [25–48]

Input Channels [49–72]

Input Channels [73–96]

Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends [MASTER]

[REMOTE 1]

[REMOTE 2]

[REMOTE 3]

[REMOTE 4]

REMOTE 1

REMOTE 2

REMOTE 3

REMOTE 4

LAYER

MASTER

124

25 48

49 72

73 96

Selecting Channels 43

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Selecting Channels

To select Input and Output Channels for editing with the SELECTED CHANNEL controls,

you use the LAYER buttons to select a Layer, and the [SEL] buttons to select a channel on

that Layer.

1 Select a Layer, as explained on page 42.

2 Use the [SEL] buttons to select an Input or Output Channel.

The [SEL] button indicator for the currently selected channel lights up, and the

border of its channel strip display lights up (see page 39). In addition, the Chan-

nel’s ID and Short name appear in the upper right corner of the display (see page 36).

The exact channel selected by each [SEL] button depends on the currently selected Layer.

For example, when Layer 1–24 is selected, [SEL] button #1 selects Input Channel #1. When

Layer 25–48 is selected, it selects Input Channel #25. And when the Master Layer is selected,

it selects Bus Out #1, as shown in the following table.

For paired Input or Output channels, the channel whose [SEL] button you press is selected,

and its indicator lights up. The [SEL] button indicator of the other channel ﬂashes.

Ve rtical and horizontal Input and Output channel partners can also be selected by using the

SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [L] and [R] buttons, which can also be used to

select left and right channels when a Matrix Send or the Stereo Out is selected.

If the currently displayed page contains a relevant parameter, when a channel’s [SEL] but-

ton is pressed, the cursor moves to that parameter automatically. If the currently displayed

page contains no such parameter, the page that does contain such a parameter is selected

automatically. For example, if a Delay page for the Output Channels is selected when an

Input Channel [SEL] button is pressed, the Delay page showing the relevant Input Channel

Delay parameter is selected automatically.

Stereo Out [SEL] Button

The Stereo Out [SEL] button is used exclusively to select the Stereo Out for editing with the

SELECTED CHANNEL controls. Its indicator lights up when the Stereo Out is selected.

Each time it’s pressed, the selection toggles between the Stereo Out’s left and right channels.

The SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [L] and [R] buttons can also be used to

select the left and right channels.

If the currently displayed page contains a Stereo Out parameter, that parameter is selected

automatically when the Stereo Out [SEL] button is pressed. If the currently selected page

contain no such parameter, the page that does contain such a parameter is selected auto-

matically. For example, if a Delay page for the Input Channels is currently selected when the

Stereo Out [SEL] button is pressed, the Delay page showing the Stereo Out Delay parameter

is selected automatically.

Layer

[SEL] Button

1–8 9–16 17–20 21–24

1-24

Input Channels 1–24

25–48

Input Channels 25–48

49–72

Input Channels 49–72

73–96

Input Channels 73–96

MASTER

Bus Outs 1–8 Aux Sends 1–12

Matrix

Sends 1–4

1. Each time a [SEL] button is pressed, the selection toggles between the Matrix Send’s left and right

channels.

REMOTE

1–4

Operation depends on the selected target. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217

for more information.

SEL

44 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Auto Channel Select & Touch Sense Select

While the Auto Channel Select preference is on (see page 235), channels can be selected by

moving the corresponding fader or Encoder, or by turning on the corresponding [AUTO],

[SOLO], or [ON] button.

While the Touch Sense Select preference is on (see page 237), channels can be selected sim-

ply by touching the fader knobs.

Selecting Fader Modes

The exact function of each fader depends on the selected Layer and Fader mode.

1 Select a Layer, as explained on page 42.

2 Use the FADER MODE buttons to select a Fader mode.

[FADER]: Channel faders control Input Channel levels or Output Chan-

nel master levels, depending on the selected Layer.

[AUX/MTRX]: Channel faders control Aux or Matrix Send levels,

depending on the selected Layer.

The indicator of the currently selected FADER MODE button lights up.

The following table shows the channel fader functions for each Layer and Fader mode.

Layer

Fader

Mode

Fader

1–8 9–16 17–20 21–24

1-24

Fader

CH 1–24: level

Aux/Mtrx

CH 1–24: Aux Send level

25–48

Fader

CH 25–48: level

Aux/Mtrx

CH 25–48: Aux Send level

49–72

Fader

CH 49–72: level

Aux/Mtrx

CH 49–72: Aux Send level

73–96

Fader

CH 73–96 level

Aux/Mtrx

CH 73–96: Aux Send level

Master

Fader

Bus Out 1–8:

master level

Aux Send 1–12: master level

Matrix

Send 1–4:

master

level

Aux/Mtrx

Bus Out 1–8:

Matrix Send level

Aux Send 1–12: Matrix Send level

No opera-

tion: Fad-

ers ﬁxed

at –∞

Remote

1–4

Fader

Operation depends on the selected target. See “About Remote Layers” on

page 217 for more information.

Aux/Mtrx

AUX / MTRXFADER

FADER MODE

Selecting Encoder Modes 45

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Selecting Encoder Modes

The exact function of each Encoder depends on the selected Layer and Encoder

mode. There are two preset Encoder modes, Pan and Aux/Mtrx, and four assign-

able modes, for which you can choose from over 40 parameters.

1 Select a Layer, as explained in page 42.

2 Use the ENCODER MODE buttons to select

an Encoder mode.

[PAN]: Encoders function as Pan controls.

[AUX/MTRX]: Encoders control Aux or Matrix

Send levels, depending on the selected Layer.

[ASSIGN 1–4]: Encoders control the parameters

assigned to the ASSIGN buttons. See “Assigning

Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons” on page 46 for more information.

The indicator of the currently selected ENCODER MODE button lights up.

The following table shows the exact Encoder functions for each Layer and Encoder mode.

The values of the parameters being controlled by the Encoders are displayed graphically by

the channel strip displays. See “Channel Strip Displays” on page 39 for more information.

Layer

Encoder

Mode

Encoder

1–8 9–16 17–20 21–24

1-24

Pan

CH 1–24: pan

Aux/Mtrx

CH 1–24: Aux Send level

Assign 1–4

CH 1–24: assigned parameter

25–48

Pan

CH 25–48: pan

Aux/Mtrx

CH 25–48: Aux Send level

Assign 1–4

CH 25–48: assigned parameter

49–72

Pan

CH 49–72: pan

Aux/Mtrx

CH 49–72: Aux Send level

Assign 1–4

CH 49–72: assigned parameter

73–96

Pan

CH 73–96 pan

Aux/Mtrx

CH 73–96: Aux Send level

Assign 1–4

CH 73–96: assigned parameter

Master

Pan

No operation No operation

Matrix

1–4: Bal-

ance

Aux/Mtrx

Bus Out 1–8: Matrix

Send level

Aux Send 1–12: Matrix Send level

No opera-

tion

Assign 1–4

Bus Out 1–8: assigned

parameter

Aux Send 1–12: assigned parameter

Matrix

Send 1–4:

assigned

parameter

Remote

1–4

Pan

Operation depends on the selected target. See “About Remote Layers” on

page 217 for more information.

Aux/Mtrx

Assign 1–4

AUX / MTRX

PAN

ASSIGN 4ASSIGN 3

DISPLAY

ASSIGN 2ASSIGN 1

PAN SEND LEVEL

INSERTSEND ASSIGNOUTPUTINPUT

ENCODER MODE

46 Chapter 3—Operating Basics

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons

Up to four parameters can be assigned to the four ENCODER MODE ASSIGN buttons.

Initially, the following parameters are assigned to the ASSIGN buttons:

[ASSIGN 1]: Input Patch

[ASSIGN 2]: Direct Out

[ASSIGN 3]: Surr. LFE Level

[ASSIGN 4]: Surr. Pan Wheel

1 Use the ENCODER MODE [DISPLAY] button to select the Encoder Mode

Assign page.

The names of the parameters currently assigned to each ASSIGN button are displayed in the

left-hand box. The parameter currently assigned to the selected ASSIGN button appears

highlighted in the right-hand box.

2 Press an ASSIGN button, or use the Up/Down cursor buttons, to select an

ASSIGN button.

3 Use the Parameter wheel, or the INC/DEC buttons to select a parameter.

A parameter is selected when it appears inside the dotted box.

See the “Assignable Encoder Mode Parameter List” on page 47 for a complete list of assign-

able parameters.

4 Press the [ENTER] button to assign your choice.

Once assigned, the selected parameter appears highlighted in the right-hand box.

When channels that do not feature the currently assigned parameter are selected, the

Encoders are inactive. For example, if the assigned Encoder parameter is “Phase,” and the

Master Layer is selected, the Encoders are inactive, because the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and

Matrix Sends do not feature Phase parameters.

Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons 47

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Assignable Encoder Mode Parameter List

Parameter Encoder Operation Push Switch Operation

No Assign

——

Attenuator

Attenuator —

Input Patch

Input Channel patch Conﬁrm patch selection

Insert In Patch

Insert In patch Conﬁrm patch selection

Insert Out Patch

Insert Out patch Conﬁrm patch selection

Direct Out

Direct Out patch Conﬁrm patch selection

Phase

Phase: normal/reverse —

Insert On

Insert on/off —

Aux pre/post

Aux pre/post —

Delay On

Delay on/off —

Delay Time

Delay Time —

Delay FB.Gain

Delay FB.Gain —

Delay Mix

Delay Mix —

EQ On

EQ on/off —

EQ Type

EQ Type —

EQ Low Q

EQ Low Q —

EQ Low F

EQ Low Frequency —

EQ Low G

EQ Low Gain —

EQ Low-Mid Q

EQ Low-Mid Q —

EQ Low-Mid F

EQ Low-Mid Frequency —

EQ Low-Mid G

EQ Low-Mid Gain —

EQ High-Mid Q

EQ High-Mid Q —

EQ High-Mid F

EQ High-Mid Frequency —

EQ High-Mid G

EQ High-Mid Gain —

EQ High Q

EQ High Q —

EQ High F

EQ High Frequency —

EQ High G

EQ High Gain —

Gate On

Gate on/off —

Gate Threshold

Gate Threshold —

Gate Range

Gate Range —

Gate Attack

Gate Attack —

Gate Decay

Gate Decay —

Gate Hold

Gate Hold —

Comp On

Comp on/off —

Comp Threshold

Comp Threshold —

Comp Ratio

Comp Ratio —

Comp Attack

Comp Attack —

Comp Release

Comp Release —

Comp Out Gain

Comp Out Gain —

Comp Knee/Width

Comp Knee/Width —

Surr. LFE Level

Surround LFE level —

Surr. Pan Wheel

Surround Pan Wheel —

Scene Fade Time

Scene Fade Time —

AD824 Gain

AD824 Gain —

Ins AD824 Gain

AD824 Insert Gain —

48 Chapter 4—wAnalog I/O & the AD Input Section

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

4 wAnalog I/O & the AD Input Section

AD Input Section

The DM2000 features 24 AD Inputs for connecting microphone and line-level sources.

AD Inputs can be patched to Input Channels or Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 61).

They can also be patched to Output Channel Insert Ins (see page 64).

AD Input Connectors

AD Inputs feature balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors and balanced 1/4-inch

phone jacks, both with a nominal input range of –60 dB to +10 dB. The phone

jacks, which can also be used with unbalanced phone plugs, have priority over

the XLR-type connectors, so when a phone plug is inserted, the XLR-type con-

nector is disconnected.

Phantom Power

AD Inputs feature switchable +48 V phantom powering for use with con-

denser-type microphones and direct boxes. Phantom power is supplied to the

balanced XLR-3-31-type connector, and can be switched individually for each

AD Input.

Pad

AD Inputs feature pad switches, which attenuate input signals by 26 dB, allow-

ing the Head Amps to work with high-level signals. Pad is typically used to

attenuate “hot” signals from bass or snare drum microphones, or “hot”

line-level signals.

Gain

AD Inputs feature detented rotary gain controls with an input sensitivity of –16

dB to –60 dB, or +10 dB to –34 dB when the Pad is on. The GAIN controls

adjust the gain of the Head Amps, allowing you to optimize input signal levels

for the best signal-to-noise performance. Ideally, the GAIN control should be

set so that the signal level is relatively high, and it’s okay for the PEAK indicator

to light up occasionally. If the PEAK indicator lights up often, however, you

should back off the GAIN control a little, otherwise, signal clipping may occur.

If the GAIN is set too low, the signal-to-noise performance will suffer.

PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators

These indicators are used in conjunction with the GAIN controls and PAD

switches to optimize signal levels. The SIGNAL indicator lights up when the

input signal level is 20 dB below nominal. The PEAK indicator lights up when

the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping.

OFF

48V

PAD

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

Stereo Out 49

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

AD Inserts

AD Inputs feature switchable analog inserts with individual balanced 1/4-inch

TRS phone jacks for the send and return signals. They are wired:

sleeve–ground, ring–cold, tip–hot. The nominal signal level for both connec-

tors is +4 dB.

AD Input inserts can be turned on and off individually by using the INSERT

ON/OFF switches, so you don’t have to disconnect your external equipment in

order to remove an insert.

Stereo Out

See page 82 for information on the Stereo Out outputs.

Control Room Monitor Outs

See page 132 for information on the Control Room Monitor outputs.

Studio Monitor Outs

See page 133 for information on the Studio Monitor outputs.

Omni Outs

The DM2000 features assignable Omni Outs on balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks. Omni

Outs can be patched to Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output

Channel Insert Outs, or Surround Monitor Channels (see page 64). In addition, Input

Channel Direct Outs can be patched to the Omni Outs (see page 65).

The maximum output level of each OMNI OUT can be set internally to either +4 dB

(–10 dB operating level) or +18 dB (+4 dB operating level). Contact your dealer for further

details.

2TR Analog INs

The DM2000 features two sets of 2-track analog inputs: 2TR IN ANALOG 1

+4 dB (BAL) uses balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks. 2TR IN ANALOG 2

–10 dBV (UNBAL) uses unbalanced phono jacks. These inputs can be moni-

tored via the Control Room monitors by pressing the CONTROL ROOM

[2TR A1] and [2TR A2] buttons. They can be patched to Input Channels (see

page 61), Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 62), or Output Channel Insert Ins

(see page 64).

OFF

INSERT

50 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

5 Digital I/O & Cascading

Wordclocks

Unlike analog audio equipment, digital audio equipment must be synchronized when dig-

ital audio signals are transferred from one device to another, otherwise, signals may not be

received correctly and audible noise, glitches, or clicks may occur. Synchronization is

achieved using what’s called a wordclock, which is a clock signal for synchronizing all the

digital audio signals in a system. Note that wordclocks are not the same as SMPTE/EBU or

MTC timecode, which is typically used to synchronize tape machines, MIDI sequencers,

and so on. Wordclock synchronization refers to the synchronization of the digital audio

processing circuits inside each digital audio device.

In a typical digital audio system, one device operates as the wordclock master, and the other

devices operate as wordclock slaves, synchronizing to the wordclock master. Wordclock sig-

nals can be distributed via dedicated cables, typically BNC cables, or derived from digital

audio connections, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam formats.

If you’re connecting to the DM2000 using only analog inputs and outputs, no special word-

clock settings are required, and the DM2000 can be set to use its own internally generated

wordclock. If you’re connecting other equipment digitally, however, you must decide which

device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves.

The DM2000 can be used as the wordclock master running at either 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz,

88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz, or slaved to an external wordclock source. External wordclock signals

can be received via the Slot Inputs, 2TR Digital Inputs, the CASCADE IN port, or the ded-

icated BNC WORD CLOCK IN connector.

In a system where all devices share a common wordclock, it’s important that all devices be

turned on even if they’re not being used. Turn on the wordclock master ﬁrst, and then the

slaves. When shutting down the system, turn off the slaves ﬁrst, and then the master. Before

use, make sure that the wordclock slaves are correctly locked to the wordclock master. Most

devices have front panel indicators to indicate this. Refer to the relevant owner’s manuals

for more information.

Wordclock Connections

The DM2000 features one BNC wordclock input and two BNC

wordclock outputs. External wordclock signals can be connected

to the WORD CLOCK IN connector, and terminated by using the

75Ω ON/OFF switch (see page 52). WORD CLOCK OUT 1 out-

puts a wordclock signal at the same clock rate as the DM2000. WORD CLOCK OUT 2 out-

puts a wordclock signal at half the clock rate of the DM2000 when using 88.2 kHz or

96 kHz, so if the DM2000 is running at 96 kHz, a wordclock signal at 48 kHz is output here.

Wordclocks 51

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Selecting the Wordclock Source

The wordclock source can be selected as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Word Clock Select page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the sources, and press [ENTER] to set.

The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O Cards. The IN and OUT

columns indicate the number of inputs and outputs available for each installed I/O Card.

The FS box in the lower-left corner displays the current wordclock status: 44.1kHz, 48kHz,

88.2kHz, 96kHz, or Unlock.

The following are possible wordclock sources:

SLOT1–6 (1/2–15/16): These buttons select the Slot Inputs as the wordclock source.

Inputs are selected in pairs, the number of pairs depending on the type of I/O Card

installed.

WC IN: This button selects the WORDCLOCK IN connector as the wordclock source.

CAS. IN: This button selects the CASCADE IN port as the wordclock source.

2TRD1, 2TRD2, 2TRD3: These buttons select the 2TR Digital Inputs as the wordclock

source.

INT44.1k, INT48k, INT88.2k, INT96k: These buttons select the internal wordclock

generator as the wordclock source.

The source select buttons have the following indications:

A usable wordclock signal is present at this input.

No wordclock signal is present at this input.

A wordclock signal is present, but it’s out of sync with the current DM2000 clock.

This is the currently selected wordclock source.

This input was selected as the wordclock source, but no usable signal was received.

This cannot be selected as the wordclock source because a wordclock signal cannot be

sourced from this input on this type of I/O Card, or no I/O Card is installed.

If an external wordclock source fails for some reason, the DM2000 automatically switches

to its internal wordclock generator at the closest frequency.

Note: When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some

devices may output noise, so turn down your power amps beforehand, otherwise your speakers

may be damaged.

52 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Terminating External Wordclocks

Wo rdclock signals distributed via BNC cables must be terminated correctly, otherwise, jitter

and synchronization errors may result. Ideally, you should make a separate wordclock con-

nection to each device and terminate it. The following examples show two ways in which

wordclock signals can be distributed and how termination should be applied in each case.

Normally the WORD CLOCK 75Ω ON/OFF switch should be set to ON. The OFF setting

provides support for wordclock source devices with special speciﬁcations.

Star Distribution

In this example a dedicated wordclock distribution box is used to supply wordclock signals

to each device individually. Termination is applied at each device.

Daisy Chain Distribution

In this example the wordclock signal is distributed in a “daisy-chain” fashion, with each

device feeding the wordclock signal on to the next. This method of distribution is not rec-

ommended for larger systems.

2TR Digital Outs

The DM2000 features three sets of 2-track digital outputs: 2TR OUT

DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 and AES/EBU 2 use XLR-3-32-type connectors

and output AES/EBU format digital audio. 2TR OUT DIGITAL

COAXIAL 3 uses a phono connector and outputs consumer format

(IEC-60958) digital audio. These outputs can be patched to the Bus Outs, Aux Sends,

Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs, or the Control Room

signal (see page 65). They can also be patched to Direct Outs (see page 65). These outputs

can output digital audio signals at sampling rates other than the current DM2000 rate by

using the internal sampling rate converters (see page 53). Digital output signals can be dith-

ered for transfer to lower-resolution systems (see page 57).

Device-A

Termination = ON

Device-B Device-C Device-D

Termination = ON Termination = ON Termination = ON

WC OUT

(BNC)

Wordclock

master

Wordclock

distribution box

Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave

WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC)

Device-A

Termination = ON

Device-B Device-C

Termination = ON Termination = ON

Wordclock

master

Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave

WC IN

(BNC)

WC OUT

(BNC)

WC OUT (BNC)

WC IN

(BNC)

WC IN

(BNC)

WC OUT

(BNC)

2TR Digital Ins 53

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

2TR Digital Ins

The DM2000 features three sets of 2-track digital inputs: 2TR IN

DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 and AES/EBU 2 use XLR-3-31-type connec-

tors and accept AES/EBU format digital audio. 2TR IN DIGITAL

COAXIAL 3 uses a phono connector and accepts consumer format

(IEC-60958) digital audio. These inputs can be monitored via the Control Room monitors

by using the CONTROL ROOM [2TR D1], [2TR D2], and [2TR D3] buttons. They can be

patched to Input Channels (see page 61), Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 62), or Output

Channel Insert Ins (see page 64). Digital audio signals received at sampling rates other than

the current DM2000 rate can be converted by the internal sampling rate converters (see

page 53). You can monitor the Channel Status of digital signals present at these inputs on

the Channel Status Monitor page (see page 57).

2TR In/Out Sampling Rate Conversion

The DM2000’s 2TR Digital Inputs and Outputs feature sampling rate converters so you can

easily connect your legacy 44.1/48 kHz digital audio equipment.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Sampling Rate Con-

verter page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them.

The FS box in the lower-left corner displays the current wordclock status: 44.1kHz, 48kHz,

88.2kHz, 96kHz, or Unlock.

2TR IN D1–3: These buttons are used to turn on and off the sampling rate converter for

each 2TR Digital Input. When on, the sampling rate of the received digital audio is con-

verted to the DM2000’s current sampling rate. The original sampling rate is displayed.

2TR OUT D1–3: These buttons are used to turn on and off the sampling rate converters

for each 2TR Digital Output. When on, the sampling rate of the transmitted digital audio is

converted to the speciﬁed rate, which can be set to either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz.

54 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Slot I/O

The DM2000 features six Slots for installing optional mini-YGDAI (Yamaha General Digi-

tal Audio Interface) I/O Cards, which offer various analog I/O options and digital I/O inter-

faces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and

Tascam.

Slot Inputs can be assigned to Input Channels or Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 61), or

to Output Channel Insert Ins (see page 64). Slot Outputs can be assigned to Bus Outs, Aux

Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Insert Outs, or the Surround Monitor Channels (see

page 63), or Direct Outs (see page 65).

Slot outputs can be dithered for digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems (see

page 57).

Available Cards

The following mini-YGDAI I/O Cards are currently available. See the Yamaha Professional

Audio Web site at the following URL for up-to-date news on I/O Cards:

<http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>.

Card Format In Out Resolution/Sampling Rate Connectors

MY8-AD

Analog in

8—20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

Phone jack (balanced) x8

MY8-AD24

1. This card supersedes the 20-bit MY8-AD card.

8—

24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

MY4-AD

4— XLR-3-31 type (balanced) x4

MY8-AD96

8 24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz 25-pin D-sub

MY4-DA

Analog out

—424-bit, 44.1/48 kHz XLR-3-32 type (balanced) x4

MY8-DA96

—824-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

25-pin D-sub

MY8-AE

2. Can handle 24-bit/96 kHz in Double Channel mode. (Separate 96 kHz wordclock required.)

AES/EBU I/O

24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

MY8-AE96

24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz

MY8-AE96S

3. Same as MY8-AE96 except for onboard sampling rate converters.

MY8-AT

ADAT I/O

24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz

Optical x2

MY8-TD

Tascam

25-pin D-sub

BNC wordclock output

MY8-mLAN

IEEE1394 6-pin 1394 connector x2

Slot I/O 55

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Installing I/O Cards

This section explains how to install I/O Cards.

1 Turn off the DM2000.

2 Undo the two ﬁxing screws and remove the slot cover, as shown below.

Keep the cover and ﬁxing screws in a safe place for future use.

3 Insert the card between the guide rails and slide it all the way into the slot,

as shown below. You may have to push ﬁrmly to plug the card into the inter-

nal connector.

4 Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews. Do not leave them loose,

as the card will not be grounded correctly, which may cause the DM2000 to

malfunction.

You can check which I/O Cards are installed on the Word Clock Select page (see page 51).

Attention: For technical reasons, certain card combinations are not supported.

Before installing any cards, check the Yamaha web site (see page 6) to see

whether your card is compatible.

http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/

Also check the total number of cards that can be installed in the unit. Installing cards that are

not endorsed by Yamaha may cause electrical shock, ﬁre, or damage to the unit.

56 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates

The data transfer format for the higher sampling rates can be set as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Higher Sample Rate Data

Transfer Format page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them.

The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O Cards.

IN/OUT: These parameters are used to set the input and output data transfer format of I/O

Cards when running at the higher sampling rates (i.e., 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) to either Double

Channel or Double Speed. In Double Speed mode, digital audio data is received and trans-

mitted at the current higher sampling rate (i.e., 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz). In Double Channel

mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is exactly half

the current higher sampling rate and data is handled by two channels, thereby reducing the

total number of inputs or outputs for an eight channel I/O Card to four. In Double Channel

mode, the even-numbered channels are disabled. Double Channel mode allows you to

record 96 kHz audio to legacy 44.1/48 kHz digital multitrack recorders.

The IN and OUT parameters are only available when a higher sampling rate (i.e., 88.2 kHz

or 96 kHz) is selected. When the sampling rate is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, all parameters on this

page are unavailable. As are individual parameters for Slots with analog I/O Cards installed,

or no I/O Card installed. When a digital I/O card that does not support 88.2/96 kHz is

installed, such as the MY8-AE, MY8-AT, or MY8-TD, its IN and OUT formats are ﬁxed at

Double Channel mode.

SRC: These parameters are used to turn on and off the sampling rate converter for each

pair of Slot Inputs. When on, the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to

the DM2000’s current sampling rate. The original sampling rate is displayed. These param-

eters are available only when an I/O Card with onboard sampling rate converters is

installed, such as the MY8-AE96S.

Dithering Digital Outputs 57

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Dithering Digital Outputs

For digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems, the 2TR Digital Outputs and Slot

Outputs can be dithered to 16-bit, 20-bit, or 24-bit.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Dither page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the Dither parameters, and use the Param-

eter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them.

The SLOT column displays the names of any installed I/O Cards.

You can copy the currently selected setting to all Dither parameters by double-clicking the

[ENTER] button.

Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status

You can monitor the Channel Status of digital audio signals connected to the 2TR Digital

Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button to locate the Channel Status Mon-

itor page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the SLOT 1–6 and 2TR IN buttons, and the

press [ENTER].

Displayed Channel Status information includes sampling rate (FS), emphasis, category, and

copy protection.

58 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Cascading Consoles

Up to four DM2000s can be cascaded, offering a maximum of 384 Input Channels. Several

functions are linked between all cascaded consoles, including Solo, Scene Recall and Store,

so that all consoles work just like one big console. A single Yamaha 02R Digital Recording

Console can be included in the cascade system.

The CASCADE IN and CASCADE OUT ports are used

to transmit and receive Cascade and control signals.

Only use the optional dedicated Cascade cables for con-

necting.

Linked Functions

The following DM2000 functions are linked via the cascade ports:

•AUX SELECT

•MATRIX SELECT

•Display page selection

•Solo function

•FADER MODE

• ENCODER MODE

•Metering position setting

•Peak Hold On/Off

•Meter Fast Fall on/off

•Scene Store, Recall, and Title Edit

When a Scene is recalled on the master console, that scene is recalled on all cascaded con-

soles.

•The following Automix functions: Make New Automix, Store, Recall, Undo, Title Edit,

Tr ansport (AutoREC, REC, PLAY, STOP, ABORT).

•The following Automix parameters: Automix Enable/Disable, Internal Start Time, Offset

Time, Frame Rate, Overwrite (FADER, ON, PAN, SURR, AUX, AUX ON, EQ), Motor

ON/OFF, Edit Out Mode OFF/RETURN/TAKEOVER, Return Time, Update To End

On/Off, ABSOLUTE/RELATIVE Fader Edit Mode, Touch Sense Edit In On/Off, Touch

Sense Edit Out On/Off.

Function and parameter linking can be turned on or off by using the Cascade COMM Link

preference (see page 235). The Solo function is always linked regardless of this preference.

Note: When the Cascade COMM Link preference is on, do not make any MIDI connections

between cascaded DM2000s. If two DM2000s are cascaded and connected via MIDI, and the

Cascade COMM Link preference is on, when a store operation is performed on the master con-

sole, a loop will be created, causing both consoles to execute endless store operations.

Cascading Consoles 59

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Cascade Hookup Examples

Cascading Two DM2000s

Cascading Three or More DM2000s

Cascading an 02R Digital Recording Console

DM2000 #1 DM2000 #2

CASCADE IN

CASCADE OUT

Master: Off

Bi-directional: -

Master: On

Bi-directional: On

CASCADE IN

Final signals

can be output by the

Slot Outputs or Omni Outs.

Final signals

can be output by the

Slot Outputs or Omni Outs.

DM2000 #1 DM2000 #2/3 DM2000 #4

CASCADE IN

CASCADE OUT

Master: Off

Bi-directional: -

Master: Off

Bi-directional: -

Master: On

Bi-directional: On

CASCADE IN

CASCADE OUT CASCADE OUT

CASCADE IN

Final signals

can be output by the

Slot Outputs or Omni Outs.

Final signals

can be output by the

Slot Outputs or Omni Outs.

02R DM2000 #1/2 DM2000 #3

CASCADE IN

CASCADE OUT

Master: Off

Bi-directional: -

Cascade In from: 02R

Master: On

Bi-directional: Off

CASCADE IN

CASCADE OUT

Final signals

can be output by the

Slot Outputs or Omni Outs.

Aux Sends 9–12 are cascaded

between the DM2000s only.

60 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Attenuating Cascade Inputs

Cascade Inputs can be attenuated, and the Cascade mode and Cascade source can be spec-

iﬁed on the Cascade In page.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Cascade In page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them.

CASCADE MODE: When you want to output the same signals from two DM2000s, turn

on the BI-DIRECTIONAL button. In this case, the Cascade connections are looped. Turn

on the CASCADE MASTER option on one of the DM2000s to make it the master console.

When the BI-DIRECTIONAL button is off, the last DM2000 in the cascade is automatically

conﬁgured as the master console and it output the ﬁnal signals.

CASCADE IN FROM: This is used to specify the type of device connected to the CAS-

CADE IN port, either DM2000 or 02R. When a DM2000 is connected to the CASCADE IN

port, DM2000 is speciﬁed automatically.

CASCADE IN ATTENUATOR: These controls are used to attenuate Cascade Input sig-

nals. You can copy the currently selected setting to all Attenuator parameters by dou-

ble-clicking the [ENTER] button.

Turning On & Off Cascade Outputs

Individual Cascade Outputs can be turned on or off as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Cascade Out page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the ON/OFF buttons, and use the [ENTER]

button to set them.

Input & Output Patching 61

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

6 Input & Output Patching

Input Patching

Signal sources for the Input Channels, Input Channel Insert Ins, and internal effects pro-

cessors are selected on the Input Patch pages, which are selected by using the DISPLAY

ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button. Use the cursor buttons to select the patch parameters,

use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a source, and press [ENTER] to set.

Patch parameters display Short Port names. The Long Port name of the currently selected

patch parameter is displayed in the upper-right corner of each page.

Patching can also be done by using the Patch Select Window (see page 67). Input Channel

Inputs, Insert Ins, and Insert Outs can also be patched by using the Encoders (see page 67).

See page 242 for a complete list of input patch sources. See page 246 for a list of initial input

patches.

Input Patch settings can be stored in the Input Patch library, which contains 1 preset mem-

ory and 32 user memories. See “Input Patch Library” on page 141 for more information.

Patching Input Channels

AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects Processor outputs, Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs,

Bus Outs, or Aux Sends can be patched to the Input Channel Inputs.

The Input Channel Patch parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two

pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Patch page is shown below. The layout of the other page is

the same. When Vertical Input Channel pairing mode is selected, patch parameters for ver-

tical partners are displayed, for example, CH1, CH25, CH2, CH26, and so on.

In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the

[SEL] buttons and the Input Layers.

62 Chapter 6—Input & Output Patching

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Patching Input Channel Insert Ins

AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects processor outputs, Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs can

be patched to the Input Channel Insert Ins.

The Input Channel Insert In Patch parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided

between two pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Insert In Patch page is shown below. The lay-

out of the other page is the same. When Vertical Input Channel pairing mode is selected,

patch parameters for vertical partners are displayed, for example, CH1, CH25, CH2, CH26,

and so on.

In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the

[SEL] buttons.

Patching Effects Inputs

Aux Sends, internal effects processor outputs, or Output Channel Insert Outs can be

patched to the internal effects processor inputs.

The internal effects processor Input Patch parameters are divided between two pages: One

for Effects Processors #1 and #2, and one for Effects Processors 3–8. The effects type for each

Effects Processor is displayed in the boxes.

Output Patching 63

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Output Patching

Signal sources for the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, Output Channel Inserts Ins, Direct Outs,

2TR Digital Outputs, and GEQs are selected on the Output Patch pages, which are selected

by using the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button. Use the cursor buttons to select

the patch parameters, use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a source, and

press [ENTER] to set.

Depending on the patch page, patch parameters display either Short Channel or Short Port

names. The Long Channel or Port name of the currently selected patch parameter is dis-

played in the upper-right corner of each page.

Signal sources can also be selected by using the Patch Select Window (see page 67). Insert

Ins, Insert Outs, and Direct Outs can also be patched by using the Encoders (see page 67).

See page 247 for a complete list of output patch sources. See page 255 for a list of initial out-

put patches.

Output Patch settings can be stored in the Output Patch library, which contains 1 preset

memory and 32 user memories. See “Output Patch Library” on page 141 for more informa-

tion.

Patching Slot Outputs

Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs,

or Surround Monitor Channels can be patched to the Slot Outputs. Slot Outputs can be

patched to Direct Outs on the Direct Out Destination pages (see page 65).

The Slot Output Patch parameters for the six Slots are arranged into three pages. The Slot

1–2 Output Patch page is shown below. The layout of the other two pages is the same.

When a Slot Output is patched to a Direct Out (see page 65), and that Direct Out is assigned

on an Input Channel Routing page, the Slot Output patch cannot be changed here.

64 Chapter 6—Input & Output Patching

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Patching Omni Outs

Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs,

or Surround Monitor Channels can be patched to the Omni Outs. Omni Outs can be

patched to Direct Outs on the Direct Out Destination pages (see page 65).

When an Omni Out is patched to a Direct out (see page 65), and that Direct Out is assigned

on an Input Channel Routing page, the Omni Out patch cannot be changed here.

Output Channel Inserts Ins

AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects processor outputs, or Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs

can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins. The left and right channels of the Matrix

Sends and the Stereo Out can be patched individually.

In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the

[SEL] buttons and the Master Layer.

Output Patching 65

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Patching Direct Outs

Direct Outs can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or 2TR Digital Outputs.

The Direct Out Destination parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two

pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Direct Out Destination page is shown below. The layout of

the other page is the same.

In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the

[SEL] buttons.

Patching the 2TR Digital Outputs

Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs,

or the Control Room signal can be patched to the 2TR Digital Outputs. 2TR Digital Out-

puts can be patched to Direct Outs on the Direct Out Destination pages (see page 65). The

left and right channels of each Digital Output can be patched individually.

When a 2TR Digital Output is patched to a Direct out (see page 65), and that Direct Out is

assigned on an Input Channel Routing page, the 2TR Digital Output patch cannot be

changed here.

66 Chapter 6—Input & Output Patching

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Patching the GEQs

The six 31-band graphic equalizers can be inserted into the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, or the left

or right channels of the Matrix Sends or Stereo Out on the Graphic Equalizer Insert page.

GEQs can also be patched on the Graphic Equalizer Edit page (see page 155) or the Output

Channel Insert page (see page 111).

Naming Input & Output Ports

You can specify Long and Short names for the Input and Output Ports as follows. These

names appear on the Input and Output Patch pages and the channel strip displays when

patching with the Encoders.

See page 258 for a list of the initial Input Port names; page 260 for Output Port names.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Input Port or Output

Port Name page.

2 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the ports.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Long or Short name, and then press

[ENTER].

When the Title Edit window appears, edit the port name, and press OK when you’ve ﬁn-

ished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information.

When the Name Input Auto Copy option is on, the ﬁrst four characters of a newly entered

Long name are automatically copied to the Short name and vice versa.

You can reset all port names back to their initial values by pressing the INITIALIZE button.

Patch Select Window 67

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Patch Select Window

Input and Output patches can be made by using the Patch Select window, shown below,

which appears when the [ENTER] button is pressed while a patch parameter is selected.

Available input and output sources and destinations are displayed in a hierarchical format

in three panes. The existing source or destination is displayed in the upper-right corner of

the window. Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the pane on the left, and use the

Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the top level item. Then move the cursor to

the center pane, and select an item at the next level. Select an item in the right pane, if avail-

able, and then select the YES button and press [ENTER].

Patching with the Encoders

The following patches can be made by using the Encoders: Input Channel Inputs, Insert

Outs, Insert Ins, and Direct Outs.

1 Assign one of the above parameters to an Encoder ASSIGN button, as

explained on page 46.

To set the Input Channel Input or Direct Out patches, you must select an Input Channel

Layer. For Insert Out or Insert In patches, you can select an Input Channel Layer or the Mas-

ter Layer.

2 Press the ASSIGN button to which you assigned the patch parameter.

If no further action is taken within ﬁve seconds, the channel strip displays

return to normal, and you must press the ASSIGN button again.

Depending on the Port ID/Port preference on page 143, the channel strip dis-

plays show the Port IDs or Short Port names for the current patches.

3 Use the Encoders to select ports, and press the Encoder push switches to set

them.

If you don’t activate your selection within ﬁve seconds (i.e., while the Port ID or Short

Channel name ﬂashes), or you operate another Encoder, the selection is cancelled and the

patch is left unchanged.

AD1

68 Chapter 7—Input Channels

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

7 Input Channels

Patching Input Channels

AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects processor outputs, Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs,

Bus Outs, or Aux Sends can be patched to the Input Channel Inputs. See “Patching Input

Channels” on page 61 for more information.

Metering Input Channels

Input Channel signal levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103

for more information.

Reversing the Signal Phase

The signal phase of each Input Channel can be reversed as follows.

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [ ] Button

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] but-

tons to select Input Channels.

2 Use the Phase [ ] button to set the phase.

Phase is reversed when the Phase [ ] button indicator is lit.

Phase Pages

Phase settings can be viewed and set on the Phase pages. If the Auto PHASE/INSERT Dis-

play preference is on, these pages appear automatically when the Phase [ ] button in the

SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT section is pressed. See “Auto PHASE/INSERT

Display” on page 234.

1 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [DISPLAY] button to select the

Phase pages.

The Phase parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The Input

Channel 1–48 Phase page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same.

2 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the NOR/REV buttons,

and the [ENTER] button and INC/DEC buttons to set them.

The NOR/REV buttons can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and

[SEL] buttons.

GLOBAL NOR/REV: These buttons allow you to set the phase of all Input Channels

simultaneously.

Gating Input Channels 69

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Gating Input Channels

Each Input Channel features a noise Gate for automatically shutting out unwanted noise.

Gate settings can be stored in the Gate library, which contains 4 preset memories and 88

user memories. See “Gate Library” on page 144 for more information.

Preset Gates & Types

The following table lists the preset Gates and types. See page 296 for detailed parameter

information.

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS Controls

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] but-

tons to select Input Channels.

2 Use the [GATE ON] button to turn the currently selected Input Channel’s

Gate on or off.

3 Use the [GATE/COMP] button to set the DYNAMICS controls to GATE (GATE

indicator lit), and use the THRESHOLD, RANGE, ATTACK, DECAY, and HOLD

controls to set the Gate.

Gate Edit Page

Gate settings can be viewed and set on the Gate Edit page. If the Auto DYNAMICS Display

preference is on, this page appears automatically when a gate control in the SELECTED

CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is operated.

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] but-

tons to select Input Channels.

2 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the

Gate Library page, and then recall a Gate preset that contains the gate type

that you want.

See “Gate Library” on page 144 for more information.

# Preset Name Type Description

Gate

GATE Gate template

Ducking

DUCKING Ducking template

A. Dr. BD

GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic bass drums

A. Dr. SN

GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic snare drums

GATE ON COMP ON

GATE

COMP

RANGE

RATIO

ATTA CK

DECAY

RELEASETHRESHOLD

THRESHOLD HOLD

DYNAMICS

GATE / COMP

GAIN

DISPLAY

70 Chapter 7—Input Channels

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

3 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the

Gate Edit page.

4 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

KEYIN SOURCE: This determines the trigger source for the currently selected Input

Channel’s Gate. Trigger sources include SELF (the Gate’s own input signal), CHANNEL

(another Input Channel), or AUX (an Aux Send from 1–12). Input Channel trigger sources

are selectable in blocks of 12 channels. For example, if Input Channel #1 is currently

selected, an Input Channel from 1–12 can be selected as the trigger source. However, if

Input Channel #13 is currently selected, an Input Channel from 13–24 can be selected.

STEREO LINK: This allows you to pair Gates for stereo operation even when Input Chan-

nels are not paired. Input Channel Gates are paired either horizontally or vertically depend-

ing on the Pair mode setting for the currently selected Input Channel. See “Pairing

Channels” on page 120 for more information on horizontal and vertical pairing. When

Input Channels are paired, this parameter is turned on automatically and cannot be

changed.

CURVE: This displays the gate curve (i.e., input level vs. output level).

TYPE: This is the gate type used by the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate.

Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its

horizontal or vertical partner. The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being

applied by the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate.

ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate on and off. It works in

unison with the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [GATE ON] button.

PARAMETER: These controls are used to set the Threshold, Range, Attack, Decay, and

Hold parameters.

Attenuating Input Channels

Input Channels signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for

more information.

EQ’ing Input Channels

Each Input Channel features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more

information.

Grouping Input Channel EQs 71

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Input Channel EQs

Input Channel EQs can be grouped, allowing you to control the EQ of several Input Chan-

nels simultaneously. There are four Input Channel EQ groups: a, b, c, and d.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Equalizer Link

page.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers.

The corresponding group row is selected as each Input Channel Layer is selected.

3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select EQ groups a–d.

The selected group is highlighted by a ﬂashing cursor box.

4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Input Channels to and from the

selected group.

The EQ settings of the ﬁrst Input Channel added to the group are applied to all subse-

quently added Input Channels.

When an Input Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.

Input Channel Inserts

Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Input

Channels by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information.

Compressing Input Channels

Each Input Channel features a Compressor. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for

more information.

72 Chapter 7—Input Channels

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Input Channel Compressors

Input Channel Compressors can be grouped, allowing you to control the compression of

several Input Channels simultaneously by operating any Compressor control in the group.

There are four Input Channel Compressor groups: i, j, k, and l.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Comp Link

page.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers.

The corresponding group row is selected as each Input Channel Layer is selected.

3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Comp groups i–l.

The selected group is highlighted by a ﬂashing cursor box.

4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Input Channels to and from the

selected group.

The Compressor settings of the ﬁrst Input Channel added to the group are applied to all

subsequently added Input Channels.

When an Input Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.

If an Input Channel Compressor’s Stereo Link option is on, it’s turned off when that Input

Channel is added to a Comp group.

Delaying Input Channels

Each Input Channel features a Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117

for more information.

Muting Input Channels (ON/OFF)

Input Channels can be muted as follows.

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers.

2 Use the [ON] buttons to mute the Input Channels on the selected Layer.

The [ON] button indicators of channels that are on are lit.

Grouping Input Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) 73

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Input Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)

Input Channel Mutes can be grouped, allowing you to mute several Input Channels simul-

taneously. There are eight Input Channel Mute groups: I, J, K, L, M, N, O, and P.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Channel Mute

Group pages.

The Mute group parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The

Input Channel 1–48 Mute Group page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the

same.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers.

The corresponding Mute Group page and group row is selected as each Input Channel

Layer is selected.

3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Mute groups I–P.

The selected group is highlighted by a ﬂashing cursor box.

4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove mutes to and from the selected

group.

When an Input Channel is added to a Mute group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.

ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups.

Mute groups may contain a combination of channels that are on and channels that are off.

74 Chapter 7—Input Channels

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Setting Input Channel Levels

Input Channel levels can be set as follows.

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers.

2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER] button to select Fader mode.

3 Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels.

Refer to the legend on the left side of the faders when setting Input Channel levels.

Fader positions can be viewed on the Fader View pages. See “Viewing Channel

Fader Settings” on page 125 for more information.

Grouping Input Channel Faders

Input Channel faders can be grouped, allowing you to control the level of several

Input Channels simultaneously. There are eight Input Channel Fader groups: A, B, C, D, E,

F, G, and H.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Channel Fader

Group pages.

The Fader Group parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The

Input Channel 1–48 Fader Group page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the

same.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers.

The corresponding Fader Group page and group row is selected as each Input Channel

Layer is selected.

3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Fader groups A–H.

The selected group is highlighted by a ﬂashing cursor box.

4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove faders to and from the selected

group.

When an Input Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.

ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups.

You can temporarily disable a Fader group in order to make adjustments to individual fad-

ers by operating the desired channel fader while holding down its [SEL] button.

Fader groups are active only in Fader mode (i.e., when the FADER MODE [FADER] button

indicator is on). See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 44 for more information.

Routing Input Channels 75

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Routing Input Channels

Each Input Channel can be routed to the Bus Outs, Stereo Out, or its own Direct Out.

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING Controls

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers,

and use the [SEL] buttons to select the Input Channels.

2 Use the [1–8], [STEREO], and [DIRECT] buttons to route the

currently selected Input Channel.

[1–8]: These buttons route the currently selected Input Channel to the

Bus Outs.

[STEREO]: This button routes the currently selected Input Channel to

the Stereo Out.

DIRECT: This button routes the currently selected Input Channel to its Direct Out.

[FOLLOW PAN]: This determines whether the Input Channel’s Pan control setting is

applied to the Bus Outs. When off, the levels of the signals fed to the odd and even Bus Outs

is the same. When on, the levels of the signals fed to the odd and even Bus Outs follows the

Pan control.

Routing Pages

Input Channel routing settings can be viewed and set on the Routing pages. If the Auto

ROUTING Display preference is on, these pages appear automatically when a button in the

SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING section is pressed. See “Auto ROUTING Display” on

page 234.

1 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button to select the Rout-

ing pages.

The Routing parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided among four pages. The

Input Channel 1–24 Routing page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the

same.

2 Use the cursor buttons and Parameter wheel to select the parameters, and

use the [ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons to set them.

Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL] buttons.

ALL STEREO: This button assigns all Input Channels to the Stereo Out.

ALL BUS: This button assigns all Input Channels to all Bus Outs

ALL CLEAR: This button clears all routing assignments.

ROUTING

STEREOFOLLOW PAN DIRECT

DISPLAY

76 Chapter 7—Input Channels

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

The currently selected Surround mode is displayed in the lower-left corner. When Stereo

mode is selected, the Bus Out routing buttons display numbers from 1 through 8. When a

Surround Pan mode is selected, they display abbreviations of the Surround Channel names,

as shown in the following table. See “Using Surround Pan” on page 77 for more informa-

tion.

Panning Input Channels

Input Channels can be panned between the left and right channels of the Stereo Out.

Using the Encoders

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers.

2 Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button to select the Pan Encoder

mode.

3 Use the Encoders to pan the input channels.

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND Controls

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL]

buttons to select the Input Channels.

2 Use the Pan control to pan the currently selected Input Channel.

The pan display indicates the pan position of the currently selected Input Channel. When

pan is set to center, the center two segments light up. You can use the [L] and [R] buttons

to select horizontal or vertical Input Channel partners.

The [LINK] button, which is enabled only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is

selected, is used to link the Pan control and the Joystick so that either control can be used

for panning. It’s a global setting that applies to all Input Channels. For this to work, the

[EFFECT] button indicator must be off and the [GRAB] and [LINK] button indicators

must be on.

Pan Pages

Pan settings can be viewed and set on the Pan pages. If the Auto PAN/SURROUND Display

preference is on, these pages appear automatically when a control in the SELECTED

CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND section is operated. If both the [LINK] and [GRAB] button

indicators are on, these pages will also appear when the Joystick is operated. See “Auto

PAN/SURROUND Display” on page 234.

1 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select

the Input Channel Pan pages.

Surround Mode

Bus Outs

12345678

Stereo

12345678

3-1

LRCS5678

5.1

LRLsRs C

1. Short for LFE (Low frequency Effects).

LINK GRAB EFFECT

EVEN

PAN/SURROUND

DISPLAY

ODD

Using Surround Pan 77

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

The Pan parameters for the 96 Input Channels are arranged into four pages. The Input

Channel 1–24 Pan page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the same.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the Pan controls, and use the Parameter

wheel and INC/DEC buttons to set them.

Pan parameters can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL]

buttons.

The currently selected Pan control can be set to center by pressing [ENTER].

MODE: There are three Pan modes that determine how horizontally and vertically paired

Input Channels are panned: Individual, Gang, and Inverse Gang. This is a global setting that

applies to all paired Input Channels.

In individual mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate independently.

In Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison.

In Inverse Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison but

move in opposite directions.

Aux Send Pan controls can be linked to Input Channel Pan controls so that operating an

Input Channel Pan control also operates the corresponding Aux Send Pan control, and vice

versa (see page 94). While linked, the Pan mode can be set on the Aux Pan page or the Input

Channel Pan page.

Using Surround Pan

The DM2000 supports 3-1 and 5.1 Surround modes. Surround pan is independent of nor-

mal panning. Normal panning determines how the Input Channel signal is panned

between the left and right channels of the Stereo out. Whereas surround panning deter-

mines how the Input Channel signal is panned among the Surround channels (i.e., the Bus

Outs). The following table shows how Surround channels are handled by the Bus Outs.

See page 134 for information on surround monitoring.

Surround Mode

Bus Outs

123456

3-1

Left Right Center Surround — —

5.1

Left Right

Left

Surround

Right

Surround

Center LFE

78 Chapter 7—Input Channels

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Selecting Surround Pan Modes

The Surround mode can be selected as follows.

1 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select

the Surround Mode page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the surround mode buttons, and press

[ENTER] to activate the selected mode.

The 3-1 Surround mode page is shown on the left; the 5.1 page on the right. The diagram

on each page shows the typical sound image placement and the Surround channel to Bus

Out conﬁguration.

Using the Joystick

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL]

buttons to select the Input Channels.

2 Press the [GRAB] button to grab the current Joystick position, and then use

the Joystick to set the surround pan.

The [GRAB] button, which is enabled only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is

selected, is used to turn on and off Joystick surround pan control for the currently selected

Input Channel. While Grab is on, the Joystick can be used to set the surround pan position

of the currently selected Input Channel. If the Joystick is set to control effects (i.e., the

[EFFECT] button indicator is lit), the [GRAB] button is disabled.

LINK GRAB EFFECT

EVEN

PAN/SURROUND

DISPLAY

ODD

Using Surround Pan 79

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Selected Channel Surround Edit Page

Surround pan settings can be viewed and set on the Input Channel Surround Edit page. If

the Auto PAN/SURROUND Display preference is on, and a Surround Pan mode other than

Stereo is selected, this page appears automatically when a PAN/SURROUND control other

than the [EFFECT] button is operated. See “Auto PAN/SURROUND Display” on page 234.

1 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select

the Surround Edit page.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL]

buttons to select the Input Channels.

The Surround Edit page displays surround pan parameters for the currently selected Input

Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner. The current surround pan position of each

Input Channel is indicated by a small circle. It’s also indicated numerically next to each

Input Channel number, for example, “CH1 (L9, R10).”

The graph of the currently selected Input Channel displays a small square, which indicates

the current position of the Joystick. If the Auto Grab preference is on (see page 235), when

the Joystick is moved to the current surround pan position, the Joystick kicks in as surround

pan control and the small square disappears.

The number of speaker icons and meters around the surround graph depends on the cur-

rently selected Surround mode. The meters indicate Bus Out signal levels.

You can move the surround pan directly to one of the speaker icons, including the box icons

without speakers, by selecting its icon, and then pressing [ENTER].

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

LFE: This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel (5.1 mode only).

DIV (divergence): This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and

Center channels. When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels

(i.e., Phantom Center). When set to 50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right,

and Center channels. When set to 100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center).

Patterns: These buttons are used to select the seven patterns that determine how the sur-

round pan moves by the Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons.

FAST: This sets the speed of surround pan control when using the Parameter wheel and

INC/DEC buttons.

WIDTH: This sets the left-to-right width of the selected pattern.

DEPTH: This sets the front-to-rear depth of the selected pattern.

WIDTH OFFSET: This can be used to offset the left-to-right direction of the selected pat-

tern.

80 Chapter 7—Input Channels

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

DEPTH OFFSET: This can be used to offset the front-to-rear direction of the selected pat-

tern.

ST LINK: This can be used to link the surround pan parameters of the currently selected

Input Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner regardless of whether they are paired.

PATTERN: When Input Channels are linked, the seven patterns selectable here determine

how the linked surround pan moves by the Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons.

Input Channel Surround Pages

Surround pan positions can be viewed and set on the Surround pages.

1 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select

the Input Channel Surround pages.

The Surround parameters for the 96 Input Channels are arranged into four pages. The

Input Channel 1–24 Surround page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is

the same.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the Surround parameters, and use the

Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons to set them.

Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL]

buttons. The graph for the currently selected Input Channel displays a small square, which

indicates the current position of the Joystick.

L/R: These parameters are used to set the left/right surround position. While selected, they

can quickly be set to center by pressing [ENTER].

F/R: These parameters are used to set the front/rear surround position. While selected, they

can quickly be set to center by pressing [ENTER].

You can jump to the more detailed Surround Edit page by pressing [ENTER] while an Input

Channel’s surround graph is selected.

Sending Input Channels to Aux Sends

Input Channel signals can be sent to Aux Sends 1–12. See “Setting Aux Send Levels” on

page 89, “Muting Aux Sends (ON/OFF)” on page 90, and “Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Aux

Sends” on page 88.

Soloing Input Channels 81

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Soloing Input Channels

Input Channels can be soloed. See page 118 for more information.

Direct Outs

Each Input Channel features a Direct Out, which can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni

Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. Direct Out signals can be sourced pre-EQ, pre-fader, or

post-fader. See “Patching Direct Outs” on page 65 and “Routing Input Channels” on

page 75 for more information.

Pairing Input Channels

Horizontal or vertical Input Channel partners can be paired for stereo operation. See “Pair-

ing Channels” on page 120 for more information.

Using MS Decoding

When Input Channels are paired, MS Decoding can be used to decode signals from micro-

phones arranged as MS pairs. MS Decoding is set on the Input Channel Pair pages. See

“Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information.

Viewing Input Channel Settings

Parameter and fader settings for each Input Channel can be viewed on the View pages. See

“Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124 and “Viewing Channel Fader Settings”

on page 125 for more information.

Copying Input Channel Settings

Input Channel settings can be copied to other Input Channels by using the Channel Copy

function. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information.

Naming Input Channels

Input Channels can be named for easy identiﬁcation. See “Naming Channels” on page 130

for more information.

82 Chapter 8—Stereo Out

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

8 Stereo Out

Stereo Out Connectors

The Stereo Out is output by the STEREO OUT +4 dB (BAL) balanced

XLR-3-32-type connectors and the STEREO OUT –10 dBV (UNBAL)

unbalanced phono connectors.

Patching the Stereo Out to Outputs

The left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni

Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more information.

Routing Input Channels to the Stereo Out

Input Channels can be routed and panned to the Stereo Out. See “Routing Input Channels”

on page 75 for more information.

Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out

Bus Out signals can be sent to the Stereo Out. See “Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out” on

page 87 for more information.

Metering the Stereo Out

Stereo Out signal levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103 for

more information.

Monitoring the Stereo Out

The Stereo Out can be monitored via the LARGE and SMALL CONTROL ROOM MON-

ITOR OUTs and the PHONES (see page 132) or the STUDIO MONITOR OUT (see

page 133).

Attenuating the Stereo Out

Stereo Out signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for

more information.

EQ’ing the Stereo Out

The Stereo Out features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more infor-

mation.

Grouping Master EQs

The Stereo Out EQ can be grouped with the EQs of other Output Channels. See “Grouping

Output Channel EQs” on page 110 for more information.

Stereo Out Inserts

Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Stereo Out

by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information.

Compressing the Stereo Out 83

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Compressing the Stereo Out

Signal dynamics can be controlled by using the Stereo Out Compressor. See “Compressing

Channels” on page 113 for more information.

Grouping Master Compressors

The Stereo Out Compressor can be grouped with the Compressors of other Output Chan-

nels. See “Grouping Output Channel Compressors” on page 116 for more information.

Muting the Stereo Out (ON/OFF)

The Stereo Out can be muted by using the STEREO [ON] button, which is used

exclusively for this task and is not affected by the Layers. Its indicator lights up

when the Stereo Out is on.

Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF)

The Stereo Out Mute can be grouped with the Mutes of other Output Channels. See

“Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)” on page 123 for more information.

Setting the Stereo Out Level

The Stereo Out level is set by using the STEREO fader, which is used exclu-

sively for this task and is not affected by the Layers or Fader modes.

Grouping Master Faders

The Stereo Out fader can be grouped with the faders of other Output Channels. See

“Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more information.

Sending the Stereo Out to the Matrix Sends

The left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be sent individually to the Matrix Sends.

See “Matrix Sends” on page 97 for more information.

STEREO

84 Chapter 8—Stereo Out

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Balancing the Stereo Out

The left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be balanced as follows.

1 Press the STEREO [SEL] button to select the Stereo Out.

2 Use the Pan control to set the balance.

The pan display indicates the balance. When the balance is set to center, the center two seg-

ments light up. Balance can be set to center by pressing [ENTER].

The Stereo Out balance can also be set on the Stereo Fader View page. See “Viewing Channel

Fader Settings” on page 125 for more information.

Delaying the Stereo Out

The left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be delayed independently by using the Ste-

reo Out Delay. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information.

Inserting GEQs

Internal GEQs can be inserted into the left and right channels of the Stereo Out. See “About

the GEQs” on page 155 for more information.

Viewing Stereo Out Settings

Parameter and fader settings for the Stereo Out can be viewed and set on the View pages.

See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124 and “Viewing Channel Fader Set-

tings” on page 125 for more information.

Copying Stereo Out Settings

Settings can be copied between the left and right channels of the Stereo Out by using the

Channel Copy function. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more informa-

tion.

Naming the Stereo Out

The Stereo Out can be named for easy identiﬁcation. See “Naming Channels” on page 130

for more information.

EVEN

PAN/SURROUND

DISPLAY

ODD

Bus Outs 85

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

9 Bus Outs

Patching Bus Outs to Outputs

Bus Outs can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. See

“Output Patching” on page 63 for more information.

Routing Input Channels to Bus Outs

Input Channels can be routed to the Bus Outs. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75

for more information.

Metering Bus Outs

Bus Out signal levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103 for

more information.

Monitoring Bus Outs

Bus Outs can be assigned to the CONTROL ROOM [ASSIGN 1] or [ASSIGN 2] button for

monitoring. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information.

Attenuating Bus Outs

Bus Out signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for more

information.

EQ’ing Bus Outs

Each Bus Out features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more infor-

mation.

Grouping Master EQs

Bus Out EQs can be grouped with the EQs of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Out-

put Channel EQs” on page 110 for more information.

Bus Out Inserts

Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Bus Outs

by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information.

Compressing Bus Outs

Signal dynamics can be controlled by using the Bus Out Compressors. See “Compressing

Channels” on page 113 for more information.

Grouping Master Compressors

Bus Out Compressors can be grouped with the Compressors of other Output Channels. See

“Grouping Output Channel Compressors” on page 116 for more information.

86 Chapter 9—Bus Outs

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Muting Bus Outs (ON/OFF)

Bus Outs can be muted by using the channel strip [ON] buttons.

1 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.

2 Use channel strip [ON] buttons 1–8 to mute the Bus Outs.

The [ON] button indicators of Bus Outs that are on light up.

Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF)

Bus Out Mutes can be grouped with the Mutes of other Output Channels. See “Grouping

Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)” on page 123 for more information.

Setting Bus Out Levels

Bus Out levels can be set as follows.

1 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.

2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER] button to select Fader mode.

3 Use faders 1–8 to set the Bus Out levels.

Refer to the legend on the right side of the faders when setting Bus Out levels.

Grouping Master Faders

Bus Out faders can be grouped with the faders of other Output Channels. See “Grouping

Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more information.

Sending Bus Outs to Matrix Sends

Bus Out signals can be sent to the Matrix Sends. See “Matrix Sends” on page 97 for more

information.

Delaying Bus Outs

Each Bus Out features a Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for

more information.

Inserting GEQs

Internal GEQs can be inserted into the Bus Outs. See “About the GEQs” on page 155 for

more information.

Soloing Bus Outs

Bus Outs can be soloed. See page 118 for more information.

Pairing Bus Outs

Bus Outs can be paired for stereo operation. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more

information.

Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out 87

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out

Bus Outs can be routed to the Stereo Out buses as follows. Bus Out to Stereo Out settings

can be stored in the Bus to Stereo library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user

memories. See “Bus to Stereo Library” on page 143 for more information.

1 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button to locate the Bus

to Stereo page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

PAN: These controls are used to pan the Bus Out signals between the left and right Stereo

Out buses. The currently selected Pan control can be set to center by pressing [ENTER].

ON/OFF: These buttons are used to turn on and off the Bus Out to Stereo Out routing.

Faders: These faders are used to set the Bus Out to Stereo Out levels. Fader knobs appear

highlighted when faders are set to 0.0 dB.

Viewing Bus Out Settings

Parameter and fader settings for each Bus Out can be viewed and set on the View pages. See

“Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124 and “Viewing Channel Fader Settings”

on page 125 for more information.

Copying Bus Out Settings

Bus Out settings can be copied to other Bus Outs by using the Channel Copy function. See

“Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information.

Naming Bus Outs

Bus Outs can be named for easy identiﬁcation. See “Naming Channels” on page 130 for

more information.

88 Chapter 10—Aux Sends

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

10 Aux Sends

Patching Aux Send Masters to Outputs

Aux Send Masters can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or the 2TR Digital Out-

puts. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more information.

Setting the Aux Send Mode

Aux Sends have two operating modes—Variable and Fixed—which can be set individually

for each of the 12 Aux Sends. In Variable mode, Aux Send levels are variable and the signal

source point can be either pre-fader or post-fader. In Fixed mode, Aux Send levels are ﬁxed

at nominal and the signal source point is ﬁxed to post-fader.

1 Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Send pages.

The Aux Send parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided among four pages. The

Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page is shown below: Variable mode on the left, Fixed mode

on the right. The layout of the other three pages is the same.

On the Fixed mode page, “GLOBAL POST” is displayed in the lower-right corner, indicat-

ing that the Aux Send Pre/Post parameter is ﬁxed at Post.

2 Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–12.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the FIXED and VARIABLE buttons, and press

[ENTER] to select a mode.

When the Aux mode is changed, the parameters of the selected Aux Send are set as follows.

Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Aux Sends

Aux Sends can be conﬁgured individually as either pre-fader or post-fader on the Aux Send

pages (see page 90) or the Aux View pages (see page 93).

Parameters Change from Variable to Fixed Change from Fixed to Variable

Level

All set to nominal All set to –∞

Pre/Post

All set to Post

On/Off

All turned off All turned on

Setting Aux Send Levels 89

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Setting Aux Send Levels

Aux Send levels can be set by using the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND

LEVEL controls, the faders, or the Encoders.

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL Controls

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL]

buttons to select Input Channels.

2 Use the [BANK] button to select Aux 1–4, Aux 5–8, or Aux 9–12.

3 Use the LEVEL controls to set the Aux Send levels.

Using the Faders

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers.

2 Press the FADER MODE [AUX/MTRX] button to select the Aux/Mtrx

Fader mode.

3 Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–12.

4 Use the faders to set the Aux Send levels.

Refer to the legend on the left side of the faders when setting Aux Send levels.

Using the Encoders

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers.

2 Press the ENCODER MODE [AUX/MTRX] button to select the Aux/Mtrx

Encoder mode.

3 Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–12.

4 Use the Encoders to set the Aux Send levels.

AUX/MATRIX SEND

LEVEL

AUX 1 /MATRIX 1

AUX 5

AUX 9

AUX 2 /MATRIX 2

AUX 6

AUX 10

AUX 3 /MATRIX 3

AUX 7

AUX 11

AUX 4 /MATRIX 4

AUX 8

AUX 12

BANK

DISPLAY

90 Chapter 10—Aux Sends

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Muting Aux Sends (ON/OFF)

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL]

buttons to select the Input Channels.

2 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND [BANK] button to select

Aux 1–4, Aux 5–8, or Aux 9–12.

3 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND [ON] buttons to turn the

Aux Sends of the selected Input Channel on or off.

Aux Send Pages

You can view and set the Aux Send parameters of all Input Channels on the Aux Send pages.

Operation of the Aux Send pages in Variable and Fixed mode is explained separately.

Variable Mode

See page 88 for information on how to select Variable Aux mode.

1 Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Send pages.

The Aux Send parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided among four pages. The

Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page in Variable mode is shown below. The layout of the

other three pages is the same.

2 Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–12.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Input Channel Aux Send controls.

Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL]

buttons.

4 To turn Aux Sends on and off, select the rotary controls, and press [ENTER].

The rotary controls of Aux Sends that are turned off, appear gray, and “OFF” appears in

place of the level value. Aux Send levels can still be changed even when Aux Sends are off.

AUX/MATRIX SEND

LEVEL

AUX 1 /MATRIX 1

AUX 5

AUX 9

AUX 2 /MATRIX 2

AUX 6

AUX 10

AUX 3 /MATRIX 3

AUX 7

AUX 11

AUX 4 /MATRIX 4

AUX 8

AUX 12

BANK

DISPLAY

Aux Send Pages 91

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

5 To set Aux Send levels, select the rotary controls, and use the Parameter

wheel or INC/DEC buttons.

6 To set the Pre/Post parameters, select the PRE/POST buttons, and use the

[ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons.

7 To set all Input Channels for the selected Aux Send to pre-fader or post-fader

simultaneously, select the GLOBAL PRE or POST button, and then press

[ENTER].

The PRE or POST button appears highlighted, and remains highlighted until the Pre/Post

setting of one or more channels is changed, so you can quickly see if all Input Channels are

set to either pre-fader or post-fader.

Fixed Mode

See page 88 for information on how to select Fixed Aux mode.

1 Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Send pages.

The Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page in Fixed mode is shown below. The layout of the

other three Aux Send pages in Fixed mode is the same.

2 Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–12.

3 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the Aux Send buttons.

Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL]

buttons.

4 Use the [ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons to turn Aux Sends on and off.

If the Fader mode is set to Aux/Mtrx, the faders provide a visual indication of the On/Off

status of each Input Channel for the currently selected Aux Send. For Aux Sends that are on,

faders move to the nominal position. Aux Sends that are off, they move to the –∞ position.

On/Off settings cannot be changed by using the faders.

92 Chapter 10—Aux Sends

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Viewing Aux Send Settings

You can view and set settings of all Aux Sends on the Aux View pages. Level and Pre/Post

parameters are displayed separately. If the Auto AUX/MATRIX Display preference is on, and

an Input Channel is currently selected, these pages appear automatically when a

SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND control is operated. See “Auto

AUX/MATRIX Display” on page 234 for more information.

Level Parameters

In Level mode, the Aux View pages display Aux Send Level and On/Off parameters. Fixed

mode Aux Sends can be turned on and off only.

1 Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux View pages.

2 Select the DISPLAY LEVEL button, and press [ENTER].

The Aux View parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided among four pages. The

Input Channel 1–24 Aux View page is shown below in Level mode. The layout of the other

three pages is the same.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Input Channel Aux Sends.

Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL]

buttons. Aux Sends can also be selected by using the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons.

4 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set the Aux Send levels.

5 Use the [ENTER] button to turn on and off the selected Aux Send.

The various Aux View page indicators are as follows:

Send level set to –∞, or Fixed mode Aux Send set to off.

Send level bar.

Send set to off.

Send level set to nominal.

Send off, level set to nominal.

Fixed mode Aux Send set to on.

In Va r iable Aux mode, the Level and On/Off parameter values for the selected Aux Send are

displayed in the lower-right corner of the page, for example, “LEVEL: –2.0 dB ON/OFF:

ON.”

In Fixed Aux mode, the On/Off parameter values for the selected Aux Send are displayed in

the lower-right corner of the page, for example, “LEVEL: FIXED ON/OFF: ON.”

Viewing Aux Send Settings 93

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Pre/Post Parameters

In Pre/Post mode, the Aux View pages display Aux Send Pre/Post parameters. Fixed mode

Aux Sends can be turned on and off only.

1 Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux View pages.

2 Select the DISPLAY PRE/POST button, and press [ENTER].

The Input Channel 1–24 Aux View page is shown below in Pre/Post mode. The layout of the

other three Aux View pages in Pre/Post mode is the same.

3 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the Input Channel Aux

Sends.

Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL]

buttons. Aux Sends can also be selected by using the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons.

4 Use the [ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons to set the selected Aux Send to

either pre-fader or post-fader.

The various Aux View page indicators are as follows:

Aux Send conﬁgured pre-fader.

Aux Send conﬁgured post-fader.

Fixed mode Aux Send.

94 Chapter 10—Aux Sends

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Panning Aux Sends

When Aux Sends are paired, Aux Sends can be panned between the paired Aux buses. See

“Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information. If the selected Aux Send is not

paired, the message “AUXx–x are not paired” appears.

If the currently selected pair of Aux Send Masters is set to Follow Surround on the Output

Pair page, Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan settings and cannot be set

here, in which case the message “Now AUXx-x PAN Following Surround” appears. See

“Pairing Aux Sends” on page 96 for more information.

1 Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Pan pages.

The Aux Pan parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided among four pages. The

Input Channel 1–24 Aux Pan page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the

same.

2 Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select the Aux Sends 1–12.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select Input Channel Aux Send pan controls, and

use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them.

Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL]

buttons.

The currently selected Pan control can be set to center by pressing [ENTER].

MODE: There are three Pan modes that determine how paired Aux Sends are panned:

Individual, Gang, and Inverse Gang. This is a global setting that applies to all paired Aux

Send Masters.

In individual mode, Aux Send pan controls operate independently.

In Gang mode, the Aux Send pan controls of paired Input Channels operate in

unison.

In Inverse Gang mode, the Aux Send pan controls of paired Input Channels

operate in unison but move in opposite directions.

INPUT PAN LINK: This is used to link Aux Send Pan controls to Input Channel Pan con-

trols so that operating an Input Channel Pan control also operates the corresponding Aux

Send Pan control, and vice versa. This can be set individually for each pair of Aux Send Mas-

ters. When a link is established, the pan positions and Pan mode of the Input Channels are

copied to the Aux Sends. While linked, the Pan mode can be set from either the Aux Pan

page or the Input Channel Pan page (see page 76).

Metering Aux Send Masters 95

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Metering Aux Send Masters

Aux Send Master levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103 for

more information.

Monitoring Aux Send Masters

Aux Send Masters can be assigned to the CONTROL ROOM [ASSIGN 1] or [ASSIGN 2]

button for monitoring. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more informa-

tion. Aux 11 and Aux 12 can be monitored via the STUDIO MONITOR OUT (see

page 133).

Attenuating Aux Send Masters

Aux Send Master signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106

for more information.

EQ’ing Aux Send Masters

Each Aux Send Master features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for

more information.

Grouping Master EQs

Aux Send Master EQs can be grouped with the EQs of other Output Channels. See “Group-

ing Output Channel EQs” on page 110 for more information.

Aux Send Master Inserts

Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Aux Send

Masters by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information.

Compressing Aux Send Masters

Signal dynamics can be controlled by using the Aux Send Master Compressors. See “Com-

pressing Channels” on page 113 for more information.

Grouping Master Compressors

Aux Send Master Compressors can be grouped with the Compressors of other Output

Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Compressors” on page 116 for more informa-

tion.

Muting Aux Send Masters (ON/OFF)

Aux Send Masters can be muted as follows.

1 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.

2 Use channel strip [ON] buttons 9–20 to mute the Aux Send Masters.

The [ON] button indicators of Aux Send Masters that are on light up.

Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF)

Aux Send Master Mutes can be grouped with the Mutes of other Output Channels. See

“Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)” on page 123 for more information.

96 Chapter 10—Aux Sends

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Settings Aux Send Master Levels

Aux Send Master levels can be set as follows.

1 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.

2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER] button to select the Fader mode.

3 Use faders 9–20 to set the Aux Send Master levels.

Refer to the legend on the right side of the faders when setting Aux Send Master

levels.

Grouping Master Faders

Aux Send Master faders can be grouped with the faders of other Output Channels.

See “Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more information.

Sending Aux Sends to Matrix Sends

Aux Send Master signals can be sent to the Matrix Sends. See “Matrix Sends” on page 97 for

more information.

Delaying Aux Send Masters

Each Aux Send Master features a Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page

117 for more information.

Inserting GEQs

Internal GEQs can be inserted into the Aux Send Masters. See “About the GEQs” on page

155 for more information.

Soloing Aux Sends

Aux Sends can be soloed. See page 118 for more information.

Pairing Aux Sends

Aux Sends can be paired for stereo operation. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more

information.

Viewing Aux Send Master Settings

Parameter and fader settings for each Aux Send Master can be viewed and set on the View

pages. See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124 and “Viewing Channel Fader

Settings” on page 125 for more information.

Copying Aux Send Master Settings

Aux Send Master settings can be copied to other Aux Sends by using the Channel Copy

function. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information.

Naming Aux Send Masters

Aux Send Masters can be named for easy identiﬁcation. See “Naming Channels” on page

130 for more information.

Matrix Sends 97

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

11 Matrix Sends

Patching Matrix Send Masters to Outputs

The left and right channels of the Matrix Send Masters can be patched to the Slot Outputs,

Omni Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more infor-

mation.

Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Matrix Sends

Matrix Sends can be conﬁgured globally as either pre-fader or post-fader on the Matrix

View page. See “Viewing Matrix Send Settings” on page 99 for more information.

Setting Matrix Send Levels

Matrix Send levels can be set by using the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND

LEVEL controls, the faders, or the Encoders.

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL Controls

1 Use the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.

2 Use [SEL] buttons 1–20 to select the Bus Outs and Aux Sends, and use the

STEREO [SEL] button to select the Stereo Out.

The Matrix Sends for the left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be set individually.

Use the STEREO [SEL] button to select the left and right channels.

3 Use the LEVEL controls to set the Matrix Send levels.

Using the Faders

Stereo Out Matrix Sends cannot be set using the faders.

1 Use the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.

2 Press the FADER MODE [AUX/MTRX] button to select the Aux/Mtrx

Fader mode.

3 Use the MATRIX SELECT [1–4] buttons to select Matrix Sends 1–4.

4 Use faders 1–20 to set the Matrix Send levels.

Faders 21–24 are inactive because Matrix Send Masters do not feature Matrix Send

controls.

Refer to the legend on the left side of the faders when setting Matrix Send levels.

Using the Encoders

Stereo Out Matrix Sends cannot be set using the Encoders.

1 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.

2 Press the ENCODER MODE [AUX/MTRX] button to select the Aux/Mtrx

Encoder mode.

AUX/MATRIX SEND

LEVEL

AUX 1 /MATRIX 1

AUX 5

AUX 9

AUX 2 /MATRIX 2

AUX 6

AUX 10

AUX 3 /MATRIX 3

AUX 7

AUX 11

AUX 4 /MATRIX 4

AUX 8

AUX 12

BANK

DISPLAY

98 Chapter 11—Matrix Sends

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

3 Use the MATRIX SELECT [1–4] buttons to select Matrix Sends 1–4.

4 Use Encoders 1–20 to set the Matrix Send levels.

Encoders 21–24 are inactive because Matrix Send Masters do not feature Matrix

Send controls.

Muting Matrix Sends (ON/OFF)

1 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.

2 Use [SEL] buttons 1–20 to select the Bus Outs and Aux Sends, and use the

STEREO [SEL] button to select the Stereo Out.

The Matrix Sends for the left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be muted individu-

ally. Use the STEREO [SEL] button to select the left and right channels.

3 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND [ON] buttons to turn the

Matrix Sends on the selected Output Channel on and off.

Matrix Send Pages

Matrix Send parameters for the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo Out can be viewed and

set on the Matrix Send page.

1 Use the MATRIX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Matrix Send page.

2 Use the Matrix SELECT [1–4] buttons to select Matrix Sends 1–4.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Output Channel Matrix Send controls.

If the Master Layer is selected, [SEL] buttons 1–20 can also be used to select Output Chan-

nels.

4 To turn Matrix Sends on and off, select the rotary controls, and press

[ENTER].

The rotary controls of Matrix Sends that are turned off, appear gray, and “OFF” appears in

place of the level value. Matrix Send levels can still be changed even when Matrix Sends are

off.

5 To set Matrix Send levels, select the rotary controls, and use the Parameter

wheel or INC/DEC buttons.

AUX/MATRIX SEND

LEVEL

AUX 1 /MATRIX 1

AUX 5

AUX 9

AUX 2 /MATRIX 2

AUX 6

AUX 10

AUX 3 /MATRIX 3

AUX 7

AUX 11

AUX 4 /MATRIX 4

AUX 8

AUX 12

BANK

DISPLAY

Panning Matrix Sends 99

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Panning Matrix Sends

Matrix Sends can be panned on the Matrix Send Pan page. The Matrix Sends for the left and

right channels of the Stereo Out can be panned individually.

1 Use the MATRIX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Matrix Send Pan

page.

2 Use the MATRIX SELECT [1–4] buttons to select Matrix Sends 1–4.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select Output Channel Matrix Send pan controls,

and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them.

If the Master Layer is currently selected, [SEL] buttons 1–20 can also be used to select Out-

put Channels.

The currently selected Pan control can quickly be set to center by pressing [ENTER].

Viewing Matrix Send Settings

You can view and set the Matrix Send Level and On/Off parameters of all Matrix Sends on

the Matrix View page. If the Auto AUX/MATRIX Display preference is on, and a Bus Out,

Aux Send, or the Stereo Out is currently selected, this page appears automatically when a

SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND control is operated. See “Auto

AUX/MATRIX Display” on page 234 for more information.

1 Use the MATRIX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Matrix Send View

page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the PRE FADER and POST FADER buttons,

and press [ENTER] to set all Matrix Sends to either pre-fader or post-fader.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Output Channel Matrix Sends.

100 Chapter 11—Matrix Sends

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

If the Master Layer is currently selected, [SEL] buttons 1–20 can also be used to select Out-

put Channels. Matrix Sends can also be selected by using the MATRIX SELECT [1–4] but-

tons.

4 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set the levels of the Matrix

Sends.

5 Use the [ENTER] button to turn on and off the selected Matrix Send.

The various Matrix View page indicators are as follows:

Send level set to –∞.

Send level bar.

Send set to off.

Send level set to nominal.

Send off, level set to nominal.

The level in dB and the on/off values of the currently selected Matrix Send are displayed in

the lower-right corner of the page.

Metering Matrix Send Masters

Matrix Send Master levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103

for more information.

Monitoring Matrix Send Masters

Matrix Send Masters can be assigned to the CONTROL ROOM [ASSIGN 1] or [ASSIGN 2]

button for monitoring. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more informa-

tion.

Attenuating Matrix Send Masters

Matrix Send Master signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page

106 for more information.

EQ’ing Matrix Send Masters

Each Matrix Send Master features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for

more information.

Grouping Master EQs

Matrix Send Master EQs can be grouped with the EQs of other Output Channels. See

“Grouping Output Channel EQs” on page 110 for more information.

Matrix Send Master Inserts

Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Matrix

Send Masters by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information.

Compressing Matrix Send Masters

Signal dynamics can be controlled by using the Matrix Send Master Compressors. See

“Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information.

Grouping Master Compressors 101

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Master Compressors

Matrix Send Master Compressors can be grouped with the Compressors of other Output

Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Compressors” on page 116 for more informa-

tion.

Muting Matrix Send Masters (ON/OFF)

Matrix Send Masters can be muted as follows.

1 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.

2 Use channel strip [ON] buttons 21–24 to mute the Matrix Sends Masters.

The [ON] button indicators of Matrix Send Masters that are on light up.

Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF)

Matrix Send Master Mutes can be grouped with the Mutes of other Output Channels. See

“Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)” on page 123 for more information.

Setting Matrix Send Master Levels

Matrix Send Master levels can be set as follows.

1 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer.

2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER] button to select the Fader mode.

3 Use faders 21–24 to set the Matrix Send Master levels.

Refer to the legend on the right side of the faders when setting Matrix Send Master

levels.

Grouping Master Faders

Matrix Send Master faders can be grouped with the faders of other Output Channels. See

“Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more information.

Balancing Matrix Send Masters

The left and right channels of the Matrix Send Masters can be balanced as follows.

1 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer, and use [SEL]

buttons 21–24 to select the Matrix Send Masters.

2 Use the Pan control to set the balance of the currently selected Matrix Send

Master.

The pan display indicates the balance. When the balance is set to center, the center two seg-

ments light up. Balance can be set to center by pressing [ENTER].

Matrix Send Master balance can also be set on the Matrix Fader View pages. See “Viewing

Channel Fader Settings” on page 125 for more information.

EVEN

PAN/SURROUND

DISPLAY

ODD

102 Chapter 11—Matrix Sends

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Delaying Matrix Send Masters

Each Matrix Send Master features a Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page

117 for more information.

Soloing Matrix Sends

Matrix Sends can be soloed. See page 118 for more information.

Inserting GEQs

Internal GEQs can be inserted into the left and right channels of the Matrix Send Masters.

See “About the GEQs” on page 155 for more information.

Viewing Matrix Send Master Settings

Parameter and fader settings for each Matrix Send Master can be viewed and set on the View

pages. See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124 and “Viewing Channel Fader

Settings” on page 125 for more information.

Copying Matrix Send Master Settings

Matrix Send Master settings can be copied to other Matrix Sends by using the Channel

Copy function. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information.

Naming Matrix Send Masters

Matrix Send Masters can be named for easy identiﬁcation. See “Naming Channels” on page

130 for more information.

Common Channel Functions 103

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

12 Common Channel Functions

Metering

Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, and the Effects proces-

sors can be metered on the various Meter pages, which are located by using the DISPLAY

ACCESS [METER] button.

Input and Output Channel Meter pages also display fader positions numerically. The Peak

Hold function, which applies to all level meters, can be turned on or off on any of the Meter

pages.

Setting the Metering Position

Input and Output Channels can be metered pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. This setting,

which can be set independently for the Input and Output Channels, can be set on the

Metering Position page shown below, or any of the Input and Output Channel Meter pages.

PRE EQ: Channels are metered pre-EQ.

PRE FADER: Channels are metered pre-fader.

POST FADER: Channels are metered post-fader.

Metering Input Channels

There are two types of Input Channel Meter page: 24-channel and 48-channel.

There are four 24-channel Meter pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Meter page is shown

below. The layout of the other three pages is the same. These pages feature two level meters

for each Input Channel. When Input Channels are vertically paired, both meters operate.

When Input Channels are horizontally paired, only the left-hand meter operates.

104 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

There are two 48-channel Meter pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Meter page is shown below.

The layout of the other page is the same.

Metering Output Channels

Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out can all be metered on the Master

Meter page.

Metering Effects

There are two Effects Input/Output Meter pages: Effects 1–8 and Effects 1–2.

The Effects 1–8 Input/Output Meter page features two input and output level meters for

each of the internal effects processors.

Metering 105

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

The Effects 1–2 Input/Output Meter page features individual level meters for the eight

inputs and outputs of internal effects processors #1 and #2.

Metering the Stereo out

The Stereo Out can be metered on the Stereo Meter page. Peak signal levels for the left and

right channels are displayed numerically.

106 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Attenuating Signals

Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature pre-EQ

attenuation, which is useful for attenuating “hot” signals before EQ’ing.

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER ATT Control

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

2 Use the ATT control to set the amount of attenuation.

Attenuator Pages

Attenuator settings can be viewed and set on the Attenuator pages.

1 Use the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button to select the Attenuator pages.

The Attenuator parameters for the 96 Input Channels are arranged into four pages. The

Input Channel 1–24 Attenuator/Shifter page is shown below. The layout of the other three

pages is the same.

The attenuator parameters for the Output Channels appear on the Output Attenuator page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the channels, and use the Parameter wheel

or INC/DEC buttons to set the amount of attenuation.

Input and Output Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER and [SEL] buttons.

You can copy the currently selected Input or Output Channel attenuation setting to all

Input or Output Channels respectively by double-clicking the [ENTER] button.

For Input Channels, you can also set the amount of attenuation in bits from +2 bits to –24

bits. Use the cursor buttons to select the bit shift parameters, and use the Parameter wheel

or INC/DEC buttons to set them. The rotary attenuators and the bit shift parameters can

be set independently.

AT T.

Using EQ 107

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Using EQ

Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature 4-band

parametric EQ. The LOW-MID and HIGH-MID bands are peaking type. The LOW and

HIGH bands can be set to shelving, peaking, or HPF and LPF respectively. EQ settings can

be stored in the EQ library, which contains 40 preset memories and 160 user memories. See

“EQ Library” on page 146 for more information.

Preset EQs

The following table lists the preset EQs. See page 292 for detailed parameter information.

# Preset Name Description

Bass Drum 1

Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the attack created by the beater.

Bass Drum 2

Creates a peak around 80 Hz, producing a tight, stiff sound.

Snare Drum 1

Emphasizes “snappy” and rimshot sounds.

Snare Drum 2

Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock snare drum sound.

Tom-tom 1

Emphasizes the attack of tom-toms, and creates a long, “leathery” decay.

Cymbal

Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals, extending the “sparkling” decay.

High Hat

Use on a tight high-hat, emphasizing the mid to high range.

Percussion

Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high-range of instruments, such as

shakers, cabasas, and congas.

E. Bass 1

Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies.

E. Bass 2

Unlike preset 9, this preset emphasizes the low range of an electric bass.

Syn. Bass 1

Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range.

Syn. Bass 2

Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass.

Piano 1

Makes pianos sound brighter.

Piano 2

Used in conjunction with a compressor, this preset emphasizes the attack and

low range of pianos.

E. G. Clean

Use for line-level recording of an electric or semi-acoustic guitar to get a slightly

harder sound.

E. G. Crunch 1

Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound.

E. G. Crunch 2

A variation on preset 16.

E. G. Dist. 1

Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer.

E. G. Dist. 2

A variation on preset 18.

A. G. Stroke 1

Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars.

A. G. Stroke 2

A variation on preset 20. You can also use it with gutsy guitar sounds.

A. G. Arpeg. 1

Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars.

A. G. Arpeg. 2

A variation on preset 22.

Brass Sec.

Use with trumpets, trombones, or saxes. When used with a single instrument,

try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID frequency.

Male Vocal 1

An EQ template for male vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID parame-

ters according to the voice quality.

Male Vocal 2

A variation on preset 25.

Female Vo. 1

An EQ template for female vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID param-

eters according to the voice quality.

Female Vo. 2

A variation on preset 27.

Chorus&Harmo

An EQ template for brightening choruses.

Total EQ 1

Use on a stereo mix during mixdown. Sounds even better when used with a

compressor.

Total EQ 2

A variation on preset 30.

Total EQ 3

A variation on preset 30. Can also be used with paired Input or Output Chan-

nels.

108 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER Controls

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

2 Use the [EQ ON] button to turn the EQ on or off.

3 Use the GAIN controls to set the gain of each band.

When a GAIN control is adjusted, the gain in dB is displayed on the corresponding EQ dis-

play. If the GAIN control is not adjusted for two seconds, the EQ display returns to display-

ing the frequency.

4 To set the frequency, press a FREQUENCY/Q control so that the FREQUENCY

indicator lights up, and use the FREQUENCY/Q control to set the frequency.

The frequency is displayed by the corresponding EQ display.

5 To set the Q, press a FREQUENCY/Q control so that the Q indicator lights

up, and use the FREQUENCY/Q control to set the Q.

The Q value is displayed by the corresponding EQ display. If the Q control is not adjusted

for two seconds, the EQ display returns to displaying the frequency.

To r eset an individual gain control, hold down the corresponding FREQUENCY/Q control.

To reset all gain controls, press the LOW and HIGH FREQUENCY/Q controls.

The EQ parameter ranges are as follows.

The initial EQ parameter settings are as follows.

Bass Drum 3

A variation on preset 1, with low and mid range reduced.

Snare Drum 3

A variation on preset 3, creating a thicker sound.

Tom-tom 2

A variation on preset 5, emphasizing the mid and high ranges.

Piano 3

A variation on preset 13.

Piano Low

Emphasizes the low range of pianos recorded in stereo.

Piano High

Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in stereo.

Fine-EQ Cass

Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape.

Narrator

Ideal for recording narration.

Parameter LOW LOW-MID HIGH-MID HIGH

Gain

–18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.1 dB steps)

1. The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on/off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF

respectively.

Frequency

21.2 Hz to 20.0 kHz (120 steps per 1/12 octave)

HPF, 10.0 to 0.10

(41 steps), L.SHELF

10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps)

LPF, 10.0 to 0.10

(41 steps), H.SHELF

Parameter LOW LOW-MID HIGH-MID HIGH

Gain

0 dB

Frequency

125 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 10.0 kHz

L.SHELF 0.70 H.SHELF

# Preset Name Description

CHANNEL

COPY

PASTE

EQ ON

AT T.

kHz

HIGH

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

DISPLAY

HIGH MIDLOW MID

10.04.001.00125

EQUALIZER

LOW

Using EQ 109

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

EQ Edit Pages

EQ parameters can also be set on the EQ Edit page. If the Auto EQUALIZER Display pref-

erence is on, this page appears automatically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL

EQUALIZER section is operated. See “Auto EQUALIZER Display” on page 234.

1 Use the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button to select the EQ Edit page.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel and INC/DEC buttons to set them.

EQ ON: This turns the EQ on and off. The [ENTER] button can be used to turn this on

and off so long as any parameter other than TYPE is selected.

TYPE: This selects the type of EQ: TYPE I (the EQ type used on legacy Yamaha digital mix-

ing consoles) or TYPE II (a newly developed algorithm).

ATT: This can be used to attenuate signals pre-EQ. It’s the same Attenuator parameter that

appears on the Attenuator pages. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for more informa-

tion.

CURVE: This displays the EQ curve of the currently selected Input Channel.

Level meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel

and its horizontal or vertical partner.

LOW, L-MID, H-MID, HIGH: These are the Q, Frequency (F), and Gain (G) parameters

for the four bands.

110 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Output Channel EQs

The Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out EQs can be grouped, allowing you to

control the EQ of several Output Channels simultaneously. There are four Output Channel

EQ groups: e, f, g, and h.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Equalizer

Link page.

2 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button.

3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select EQ groups e–h.

The selected group is highlighted by a ﬂashing cursor box.

4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channels to and from the

selected group.

The EQ settings of the ﬁrst Output Channel added to the group are applied to all subse-

quently added Output Channels.

When an Output Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.

Using Inserts 111

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Using Inserts

Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature assign-

able Inserts.

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [INSERT ON] Button

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

2 Use the [INSERT ON] button to turn the currently selected channel’s

Insert on or off.

Insert Pages

Inserts can be conﬁgured on the Insert page. If the Auto PHASE/INSERT Display preference

is on, this page appears automatically when the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT

[INSERT ON] button is operated. See “Auto PHASE/INSERT Display” on page 234.

1 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [DISPLAY] button to select the

Insert page.

The Insert page for the Input Channels is shown on the left; the Insert page for the Bus Outs,

Aux Sends, and the Stereo out, on the right.

The Insert page for the Matrix Sends is shown below.

INSERT ON

112 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

INSERT ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected channel’s Insert on and off. It works

in unison with the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [INSERT ON] button.

INSERT POSITION: This determines the position of the Insert within the channel, and

can be set to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader.

INSERT OUT: This selects the destination for the Insert Out, which can be a Slot Output,

Omni Out, 2TR Digital Output, or the input to an internal effects processor. See page 242

and page 247 for Input and Output patch parameter lists. The Port ID of the currently

selected destination is displayed below the currently selected channel’s Long name in the

upper-right corner of the page. The destination port can also be selected by using the Patch

Select window (see page 67), which is accessed by pressing [ENTER] while this parameter

is selected. Insert Outs can also be patched on the Output Patch pages. See “Output Patch-

ing” on page 63 for more information.

INSERT IN: This selects the source for the Insert In, which can be an AD Input, Slot Input,

2TR Digital or Analog Input, or the output of an internal effects processor. See page 242 for

a list of Input Channel Insert In sources; page 247 for a list of Output Channel Insert In

sources. The Port ID of the currently selected source is displayed below the currently

selected channel’s Long name in the upper-right corner of the page. The source port can

also be selected by using the Patch Select window (see page 67), which is accessed by press-

ing [ENTER] while this parameter is selected. Insert Ins can also be patched on the Input

Channel Insert In Patch pages. See “Patching Input Channel Insert Ins” on page 62 for more

information.

COMP ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected channel’s Compressor on and off. It

works in unison with the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [COMP ON] button, and

the ON/OFF button on the Comp Edit page. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for

more information.

COMP POSITION: This determines the position of the Compressor within the channel,

and can be set to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. It works in unison with the POSITION

parameter on the Comp Edit page. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more

information.

COMP ORDER: If the Insert and Compressor are set to the same position in the channel

(i.e., INSERT POSITION and COMP POSITION are the same), you can use this parameter

to set the order of the Insert and Compressor to either Comp->Ins or Ins->Comp.

GEQ: This parameter allows you to insert a GEQ into the output of the currently selected

Output Channel. This parameter can also be set on the Graphic Equalizer Edit page (see

page 155) and the Graphic Equalizer Insert page (see page 66).

When a Y56K card effect, or an internal effects processor is inserted in the currently selected

channel, when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button is pressed, the cor-

responding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] button indicator ﬂashes, and the corresponding

Effects, or Plug-In edit page appears. If it’s a Y56K card that’s inserted, the [PLUG-INS] but-

ton indicator also ﬂashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS]

button indicator also ﬂashes. This applies only to effects that are inserted into channels. If

there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected channel, a message appears.

Compressing Channels 113

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Compressing Channels

Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature a Com-

pressor. Settings can be stored in the Comp library, which contains 36 preset memories and

88 user memories. See “Comp Library” on page 145 for more information.

Preset Comps & Types

The following table lists the preset Comps and types. See page 296 for detailed parameter

information.

# Preset Name Type Description

Comp

COMP

Compressor intended to reduce the overall volume level.

Use it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with

paired Input or Output Channels.

Expand

EXPAND Expander template.

Compander (H)

COMPAND-H Hard-kneed compressor template.

Compander (S)

COMPAND-S Soft-kneed compressor template.

A. Dr. BD

COMP Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum.

A. Dr. BD

COMPAND-H Hard-kneed compander for use with acoustic bass drum.

A. Dr. SN

COMP Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum.

A. Dr. SN

EXPAND Expander for use with acoustic snare drum.

A. Dr. SN

COMPAND-S Soft-kneed compander for use with acoustic snare drum.

A. Dr. Tom

EXPAND

Expander for use with acoustic tom toms, which automati-

cally reduces the volume when the tom toms are not

played, improving mic separation.

A. Dr. OverTop

COMPAND-S

Soft-kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and

ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead mics. It

automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are

not played, improving mic separation.

E. B. Finger

COMP

Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a ﬁn-

ger-picked electric bass guitar.

E. B. Slap

COMP

Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a

slapped electric bass guitar.

Syn. Bass

COMP

Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of a

synth bass.

Piano1

COMP Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano.

Piano2

COMP

A variation on preset 15, using a deep threshold to change

the overall attack and level.

E. Guitar

COMP

Compressor for electric guitar “cutting” or arpeggio-style

backing. The sound color can be varied by playing differ-

ent styles.

A. Guitar

COMP

Compressor for acoustic guitar “stroke” or arpeggio-style

backing.

Strings1

COMP Compressor for use with strings.

Strings2

COMP A variation on preset 19, intended for violas or cellos.

Strings3

COMP

A variation on preset 20, intended for string instruments

with a very low range, such as cellos or contrabass.

BrassSection

COMP Compressor for brass sounds with a fast and strong attack.

Syn. Pad

COMP

Compressor for synth pad, intended to prevent diffusion of

the sound.

SamplingPerc

COMPAND-S

Compressor for making sampled percussion sound like real

acoustic percussion.

Sampling BD

COMP

A variation on preset 24, intended for sampled bass drum

sounds.

Sampling SN

COMP

A variation on preset 25, intended for sampled snare drum

sounds.

114 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS Controls

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

2 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [COMP ON] button to turn the cur-

rently selected channel’s Compressor on or off.

3 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [GATE/COMP] button to set the

DYNAMICS controls to COMP (COMP indicator lit), and use the THRESH-

OLD, RATIO, ATTACK, RELEASE, and GAIN controls to set the Compressor.

While an output Channel is selected, the [GATE/COMP] button is ﬁxed at COMP.

Comp Edit Page

Compressor settings can be viewed and set on the Comp Edit page. If the Auto DYNAMICS

Display preference is on, this page appears automatically when a Compressor control in the

SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is operated. See “Auto DYNAMICS Display”

on page 234.

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

2 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the

Comp Library page, and recall a preset Compressor that contains the comp

type that you want.

See “Comp Library” on page 145 for more information.

Hip Comp

COMPAND-S

A variation on preset 26, intended for sampled loops and

phrases.

Solo Vocal1

COMP Compressor for use with main vocals.

Solo Vocal2

COMP A variation on preset 28.

Chorus

COMP A variation on preset 28, intended for choruses.

Click Erase

EXPAND

Expander for removing a click track that may bleed

through from a musicians headphones.

Announcer

COMPAND-H

Hard-kneed compander for reducing the level of the music

when an announcer speaks.

Limiter1

COMPAND-S A soft-kneed compander with a slow release.

Limiter2

COMP A “peak-stop” compressor.

Total Comp1

COMP

Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use it on

the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired Input or

Output Channels.

Total Comp2

COMP A variation on preset 35, but with more compression.

# Preset Name Type Description

GATE ON COMP ON

GATE

COMP

RANGE

RATIO

ATTA CK

DECAY

RELEASETHRESHOLD

THRESHOLD HOLD

DYNAMICS

GATE / COMP

GAIN

DISPLAY

Compressing Channels 115

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

3 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the

Comp Edit page.

4 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

POSITION: This determines the position of the Compressor within the channel, and can

be set to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. It works in unison with the COMP POSITION

parameter on the Insert page. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information.

STEREO LINK: This allows you to pair Comps for stereo operation even when channels

are not paired. Input Channel Comps are paired either horizontally or vertically depending

on the Pair mode setting for the currently selected Input Channel. See “Pairing Channels”

on page 120 for more information on horizontal and vertical pairing. When channels are

paired, this parameter is turned on automatically and cannot be changed.

CURVE: This displays the Compressor curve (i.e., input level vs. output level).

TYPE: This is the comp type used by the currently selected channel’s Compressor.

Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its

horizontal or vertical partner. The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being

applied by the currently selected channel’s Compressor.

ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected channel’s Compressor on and off. It works in

unison with the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [COMP ON] button.

PARAMETER: These controls are used to set the Threshold, Ratio, Attack, Release, Out

Gain, and Knee parameters.

116 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Output Channel Compressors

The Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out Compressors can be grouped, allow-

ing you to control the compression of several Output Channels simultaneously. There are

four Output Channel Compressor groups: m, n, o, and p.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Comp Link

page.

2 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button.

3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Comp groups m–p.

The selected group is highlighted by a ﬂashing cursor box.

4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channels to and from the

selected group.

The Compressor settings of the ﬁrst Output Channel added to the group are applied to all

subsequently added Output Channels.

When an Output Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.

Delaying Channel Signals 117

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Delaying Channel Signals

Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature inde-

pendent Delay functions. Input Channel Delays feature feedback, with independent Mix

and Gain parameters.

Using the SELECTED CHANNEL DELAY Controls

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use

the [SEL] buttons to select channels.

Use the STEREO [SEL] button to toggle between the left

and right channels of the Stereo Out. On the Master Layer, use [SEL] buttons 21–24 to tog-

gle between the left and right channels of the Matrix Sends.

2 Use the [ON] button to turn the Delay function on and off.

3 Use the TIME control to set the delay time.

If the currently selected channel is an Input Channel, you can also set the Feedback Gain

(FB) and Feedback Mix (MIX) parameters. Use the FB/MIX push switch to select either FB

or MIX, and use the FB/MIX control to set it.

Delay Pages

Delay settings can be viewed and set on the Delay pages. If the Auto DELAY Display prefer-

ence is on, these pages appear automatically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL

DELAY section is operated. See “Auto DELAY Display” on page 234.

1 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DELAY [DISPLAY] button to select the Delay

pages.

The Delay parameters for the 96 Input Channels are arranged into four pages. The Input

Channel 1–24 Delay page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the same.

DELAY

TIME

MIX

DISPLAY

118 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

The Delay parameters for the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out

appear on the Output Delay page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the Delay parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

Input and Output Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER and [SEL] buttons.

DELAY SCALE: These buttons determine the units of the delay value shown below the

msec value. Units can be set to meters, feet, samples, beats, or timecode frames.

GANG: When this option is turned on, the delay time for paired channels can be set simul-

taneously. Ganging is relative, so any delay time difference between the two channels is

maintained when this is turned on.

ON/OFF: These buttons turn the individual Delay functions on and off. The [ENTER]

button can be used to turn a Delay on and off regardless of which parameter is selected.

msec: This sets the delay time in milliseconds. The delay time can also be set by using the

parameter below, which is the delay time in the units selected by the DELAY SCALE but-

tons. You can copy the currently selected Input or Output Channel delay setting to all Input

or Output Channels respectively by double-clicking the [ENTER] button.

MIX: This parameter, available only on the Input Channel Delay pages, sets the mix of dry

and wet signals.

FB.GAIN: This parameter, available only on the Input Channel Delay pages, sets the

amount of feedback.

Soloing Channels

Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Matrix Sends can be soloed as follows.

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers if you want to solo

Input Channels, or select the Master Layer if you want to solo Output Chan-

nels.

Input and Output Channels cannot be soloed simultaneously. Soled Input Channels will be

unsoled when an Output Channel is soloed, and vice versa.

2 Use the [SOLO] buttons to solo the channels on the selected Layer.

The [SOLO] button indicators of channels that are soloed light up.

The SOLO indicator in the MONITOR section ﬂashes when the Solo function

is active. You can unsolo all soloed channels by pressing the SOLO [CLEAR]

button. You can adjust the level contrast between the soloed channels and the

currently selected Control Room Monitor source by adjusting the SOLO

CONTRAST control.

SOLO

CLEAR

SOLO CONTRAST

Soloing Channels 119

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Conﬁguring Solo

The Solo function is conﬁgured on the Solo Setup page. If the Auto SOLO Display prefer-

ence is on, this page appears automatically when a channel is soloed. See “Auto SOLO Dis-

play” on page 234.

1 Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Solo Setup page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

SOLO: This is used to enable and disable the Solo function.

STATUS: This determines the Solo mode: Recording or Mixdown.

In Recording Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Solo bus and output

via the Control Room Outputs. Other buses are unaffected by this mode. If the Listen

parameter is set to AFTER PAN, the signal source for Input Channels that are off, is pre

fader.

In Mixdown Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Stereo bus and output

via the Stereo Out and Control Room Outputs. Unsoloed Input Channels are muted and

their [ON] button indicators ﬂash (unless they are Solo Safe enabled). Only Input Channels

that are routed to the Stereo Out can be soloed in this mode. Input Channels that are off are

temporarily turned on when they are soloed.

SEL MODE: This determines the Solo Select mode: Mix Solo or Last Solo. In Mix Solo

mode, any number of channels can be soloed simultaneously. In Last Solo mode, only one

channel can be soloed at a time.

LISTEN: This determines the source of the Input Channel Solo signal: Pre Fader or After

Pan. This parameter does not affect Mixdown Solo mode. Output Channels are ﬁxed at

After Pan.

SOLO TRIM: This is used to trim the level of the Solo signal. This parameter does not

affect Mixdown Solo mode.

SOLO SAFE CHANNEL: For Mixdown Solo mode, Input Channels can be conﬁgured

individually so that they are not muted when other Input Channels are soloed. Use the

[SEL] buttons, cursor buttons, or Parameter wheel to select the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL

buttons. Use the [ENTER] or INC/DEC buttons to set Solo Safe for each Input Channel.

These settings do not affect Recording Solo mode. You can clear all Solo Safe settings by

selecting the ALL CLEAR button and pressing [ENTER].

120 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Pairing Channels

Input Channels, Bus Outs, and Aux Sends can be paired for stereo operation. Input Chan-

nels can be paired either horizontally, that is, adjacent odd-even channels on the same Layer

(e.g., 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, etc) or vertically, that is, counterpart channels on adjacent Layers (e.g.,

1-25, 2-26, 49-73, 50-74, etc). Bus Outs and Aux Sends can be paired only horizontally.

Pairing Channels by Using the [SEL] Buttons

Only horizontal pairing can be set by using the [SEL] buttons.

1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layer containing the channels that you

want to pair.

2 While holding down the [SEL] button of the ﬁrst channel, press the [SEL] but-

ton of the second channel.

The settings of the ﬁrst channel are copied to the second channel and the channels are

paired. The [SEL] button indicator of the currently selected channel lights up, while the

[SEL] button indicator of the other channel ﬂashes.

Aux Sends can also be paired by using the AUX SELECT buttons.

To cancel a pair, while holding down the [SEL] button of the ﬁrst channel, press the [SEL]

button of the second channel.

The following channel parameters are copied, and controlled together, when channels are

paired: Fader, On/Off, Insert On/Off, Aux/Matrix On/Off, Aux/Matrix Send Level,

Aux/Matrix Pre/Post, Gate parameters, Compressor parameters, Comp Position, EQ

parameters, Fader group, Mute group, EQ group, Comp group, Solo, Solo Safe, [AUTO]

button, Fade Time, Recall Safe, Bus to Stereo On/Off, Bus to Stereo Level.

The following channel parameters are not copied, or controlled together, when channels are

paired: Input Patch, Insert Patch, Output Patch, Phase, Delay On/Off, Delay Time, Delay

Feedback, Delay Mix, Routing, Pan, Follow Pan, Surround Pan, Bus to Stereo Pan,

Aux/Matrix Send Pan, Balance.

When channels are paired, the Attenuator value is copied, but the channels are not con-

trolled together.

Pairing Channels by Using the Pair Pages

Both horizontal and vertical pairing can be set on the Pair pages.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR] button to locate the Pair pages.

The Pair parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The Input

Channel 1–48 Pair page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same.

Pairing Channels 121

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

2 To set the pair mode, select the PAIR MODE HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL but-

tons, and press [ENTER].

The Pair mode can be set independently for Input Channels 1–48 and Input Channels

49–96. The Input Channel 1–48 Pair page in Vertical mode is shown below.

Pair parameters for the Bus Outs and Aux Sends appear on the Output Pair page.

3 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the channel pair but-

tons, and press [ENTER] to make or break pairs.

Input and Output Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER and [SEL] buttons.

A dialog box appears with options for copying the settings of the ﬁrst channel to the second

channel, the second channel to the ﬁrst channel, and for resetting both channels to their ini-

tial settings. Choose the option required, and then press [ENTER].

On other display pages, paired channels have a heart icon, or a dash between their channel

numbers.

When Input Channels are paired, MS Decoding can be used to decode signals from micro-

phones arranged as MS pairs. MS Decoding is set on the Input Channel Pair pages. This can

be turned on and off for each pair of channels by using the MS buttons.

The Output Pair page displays the currently selected Surround mode (i.e., Stereo, 3-1, or

5.1), which can be set on the Surround Mode page (see page 77). When a Surround mode

other than Stereo is selected, the names of the Surround channels are shown below the Bus

Out and Aux Send pair buttons, as shown in the following table.

Surround Mode

Bus Out/Aux Send

123456

3-1

LRCS——

5.1

LRLsRs C LFE

122 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

When a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected, Aux Sends can be set to follow the

same Input Channel Surround Pan that applies to the Bus Outs, which is useful for feeding

Surround channel signals to external effects processors. This is turned on and off by using

the F.S buttons that appear below the Aux Send Pair buttons. When a pair of Aux Sends are

set to follow Surround Pan, their Aux Send Pair button is unavailable, and their Aux Pan

parameters (see page 94) are unavailable.

Grouping Output Channel Faders

The Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out faders can be grouped, allowing you

to control the level of several Output Channels simultaneously. There are four Output

Channel Fader groups: Q, R, S, and T.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Fader Group

page.

2 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button.

3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Fader groups Q–T.

The selected group is highlighted by a ﬂashing cursor box.

4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channel faders to and from

the selected group.

When an Output Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.

ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups.

You can temporarily disable a Fader group in order to make adjustments to individual fad-

ers by operating the desired channel fader while holding down its [SEL] button.

Fader groups are active only in Fader mode. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 44 for

more information.

Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) 123

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)

The Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out mutes can be grouped, allowing you

to mute several Output Channels simultaneously. There are four Output Channel Mute

groups: U, V, W, and X.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Mute Group

page.

2 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button.

3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Mute groups U–X.

The selected group is highlighted by a ﬂashing cursor box.

4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channels to and from the

selected group.

When an Output Channel is added to a Mute group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up.

ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups.

Mute groups may contain a combination of channels that are on and channels that are off.

124 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Viewing Channel Parameter Settings

The parameter setting of the currently selected Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix

Send, or the Stereo Out can be viewed and set on the Parameter View pages.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button to select the Parameter View page.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] buttons to set them.

Input Channels

This is the Parameter View page for the Input Channels.

GATE: The following Gate parameters for the currently selected Input Channel can be set:

Gate On/Off, Threshold, Range, Attack, Decay, and Hold. The GR meter indicates the

amount of gain reduction being applied by the Gate. Also displayed are the gate curve and

gate type. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69 for more information.

COMP: The following Compressor parameters for the currently selected channel can be

set: Comp On/Off, Threshold, Ratio, Attack, Release, Gain, and Knee. The GR meter indi-

cates the amount of gain reduction being applied by the Compressor. Also displayed are the

comp curve and comp type. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more informa-

tion.

INSERT: The currently selected channel’s Insert can be turned on and off and patched. See

“Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information.

EQ: The currently selected channel’s EQ and Attenuator can be set. Also displayed is the EQ

curve of the currently selected Input Channel. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more infor-

mation.

Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected channel and its horizon-

tal or vertical partner.

Phase: The signal phase of the currently selected Input Channel can be reversed. See

“Reversing the Signal Phase” on page 68 for more information.

DELAY: The currently selected channel’s Delay function can be set. See “Delaying Channel

Signals” on page 117 for more information.

PAIR: This heart icon indicates whether or not channels are paired. See “Pairing Channels”

on page 120 for more information.

Viewing Channel Fader Settings 125

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Output Channels

This is the Parameter View page for the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo

Out. Parameters are the same as for the Input Channel Parameter View page, minus the

GATE and Phase sections and the DELAY MIX and FB GAIN parameters. The parameter

settings of the left and right channels of the Matrix Sends and Stereo Out can be viewed

individually. Use the [SEL] buttons to toggle between the left and right channels.

Viewing Channel Fader Settings

The fader-related settings of the currently selected Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send,

Matrix Send, or the Stereo Out can be viewed and set on the Fader View pages.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button to select the Fader View page.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select

channels.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] buttons to set them.

Pan and Balance controls can be set to center by pressing [ENTER] while they’re selected.

Input Channels

This is the Fader View page for the Input Channels.

PAN: This is the currently selected Input Channel’s Pan parameter. See “Panning Input

Channels” on page 76 for more information.

ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the currently selected Input Channel. See “Mut-

ing Input Channels (ON/OFF)” on page 72 for more information.

Fader: This indicates the fader position of the currently selected Input Channel. The fader

knob appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed

126 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

numerically below the fader. See “Setting Input Channel Levels” on page 74 for more infor-

mation.

SURROUND PAN: The Surround pan parameters for the currently selected Input Chan-

nel are displayed only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected. See “Using Sur-

round Pan” on page 77 for more information.

BUS ROUTING: This section contains Routing and Follow Pan buttons for the currently

selected Input Channel. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 for more information.

The Direct Out output patch can also be set. See “Patching Direct Outs” on page 65 for more

information.

AUX: These are the currently selected Input Channel’s Aux Send Level, On/Off, and

Pre/Post parameters. While a rotary control is selected, the Aux Send can be turned on and

off by pressing [ENTER]. See “Aux Sends” on page 88 for more information.

Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its

horizontal or vertical partner. The metering position is displayed below them.

GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the cur-

rently selected Input Channel is in.

Bus Outs

This is the Fader View page for the Bus Outs.

ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the currently selected Bus Out. See “Muting Bus

Outs (ON/OFF)” on page 86 for more information.

Fader: This indicates the fader position of the currently selected Bus Out. The fader knob

appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numer-

ically below the fader. See “Setting Bus Out Levels” on page 86 for more information.

TO ST PAN, ON/OFF & Fader: These are the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan, On/Off, and

Fader parameters for the currently selected Bus Out. The fader knob appears highlighted

when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numerically below the fader.

See “Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out” on page 87 for more information.

MATRIX PAN: These are the Matrix Send Pan controls for the currently selected Bus Out.

See “Panning Matrix Sends” on page 99 for more information.

MATRIX SEND: These are the Matrix Send Level controls for the currently selected Bus

Out. While a rotary control is selected, the Matrix Send can be turned on and off by pressing

[ENTER]. See “Setting Matrix Send Levels” on page 97 for more information.

Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Bus Out and its partner.

The metering position is displayed below them.

GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the cur-

rently selected Bus Out is in.

Viewing Channel Fader Settings 127

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Aux Sends

Below is the Fader View page for the Aux Sends.

ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the currently selected Aux Send. See “Muting

Aux Sends (ON/OFF)” on page 90 for more information.

Fader: This indicates the fader position of the currently selected Aux Send. The fader knob

appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numer-

ically below the fader. See “Settings Aux Send Master Levels” on page 96 for more informa-

tion.

MATRIX PAN: These are the Matrix Send Pan controls for the currently selected Aux

Send. See “Panning Matrix Sends” on page 99 for more information.

MATRIX SEND: These are the Matrix Send Level controls for the currently selected Aux

Send. While a rotary control is selected, the Matrix Send can be turned on and off by press-

ing [ENTER]. See “Setting Matrix Send Levels” on page 97 for more information.

Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Aux Send and its partner.

The metering position is displayed below them.

GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the cur-

rently selected Aux Send is in.

Matrix Sends

Below is the Fader View page for the Matrix Sends. The settings of the left and right channels

of the Matrix Sends can be viewed individually. Use [SEL] buttons 1–24 to toggle between

the left and right channels.

BAL: This is the Balance parameter for the currently selected Matrix Send. See “Balancing

Matrix Send Masters” on page 101 for more information.

ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the currently selected Matrix Send. See “Muting

Matrix Sends (ON/OFF)” on page 98 for more information.

128 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Fader: This indicates the fader position of the currently selected Matrix Send. The fader

knob appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed

numerically below the fader. See “Setting Matrix Send Master Levels” on page 101 for more

information.

Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Matrix Send and its part-

ner. The metering position is displayed below them.

GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the cur-

rently selected Matrix Send is in.

Stereo Out

Below is the Fader View page for the Stereo Out. The settings of the left and right channels

of the Stereo Out can be viewed individually. Use the STEREO [SEL] button to toggle

between the left and right channels.

BAL: This is the Balance parameter for the Stereo Out. See “Balancing the Stereo Out” on

page 84 for more information.

ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the Stereo Out. See “Muting the Stereo Out

(ON/OFF)” on page 83 for more information.

Fader: This indicates the fader position of the Stereo Out. The fader knob appears high-

lighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numerically below the

fader. See “Setting the Stereo Out Level” on page 83 for more information.

MATRIX PAN: These are the Matrix Send Pan controls for the Stereo Out. They can be set

independently for the Stereo Out’s left and right channels. See “Panning Matrix Sends” on

page 99 for more information.

MATRIX SEND: These are the Matrix Send Level controls for the Stereo Out. They can be

set independently for the Stereo Out’s left and right channels. While a rotary control is

selected, the Matrix Send can be turned on and off by pressing [ENTER]. See “Setting

Matrix Send Levels” on page 97 for more information.

Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the Stereo Out. The metering position is dis-

played below them.

GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the Stereo

Out is in.

Copying Channel Settings 129

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Copying Channel Settings

The settings of Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo

Out can be copied among channels of the same type by using the Channel Copy

function. You can even copy to and from channels in Scenes without recalling

them. For the Matrix Sends and Stereo Out, the left and right channels are copied

and pasted independently.

The Channel Copy Parameter buttons on the Preferences 2 page allow you to spec-

ify which channel settings will be copied. See “Channel Copy Parameter” on page 236.

Copying Channel Settings in the Same Scene

1 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the source channel.

2 Press the CHANNEL [COPY] button.

The settings of the currently selected channel are copied to the Copy buffer.

For paired channels, only the settings of the currently selected channel are copied.

3 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the destination channel.

4 Press the CHANNEL [PASTE] button.

If the destination channel is of the same type as the source channel, the settings in the Copy

buffer are pasted to the destination channel and its settings are updated accordingly.

Copying Channel Settings from the Current Scene to Other Scenes

1 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the source channel.

2 Press the CHANNEL [COPY] button.

3 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the desti-

nation Scene.

The number of the destination Scene ﬂashes on the SCENE MEMORY display.

4 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the destination channel.

5 Press the CHANNEL [PASTE] button.

A conﬁrmation message appears. Choose YES to copy the source channel settings to the

destination channel.

Copying Channel Settings from Other Scenes to the Current Scene

1 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the source

Scene.

The number of the source Scene ﬂashes on the SCENE MEMORY display.

2 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the source channel.

3 Press the CHANNEL [COPY] button.

4 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the current

Scene.

The number of the current Scene does not ﬂash on the SCENE MEMORY display.

5 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the destination channel.

6 Press the CHANNEL [PASTE] button.

The source channel settings are copied to the destination channel.

CHANNEL

COPY

PASTE

130 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Copying Channel Settings Between Noncurrent Scenes

1 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the source

Scene.

The number of the source Scene ﬂashes on the SCENE MEMORY display.

2 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the source channel.

3 Press the CHANNEL [COPY] button.

4 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the desti-

nation Scene.

The number of the destination Scene ﬂashes on the SCENE MEMORY display.

5 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the destination channel.

6 Press the CHANNEL [PASTE] button.

A conﬁrmation message appears. Choose YES to copy the source channel settings to the

destination channel.

Naming Channels

You can specify Long and Short names for the Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix

Sends, and the Stereo Out as follows.

See page 256 for a list of initial Input Channel names; page 257 for Output Channel names.

Input Channels

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button to locate the Input Channel

Name page.

2 Use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or the LAYER and [SEL] buttons

to select the Input Channels.

When Vertical Input Channel pairing mode is selected, Input Channels are listed in order

of vertical partners, for example, CH1, CH25, CH2, CH26, and so on.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Input Channel’s Long or Short name,

and then press [ENTER].

When the Title Edit window appears, edit the Input Channel name, and press OK when

you’ve ﬁnished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information.

You can reset all Input Channel names back to their initial values by pressing the INITIAL-

IZE button.

Naming Channels 131

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Output Channels

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button to locate the Output

Channel Name page

2 Use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or the Master Layer and [SEL]

buttons to select the Output Channels.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Output Channel’s Long or Short name,

and then press [ENTER].

When the Title Edit window appears, edit the Output Channel name, and press OK when

you’ve ﬁnished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information.

You can reset all Output Channel names back to their initial values by pressing the INI-

TIALIZE button.

132 Chapter 13—Monitoring & Talkback

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

13 Monitoring & Talkback

Control Room Monitoring

The DM2000 features independent outputs and level controls for two

sets of studio monitors. The LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR

OUT +4 dB (BAL) XLR-3-32-type connectors are intended to feed to the

control room’s main monitors. The SMALL CONTROL ROOM MON-

ITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL) XLR-3-32-type connectors are intended to

feed to the control room’s nearﬁeld monitors.

The Control Room Monitor signal source is selected by using the CONTROL

ROOM STEREO buttons.

[2TR D1]: Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1.

[2TR D2]: Selects the

2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 2.

[2TR D3]: Selects the

2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 3.

[2TR A1]: Selects the

2TR IN ANALOG 1.

[2TR A2]: Selects the

2TR IN ANALOG 2.

[STEREO]: Selects the Stereo Out.

[ASSIGN 1]: Selects the Output Channel assigned to this button on the Control Room

Setup page. See “Control Room Setup” on page 133.

[ASSIGN 2]: Selects the Output Channel assigned to this button on the Control Room

Setup page. See “Control Room Setup” on page 133.

The level of the Control Room Monitor signal can be set by using the CON-

TROL ROOM LEVEL control. You can toggle between the LARGE CON-

TROL ROOM MONITOR OUT and SMALL CONTROL ROOM

MONITOR OUT by using the CONTROL ROOM [SMALL] button, whose

indicator is off when LARGE is selected, and on when SMALL is selected.

The Control Room Monitor signal can be switched into mono by using the

CONTROL ROOM [MONO] button. The [DIMMER] button activates the

Dimmer function, which dims the Control Room Monitor and Surround

Monitor signals by the amount speciﬁed on the Control Room Setup page

(page 133). The Dimmer function is activated automatically when the Slate,

Talkback, or Oscillator function is active.

The level of the SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT can be set by using

the SMALL TRIM control. When set at maximum, the level is the same as that of the

LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT.

The Control Room Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack, the level of

which is set by using the PHONES LEVEL control.

2TR D1 2TR A1

2TR D2 2TR A2

2TRD3STEREO

ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2

STEREO

DIMMER

SMALL

MONO

CONTROL ROOM LEVEL

100

SMALL

TRIM

0010

PHONES

LEVEL

PHONES

010

Studio Monitoring 133

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Control Room Setup

Control room monitoring is conﬁgured on the Control Room Setup page.

1 Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Control Room Setup page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the ASSIGN buttons in the left-hand box,

and use the Parameter wheel to select an Output Channel in the right-hand

box.

Bus Outs, Aux Sends, or Matrix Sends can be assigned to the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2]

buttons.

3 Press [ENTER] to assign the selected Output Channel.

Once assigned, the selected Output Channel appears highlighted in the right-hand box.

The other parameters on this page are as follows.

CONTROL ROOM DIMMER LEVEL: This determines the amount of attenuation

applied to the Control Room Monitor and Surround Monitor signals by the Dimmer func-

tion. Use the cursor buttons to select it, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons

to set it from.

MONO: This button, which works in unison with the CONTROL ROOM [MONO] but-

ton, can be used to switch the Control Room Monitor signal into mono.

Studio Monitoring

The DM2000 features dedicated outputs, source selection, and level control.

The Studio Monitor signal is output by the STUDIO MONITOR OUT +4 dB

(BAL) 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks.

The Studio Monitor signal source is selected by using the STUDIO buttons.

[CONTROL ROOM]: Selects the Control Room Monitor.

[STEREO]: Selects the Stereo Out.

[AUX 11]: Selects Aux Send #11.

[AUX 12]: Selects Aux Send #12.

The level of the Studio Monitor signal can be set by using the STUDIO LEVEL

control.

STUDIO

CONTROL

ROOM

STEREO

AUX 11 AUX 12

STUDIO

LEVEL

010

134 Chapter 13—Monitoring & Talkback

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Surround Monitoring

The DM2000 features comprehensive surround monitoring functions, including a pink

noise generator for speaker setup, Bass Management, and down mixing.

The Surround pages explained in this section are available only when a Surround mode

other than Stereo is selected (see page 78).

The Surround Monitor signal source is selected by using the SURROUND

buttons. The [BUS] button selects the Bus Outs as the source. The

[ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons select the Inputs of the Slots speciﬁed

on the Surround Monitor page as the source. Surround mixes from up to six

multitrack recorders can be monitored by patching Slot Inputs to Surround

Monitor Channels (see page 137) and selecting with the [ASSIGN 1] and

[ASSIGN 2] buttons. The level of the Surround Monitor can be set by using

the SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control.

Surround monitor speakers can be aligned by using the individual Attenuator and Delay

parameters on each Surround Monitor Channel. In addition to the standard Ls and Rs

speakers, the DM2000 supports Ls2 and Rs2 speakers, with independent Attenuator and

Delay parameters, for a more diffused surround monitoring environment. See “Conﬁgur-

ing Surround Monitoring” on page 135 for more information.

Surround Monitor Channels can be patched to Slot Outputs or Omni Outputs. See “Output

Patching” on page 63 for more information.

Surround Monitor settings can be stored in the Surround Monitor library, which contains

1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See “Surround Monitor Library” on page 147 for

more information.

General surround monitoring is performed on the Surround Monitor page.

1 Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Surround Monitor page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

The number of speaker icons and meters shown on the Surround Monitor page depends on

the currently selected Surround mode. The meters indicate Bus Out signal levels.

MUTE/SOLO: These parameters are used to mute and solo Surround Channels. A Sur-

round Channel is on when its speaker icon is highlighted. Speaker icons can be selected by

using the cursor buttons. When SOLO is on, Surround Channels can be soloed by selecting

speaker icons and pressing [ENTER].

SETTING: These buttons are used to select which Slot’s Inputs are monitored when the

SURROUND [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are pressed. Up to six Slots can be

assigned to each ASSIGN button, in which case the signals are mixed. Individual Slot Inputs

can be patched to Surround Monitor Channels on the Surround Monitor Patch page (see

page 137).

ASSIGN 1 ASSI GN 2

SURROUND

MONITOR LEVEL

BUS

SURROUND

Surround Monitoring 135

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

When the MONITOR L/R to C-R button is on, the Left and Right Surround Monitor Chan-

nels are fed to the Control Room Monitors. This is useful when you want to use the same

speakers for Left and Right Surround Monitors and Control Room Monitors.

STATUS: SURROUND MODE indicates the currently selected Surround mode, which is

set on the Surround Mode page (see page 78). MONITOR LEVEL indicates the volume set-

ting of the SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control, which can be calibrated to 85 dB SPL,

the cinema standard for setting up Surround Channel Monitor speakers. To do this, output

pink noise from the built-in Oscillator (see page 135), set the SURROUND MONITOR

LEVEL control and the level controls on the Surround Monitor speaker amps so that the

total output is 85 dB SPL, then press the SET SPL85 button. The MONITOR LEVEL indi-

cation will then display the volume setting relative to 85 dB SPL. Press the SET SPL85 but-

ton again to return to the normal volume indication.

Conﬁguring Surround Monitoring

Surround monitoring, including speaker setup, monitor matrix, Bass Management, and

monitor alignment, is conﬁgured on the Surround Monitor Setup page.

1 Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Surround Monitor Setup

page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

SPEAKER SETUP: These parameters are for setting the volume balance of the surround

monitor speakers. Select the OSC (Oscillator) parameter and choose from PINK NOISE,

500-2K (pink noise through a 500 Hz to 2 kHz BPF), 1K (1 kHz sinewave), or 50 Hz (50 Hz

sinewave). Use the ON/OFF button to turn the Oscillator on and off. When on, the Oscil-

lator outputs a signal at –20 dB to the Surround Channels whose icons are highlighted. You

can turn on and off Oscillator output for speakers individually. Speaker icons can be

selected by using the cursor buttons. The signal phase of the LFE Channel can be reversed

by using the SW Phase button. When ROTATE is on, the Oscillator signal is output by each

speaker in turn in a clockwise direction (3 second signal, 2 second pause).

SURR. MODE: This indicates the currently selected Surround mode, which is set on the

Surround Mode page (see page 78).

136 Chapter 13—Monitoring & Talkback

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

MONITOR MATRIX: This is used to select the Surround Monitor Matrix. In 5.1 Sur-

round mode, you can select 5.1, 3-1, or ST. In 3-1 Surround mode, you can select 3-1 or ST.

When a down mix Monitor Matrix is selected, you can attenuate signals by using the ATT

parameters. The following diagrams, which show the Monitor Matrixes available in each

Surround mode, are displayed when this parameter is selected.

BASS MANAGE: This parameter is used to select the

ﬁve preset Bass Management modes for use with 5.1 Sur-

round mode and the 5.1 Monitor Matrix. The presets

cannot be selected when other Surround modes or Mon-

itor Matrixes are selected. Use the ON/OFF button to turn

Bass Management on and off. When off, the Bass Man-

agement ﬁlters are set to THRU and the discrete 5.1 chan-

nel-to-LFE feeds are muted. The Bass Management

diagram and parameters shown here are displayed when

this parameter is selected. Bass Management parameters can be set as follows.

“80-12” means a cutoff frequency of 80 Hz and a ﬁlter response of –12 dB/octave. “L” means

Linkwitz ﬁlter. Other ﬁlters are Butterworth.

The following table lists the Bass Management preset parameter values (“w/BS” means with

Bass Management). SMALL speakers are assumed for the presets.

Parameter Range

HPF

THRU, 80-12, 80-12L, 80-24, 80-24L

LPF1

THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, 120-42

LPF2

THRU, 80–24, 80-24L, MUTE

ATT

0 to –12 dB (1 dB steps)

AMP

0 to +12 dB (1 dB steps)

Presets Parameters

#Title HPF LPF1 LPF2 ATT AMP

DVD Mix w/BS 80-12 80-24 80-24 0 10

DVD Author w/BS 80-12 120-42 80-24 0 10

Film Mix w/BS 80-12 80-24 80-24 –3 10

Film Author w/BS 80-12 120-42 80-24 –3 10

Bypass THRU THRU MUTE 0 0

3-1 to 3-1 3-1 to ST

5.1 to 5.1 5.1 to 3-1 5.1 to ST

Surround Monitoring 137

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

MONITOR ALIGNMENT ATT & DLY ON/OFF:

These buttons are used to turn on and off the Monitor

Alignment Attenuator and Delay parameters of all Sur-

round speakers. The MONITOR ALIGNMENT diagram

and Surround Channel Attenuator and Delay parameters,

which are displayed when either of these buttons are

selected, allow you to align the surround monitor speak-

ers by attenuating and delaying Surround Channels as

necessary. The Attenuator parameters can be set from

–12 dB to +12 dB in 0.1 dB steps. The Delay parameters

can be set from 0.0 to 30.0 msec in 0.02 msec steps.

Patching Slot Inputs to Surround Channels

Individual Slot Inputs can be patched to Surround Monitor Channels as follows.

1 Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Surround Monitor Patch

page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

SLOT/CH: This patching matrix is used to patch Inputs 1–8 from each of the six Slots to

Surround Monitor Channels 1–8. Each Slot Input can be patched to only one Surround

Monitor Channel.

LEVEL: These parameters are used to set the monitor level of each Slot.

138 Chapter 13—Monitoring & Talkback

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Using Talkback & Slate

The Talkback function distributes the Talkback mic signal to the Studio Monitor Outs and

any Slot or Omni Outputs speciﬁed on the Talkback Setup page.

The TALKBACK LEVEL control sets the level of the built-in talkback micro-

phone.

The [TALKBACK] button has two modes of operation: If it’s pressed once

(i.e., for less than 300 ms), the Talkback function is turned on and remains on

when the button is released. This is Latched mode (this mode can be disabled

on the Talkback Setup page). If it’s pressed and held for longer, the Talkback

function is turned on, but turns off when the button is released. This is

Unlatched mode. The [TALKBACK] button indicator ﬂashes while the Talk-

back function is active.

The Slate function distributes the Talkback mic signal to all Bus Outs, Matrix Sends, and the

Stereo Out.

The [SLATE] button has two modes of operation: If it’s pressed once (i.e., for

less than 300 ms), the Slate function is turned on and remains on when the

button is released. This is Latched mode. If it’s pressed and held for longer, the

Slate function is turned on, but turns off when the button is released. This is

Unlatched mode. The [SLATE] button indicator ﬂashes while the Slate func-

tion is active.

Talkback Setup

1 Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Talkback Setup page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

OUTPUT ASSIGN: These buttons are used to assign the Talkback mic signal to Slot and

Omni Outputs.

TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL: When the Talkback function is active, this determines the

amount of attenuation applied to sound sources assigned to the Studio Monitors and

selected for Talkback.

USE AD IN x AS TALKBACK: This allows you to select an AD Input as the Talkback sig-

nal source. Use the check box to turn this option on and off, and use the number parameter

to specify the number of the AD Input. The signal from the speciﬁed AD Input is mixed

with the Talkback mic signal. Turn down the TALKBACK LEVEL if you do not want to use

the Talkback mic.

NEVER LATCH TALKBACK: This options allows you to disable Talkback latching.

010

TALKBACK LEVE

TALKBACK

SLATE

Libraries 139

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

14 Libraries

About the Libraries

The DM2000 features 11 libraries for storing Automix, Effects, Channel, Input Patch, Out-

put Patch, GEQ, Bus to Stereo, Gate, Comp, EQ, and Surround Monitor data.

Library data can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler, by using

MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187). It can also be stored to SmartMedia (see page 231).

General Library Operation

Since most library functions are the same for each library, rather than explain them several

times, they’re explained only here for conciseness.

1 Locate the various library pages as explained in the following sections.

The Input Patch Library page shown below is used here for explanation purposes.

2 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the memories.

A memory is selected when it appears inside the dotted box.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the following page buttons.

TITLE EDIT: To edit the title of the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER]. When

the Title Edit window appears, edit the title, and press OK when you’ve ﬁnished. See “Title

Edit Window” on page 38 for more information.

RECALL: To recall the contents of the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER]. If

the Recall Conﬁrmation preference is on, a conﬁrmation window appears before the con-

tents are recalled.

STORE: To store settings to the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER]. When the

Title Edit window appears, enter a title, and press OK. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38

for more information. You can stop the Title Edit window from appearing by turning off

the Store Conﬁrmation preference on page 235.

CLEAR: To delete the contents and title of the selected memory, select this and press

[ENTER]. A conﬁrmation window appears before the memory is cleared.

Read-only preset memories have an “R” icon next to their name. You cannot store, clear, or

edit the title of these memories.

Empty memories have the title “No Data!” Memory #0 is a read-only memory that you can

recall to reset settings to their initial values.

140 Chapter 14—Libraries

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Memory #U is a special read-only memory that allows you to undo and redo memory recall

and store operations. After recalling a memory, you can revert to the previously recalled

memory by recalling memory #U. After storing a memory, you can revert it to its previous

contents by recalling memory #U. You can redo either of these undo operations by recalling

memory #U again.

Channel Library

Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out channel settings can be

stored in the Channel library, which contains 2 preset memories and 127 user memories.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button to select the Channel Library page.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and the [SEL] buttons to select chan-

nels.

When storing, the settings of the currently selected channel are stored to the selected mem-

ory. When recalling, the settings in the selected memory are applied to the currently selected

channel.

Only memories whose contents correspond to the currently selected channel can be

recalled. For example, you can recall Input Channel settings to Input Channels, but not to

Aux Sends. When the selected memory and currently selected channel don’t correspond, a

warning triangle and the word “CONFLICT” appear in the STORED FROM box.

Preset memory #0, “Reset(–∞dB),” resets all parameters of the currently selected channel to

their initial values and sets the channel level to –∞ dB. Preset memory #1, “Reset (0dB),”

also resets all parameters, but sets the channel level to 0 dB (i.e., nominal).

SEL CH: This indicates the currently selected channel.

CURRENT CONFIGURATION: If the currently selected channel is an Input Channel,

Surround mode and Aux conﬁguration information is displayed here.

Level meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel

and its horizontal or vertical partner.

STORED FROM: This indicates the channel whose settings were originally stored in the

selected memory. If the currently selected channel is an Input channel, Pan mode and Aux

pairing information is also displayed.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Oper-

ation” on page 139.

Input Patch Library 141

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Input Patch Library

Input Patch settings can be stored in the Input Patch library, which contains 1 preset mem-

ory and 32 user memories. See page 61 for information on Input Patch settings.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button to select the Input Patch

Library page.

When storing, the current Input Patch settings are stored to the selected memory.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Oper-

ation” on page 139.

Output Patch Library

Output Patch settings can be stored in the Output Patch library, which contains 1 preset

memory and 32 user memories. See page 63 for information on Output Patch settings.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button to select the Output Patch

Library page.

When storing, the current Output Patch settings are stored to the selected memory.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Oper-

ation” on page 139.

142 Chapter 14—Libraries

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

GEQ Library

GEQ settings can be stored in the GEQ library, which contains 1 preset memory and 128

user memories. See page 155 for information on using the GEQs.

1 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [DISPLAY] button to select the Graphic Equalizer

Library page.

2 Press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS] button, and use the

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–6] buttons to select the GEQs.

When storing, the settings of the currently selected GEQ, indicated in the upper-left corner,

are stored to the selected memory.

CURRENT CURVE: This is the response curve of the currently selected GEQ.

CURVE: This displays the response curve in the currently selected memory.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Oper-

ation” on page 139.

Effects Library

Effects settings can be stored in the Effects library, which contains 52 preset memories and

76 user memories. See page 148 for information on using the Effects.

1 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [DISPLAY] button to select the Effect Library

page.

2 Press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button, and use the

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] buttons to select the internal effects processors.

When storing, the settings of the currently selected internal effects processor, indicated in

the upper-left corner, are stored to the selected memory.

EFFECT NAME: This is the name of the previously recalled Effects memory.

Bus to Stereo Library 143

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

TYPE: This is the effects type used in the previously recalled Effects memory. Its I/O con-

ﬁguration is shown below this.

Level meters: These meters indicate the output levels of the currently selected Effects

processor. There are eight output meters for Effects processors #1 and #2, and two output

meters for Effects processors #3 through #8.

EFFECT TYPE: This is the effects type in the selected memory. Its I/O conﬁguration is

shown below this.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Oper-

ation” on page 139.

Bus to Stereo Library

Bus to Stereo settings can be stored in the Bus to Stereo library, which contains 1 preset

memory and 32 user memories. See page 87 for information on Bus to Stereo routing.

1 Use the ROUTING [DISPLAY] button to select the Bus to Stereo Library page.

When storing, the current Bus Out to Stereo Out settings are stored to the selected memory.

CURRENT CONFIGURATION: Bus Out pairing information for the current conﬁgura-

tion is displayed here.

LIBRARY CONFIGURATION: Bus Out pairing information for the conﬁguration stored

in the currently selected memory is displayed here.

Only memories whose Bus Out pairing conﬁguration matches the current conﬁguration

can be recalled. When the current conﬁguration and the selected memory don’t match, the

word “CONFLICT” appear in the LIBRARY CONFIGURATION box.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Oper-

ation” on page 139.

144 Chapter 14—Libraries

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Gate Library

Input Channel Gate settings can be stored in the Gate library, which contains 4 preset mem-

ories and 124 user memories. See page 69 for information on gating Input Channels.

1 Use the DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to select the Gate Library page.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and the [SEL] but-

tons to select Input Channels.

When storing, the Gate settings of the currently selected Input Channel, indicated in the

upper-right corner, are stored to the selected memory. When recalling, the Gate settings in

the selected memory are applied to the currently selected Input Channel.

CURRENT TYPE: This indicates the current Gate type of the currently selected channel.

CURRENT CURVE: This is the Gate curve of the currently selected channel.

GR meters: These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the

Gate, and the levels of the currently selected channel and its adjacent channel. If Pair mode

for the currently selected channel is set to Vertical, the level of its counterpart on the adja-

cent Layer is displayed.

The type (Gate or Ducking) and curve of the currently selected memory is displayed to the

right of the memory list.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Oper-

ation” on page 139.

Comp Library 145

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Comp Library

Comp settings can be stored in the Comp library, which contains 36 preset memories and

92 user memories. See page 113 for information on the Comps.

1 Use the DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to select the Comp Library page.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and the [SEL] buttons to select chan-

nels.

When storing, the Comp settings of the currently selected channel, indicated in the

upper-right corner, are stored to the selected memory. When recalling, the Comp settings

in the selected memory are applied to the currently selected channel.

CURRENT TYPE: This indicates the current Comp type of the currently selected channel.

CURRENT CURVE: This is the Comp curve of the currently selected channel.

GR meters: These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the

Comp, and the levels of the currently selected channel and its adjacent channel. If Pair mode

for the currently selected channel is set to Vertical, the level of its counterpart on the adja-

cent Layer is displayed.

The type (Comp, Expand, Comp Soft, Comp Hard) and curve of the currently selected

memory is displayed to the right of the memory list.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Oper-

ation” on page 139.

146 Chapter 14—Libraries

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

EQ Library

Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out EQ settings can be stored

in the EQ library, which contains 40 preset memories and 160 user memories. See page 107

for information on EQ’ing.

1 Use the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button to select the EQ Library page.

2 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and the [SEL] buttons to select chan-

nels.

When storing, the EQ settings of the currently selected channel, indicated in the upper-left

and right corners, are stored to the selected memory. When recalling, the EQ settings in the

selected memory are applied to the currently selected channel.

CURRENT TYPE: This indicates the current EQ type (TYPE I or TYPE II) for the cur-

rently selected channel.

CURRENT CURVE: This is the EQ curve of the currently selected channel.

Level meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel

and its horizontal or vertical partner.

CURVE: This displays the EQ curve in the currently selected memory.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Oper-

ation” on page 139.

Automix Library 147

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Automix Library

Up to 16 Automixes can be stored in the Automix library. See page 164 for information on

using Automix.

1 Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to select the Automix Memory page.

When storing, the current Automix is stored to the selected memory.

TITLE: This is the title of the current Automix.

CURRENT: This is the size of the current Automix.

FREE: This is the amount of free memory for storing the current Automix.

SIZE: This is the size of the selected Automix memory.

PROTECT: To protect the contents of the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER].

A padlock icon appears next to the titles of memories that are write-protected. Automixes

cannot be stored to write-protected memories.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Oper-

ation” on page 139.

Surround Monitor Library

Surround Monitor settings can be stored in the Surround Monitor library, which contains

1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See page 134 for information on Surround Moni-

toring.

1 Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to select the Surround Monitor Library

page.

When storing, the current Surround Monitor settings are stored to the selected memory.

For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Oper-

ation” on page 139.

148 Chapter 15—Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

15 Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs

About the Effects

The DM2000 features eight internal multi-effects processors, offering a whole host of effects

types, including reverbs, delays, modulation-based effects, combination effects, and multi-

channel effects designed especially for use with surround sound.

Effects processors 3–8 feature assignable stereo inputs and outputs. Processors #1 and #2,

which are intended for use with the multichannel surround effects, feature eight assignable

inputs and outputs. Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various sources,

including the inputs and outputs of other Effects processors, allowing you to chain proces-

sors together in series.

The output signal levels of the currently selected Effects processor can be metered on the

Effects Edit page. The input and output signal levels of all Effects processors can be metered

on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103 for more information.

Effects settings can be stored in the Effects library, which contains 52 preset memories and

76 user memories. See “Effects Library” on page 142 for more information.

Patching Effects Processors

Effects processor inputs can be fed from the Aux Sends, Input and Output Channel Insert

Outs, or the outputs of another Effects processor. See “Patching Effects Inputs” on page 62

for more information.

Effects processor outputs can be patched to the Input Channels, Input and Output Channel

Insert Ins, or the inputs of another Effects processor. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for

more information.

Preset Effects & Types

The following tables list the preset effects and types. See page 264 for detailed parameter

information.

Reverbs

Delays

# Preset Name Type Description

Reverb Hall

REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate

Reverb Room

REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate

Reverb Stage

REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals, with gate

Reverb Plate

REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate

Early Ref.

EARLY REF. Early reﬂections without the subsequent reverb

Gate Reverb

GATE REVERB Gated early reﬂections

Reverse Gate

REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reﬂections

# Preset Name Type Description

Mono Delay

MONO DELAY Simple mono delay

Stereo Delay

STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay

Mod.delay

MOD.DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation

Delay LCR

DELAY LCR 3-tap (left, center, right) delay

Echo

ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback

Preset Effects & Types 149

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Modulation-based Effects

Guitar Effects

Dynamic Effects

Combination Effects

# Preset Name Type Description

Chorus

CHORUS Chorus

Flange

FLANGE Flanger

Symphonic

SYMPHONIC

Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more

complex modulation than normal chorus

Phaser

PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter

Auto Pan

AUTO PAN Auto-panner

Tremolo

TREMOLO Tremolo

HQ.Pitch

HQ.PITCH Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results

Dual Pitch

DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter

Rotary

ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation

Ring Mod.

RING MOD. Ring modulator

Mod.Filter

MOD.FILTER Modulated ﬁlter

# Preset Name Type Description

Distortion

DISTORTION Distortion

Amp Simulate

AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation

# Preset Name Type Description

Dyna.Filter

DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled ﬁlter

Dyna.Flange

DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled ﬂanger

Dyna.Phaser

DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter

# Preset Name Type Description

Rev+Chorus

REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel

Rev->Chorus

REV->CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series

Rev+Flange

REV+FLANGE Reverb and ﬂanger in parallel

Rev->Flange

REV->FLANGE Reverb and ﬂanger in series

Rev+Sympho.

REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel

Rev->Sympho.

REV->SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series

Rev->Pan

REV->PAN Reverb and auto-pan in series

Delay+ER.

DELAY+ER. Delay and early reﬂections in parallel

Delay->ER.

DELAY->ER. Delay and early reﬂections in series

Delay+Rev

DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel

Delay->Rev

DELAY->REV Delay and reverb in series

Dist->Delay

DIST->DELAY Distortion and delay in series

150 Chapter 15—Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Others

Editing Effects

The internal effects processors can be edited as follows.

1 Press the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button.

2 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [1–8] buttons to select the internal effects pro-

cessors.

3 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Effects Library

page, and recall a preset effects memory that contains the effects type that

you want.

See “Effects Library” on page 142 for more information.

4 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Effects Edit page.

The available effects parameters depends on the effects type currently selected. See page 148

for detailed parameter information.

5 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them.

EFFECT NAME: This is the name of the previously recalled Effects memory.

# Preset Name Type Description

Multi.Filter

MULTI.FILTER 3-band parallel ﬁlter (24 dB/octave)

Freeze

FREEZE Simple sampler

Stereo Reverb

ST REVERB Stereo reverb

1. These effects can be recalled only to Effects processors #1 and #2.

Reverb 5.1

REVERB 5.1

2. Since these effects types require four DSPs, the total number of Effects processors is reduced by

three when one of these types is used. For example, if REVERB 5.1 is used with Effects processor #1,

only processors 2–5 are available. And if, for example, REVERB 5.1 is used with both Effects processor

#1 and #2, then processors 3–8 are not available.

6-channel reverb for 5.1 surround

Octa Reverb

OCTA REVERB

8-channel reverb for 7.1 surround

Auto Pan 5.1

AUTO PAN 5.1 6-channel auto pan for 5.1 surround

Chorus 5.1

CHORUS 5.1 6-channel chorus for 5.1 surround

Flange 5.1

FLANGE 5.1 6-channel ﬂanger for 5.1 surround

Sympho. 5.1

SYMPHO. 5.1 6-channel symphonic effect for 5.1 surround

M. Band Dyna.

M. BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor

Comp 5.1

COMP 5.1

Multi-band compressor for 5.1 surround

Compand 5.1

COMPAND 5.1

Multi-band compander for 5.1 surround

Editing Effects 151

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

TYPE: This is the effects type used in the previously recalled Effects memory. Its I/O con-

ﬁguration is shown below this.

MIX BALANCE: This is used to set the balance between the wet and dry signals. When set

to 0%, only the dry signal is heard. When set to 100%, only the wet signal is heard.

BYPASS: This button is used to bypass the currently selected Effects processor.

TEMPO: These parameters, which appear only when an effects type with a delay parame-

ter, or a modulation-based effects type with a Frequency parameter is selected, are used to

automatically calculate and set the delay time, or modulation frequency relative to the spec-

iﬁed tempo and note length. Use the Note parameter to specify the note length, and use the

BPM control to specify the tempo. You can also specify the tempo by tapping the TAP

TEMPO button, which calculates the tempo based on the time interval between two taps.

When the MIDI CLK button is on, the tempo is derived from the MIDI Clock information

received at the speciﬁed MIDI Rx port. See “MIDI I/O” on page 182.

Meters: These are output meters for the currently selected Effects processor. There are

eight meters when processors #1 or #2 are selected; two when processors 3–8 are selected.

Effects parameters can also be adjusted by using Parameter controls 1–4. Use the Parameter

Up/Down buttons to select the rows of parameters. The parameters in the currently selected

row appear highlighted. Up to 16 parameters can be displayed at a time, and if more are

available, an up or down arrow is displayed.

When a Y56K card effect, or an internal effects processor is inserted in the currently selected

channel, when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button is pressed, the cor-

responding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] button indicator ﬂashes, and the corresponding

Effects, or Plug-In edit page appears. If it’s a Y56K card that’s inserted, the [PLUG-INS] but-

ton indicator also ﬂashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS]

button indicator also ﬂashes. This applies only to effects that are inserted into channels. If

there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected channel, a message appears.

1234

Parameter controls 1–4

Parameter Up/Down

152 Chapter 15—Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

About Plug-Ins

There are two types of Plug-Ins: Waves Plug-Ins and User Deﬁned Plug-Ins. Waves Plug-Ins

are available on Y56K cards, which need to be installed in the DM2000’s mini YGDAI Slots

(Slots 4–6 only). See your Yamaha dealer for details. User Deﬁned Plug-Ins can be used to

control up to 32 user deﬁnable parameters via MIDI Control Change or Parameter Change

messages on an external MIDI device, such as an external effects processor. Plug-In param-

eters can be controlled by using the four Parameter controls below the display. Plug-In

parameter settings are stored in Scenes, for snapshot-style automation.

When installing Y56K cards, mini YGDAI Slots 4–6 correspond to Plug-Ins 4–6, so if you

install, for example, a Y56K card in Slot #4, it’s automatically conﬁgured as Plug-In #4.

DM2000 signals are patched through to the Y56K card’s effect chains just like any other sig-

nal is patched through to a Slot Input or Output. Slot Outputs (i.e., effect chain inputs) can

be fed from the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, Stereo Out, or the Input and Output

Channel Insert Outs. Slot Inputs (i.e., effect chain outputs) can be fed to the Input Chan-

nels, or the Input and Output Channel Insert Ins. See “Input & Output Patching” on

page 61.

Conﬁguring Plug-Ins

Plug-Ins can be conﬁgured as follows.

If you’ve installed a Y56K card into one of the Slots, the DM2000 conﬁgures itself automat-

ically and no further conﬁguration settings are required.

1 Press the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [PLUG-INS] button.

2 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Plug-In Setup

page.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

TARGET: These are used to assign a target to each of the eight Plug-Ins. Parameters for the

speciﬁed target appear on the Plug-In Edit page when that Plug-In is selected by using the

EFFECTS PLUG-INS [1–8] buttons. In addition to using the cursor buttons, Plug-Ins can

also be selected on this page by using the EFFECTS PLUG-INS [1–8] buttons.

TITLE: If a Y56K card is installed, its name is displayed here. If the target is set to USER

DEFINED, the speciﬁed title of the bank currently selected on the Plug-In Edit page is dis-

played.

PORT: If a Y56K card is installed, its Slot number is displayed here. If the target is set to

USER DEFINED, you can specify the Plug-Ins MIDI port as MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8,

or SLOT1 1–8. Plug-In MIDI Ports can also be set on the MIDI/To Host Setup page. See

“MIDI I/O” on page 182 for more information.

Plug-In Setup settings are stored in the Setup data. See “Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMe-

dia” on page 231 for more information.

Editing Plug-Ins 153

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Editing Plug-Ins

Plug-Ins can be edited as follows. The settings of Waves Plug-Ins and User Deﬁned Plug-In

banks can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler, by using MIDI

Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored to SmartMedia (see page 231).

If you’ve installed a Y56K card into one of the Slots, display pages especially for the Waves

card are displayed when the corresponding Plug-In is selected. See the Waves documenta-

tion for more information. The following explanation applies only to User Deﬁned

Plug-Ins.

1 Press the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [PLUG-INS] button.

2 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [1–8] buttons to select the Plug-Ins.

3 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Plug-In Edit page.

4 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

TRANSMIT: This enables and disables MIDI data transmission for the currently selected

Plug-In.

INITIALIZE: This initializes the settings of the currently selected bank.

BANK: These buttons are used to select the parameter banks of the currently selected

Plug-In. Up to four parameter settings can be stored in each bank, making a total of 32

parameters per Plug-In.

TITLE: This is used to enter a title (up to 16 characters long) for each bank. To enter a title

for the currently selected bank, select this and press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window

appears, enter a title, and press OK when you’ve ﬁnished. See “Title Edit Window” on page

38 for more information.

PARAMETER ID/NAME: This is used to select the four rotary controls at the bottom of

the Plug-In Edit page for editing, and to enter a name (up to 16 characters long) for each

control. Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a Parameter ID from 1–4,

and then press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a title, and press OK

when you’ve ﬁnished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information.

DATA: This is used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be transmitted when

each parameter control is adjusted. Use the PARAMETER ID/NAME parameter to select a

Parameter ID from 1–4, and then edit as necessary. Data values can be set in hex from 00 to

FF. The VAL setting is the value of the parameter control. The END setting speciﬁes the end

of the data. NOP means no data is transmitted.

LEARN: This button is used to turn on and off the Learn function, which can be used to

learn what MIDI messages are transmitted by external MIDI devices when their controls or

parameters are adjusted. When on, received MIDI messages are displayed by the DATA

parameter. Only the ﬁrst 16 bytes of data, starting with a Status bit, are displayed.

154 Chapter 15—Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

MIN/MAX: These parameters determine the minimum and maximum values of the

MIDI data transmitted when each parameter control is adjusted. Use the PARAMETER

ID/NAME parameter to select a Parameter ID from 1–4, and then edit as necessary.

VAL: This is used to select the format for converting parameter control values to the DATA

parameter’s VAL setting. It applies to the currently selected bank. The available options are

listed in the following table.

When the controls at the bottom of the Plug-In Edit page are operated, the speciﬁed MIDI

data, along with the value of the parameter control, is transmitted.

Plug-In parameters can also be adjusted by using Parameter controls 1–4, which corre-

spond to the four parameters shown at the bottom of the Plug-In Edit page.

When a Y56K card effect, or an internal effects processor is inserted in the currently selected

channel, when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button is pressed, the cor-

responding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] button indicator ﬂashes, and the corresponding

Effects, or Plug-In edit page appears. If it’s a Y56K card that’s inserted, the [PLUG-INS] but-

ton indicator also ﬂashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS]

button indicator also ﬂashes. This applies only to effects that are inserted into channels. If

there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected channel, a message appears.

The parameter settings, and the target and bank for each Plug-In are stored in Scenes. When

a Scene is recalled, if the Plug-In’s Target is the same as when the Scene was stored, the

parameters are set accordingly and the corresponding MIDI data is transmitted (so long as

the REMOTE parameter is set to ENABLED). If the Target is not the same, the parameters

are set accordingly but no MIDI data is transmitted.

VAL Description VAL count

One byte

Transmit the lower 7 bits of the parameter value as 1 word Up to one VAL

MSB/LSB

Transmit the lower 14 bits of the parameter value in 7-bit units

starting from the upper byte

Up to two VAL’s

LSB/MSB

Transmit the lower 14 bits of the parameter value in 7-bit units

starting from the lower byte

Up to two VAL’s

2 Nibbles M

Transmit the lower 8 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units,

consecutively from the highest data

Up to two VAL’s

3 Nibbles M

Transmit the lower 12 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units,

consecutively from the highest data

Up to three VAL’s

4 Nibbles M

Transmit the parameter value in 4 bit units, consecutively from

the highest data

Up to four VAL’s

2 Nibbles L

Transmit the lower 8 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units,

consecutively from the lowest data

Up to two VAL’s

3 Nibbles L

Transmit the lower 12 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units,

consecutively from the lowest data

Up to three VAL’s

4 Nibbles L

Transmit the parameter value in 4-bit units, consecutively from

the lowest data

Up to four VAL’s

1234

Parameter controls 1–4

About the GEQs 155

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

About the GEQs

The DM2000 features six 31-band graphic equalizers that can be inserted into the Bus Outs,

Aux Sends, or the left or right channels of the Matrix Sends or Stereo Out. GEQs can be

linked for simultaneous operation. GEQ settings can be stored in the GEQ library, which

contains 1 preset memory and 128 user memories. See “GEQ Library” on page 142 for more

information.

Editing GEQs

GEQs can be edited as follows.

1 Press the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS] button.

2 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [1–6] buttons to select the GEQs.

3 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the GEQ Edit page.

4 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

ON/OFF: This is used to turn on and off the currently selected GEQ.

INSERT: This selects the Output Channel (Bus Out, Aux Send, or left or right channel of a

Matrix Send or the Stereo Out) into which the GEQ is inserted. This parameter can also be

set on the Output Channel Insert page (see page 111) or the Graphic Equalizer Insert page

(see page 66).

LINK: These buttons are used to link the currently selected GEQ with another GEQ for

simultaneous operation. The buttons of GEQs that are already linked are unavailable. When

you press a button to link to a GEQ, the settings of the currently selected GEQ are copied to

that GEQ.

LIMIT: This determines the maximum amount of boost and cut for the currently selected

GEQ. It can be set to ±15 dB, ±12 dB, ±6 dB, or –24 dB.

FLAT: Pressing this resets all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB.

Meters: These meters display pre-GEQ and post-GEQ signal levels.

CURVE: This graphically displays the settings of the currently selected GEQ.

Faders: These are used to boost and cut the level of each band. The currently selected band

can be reset to 0 dB by pressing [ENTER].

FREQUENCY: This indicates the frequency of the currently selected band.

GAIN: This indicates the gain setting of the currently selected band.

156 Chapter 15—Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

GEQ parameters can also be adjusted by using Parameter controls #1 and #4. Parameter

control #1 selects the frequency bands. Parameter control #4 resets the gain of the selected

band. Parameter controls #2 and #3 are inactive.

1 234

Band select Gain

Scene Memories 157

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

16 Scene Memories

About Scene Memories

Scene memories allow you to store a snapshot of virtually every DM2000 mix setting in a

Scene. There are 99 Scene memories, and they can be titled for easy identiﬁcation. A fade

time of up to 30 seconds can be set individually for each Input and Output Channel fader.

Recall Safe can be used to exclude individual Input and Output Channels and certain

parameters from Scene recalls. Stored Scenes can be sorted as necessary.

Scenes can be stored and recalled by using the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] and [RECALL]

buttons, or by using the Scene Memory page. Scenes can be assigned MIDI Program

Change numbers and recalled remotely. See “A ssigning Scenes to Program Changes” on

page 185 for more information. When a Scene is recalled on the DM2000, the Program

Change number assigned to that Scene is transmitted, which can be used to recall programs,

effects, etc., on other MIDI equipment. In addition, manual Scene recalls can be recorded

on-the-ﬂy in an Automix. When that Automix is replayed, the Scenes are recalled automat-

ically. See “Automix” on page 164 for more information.

Scene memories can be stored to external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler, by using

MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187). They can also be stored to SmartMedia (see page 231).

What’s Stored in a Scene?

The following items are stored in Scenes: Input and Output Channel settings, Effects set-

tings, GEQ settings, Group and Pair settings, Fade Time settings, and Scene title.

Edit Buffer & Edit Indicator

The Edit Buffer is where the current mix settings (i.e., the current Scene) are stored. When

a Scene is stored, the mix settings in the Edit Buffer are written to the selected Scene mem-

ory. When a Scene is recalled, the contents of the selected Scene memory are copied to the

Edit Buffer, making them the current mix settings.

When a parameter is adjusted after a Scene has been recalled, the Edit indicators—the dot

on the SCENE MEMORY display and “EDIT” on the display—appear, indicating that the

current mix settings (i.e., those in the Edit Buffer) no longer match those of the Scene that

was recalled last, as illustrated below.

The contents of the Edit Buffer are retained while the DM2000 is turned off.

Scene Memories #0 & #U

Scene memory #0 is a special read-only memory that contains the initial settings of all mix

parameters. It can be recalled, but not stored. When you want to reset all mix parameters to

their initial, or default values, recall Scene memory #0. Input Channel faders are set to either

–∞dB or nominal, depending on the Initial Data Nominal preference (see page 235).

Scene #2 has just been recalled, so the

contents of the Edit Buffer match those of

Scene #2 and the Edit indicators are off.

A parameter has been adjusted since Scene

#2 was recalled, so the Edit indicators

appear, indicating that the contents of the

Edit Buffer no longer match those of Scene

#2.

SCENE MEMORY display

Display

158 Chapter 16—Scene Memories

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Scene memory #U is a special read-only memory that allows you to undo and redo Scene

memory recall and store operations. After recalling a Scene memory, you can revert to the

previously recalled Scene memory by recalling Scene memory #U. After storing a Scene

memory, you can revert it to its previous contents by recalling Scene memory #U. You can

redo either of these undo operations by recalling Scene memory #U again.

Auto Scene Memory Update

Normally, when a Scene is recalled and then edited, that Scene must be stored again in order

to save the edits. If the Scene MEM Auto Update preference on page 235 is on, however,

those edits are stored automatically in a Shadow memory. There’s one Shadow memory for

each Original Scene memory. The contents of the Original and Shadow memories can be

recalled alternately, which is useful for doing A/B comparisons.

When a Scene is recalled, the current mix settings are automatically stored in the Shadow

memory of the Scene memory that was recalled last. When you return to that Scene, you

can recall the Shadow or Original memory alternately.

While the Scene MEM Auto Update preference is on, Shadow memories, not Original

memories are recalled initially. To recall an Original memory, recall its Shadow memory

ﬁrst, and while the Edit indicators are both off, recall again. This time the Original memory

is recalled.

When recalling Original and Shadow memories, you can easily tell which is currently active

by the Edit indicators, which are off when an Original memory is active, and on when a

Shadow memory is active. Note that when a Scene is stored, the contents of the Original and

Shadow memories will be the same and the Edit indicators will be off regardless of which

memory is active.

When storing data to SmartMedia, Shadow memories are automatically stored along with

their Original memories. When recalling Scenes in an Automix, only the Original memories

can be recalled. When recalling Scenes via MIDI Program Change messages, Original and

Shadow memories can be recalled, and operation is the same as for recalling Scenes by using

the DM2000’s SCENE MEMORY buttons or the Scene Memory page.

Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons 159

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons

As each Scene memory is selected, its number ﬂashes on the SCENE MEMORY display, and

its number and title ﬂash in the Scene memory section of the display. These stop ﬂashing

when the selected Scene memory is either stored or recalled. Empty Scene memories have

the title “No Data!” and cannot be recalled. You cannot store to Scene memories that are

write-protected.

Storing Scenes

1 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene

memory.

2 Press the [STORE] button.

The Title Edit window appears. This window can be disabled by the Store Conﬁrmation

preference on page 235.

3 Enter a title.

See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information.

4 Press OK on the Title Edit window.

The current Scene is stored to the selected Scene memory.

You can undo Scene stores, reverting to the previous mix settings, by recalling Scene mem-

ory #U (“Ud” on the SCENE MEMORY display).

Recalling Scenes

1 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene

memory.

2 Press the [RECALL] button.

The contents of the selected Scene memory are recalled and all mix parameters are set

accordingly. If the Recall Conﬁrmation preference is on, a conﬁrmation window appears

before a Scene is recalled.

You can undo Scene recalls, reverting to the previous mix settings, by recalling Scene mem-

ory #U (“Ud” on the SCENE MEMORY display).

Warning: When storing Scenes, make sure that there are no settings in the Edit Buffer that

you do not want to store. Perhaps some settings have been adjusted accidentally, or by someone

else. If you are not sure of the Edit Buffer’s exact contents, recall the last Scene, make the adjust-

ments that you really want, and then store the Scene. You may want to store the current Scene

to an unused Scene memory just in case.

160 Chapter 16—Scene Memories

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Using the Scene Memory Page

On the Scene Memory page you can store, recall, write-protect, delete, and edit the titles of

Scenes.

1 Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate the Scene Memory

page.

2 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a Scene memory.

A Scene memory is selected when it appears inside the dotted box.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the following buttons.

TITLE EDIT: To edit the title of the selected Scene memory, select this and press [ENTER].

When the Title Edit window appears, edit the title, and press OK when you’ve ﬁnished. See

“Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information.

RECALL: To recall the contents of the selected Scene memory, select this and press

[ENTER]. The contents of the selected Scene memory are recalled, all parameters are set

accordingly, the Scene memory’s number and title stop ﬂashing, and the Edit indicators go

off. If the Recall Conﬁrmation preference is on, a conﬁrmation window appears before a

Scene is recalled.

STORE: To store the current Scene to the selected Scene memory, select this and press

[ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a title, and press OK. See “Title Edit

Window” on page 38 for more information. When a Scene is stored, the Scene memory’s

number and title stop ﬂashing, and the Edit indicators go off. You can stop the Title Edit

window from appearing by turning off the Store Conﬁrmation preference on page 235.

CLEAR: To delete the contents and title of the selected Scene memory, select this, press

[ENTER], and the press YES when the conﬁrmation window appears.

PROTECT: To protect the contents of the selected Scene memory, select this and press

[ENTER]. A padlock icon appears next to the titles of Scene memories that are write-pro-

tected. Scenes cannot be stored to write-protected Scene memories. While the PROTECT

button is selected, the selected Scene memory can be protected and unprotected by using

the INC/DEC buttons.

Fading Scenes 161

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Fading Scenes

Fade times can be speciﬁed for individual Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix

Sends, and the Stereo Out. The fade time determines the time it takes the Input and Output

Channel faders to move to their new positions when a Scene is recalled. You must store these

settings in a Scene beforehand in order for them to take effect. Fade time settings can be

speciﬁed for each Scene individually.

1 Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate a Fade Time page.

The Fade Time parameters for Input Channels 1–48 appear on the Input CH1–48 Fade

Time page, for Input Channels 49–96 appear on the Input CH49–96 Fade Time page, and

those for the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out appear on the Output

Fade Time page.

2 Use the cursor buttons or [SEL] buttons to select the individual Fade Time

parameters, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them.

You can copy the currently selected Input or Output Channel Fade Time setting to all Input

or Output Channels respectively by double-clicking the [ENTER] button.

The Long name of the channel whose Fade Time parameter is currently selected appears in

the upper-right corner of the page. When a channel is selected by using the [SEL] buttons,

its Long name also appears in the upper-right corner of the display.

The Fade Time can be set from 0 to 30 seconds in 0.1 second steps.

You can reset all Fade Time parameters to zero by selecting the ALL CLEAR button, and

then pressing [ENTER].

162 Chapter 16—Scene Memories

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Recalling Scenes Safely

When a Scene is recalled, all mix parameters are set accordingly. In some situations, you

may want to retain the settings of certain parameters on certain channels, and this can be

achieved by using the Recall Safe function. Recall Safe can be set individually for Input

Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out.

1 Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate the Recall Safe page.

2 Select the SAFE ENABLED/DISABLED button, and use the [ENTER] button or

the INC/DEC buttons to enable or disable the Recall Safe function.

3 Use the cursor buttons, [SEL] buttons, or Parameter wheel to select channels,

and use the [ENTER] button or the INC/DEC buttons to set them as Safe chan-

nels.

When a channel is selected by using the [SEL] buttons, its Long name appears in the

upper-right corner of the display. When a channel is Safe, its number appears highlighted.

4 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the MODE parameters,

and the [ENTER] button to set them.

The MODE buttons determine which Safe channel parameters are unaffected by Scene

recalls. ALL (all parameters. This option is mutually exclusive with the following options),

FADER (faders), ON (On/Off parameters), PAN (Pan parameters), EQ (EQ parameters),

COMP (Comp parameters), GATE (Gate parameters), AUX (Aux/Matrix Send levels),

AUX ON (Aux/Matrix Send On/Off parameters).

The EFFECT and GEQ buttons operate independently of the MODE buttons and can be

used to make the effects and GEQs Safe.

Recall Safe settings are stored in Scene memories.

Sorting Scenes 163

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Sorting Scenes

Scene can be sorted by using the Scene Memory Sort function.

1 Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate the Scene Memory Sort

page.

2 Use the cursor button to the select the SOURCE list, and use the Parameter

wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to select the Scene memory you want to

move.

3 Use the cursor button to the select the DESTINATION list, and use the Param-

eter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to select the position to which you want

to move the source Scene memory.

4 Press [ENTER] to move the source Scene memory to the speciﬁed destina-

tion.

The [ENTER] button executes the Sort function regardless of its position.

164 Chapter 17—Automix

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

17 Automix

About Automix

The DM2000’s Automix function allows dynamic automation of virtually all mix parame-

ters, including Levels, Mutes, Pan, Surround Pan, Aux/Matrix Sends, Aux/Matrix Send

Mutes, EQ, effects, and Plug-Ins. You can specify which of these parameters will be

recorded, and punch channels in and out of recording on-the-ﬂy. User Deﬁned Remote

Layer operations, and scene and library recall operations can also be automated, combining

snap shot and dynamic mix automation. Events are recorded in real time and can be edited

either ofﬂine, with 1/4 frame accuracy, or by rerecording with punch in/out. Automix can

be synchronized to an external timecode source or to the internal timecode generator.

Up to 16 Automixes can be stored in the Automix library. See “Automix Library” on page

147 for more information. They can also be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a

MIDI data ﬁler, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored to SmartMedia (see

page 231).

What’s Recorded in an Automix?

The following parameters can be recorded in an Automix.

Parameter

Input

Channels

Bus Out

Masters

Aux Send

Masters

Matrix

Send

Masters

Stereo Out

Channel Levels (faders) OOOOO

Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) OOOOO

Pan O ————

Surround Pan O ————

EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off) OOOOO

Aux Send 1–12 levels O ————

Aux Send 1–12 mutes O ————

Matrix Send 1–4 levels — O O — O

Matrix Send 1–4 mutes — O O — O

Scene recalls —

EQ, Gate, Comp, Effects, Channel

library recalls

—

Effect parameters

(certain parameters)

—

User Deﬁned Plug-Ins

(parameters 1–4)

—

User Deﬁned Remote Layers (fad-

ers, [ON], Encoders)

—

Automix Main Page 165

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Automix Main Page

This section explains the Automix Main page.

1 Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Automix Main page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

TITLE: This is the title of the current Automix.

DISABLED/ENABLED: This button is used to enable and disable the Automix function.

It works in unison with the AUTOMIX [ENABLE] button.

TIME CODE: This counter displays the current timecode position. If the optional

MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, the current timecode position is also displayed on

its TIME CODE counter.

FREE: The amount of free Automix memory remaining is displayed here in kilobytes, per-

cent, and graphically by a bargraph.

SIZE: The size of the current Automix and the size of any Automix data in the undo buffer

are displayed here in kilobytes.

OFFSET: This parameter can be used to specify an offset relative to the external timecode

source in hours, minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Specify a “+” value to move

events forward relative to the incoming timecode. Specify a “–” value to move events back-

wards relative to the incoming timecode. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently

selected digits to “00.”

INT START TIME: This parameter is used to set the start time of the internal timecode

generator in hours, minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Press the [ENTER] button to

reset the currently selected digits to “00.” The internal timecode generator is selected on the

Time Reference page (see page 171).

UPDATE: This button determines the fate of events that exist beyond the point at which

rerecording is stopped. When TO END is on, all events that exist beyond the point at which

rerecording is stopped for parameters that have been edited during the current pass are

erased. This function is useful when you want parameters to remain the same right through

to the end of the Automix. Events are erased only when the current pass is actually stopped,

not when a punch out occurs. When TO END is off, existing events are left as they are.

When TO END is on, the way in which Fader events are processed depends on the currently

selected Fader Edit mode and Edit Out mode. In the following table, the Fader Edit mode

is set to Absolute. If the Fader Edit mode is set to Relative, and the Edit Out mode is set to

either Takeover or Off, the fader will remain at a position relative to the position at which

recording is stopped.

166 Chapter 17—Automix

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

EDIT OUT: These buttons are used to set the Edit Out mode: Off, Takeover, or Return. The

Edit Out mode determines how rerecorded fader moves align with existing fader data at the

punch out point. Fader data includes Input Channel levels, Bus Out master levels, Aux Send

master levels, Matrix Send master levels, the Stereo Out level, and User Deﬁned Remote

Layer faders. The Edit Out modes are explained in the following table. The Edit Out mode

can also be set by using the AUTOMIX [RETURN] button. The Return Time is speciﬁed on

the Fader Edit page (see page 171).

TO END Return Takeover or Off

OFF

At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader

returns to the position speciﬁed by the existing fader

data, at the speed speciﬁed by the Time parameter on

the Fader Edit pages.

At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader

remains at the same position until the next Fader

event in the existing data occurs.

At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader

returns to the position speciﬁed by the existing fader

data, at the speed speciﬁed by the Time parameter,

and all subsequent events are erased so that the fader

remains at that position right through to the end of

the Automix.

At the point at which recording is stopped, all subse-

quent events are erased so that the fader remains at

that position right through to the end of the Automix.

Off Return Takeover

At the punch out point, the fader

remains at the same position until the

next Fader event in the existing data

occurs.

At the punch out point, the fader returns

to the position speciﬁed by the existing

fader data, at the speed speciﬁed by the

Time parameter on the Fader Edit pages.

At the punch out point, recording con-

tinues until the fader position intersects

the existing fader data. If you are still

touching the fader knob at the actual

punch out point, the fader is disabled

until you release it.

In this example, punch out was per-

formed by pressing the [AUTO] button,

and the fader was moved manually

between the punch out and actual

punch out points.

Return time

Stop recording

Time

Existing data

Punch in

Fader edit

Stop recording

Time

Existing data

Punch in

Fader edit

Return time

Stop recording

Time

Existing data

Punch in

Fader edit

Stop recording

Time

Existing data

Punch in

Fader edit

Punch out

Time

Existing data

Punch in

Fader edit

Return time

Punch out

Time

Existing data

Punch in

Fader edit

Time

Punch out

Existing data

Actual punch out

Punch in

Fader edit

Automix Main Page 167

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

FADER EDIT: These buttons are used to set the Fader Edit mode: Absolute or Relative. The

Fader Edit mode determines how fader moves are rerecorded. It has no effect during the

ﬁrst recording pass. In Absolute mode, fader moves are rerecorded as absolute values and

existing fader data is erased. In Relative mode, fader moves are rerecorded relative to the

existing fader data.

Fader data includes Input Channel levels, Bus Out master levels, Aux Send master levels,

Matrix Send master levels, Stereo Out level, and User Deﬁned Remote Layer faders. The

Fader Edit mode can also be set by using the AUTOMIX [RELATIVE] button.

The following table explains Fader Edit mode operation (TO END: off. Edit Out: off)

TIME REFERENCE: This section displays the current timecode source and frame rate. If

you select this item and then press the [ENTER] button, you can jump directly to the Time

Reference page (see page 171).

OVERWRITE: These buttons determine which parameters can be recorded on the ﬁrst

pass, and rerecorded (i.e., overwritten) on subsequent passes. They can be set while record-

ing is in progress. Parameters for which the corresponding OVERWRITE button is not set,

cannot be edited while recording is in progress. They work in unison with the AUTOMIX

[FADER], [ON], [PAN], [SURROUND], [AUX], [AUX ON] & [EQ] buttons.

Scene and library recalls, and internal effects processors and Plug-Ins parameters can be

recorded regardless of the OVERWRITE settings.

NEW: This button is used to create a new Automix. When a new Automix is created, a

Scene recall event to recall the current Scene (i.e., the last Scene recalled) is automatically

inserted at the start of the Automix. You can edit this event so that another Scene is recalled.

This initial Scene is important because it sets all the mix parameters how you’d like them at

the beginning of the Automix. Without it, mix parameters would remain the same as when

Automix playback was stopped.

UNDO: This button is used to undo various Automix operations. During each recording

pass, when a new Automix is created, when an Automix is recalled, when an ofﬂine edit is

performed, or when the Undo function is used, the current Automix data is copied to the

Undo buffer, from which it can be retrieved by pressing UNDO while Automix is stopped.

This button works in unison with the AUTOMIX [ABORT/UNDO] button.

Absolute Relative

Fader edits are recorded as absolute values and

existing fader data between the punch in and out

points is erased.

Fader edits are rerecorded relative to the existing

fader data.

Parameter button Description

FADER

Channel faders (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Send masters, Matrix

Send masters, the Stereo Out, and User Deﬁned Layer faders)

Channel Mutes (ON/OFF), User Deﬁned Layer [ON] buttons

PAN

Input Channel Pan, User Deﬁned Layer Encoders

SURR

Input Channel Surround pan, LFE level, DIV parameter

AUX

Aux/Matrix Send 1–12 levels

AUX ON

Aux/Matrix Send 1–12 mutes

(F, Q, G, On/Off)

Punch out

Time

Existing data

Punch in

Fader edit

Punch out

Time

Existing data

Punch in

Fader edit

168 Chapter 17—Automix

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

AUTO REC: This button works the same as the REC button except that it remains on when

Automix recording is stopped. It appears highlighted while Auto Record mode is on. It

works in unison with the AUTOMIX [AUTO-REC] button.

REC: This button is used to engage Record-Ready mode, in which Automix recording starts

automatically as soon as the speciﬁed timecode source starts. Unlike the AUTO REC button,

however, it’s turned off when recording is stopped. It ﬂashes in Record-Ready mode, and is

highlighted during recording. This button can also be used to engage Automix recording

during playback. To do this, while the PLAY button is highlighted (i.e., during playback),

press the REC button (it ﬂashes in Record-Ready mode). Then press the PLAY button to

start recording. This button can also be used to stop recording. This button works in unison

with the AUTOMIX [REC] button.

PLAY: This button is used to start Automix recording and playback when the timecode

source is set to internal. When an external timecode source is selected, while the external

timecode is being received, recording and playback are started, and this button is turned on

automatically. If Automix is stopped by pressing the STOP or ABORT button, recording or

playback can be restarted by pressing this button so long as timecode is still being received.

This button can also be used in conjunction with the REC button to punch in recording

during Automix playback.

STOP: This button is used to stop Automix playback and recording. It appears highlighted

while Automix is stopped.

ABORT: This button is used to abort the current recording without updating the existing

Automix data. Automix recording can also be aborted by pressing the AUTOMIX

[ABORT/UNDO] button.

AUTOMIX Section

Certain Automix functions and parameters can be controlled by using the buttons in the

AUTOMIX section.

[DISPLAY] button: This button is used to select the following Automix pages: Main,

Memory, Fader Edit, Event Copy, and Event Edit.

[ENABLE] button: This button is used to enable and disable the Automix function. It

works in unison with the ENABLED/DISABLED button on the Automix Main page.

[REC] button: This button can be used to engage Record-Ready mode from stop, engage

recording during playback, and to stop recording. Its indicator ﬂashes in Record-Ready

mode, and lights continuously during recording.

[ABORT/UNDO] button: This button is used to abort Automix recording or playback.

While Automix is stopped, it performs the undo function, reverting to the Automix in the

Undo buffer. It works in unison with the ABORT and UNDO buttons on the Automix Main

and Memory pages.

[AUTO-REC] button: This button is used to turn on and off Auto Recording. Its indica-

tor lights up while Auto Record is on. It works in unison with the AUTO REC button on the

Automix Main and Memory pages.

OVERWRITE

FADER ON

PAN

EQAUX AUX

ENABLE

REC ABORT/

UNDO

AUTO-

REC

RETURN

RELATIVE

TOUCH

SENSE

DISPLAY

SUSPEND WRITE TOUCH LATCH READ TRIM OFF

SURROUND

AUTOMIX

Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons 169

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

[RETURN] button: This button is used to set the Edit Out mode. It works in unison with

the EDIT OUT RETURN buttons on the Automix Main and Memory pages. When its indi-

cator is on, Return mode is set. When its indicator is ﬂashing, Takeover mode is set. And

when its indicator is off, neither mode is set.

[RELATIVE] button: This button is used to set the Fader Edit mode. It works in unison

with the FADER EDIT buttons on the Automix Main and Memory pages. When its indica-

tor is off, Absolute mode is set. When its indicator is on, Relative mode is set.

[TOUCH SENSE] button: This button is used to turn on and off Fader Touch Sense. It

works in unison with the TOUCH SENSE buttons on the Fader Edit pages (see page 170).

[FADER], [ON], [PAN], [SURROUND], [AUX], [AUX ON] & [EQ] buttons:

These buttons determine which parameters can be recorded on the ﬁrst pass, and rere-

corded (i.e., overwritten) on subsequent passes. They work in unison with their counter-

parts on the Automix Main and Memory pages.

Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons

The channel strip [AUTO] buttons are used to arm channels in Record-Ready

mode, and to punch channels in and out during recording.

The [AUTO] button indicators operate as follows:

• Off: Automix playback disabled

•Green: Automix stopped or playing

•Orange: Record-Ready mode

•Red: Recording (even for individual parameters, see page 175)

• Flashing red: Takeover in progress

• Flashing green: indicates that a fader is inactive, for example, when you continue touching

a fader after actual punch out has occurred when using the Takeover Edit Out mode.

Automix Memory Page

Automixes can be stored and recalled on the Automix Memory page. The lower half of this

page is identical to the Automix Main page.

1 Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Automix Memory page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

The Automix library functions are explained in “Automix Library” on page 147. The

remaining items are the same as on the Main page and are explained on page 165.

AUTO

170 Chapter 17—Automix

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Fader Edit Pages

During playback, fader positions are displayed graphically as black bars on the Fader Edit

page, of which there are two. The CH1–48 Fader Edit page displays Faders positions for

Input Channel 1 through 48, the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Stereo Out. The CH49–96 Fader

Edit page displays faders positions for Input Channel 49 through 96, the Bus Outs, Aux

Sends, and Matrix Sends. When the Fader mode is set to Fader, Input and Output Channel

levels are displayed. When it’s set to Aux/Mtrx mode, Aux/Matrix Send levels are displayed.

During rerecording, arrows are displayed next to each fader bar. A downward arrow indi-

cates that the current fader position is higher than that speciﬁed by the existing fader data.

An upward arrow indicates that the current fader position is lower than that speciﬁed by the

existing fader data.

1 Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Fader Edit pages.

The CH1–48 Fader Edit page is shown here.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

The counter in the upper-left corner displays the current timecode position.

Edit Safe buttons: The numbered buttons below each fader bar are Channel Safe but-

tons, which can be used to prohibit automix recording on certain channels. A channel is set

to safe when its button appears highlighted. You can make all channels safe by selecting one

button and then double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A conﬁrmation message appears

and you can elect to make one channel safe or all channels. During recording, events cannot

be recorded, or rerecorded on safe channels, although existing events are played back and

faders, Encoders, [ON] buttons, and so on can still be used, which is useful for rehearsing

mix moves. Channel safe settings cannot be changed during recording.

ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE: These buttons are the same as those on the Main and Memory

pages. See “Automix Main Page” on page 165 for more information.

MOTOR: This button is used to turn the fader motors are on and off for Automix play-

back. The button appears highlighted when the motors are on. The motors cannot be

turned off during recording, and are automatically turned on when recording starts.

TOUCH SENSE: Touch sense allows you to punch faders in and out during recording

simply by touching fader knobs. Touch sense IN and touch sense OUT can be turned on

and off independently.

Touch sense can also be turned on and off by using the AUTOMIX [TOUCH SENSE] but-

ton, which remembers the status of the individual IN and OUT buttons on this page. For

example, if both the IN and OUT buttons on this page are on, the AUTOMIX

[TOUCH SENSE] button will turn both IN and OUT on and off. However, if the IN button

is on and the OUT button is off, the AUTOMIX [TOUCH SENSE] button will turn only the

IN button on and off.

Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate 171

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

UPDATE: This button is the same as that on the Main and Memory pages. See “Automix

Main Page” on page 165 for more information.

EDIT OUT: The TAKEOVER and RETURN buttons are the same as those on the Main and

Memory pages. See “Automix Main Page” on page 165 for more information. The TIME

parameter determines the time it takes faders to return to levels speciﬁed by the existing

Automix data when the Edit Out mode is set to Return. It can be set from 0.0 to 30.0 seconds

in 0.1 second steps.

Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate

The timecode source and frame rate for Automix can be set as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the Time Reference page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

TIME REFERENCE: The following timecode sources can be selected.

For the USB, SERIAL, and SLOT1 sources, you must specify a port from 1–8.

FRAMES: The frame rate can be set to: 30, 30D, 29.97, 29.97D, 25, or 24. An Automix will

playback correctly even if the frame rate is different to that which was used when the Auto-

mix was originally recorded.

The MIDI CLOCK source supports Song position Pointers, F8 TIMING CLOCK (timing

info), FA START (starts Automix from beginning), FB CONTINUE (starts Automix from

current position), and FC STOP (stops Automix).

Source Description

INTERNAL

Internally generated timecode

SMPTE

SMPTE timecode received via the SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT

MIDI CLOCK

MIDI Clock received via the MIDI IN port

MTC

MTC received via the MTC TIME CODE INPUT

USB

MTC received via the USB TO HOST port

SERIAL

MTC received via the SERIAL TO HOST port

SLOT1

MTC received via Slot #1 (for use with an optional mLAN I/O Card installed in Slot #1)

MIDI

MTC received via the MIDI IN port

172 Chapter 17—Automix

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Creating a Time Signature Map

When using the MIDI CLOCK timecode source, you’ll also need to specify the initial time

signature and any time signature changes that follow.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the Time Signature page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel or INC/DEC buttons to specify the measure and time signature.

To insert a time signature change, use the cursor buttons to select the next available entry,

and press [ENTER], or turn the Parameter wheel.

To delete a time signature change, select it, and then press [ENTER]. The initial time signa-

ture entry at measure #1 cannot be deleted.

Recording an Automix

This section provides a general procedure for Automix recording.

1 Select the timecode source and frame rate.

See “Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate” on page 171 for more information.

2 Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Automix Main page.

3 Press the AUTOMIX [ENABLE] button to enable the Automix function.

The AUTOMIX [ENABLE] button indicator lights up, and the ENABLED/DISABLED but-

ton on the Automix main page appears highlighted.

4 Use the AUTOMIX OVERWRITE buttons to select which parameters you want

to record.

The corresponding AUTOMIX OVERWRITE button indicators light up, and the corre-

sponding OVERWRITE buttons on the Automix Main and Memory pages appear high-

lighted.

5 Press the AUTOMIX [REC] button.

The AUTOMIX [REC] button indicator ﬂashes, and the REC button on the Automix Main

and Memory pages ﬂashes.

Alternatively, you could press the AUTOMIX [AUTO-REC] button so that Automix record-

ing starts automatically when timecode is received. The main difference between REC and

AUTO REC is that the AUTO REC functions remains on when recording is stopped.

Whereas REC must be pressed each and every time you want to start recording. Initially

however, REC may be the safer option.

6 Use the [AUTO] buttons to arm channels for Automix recording.

The [AUTO] button indicators of armed channels light up orange.

Rerecording Events 173

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

7 Start the timecode source.

The AUTOMIX [REC] button indicator lights up continuously, and on the Automix Main

and Memory pages, the REC and PLAY buttons appear highlighted.

8 Adjust the faders and other controls as necessary.

Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the currently selected channel. Channels are

selected automatically when the [AUTO] buttons are pressed. You can punch channels out

of recording by using the [AUTO] buttons.

9 To stop Automix recording, stop the timecode source, or press the STOP but-

ton on the Automix Main or Memory page.

A conﬁrmation message appears asking if you want to update the existing Automix data

(i.e., keep the edits just recorded).

Rerecording Events

Events can be rerecorded as many times as you like. Remember, however, that unlike the

ﬁrst pass, on subsequent passes, existing events for the currently punched in parameter are

overwritten, so use the OVERWRITE buttons and [AUTO] buttons with care. Instead of

using the [AUTO] buttons to punch in an entire channel, you can reduce the risk of over-

writing important data by punching in and out individual parameters (see page 175). Use

the Update To End option to determine how existing events are handled when rerecording

is stopped (see page 165). Use the Edit Out (see page 166) and Fader Edit (see page 167)

options to determine how Fader events are rerecorded.

174 Chapter 17—Automix

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Parameter Recording

The following table summarizes parameter recording operation for each parameter. Param-

eter adjustments made on the respective display pages are also recorded.

Parameter Channel

OVER

WRITE

Operation Pair/Group

Channel Levels

(faders)

Input

FADER

Set Layer to input, Fader mode to

Fader, use faders

Faders of paired channels and

grouped faders are recorded

together

Bus Out, Aux Send,

Matrix Send

Set Layer to Master, Fader mode to

Fader, use faders

Stereo Out Use Stereo Out fader

Channel Mutes

(ON/OFF)

Input

Set Layer to input, use [ON] buttons

[ON] buttons of paired chan-

nels and grouped mutes are

recorded together

Bus Out, Aux Send,

Matrix Send

Set Layer to Master, use [ON] buttons

Stereo Out Use Stereo Out [ON] button

Pan

Input PAN

Set Layer to input, Encoder mode to

Pan, use Encoders (Also use SELECTED

CHANNEL section PAN control, or

Joystick if [LINK] is on)

If Pan mode is Gang or

Inverse-Gang, paired channels

are recorded together.

Surround Pan

Input SURR

Use Joystick (If [LINK] is on, also use

SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN

control) (If a surround parameter is

assigned to the Encoders, also use

Encoders)

If ST LINK button on Surround

Edit page is on, adjacent chan-

nels are recorded together.

EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off)

Input, Bus Out, Aux

Send, Matrix Send,

Stereo Out

Use SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER

section (If EQ parameter assigned to

an Encoder, also use Encoders)

EQ of paired channels, and

grouped EQs recorded

together

Aux send 1–12 levels

Input AUX

Use SELECTED CHANNEL

AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL controls (If

Layer is input and Fader mode is

Aux/Mtrx, use faders. If Layer is input

and Encoder mode is Aux/Mtrx, use

Encoders)

Aux send levels of paired chan-

nels recorded together. (If the

selected Aux Send is paired,

the send level to both Aux

Sends is recorded.)

Aux send 1–12 mutes

Input

AUX

Use SELECTED CHANNEL

AUX/MATRIX SEND [ON] buttons

Aux send mutes of paired

channels recorded together (If

the selected Aux Send is

paired, mutes for both Aux

Sends recorded.)

Matrix send 1–4

levels

Bus Out, Aux Send

AUX

If Layer is Master and Fader mode is

Aux/Mtrx, use faders (If Layer is Mas-

ter and Encoder mode is Aux /Mtrx,

use Encoders)

Matrix send levels of paired

Bus Outs or Aux Sends

recorded together

Bus Out, Aux Send,

Stereo Out

Use SELECTED CHANNEL

AUX/MATRIX SEND controls

Matrix send 1–4

mutes

Bus Out, Aux Send,

Stereo Out

AUX

Use SELECTED CHANNEL

AUX/MATRIX SEND [ON] buttons

Matrix send mutes of paired

Bus Outs or Aux Sends

recorded together

Scene recalls

——

Use SCENE MEMORY section or Scene

Memory page

—

Library recalls

EQ, Gate, Comp,

Effects, Channel

— Use corresponding library page —

Effect parameters

(certain parameters)

Effects processors

1–8

—

Use Parameter controls 1–4 (push to

punch in/out)

—

User Deﬁned Plug-Ins

(parameters 1–4)

Plug-Ins 1–8 —

Use Parameter controls 1–4 (push to

punch in/out)

—

User Deﬁned Remote

Layers

Faders FADER

Select User Deﬁned Remote Layer, use

faders

—

[ON] buttons ON

Select User Deﬁned Remote Layer, use

[ON] buttons

—

Encoders PAN

Select User Deﬁned Remote Layer, use

Encoder

—

Punching In & Out Individual Parameters 175

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Punching In & Out Individual Parameters

During Automix rerecording, channels can be punched in and out by pressing the channel

strip [AUTO] buttons. Individual parameters can be punched in and out as follows.

Parameter Channel

OVER

WRITE

Operation Punch In Punch Out

Channel Levels

(faders)

Input

FADER

Set Layer to input, Fader mode to

Fader

Touch fader

knob and

adjust

1. TOUCH SENSE IN on Fader Edit page must be on.

Release fader

knob

2. TOUCH SENSE OUT on Fader Edit page must be on.

Bus Out, Aux Send,

Matrix Send

Set Layer to Master, Fader mode to

fader

Stereo Out Stereo Out fader

Pan

Input PAN

Set Layer to input, Encoder mode

to Pan (Also use SELECTED CHAN-

NEL section PAN control, or Joy-

stick if [LINK] is on)

Press Encoder

and adjust

Press Encoder

Surround Pan

Input SURR

Select Input Layer and assign Sur-

round LFE Level or Surround Pan

Wheel to the Encoders

Press Encoder

and adjust

Press Encoder

EQ (F, Q, G)

All channels EQ

Turn on Auto EQ Edit In preference

(see page 237). Use SELECTED

CHANNEL EQUALIZER section (If

EQ parameter assigned to an

Encoder, also use Encoders)

Adjust control

Press [AUTO]

button

EQ On/Off

Press EQ [ON]

button

Press [AUTO]

button

Aux send 1–12 levels

Input AUX

Set Layer to input, Fader mode to

Aux/Mtrx

Touch fader

knob and

adjust

Release fader

knob

Set Layer to input, Encoder mode

to Aux/Mtrx (Or use SELECTED

CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND

LEVEL controls)

Press Encoder

and adjust

Press Encoder

Aux send 1–12 mutes

Input

AUX

Set Layer to input

Press

SELECTED

CHANNEL

AUX/MATRIX

SEND [ON]

button

Press [AUTO]

button

Matrix send 1–4

levels

Bus Out, Aux Send,

Stereo Out

AUX

Set Layer to Master, Fader mode to

Aux/Mtrx

3. Cannot be used to control Stereo Out to Matrix Send levels.

Touch fader

knob and

adjust

Release fader

knob

Set Layer to Master, Encoder mode

to Aux/Mtrx (Also use SELECTED

CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND

LEVEL controls)

Press Encoder

and adjust

Press Encoder

Matrix send 1–4

mutes

Bus Out, Aux Send,

Stereo Out

AUX

Set Layer to master

Press

SELECTED

CHANNEL

AUX/MATRIX

SEND [ON]

button

Press [AUTO]

button

Effect parameters

(certain parameters)

Effects processors

1–8

— Select internal effects processors

Push Parame-

ter 1–4 control

Push Parame-

ter 1–4 control

User Deﬁned Plug-Ins

(parameters 1–4)

Plug-Ins 1–8 — Select Plug-Ins

Push Parame-

ter 1–4 control

Push Parame-

ter 1–4 control

User Deﬁned Remote

Layers

Faders FADER Select User Deﬁned Remote Layer

Touch fader

knob and

adjust

Release fader

knob

Encoders PAN Select User Deﬁned Remote Layer

Press Encoder

and adjust

Press Encoder

176 Chapter 17—Automix

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

If during Automix recording you punch in an individual parameter by using the controls

listed in the above table, even if some OVERWRITE buttons are on, only the existing data

of that particular parameter will be overwritten. Likewise, when you punch out an individ-

ual parameter by using the controls listed above, only that particular parameter will be

punched out.

If during Automix recording you press an [AUTO] button to punch in a channel, the exist-

ing data of all parameters for which the corresponding OVERWRITE buttons are on will be

overwritten. When you press the [AUTO] button to punch out of recording, all of those

parameters will be punched out.

When faders are grouped, if the OVERWRITE FADER button is on, pressing an [AUTO]

button, or touching the fader knob of any fader in the group (if TOUCH SENSE on the

Fader Edit page is on) puts all the corresponding channels into Record mode and all the

[AUTO] button indicators light up red. The same applies to Mute (OVERWRITE ON but-

ton) and EQ (OVERWRITE EQ button) groups.

Playing Back an Automix

So long as the Automix function is enabled, the Automix function will chase the incoming

timecode and play and stop the current Automix accordingly. Playback stops automatically

when the end of the Automix data is reached. Playback can be stopped manually by pressing

the STOP or ABORT button on the Automix Main or Memory pages, or the AUTOMIX

[ABORT/UNDO] button. Playback will stop automatically if no timecode is received for a

while, for example, if the timecode source is disconnected or turned off.

If the timecode source is set to internal, use the PLAY button on the Automix Main or Mem-

ory page to start Automix playback, and the STOP button to stop it.

You can disable Automix playback on individual channels by using the channel strip

[AUTO] buttons. During playback, the [AUTO] button indicators appear green. When

Automix playback for an individual channel is disabled, its [AUTO] button indicator goes

out.

During playback, faders move in accordance with recorded Fader events (so long as the cor-

responding Layer and Fader mode is selected). Fader movement can be disabled by turning

off the fader motors (see page 170). Fader events can be viewed on the Fader Edit pages (see

page 170).

Other events are reﬂected by the channel strip displays and various other displays and but-

ton indicators. Recorded events of the currently selected channel are displayed by the

SELECTED CHANNEL section controls and displays.

If the effects type is different to that which was used when the effects parameter edits were

recorded, the parameter edits will not be played back. However, they are not deleted. When

you rerecord effects parameter edits, it’s recommended that you delete the existing effects

events ofﬂine. See “Editing Events Ofﬂine” on page 177 for more information.

Editing Events Offline 177

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Editing Events Ofﬂine

Automix events can be edited ofﬂine on the Event Copy and Event Edit pages. Ofﬂine edit-

ing can be performed only while the Automix function is stopped.

Event Copy Page

On the Event Copy page, speciﬁed events on speciﬁed channels between speciﬁed in and

out points can be erased, copied, moved/merged, or trimmed.

1 Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Event Copy page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

Channel buttons: These buttons are used to specify the Input and Output Channels

whose Automix data you want to erase, copy, move/merge, or trim. In other words, the

source data. A channel is speciﬁed when its button appears highlighted. Multiple channels

can be speciﬁed. Channel buttons can be selected by using the Parameter wheel or the cur-

sor buttons. You can specify all channels by double-clicking any channel button. A conﬁr-

mation message appears and you can select one or all channels. It’s not necessary to select

source channels when editing library or Scene recall events or effects or Plug-Ins events.

SOURCE: These parameters are used to select the source Automix for copying and mov-

ing/merging. You can select CURRENT, i.e., the current Automix, or MEM and any Auto-

mix from 1 to 16. When MEM is selected, the MOVE button changes to MERGE. The Erase

and Trim functions work only with the current Automix and ignore these settings.

TIME SETTING: The IN and OUT parameters are used to specify the region of Automix

data to be erased, copied, moved/merged, or trimmed. The IN and OUT points can be set

on-the-ﬂy by pressing the [ENTER] button while the IN or OUT button is selected. The

captured timecode values can be edited by using the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC but-

tons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently selected digits to “00.” Up to eight IN

and OUT timecode values can be captured and stored in the eight Capture memories. Use

the cursor buttons to select the Capture memory number, and use the Parameter wheel or

the INC/DEC buttons to select the Capture memories.

The TO parameter is used to specify the point to which the speciﬁed data will be copied or

moved/merged. The TO point can be set on-the-ﬂy by pressing the [ENTER] button while

the TO button is selected. The captured timecode value can be edited by using the Param-

eter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently

selected digits to “00.”

The DESTINATION parameter is used to specify the channel to which the speciﬁed data

will be copied or moved/merged. The number of destination channels depends on the

number of source channels speciﬁed. For example, if Input Channels 1 though 8 are speci-

ﬁed as the source, then the number of destination channels will be eight. Destination chan-

nels are contiguous and only the ﬁrst channel in the range can be speciﬁed.

178 Chapter 17—Automix

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

TRIM EDIT: These parameters are used to specify the TRIM IN and TRIM OUT times and

the trim level, which can be set in 0.5 dB steps. The TRIM IN parameter determines the

time in which the fader level must achieve the speciﬁed trim amount. The TIME SETTING

IN point determines the point at which trimming starts.

The TRIM OUT time determines the time from which the Fader level can start returning to

the previous level. The TIME SETTING OUT point determines the point at which trim-

ming ends.

PARAM: Pressing this button opens the

PARAMETERS window, which is used to

specify which parameters will be erased, cop-

ied, moved/merged, or trimmed. A parameter

is selected when its button appears high-

lighted. Multiple parameters can be speciﬁed.

You can select all parameters by double-click-

ing any parameter button. A conﬁrmation

message appears and you can select one or all

parameters.

Button Events

FADER

Channel Fader events (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Send masters,

Matrix Send masters, and the Stereo Out)

Channel Mute events

PAN

Input Channel pan events

SURR

Input Channel surround pan, LFE level, and DIV parameter events

Channel EQ events

LIB

Channel library recall events

GATE

Gate library recall events

COMP

Comp library recall events

EQ library recall events

SCENE

Scene recall events

FX LIB 1–8

Effects library recall events of each internal effects processor

AUX 1–12

Level events of each Aux Send

ON 1–12

Mute events of each Aux Send

MATRIX 1–4

Level events of each Matrix Send

ON 1–4

Mute events of each Matrix Send

REMOTE 1–4

User Deﬁned Remote Layer events

EFFECT 1–8

Parameter events for each internal effects processor

PLUG-IN 1–8

Parameter events for each Plug-In

TRIM IN

TRIM OUT

Time

Existing data

Tr im: –

IN OUT

Tr immed data

Editing Events Offline 179

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

ERASE button: This button is used to erase the speciﬁed Automix data. Use the channel

buttons to select the source channels. Use the IN and OUT parameters to specify the region

to be erased. Use the PARAMETERS window to specify which Automix events are to be

erased. Then select the ERASE button and press [ENTER].

COPY button: This button is used to copy the speciﬁed Automix data. Use the channel

buttons to select the source channels. Use the IN and OUT parameters to specify the region

to be copied. Use the TO parameter to specify the point to which the speciﬁed data is to be

copied. Use the DESTINATION parameter to specify the channels to which the speciﬁed

data is to be copied. Use the PARAMETERS window to specify which Automix events are

to be copied. Then select the COPY button and press [ENTER]. Duplicate events at the

speciﬁed destination will be erased.

MOVE/MERGE button: This button is used to move/merge the speciﬁed Automix data.

To move events, set the SOURCE to CURRENT. Use the channel buttons to select the

source channels. Use the IN and OUT parameters to specify the region to be moved. Use

the TO parameter to specify the point to which the speciﬁed data it to be moved. Use the

DESTINATION parameter to specify the channels to which the speciﬁed data is to be

moved. Use the PARAMETERS window to specify which Automix events are to be moved.

Then select the MOVE button and press [ENTER].

To merge events from another Automix, select the SOURCE MEM option and specify the

source Automix. Use the channel buttons to select the source channels. Use the IN and OUT

parameters to specify the region to be merged. Use the TO parameter to specify the point to

which the speciﬁed data it to be merged. Use the DESTINATION parameter to specify the

channels to which the speciﬁed data is to be merged. Use the PARAMETERS window to

specify which Automix events are to be merged. Then select the MERGE button and press

[ENTER].

TRIM button: This button is used to trim the speciﬁed Automix data. Use the channel

buttons to select the source channels. Use the IN and OUT parameters to specify the region

to be trimmed. Use the TRIM EDIT IN and OUT parameters to specify the TRIM IN and

OUT times, and set the trim amount. Use the PARAMETERS window to specify which

Automix events are to be trimmed (see below). Then select the TRIM button and press

[ENTER].

For trimming, you can select the following Fader events on the PARAMETERS window:

FADER (i.e., Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Send masters, Matrix Send masters,

and the Stereo Out), AUX 1–12 (i.e., Aux Send levels 1–12), and MATRIX 1–4 (i.e., Matrix

Send levels 1–4).

UNDO button: This button works the same as the UNDO button on the Automix Main

page. See “UNDO” on page 167 for more information.

180 Chapter 17—Automix

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Event Edit Page

On the Event Edit page, you can edit, duplicate, delete, and insert new events.

1 Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Event Edit page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

Event list: Automix events are listed in chronological order. The type of events listed

depends on the Event select buttons. Use the cursor buttons to select event parameters.

While the cursor is on the DUPLICATE, DELETE, SELECTED CH, Event select, or SYNC

buttons, you can use the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to scroll the list. While

the cursor is inside the event list, you can use these controls to edit event parameters. The

triangular cursor at the left side of the list indicates the currently selected event. When an

event’s timecode value is edited, the list is resorted automatically.

DUPLICATE button: This button is used to duplicate events. Use the Parameter wheel to

select an event, select the DUPLICATE button, and then press [ENTER]. A duplicate event

is inserted below the currently selected event. If there are no events in the list, you can use

this button to insert a new event of the type speciﬁed by the Event select buttons.

DELETE button: This button is used to delete events. Use the Parameter wheel to select

an event, select the DELETE button, and then press [ENTER].

SELECTED CH: When this option is on, only events of the currently selected channel are

displayed. All Scene recall and effects library recall events are displayed regardless of this

option. For paired channels, only events of the currently selected channel are displayed.

Event select buttons: These buttons are used to select the type of events to be displayed

in the event list.

SYNC button: This button is used to synchronize the list to the current timecode posi-

tion. When pressed, events closest to the current timecode position are displayed. This

function can be used during Automix playback.

Timecode counter: This counter displays the current timecode position.

Button Events Listed List Format

SCENE/LIB

Library and Scene recall events TIME CODE, CH, SCENE/LIB

FADER

Channel faders (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters,

Aux Send masters, Matrix Send masters, and the Ste-

reo Out)

TIME CODE, CH, dB, SEC

Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF

PAN

Pan TIME CODE, CH, L-C-R

SURR

Surround pan TIME CODE, CH, SURR

AUX

Aux/matrix Send 1–12 levels TIME CODE, CH, AUX, dB

AUX ON

Aux/matrix Send 1–12 mutes TIME CODE, CH, AUX, ON/OFF

Editing Events Offline 181

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

CAPTURE button: This button is used to capture the current timecode position. Up to

eight timecode values can be captured and stored in the eight Capture memories. Use the

cursor buttons to select the Capture memory number, and use the Parameter wheel or the

INC/DEC buttons to select the Capture memories. Capture memories can be selected even

while the CAPTURE, LOCATE, or INSERT button is selected.

If the Auto Inc TC capture preference is on (see page 237), Capture memories increment

automatically each time a timecode position is captured.

If the Link Capture & Locate Memory preference is on (see page 237), the eight Capture

memories are linked to the eight Locate memories so that, for example, edits made to Cap-

ture memory #1 are reﬂected on Locate memory #1, and vice versa.

Capture memory display: This displays the captured timecode position. The captured

timecode values can be edited by using the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons. Press

the [ENTER] button to reset the currently selected digits to “00.”

LOCATE button: This button is used to locate events at the Capture memory display

position.

INSERT button: This button is used to insert new events. Use the Event select buttons to

select the type of event that you want to insert. Use the Captured timecode counter to spec-

ify the point at which you want to insert the new event. Select the INSERT button, and then

press [ENTER].

182 Chapter 18—MIDI

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

18 MIDI

MIDI & the DM2000

The DM2000 supports the following MIDI messages:

•Program Changes for recalling Scenes (see page 185)

•Control Changes for real-time parameter control (see page 186)

•System Exclusive Parameter Changes for real-time parameter control (see page 186)

• MIDI Note On/Off for Freeze effect (see page 285)

•Bulk Dump for transmitting Scene, library, and setup data (see page 187)

•MTC and MIDI Clock for Automix synchronization (see page 171)

• MMC for external machine control (see page 220)

•User Deﬁned Plug-Ins transmit user-speciﬁed MIDI data when Parameter controls 1–4 are

operated (see page 152)

•User Deﬁned Remote Layers transmit user-speciﬁed MIDI data when the channel strip fad-

ers, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are operated (see page 217)

•Predeﬁned Remote Layers for controlling popular DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations),

including Pro Tools (see page 188)

MIDI I/O

The DM2000 features four types of interface for transmitting and receiving MIDI data:

• Standard MIDI ports

•TO HOST USB port

•TO HOST SERIAL port

•SLOT1 (for use with an optional mLAN I/O Card installed in Slot #1)

TO HOST SERIAL, TO HOST USB, and SLOT1 are multiport interfaces, with eight ports

each.

When the DM2000 receives MIDI data via any of these interfaces, the MIDI indicator

appears on the display (see page 35).

If you are connecting a Windows computer to the TO HOST USB or TO HOST SERIAL

port, you must install and use the YAMAHA CBX Driver for Windows and the YAMAHA

USB Driver for Windows, which are included on the supplied CD-ROM.

If you are connecting a Macintosh computer to the TO HOST USB or TO HOST SERIAL

port, you must install and use the YAMAHA USB Driver for Macintosh and OMS 2.3.3,

which are included on the supplied CD-ROM.

MIDI Port Setup 183

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

MIDI Port Setup

MIDI ports are conﬁgured as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the MIDI/TO HOST Setup

page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

TO HOST SERIAL: These buttons are used to conﬁgure the TO HOST SERIAL port for

use with either a Mac or PC.

GENERAL: These parameters are used to select ports for general MIDI data transmission

and reception, including Program Changes for recalling Scenes, Control Changes for

real-time parameter control, and Note On/Off for use with the Freeze effect. Available ports

include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1 1–8.

MIDI THRU: These parameters allow you to route the incoming MIDI data from one port

through to another port. Available ports include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1

1–8.

REMOTE1–4: These parameters are used to select ports for the Remote Layers. Available

ports include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1 1–8. If Pro Tools is selected as the

target for a Remote Layer, “Pro Tools” is displayed here and no settings can be made.

Studio Manager: These parameters are used to select a port for use with the Studio

Manager software and to assign the DM2000 an ID from 1 to 8. Available ports include:

MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1 1–8. See the Studio Manager documentation for

more information.

DAW: These parameters are used to select ports for use with DAWs. Since three ports are

required to control DAWs, ports are selected in groups of three, as follows: 1–3, 2–4, 3–5,

4–6, 5–7, 6–8. Available ports include: SERIAL, USB, and SLOT1.

PLUG-IN1–8: These parameters are used to select ports for use with the Plug-Ins. If a

Waves Plug-In card is installed in a Slot, the number of that Slot is displayed and no settings

can be made. If the Plug-In target is set to USER DEFINED, you can select a port from

MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, or SLOT1 1–8. Ports for User Deﬁned Plug-Ins can also be set

on the Plug-In Setup page (see page 152).

Caution: When a PC is connected to the TO HOST SERIAL port, do not set this to Mac

because your PC may crash.

Note: Some functions cannot share ports. If you try to assign a port that’s already assigned to

such a function, the message “Change Port?” appears. If you select YES, the port will be assigned

to the selected function and the previously assigned function will be set to “NO ASSIGN.”

184 Chapter 18—MIDI

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

MIDI Channel Setup

MIDI Channels for reception and transmission are speciﬁed as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the MIDI Setup page.

2 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the parameters, and use

the INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to set them.

RECEIVE: The Channel buttons are used to select a MIDI Channel for MIDI message

reception. The Enable buttons are used to turn on and off reception of Program Change,

Parameter Change, and Control Change messages.

TRANSMIT: The Channel buttons are used to select a MIDI Channel for MIDI message

transmission. The Enable buttons are used to turn on and off transmission of Program

Change, Parameter Change, and Control Change messages.

OMNI: These buttons determine whether the DM2000 responds to Program Change and

Control Change messages only on the speciﬁed MIDI Receive Channel or on all Channels.

ECHO: These buttons determine whether Program Change, Parameter Change, Control

Change, and Other Commands received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the

MIDI OUT port.

Assigning Scenes to Program Changes 185

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Assigning Scenes to Program Changes

DM2000 Scenes can be assigned to MIDI Program Changes for remote recall. When a Scene

is recalled on the DM2000, the assigned Program Change number is transmitted. If that

Scene is assigned to more than one Program Change, the lowest Program Change is trans-

mitted. Likewise, when a Program Change message is received, the assigned Scene is

recalled. You must set the MIDI Setup parameters in order to transmit and receive Program

Change messages (see page 184).

Initially, Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1 through

99. Scene #0 is assigned to Program Changes #100.

A Scene to Program Change assign-

ment table, listing initial assignments and with space to note user assignments, is provided

on page 317. This table can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler,

by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored to SmartMedia (see page 231).

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the Program Change

Assign Table page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the PGM CHG. column, and use the Param-

eter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the Program Changes.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the SCENE No/TITLE column, and use the

Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select Scenes.

You can initialize the Scene to Program Change assignment table by selecting the INITIAL-

IZE button, and then pressing [ENTER].

186 Chapter 18—MIDI

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Assigning Parameters to Control Changes

DM2000 parameters can be assigned to MIDI Control Changes for real-time control. When

a parameter is adjusted on the DM2000, the assigned Control Change message is transmit-

ted. Likewise, when a Control Change message is received, the assigned DM2000 parameter

is set. You must set the MIDI Setup parameters in order to transmit and receive Control

Change messages (see page 184).

A Parameter to Control Change assignment table, listing the initial assignments, is provided

on page 318. This table can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler,

by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored to SmartMedia (see page 231).

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the Control Change Assign

Table page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the MODE TABLE button, and press [ENTER].

In TABLE mode, when DM2000 parameters are adjusted, MIDI Control Change messages

are transmitted in accordance with the assignments on this page. In NRPN mode, when

DM2000 parameters are adjusted, predeﬁned NRPNs (Non Registered Parameter Number)

are transmitted.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the CTL CHG. column, and use the Parameter

wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the Control Changes.

4 Use the cursor buttons to select the three PARAMETER columns, and use the

Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the parameters.

Parameters with more than 128 steps require two or more Control Change messages for

MIDI transmission and reception. Certain Delay parameters and the faders are divided into

L and H parameters. Delay Time parameters are divided into LOW, MID, and HIGH

parameters. For accurate transmission, all parameters (e.g., both L and H for faders) must

be assigned to individual Control Changes.

You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change assignment table by selecting the INI-

TIALIZE button, and then pressing [ENTER].

Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes

DM2000 parameters can be controlled in real time by using Parameter Change messages,

which are System Exclusive messages. When a parameter is adjusted on the DM2000, a

Parameter Change message is transmitted. Likewise, when a Parameter Change message is

received, a DM2000 parameter is adjusted. See “MIDI Data Format” on page 319 for

detailed information. You must set the MIDI Setup parameters in order to transmit and

receive Parameter Change messages (see page 184).

Using Bulk Dump 187

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Using Bulk Dump

DM2000 data can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler, by using

MIDI Bulk Dump.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the Bulk Dump page.

2 To transmit data, use the CATEGORY parameters to select the type of data

you want to transmit, select the TRANSMIT button, and then press [ENTER].

3 To receive data, use the CATEGORY parameters to select the type of data

you want to receive, select the REQUEST button, and then press [ENTER].

The INTERVAL parameter sets the interval between data packets during transmission.

The CATEGORY parameters can be set as follows:

ALL: All data.

SCENE MEM: ALL Scenes, individual Scenes, or current (i.e., the Edit buffer).

AUTOMIX: ALL Automixes, individual Automixes, or the current Automix.

LIBRARY: The following libraries: EQ, Gate, Comp, Channel, Effects, GEQ, Bus to Stereo,

Input Patch, Output Patch, Surround Monitor. For each library you can specify ALL user

memories, individual user memories, and for the Bus to Stereo, Input Patch, Output Patch,

Surround Monitor libraries you can also specify the current settings.

BANK: User Deﬁned Remote Layer banks, User Deﬁned Plug-Ins banks, or the User

Deﬁned Keys banks. For each item you can specify ALL or individual banks.

SETUP MEM: DM2000 setup data (i.e., system settings).

PGM TABLE: Scene to MIDI Program Change table. See “Assigning Scenes to Program

Changes” on page 185.

CTL TABLE: Parameter to MIDI Control Change table. See “Assigning Parameters to Con-

trol Changes” on page 186.

PLUG-IN: The settings of any installed Y56K cards. You can specify ALL Slots or Slots 4–6

individually.

188 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

19 Pro Tools Remote Layer

The DM2000 features a Remote Layer target especially designed for controlling Pro Tools.

If an optional MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, Pro Tools channel levels are displayed

by the meters, and timecode is displayed on the TIME CODE counter.

Conﬁguring Windows Computers

1 Connect your PC.

The DM2000 can be connected to your Windows PC by connecting the TO HOST SERIAL

port to a suitable RS232 serial port on your PC, or by connecting the TO HOST USB port

to a USB port on your PC. If you use the TO HOST SERIAL port, make sure that the TO

HOST SERIAL parameter on the MIDI/TO HOST Setup page is set to PC-2 (see page 183).

2 Install the necessary drivers.

Once your PC is connected, you’ll need to install the TO HOST SERIAL or TO HOST USB

drivers included on the DM2000 CD-ROM.

Conﬁguring Macintosh Computers

1 Connect your Mac.

The DM2000 can be connected to your Mac by connecting the TO HOST SERIAL port to

either the Printer or Modem port on your Mac, or by connecting the TO HOST USB port

to a USB port on your Mac. If you use the TO HOST SERIAL port, make sure that the TO

HOST SERIAL parameter on the MIDI/TO HOST Setup page is set to Mac (see page 183).

2 Install OMS.

The DM2000 communicates with Pro Tools via OMS (Open Music System) software. If you

already have OMS installed on your Mac, there’s no need to install it again and you can

move on to the next section. If you don’t already have OMS installed, it’s included on the

DM2000 CD-ROM. Refer to the OMS documentation included on the DM2000 CD-ROM

for more information on installing.

3 Install Yamaha USB MIDI driver 1.04 or later.

If you are using the TO HOST USB port, you must also install the Yamaha USB MIDI driver

included on the DM2000 CD-ROM. See the included documentation for more informa-

tion.

Conﬁguring the DM2000

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the MIDI/TO HOST Setup

page, and use the DAW parameter to specify the port to which Pro Tools is

connected.

See “MIDI Port Setup” on page 183 for more information.

2 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate the Remote pages, and

assign Pro Tools to a Remote Layer.

See “Assigning Targets to Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information.

3 Use the LAYER [REMOTE] buttons to select the Pro Tools Remote Layer.

When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, the DM2000’s control surface controls Pro

To ols, not the DM2000. In order to control the DM2000, you need to select an Input Chan-

nel Layer or the Master Layer. Audio mixing on the Input and Master Layers, and Automix

continues while the Pro Tools Layer is selected.

Configuring Pro Tools 189

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Conﬁguring Pro Tools

Pro Tools needs to be conﬁgured as follows. For more information, see your Pro Tools doc-

umentation.

1 Launch Pro Tools.

2 Choose OMS Studio Setup from the Setups menu, and conﬁgure OMS as nec-

essary.

This screen shot shows the Yamaha USB MIDI

driver with eight ports. An OMS-compatible

device proﬁle for the DM2000 is included on

the DM2000 CD-ROM. See the included doc-

umentation for more information.

3 Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu.

4 When the Peripherals window appears, click the MIDI Controllers button.

5 Select HUI as the Type of controller.

6 Select the Receive From and Send To ports, and then click OK.

The DM2000 can emulate up to three typical 8-channel Pro Tools MIDI controllers. A sin-

gle MIDI port is required for every eight channels. So you must conﬁgure MIDI Controller

#2 to use channels 9 through 16, and conﬁgure MIDI Controller #3 to use channels 17

through 24.

190 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer

This section explains the operation of the DM2000 control surface when the Pro Tools

Remote Layer is selected. DM2000 buttons and controls are referred to by the names

printed on the DM2000 with the name of the corresponding Pro Tools function in paren-

thesis. For example, “Press the MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 1] (DEFAULT) button.” In key-

board shortcuts, the Pro Tools function names are left out for simpliﬁcation.

Display

This is the Pro Tools Remote Layer page, the various sections of which are explained below.

TARGET

This parameter cannot be changed here. To change the target for this Layer, you must ﬁrst

select another Layer, and then use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate the

Remote page for this Layer. See “Assigning Targets to Remote Layers” on page 217 for more

information.

COUNTER

This counter works in unison with the timecode counter

in Pro Tools. The display format is speciﬁed in Pro Tools.

The three check boxes indicate the currently selected for-

mat, as follows:

TIME CODE: Pro Tools timecode format set to “Time Code.”

FEET: Pro Tools timecode format set to “Feet:Frames.”

BEATS: Pro Tools timecode format set to “Bars:Beats.”

When the Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Minutes:Seconds” or “Samples,” no check

boxes are selected.

CURSOR MODE

The currently selected Cursor mode is displayed here: NAVIGA-

TION, ZOOM, or SELECT. Cursor modes are selected by using the

[INC] (CURSOR MODE) button.

SELECT ASSIGN

This indicates the current function of the Encoders. For example,

Pan (PanR), SndA, SndB, SndC, SndD, or SndE.

Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 191

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT

ASSIGN: This indicator works in unison with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [5] (ASSIGN)

button indicator. See “Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins” on page 209 for more information.

COMPARE: This indicator works in unison with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [6] (COM-

PARE) button indicator. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 for more information.

BYPASS: This indicator works in unison with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [7] (BYPASS)

button indicator. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 and “Bypassing Individual Plug-ins”

on page 211 for more information.

INSERT: This indicator works in unison with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [8]

(INSERT/PARAM) button indicator. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 for more informa-

tion.

INSERT/PARAM Display

This section displays mainly insert and plug-in-related information, although other mes-

sages are also displayed here.

Encoder Display

This section displays information about the Parameter controls 1–4. The SEL indicators

show the on/off status of the Parameter control push-switches. The rotary control indica-

tors show the positions of the Parameter controls. The “O” symbol below each Parameter

control shows the automation status for each Parameter control.

Channel Strips

DM2000 channel strips correspond to Pro Tools channels from left to right, with

the leftmost Pro Tools channel being handled by DM2000 channel strip #1. You

can change the order of channel strips by dragging the channel select buttons in

Pro Tools, in which case the DM2000 automatically reorders its channel strips.

By using certain USER DEFINED KEYS, Pro Tools channels can be scrolled

individually (see page 198), or in banks of 24 (see page 198).

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

192 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Encoders & Push-Switches

The Encoders are used to set pan and send levels and select I/O assignments. The Encoder

push-switches are used to mute sends, reset send levels and panpots, and conﬁrm I/O

assignments. Their exact operation depends on the currently selected Encoder mode, as

shown in the following table.

[AUTO] buttons

These buttons are used in conjunction with the AUTOMIX section to set the Automation

mode of each channel. See “Setting the Automation Mode” on page 215 for more informa-

tion.

[SEL] buttons

These buttons are used to select channels (see page 203), to select inserts (see page 210), and

to bypass inserts (see page 211).

[SOLO] buttons

These buttons are used to solo channels. See “Soloing Channels” on page 205 for more

information.

[ON] buttons

These buttons are used to mute channels. See “Muting Channels” on page 205 for more

information.

Faders

The faders are used to set channel levels (see page 204), or to set send levels in

Flip mode (see page 208).

Encoder Mode Encoder Push-switches

[PAN]

Pan (see page 205) Reset pan (see page 212)

[SEND LEVEL]

Send levels (see page 207)

Mute sends (see page 207)

Send pre/post (see page 206)

Reset send levels (see page 212)

[INPUT]

Select input source (see page 203)

Conﬁrm selection

[OUTPUT]

Select output destination (see page 204)

[SEND ASSIGN]

Select send destination (see page 206)

Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 193

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Channel Strip Displays

The ﬂuorescent channel strip displays graphically display the value of the parameter cur-

rently assigned to the Encoders. The minimum and maximum segments do not work with

the Pro Tools Remote Layer. Channel strip displays also display Pro Tools channel names in

an abbreviated form. Various other information is also displayed here and this is explained

in the relevant sections.

Selected Channel

The channel strip borders of currently selected channels light up like this.

Fader Touch Sense

When fader knobs are touched, the corresponding Touch Sense indica-

tors light up like this.

Insert Indicator

The INS indicator shows whether a channel’s plug-ins are on or off.

Pan Display

Send Level

Aud1

( indicates at center)

Hard left

( indicates center position)

Other position Center Hard right

Minimum Other value Maximum

194 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

MATRIX SELECT Section

[MATRIX 1] (DEFAULT) button

This button is used in conjunction with other controls to reset faders, panpots, sends, and

plug-ins to their default values. See “Resetting Faders, Sends, Panpots & Plug-ins” on page

212 for more information.

[MATRIX 2] (SEND MUTE) button

This button is used in conjunction with the Encoder push-switches to mute sends. See

“Muting Sends” on page 207 for more information.

[MATRIX 4] (INSERT BYPASS) button

This button is used in conjunction with other controls to bypass plug-ins. See “Bypassing

Individual Plug-ins” on page 211 for more information.

AUX SELECT Section

AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] buttons are used to select sends A–E. The button indicator of the

currently selected send lights up.

ENCODER MODE Section

[PAN] (PAN) button

When this button is pressed, the Encoders work as channel panpots. Its indicator lights up

when it’s pressed. See “Panning Channels” on page 205 for more information.

[AUX/MTRX] (SEND LEVEL) button

When this button is pressed, the Encoders work as send level controls. Its indicator lights

up when it’s pressed, and send A is selected automatically. If the Encoders are currently set

to control pan, its indicator lights automatically when one of the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5]

(SEND A–E) buttons is pressed.

MATRIX SELECT

MATRIX 2 MATRIX 4

MATRIX 1

(SEND MUTE) (INSERT BYPASS)

(DEFAULT)

AUX 2AUX 1 AUX 3 AUX 4

AUX 5

(SEND B)(SEND A) (SEND C) (SEND D)

(SEND E)

AUX SELECT

AUX / MTRX

PAN

ASSIGN 4ASSIGN 3ASSIGN 2ASSIGN 1

PAN SEND LEVEL

INSERTSEND ASSIGNOUTPUTINPUT

ENCODER MODE

Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 195

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

[ASSIGN 1] (INPUT) button

This button is used in conjunction with other controls to set channel input sources. See

“A ssigning Inputs to Channels” on page 203 for more information.

[ASSIGN 2] (OUTPUT) button

This button is used in conjunction with other controls to set channel output destinations.

See “Assigning Outputs to Channels” on page 204 for more information.

[ASSIGN 3] (SEND ASSIGN) button

This button is used in conjunction with other controls to set send destinations. See “Assign-

ing Send Destinations” on page 206 for more information.

[ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button

This button determines the operation of the [SEL] buttons. When its indicator is off, [SEL]

buttons select channels (see page 203). When its indicator is on, they select inserts/plug-ins

(see page 210).

FADER MODE Section

[FADER] & [AUX/MTRX] buttons

These buttons are used to select Flip mode, in which faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons

can be used to control sends. See “Flip Mode” on page 208 for more information.

DISPLAY ACCESS Section

[METER] button

This button is used to reset the meter clip indicators and peak hold indicators.

AUX/MTRXFADER

FADER MODE

METER

DISPLAY ACCESS

196 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS Section

[DISPLAY] (SHOW INSERT) button

This button is used to open and close plug-in windows.

[5] (ASSIGN) button

This button is used in conjunction with other controls to assign inserts/plug-ins to chan-

nels. See “Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins” on page 209 for more information.

[6] (COMPARE) button

This button is used to compare plug-in edits before and after. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page

210 for more information.

[7] (BYPASS) button

This button is used to bypass plug-ins. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 and “Bypassing

Individual Plug-ins” on page 211 for more information.

[8] (INSERT/PARAM) button

This button is used in conjunction with other controls when editing plug-ins. See “Editing

Plug-ins” on page 210 for more information.

Parameter Up (< SCROLL) & Parameter Down

(SCROLL >) buttons

These buttons are used to scroll parameters when assigning inserts and editing plug-ins. See

“A ssigning Inserts/Plug-ins” on page 209 and “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 for more

information.

1234

5678

(COMPARE)(ASSIGN) (BYPASS) (INSERT/PARAM)

(< SCROLL)

(SCROLL >)

DISPLAY

(SHOW

INSERT)

EFFECTS / PLUG INS

Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 197

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

TRACK ARMING Section

[1–24] (REC/RDY) buttons

These buttons are used to arm Pro Tools channels for recording. The button indicators of

channels that are armed ﬂash. The button indicators of armed channels light continuously

when recording starts.

[MASTER] (REC/RDY ALL) button

This button is used to arm all Pro Tools channels for recording. The button indicators of all

channels ﬂash when this button is pressed. All channels can be disarmed by pressing it

again, in which case all button indicators go out. The number of channels that can be armed

depends on the number of recordable tracks in the current Pro Tools session.

The following shortcuts apply.

AUTOMIX Section

[DISPLAY] (AUTO STATUS) button

When this button is pressed, the Automation modes of all channels are displayed on the

channel strip displays. See “Viewing the Automation Mode” on page 215 for more informa-

tion.

[ENABLE] (SUSPEND) button

This button is used to suspend all automation recording and playback operations. Its but-

ton indicator ﬂashes while automation is suspended. Level and other channel strip settings

are left as they are while automation is suspended.

To do this... Do this!

Arm all channels (same as [MASTER]

(REC/RDY ALL) button

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+TRACK ARMING [1–24]

Arm all selected channels

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+TRACK

ARMING [1–24]

TRACK ARMING

MASTER

(REC/RDY ALL)

12 45678

910 12131415

21 22 23 2417 18 2019

OVERWRITE

FADER ON

PAN

EQAUX AUX

(FADER)

(AUTO STATUS)

(MUTE)

PAN

(PLUG-IN)(SEND) (SEND

MUTE)

ENABLE

REC ABORT/

UNDO

AUTO-

REC

RETURN

RELATIVE

TOUCH

SENSE

DISPLAY

SUSPEND WRITE TOUCH LATCH READ TRIM OFF

AUTOMIX

198 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

[REC] (WRITE), [ABORT/UNDO] (TOUCH), [AUTOREC] (LATCH),

[RETURN] (READ), [RELATIVE] (TRIM) & [TOUCH SENSE] (OFF) buttons

These buttons are used to select the channel Automation modes. See “Setting the Automa-

tion Mode” on page 215 for more information.

OVERWRITE [FADER] (FADER), [ON] (MUTE), [PAN] (PAN), [AUX]

(SEND), [AUX ON] (SEND MUTE) & [EQ] (PLUG-IN) buttons

These buttons are used to select parameters for automation recording and playback. See

“A r ming Parameters for Automation” on page 216 for more information.

USER DEFINED KEYS Section

[DISPLAY] (STATUS) button

This button is used to open and close the Session Setup window.

[1] (TRANSPORT) button

This button is used to open and close the Transport window. Its indicator lights up while

the Transport window is open.

[2] (< BANK) & [3] (BANK >) buttons

These buttons are used to swap channel banks 24 channels at a time.

[4] (SHIFT/ADD) & [5] (OPTION/ALL) buttons

These buttons are used in conjunction with other buttons to modify function operation.

They correspond to the Shift and Option modiﬁer keys found on Macintosh keyboards.

[6] (GROUP) button

This button is used to display group information for all channels. While it’s pressed, the

channel strip displays show the ID of any group in which each channel is assigned.

[7] (SUSPEND) button

This button is used to temporarily suspend all mix groups (not edit groups). Its indicator

ﬂashes while mix groups are suspended.

[8] (CREATE) button

This button is used to open the New Group window (Command-G in Pro Tools).

[9] (MIX/EDIT)

This button is used to toggle between the Mix and Edit windows.

[10] (< CH) & [11] (CH >) buttons

These buttons are used to scroll channels one at a time.

(TRANSPORT)

(STATUS)

( BANK) (BANK ) (SHIFT/ADD) (OPTION/ALL) (GROUP) (SUSPEND) (CREATE)

(MIX/EDIT) ( CH) (CH ) (CTRL/

CLUTCH)

(Command

ALT/FINE)

(MONITOR) (UNDO) (SAVE)

USER DEFINED KEYS

12345678

910111213141516

DISPLAY

Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 199

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

[12] (CTRL/CLUTCH) & [13] (Command-ALT/FINE) buttons

These buttons are used in conjunction with other buttons to modify function operation.

They correspond to the Control and Command modiﬁer keys found on Macintosh key-

boards.

[14] (MONITOR) button

This button is used to display the monitor mode currently selected in the Pro Tools Opera-

tions menu. When the monitor mode is set to “Auto Input Monitor,” “Auto” is displayed.

When it’s set to “Input Only Monitor,” “Inpt” is displayed. Aux Input channels always dis-

play “AUX.” Master fader channels always display “Mstr.” And MIDI Tracks always display

“MIDI.”

[15] (UNDO) button

This button is used to undo and redo the last operation. Its indicator lights up when the last

operation can be undone, and it ﬂashes when the last operation can be redone.

[16] (SAVE)

This button is used to save the current session (same as Save Session command in the File

menu). Its indicator lights up when there are unsaved changes, and goes out when there are

no unsaved changes. When pressed, the indicator ﬂashes and you can press it again to go

ahead and save the current session, or press [ESC] to cancel.

LOCATOR Section

[DISPLAY] (MEM-LOC) button

This button is used to open and close the Memory Locations window.

LOCATE MEMORY [1–8] buttons

These buttons perform the same transport-related functions as the 1–8 number keys on a

Macintosh keyboard. If you set the Numeric keypad Mode in Pro Tools to “Classic” (Setups

menu, Preferences), these buttons can be used to directly locate markers 1–8.

[AUDITION] button

This button is used in conjunction with the [PRE], [IN], [OUT], and [POST] buttons for

auditioning. Its indicator lights up while auditioning is on and operation is as follows:

•Press the [PRE] button to audition the section between the pre-roll point and the in point

of the selected region.

•Press the [IN] button to audition from the in point of the selected region, continuing for

the speciﬁed pre-roll time.

•Press the [OUT] button to audition the section before the out point of the selected region.

The length of the section is determined by the post-roll time.

DISPLAY

LOCATE MEMORY

LOCATOR

12345678

ONLINE

AUDITION

(MEM-LOC)

LOOP

PRE POSTIN OUT

END QUICK

PUNCH

RETURN

TO ZERO

200 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

•Press the [POST] button to audition from the out point of the selected region, continuing

for the speciﬁed post-roll time.

Auditioning stops at the end of the section, or when a transport button is pressed.

[PRE] & [POST] buttons

These buttons are used to turn on and off pre-roll and post-roll. While the [AUDITION]

button indicator is lit, they are used for auditioning.

[IN] & [OUT] buttons

These buttons are used to set in and out points during playback. While the [AUDITION]

button indicator is lit, they are used for auditioning.

[RETURN TO ZERO] button

Pressing this button moves the playback cursor to the beginning of the session.

[END] button

Pressing this button moves the playback cursor to the end of the session.

[ONLINE] button

This button is used to take Pro Tools online and ofﬂine (same as the Online command in

the Operations menu). Its indicator lights up when Pro Tools is online.

[LOOP] button

This button is used to turn loop playback on and off (same as the Loop Playback command

in the Operations menu). Its indicator lights up when loop playback is on. This button is

mutually exclusive with the [QUICK PUNCH], [SHUTTLE], and [SCRUB] buttons.

[QUICK PUNCH] button

This button is used to turn quick punch on and off (same as the Quick Punch command in

the Operations menu). Its indicator lights up when quick punch is on. This button is mutu-

ally exclusive with the [LOOP], [SHUTTLE], and [SCRUB] buttons.

Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 201

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Data Entry & Transport Section

[REW] button

This button rewinds from the current cursor position (it’s non-latching).

[FF] button

This button fast forwards from the current cursor position (it’s non-latching).

[STOP] button

This button stops playback and recording.

[PLAY] button

This button starts playback from the current cursor position.

[REC] button

This button arms Pro Tools for recording ([REC] button indicator ﬂashing), recording is

started by pressing the [PLAY] button ([REC] button indicator lit continuously).

[BACK] (EDIT MODE) button

This button is used to select the following edit modes: Shufﬂe, Slip, Spot, and Grid.

[FORWARD] (EDIT TOOLS) button

This button is used to select the following edit tools: Zoomer, Trimmer, Selector, Grabber,

SmartTool, Scrubber, and Pencil.

Parameter Wheel

The Parameter wheel is used for shuttling and scrubbing (see page 214). It’s also used for

making ﬁne adjustments to the selected region (see page 213).

ENTER

INC

REC

REW

FF STOP PLAY

DEC

(CURSOR MODE)(ESC)

BACK FORWARD

(EDIT MODE) (EDIT TOOLS)

SHUTTLE

DISPLAY HISTORY

SCRUB

202 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

[SHUTTLE] & [SCRUB] buttons

These buttons are used to select the Shuttle and Scrub modes. See “Scrub & Shuttle” on page

214 for more information. These buttons are mutually exclusive with the [QUICK

PUNCH] and [LOOP] buttons.

[ENTER] button

This button works the same as the Enter key on your computer keyboard. Pressing it opens

the New Memory Location dialog box. While a dialog box is open, pressing it performs the

same action as clicking the OK button.

[–/DEC] (ESC) button

For the most part, this button works the same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard.

While a dialog box is open, pressing it performs the same action as clicking the Cancel but-

ton.

[INC] (CURSOR MODE) button

This button is used to select the following cursor modes: Navigation (see page 212), Zoom

(see page 213), and Select (see page 213).

Cursor buttons

These buttons can be used to scroll the Mix and Edit windows (see page 203), navigate the

Edit window (see page 212), zoom waveforms (see page 213), and to make ﬁne adjustments

to the selected region (see page 213). Their exact operation depends on the currently

selected cursor mode.

Scrolling Windows 203

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Scrolling Windows

The following shortcuts can be used to scroll the Mix and Edit windows.

Selecting Channels

Channels can be selected as follows.

(Make sure the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button indicator is not lit before

proceeding.)

1 Use the [SEL] buttons to select channels.

The [SEL] button indicators of selected channels light up. The border of the corresponding

channel strip displays also light up.

2 To select multiple channels in each eight-channel block (e.g., 1–8, 9–16, or

17–24), while holding down one [SEL] button, use the [SEL] buttons of the

other channels in the same block to add and remove channels.

The following shortcuts apply.

Assigning Inputs to Channels

Channels can be assigned to input sources as follows. The Pro Tools transport must be

stopped in order to make these assignments.

You can view the current input source assignment for each channel on the channel strip dis-

plays by pressing and holding the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 1] (INPUT) button.

1 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3] (SEND ASSIGN) button.

Its button indicator ﬂashes, and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “ASGN.”

2 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 1] (INPUT) button.

Its button indicator lights up, and the channel strip displays show the current input source

for each channel.

3 Use the Encoders to select input sources.

The names of the input sources appear on the channel strip displays in abbreviated form.

When you select a source other than the current, the ring of the corresponding channel strip

display ﬂashes.

4 To conﬁrm your selection, press the Encoder’s push-switch.

The channel strip display ring stops ﬂashing.

Scroll window to the left USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Left cursor button

Scroll window to the right USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Right cursor button

Scroll window up USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Up cursor button

Scroll window down USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Down cursor button

Scroll window to the beginning

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Left cur-

sor button

Scroll window to the end

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Right

cursor button

Scroll window to the top

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Up cur-

sor button

Scroll window to the bottom

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Down

cursor button

To do this... Do this!

Select multiple channels USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+[SEL]

Select all channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+[SEL]

Inverse the channel selection USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+[SEL]

204 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

The following shortcuts apply.

You can cancel this function by pressing the [–/DEC] (ESC) button.

Assigning Outputs to Channels

Channels can be assigned to output destinations as follows. The Pro Tools transport must

be stopped in order to make these assignments.

You can view the current output destination assignment for each channel on the channel

strip displays by pressing and holding the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 2] (OUTPUT) but-

ton.

1 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3] (SEND ASSIGN) button.

Its indicator ﬂashes, and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “ASGN.”

2 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 2] (OUTPUT) button.

Its indicator lights up, and the channel strip displays show the current output destination

for each channel.

3 Use the Encoders to select output destinations.

The names of the output destinations appear on the channel strip displays in abbreviated

form. When you select a destination other than the current, the ring of the corresponding

channel strip display ﬂashes.

4 To conﬁrm your selection, press the Encoder’s push-switch.

The channel strip display ring stops ﬂashing.

The following shortcuts apply.

You can cancel this function by pressing the [–/DEC] (ESC) button.

Setting Channel Levels

Channel levels can be set as follows.

(Make sure the FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX/MTRX] button indicators are not

ﬂashing before proceeding.)

1 Use the faders to set channels levels.

Faders in a mix group are controlled together. You can temporarily disable a mix group in

order to make adjustments to individual faders by pressing and holding the USER

DEFINED KEYS [12] (CTRL/CLUTCH) button. Alternatively, you can make adjustments

to individual faders while touching the knob of at least one fader in that mix group.

You can view channel levels in dB on the channel strip displays by holding down the USER

DEFINED KEYS [13] (ALT/FINE) button while adjusting faders.

To do this... Do this!

Set all channels to the same input source

ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], ENCODER MODE

[ASSIGN 1], Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Encoder

push-switch

Set all selected channels to the same input

source

ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], ENCODER MODE

[ASSIGN 1], Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER

DEFINED KEYS [4]+Encoder push-switch

To do this... Do this!

Set all channels to the same output desti-

nation

ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], ENCODER MODE

[ASSIGN 2], Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Encoder

push-switch

Set all selected channels to the same out-

put destination

ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], ENCODER MODE

[ASSIGN 2], Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER

DEFINED KEYS [4]+Encoder push-switch

Muting Channels 205

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Muting Channels

Channels can be muted as follows.

1 Use the [ON] buttons to mute channels.

The [ON] button indicators of muted channels go out.

2 Press the [ON] buttons again to unmute channels.

The [ON] button indicators of unmuted channels are lit.

Grouped channels are muted together. You can temporarily disable a group in order to

mute individual channels by pressing and holding the USER DEFINED KEYS [12]

(CTRL/CLUTCH) button.

The following shortcuts apply.

Panning Channels

Channels can be panned as follows.

1 Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button.

Its indicator lights up.

2 Use the Encoders to pan the channels.

Pan positions are displayed by the channel strip displays. See “Pan Display” on page 193 for

more information.

You can view pan settings numerically on the channel strip displays by holding down the

USER DEFINED KEYS [13] (ALT/FINE) button while adjusting the Encoders.

For stereo aux input channels (i.e., channels with two panpots), use the ENCODER MODE

[PAN] (PAN) button to toggle between the left and right panpots, and pan with the

Encoder. When the left panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button indi-

cator is lit continuously and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “Pan.” When

the right panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button indicator ﬂashes

and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “PanR.”

Soloing Channels

Channels can be soloed as follows.

1 Use the [SOLO] buttons to solo channels.

The [SOLO] button indicators of soloed channels light up and the [ON] button indicators

of unsoloed channels ﬂash.

2 Press the [SOLO] buttons again to unsolo channels.

Grouped channels are soloed together. You can temporarily disable a mix group in order to

solo individual channels by pressing and holding the USER DEFINED KEYS [12]

(CTRL/CLUTCH) button.

To do this... Do this!

Mute all channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+[ON]

Mute all selected channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+[ON]

206 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Assigning Send Destinations

Sends can be assigned to output destinations as follows. The Pro Tools transport must be

stopped in order to make these assignments.

You can view the current output destination assignment for each send on the channel strip

displays by pressing and holding the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons.

1 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3] (SEND ASSIGN) button.

Its indicator ﬂashes, and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “ASGN.”

2 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the sends.

The button indicator of the selected send lights up, and the channel strip displays show the

current send destinations of all channels. If the currently selected send is not assigned to a

channel, “—” is displayed.

3 Use the Encoders to select send destinations.

The names of the send destinations appear on the channel strip displays in abbreviated

form. When you select a different destination, the ring of the corresponding channel strip

display ﬂashes. When a stereo send destination is selected, its name ﬂashes and continues to

ﬂash even after its been conﬁrmed.

4 To conﬁrm your selection, press the Encoder’s push-switch.

The channel strip display ring stops ﬂashing.

The following shortcuts apply.

You can cancel this function by pressing the [–/DEC] (ESC) button.

Conﬁguring Sends as Pre or Post

Sends can be conﬁgured as either pre or post as follows.

(Make sure the MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 2] (SEND MUTE) button indicator is not lit

before proceeding.)

1 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the sends.

The ENCODER MODE [AUX/MTRX] (SEND LEVEL) button indicator lights up, as does

the button indicator of the selected send.

2 Use the Encoder push-switches to toggle between pre and post.

To do this... Do this!

Set all channels to the same send destina-

tion

ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5],

Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Encoder push-switch

Set all selected channels to the same send

destination

ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5],

Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS

[4]+Encoder push-switch

Setting Send Levels 207

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Setting Send Levels

Send levels can be set as follows.

1 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the sends.

The ENCODER MODE [AUX/MTRX] (SEND LEVEL) button indicator lights up, as does

the button indicator of the selected send.

The levels for the selected send are displayed by the channel strip displays. See “Send Level”

on page 193 for more information.

2 Use the Encoders to set the send levels.

You can view send levels in dB on the channel strip displays by holding down the USER

DEFINED KEYS [13] (ALT/FINE) button while adjusting the Encoders.

Send levels can also be set by using the faders in Flip mode. See “Flip Mode” on page 208 for

more information.

Muting Sends

Sends can be muted as follows.

1 Press the MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 2] (SEND MUTE) button.

2 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the sends.

The ENCODER MODE [AUX/MTRX] (SEND LEVEL) button indicator lights up, as does

the button indicator of the selected send.

3 Use the Encoder push-switches to mute the sends.

When a send is muted, the ring of the corresponding channel strip display ﬂashes.

Sends can also be muted by using the [ON] buttons in Flip mode. See “Flip Mode” on page

208 for more information.

Panning Sends

Only sends assigned to stereo destinations can be panned. Sends can be panned by using the

Encoders in Flip mode. See “Flip Mode” on page 208 for more information.

208 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Flip Mode

In Flip mode, the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons can be used to control sends, as

shown in the following table.

1 Press the FADER MODE [FADER] or [AUX/MTRX] button.

The FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX/MTRX] button indicators ﬂash alternately, and

both the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) and [AUX/MTRX] (SEND LEVEL) button

indicators light up. The SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “FLIP.”

2 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the sends.

The button indicator of the selected send lights up.

3 Use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the currently selected

send.

For stereo aux input channels (i.e., channels with two send panpots), use the ENCODER

MODE [PAN] (PAN) button to toggle between the left and right panpots, and pan with the

Encoder. When the left panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button indi-

cator is lit continuously. When the right panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN]

(PAN) button indicator ﬂashes.

Control Normal mode Flip mode

Fader Channel level Send level

Encoder Channel pan/send level Send pan

[ON] button Channel mute Send mute

Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins 209

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins

Inserts can be assigned to channels as follows. The Pro Tools transport must be stopped in

order to make these assignments.

1 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button.

Its indicator lights up and the [SEL] buttons are set to Insert Select mode.

2 Use the [SEL] buttons to select channels for insert assignment.

The name of the selected channel appears in the INSERT/PARAM section of the display.

The border of the corresponding channel name in the Pro Tools Mix window is highlighted

red.

3 Press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [5] (ASSIGN) button.

Its indicator ﬂashes, as does the ASSIGN indicator on the display.

4 Use Parameter controls 1–4 to select inserts/plug-ins.

The names of the inserts/plug-ins appear on the display in abbreviated form. When you

select an insert/plug-in other than the current, the corresponding SEL button ﬂashes on the

display.

5 To conﬁrm your selection, press the relevant Parameter control’s

push-switch.

The SEL button stops ﬂashing.

While the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [5] (ASSIGN) button indicator is still ﬂashing, you can

assign more inserts/plug-ins to the same channel. To set insert #5, press the Parameter

Down (SCROLL >) button. Press the Parameter Up (< SCROLL) button to view inserts 1–4

again.

To assign inserts/plug-ins to other channels, use the [SEL] buttons to select them. You’ll

need to press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [5] (ASSIGN) button each time you select another

channel.

To assign the same insert/plug-in to all channels, while holding down the USER DEFINED

KEYS [5] (OPTION/ALL) button, press the Parameter control push-switch. (The number

of assignments possible depends on the available CPU power.)

To assign the same insert/plug-in to a selection of channels, press the ENCODER MODE

[ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button (indicator off) so that the [SEL] buttons can be used to select

channels. Select the channels as explained on page 203, then press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS

[5] (ASSIGN) button. While its indicator is ﬂashing, use Parameter controls 1–4 to select an

insert/plug-in, and while holding down the USER DEFINED KEYS [5] (OPTION/ALL)

button and USER DEFINED KEYS [4] (SHIFT/ADD) button, press the Parameter control’s

push-switch. (The number of assignments possible depends on the available CPU power.)

You can cancel this function by pressing the [–/DEC] (ESC) button.

210 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Editing Plug-ins

Plug-ins can be edited as follows.

(Make sure the MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 4] (INSERT BYPASS) button indicator is not

lit before proceeding.)

1 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button.

Its indicator lights up and the [SEL] buttons are set to Insert Select mode.

2 Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel whose plug-in you want to edit.

That channel’s [SEL] button indicator lights up, and the border of the corresponding chan-

nel name in the Pro Tools Mix window is highlighted red. The names of the Plug-ins

inserted in the channel are displayed in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section of the display.

3 Use the Parameter control 1–4 push-switches to select the plug-in that you

want to edit.

Plug-in Edit mode is set and the plug-in’s parameters are displayed in the INSERT

ASSIGN/EDIT section of the display. The EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [8] (INSERT/PARAM)

button indicator lights up and the PARAM indicator on the display appears highlighted.

4 Use Parameter controls 1–4 and their push-switches to edit the displayed

parameters.

Parameters displayed on the top row can be edited by using the push-switches. Parameters

displayed on the bottom row can be edited by using the Parameter controls.

5 Use the Parameter Down (SCROLL >) button and Parameter Up (< SCROLL)

button to select the parameter pages.

When a parameter page is ﬁrst selected, the number of the current parameter page and the

total number of parameter pages is displayed momentarily. For example, “1/2” indicates

that the ﬁrst page of two is currently selected. While “3/4” indicates that the third page of

four is currently selected. The title of the plug-in is also displayed.

While editing a plug-in you can bypass it by pressing the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [7]

(BYPASS) button. In which case, the BYPASS indicator on the display appears highlighted.

As soon as you begin editing a plug-in, the COMPARE indicator on the display appears

highlighted. You can compare your edits with the original settings by pressing the

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [6] (COMPARE) button. The COMPARE indicator on the display

appears highlighted while the original settings are active, and unhighlighted while your

edits are active.

6 To edit another plug-in, press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [8] (INSERT/PARAM)

button (its indicator goes out), use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel

(same as step #2), and use the Parameter control 1–4 push-switches to select

the plug-in (same as step #3).

Bypassing Individual Plug-ins 211

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Bypassing Individual Plug-ins

Individual plug-ins can be bypassed as follows.

(Make sure the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [8] (INSERT/PARAM) button indicator is not lit

before proceeding.)

1 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button.

Its indicator lights up and the [SEL] buttons are set to Insert Select mode.

2 Use the [SEL] buttons to select plug-ins.

3 While holding down the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [7] (BYPASS) button, use

Parameter control 1–4 push switches to bypass the plug-ins.

To bypass plug-in #5, press the Parameter Down (SCROLL >) button, and then perform

step 3. Press the Parameter Up (< SCROLL) button to view plug-ins 1–4 again.

The titles of bypassed plug-ins are displayed in uppercase characters. For example, the title

of the plug in “D-Verb” appears as “d-verb” when it’s not bypassed, and appears as

“D-VERB” when it is bypassed.

Bypassing all Plug-ins

All plug-ins on a channel can be bypassed as follows.

1 Press the MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 4] (INSERT BYPASS) button.

Its indicator lights up.

The INS indicators on the channel strip displays work as follows.

INS indicator = off: None of the channel’s plug-ins are bypassed.

INS indicator = lit: All of the channel’s plug-ins are bypassed.

INS indicator = ﬂashing: Some of the channel’s plug-ins are bypassed.

2 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button.

Its indicator ﬂashes.

3 Use the [SEL] buttons to bypass all plug-ins on each channel.

The following shortcuts apply.

To do this... Do this!

Bypass all plug-ins on all channels

MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 4], ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4],

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+[SEL]

Bypass all plug-ins on all selected chan-

nels

MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 4], ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4],

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+[SEL]

212 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Resetting Faders, Sends, Panpots & Plug-ins

Faders, panpots, sends, and plug-ins can be reset to their default values as follows. For faders

and send controls, this is “0.” For panpots, it’s center.

Make sure that the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button indicator is off before

proceeding with these shortcuts.

While the [MATRIX 1] (DEFAULT) button is being pressed, its indicator ﬂashes and

“DFLT” appears in the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display.

Grouped channels are reset together. You can temporarily disable a group by pressing and

holding the USER DEFINED KEYS [12] (CTRL/CLUTCH) button before pressing the

[MATRIX 1] (DEFAULT) button.

Navigating the Edit Window

The cursor buttons can be used to navigate the Edit window as follows.

1 Use the [INC] (CURSOR MODE) button to select Navigation cursor mode.

The CURSOR MODE section of the display shows “NAVIGATION.”

2 To move the edit cursor to the previous region boundary, or to the previous

marker, press the Left cursor button.

3 To move the edit cursor to the next region boundary, or to the next marker,

press the Right cursor button.

4 To select the track above, press the Up cursor button.

5 To select the track below, press the Down cursor button.

The following shortcuts apply.

To do this... Do this!

Reset a channel fader [MATRIX 1]+[SEL]

Reset all channel faders USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+[MATRIX 1]+[SEL]

Reset all selected channel faders

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS

[4]+[MATRIX 1]+[SEL]

Reset a channel panpot [PAN], [MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push]

Reset all channel panpots [PAN], USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+[MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push]

Reset all selected channel panpots

[PAN], USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS

[4]+[MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push]

Reset a channel send level AUX SELECT [AUX1–5], [MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push]

Reset all channel send levels

AUX SELECT [AUX1–5], USER DEFINED KEYS

[5]+[MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push]

Reset all selected channel send levels

AUX SELECT [AUX1–5], USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER

DEFINED KEYS [4]+[MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push]

Reset the currently selected plug-in [MATRIX 1]+EFFECTS PLUG-INS [6]

To do this... Do this!

Extend the selection USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+Left or Right cursor button

Select the previous region USER DEFINED KEYS [12]+Left cursor button

Select the next region USER DEFINED KEYS [12]+Right cursor button

Display the in point of the selected region

in the center of the Edit window

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Left cursor button (or LOCATE

MEMORY [IN] button)

Display the out point of the selected

region in the center of the Edit window

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Right cursor button (or LOCATE

MEMORY [OUT] button)

Zooming 213

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Zooming

The cursor buttons can be used to zoom the Edit window as follows.

1 Use the [INC] (CURSOR MODE) button to select Zoom cursor mode.

The CURSOR MODE section of the display shows “ZOOM.”

In Zoom cursor mode, the cursor buttons work as follows:

•Left cursor button: Zoom out horizontally.

•Right cursor button: Zoom in horizontally.

•Up cursor button: Zoom in vertically.

•Down cursor button: Zoom out vertically.

Making Fine Adjustments to the Selected Region

The cursor buttons can be used in conjunction with the Parameter wheel to make ﬁne

adjustments to the selected region.

1 Use the [INC] (CURSOR MODE) button to select Select cursor mode.

The CURSOR MODE section of the display shows “SELECT.”

2 While holding down the left cursor button, turn the Parameter wheel to

make ﬁne adjustments to the in point of the selected region.

3 While holding down the right cursor button, turn the Parameter wheel to

make ﬁne adjustments to the out point of the selected region.

The following shortcuts apply.

The following shortcuts can be used in either Navigation or Select cursor mode.

To do this... Do this!

Move the edit cursor to the in point of the

selected region

Double-click the Left cursor button

Move the edit cursor to the out point of

the selected region

Double-click the Right cursor button

To do this... Do this!

Select the track/region below Down cursor button

Select the track/region above Up cursor button

Extend the selection to include the same

region on the track below

USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+Down cursor button

Extend the selection to include the same

region on the track above

USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+Up cursor button

Shorten the selection by unselecting the

region on the lowest track

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Down cursor button

Shorten the selection by unselecting the

region on the highest track

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Up cursor button

Move the selection (not the audio) back-

wards or forwards

Left cursor button+Right cursor button+Parameter wheel

214 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Scrub & Shuttle

The Parameter wheel can be used to scrub and shuttle as follows.

1 Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped.

2 Press the [SCRUB] button if you want to scrub, press the [SHUTTLE] button

if you want to shuttle.

The corresponding button indicator lights up. The [REW] and [FF] button indicators also

light up, and the cursor mode is set to Navigation (the CURSOR MODE section of the dis-

play shows “NAVIGATION”).

3 Turn the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub/shuttle forwards. Turn it coun-

terclockwise to scrub/shuttle backwards.

Scrub/shuttle starts at the in point of the selected region. If no region is selected, the edit

cursor position is used. If you hold down the USER DEFINED KEYS [5] (OPTION/ALL)

button when pressing the [SCRUB] or [SHUTTLE] button, scrub/shuttle will start at the

out point of the selected region.

If the Edit Insertion Follows Scrub/Shuttle preference is turned on in Pro Tools (Setups

menu, Preferences command, Operation page), the currently selected region will be can-

celled when the [SCRUB] or [SHUTTLE] button is pressed. To maintain the currently

selected region, hold down the USER DEFINED KEYS [4] (SHIFT/ADD) button when

pressing the [SCRUB] or [SHUTTLE] button.

You can toggle between scrub and shuttle by pressing the [SCRUB] and [SHUTTLE] but-

tons, in which case scrub or shuttle continues from the current position.

4 To expand or shrink the selected region, while holding down the USER

DEFINED KEYS [4] (SHIFT/ADD) button, rotate the Parameter wheel.

Press the left cursor button when you want to move the in point. Press the right cursor but-

ton, to move the out point.

To start Scrub/Shuttle from the top of the selected region, while holding down the USER

DEFINED KEYS [5] (OPTION/ALL) button, press the left cursor button. Similarly, to start

Scrub/Shuttle from the end of the selected region, while holding down the USER DEFINED

KEYS [5] (OPTION/ALL) button, press the right cursor button.

5 To stop scrub/shuttle, press the [SCRUB] or [SHUTTLE] button again, or press

the [STOP] button.

If you press the [REW], [FF], or [PLAY] button, scrub/shuttle operation is stopped before

rewind, fast forward, or playback commences.

While scrub/ shuttle is active, only the following Pro Tools/DM2000 controls can be used:

[SCRUB] and [SHUTTLE] buttons, Parameter wheel, transport buttons, faders, [ON] but-

tons, and [SOLO] buttons. The current position can be stored as a marker by pressing the

[ENTER] button.

The scrub resolution depends on the current zoom setting, the more zoomed in you are, the

higher the resolution. If you hold down the USER DEFINED KEYS [13] (ALT/FINE) but-

ton while scrubbing, you can scrub at the highest resolution regardless of the current zoom

setting.

Automation 215

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Automation

Viewing the Automation Mode

The Automation mode setting of each channel can be viewed as follows.

1 Press and hold a channel’s [AUTO] button.

The channel’s Automation mode is displayed on the corresponding channel strip display

while the [AUTO] button is pressed.

The Automation mode settings of all channels can be viewed as follows.

2 Press and hold the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] (AUTO STATUS) button.

The Automation modes of all channels are displayed on the channel strip displays while the

AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] (AUTO STATUS) button is pressed.

Setting the Automation Mode

The Automation mode can be set as follows.

1 While holding down a channel’s [AUTO] button, press the AUTOMIX

[WRITE], [TOUCH], [LATCH], [TRIM], [READ], or [OFF] button.

The channel’s Automation mode is displayed on the corresponding channel strip display

while the [AUTO] button is pressed.

Grouped channels are set together. You can temporarily disable a group in order to set indi-

vidual channels by pressing and holding the USER DEFINED KEYS [12] (CTRL/CLUTCH)

button.

The following shortcuts apply.

Pro Tools Channel Strip Displays [AUTO] Button Indicators

Auto write

Wrt

Flashing red (Record Ready)

Red (Recording)

Auto touch

Tch

Auto latch

Ltch

Auto read

Read Green

Auto off

Off Off

To do this... Do this!

Set the Automation mode of all channels

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+AUTOMIX [WRITE], [TOUCH],

[LATCH], [TRIM], [READ], or [OFF]

Set the Automation mode of all selected

channels

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+AUTO-

MIX [WRITE], [TOUCH], [LATCH], [TRIM], [READ], or [OFF]

216 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Trim Mode

Tr im mode can be set as follows.

1 While holding down a channel’s [AUTO] button, press the AUTOMIX [REL-

ATIVE] (TRIM) button.

The channel’s Automation mode is displayed on the corresponding channel strip display

while its [AUTO] button is pressed.

Grouped channels are set together. You can temporarily disable a group in order to set indi-

vidual channels by pressing and holding the USER DEFINED KEYS [12] (CTRL/CLUTCH)

button.

The following shortcuts apply.

In Tr im mode, you can display channel and send level values relatively (instead of absolute

decibel values) on the channel strip displays by holding down the USER DEFINED KEYS

[13] (ALT/FINE) button while adjusting the faders and Encoders.

Arming Parameters for Automation

Parameters can be selected for automation recording as follows.

1 Use the following AUTOMIX-OVERWRITE buttons to arm parameters.

The button indicators for armed parameters light up.

The following shortcuts apply.

Pro Tools Channel Strip Displays [AUTO] Button Indicators

Auto trim/write

TWrt

Flashing red/orange (Record Ready)

Orange (Recording)

Auto trim/touch

TTch

Auto trim/latch

TLch

Auto trim/read

TRd Flashing green/orange

To do this... Do this!

Set Trim mode for all channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+AUTOMIX [RELATIVE]

Set Trim mode of all selected channels

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+AUTO-

MIX [RELATIVE]

AUTOMIX-OVERWRITE Buttons Pro Tools

[FADER] (FADER) Volume

[ON] (MUTE) Mute

[PAN] (PAN) Pan

[AUX] (SEND) Send level

[AUX ON] (SEND MUTE) Send mute

[EQ] (PLUG-IN) Plug-in

To do this... Do this!

Arm all parameters

USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+AUTOMIX-OVERWRITE [FADER],

[ON], [PAN], [AUX], [AUX ON], or [EQ]

Inverse armed parameter selection

USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+AUTOMIX-OVERWRITE [FADER],

[ON], [PAN], [AUX], [AUX ON], or [EQ]

Remote Control 217

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

20 Remote Control

About Remote Layers

The DM2000’s four Remote Layers allow you to control external MIDI equipment directly

from the DM2000. The type of device to be controlled (i.e., the target) can be speciﬁed for

each Remote Layer. There are three types of target: User Deﬁned, Nuendo, and Pro Tools.

User Deﬁned targets allow you to specify the MIDI data that will be transmitted when the

24 channel strip faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are operated. These settings are stored

in Scenes, for snapshot-style automation. The Nuendo and Pro Tools targets have been

especially designed for controlling Nuendo and Pro Tools.

Assigning Targets to Remote Layers

Targets are assigned to Remote Layers as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate the Remote 1–4 pages.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the TARGET parameter, use the Parameter

wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a target, and then press [ENTER].

TARGET: This can be set to NO ASSIGN, USER DEFINED, Nuendo, or Pro Tools. Only

one Remote Layer can be set to Nuendo or Pro Tools. See page 218 for more information

on the User Deﬁned target. See page 188 for more information on the Pro Tools target.

218 Chapter 20—Remote Control

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Conﬁguring User Deﬁned Remote Layers

User Deﬁned Remote Layers can be conﬁgured as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate the Remote 1–4 pages.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

TARGET: This is used to select the target for the currently selected Remote Layer (the User

Deﬁned target is explained here).

TRANSMIT: This enables and disables MIDI data transmission for the selected Remote

Layer.

INITIALIZE: This initializes the settings of the currently selected bank.

BANK: These buttons are used to select banks 1, 2, 3, and 4. Each bank can contain MIDI

settings for the 24 faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons. Banks can be stored to an external

MIDI device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored

to SmartMedia (see page 231). Initially, bank 1 contains General MIDI (GM) volume and

pan settings; bank 2, GM volume and effect; bank 3, XG volume and pan; bank 4, Nuendo

VST mixer.

ID/SHORT/LONG: On Remote Layers, channel strips 1–24 are identiﬁed by the ﬁxed IDs

RM01–RM24. You can enter a Short and Long name for each Remote channel strip. Short

names appear on the channel strip displays. To enter a name, use the cursor buttons to select

the SHORT or LONG name, use the [SEL] buttons, Parameter wheel, or INC/DEC buttons

to select the channel strips, and then press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears,

enter a name, and press OK when you’ve ﬁnished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for

more information.

ON: These parameters are used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be trans-

mitted when an [ON] button is pressed. Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel strips,

and then edit as necessary. When a value from 00 to FF is speciﬁed, that value is transmitted

when an [ON] button is pressed. For the SW setting, data value 7F is transmitted when an

[ON] button is turned on, and data value 00 is transmitted when an [ON] button is turned

off. The END setting speciﬁes the end of the data. NOP means no data is transmitted.

UNLATCH/LATCH: This parameter determines the operation of the [ON] buttons:

Latching or Non-latching. When set to UNLATCH, an ON value is transmitted when an

buttons is pressed, and an OFF value is transmitted when it’s released. When set to LATCH,

an ON value is transmitted when the button is pressed and that value is maintained when

the button is released. The next time you press that button, the OFF value is transmitted.

LEARN: This button is used to turn on and off the Learn function, which can be used to

learn what MIDI messages are being transmitted by external MIDI devices when their con-

trols or parameters are adjusted. When on, received MIDI messages are displayed in the

DATA area. Only the ﬁrst 16 bytes of data, starting with a Status bit, are displayed.

Using User Defined Remote Layers 219

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

ENCODER: These parameters are used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be

transmitted when an Encoder is operated. Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel strips,

and then edit as necessary. When a value from 00 to FF is speciﬁed, that value is transmitted

when an Encoder is adjusted. For the ENC setting, the Encoder’s current value from 0–127

is transmitted when it’s adjusted. The END setting speciﬁes the end of the data. NOP means

no data is transmitted.

LEARN: This works the same as the [ON] button Learn function above, except the received

MIDI messages are displayed in the ENCODER DATA area. Only one Learn function can

be used at a time.

FADER: These parameters are used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be

transmitted when a fader is operated. Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel strips, and

then edit as necessary. When a value from 00 to FF is speciﬁed, that value is transmitted

when a fader is adjusted. For the FAD setting, a fader’s current value from 0–127 is trans-

mitted when it’s adjusted. The END setting speciﬁes the end of the data. NOP means no

data is transmitted.

LEARN: This works the same as the [ON] button Learn function above, except the received

MIDI messages are displayed in the FADER DATA area. Only one Learn function can be

used at a time.

Using User Deﬁned Remote Layers

Once conﬁgured, User Deﬁned Remote Layers can be used as follows.

1 Use the LAYER REMOTE [1–4] buttons to select the User Deﬁned Remote Lay-

ers.

While a User Deﬁned Remote Layer is selected, operating the channel strip faders, Encod-

ers, and [ON] buttons causes the speciﬁed MIDI data to be transmitted.

When a User Deﬁned Remote Layer is selected, the corresponding Remote page appears.

Since this is the same page as that selected by the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button,

User Deﬁned Remote Layers can be conﬁgured here as well, even the target can be changed.

When a User Deﬁned Remote Layer is selected, the channel strip displays

show Remote channel strip Short names. The border of the currently

selected channel’s channel strip display lights up. The Encoder displays

indicate the positions of the Encoders.

The settings of the channel strip faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons,

and the current target and bank setting for each Remote Layer are stored

in Scenes. When a Scene is recalled, if the Remote Layer’s target is the same as when the

Scene was stored, the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are set accordingly and the cor-

responding MIDI data is transmitted (so long as the TRANSMIT parameter is set to

ENABLED). If the target is not the same, the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are set

accordingly, but no MIDI data is transmitted.

GM01

220 Chapter 20—Remote Control

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

About Machine Control (MMC & P2)

The DM2000 can control the transport, locate functions, track arming, and chase function

of up to eight external recording machines that support the MMC or P2 control protocol.

Machines can be speciﬁed as either MTR or Master and controlled independently.

Machines that support the P2 protocol can be controlled by connecting them to the

DM2000’s REMOTE port using a 9-pin straight cable. Wiring details are provided on

page 315. The REMOTE port must be set for P2 control on the Remote Port Setup page (see

page 221).

Machines that support MMC can be controlled by connecting them to the DM2000’s

MIDI, SERIAL, USB, or SLOT1 (with optional mLAN I/O Card installed in Slot #1).

MMC and P2 protocol support varies from machine to machine. Some machines may not

operate exactly as explained in this section.

Conﬁguring Machines

Up to eight machines can be conﬁgured as follows.

1 Use the LOCATOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Machine Conﬁguration

page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

TYPE: This is used to specify the type of machine: MMC or P2. Only one machine can be

set to P2.

PORT: When the machine TYPE is MMC, use this parameter to specify the port for MMC

communications. Available ports include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1 1–8.

DEVICE ID: When the machine TYPE is MMC, use this parameter to specify the device ID

from 1 to 127 or ALL. The target machine must be set to the same ID. The same ID cannot

be assigned to more than one SERIAL, USB, or SLOT1 port.

TRANSPORT CONTROL: This parameter determines whether or not the DM2000’s

transport buttons control the machine. Only one Master and one MTR machine can be

enabled at a time.

CHASE CONTROL: This parameter determines whether or not a Chase On/Off com-

mand is transmitted from the DM2000 to a machine when the LOCATOR [ONLINE] but-

ton is pressed.

MASTER/MTR: This parameter is used to specify which machines are Masters and which

are MTRs. Multiple machines can be set to Master and MTR.

Configuring the REMOTE Port 221

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Conﬁguring the REMOTE Port

If you are using the P2 protocol to control a machine, the REMOTE port

must be conﬁgured as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the Remote

Port Setup page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the REMOTE FUNCTION P2 button, and then

press [ENTER].

Transport Buttons

The DM2000’s transport can be used to control external machines. Transport control can

be enabled and disabled for individual machines on the Machine Conﬁguration page (see

page 220).

[REW] button

This button starts rewind on the external machines.

[FF] button

This button starts fast forward on the external machines.

[STOP] button

This button stops the external machines.

[PLAY] button

This button starts playback on the external machines. It’s also used to punch out of record-

ing.

[REC] button

This button is used in conjunction with the [PLAY] button to start recording on the external

machines. Pressing the [REC] button on its own has no effect.

REC

REW

FF STOP PLAY

222 Chapter 20—Remote Control

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Using Shuttle & Scrub

The Parameter wheel can be used to shuttle and scrub the external machines.

When the [SHUTTLE] button indicator is lit, the Parameter wheel can be used to shuttle.

When the [SCRUB] button indicator is lit, the Parameter wheel can be used to scrub. Turn

the Parameter wheel clockwise to shuttle/scrub forwards. Turn it counterclockwise to shut-

tle/scrub backwards.

These buttons are mutually exclusive with the LOCATOR [QUICK PUNCH] and [LOOP]

buttons.

Using the Locator

The LOCATOR section can be used to control the external machines.

LOCATE MEMORY [1–8] buttons

These buttons are used to set and to locate to the eight Locate memories. Locate memories

can be set on the Locate Memory page (see page 224). To set a locate memory on-the-ﬂy,

while holding down the [SET] button, press a LOCATE MEMORY [1–8] button. The

DM2000 must be receiving timecode in order to do this. Once set, the stored position can

be located by pressing the corresponding button. If the button is pressed while the machine

is stopped, the stored position is located. If the button is pressed while the machine is play-

ing, the stored position is located and then playback continues from that position.

When using P2, locate operations are based on the control information received at the

REMOTE port. In order to synchronize the MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge’s time counter, it’s

recommended that you set the DM2000 to the same timecode source as the machine.

[AUDITION] button

This button is used in conjunction with the [PRE], [IN], [OUT], and [POST] buttons for

auditioning. Its indicator lights up while auditioning is on and operation is as follows:

•Press the [PRE] button to locate and audition from the pre-roll point.

•Press the [IN] button to locate and audition from the in point.

•Press the [OUT] button to locate and audition from the out point.

•Press the [POST] button to locate and audition from the post-roll point.

SHUTTLE

SCRUB

DISPLAY

LOCATE MEMORY

LOCATOR

12345678

ONLINE

AUDITION

LOOP

MASTER

PRE POST

ROLL

BACK

IN OUT MTR

QUICK

PUNCH

REHEARSAL

SET

RETURN

TO ZERO

Using the Locator 223

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

[PRE] & [POST] buttons

These buttons are used to locate the pre-roll and post-roll points. If the [AUDITION] but-

ton indicator is lit, playback starts when a point is located. The pre-roll point is the in point

minus the speciﬁed pre-roll time. The post-roll point is the out point plus the speciﬁed

post-roll time. The pre-roll and post-roll times can be speciﬁed on the Locate Memory page

(see page 224). If a button is pressed while the machine is stopped, the stored position is

located. If a button is pressed while the machine is playing, the stored position is located and

then playback continues from that position.

[IN] & [OUT] buttons

These buttons are used to set and to locate the in and out points. These points can be set on

the Locate Memory page (see page 224). To set a point on-the-ﬂy, while holding down the

[SET] button, press the [IN] or [OUT] button. The DM2000 must be receiving timecode

in order to do this. Once set, the stored position can be located by pressing the correspond-

ing button. If the button is pressed while the machine is stopped, the stored position is

located. If the button is pressed while the machine is playing, the stored position is located

and then playback continues from that position. If the [AUDITION] button indicator is lit,

playback starts when a point is located.

[SET] button

This button is used in conjunction with the LOCATE MEMORY [1–8], [IN], [OUT], and

[RETURN TO ZERO] buttons to set the locate points.

[RETURN TO ZERO] button

This button is used to set and to locate the return to zero point. This point can be set on the

Locate Memory page (see page 224). To set it on-the-ﬂy, while holding down the [SET] but-

ton, press the [RETURN TO ZERO] button. The DM2000 must be receiving timecode in

order to do this. Once set, the stored position can be located by pressing the [RETURN TO

ZERO] button. If the button is pressed while the machine is stopped, the stored position is

located. If the button is pressed while the machine is playing, the stored position is located

and then playback continues from that position.

[ONLINE] button

This button is used to switch the external machines online and ofﬂine. Its indicator lights

up when machines are online. Essentially, this turns the machine’s chase function on and

off. This function can be enabled and disabled for individual machines on the Machine

Conﬁguration page (see page 220).

When chase is on, the machine automatically chases its speciﬁed timecode source, and the

following DM2000 controls are ineffective: transport, [SHUTTLE], [SCRUB], [PRE],

[POST], [IN], [OUT], [RETURN TO ZERO], [LOOP], and [QUICK PUNCH].

[LOOP] button

This button is used to turn loop playback on and off, in which playback cycles between the

pre-roll and post-roll points. Its indicator lights up when loop playback is on. If Loop play-

back is turned on during playback, loop playback will not start until the post-roll point is

reached.

This button is mutually exclusive with the [QUICK PUNCH], [SHUTTLE], and [SCRUB]

buttons.

[QUICK PUNCH] button

This button is used to turn quick punch (also known as auto punch) on and off. Its indica-

tor lights up when quick punch is on.

This button is mutually exclusive with the [LOOP], [SHUTTLE], and [SCRUB] buttons.

224 Chapter 20—Remote Control

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

•When the [QUICK PUNCH] button indicator is lit, pressing the [PLAY] button will locate

to the pre-roll point and start playback. At the post-roll point, the machine will stop play-

back, locate the pre-roll point, and then stop.

•When the [QUICK PUNCH] button indicator is lit, pressing the [PLAY] and [REC] but-

tons together will locate to the pre-roll point and start playback. At the in point, the

machine switches to input monitor and starts recording. At the out point, the machine

switches to playback monitor and stops recording. At the post-roll point, the machine

locates the pre-roll point and then stops. If the [REHEARSAL] button indicator is lit, the

machine goes into Record-Rehearsal mode between the in and out points (i.e., nothing is

recorded).

[ROLL BACK] button

This button is used to roll back the machine by the amount speciﬁed on the Locate Memory

page (see page 224). If its pressed while the machine is stopped, the machine rolls back the

speciﬁed amount and stops. If its pressed during playback, the machine rolls back the spec-

iﬁed amount and then continues playing.

[REHEARSAL] button

This button is used to turn Rehearsal mode on and off. Its indicator lights up when

Rehearsal mode is on. In Rehearsal mode, the machine enters Record-Rehearsal mode

instead of actually recording when the [PLAY] and [REC] buttons are pressed together.

Rehearsal mode can also be used with quick punch.

[MTR] & [MASTER] buttons

These mutually exclusive buttons are used to select the MTR or Master machines for control

with the LOCATOR section. When the [MTR] button indicator is lit, the LOCATOR section

controls machines set to MTR. When the [MASTER] button indicator is lit, the LOCATOR

section controls machines set to MASTER. See “Conﬁguring Machines” on page 220.

Setting the Locate Memories, Pre-roll, Post-roll & Roll-back

The locate points and the pre-roll, post-roll, and roll-back times can be set as follows.

1 Use the LOCATOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Locate Memory page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

LOCATE MEMORY 1–8, IN, OUT, and RTZ: These time values determine the points

that will be located when the LOCATOR [1–8], [IN], [OUT], and [RTZ] buttons are

pressed. Locate points can be speciﬁed in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames, the frame

range being dependent on the frame rate setting on the Time Reference page (see page 171).

Arming Machine Tracks 225

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

These points can also be set on-the-ﬂy, so long as the DM2000 is receiving timecode. To do

this, while holding down the LOCATOR [SET] button, press the [1–8], [IN], [OUT], or

[RTZ] button.

PREROLL TIME: In conjunction with the in point, this determines the position that will

be located when the LOCATOR [PRE] button is pressed. For example, if the in point is

00:01:00.00 and the pre-roll time is 5 seconds, 00:00:55.00 will be located.

POSTROLL TIME: In conjunction with the out point, this determines the position that

will be located when the LOCATOR [POST] button is pressed. For example, if the out point

is 00:01:00.00 and the post-roll time is 5 seconds, 00:01:05.00 will be located.

ROLLBACK TIME: This determines how many seconds the machines roll back from the

current position when the LOCATOR [ROLL BACK] button is pressed.

Arming Machine Tracks

The TRACK ARMING section can be used to arm tracks on external machines.

[1–24] buttons

These buttons are used to arm tracks on the external MTR and Master machines. Their

indicators light up when tracks are armed. These buttons can be conﬁgured to arm any

track of any machine. See “Conﬁguring MTR Track Arming” on page 226 and “Conﬁguring

Master Track Arming” on page 226 for more information.

TRACK ARMING GROUP [A–D] buttons

These buttons are used to select track arming groups A, B, C, and D. The indicator of the

currently selected group lights up. Track arming groups can be used only with P2 machines.

See “Conﬁguring Track Arming Groups” on page 227 for more information.

[ALL CLEAR] button

This button is used to clear all track arming on the external machines.

[MASTER] button

This button is used to select the MTR or Master machines for track arming. When its button

indicator is off, the TRACK ARMING section controls machines set to MTR. When the but-

ton indicator is lit, the TRACK ARMING section controls machines set to MASTER. See

“Conﬁguring Machines” on page 220.

ABCD

MASTERALL CLEAR

12 45678

910 12131415

21 22 23 2417 18 2019

TRACK ARMING

TRACK ARMING GROUP

DISPLAY

226 Chapter 20—Remote Control

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Conﬁguring MTR Track Arming

You can assign MTR machine tracks to the TRACK ARMING [1–24] buttons as follows.

These assignments are effective only when the TRACK ARMING [MASTER] button indi-

cator is off.

1 Use the TRACK ARMING [DISPLAY] button to locate the MTR Track Arming

Conﬁguration page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

MACHINE: This parameter is used to specify the MTR machine whose track is to be

armed when each TRACK ARMING button is pressed. Only machines conﬁgured as MTRs

on the Machine Conﬁguration page (see page 220) can be selected.

TARGET TRACK: This parameter is used to specify the MTR machine track that is to be

armed when each TRACK ARMING button is pressed.

Conﬁguring Master Track Arming

You can assign Master machine tracks to the TRACK ARMING [1–24] buttons as follows.

These assignments are effective only when the TRACK ARMING [MASTER] button indi-

cator is lit.

1 Use the TRACK ARMING [DISPLAY] button to locate the Master Track Arming

Conﬁguration page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them.

MACHINE: This parameter is used to specify the Master machine whose track is to be

armed when each TRACK ARMING button is pressed. Only machines conﬁgured as Mas-

ters on the Machine Conﬁguration page (see page 220) can be selected.

Configuring Track Arming Groups 227

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

TARGET TRACK: This parameter is used to specify the Master machine track that is to be

armed when each TRACK ARMING button is pressed.

Conﬁguring Track Arming Groups

Tr ack arming groups A, B, C, and D provide a quick way to arm multiple MTR or Master

machine tracks.

1 Use the TRACK ARMING [DISPLAY] button to locate the Track Arming Group

page.

2 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the track buttons, and

use the INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to add and remove tracks from

the groups.

A track is in a group when its button appears highlighted, and tracks can be in multiple

groups. The CLEAR buttons can be used to clear all assignments in each group.

When a TRACK ARMING GROUP [A–D] button is pressed, that button’s indicator, and

the button indicators of the tracks in that group light up. If one of those tracks is subse-

quently unarmed, or another track is armed, the TRACK ARMING GROUP [A–D] button

indicator goes out.

228 Chapter 20—Remote Control

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

GPI (General Purpose Interface)

The DM2000’s CONTROL port (25-pin D-sub connector) provides

a GPI (General Purpose Interface) for controlling external equip-

ment. Pinouts are provided on page 315. The eight GPI outputs can

be conﬁgured so that they output trigger signals when faders or

USER DEFINED KEYS are operated. The GPI can also be used to

control a “RECORDING” warning light outside a studio, or to trigger

the Solo function of a Yamaha 02R Digital Recording Console.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the GPI page.

The names of the parameters currently assigned to each GPI Output are displayed in the

left-hand box. The parameter currently assigned to the selected GPI Output appears high-

lighted in the right-hand box.

2 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select a GPI Output.

3 Use the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to select a function.

A function is selected when it appears inside the dotted box.

See the “GPI Trigger Source List” on page 261 for a complete list of assignable functions.

4 Press the [ENTER] button to assign your choice.

Once assigned, the selected function appears highlighted in the right-hand box.

Faders: Faders can be used to control external equipment. A FADER ON event occurs

when a fader is moved up from –∞. A FADER OFF event occurs when a fader is moved

down to –∞. When such an event occurs, the assigned GPI Output goes High (open) for

approximately 250 msec.

USER DEFINED KEYS: These buttons can be used as general-purpose triggers. For

UNLATCH, when a USER DEFINED KEY is pressed, the assigned GPI Output goes High

(open) for approximately 250 msec. For LATCH, when a USER DEFINED KEY is pressed,

the assigned GPI Output goes High (open) and remains High until the USER DEFINED

KEY is pressed again.

REC LAMP: This source can be used to control a “RECORDING” warning light outside a

studio. When the [REC] button indicator is lit, the assigned GPI Output goes High (open).

POWER ON: While the DM2000 is powered up, the assigned GPI output is High (open).

The DM2000 also features two ﬁxed GPI inputs for use with talkback and dimmer. Each

time the GPI0 input goes Low (ground), the TALKBACK button is turned on or off. Each

time the GPI1 input goes Low (ground), the DIMMER button is turned on or off.

Important note: GPI outputs are open collector outputs. GPI inputs have an internal pull-up

to 5 V.

Controlling AD824 A/D Converters 229

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Controlling AD824 A/D Converters

You can control the Gain and Phantom On/Off parameters of up to 12

Yamaha AD824 A/D Converters from the DM2000 by connecting them to the

DM2000’s REMOTE port using a 9-pin reversed cable. Pinouts are provided

on page 315.

Conﬁguring the REMOTE Port & Assigning Slots to AD824 IDs

The REMOTE port can be conﬁgured, and Slots assigned to AD824 IDs as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the Remote Port Setup

page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the REMOTE FUNCTION AD824 button, and

then press [ENTER].

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the AD824 SLOT parameters, and use the

Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the Slots.

The number of available IDs depends on the number of AD824s connected to the DM2000.

Controlling AD824s from the DM2000

Connected AD824s are controlled from the AD824 Gain/Phantom Control page.

1 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [DISPLAY] button to select the

AD824 Gain/Phantom Control page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the ID of the AD824 that you want to control,

and then press [ENTER].

3 Use the rotary controls to set the gain of each AD824 channel, and use the

+48V buttons to turn phantom power on or off for each channel.

Gain parameter settings (not Phantom) are stored in Scenes.

230 Chapter 21—Other Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

21 Other Functions

Using the User Deﬁned Keys

Up to 16 functions from a list of over 150 can be

assigned to the USER DEFINED KEYS, and up to

four assignment setups can be stored in banks A, B,

C, and D. See page 240 for a list of initial bank

assignments.

1 Use the USER DEFINED KEYS [DISPLAY] button to locate the User deﬁned

Key Assigned page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the BANK buttons, A, B, C, and D, and press

[ENTER] to select a bank.

3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Assign buttons in the left-hand box, and

use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a function.

A function is selected when it appears inside the dotted box.

See page 240 for a complete list of assignable functions.

4 Press [ENTER] to activate your selection.

When you select a function that recalls a speciﬁc Scene or library memory, you need to spec-

ify the number of the memory that you want recalled when the USER DEFINED KEY is

pressed. To do this, in the left-hand box, select the number parameter next to the Assign

button, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to specify the number.

You can initialize the assignments of the currently selected bank by selecting the INITIAL-

IZE button, and pressing [ENTER].

User Deﬁned Keys banks can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data ﬁler,

by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored to SmartMedia (see page 231).

USER DEFINED KEYS

12345678

910111213141516

DISPLAY

Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia 231

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia

Saving

DM2000 Data can be saved to SmartMedia as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DATA] button to locate the Save page.

2 Insert your SmartMedia card into the CARD slot.

If the card doesn’t have a “/YPE/DM2000” directory, a conﬁrmation message appears and

you should choose YES to make the directory.

The LIST box displays ﬁles and directories alphabetically. Only ﬁles of the currently selected

CATEGORY are displayed. All ﬁles are displayed when the CATEGORY is set to ALL. Use

the cursor buttons to select the LIST box, and then use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC

buttons to select ﬁles and directories. Directories have a small “D” next to their name. You

can open the currently selected directory by pressing [ENTER]. To move up the directory

structure, select “up,” and then press [ENTER]. You cannot move up beyond the

“/YPE/DM2000” directory.

The PATH box indicates the path of the currently selected ﬁle. The SmartMedia icon to the

right of the PATH box indicates whether or not a SmartMedia card is inserted: “O” when a

card is inserted, “X” when no card is inserted.

3 To save data, use the CATEGORY parameters to select the type of data you

want to save, use the LIST box to select where you want to save the data,

select the SAVE button, and then press [ENTER].

When the Title Edit window appears, enter a ﬁlename, and press OK when you’ve ﬁnished.

See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information.

You can save data with a different name by using the SAVE AS button.

When saving individual items, such as Scenes or library memories, you can use the SAVE

OPTIONS APPEND and OVERWRITE to append individual memories to existing ﬁles or

to overwrite them. The SAVE OPTIONS are unavailable when ALL, or SCENE MEM ALL,

AUTOMIX ALL, LIBRARY ALL, BANK ALL, or PLUG IN ALL is selected.

The CATEGORY parameters can be set as follows:

ALL: Saves all data.

SCENE MEM: Saves Scenes. You can save ALL Scenes, individual Scenes, or the Edit Buffer

(i.e., the current Scene).

AUTOMIX: Saves Automixes. You can save ALL Automixes, individual Automixes, or the

current Automix.

LIBRARY: Saves the following libraries: EQ, Gate, Comp, Channel, Effects, GEQ, Bus to

Stereo, Input Patch, Output Patch, Surround Monitor. For each library you can select ALL

232 Chapter 21—Other Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

user memories, individual user memories, and for the Bus to Stereo, Input Patch, Output

Patch, Surround Monitor libraries you can also select the current settings.

BANK: Saves the User Deﬁned Remote banks, User Deﬁned Plug-Ins banks, or the User

Deﬁned Keys banks. For each item you can select ALL or individual banks.

SETUP MEM: Saves the DM2000 setup data (i.e., system settings).

PGM TABLE: Saves the Scene to MIDI Program Change table. See “Assigning Scenes to

Program Changes” on page 185.

CTL TABLE: Saves the Parameter to MIDI Control Change table. See “Assigning Parame-

ters to Control Changes” on page 186.

PLUG-IN: Saves the settings of the effects processing cards installed in the Slots. You can

save ALL Slots or individual Slots.

DM2000 data can be loaded from SmartMedia as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DATA] button to locate the Load page.

2 Insert your SmartMedia card into the CARD slot.

3 To load data, use the buttons in the CATEGORY box to select the type of ﬁle

you want to load, select a ﬁle in the LIST box, select the LOAD button, and

then press [ENTER].

The FILE INFORMATION box displays the ﬁlename and the date when the currently

selected ﬁle was last stored. See “Saving” on page 231 for information on the PATH and

LIST boxes and the SmartMedia icon.

Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia 233

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Managing Files & SmartMedia

Files stored on SmartMedia can be renamed and deleted as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DATA] button to locate the File page.

2 Insert your SmartMedia card into the CARD slot.

If the card doesn’t have a “/YPE/DM2000” directory, a conﬁrmation message appears and

you should choose YES to make the directory.

The FILE INFORMATION box displays the ﬁlename and the date when the currently

selected ﬁle was last stored. See “Saving” on page 231 for information on the PATH and

LIST boxes and the SmartMedia icon.

The STATUS box displays information about the currently inserted SmartMedia card,

including, its Volume Label, total Capacity, amount of Used space, and amount of Free

space.

3 To create a new directory, use the LIST box to select the directory in which

you want to create the new directory, select the CREATE DIRECTORY button,

and then press [ENTER].

When the Title Edit window appears, enter a name for the new directory, and press OK

when you’ve ﬁnished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information.

4 To rename a ﬁle or directory, use the LIST box to select that ﬁle or directory,

select the RENAME button, and then press [ENTER].

When the Title Edit window appears, edit the name, and press OK when you’ve ﬁnished.

See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information.

5 To delete a ﬁle or directory, use the LIST box to select that ﬁle or directory,

select the DELETE button, and then press [ENTER].

6 To format a SmartMedia card, select the FORMAT button, and press [ENTER].

When the Title Edit window appears, enter a volume label for the card, and press OK when

you’ve ﬁnished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. The directory

“/YPE/DM2000” is created automatically.

234 Chapter 21—Other Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Setting Preferences

You can customize the operation of the DM2000 by using the preferences pages.

Preferences 1

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Preferences 1 page.

2 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the preferences, and

use the INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to set them.

Auto ROUTING Display: When this preference is on, the Routing pages appear auto-

matically when a button in the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING section is pressed (see

page 75).

Auto PHASE/INSERT Display: When this preference is on, the Phase pages appear

automatically when the Phase [ ] button in the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT

section is pressed (see page 68), and the Insert page appears automatically when the

SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [INSERT ON] button is pressed (see page 111).

Auto DELAY Display: When this option is on, the Delay pages appear automatically

when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL DELAY section is operated (see page 117).

Auto AUX/MATRIX Display: When this preference is on, the Aux View pages appear

automatically when a SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND control is operated

while an Input Channel is selected (see page 92), and the Matrix View page appears auto-

matically when a SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND control is operated while a

Bus Out, Aux Send, or the Stereo Out is selected (see page 99).

Auto DYNAMICS Display: When this preference is on, the Gate Edit page appears auto-

matically when a gate control in the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is oper-

ated (see page 69), and the Comp Edit page appears automatically when a Compressor

control in the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is operated (see page 113).

Auto PAN/SURROUND Display: When this preference is on, the Pan pages appears

automatically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND section is

operated (see page 76). Similarly, when a Surround Pan mode other than Stereo is selected,

the Input Channel Surround Edit page appears automatically when the Joystick is operated

(see page 79).

Auto EQUALIZER Display: When this preference is on, the EQ Edit page appears auto-

matically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER section is operated

(see page 109).

Auto SOLO Display: When this option is on, the Solo Setup page appears automatically

when an channel is soloed (see page 119).

Auto WORD CLOCK Display: When this preference is on, the Word Clock Select page

appears automatically if the currently selected external wordclock source fails (see page 51).

Setting Preferences 235

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Auto Channel Select: When this preference is on, channels can be selected by moving

the corresponding fader or Encoder, or by turning on the corresponding [AUTO], [SOLO],

or [ON] button.

Store Conﬁrmation: When this preference is on, the Title Edit window appears when

you store a Scene (page 159) or library memory (page 139). However, when you store an

Automix library memory, the Title Edit window appears regardless of whether this prefer-

ence is set to on or off.

Recall Conﬁrmation: When this preference is on, a conﬁrmation message appears when

you recall a Scene (page 159) or library memory (page 139).

Patch Conﬁrmation: When this preference is on, a conﬁrmation message appears when

you edit the Input and Output Patches (see page 61).

L/R Nominal Pan: When this preference is on, left/odd and right/even signals will be at

nominal level when Input Channels are panned hard left or hard right, and at –3 dB when

panned center. When this preference is off, signals panned hard left or hard right will be at

3 dB, and at nominal level when panned center.

Fast Meter Fall Time: When this preference is on, the level meters fall quicker.

TC Drop Warning: When this preference is on, a warning message appears if a dropout

is detected in the incoming timecode.

DIO Warning: When this preference is on, a warning message appears if any errors are

detected in digital audio signals received by the Slot Inputs or 2TR Digital Inputs.

MIDI Warning: When this preference is on, a warning message appears if any errors are

detected in the incoming MIDI messages.

Initial Data Nominal: When this preference is on, Input Channel faders are set to nom-

inal when Scene #0 is recalled.

Meter Follow Layer: When this preference is on, the optional MB2000 Peak Meter

Bridge automatically follows the Layer selection on the DM2000.

Scene MEM Auto Update: When this preference is on, the Shadow Scene memories

can be used (see page 158).

Joystick Auto Grab: When this preference is on, the Joystick automatically kicks in as the

surround pan control when it’s moved to the current surround pan position (see page 79).

Cascade COMM Link: When this preference is on, various functions are linked between

cascaded DM2000s (see page 58). When this preference is off, only digital audio signals are

distributed among the cascaded DM2000s.

236 Chapter 21—Other Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Preferences 2

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Preferences 2 page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the preferences, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them.

Channel ID/Channel: This preference setting determines how channels are represented

on the channel strip displays. When the Channel ID preference is on, Channel IDs are dis-

played. When the Channel Short Name preference is on, Short channel names are displayed.

See “Channel Names” on page 41.

Port ID/Port: When the Port ID preference is on, the channel strip displays show Port IDs

when the Encoders are used for patching. When the Port Short Name preference is on, they

display Short Port names. See “Patching with the Encoders” on page 67.

Channel Copy Parameter: These buttons allow you to choose which channel parame-

ters are copied by the Channel Copy function: ALL parameters, or any combination of

FADER, ON, PAN, SURR, AUX, AUX ON, and EQ. See “Copying Channel Settings” on

page 129.

Display Brightness: This preference is used to set the brightness of the ﬂuorescent and

LED displays and indicators.

Fader Touch Sensitivity: This determines the touch sensitivity of the fader knobs when

they are used for selecting channels. If you’re having trouble selecting channels because the

fader knobs are not sensitive enough, try increasing this value. If they are too sensitive, try

reducing it. It’s important that the DM2000 is grounded properly for Touch Select to work

correctly. See “Grounding screw” on page 34 for more information.

Date: These parameters are used to set the date and time that is applied to ﬁles when they

stored to SmartMedia. Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set the parameters,

and then press the SET button, or press CANCEL to cancel.

Setting Preferences 237

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Preferences 3

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Preferences 3 page.

2 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the preferences, and

use the INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to set them.

Mix Update Conﬁrmation: When this preference is on, a conﬁrmation message asking

if you want to update the current Automix with the latest edits appears when Automix

recording is stopped.

Auto EQ Edit In: When this preference is on, EQ is automatically punched into Automix

recording when an EQ control is adjusted.

Auto Inc TC Capture: When this preference is on, the Timecode Capture memory is

incremented automatically each time a timecode address is captured on the Automix Event

Edit page (see page 177).

Link Capture & Locate Memory: When this preference is on, the eight Capture mem-

ories on the Automix Event Edit page are linked to the eight Locate memories so that, for

example, edits made to Capture memory #1 are reﬂected on Locate memory #1, and vice

versa.

Show Compact Size: Automix data, except that in the Undo buffer, is compressed while

recording. When this preference is on, the compressed size of the Automix is displayed on

the Automix Main and Memory pages. When this preference is off, the uncompressed size

is displayed.

Automix Store Undo: When this preference is on, Automix Store operations can be

undone by using the Undo function.

Copy Initial Fader: When this preference is on, when Fader events are copied or moved

on the Automix Event Copy page, the fader value at the speciﬁed IN point is copied to the

speciﬁed TO point. This eliminates fader position matching problems when no fader event

exists at the speciﬁed TO point.

Touch Sense Control: When this preference is on, fader movements are ineffective

when the touch sensors are not triggered (i.e., when fader knobs are moved by an insulated

item, such as a ﬁngernail, instead of a ﬁngertip), allowing “cut-in” style operation. When

this preference is off, fader movements are always recognized.

Touch Sense Select: When this preference is on, channels can be selected simply by

touching the fader knobs.

Receive Full Frame Message: When this preference is on, MTC full frame messages

are recognized and Automix follows them.

Clear Edit Channel after REC: When this preference is on, when using Auto Rec,

channels are automatically unarmed (i.e., [AUTO] buttons are turned off) when Automix

recording stops. When this preference is off, channels remain armed when recording stops.

238 Chapter 21—Other Functions

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Using the Oscillator

The DM2000 features an oscillator that can be used for calibration or diagnostic purposes.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button to locate the Oscillator page.

2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter

wheel, INC/DEC button, or [ENTER] button to set them.

OSCILLATOR ON: This turns the Oscillator on or off. While the LEVEL parameter is

selected, the [ENTER] button can be used to turn on and off the Oscillator.

LEVEL: This sets the Oscillator output level, which is displayed by the adjacent meter. This

parameter can be set by using the Parameter wheel regardless of which parameter is cur-

rently selected.

WAVEFORM: These buttons are used to select the waveforms: SINE 100Hz, SINE 1kHz,

SINE 10kHz, PINK NOISE, or BURST NOISE, which is 200 msec pink noise pulses at four

second intervals.

ASSIGN: These buttons are used to assign the Oscillator output to Bus Outs, Aux Sends,

Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out.

Checking the Battery

The condition of the internal memory-backup battery can be checked as follows.

1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button to locate the Battery Check page.

If the Status is “Okay,” the battery is okay. If the Status is “Getting Low,” ask your Yamaha

dealer to replace the battery as soon as possible. Do not attempt to replace the battery your-

self. Failure to replace a low battery may result in data loss.

Note: To prevent any sudden tone burst surprises in your monitors or headphones, you may

want to set the LEVEL parameter to minimum before turning on the oscillator.

Initializing the DM2000 239

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Initializing the DM2000

The DM2000 can be initialized as follows.

1 Turn off the DM2000.

2 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button, turn on the

DM2000.

3 When the conﬁrmation message appears, release the SCENE MEMORY

[STORE] button, select YES, and press [ENTER].

The following message is displayed while initialization is in progress: “Loading Factory Pre-

sets & Calibrating the Faders... Do Not Touch the Faders!”

It’s important that you do not touch the faders while this message is displayed, as the faders

may not be calibrated correctly.

The display returns to normal when initialization is complete.

Warning: This procedure will clear all user memories and reset all settings to their initial val-

ues. You may want to back up any important data beforehand via MIDI Bulk Dump (see

page 187), or to SmartMedia (see page 231). If you want to reset just the mix settings, recall

scene memory #0 instead (see page 157).

240 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Appendix A: Parameter Lists

USER DEFINED KEYS

# Function Display

0 No ASSIGN

No Assign

1 Scene MEM. Recall +1

Scene +1 Recall

2 Scene MEM. Recall –1

Scene –1 Recall

3 Scene MEM. Recall No. XX

Scene XX Recall

4 Effect-1 Lib. Recall +1

Fx1 Lib+1 Recall

5 Effect-1 Lib. Recall –1

Fx1 Lib –1 Recall

6 Effect-1 Lib. Recall No. XX

Fx1 LibXXX RCL.

7 Effect-2 Lib. Recall +1

Fx2 Lib+1 Recall

8 Effect-2 Lib. Recall –1

Fx2 Lib–1 Recall

9 Effect-2 Lib. Recall No.XX

Fx2 LibXXX RCL.

10 Effect-3 Lib. Recall +1

Fx3 Lib+1 Recall

11 Effect-3 Lib. Recall –1

Fx3 Lib–1 Recall

12 Effect-3 Lib. Recall No.XX

Fx3 LibXXX RCL.

13 Effect-4 Lib. Recall +1

Fx4 Lib+1 Recall

14 Effect-4 Lib. Recall –1

Fx4 Lib–1 Recall

15 Effect-4 Lib. Recall No.XX

Fx4 LibXXX RCL.

16 Effect-5 Lib. Recall +1

Fx5 Lib+1 Recall

17 Effect-5 Lib. Recall –1

Fx5 Lib–1 Recall

18 Effect-5 Lib. Recall No.XX

Fx5 LibXXX RCL.

19 Effect-6 Lib. Recall +1

Fx6 Lib+1 Recall

20 Effect-6 Lib. Recall –1

Fx6 Lib–1 Recall

21 Effect-6 Lib. Recall No.XX

Fx6 LibXXX RCL.

22 Effect-7 Lib. Recall +1

Fx7 Lib+1 Recall

23 Effect-7 Lib. Recall –1

Fx7 Lib–1 Recall

24 Effect-7 Lib. Recall No.XX

Fx7 LibXXX RCL.

25 Effect-8 Lib. Recall +1

Fx8 Lib+1 Recall

26 Effect-8 Lib. Recall –1

Fx8 Lib–1 Recall

27 Effect-8 Lib. Recall No.XX

Fx8 LibXXX RCL.

28 Effect-1 Bypass On/Off

Fx1 Bypass

29 Effect-2 Bypass On/Off

Fx2 Bypass

30 Effect-3 Bypass On/Off

Fx3 Bypass

31 Effect-4 Bypass On/Off

Fx4 Bypass

32 Effect-5 Bypass On/Off

Fx5 Bypass

33 Effect-6 Bypass On/Off

Fx6 Bypass

34 Effect-7 Bypass On/Off

Fx7 Bypass

35 Effect-8 Bypass On/Off

Fx8 Bypass

36 Channel Lib. Recall +1

CH Lib+1 Recall

37 Channel Lib. Recall –1

CH Lib–1 Recall

38 Channel Lib. Recall No. XX

CH LibXXX Recall

39 GATE Lib. Recall +1

Gate Lib+1 RCL.

40 GATE Lib. Recall –1

Gate Lib–1 RCL.

41 GATE Lib. Recall No. XX

Gate LibXXX RCL.

42 COMP Lib. Recall +1

Comp Lib+1 RCL.

43 COMP Lib. Recall –1

Comp Lib–1 RCL.

44 COMP Lib. Recall No. XX

Comp LibXXX RCL.

45 EQ Lib. Recall +1

EQ Lib+1 Recall

46 EQ Lib. Recall –1

EQ Lib–1 Recall

47 EQ Lib. Recall No. XX

EQ LibXXX Recall

48 GEQ1 Lib. Recall +1

GEQ1 Lib+1 RCL.

49 GEQ1 Lib. Recall –1

GEQ1 Lib–1 RCL.

50 GEQ1 Lib. Recall No. XX

GEQ1 LibXXX RCL.

51 GEQ2 Lib. Recall +1

GEQ2 Lib+1 RCL.

52 GEQ2 Lib. Recall –1

GEQ2 Lib–1 RCL.

53 GEQ2 Lib. Recall No. XX

GEQ2 LibXXX RCL.

54 GEQ3 Lib. Recall +1

GEQ3 Lib+1 RCL.

55 GEQ3 Lib. Recall –1

GEQ3 Lib–1 RCL.

56 GEQ3 Lib. Recall No. XX

GEQ3 LibXXX RCL.

57 GEQ4 Lib. Recall +1

GEQ4 Lib+1 RCL.

58 GEQ4 Lib. Recall –1

GEQ4 Lib–1 RCL.

59 GEQ4 Lib. Recall No. XX

GEQ4 LibXXX RCL.

60 GEQ5 Lib. Recall +1

GEQ5 Lib+1 RCL.

61 GEQ5 Lib. Recall –1

GEQ5 Lib–1 RCL.

62 GEQ5 Lib. Recall No. XX

GEQ5 LibXXX RCL.

63 GEQ6 Lib. Recall +1

GEQ6 Lib+1 RCL.

64 GEQ6 Lib. Recall –1

GEQ6 Lib–1 RCL.

65 GEQ6 Lib. Recall No. XX

GEQ6 LibXXX RCL.

66 GEQ-1 On/Off

GEQ1 ON/OFF

67 GEQ-2 On/Off

GEQ2 ON/OFF

68 GEQ-3 On/Off

GEQ3 ON/OFF

69 GEQ-4 On/Off

GEQ4 ON/OFF

70 GEQ-5 On/Off

GEQ5 ON/OFF

71 GEQ-6 On/Off

GEQ6 ON/OFF

SURR. MONI MUTE Mute L

On/Off

Surr.Mon L Mute

SURR. MONI MUTE Mute R

On/Off

Surr.Mon R Mute

SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Ls

On/Off

Surr.Mon Ls Mute

SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Rs

On/Off

Surr.Mon Rs Mute

SURR. MONI MUTE Mute C

On/Off

Surr.Mon C Mute

SURR. MONI MUTE Mute LFE

On/Off

Surr.Mon LFEMute

78 SURR. MONI SLOT1 ON/OFF

Surr.SLOT1 ON

79 SURR. MONI SLOT2 ON/OFF

Surr.SLOT2 ON

80 SURR. MONI SLOT3 ON/OFF

Surr.SLOT3 ON

81 SURR. MONI SLOT4 ON/OFF

Surr.SLOT4 ON

# Function Display

USER DEFINED KEYS 241

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

82 SURR. MONI SLOT5 ON/OFF

Surr.SLOT5 ON

83 SURR. MONI SLOT6 ON/OFF

Surr.SLOT6 ON

SURR. MONI BASS MANAGE

ON/OFF

Bass Manage ON

85 Input Fader Group Enable A

IN Fader Group A

86 Input Fader Group Enable B

IN Fader Group B

87 Input Fader Group Enable C

IN Fader Group C

88 Input Fader Group Enable D

IN Fader Group D

89 Input Fader Group Enable E

IN Fader Group E

90 Input Fader Group Enable F

IN Fader Group F

91 Input Fader Group Enable G

IN Fader Group G

92 Input Fader Group Enable H

IN Fader Group H

93 Input MUTE Group Enable I

IN Mute Group I

94 Input MUTE Group Enable J

IN Mute Group J

95 Input MUTE Group Enable K

IN Mute Group K

96 Input MUTE Group Enable L

IN Mute Group L

97 Input MUTE Group Enable M

IN Mute Group M

98 Input MUTE Group Enable N

IN Mute Group N

99 Input MUTE Group Enable O

IN Mute Group O

100 Input MUTE Group Enable P

IN Mute Group P

101 Output Fader Group Enable Q

OutFader Group Q

102 Output Fader Group Enable R

OutFader Group R

103 Output Fader Group Enable S

OutFader Group S

104 Output Fader Group Enable T

OutFader Group T

105 Output MUTE Group Enable U

Out Mute Group U

106 Output MUTE Group Enable V

Out Mute Group V

107 Output MUTE Group Enable W

Out Mute Group W

108 Output MUTE Group Enable X

Out Mute Group X

109 PEAK HOLD On/Off

Peak Hold

110 OSCILLATOR On/Off

OSC. ON/OFF

111 SOLO Enable

SOLO ENABLE

112 Input Patch Lib. Recall +1

IN Patch Lib+1

113 Input Patch Lib. Recall –1

IN Patch Lib–1

114 Input Patch Lib. Recall No. XX

IN Patch LibXX

115 Output Patch Lib. Recall +1

Out Patch Lib+1

116 Output Patch Lib. Recall –1

Out Patch Lib–1

117

Output Patch Lib. Recall No.

Out Patch LibXX

118 Channel Name ID/Short

CH Name ID/Short

119 Port Name ID/Short

PortNameID/Short

120 Automix REC

Automix REC

121 Automix PLAY

Automix PLAY

122 Automix STOP

Automix STOP

123 Automix ABORT

Automix ABORT

124 Automix AUTO REC

Automix AUTOREC

125 Automix ENABLE

Automix ENABLE

126 Automix RETURN

Automix RETURN

# Function Display

127 Automix TAKEOVER

Automix

TAKEOVER

128 Automix RELATIVE

Automix RELATIVE

129 Automix TOUCH SENSE

Automix T.SENSE

130 Overwrite FADER

Overwrite FADER

131 Overwrite ON

Overwrite ON

132 Overwrite PAN

Overwrite PAN

133 Overwrite SURROUND

Overwrite SURR.

134 Overwrite EQ

Overwrite EQ

135 Overwrite AUX

Overwrite AUX

136 Overwrite AUX ON

Overwrite AUX ON

137 Track Arming 1 ON/OFF

Track Arming 1

138 Track Arming 2 ON/OFF

Track Arming 2

139 Track Arming 3 ON/OFF

Track Arming 3

140 Track Arming 4 ON/OFF

Track Arming 4

141 Track Arming 5 ON/OFF

Track Arming 5

142 Track Arming 6 ON/OFF

Track Arming 6

143 Track Arming 7 ON/OFF

Track Arming 7

144 Track Arming 8 ON/OFF

Track Arming 8

145 Track Arming 9 ON/OFF

Track Arming 9

146 Track Arming 10 ON/OFF

Track Arming 10

147 Track Arming 11 ON/OFF

Track Arming 11

148 Track Arming 12 ON/OFF

Track Arming 12

149 Track Arming 13 ON/OFF

Track Arming 13

150 Track Arming 14 ON/OFF

Track Arming 14

151 Track Arming 15 ON/OFF

Track Arming 15

152 Track Arming 16 ON/OFF

Track Arming 16

153 Track Arming 17 ON/OFF

Track Arming 17

154 Track Arming 18 ON/OFF

Track Arming 18

155 Track Arming 19 ON/OFF

Track Arming 19

156 Track Arming 20 ON/OFF

Track Arming 20

157 Track Arming 21 ON/OFF

Track Arming 21

158 Track Arming 22 ON/OFF

Track Arming 22

159 Track Arming 23 ON/OFF

Track Arming 23

160 Track Arming 24 ON/OFF

Track Arming 24

# Function Display

242 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments

Input Patch Parameters

# Bank A Bank B Bank C Bank D

SOLO ON Scene 1 Recall IN Fader Group A No Assign

No Assign Scene 2 Recall IN Fader Group B No Assign

No Assign Scene 3 Recall IN Fader Group C No Assign

No Assign Scene 4 Recall IN Fader Group D No Assign

No Assign Scene 5 Recall IN Fader Group E No Assign

Surr.Mon L Mute Scene 6 Recall IN Fader Group F No Assign

Surr.Mon C Mute Scene 7 Recall IN Fader Group G No Assign

Surr.Mon R Mute Scene +1 Recall IN Fader Group H No Assign

Bass Manage ON Scene 8 Recall IN Mute Group I No Assign

No Assign Scene 9 Recall IN Mute Group J No Assign

No Assign Scene 10 Recall IN Mute Group K No Assign

No Assign Scene 11 Recall IN Mute Group L No Assign

No Assign Scene 12 Recall IN Mute Group M No Assign

Surr.Mon Ls Mute Scene 13 Recall IN Mute Group N No Assign

Surr.Mon LFEMute Scene 14 Recall IN Mute Group O No Assign

Surr.Mon Rs Mute Scene –1 Recall IN Mute Group P No Assign

input Channel Inputs Input Channel insert Ins Internal Effects Processor Inputs

Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description

NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

AD1 AD IN 1 AD1 AD IN 1 AUX1 AUX1

AD2 AD IN 2 AD2 AD IN 2 AUX2 AUX2

AD3 AD IN 3 AD3 AD IN 3 AUX3 AUX3

AD4 AD IN 4 AD4 AD IN 4 AUX4 AUX4

AD5 AD IN 5 AD5 AD IN 5 AUX5 AUX5

AD6 AD IN 6 AD6 AD IN 6 AUX6 AUX6

AD7 AD IN 7 AD7 AD IN 7 AUX7 AUX7

AD8 AD IN 8 AD8 AD IN 8 AUX8 AUX8

AD9 AD IN 9 AD9 AD IN 9 AUX9 AUX9

AD10 AD IN 10 AD10 AD IN 10 AUX10 AUX10

AD11 AD IN 11 AD11 AD IN 11 AUX11 AUX11

AD12 AD IN 12 AD12 AD IN 12 AUX12 AUX12

AD13 AD IN 13 AD13 AD IN 13 INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1

AD14 AD IN 14 AD14 AD IN 14 INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2

AD15 AD IN 15 AD15 AD IN 15 INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3

AD16 AD IN 16 AD16 AD IN 16 INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4

AD17 AD IN 17 AD17 AD IN 17 INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5

AD18 AD IN 18 AD18 AD IN 18 INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6

AD19 AD IN 19 AD19 AD IN 19 INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7

AD20 AD IN 20 AD20 AD IN 20 INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8

AD21 AD IN 21 AD21 AD IN 21 INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9

AD22 AD IN 22 AD22 AD IN 22 INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10

AD23 AD IN 23 AD23 AD IN 23 INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11

AD24 AD IN 24 AD24 AD IN 24 INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12

S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13

S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14

S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15

Input Patch Parameters 243

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16

S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17

S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18

S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19

S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20

S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21

S1-10 Slot1 CH10 IN S1-10 Slot1 CH10 IN INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22

S1-11 Slot1 CH11 IN S1-11 Slot1 CH11 IN INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23

S1-12 Slot1 CH12 IN S1-12 Slot1 CH12 IN INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24

S1-13 Slot1 CH13 IN S1-13 Slot1 CH13 IN INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25

S1-14 Slot1 CH14 IN S1-14 Slot1 CH14 IN INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26

S1-15 Slot1 CH15 IN S1-15 Slot1 CH15 IN INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27

S1-16 Slot1 CH16 IN S1-16 Slot1 CH16 IN INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28

S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29

S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30

S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31

S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32

S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33

S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34

S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35

S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36

S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37

S2-10 Slot2 CH10 IN S2-10 Slot2 CH10 IN INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38

S2-11 Slot2 CH11 IN S2-11 Slot2 CH11 IN INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39

S2-12 Slot2 CH12 IN S2-12 Slot2 CH12 IN INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40

S2-13 Slot2 CH13 IN S2-13 Slot2 CH13 IN INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41

S2-14 Slot2 CH14 IN S2-14 Slot2 CH14 IN INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42

S2-15 Slot2 CH15 IN S2-15 Slot2 CH15 IN INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43

S2-16 Slot2 CH16 IN S2-16 Slot2 CH16 IN INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44

S3-1 Slot3 CH1 IN S3-1 Slot3 CH1 IN INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45

S3-2 Slot3 CH2 IN S3-2 Slot3 CH2 IN INSCH46 InsertOut-CH46

S3-3 Slot3 CH3 IN S3-3 Slot3 CH3 IN INSCH47 InsertOut-CH47

S3-4 Slot3 CH4 IN S3-4 Slot3 CH4 IN INSCH48 InsertOut-CH48

S3-5 Slot3 CH5 IN S3-5 Slot3 CH5 IN INSCH49 InsertOut-CH49

S3-6 Slot3 CH6 IN S3-6 Slot3 CH6 IN INSCH50 InsertOut-CH50

S3-7 Slot3 CH7 IN S3-7 Slot3 CH7 IN INSCH51 InsertOut-CH51

S3-8 Slot3 CH8 IN S3-8 Slot3 CH8 IN INSCH52 InsertOut-CH52

S3-9 Slot3 CH9 IN S3-9 Slot3 CH9 IN INSCH53 InsertOut-CH53

S3-10 Slot3 CH10 IN S3-10 Slot3 CH10 IN INSCH54 InsertOut-CH54

S3-11 Slot3 CH11 IN S3-11 Slot3 CH11 IN INSCH55 InsertOut-CH55

S3-12 Slot3 CH12 IN S3-12 Slot3 CH12 IN INSCH56 InsertOut-CH56

S3-13 Slot3 CH13 IN S3-13 Slot3 CH13 IN INSCH57 InsertOut-CH57

S3-14 Slot3 CH14 IN S3-14 Slot3 CH14 IN INSCH58 InsertOut-CH58

S3-15 Slot3 CH15 IN S3-15 Slot3 CH15 IN INSCH59 InsertOut-CH59

S3-16 Slot3 CH16 IN S3-16 Slot3 CH16 IN INSCH60 InsertOut-CH60

S4-1 Slot4 CH1 IN S4-1 Slot4 CH1 IN INSCH61 InsertOut-CH61

S4-2 Slot4 CH2 IN S4-2 Slot4 CH2 IN INSCH62 InsertOut-CH62

S4-3 Slot4 CH3 IN S4-3 Slot4 CH3 IN INSCH63 InsertOut-CH63

S4-4 Slot4 CH4 IN S4-4 Slot4 CH4 IN INSCH64 InsertOut-CH64

S4-5 Slot4 CH5 IN S4-5 Slot4 CH5 IN INSCH65 InsertOut-CH65

S4-6 Slot4 CH6 IN S4-6 Slot4 CH6 IN INSCH66 InsertOut-CH66

input Channel Inputs Input Channel insert Ins Internal Effects Processor Inputs

Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description

244 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

S4-7 Slot4 CH7 IN S4-7 Slot4 CH7 IN INSCH67 InsertOut-CH67

S4-8 Slot4 CH8 IN S4-8 Slot4 CH8 IN INSCH68 InsertOut-CH68

S4-9 Slot4 CH9 IN S4-9 Slot4 CH9 IN INSCH69 InsertOut-CH69

S4-10 Slot4 CH10 IN S4-10 Slot4 CH10 IN INSCH70 InsertOut-CH70

S4-11 Slot4 CH11 IN S4-11 Slot4 CH11 IN INSCH71 InsertOut-CH71

S4-12 Slot4 CH12 IN S4-12 Slot4 CH12 IN INSCH72 InsertOut-CH72

S4-13 Slot4 CH13 IN S4-13 Slot4 CH13 IN INSCH73 InsertOut-CH73

S4-14 Slot4 CH14 IN S4-14 Slot4 CH14 IN INSCH74 InsertOut-CH74

S4-15 Slot4 CH15 IN S4-15 Slot4 CH15 IN INSCH75 InsertOut-CH75

S4-16 Slot4 CH16 IN S4-16 Slot4 CH16 IN INSCH76 InsertOut-CH76

S5-1 Slot5 CH1 IN S5-1 Slot5 CH1 IN INSCH77 InsertOut-CH77

S5-2 Slot5 CH2 IN S5-2 Slot5 CH2 IN INSCH78 InsertOut-CH78

S5-3 Slot5 CH3 IN S5-3 Slot5 CH3 IN INSCH79 InsertOut-CH79

S5-4 Slot5 CH4 IN S5-4 Slot5 CH4 IN INSCH80 InsertOut-CH80

S5-5 Slot5 CH5 IN S5-5 Slot5 CH5 IN INSCH81 InsertOut-CH81

S5-6 Slot5 CH6 IN S5-6 Slot5 CH6 IN INSCH82 InsertOut-CH82

S5-7 Slot5 CH7 IN S5-7 Slot5 CH7 IN INSCH83 InsertOut-CH83

S5-8 Slot5 CH8 IN S5-8 Slot5 CH8 IN INSCH84 InsertOut-CH84

S5-9 Slot5 CH9 IN S5-9 Slot5 CH9 IN INSCH85 InsertOut-CH85

S5-10 Slot5 CH10 IN S5-10 Slot5 CH10 IN INSCH86 InsertOut-CH86

S5-11 Slot5 CH11 IN S5-11 Slot5 CH11 IN INSCH87 InsertOut-CH87

S5-12 Slot5 CH12 IN S5-12 Slot5 CH12 IN INSCH88 InsertOut-CH88

S5-13 Slot5 CH13 IN S5-13 Slot5 CH13 IN INSCH89 InsertOut-CH89

S5-14 Slot5 CH14 IN S5-14 Slot5 CH14 IN INSCH90 InsertOut-CH90

S5-15 Slot5 CH15 IN S5-15 Slot5 CH15 IN INSCH91 InsertOut-CH91

S5-16 Slot5 CH16 IN S5-16 Slot5 CH16 IN INSCH92 InsertOut-CH92

S6-1 Slot6 CH1 IN S6-1 Slot6 CH1 IN INSCH93 InsertOut-CH93

S6-2 Slot6 CH2 IN S6-2 Slot6 CH2 IN INSCH94 InsertOut-CH94

S6-3 Slot6 CH3 IN S6-3 Slot6 CH3 IN INSCH95 InsertOut-CH95

S6-4 Slot6 CH4 IN S6-4 Slot6 CH4 IN INSCH96 InsertOut-CH96

S6-5 Slot6 CH5 IN S6-5 Slot6 CH5 IN INSBUS1 InsertOut-BUS1

S6-6 Slot6 CH6 IN S6-6 Slot6 CH6 IN INSBUS2 InsertOut-BUS2

S6-7 Slot6 CH7 IN S6-7 Slot6 CH7 IN INSBUS3 InsertOut-BUS3

S6-8 Slot6 CH8 IN S6-8 Slot6 CH8 IN INSBUS4 InsertOut-BUS4

S6-9 Slot6 CH9 IN S6-9 Slot6 CH9 IN INSBUS5 InsertOut-BUS5

S6-10 Slot6 CH10 IN S6-10 Slot6 CH10 IN INSBUS6 InsertOut-BUS6

S6-11 Slot6 CH11 IN S6-11 Slot6 CH11 IN INSBUS7 InsertOut-BUS7

S6-12 Slot6 CH12 IN S6-12 Slot6 CH12 IN INSBUS8 InsertOut-BUS8

S6-13 Slot6 CH13 IN S6-13 Slot6 CH13 IN INSAUX1 InsertOut-AUX1

S6-14 Slot6 CH14 IN S6-14 Slot6 CH14 IN INSAUX2 InsertOut-AUX2

S6-15 Slot6 CH15 IN S6-15 Slot6 CH15 IN INSAUX3 InsertOut-AUX3

S6-16 Slot6 CH16 IN S6-16 Slot6 CH16 IN INSAUX4 InsertOut-AUX4

FX1-1 Effect1 OUT 1 FX1-1 Effect1 OUT 1 INSAUX5 InsertOut-AUX5

FX1-2 Effect1 OUT 2 FX1-2 Effect1 OUT 2 INSAUX6 InsertOut-AUX6

FX1-3 Effect1 OUT 3 FX1-3 Effect1 OUT 3 INSAUX7 InsertOut-AUX7

FX1-4 Effect1 OUT 4 FX1-4 Effect1 OUT 4 INSAUX8 InsertOut-AUX8

FX1-5 Effect1 OUT 5 FX1-5 Effect1 OUT 5 INSAUX9 InsertOut-AUX9

FX1-6 Effect1 OUT 6 FX1-6 Effect1 OUT 6 INSAUX10 InsertOut-AUX10

FX1-7 Effect1 OUT 7 FX1-7 Effect1 OUT 7 INSAUX11 InsertOut-AUX11

FX1-8 Effect1 OUT 8 FX1-8 Effect1 OUT 8 INSAUX12 InsertOut-AUX12

FX2-1 Effect2 OUT 1 FX2-1 Effect2 OUT 1 INSMTX1L InsertOut-MTX1L

input Channel Inputs Input Channel insert Ins Internal Effects Processor Inputs

Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description

Input Patch Parameters 245

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

FX2-2 Effect2 OUT 2 FX2-2 Effect2 OUT 2 INSMTX1R InsertOut-MTX1R

FX2-3 Effect2 OUT 3 FX2-3 Effect2 OUT 3 INSMTX2L InsertOut-MTX2L

FX2-4 Effect2 OUT 4 FX2-4 Effect2 OUT 4 INSMTX2R InsertOut-MTX2R

FX2-5 Effect2 OUT 5 FX2-5 Effect2 OUT 5 INSMTX3L InsertOut-MTX3L

FX2-6 Effect2 OUT 6 FX2-6 Effect2 OUT 6 INSMTX3R InsertOut-MTX3R

FX2-7 Effect2 OUT 7 FX2-7 Effect2 OUT 7 INSMTX4L InsertOut-MTX4L

FX2-8 Effect2 OUT 8 FX2-8 Effect2 OUT 8 INSMTX4R InsertOut-MTX4R

FX3-1 Effect3 OUT 1 FX3-1 Effect3 OUT 1 INSSTL InsertOut-STL

FX3-2 Effect3 OUT 2 FX3-2 Effect3 OUT 2 INSSTR InsertOut-STR

FX4-1 Effect4 OUT 1 FX4-1 Effect4 OUT 1 FX1-1 Effect1 OUT 1

FX4-2 Effect4 OUT 2 FX4-2 Effect4 OUT 2 FX1-2 Effect1 OUT 2

FX5-1 Effect5 OUT 1 FX5-1 Effect5 OUT 1 FX2-1 Effect2 OUT 1

FX5-2 Effect5 OUT 2 FX5-2 Effect5 OUT 2 FX2-2 Effect2 OUT 2

FX6-1 Effect6 OUT 1 FX6-1 Effect6 OUT 1 FX3-1 Effect3 OUT 1

FX6-2 Effect6 OUT 2 FX6-2 Effect6 OUT 2 FX3-2 Effect3 OUT 2

FX7-1 Effect7 OUT 1 FX7-1 Effect7 OUT 1 FX4-1 Effect4 OUT 1

FX7-2 Effect7 OUT 2 FX7-2 Effect7 OUT 2 FX4-2 Effect4 OUT 2

FX8-1 Effect8 OUT 1 FX8-1 Effect8 OUT 1 FX5-1 Effect5 OUT 1

FX8-2 Effect8 OUT 2 FX8-2 Effect8 OUT 2 FX5-2 Effect5 OUT 2

2TD1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L 2TD1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L FX6-1 Effect6 OUT 1

2TD1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R 2TD1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R FX6-2 Effect6 OUT 2

2TD2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L 2TD2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L FX7-1 Effect7 OUT 1

2TD2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R 2TD2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R FX7-2 Effect7 OUT 2

2TD3L 2TR IN Dig.3 L 2TD3L 2TR IN Dig.3 L FX8-1 Effect8 OUT 1

2TD3R 2TR IN Dig.3 R 2TD3R 2TR IN Dig.3 R FX8-2 Effect8 OUT 2

2TA1L 2TR IN Analog1 L 2TA1L 2TR IN Analog1 L — —

2TA1R 2TR IN Analog1 R 2TA1R 2TR IN Analog1 R — —

2TA2L 2TR IN Analog2 L 2TA2L 2TR IN Analog2 L — —

2TA2R 2TR IN Analog2 R 2TA2R 2TR IN Analog2 R — —

BUS1 BUS1 ————

BUS2 BUS2 ————

BUS3 BUS3 ————

BUS4 BUS4 ————

BUS5 BUS5 ————

BUS6 BUS6 ————

BUS7 BUS7 ————

BUS8 BUS8 ————

AUX1 AUX1 ————

AUX2 AUX2 ————

AUX3 AUX3 ————

AUX4 AUX4 ————

AUX5 AUX5 ————

AUX6 AUX6 ————

AUX7 AUX7 ————

AUX8 AUX8 ————

AUX9 AUX9 ————

AUX10 AUX10 ————

AUX11 AUX11 ————

AUX12 AUX12 ————

input Channel Inputs Input Channel insert Ins Internal Effects Processor Inputs

Port ID Description Port ID Description Port ID Description

246 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Initial Input Patch Settings

Input Channel Inputs Effects Processors inputs

Ch # Source Ch # Source

1 AD01 49 S4-01

2 AD02 50 S4-02

3 AD03 51 S4-03

4 AD04 52 S4-04

5 AD05 53 S4-05

6 AD06 54 S4-06

7 AD07 55 S4-07

8 AD08 56 S4-08

9 AD09 57 S5-01

10 AD10 58 S5-02

11 AD11 59 S5-03

12 AD12 60 S5-04

13 AD13 61 S5-05

14 AD14 62 S5-06

15 AD15 63 S5-07

16 AD16 64 S5-08

17 AD17 65 S6-01

18 AD18 66 S6-02

19 AD19 67 S6-03

20 AD20 68 S6-04

21 AD21 69 S6-05

22 AD22 70 S6-06

23 AD23 71 S6-07

24 AD24 72 S6-08

25 S1-01 73 FX1-1

26 S1-02 74 FX1-2

27 S1-03 75 FX2-1

28 S1-04 76 FX2-2

29 S1-05 77 FX3-1

30 S1-06 78 FX3-2

31 S1-07 79 FX4-1

32 S1-08 80 FX4-2

33 S2-01 81 FX5-1

34 S2-02 82 FX5-2

35 S2-03 83 FX6-1

36 S2-04 84 FX6-2

37 S2-05 85 FX7-1

38 S2-06 86 FX7-2

39 S2-07 87 FX8-1

40 S2-08 88 FX8-2

41 S3-01 89 2TD1L

42 S3-02 90 2TD1R

43 S3-03 91 2TD2L

44 S3-04 92 2TD2R

45 S3-05 93 2TA1L

46 S3-06 94 2TA1R

47 S3-07 95 2TA2L

48 S3-08 96 2TA2R

# Source

1-1 AUX1

1-2 NONE

1-3 NONE

1-4 NONE

1-5 NONE

1-6 NONE

1-7 NONE

1-8 NONE

2-1 AUX2

2-2 NONE

2-3 NONE

2-4 NONE

2-5 NONE

2-6 NONE

2-7 NONE

2-8 NONE

3-1 AUX3

3-2 NONE

4-1 AUX4

4-2 NONE

5-1 AUX5

5-2 NONE

6-1 AUX6

6-2 NONE

7-1 AUX7

7-2 NONE

8-1 AUX8

8-2 NONE

Output Patch Parameters 247

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Output Patch Parameters

Output patch parameters are split into two tables. The ﬁrst table contains parameters for

the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, and Output Channel Insert Ins. The second table, Direct

Outs, 2TR Digital Outputs, and the GEQs.

Output Patch Table 1

Slot Outputs Omni Outs Output Channel Insert Ins

Source Description Source Description Source Description

NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

BUS1 BUS1 BUS1 BUS1 AD1 AD IN 1

BUS2 BUS2 BUS2 BUS2 AD2 AD IN 2

BUS3 BUS3 BUS3 BUS3 AD3 AD IN 3

BUS4 BUS4 BUS4 BUS4 AD4 AD IN 4

BUS5 BUS5 BUS5 BUS5 AD5 AD IN 5

BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 AD6 AD IN 6

BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 AD7 AD IN 7

BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 AD8 AD IN 8

AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AD9 AD IN 9

AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AD10 AD IN 10

AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AD11 AD IN 11

AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AD12 AD IN 12

AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AD13 AD IN 13

AUX6 AUX6 AUX6 AUX6 AD14 AD IN 14

AUX7 AUX7 AUX7 AUX7 AD15 AD IN 15

AUX8 AUX8 AUX8 AUX8 AD16 AD IN 16

AUX9 AUX9 AUX9 AUX9 AD17 AD IN 17

AUX10 AUX10 AUX10 AUX10 AD18 AD IN 18

AUX11 AUX11 AUX11 AUX11 AD19 AD IN 19

AUX12 AUX12 AUX12 AUX12 AD20 AD IN 20

MATRIX1L MATRIX1 L MATRIX1L MATRIX1 L AD21 AD IN 21

MATRIX1R MATRIX1 R MATRIX1R MATRIX1 R AD22 AD IN 22

MATRIX2L MATRIX2 L MATRIX2L MATRIX2 L AD23 AD IN 23

MATRIX2R MATRIX2 R MATRIX2R MATRIX2 R AD24 AD IN 24

MATRIX3L MATRIX3 L MATRIX3L MATRIX3 L S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN

MATRIX3R MATRIX3 R MATRIX3R MATRIX3 R S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN

MATRIX4L MATRIX4 L MATRIX4L MATRIX4 L S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN

MATRIX4R MATRIX4 R MATRIX4R MATRIX4 R S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN

STEREO-L STEREO L STEREO-L STEREO L S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN

STEREO-R STEREO R STEREO-R STEREO R S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN

INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN

INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN

INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN

INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 S1-10 Slot1 CH10 IN

INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 S1-11 Slot1 CH11 IN

INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 S1-12 Slot1 CH12 IN

INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 S1-13 Slot1 CH13 IN

INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 S1-14 Slot1 CH14 IN

INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 S1-15 Slot1 CH15 IN

INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 S1-16 Slot1 CH16 IN

INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN

INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN

INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN

248 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN

INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN

INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN

INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN

INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN

INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN

INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 S2-10 Slot2 CH10 IN

INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 S2-11 Slot2 CH11 IN

INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 S2-12 Slot2 CH12 IN

INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 S2-13 Slot2 CH13 IN

INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 S2-14 Slot2 CH14 IN

INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 S2-15 Slot2 CH15 IN

INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 S2-16 Slot2 CH16 IN

INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 S3-1 Slot3 CH1 IN

INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 S3-2 Slot3 CH2 IN

INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 S3-3 Slot3 CH3 IN

INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 S3-4 Slot3 CH4 IN

INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 S3-5 Slot3 CH5 IN

INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 S3-6 Slot3 CH6 IN

INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 S3-7 Slot3 CH7 IN

INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 S3-8 Slot3 CH8 IN

INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 S3-9 Slot3 CH9 IN

INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36 INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36 S3-10 Slot3 CH10 IN

INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37 INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37 S3-11 Slot3 CH11 IN

INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38 INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38 S3-12 Slot3 CH12 IN

INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39 INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39 S3-13 Slot3 CH13 IN

INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40 INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40 S3-14 Slot3 CH14 IN

INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41 INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41 S3-15 Slot3 CH15 IN

INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42 INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42 S3-16 Slot3 CH16 IN

INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43 INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43 S4-1 Slot4 CH1 IN

INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44 INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44 S4-2 Slot4 CH2 IN

INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45 INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45 S4-3 Slot4 CH3 IN

INSCH46 InsertOut-CH46 INSCH46 InsertOut-CH46 S4-4 Slot4 CH4 IN

INSCH47 InsertOut-CH47 INSCH47 InsertOut-CH47 S4-5 Slot4 CH5 IN

INSCH48 InsertOut-CH48 INSCH48 InsertOut-CH48 S4-6 Slot4 CH6 IN

INSCH49 InsertOut-CH49 INSCH49 InsertOut-CH49 S4-7 Slot4 CH7 IN

INSCH50 InsertOut-CH50 INSCH50 InsertOut-CH50 S4-8 Slot4 CH8 IN

INSCH51 InsertOut-CH51 INSCH51 InsertOut-CH51 S4-9 Slot4 CH9 IN

INSCH52 InsertOut-CH52 INSCH52 InsertOut-CH52 S4-10 Slot4 CH10 IN

INSCH53 InsertOut-CH53 INSCH53 InsertOut-CH53 S4-11 Slot4 CH11 IN

INSCH54 InsertOut-CH54 INSCH54 InsertOut-CH54 S4-12 Slot4 CH12 IN

INSCH55 InsertOut-CH55 INSCH55 InsertOut-CH55 S4-13 Slot4 CH13 IN

INSCH56 InsertOut-CH56 INSCH56 InsertOut-CH56 S4-14 Slot4 CH14 IN

INSCH57 InsertOut-CH57 INSCH57 InsertOut-CH57 S4-15 Slot4 CH15 IN

INSCH58 InsertOut-CH58 INSCH58 InsertOut-CH58 S4-16 Slot4 CH16 IN

INSCH59 InsertOut-CH59 INSCH59 InsertOut-CH59 S5-1 Slot5 CH1 IN

INSCH60 InsertOut-CH60 INSCH60 InsertOut-CH60 S5-2 Slot5 CH2 IN

INSCH61 InsertOut-CH61 INSCH61 InsertOut-CH61 S5-3 Slot5 CH3 IN

INSCH62 InsertOut-CH62 INSCH62 InsertOut-CH62 S5-4 Slot5 CH4 IN

INSCH63 InsertOut-CH63 INSCH63 InsertOut-CH63 S5-5 Slot5 CH5 IN

INSCH64 InsertOut-CH64 INSCH64 InsertOut-CH64 S5-6 Slot5 CH6 IN

Slot Outputs Omni Outs Output Channel Insert Ins

Source Description Source Description Source Description

Output Patch Parameters 249

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

INSCH65 InsertOut-CH65 INSCH65 InsertOut-CH65 S5-7 Slot5 CH7 IN

INSCH66 InsertOut-CH66 INSCH66 InsertOut-CH66 S5-8 Slot5 CH8 IN

INSCH67 InsertOut-CH67 INSCH67 InsertOut-CH67 S5-9 Slot5 CH9 IN

INSCH68 InsertOut-CH68 INSCH68 InsertOut-CH68 S5-10 Slot5 CH10 IN

INSCH69 InsertOut-CH69 INSCH69 InsertOut-CH69 S5-11 Slot5 CH11 IN

INSCH70 InsertOut-CH70 INSCH70 InsertOut-CH70 S5-12 Slot5 CH12 IN

INSCH71 InsertOut-CH71 INSCH71 InsertOut-CH71 S5-13 Slot5 CH13 IN

INSCH72 InsertOut-CH72 INSCH72 InsertOut-CH72 S5-14 Slot5 CH14 IN

INSCH73 InsertOut-CH73 INSCH73 InsertOut-CH73 S5-15 Slot5 CH15 IN

INSCH74 InsertOut-CH74 INSCH74 InsertOut-CH74 S5-16 Slot5 CH16 IN

INSCH75 InsertOut-CH75 INSCH75 InsertOut-CH75 S6-1 Slot6 CH1 IN

INSCH76 InsertOut-CH76 INSCH76 InsertOut-CH76 S6-2 Slot6 CH2 IN

INSCH77 InsertOut-CH77 INSCH77 InsertOut-CH77 S6-3 Slot6 CH3 IN

INSCH78 InsertOut-CH78 INSCH78 InsertOut-CH78 S6-4 Slot6 CH4 IN

INSCH79 InsertOut-CH79 INSCH79 InsertOut-CH79 S6-5 Slot6 CH5 IN

INSCH80 InsertOut-CH80 INSCH80 InsertOut-CH80 S6-6 Slot6 CH6 IN

INSCH81 InsertOut-CH81 INSCH81 InsertOut-CH81 S6-7 Slot6 CH7 IN

INSCH82 InsertOut-CH82 INSCH82 InsertOut-CH82 S6-8 Slot6 CH8 IN

INSCH83 InsertOut-CH83 INSCH83 InsertOut-CH83 S6-9 Slot6 CH9 IN

INSCH84 InsertOut-CH84 INSCH84 InsertOut-CH84 S6-10 Slot6 CH10 IN

INSCH85 InsertOut-CH85 INSCH85 InsertOut-CH85 S6-11 Slot6 CH11 IN

INSCH86 InsertOut-CH86 INSCH86 InsertOut-CH86 S6-12 Slot6 CH12 IN

INSCH87 InsertOut-CH87 INSCH87 InsertOut-CH87 S6-13 Slot6 CH13 IN

INSCH88 InsertOut-CH88 INSCH88 InsertOut-CH88 S6-14 Slot6 CH14 IN

INSCH89 InsertOut-CH89 INSCH89 InsertOut-CH89 S6-15 Slot6 CH15 IN

INSCH90 InsertOut-CH90 INSCH90 InsertOut-CH90 S6-16 Slot6 CH16 IN

INSCH91 InsertOut-CH91 INSCH91 InsertOut-CH91 FX1-1 Effect1 OUT 1

INSCH92 InsertOut-CH92 INSCH92 InsertOut-CH92 FX1-2 Effect1 OUT 2

INSCH93 InsertOut-CH93 INSCH93 InsertOut-CH93 FX1-3 Effect1 OUT 3

INSCH94 InsertOut-CH94 INSCH94 InsertOut-CH94 FX1-4 Effect1 OUT 4

INSCH95 InsertOut-CH95 INSCH95 InsertOut-CH95 FX1-5 Effect1 OUT 5

INSCH96 InsertOut-CH96 INSCH96 InsertOut-CH96 FX1-6 Effect1 OUT 6

INSBUS1 InsertOut-BUS1 INSBUS1 InsertOut-BUS1 FX1-7 Effect1 OUT 7

INSBUS2 InsertOut-BUS2 INSBUS2 InsertOut-BUS2 FX1-8 Effect1 OUT 8

INSBUS3 InsertOut-BUS3 INSBUS3 InsertOut-BUS3 FX2-1 Effect2 OUT 1

INSBUS4 InsertOut-BUS4 INSBUS4 InsertOut-BUS4 FX2-2 Effect2 OUT 2

INSBUS5 InsertOut-BUS5 INSBUS5 InsertOut-BUS5 FX2-3 Effect2 OUT 3

INSBUS6 InsertOut-BUS6 INSBUS6 InsertOut-BUS6 FX2-4 Effect2 OUT 4

INSBUS7 InsertOut-BUS7 INSBUS7 InsertOut-BUS7 FX2-5 Effect2 OUT 5

INSBUS8 InsertOut-BUS8 INSBUS8 InsertOut-BUS8 FX2-6 Effect2 OUT 6

INSAUX1 InsertOut-AUX1 INSAUX1 InsertOut-AUX1 FX2-7 Effect2 OUT 7

INSAUX2 InsertOut-AUX2 INSAUX2 InsertOut-AUX2 FX2-8 Effect2 OUT 8

INSAUX3 InsertOut-AUX3 INSAUX3 InsertOut-AUX3 FX3-1 Effect3 OUT 1

INSAUX4 InsertOut-AUX4 INSAUX4 InsertOut-AUX4 FX3-2 Effect3 OUT 2

INSAUX5 InsertOut-AUX5 INSAUX5 InsertOut-AUX5 FX4-1 Effect4 OUT 1

INSAUX6 InsertOut-AUX6 INSAUX6 InsertOut-AUX6 FX4-2 Effect4 OUT 2

INSAUX7 InsertOut-AUX7 INSAUX7 InsertOut-AUX7 FX5-1 Effect5 OUT 1

INSAUX8 InsertOut-AUX8 INSAUX8 InsertOut-AUX8 FX5-2 Effect5 OUT 2

INSAUX9 InsertOut-AUX9 INSAUX9 InsertOut-AUX9 FX6-1 Effect6 OUT 1

INSAUX10 InsertOut-AUX10 INSAUX10 InsertOut-AUX10 FX6-2 Effect6 OUT 2

INSAUX11 InsertOut-AUX11 INSAUX11 InsertOut-AUX11 FX7-1 Effect7 OUT 1

Slot Outputs Omni Outs Output Channel Insert Ins

Source Description Source Description Source Description

250 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

INSAUX12 InsertOut-AUX12 INSAUX12 InsertOut-AUX12 FX7-2 Effect7 OUT 2

INSMTX1L InsertOut-MTX1L INSMTX1L InsertOut-MTX1L FX8-1 Effect8 OUT 1

INSMTX1R InsertOut-MTX1R INSMTX1R InsertOut-MTX1R FX8-2 Effect8 OUT 2

INSMTX2L InsertOut-MTX2L INSMTX2L InsertOut-MTX2L 2TD1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L

INSMTX2R InsertOut-MTX2R INSMTX2R InsertOut-MTX2R 2TD1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R

INSMTX3L InsertOut-MTX3L INSMTX3L InsertOut-MTX3L 2TD2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L

INSMTX3R InsertOut-MTX3R INSMTX3R InsertOut-MTX3R 2TD2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R

INSMTX4L InsertOut-MTX4L INSMTX4L InsertOut-MTX4L 2TD3L 2TR IN Dig.3 L

INSMTX4R InsertOut-MTX4R INSMTX4R InsertOut-MTX4R 2TD3R 2TR IN Dig.3 R

INSSTL InsertOut-STL INSSTL InsertOut-STL 2TA1L 2TR IN Analog1 L

INSSTR InsertOut-STR INSSTR InsertOut-STR 2TA1R 2TR IN Analog1 R

Surr L

Surround Monitor

Surr L

Surround Monitor

2TA2L 2TR IN Analog2 L

Surr R

Surround Monitor

Surr R

Surround Monitor

2TA2R 2TR IN Analog2 R

Surr Ls

Surround Monitor

Surr Ls

Surround Monitor

——

Surr Rs

Surround Monitor

Surr Rs

Surround Monitor

——

Surr C

Surround Monitor

Surr C

Surround Monitor

——

Surr LFE

Surround Monitor

LFE

Surr LFE

Surround Monitor

LFE

——

Surr Ls2

Surround Monitor

Ls2

Surr Ls2

Surround Monitor

Ls2

——

Surr Rs2

Surround Monitor

Rs2

Surr Rs2

Surround Monitor

Rs2

——

Slot Outputs Omni Outs Output Channel Insert Ins

Source Description Source Description Source Description

Output Patch Parameters 251

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Output Patch Table 2

Direct Outs 2TR Digital Outs GEQs

Source Description Source Description Source Description

NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

S1-1 Slot1 CH1 OUT BUS1 BUS1 BUS1 BUS1

S1-2 Slot1 CH2 OUT BUS2 BUS2 BUS2 BUS2

S1-3 Slot1 CH3 OUT BUS3 BUS3 BUS3 BUS3

S1-4 Slot1 CH4 OUT BUS4 BUS4 BUS4 BUS4

S1-5 Slot1 CH5 OUT BUS5 BUS5 BUS5 BUS5

S1-6 Slot1 CH6 OUT BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6

S1-7 Slot1 CH7 OUT BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7

S1-8 Slot1 CH8 OUT BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8

S1-9 Slot1 CH9 OUT AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1

S1-10 Slot1 CH10 OUT AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2

S1-11 Slot1 CH11 OUT AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3

S1-12 Slot1 CH12 OUT AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4

S1-13 Slot1 CH13 OUT AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5

S1-14 Slot1 CH14 OUT AUX6 AUX6 AUX6 AUX6

S1-15 Slot1 CH15 OUT AUX7 AUX7 AUX7 AUX7

S1-16 Slot1 CH16 OUT AUX8 AUX8 AUX8 AUX8

S2-1 Slot2 CH1 OUT AUX9 AUX9 AUX9 AUX9

S2-2 Slot2 CH2 OUT AUX10 AUX10 AUX10 AUX10

S2-3 Slot2 CH3 OUT AUX11 AUX11 AUX11 AUX11

S2-4 Slot2 CH4 OUT AUX12 AUX12 AUX12 AUX12

S2-5 Slot2 CH5 OUT MATRIX1L MATRIX1 L MATRIX1L MATRIX1 L

S2-6 Slot2 CH6 OUT MATRIX1R MATRIX1 R MATRIX1R MATRIX1 R

S2-7 Slot2 CH7 OUT MATRIX2L MATRIX2 L MATRIX2L MATRIX2 L

S2-8 Slot2 CH8 OUT MATRIX2R MATRIX2 R MATRIX2R MATRIX2 R

S2-9 Slot2 CH9 OUT MATRIX3L MATRIX3 L MATRIX3L MATRIX3 L

S2-10 Slot2 CH10 OUT MATRIX3R MATRIX3 R MATRIX3R MATRIX3 R

S2-11 Slot2 CH11 OUT MATRIX4L MATRIX4 L MATRIX4L MATRIX4 L

S2-12 Slot2 CH12 OUT MATRIX4R MATRIX4 R MATRIX4R MATRIX4 R

S2-13 Slot2 CH13 OUT STEREO-L STEREO L STEREO-L STEREO L

S2-14 Slot2 CH14 OUT STEREO-R STEREO R STEREO-R STEREO R

S2-15 Slot2 CH15 OUT INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 — —

S2-16 Slot2 CH16 OUT INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 — —

S3-1 Slot3 CH1 OUT INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 — —

S3-2 Slot3 CH2 OUT INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 — —

S3-3 Slot3 CH3 OUT INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 — —

S3-4 Slot3 CH4 OUT INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 — —

S3-5 Slot3 CH5 OUT INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 — —

S3-6 Slot3 CH6 OUT INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 — —

S3-7 Slot3 CH7 OUT INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 — —

S3-8 Slot3 CH8 OUT INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 — —

S3-9 Slot3 CH9 OUT INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 — —

S3-10 Slot3 CH10 OUT INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 — —

S3-11 Slot3 CH11 OUT INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 — —

S3-12 Slot3 CH12 OUT INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 — —

S3-13 Slot3 CH13 OUT INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 — —

S3-14 Slot3 CH14 OUT INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 — —

S3-15 Slot3 CH15 OUT INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 — —

S3-16 Slot3 CH16 OUT INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 — —

S4-1 Slot4 CH1 OUT INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 — —

252 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

S4-2 Slot4 CH2 OUT INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 — —

S4-3 Slot4 CH3 OUT INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 — —

S4-4 Slot4 CH4 OUT INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 — —

S4-5 Slot4 CH5 OUT INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 — —

S4-6 Slot4 CH6 OUT INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 — —

S4-7 Slot4 CH7 OUT INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 — —

S4-8 Slot4 CH8 OUT INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 — —

S4-9 Slot4 CH9 OUT INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 — —

S4-10 Slot4 CH10 OUT INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 — —

S4-11 Slot4 CH11 OUT INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 — —

S4-12 Slot4 CH12 OUT INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 — —

S4-13 Slot4 CH13 OUT INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 — —

S4-14 Slot4 CH14 OUT INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 — —

S4-15 Slot4 CH15 OUT INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 — —

S4-16 Slot4 CH16 OUT INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 — —

S5-1 Slot5 CH1 OUT INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 — —

S5-2 Slot5 CH2 OUT INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36 — —

S5-3 Slot5 CH3 OUT INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37 — —

S5-4 Slot5 CH4 OUT INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38 — —

S5-5 Slot5 CH5 OUT INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39 — —

S5-6 Slot5 CH6 OUT INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40 — —

S5-7 Slot5 CH7 OUT INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41 — —

S5-8 Slot5 CH8 OUT INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42 — —

S5-9 Slot5 CH9 OUT INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43 — —

S5-10 Slot5 CH10 OUT INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44 — —

S5-11 Slot5 CH11 OUT INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45 — —

S5-12 Slot5 CH12 OUT INSCH46 InsertOut-CH46 — —

S5-13 Slot5 CH13 OUT INSCH47 InsertOut-CH47 — —

S5-14 Slot5 CH14 OUT INSCH48 InsertOut-CH48 — —

S5-15 Slot5 CH15 OUT INSCH49 InsertOut-CH49 — —

S5-16 Slot5 CH16 OUT INSCH50 InsertOut-CH50 — —

S6-1 Slot6 CH1 OUT INSCH51 InsertOut-CH51 — —

S6-2 Slot6 CH2 OUT INSCH52 InsertOut-CH52 — —

S6-3 Slot6 CH3 OUT INSCH53 InsertOut-CH53 — —

S6-4 Slot6 CH4 OUT INSCH54 InsertOut-CH54 — —

S6-5 Slot6 CH5 OUT INSCH55 InsertOut-CH55 — —

S6-6 Slot6 CH6 OUT INSCH56 InsertOut-CH56 — —

S6-7 Slot6 CH7 OUT INSCH57 InsertOut-CH57 — —

S6-8 Slot6 CH8 OUT INSCH58 InsertOut-CH58 — —

S6-9 Slot6 CH9 OUT INSCH59 InsertOut-CH59 — —

S6-10 Slot6 CH10 OUT INSCH60 InsertOut-CH60 — —

S6-11 Slot6 CH11 OUT INSCH61 InsertOut-CH61 — —

S6-12 Slot6 CH12 OUT INSCH62 InsertOut-CH62 — —

S6-13 Slot6 CH13 OUT INSCH63 InsertOut-CH63 — —

S6-14 Slot6 CH14 OUT INSCH64 InsertOut-CH64 — —

S6-15 Slot6 CH15 OUT INSCH65 InsertOut-CH65 — —

S6-16 Slot6 CH16 OUT INSCH66 InsertOut-CH66 — —

OMNI1 OMNI OUT 1 INSCH67 InsertOut-CH67 — —

OMNI2 OMNI OUT 2 INSCH68 InsertOut-CH68 — —

OMNI3 OMNI OUT 3 INSCH69 InsertOut-CH69 — —

OMNI4 OMNI OUT 4 INSCH70 InsertOut-CH70 — —

OMNI5 OMNI OUT 5 INSCH71 InsertOut-CH71 — —

Direct Outs 2TR Digital Outs GEQs

Source Description Source Description Source Description

Output Patch Parameters 253

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

OMNI6 OMNI OUT 6 INSCH72 InsertOut-CH72 — —

OMNI7 OMNI OUT 7 INSCH73 InsertOut-CH73 — —

OMNI8 OMNI OUT 8 INSCH74 InsertOut-CH74 — —

2TD1L 2TR OUT Dig.1 L INSCH75 InsertOut-CH75 — —

2TD1R 2TR OUT Dig.1 R INSCH76 InsertOut-CH76 — —

2TD2L 2TR OUT Dig.2 L INSCH77 InsertOut-CH77 — —

2TD2R 2TR OUT Dig.2 R INSCH78 InsertOut-CH78 — —

2TD3L 2TR OUT Dig.3 L INSCH79 InsertOut-CH79 — —

2TD3R 2TR OUT Dig.3 R INSCH80 InsertOut-CH80 — —

——INSCH81 InsertOut-CH81 — —

——INSCH82 InsertOut-CH82 — —

——INSCH83 InsertOut-CH83 — —

——INSCH84 InsertOut-CH84 — —

——INSCH85 InsertOut-CH85 — —

——INSCH86 InsertOut-CH86 — —

——INSCH87 InsertOut-CH87 — —

——INSCH88 InsertOut-CH88 — —

——INSCH89 InsertOut-CH89 — —

——INSCH90 InsertOut-CH90 — —

——INSCH91 InsertOut-CH91 — —

——INSCH92 InsertOut-CH92 — —

——INSCH93 InsertOut-CH93 — —

——INSCH94 InsertOut-CH94 — —

——INSCH95 InsertOut-CH95 — —

——INSCH96 InsertOut-CH96 — —

——INSBUS1 InsertOut-BUS1 — —

——INSBUS2 InsertOut-BUS2 — —

——INSBUS3 InsertOut-BUS3 — —

——INSBUS4 InsertOut-BUS4 — —

——INSBUS5 InsertOut-BUS5 — —

——INSBUS6 InsertOut-BUS6 — —

——INSBUS7 InsertOut-BUS7 — —

——INSBUS8 InsertOut-BUS8 — —

——INSAUX1 InsertOut-AUX1 — —

——INSAUX2 InsertOut-AUX2 — —

——INSAUX3 InsertOut-AUX3 — —

——INSAUX4 InsertOut-AUX4 — —

——INSAUX5 InsertOut-AUX5 — —

——INSAUX6 InsertOut-AUX6 — —

——INSAUX7 InsertOut-AUX7 — —

——INSAUX8 InsertOut-AUX8 — —

——INSAUX9 InsertOut-AUX9 — —

——INSAUX10 InsertOut-AUX10 — —

——INSAUX11 InsertOut-AUX11 — —

——INSAUX12 InsertOut-AUX12 — —

——INSMTX1L InsertOut-MTX1L — —

——INSMTX1R InsertOut-MTX1R — —

——INSMTX2L InsertOut-MTX2L — —

——INSMTX2R InsertOut-MTX2R — —

——INSMTX3L InsertOut-MTX3L — —

——INSMTX3R InsertOut-MTX3R — —

——INSMTX4L InsertOut-MTX4L — —

Direct Outs 2TR Digital Outs GEQs

Source Description Source Description Source Description

254 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

——INSMTX4R InsertOut-MTX4R — —

——INSSTL InsertOut-STL — —

——INSSTR InsertOut-STR — —

——CR-L Control Room L — —

——CR-R Control Room R — —

Direct Outs 2TR Digital Outs GEQs

Source Description Source Description Source Description

Initial Output Patch Settings 255

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Initial Output Patch Settings

Slot Outputs Omni Outs Direct Outs

# Source # Source

Destinati

SLOT1-01 BUS1 1 AUX1 1 SLOT1-01

SLOT1-02 BUS2 2 AUX2 2 SLOT1-02

SLOT1-03 BUS3 3 AUX3 3 SLOT1-03

SLOT1-04 BUS4 4 AUX4 4 SLOT1-04

SLOT1-05 BUS5 5 AUX5 5 SLOT1-05

SLOT1-06 BUS6 6 AUX6 6 SLOT1-06

SLOT1-07 BUS7 7 AUX7 7 SLOT1-07

SLOT1-08 BUS8 8 AUX8 8 SLOT1-08

SLOT1-09 BUS1 — — 9 SLOT2-01

SLOT1-10 BUS2 — — 10 SLOT2-02

SLOT1-11 BUS3 — — 11 SLOT2-03

SLOT1-12 BUS4 — — 12 SLOT2-04

SLOT1-13 BUS5 — — 13 SLOT2-05

SLOT1-14 BUS6 — — 14 SLOT2-06

SLOT1-15 BUS7 — — 15 SLOT2-07

SLOT1-16 BUS8 — — 16 SLOT2-08

SLOT2-01 BUS1 — — 17 SLOT3-01

SLOT2-02 BUS2 — — 18 SLOT3-02

SLOT2-03 BUS3 — — 19 SLOT3-03

SLOT2-04 BUS4 — — 20 SLOT3-04

SLOT2-05 BUS5 — — 21 SLOT3-05

SLOT2-06 BUS6 — — 22 SLOT3-06

SLOT2-07 BUS7 — — 23 SLOT3-07

SLOT2-08 BUS8 — — 24 SLOT3-08

SLOT2-09 BUS1 — — 25 SLOT4-01

SLOT2-10 BUS2 — — 26 SLOT4-02

SLOT2-11 BUS3 — — 27 SLOT4-03

SLOT2-12 BUS4 — — 28 SLOT4-04

SLOT2-13 BUS5 — — 29 SLOT4-05

SLOT2-14 BUS6 — — 30 SLOT4-06

SLOT2-15 BUS7 — — 31 SLOT4-07

SLOT2-16 BUS8 — — 32 SLOT4-08

SLOT3-01 BUS1 — — 33 SLOT5-01

SLOT3-02 BUS2 — — 34 SLOT5-02

SLOT3-03 BUS3 — — 35 SLOT5-03

SLOT3-04 BUS4 — — 36 SLOT5-04

SLOT3-05 BUS5 — — 37 SLOT5-05

SLOT3-06 BUS6 — — 38 SLOT5-06

SLOT3-07 BUS7 — — 39 SLOT5-07

SLOT3-08 BUS8 — — 40 SLOT5-08

SLOT3-09 BUS1 — — 41 SLOT6-01

SLOT3-10 BUS2 — — 42 SLOT6-02

SLOT3-11 BUS3 — — 43 SLOT6-03

SLOT3-12 BUS4 — — 44 SLOT6-04

SLOT3-13 BUS5 — — 45 SLOT6-05

SLOT3-14 BUS6 — — 46 SLOT6-06

SLOT3-15 BUS7 — — 47 SLOT6-07

SLOT3-16 BUS8 — — 48 SLOT6-08

SLOT4-01 BUS1 — — 49 NONE

SLOT4-02 BUS2 — — 50 NONE

SLOT4-03 BUS3 — — 51 NONE

SLOT4-04 BUS4 — — 52 NONE

SLOT4-05 BUS5 — — 53 NONE

SLOT4-06 BUS6 — — 54 NONE

SLOT4-07 BUS7 — — 55 NONE

SLOT4-08 BUS8 — — 56 NONE

SLOT4-09 BUS1 — — 57 NONE

SLOT4-10 BUS2 — — 58 NONE

SLOT4-11 BUS3 — — 59 NONE

SLOT4-12 BUS4 — — 60 NONE

SLOT4-13 BUS5 — — 61 NONE

SLOT4-14 BUS6 — — 62 NONE

SLOT4-15 BUS7 — — 63 NONE

SLOT4-16 BUS8 — — 64 NONE

SLOT5-01 BUS1 — — 65 NONE

SLOT5-02 BUS2 — — 66 NONE

SLOT5-03 BUS3 — — 67 NONE

SLOT5-04 BUS4 — — 68 NONE

SLOT5-05 BUS5 — — 69 NONE

SLOT5-06 BUS6 — — 70 NONE

SLOT5-07 BUS7 — — 71 NONE

SLOT5-08 BUS8 — — 72 NONE

SLOT5-09 BUS1 — — 73 NONE

SLOT5-10 BUS2 — — 74 NONE

SLOT5-11 BUS3 — — 75 NONE

SLOT5-12 BUS4 — — 76 NONE

SLOT5-13 BUS5 — — 77 NONE

SLOT5-14 BUS6 — — 78 NONE

SLOT5-15 BUS7 — — 79 NONE

SLOT5-16 BUS8 — — 80 NONE

SLOT6-01 BUS1 — — 81 NONE

SLOT6-02 BUS2 — — 82 NONE

SLOT6-03 BUS3 — — 83 NONE

SLOT6-04 BUS4 — — 84 NONE

SLOT6-05 BUS5 — — 85 NONE

SLOT6-06 BUS6 — — 86 NONE

SLOT6-07 BUS7 — — 87 NONE

SLOT6-08 BUS8 — — 88 NONE

SLOT6-09 BUS1 — — 89 NONE

SLOT6-10 BUS2 — — 90 NONE

SLOT6-11 BUS3 — — 91 NONE

SLOT6-12 BUS4 — — 92 NONE

SLOT6-13 BUS5 — — 93 NONE

SLOT6-14 BUS6 — — 94 NONE

SLOT6-15 BUS7 — — 95 NONE

SLOT6-16 BUS8 — — 96 NONE

Slot Outputs Omni Outs Direct Outs

# Source # Source

Destinati

256 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Initial Input Channel Names

Input

Channel ID

Short Name Long Name

CH01 CH01 CH01

CH02 CH02 CH02

CH03 CH03 CH03

CH04 CH04 CH04

CH05 CH05 CH05

CH06 CH06 CH06

CH07 CH07 CH07

CH08 CH08 CH08

CH09 CH09 CH09

CH10 CH10 CH10

CH11 CH11 CH11

CH12 CH12 CH12

CH13 CH13 CH13

CH14 CH14 CH14

CH15 CH15 CH15

CH16 CH16 CH16

CH17 CH17 CH17

CH18 CH18 CH18

CH19 CH19 CH19

CH20 CH20 CH20

CH21 CH21 CH21

CH22 CH22 CH22

CH23 CH23 CH23

CH24 CH24 CH24

CH25 CH25 CH25

CH26 CH26 CH26

CH27 CH27 CH27

CH28 CH28 CH28

CH29 CH29 CH29

CH30 CH30 CH30

CH31 CH31 CH31

CH32 CH32 CH32

CH33 CH33 CH33

CH34 CH34 CH34

CH35 CH35 CH35

CH36 CH36 CH36

CH37 CH37 CH37

CH38 CH38 CH38

CH39 CH39 CH39

CH40 CH40 CH40

CH41 CH41 CH41

CH42 CH42 CH42

CH43 CH43 CH43

CH44 CH44 CH44

CH45 CH45 CH45

CH46 CH46 CH46

CH47 CH47 CH47

CH48 CH48 CH48

CH49 CH49 CH49

CH50 CH50 CH50

CH51 CH51 CH51

CH52 CH52 CH52

CH53 CH53 CH53

CH54 CH54 CH54

CH55 CH55 CH55

CH56 CH56 CH56

CH57 CH57 CH57

CH58 CH58 CH58

CH59 CH59 CH59

CH60 CH60 CH60

CH61 CH61 CH61

CH62 CH62 CH62

CH63 CH63 CH63

CH64 CH64 CH64

CH65 CH65 CH65

CH66 CH66 CH66

CH67 CH67 CH67

CH68 CH68 CH68

CH69 CH69 CH69

CH70 CH70 CH70

CH71 CH71 CH71

CH72 CH72 CH72

CH73 CH73 CH73

CH74 CH74 CH74

CH75 CH75 CH75

CH76 CH76 CH76

CH77 CH77 CH77

CH78 CH78 CH78

CH79 CH79 CH79

CH80 CH80 CH80

CH81 CH81 CH81

CH82 CH82 CH82

CH83 CH83 CH83

CH84 CH84 CH84

CH85 CH85 CH85

CH86 CH86 CH86

CH87 CH87 CH87

CH88 CH88 CH88

CH89 CH89 CH89

CH90 CH90 CH90

CH91 CH91 CH91

CH92 CH92 CH92

CH93 CH93 CH93

CH94 CH94 CH94

CH95 CH95 CH95

CH96 CH96 CH96

Input

Channel ID

Short Name Long Name

Initial Output Channel Names 257

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Initial Output Channel Names

Output

Channel ID

Short Name Long Name

BUS1 BUS1 BUS1

BUS2 BUS2 BUS2

BUS3 BUS3 BUS3

BUS4 BUS4 BUS4

BUS5 BUS5 BUS5

BUS6 BUS6 BUS6

BUS7 BUS7 BUS7

BUS8 BUS8 BUS8

AUX1 AUX1 AUX1

AUX2 AUX2 AUX2

AUX3 AUX3 AUX3

AUX4 AUX4 AUX4

AUX5 AUX5 AUX5

AUX6 AUX6 AUX6

AUX7 AUX7 AUX7

AUX8 AUX8 AUX8

AUX9 AUX9 AUX9

AX10 AX10 AUX10

AX11 AX11 AUX11

AX12 AX12 AUX12

MTX1 MTX1 MATRIX1

MTX2 MTX2 MATRIX2

MTX3 MTX3 MATRIX3

MTX4 MTX4 MATRIX4

ST ST STEREO

258 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Initial Input Port Names

Port PORT ID

Short

Name

Long Name

AD1 AD01 AD01 AD IN 1

AD2 AD02 AD02 AD IN 2

AD3 AD03 AD03 AD IN 3

AD4 AD04 AD04 AD IN 4

AD5 AD05 AD05 AD IN 5

AD6 AD06 AD06 AD IN 6

AD7 AD07 AD07 AD IN 7

AD8 AD08 AD08 AD IN 8

AD9 AD09 AD09 AD IN 9

AD10 AD10 AD10 AD IN 10

AD11 AD11 AD11 AD IN 11

AD12 AD12 AD12 AD IN 12

AD13 AD13 AD13 AD IN 13

AD14 AD14 AD14 AD IN 14

AD15 AD15 AD15 AD IN 15

AD16 AD16 AD16 AD IN 16

AD17 AD17 AD17 AD IN 17

AD18 AD18 AD18 AD IN 18

AD19 AD19 AD19 AD IN 19

AD20 AD20 AD20 AD IN 20

AD21 AD21 AD21 AD IN 21

AD22 AD22 AD22 AD IN 22

AD23 AD23 AD23 AD IN 23

AD24 AD24 AD24 AD IN 24

SLOT1-01 S1-1 S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN

SLOT1-02 S1-2 S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN

SLOT1-03 S1-3 S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN

SLOT1-04 S1-4 S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN

SLOT1-05 S1-5 S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN

SLOT1-06 S1-6 S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN

SLOT1-07 S1-7 S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN

SLOT1-08 S1-8 S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN

SLOT1-09 S1-9 S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN

SLOT1-10 S110 S110 Slot1 CH10 IN

SLOT1-11 S111 S111 Slot1 CH11 IN

SLOT1-12 S112 S112 Slot1 CH12 IN

SLOT1-13 S113 S113 Slot1 CH13 IN

SLOT1-14 S114 S114 Slot1 CH14 IN

SLOT1-15 S115 S115 Slot1 CH15 IN

SLOT1-16 S116 S116 Slot1 CH16 IN

SLOT2-01 S2-1 S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN

SLOT2-02 S2-2 S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN

SLOT2-03 S2-3 S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN

SLOT2-04 S2-4 S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN

SLOT2-05 S2-5 S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN

SLOT2-06 S2-6 S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN

SLOT2-07 S2-7 S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN

SLOT2-08 S2-8 S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN

SLOT2-09 S2-9 S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN

SLOT2-10 S210 S210 Slot2 CH10 IN

SLOT2-11 S211 S211 Slot2 CH11 IN

SLOT2-12 S212 S212 Slot2 CH12 IN

SLOT2-13 S213 S213 Slot2 CH13 IN

SLOT2-14 S214 S214 Slot2 CH14 IN

SLOT2-15 S215 S215 Slot2 CH15 IN

SLOT2-16 S216 S216 Slot2 CH16 IN

SLOT3-01 S3-1 S3-1 Slot3 CH1 IN

SLOT3-02 S3-2 S3-2 Slot3 CH2 IN

SLOT3-03 S3-3 S3-3 Slot3 CH3 IN

SLOT3-04 S3-4 S3-4 Slot3 CH4 IN

SLOT3-05 S3-5 S3-5 Slot3 CH5 IN

SLOT3-06 S3-6 S3-6 Slot3 CH6 IN

SLOT3-07 S3-7 S3-7 Slot3 CH7 IN

SLOT3-08 S3-8 S3-8 Slot3 CH8 IN

SLOT3-09 S3-9 S3-9 Slot3 CH9 IN

SLOT3-10 S310 S310 Slot3 CH10 IN

SLOT3-11 S311 S311 Slot3 CH11 IN

SLOT3-12 S312 S312 Slot3 CH12 IN

SLOT3-13 S313 S313 Slot3 CH13 IN

SLOT3-14 S314 S314 Slot3 CH14 IN

SLOT3-15 S315 S315 Slot3 CH15 IN

SLOT3-16 S316 S316 Slot3 CH16 IN

SLOT4-01 S4-1 S4-1 Slot4 CH1 IN

SLOT4-02 S4-2 S4-2 Slot4 CH2 IN

SLOT4-03 S4-3 S4-3 Slot4 CH3 IN

SLOT4-04 S4-4 S4-4 Slot4 CH4 IN

SLOT4-05 S4-5 S4-5 Slot4 CH5 IN

SLOT4-06 S4-6 S4-6 Slot4 CH6 IN

SLOT4-07 S4-7 S4-7 Slot4 CH7 IN

SLOT4-08 S4-8 S4-8 Slot4 CH8 IN

SLOT4-09 S4-9 S4-9 Slot4 CH9 IN

SLOT4-10 S410 S410 Slot4 CH10 IN

SLOT4-11 S411 S411 Slot4 CH11 IN

SLOT4-12 S412 S412 Slot4 CH12 IN

SLOT4-13 S413 S413 Slot4 CH13 IN

SLOT4-14 S414 S414 Slot4 CH14 IN

SLOT4-15 S415 S415 Slot4 CH15 IN

SLOT4-16 S416 S416 Slot4 CH16 IN

SLOT5-01 S5-1 S5-1 Slot5 CH1 IN

SLOT5-02 S5-2 S5-2 Slot5 CH2 IN

SLOT5-03 S5-3 S5-3 Slot5 CH3 IN

SLOT5-04 S5-4 S5-4 Slot5 CH4 IN

SLOT5-05 S5-5 S5-5 Slot5 CH5 IN

SLOT5-06 S5-6 S5-6 Slot5 CH6 IN

SLOT5-07 S5-7 S5-7 Slot5 CH7 IN

SLOT5-08 S5-8 S5-8 Slot5 CH8 IN

SLOT5-09 S5-9 S5-9 Slot5 CH9 IN

SLOT5-10 S510 S510 Slot5 CH10 IN

SLOT5-11 S511 S511 Slot5 CH11 IN

SLOT5-12 S512 S512 Slot5 CH12 IN

SLOT5-13 S513 S513 Slot5 CH13 IN

Port PORT ID

Short

Name

Long Name

Initial Input Port Names 259

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

SLOT5-14 S514 S514 Slot5 CH14 IN

SLOT5-15 S515 S515 Slot5 CH15 IN

SLOT5-16 S516 S516 Slot5 CH16 IN

SLOT6-01 S6-1 S6-1 Slot6 CH1 IN

SLOT6-02 S6-2 S6-2 Slot6 CH2 IN

SLOT6-03 S6-3 S6-3 Slot6 CH3 IN

SLOT6-04 S6-4 S6-4 Slot6 CH4 IN

SLOT6-05 S6-5 S6-5 Slot6 CH5 IN

SLOT6-06 S6-6 S6-6 Slot6 CH6 IN

SLOT6-07 S6-7 S6-7 Slot6 CH7 IN

SLOT6-08 S6-8 S6-8 Slot6 CH8 IN

SLOT6-09 S6-9 S6-9 Slot6 CH9 IN

SLOT6-10 S610 S610 Slot6 CH10 IN

SLOT6-11 S611 S611 Slot6 CH11 IN

SLOT6-12 S612 S612 Slot6 CH12 IN

SLOT6-13 S613 S613 Slot6 CH13 IN

SLOT6-14 S614 S614 Slot6 CH14 IN

SLOT6-15 S615 S615 Slot6 CH15 IN

SLOT6-16 S616 S616 Slot6 CH16 IN

2TD1L 2TD1L 2D1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L

2TD1R 2TD1R 2D1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R

2TD2L 2TD2L 2D2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L

2TD2R 2TD2R 2D2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R

2TD3L 2TD3L 2D3L 2TR IN Dig.3 L

2TD3R 2TD3R 2D3R 2TR IN Dig.3 R

2TA1L 2TA1L 2A1L 2TR IN Analog1 L

2TA1R 2TA1R 2A1R 2TR IN Analog1 R

2TA2L 2TA2L 2A2L 2TR IN Analog2 L

2TA2R 2TA2R 2A2R 2TR IN Analog2 R

Port PORT ID

Short

Name

Long Name

260 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Initial Output Port Names

Port Port ID

Short

Name

Long Name

SLOT1-01 S1-01 S101 Slot1 CH1 OUT

SLOT1-02 S1-02 S102 Slot1 CH2 OUT

SLOT1-03 S1-03 S103 Slot1 CH3 OUT

SLOT1-04 S1-04 S104 Slot1 CH4 OUT

SLOT1-05 S1-05 S105 Slot1 CH5 OUT

SLOT1-06 S1-06 S106 Slot1 CH6 OUT

SLOT1-07 S1-07 S107 Slot1 CH7 OUT

SLOT1-08 S1-08 S108 Slot1 CH8 OUT

SLOT1-09 S1-09 S109 Slot1 CH9 OUT

SLOT1-10 S1-10 S110 Slot1 CH10 OUT

SLOT1-11 S1-11 S111 Slot1 CH11 OUT

SLOT1-12 S1-12 S112 Slot1 CH12 OUT

SLOT1-13 S1-13 S113 Slot1 CH13 OUT

SLOT1-14 S1-14 S114 Slot1 CH14 OUT

SLOT1-15 S1-15 S115 Slot1 CH15 OUT

SLOT1-16 S1-16 S116 Slot1 CH16 OUT

SLOT2-01 S2-01 S201 Slot2 CH1 OUT

SLOT2-02 S2-02 S202 Slot2 CH2 OUT

SLOT2-03 S2-03 S203 Slot2 CH3 OUT

SLOT2-04 S2-04 S204 Slot2 CH4 OUT

SLOT2-05 S2-05 S205 Slot2 CH5 OUT

SLOT2-06 S2-06 S206 Slot2 CH6 OUT

SLOT2-07 S2-07 S207 Slot2 CH7 OUT

SLOT2-08 S2-08 S208 Slot2 CH8 OUT

SLOT2-09 S2-09 S209 Slot2 CH9 OUT

SLOT2-10 S2-10 S210 Slot2 CH10 OUT

SLOT2-11 S2-11 S211 Slot2 CH11 OUT

SLOT2-12 S2-12 S212 Slot2 CH12 OUT

SLOT2-13 S2-13 S213 Slot2 CH13 OUT

SLOT2-14 S2-14 S214 Slot2 CH14 OUT

SLOT2-15 S2-15 S215 Slot2 CH15 OUT

SLOT2-16 S2-16 S216 Slot2 CH16 OUT

SLOT3-01 S3-01 S301 Slot3 CH1 OUT

SLOT3-02 S3-02 S302 Slot3 CH2 OUT

SLOT3-03 S3-03 S303 Slot3 CH3 OUT

SLOT3-04 S3-04 S304 Slot3 CH4 OUT

SLOT3-05 S3-05 S305 Slot3 CH5 OUT

SLOT3-06 S3-06 S306 Slot3 CH6 OUT

SLOT3-07 S3-07 S307 Slot3 CH7 OUT

SLOT3-08 S3-08 S308 Slot3 CH8 OUT

SLOT3-09 S3-09 S309 Slot3 CH9 OUT

SLOT3-10 S3-10 S310 Slot3 CH10 OUT

SLOT3-11 S3-11 S311 Slot3 CH11 OUT

SLOT3-12 S3-12 S312 Slot3 CH12 OUT

SLOT3-13 S3-13 S313 Slot3 CH13 OUT

SLOT3-14 S3-14 S314 Slot3 CH14 OUT

SLOT3-15 S3-15 S315 Slot3 CH15 OUT

SLOT3-16 S3-16 S316 Slot3 CH16 OUT

SLOT4-01 S4-01 S401 Slot4 CH1 OUT

SLOT4-02 S4-02 S402 Slot4 CH2 OUT

SLOT4-03 S4-03 S403 Slot4 CH3 OUT

SLOT4-04 S4-04 S404 Slot4 CH4 OUT

SLOT4-05 S4-05 S405 Slot4 CH5 OUT

SLOT4-06 S4-06 S406 Slot4 CH6 OUT

SLOT4-07 S4-07 S407 Slot4 CH7 OUT

SLOT4-08 S4-08 S408 Slot4 CH8 OUT

SLOT4-09 S4-09 S409 Slot4 CH9 OUT

SLOT4-10 S4-10 S410 Slot4 CH10 OUT

SLOT4-11 S4-11 S411 Slot4 CH11 OUT

SLOT4-12 S4-12 S412 Slot4 CH12 OUT

SLOT4-13 S4-13 S413 Slot4 CH13 OUT

SLOT4-14 S4-14 S414 Slot4 CH14 OUT

SLOT4-15 S4-15 S415 Slot4 CH15 OUT

SLOT4-16 S4-16 S416 Slot4 CH16 OUT

SLOT5-01 S5-01 S501 Slot5 CH1 OUT

SLOT5-02 S5-02 S502 Slot5 CH2 OUT

SLOT5-03 S5-03 S503 Slot5 CH3 OUT

SLOT5-04 S5-04 S504 Slot5 CH4 OUT

SLOT5-05 S5-05 S505 Slot5 CH5 OUT

SLOT5-06 S5-06 S506 Slot5 CH6 OUT

SLOT5-07 S5-07 S507 Slot5 CH7 OUT

SLOT5-08 S5-08 S508 Slot5 CH8 OUT

SLOT5-09 S5-09 S509 Slot5 CH9 OUT

SLOT5-10 S5-10 S510 Slot5 CH10 OUT

SLOT5-11 S5-11 S511 Slot5 CH11 OUT

SLOT5-12 S5-12 S512 Slot5 CH12 OUT

SLOT5-13 S5-13 S513 Slot5 CH13 OUT

SLOT5-14 S5-14 S514 Slot5 CH14 OUT

SLOT5-15 S5-15 S515 Slot5 CH15 OUT

SLOT5-16 S5-16 S516 Slot5 CH16 OUT

SLOT6-01 S6-01 S601 Slot6 CH1 OUT

SLOT6-02 S6-02 S602 Slot6 CH2 OUT

SLOT6-03 S6-03 S603 Slot6 CH3 OUT

SLOT6-04 S6-04 S604 Slot6 CH4 OUT

SLOT6-05 S6-05 S605 Slot6 CH5 OUT

SLOT6-06 S6-06 S606 Slot6 CH6 OUT

SLOT6-07 S6-07 S607 Slot6 CH7 OUT

SLOT6-08 S6-08 S608 Slot6 CH8 OUT

SLOT6-09 S6-09 S609 Slot6 CH9 OUT

SLOT6-10 S6-10 S610 Slot6 CH10 OUT

SLOT6-11 S6-11 S611 Slot6 CH11 OUT

SLOT6-12 S6-12 S612 Slot6 CH12 OUT

SLOT6-13 S6-13 S613 Slot6 CH13 OUT

SLOT6-14 S6-14 S614 Slot6 CH14 OUT

SLOT6-15 S6-15 S615 Slot6 CH15 OUT

SLOT6-16 S6-16 S616 Slot6 CH16 OUT

OMNI1 OMNI1 OMN1 OMNI OUT 1

OMNI2 OMNI2 OMN2 OMNI OUT 2

OMNI3 OMNI3 OMN3 OMNI OUT 3

OMNI4 OMNI4 OMN4 OMNI OUT 4

OMNI5 OMNI5 OMN5 OMNI OUT 5

OMNI6 OMNI6 OMN6 OMNI OUT 6

OMNI7 OMNI7 OMN7 OMNI OUT 7

OMNI8 OMNI8 OMN8 OMNI OUT 8

2TD1L 2TD1L 2D1L 2TR OUT Dig. 1L

2TD1R 2TD1R 2D1R 2TR OUT Dig. 1R

2TD2L 2TD2L 2D2L 2TR OUT Dig. 2L

2TD2R 2TD2R 2D2R 2TR OUT Dig. 2R

2TD3L 2TD3L 2D3L 2TR OUT Dig. 3L

2TD3R 2TD3R 2D3R 2TR OUT Dig. 3R

Port Port ID

Short

Name

Long Name

GPI Trigger Source List 261

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

GPI Trigger Source List

# Source

0 NO ASSIGN

1 CH1 FADER ON

2 CH2 FADER ON

3 CH3 FADER ON

4 CH4 FADER ON

5 CH5 FADER ON

6 CH6 FADER ON

7 CH7 FADER ON

8 CH8 FADER ON

9 CH9 FADER ON

10 CH10 FADER ON

11 CH11 FADER ON

12 CH12 FADER ON

13 CH13 FADER ON

14 CH14 FADER ON

15 CH15 FADER ON

16 CH16 FADER ON

17 CH17 FADER ON

18 CH18 FADER ON

19 CH19 FADER ON

20 CH20 FADER ON

21 CH21 FADER ON

22 CH22 FADER ON

23 CH23 FADER ON

24 CH24 FADER ON

25 CH25 FADER ON

26 CH26 FADER ON

27 CH27 FADER ON

28 CH28 FADER ON

29 CH29 FADER ON

30 CH30 FADER ON

31 CH31 FADER ON

32 CH32 FADER ON

33 CH33 FADER ON

34 CH34 FADER ON

35 CH35 FADER ON

36 CH36 FADER ON

37 CH37 FADER ON

38 CH38 FADER ON

39 CH39 FADER ON

40 CH40 FADER ON

41 CH41 FADER ON

42 CH42 FADER ON

43 CH43 FADER ON

44 CH44 FADER ON

45 CH45 FADER ON

46 CH46 FADER ON

47 CH47 FADER ON

48 CH48 FADER ON

49 CH49 FADER ON

50 CH50 FADER ON

51 CH51 FADER ON

52 CH52 FADER ON

53 CH53 FADER ON

54 CH54 FADER ON

55 CH55 FADER ON

56 CH56 FADER ON

57 CH57 FADER ON

58 CH58 FADER ON

59 CH59 FADER ON

60 CH60 FADER ON

61 CH61 FADER ON

62 CH62 FADER ON

63 CH63 FADER ON

64 CH64 FADER ON

65 CH65 FADER ON

66 CH66 FADER ON

67 CH67 FADER ON

68 CH68 FADER ON

69 CH69 FADER ON

70 CH70 FADER ON

71 CH71 FADER ON

72 CH72 FADER ON

73 CH73 FADER ON

74 CH74 FADER ON

75 CH75 FADER ON

76 CH76 FADER ON

77 CH77 FADER ON

78 CH78 FADER ON

79 CH79 FADER ON

80 CH80 FADER ON

81 CH81 FADER ON

82 CH82 FADER ON

83 CH83 FADER ON

84 CH84 FADER ON

85 CH85 FADER ON

86 CH86 FADER ON

87 CH87 FADER ON

88 CH88 FADER ON

89 CH89 FADER ON

90 CH90 FADER ON

91 CH91 FADER ON

92 CH92 FADER ON

93 CH93 FADER ON

94 CH94 FADER ON

95 CH95 FADER ON

96 CH96 FADER ON

97 BUS1 FADER ON

98 BUS2 FADER ON

99 BUS3 FADER ON

100 BUS4 FADER ON

101 BUS5 FADER ON

102 BUS6 FADER ON

103 BUS7 FADER ON

104 BUS8 FADER ON

105 AUX1 FADER ON

106 AUX2 FADER ON

107 AUX3 FADER ON

# Source

262 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

108 AUX4 FADER ON

109 AUX5 FADER ON

110 AUX6 FADER ON

111 AUX7 FADER ON

112 AUX8 FADER ON

113 AUX9 FADER ON

114 AUX10 FADER ON

115 AUX11 FADER ON

116 AUX12 FADER ON

117 MATRIX1 FADER ON

118 MATRIX2 FADER ON

119 MATRIX3 FADER ON

120 MATRIX4 FADER ON

121 STEREO FADER ON

122 CH1 FADER OFF

123 CH2 FADER OFF

124 CH3 FADER OFF

125 CH4 FADER OFF

126 CH5 FADER OFF

127 CH6 FADER OFF

128 CH7 FADER OFF

129 CH8 FADER OFF

130 CH9 FADER OFF

131 CH10 FADER OFF

132 CH11 FADER OFF

133 CH12 FADER OFF

134 CH13 FADER OFF

135 CH14 FADER OFF

136 CH15 FADER OFF

137 CH16 FADER OFF

138 CH17 FADER OFF

139 CH18 FADER OFF

140 CH19 FADER OFF

141 CH20 FADER OFF

142 CH21 FADER OFF

143 CH22 FADER OFF

144 CH23 FADER OFF

145 CH24 FADER OFF

146 CH25 FADER OFF

147 CH26 FADER OFF

148 CH27 FADER OFF

149 CH28 FADER OFF

150 CH29 FADER OFF

151 CH30 FADER OFF

152 CH31 FADER OFF

153 CH32 FADER OFF

154 CH33 FADER OFF

155 CH34 FADER OFF

156 CH35 FADER OFF

157 CH36 FADER OFF

158 CH37 FADER OFF

159 CH38 FADER OFF

160 CH39 FADER OFF

161 CH40 FADER OFF

162 CH41 FADER OFF

# Source

163 CH42 FADER OFF

164 CH43 FADER OFF

165 CH44 FADER OFF

166 CH45 FADER OFF

167 CH46 FADER OFF

168 CH47 FADER OFF

169 CH48 FADER OFF

170 CH49 FADER OFF

171 CH50 FADER OFF

172 CH51 FADER OFF

173 CH52 FADER OFF

174 CH53 FADER OFF

175 CH54 FADER OFF

176 CH55 FADER OFF

177 CH56 FADER OFF

178 CH57 FADER OFF

179 CH58 FADER OFF

180 CH59 FADER OFF

181 CH60 FADER OFF

182 CH61 FADER OFF

183 CH62 FADER OFF

184 CH63 FADER OFF

185 CH64 FADER OFF

186 CH65 FADER OFF

187 CH66 FADER OFF

188 CH67 FADER OFF

189 CH68 FADER OFF

190 CH69 FADER OFF

191 CH70 FADER OFF

192 CH71 FADER OFF

193 CH72 FADER OFF

194 CH73 FADER OFF

195 CH74 FADER OFF

196 CH75 FADER OFF

197 CH76 FADER OFF

198 CH77 FADER OFF

199 CH78 FADER OFF

200 CH79 FADER OFF

201 CH80 FADER OFF

202 CH81 FADER OFF

203 CH82 FADER OFF

204 CH83 FADER OFF

205 CH84 FADER OFF

206 CH85 FADER OFF

207 CH86 FADER OFF

208 CH87 FADER OFF

209 CH88 FADER OFF

210 CH89 FADER OFF

211 CH90 FADER OFF

212 CH91 FADER OFF

213 CH92 FADER OFF

214 CH93 FADER OFF

215 CH94 FADER OFF

216 CH95 FADER OFF

217 CH96 FADER OFF

# Source

GPI Trigger Source List 263

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

218 BUS1 FADER OFF

219 BUS2 FADER OFF

220 BUS3 FADER OFF

221 BUS4 FADER OFF

222 BUS5 FADER OFF

223 BUS6 FADER OFF

224 BUS7 FADER OFF

225 BUS8 FADER OFF

226 AUX1 FADER OFF

227 AUX2 FADER OFF

228 AUX3 FADER OFF

229 AUX4 FADER OFF

230 AUX5 FADER OFF

231 AUX6 FADER OFF

232 AUX7 FADER OFF

233 AUX8 FADER OFF

234 AUX9 FADER OFF

235 AUX10 FADER OFF

236 AUX11 FADER OFF

237 AUX12 FADER OFF

238 MATRIX1 FADER OFF

239 MATRIX2 FADER OFF

240 MATRIX3 FADER OFF

241 MATRIX4 FADER OFF

242 STEREO FADER OFF

243 UDEF1 LATCH

244 UDEF2 LATCH

245 UDEF3 LATCH

246 UDEF4 LATCH

247 UDEF5 LATCH

248 UDEF6 LATCH

249 UDEF7 LATCH

250 UDEF8 LATCH

251 UDEF9 LATCH

252 UDEF10 LATCH

253 UDEF11 LATCH

254 UDEF12 LATCH

255 UDEF13 LATCH

256 UDEF14 LATCH

257 UDEF15 LATCH

258 UDEF16 LATCH

259 UDEF1 UNLATCH

260 UDEF2 UNLATCH

261 UDEF3 UNLATCH

262 UDEF4 UNLATCH

263 UDEF5 UNLATCH

264 UDEF6 UNLATCH

265 UDEF7 UNLATCH

266 UDEF8 UNLATCH

267 UDEF9 UNLATCH

268 UDEF10 UNLATCH

269 UDEF11 UNLATCH

270 UDEF12 UNLATCH

271 UDEF13 UNLATCH

272 UDEF14 UNLATCH

# Source

273 UDEF15 UNLATCH

274 UDEF16 UNLATCH

275 REC LAMP

# Source

264 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Effects Parameters

REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE

One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates.

EARLY REF.

One input, two output early reﬂections.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO

0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

E/R DLY

0.0–100.0 ms Delay between early reﬂections and reverb

E/R BAL.

0–100%

Balance of early reﬂections and reverb

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reﬂections)

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

GATE LVL

OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in

ATTACK

0–120 ms Gate opening speed

HOLD

1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz), 0.01 ms–1.06 s (fs=88.2 kHz),

0.01 ms–981 ms (fs=96 kHz)

Gate open time

DECAY

2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s

(fs=96 kHz)

Gate closing speed

Parameter Range Description

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE

0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS

0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF.

0–10 Reﬂection diffusion (left–right reﬂection spread)

DENSITY

0–100% Reﬂection density

ER NUM.

1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB GAIN

–99 to +99% Feedback gain

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Effects Parameters 265

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE

One input, two output early reﬂections with gate, and early reﬂections with reverse gate.

MONO DELAY

One input, one output basic repeat delay.

Parameter Range Description

TYPE

Type-A, Type-B Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE

0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS

0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF.

0–10 Reﬂection diffusion (left–right reﬂection spread)

DENSITY

0–100% Reﬂection density

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

ER NUM.

1–19 Number of early reﬂections

FB GAIN

–99 to +99% Feedback gain

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

DELAY

0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1. (Max. value depends on tempo

setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

266 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

STEREO DELAY

Two input, two output basic stereo delay.

MOD. DELAY

One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L

0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. G L

–99 to +99%

Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feed-

back, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB. G R

–99 to +99%

Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feed-

back, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1. (Maximum value depends on the

tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel

DELAY

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right chan-

nel DELAY

Parameter Range Description

DELAY

0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE

Sine/Tri Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY NOTE

1. (Maximum value depends on

the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

MOD NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

Effects Parameters 267

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

DELAY LCR

One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right).

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L

0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY C

0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY

0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time

LEVEL L

–100 to +100% Left channel delay level

LEVEL C

–100 to +100% Center channel delay level

LEVEL R

–100 to +100% Right channel delay level

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1. (Maximum value depends on

the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L

NOTE C

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

268 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

ECHO

Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop.

CHORUS

Two input, two output chorus effect.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L

0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. D L

0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time

FB. D R

0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time

FB. G L

–99 to +99%

Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

FB. G R

–99 to +99%

Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

L->R FB. G

–99 to +99%

Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for nor-

mal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

R->L FB. G

–99 to +99%

Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for nor-

mal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feed-

back)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1. (Maximum value depends on the

tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R

NOTE FBL

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D L

NOTE FBR

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D R

Parameter Range Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH

0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH

0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G

–12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G

–12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Effects Parameters 269

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

FLANGE

Two input, two output ﬂange effect.

SYMPHONIC

Two input, two output symphonic effect.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G

–12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G

–12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G

–12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G

–12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

270 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

PHASER

Two input, two output 16-stage phaser.

AUTOPAN

Two input, two output autopanner.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

OFFSET

0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

PHASE

0.00–354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance

STAGE

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G

–12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G

–12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE

Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G

–12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G

–12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Effects Parameters 271

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

TREMOLO

Two input, two output tremolo effect.

HQ. PITCH

One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

WAVE

Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G

–12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G

–12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

PITCH

–12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift

FINE

–50 to +50 cents Pitch shift ﬁne

DELAY

0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

MODE

1–10 Pitch shift precision

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

1. (Maximum value depends on the

tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

272 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

DUAL PITCH

Two input, two output pitch shifter.

ROTARY

One input, two output rotary speaker simulator.

Parameter Range Description

PITCH 1

–24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift

FINE 1

–50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL 1

–100 to +100%

Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values

for reverse phase)

PAN 1

L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan

DELAY 1

0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time

FB. G 1

–99 to +99%

Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

PITCH 2

–24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift

FINE 2

–50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift ﬁne

LEVEL 2

–100 to +100%

Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values

for reverse phase)

PAN 2

L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan

DELAY 2

0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time

FB. G 2

–99 to +99%

Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase

feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

MODE

1–10 Pitch shift precision

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE 1

1. (Maximum value depends on the

tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1

delay

NOTE 2

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2

delay

Parameter Range Description

ROTATE

STOP, START Rotation stop, start

SPEED

SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters)

SLOW

0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed

FAST

0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed

DRIVE

0–100 Overdrive level

ACCEL

0–10 Acceleration at speed changes

LOW

0–100 Low-frequency ﬁlter

HIGH

0–100 High-frequency ﬁlter

Effects Parameters 273

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

RING MOD.

Two input, two output ring modulator.

MOD. FILTER

Two input, two output modulation ﬁlter.

DISTORTION

One input, two output distortion effect.

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE

OSC, SELF Modulation source: oscillator or input signal

OSC FREQ

0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency

FM FREQ

0.05–40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed

FM DEPTH

0–100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE FM

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ

Parameter Range Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

PHASE

0.00–354.38°

Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation

phase difference

TYPE

LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass

OFFSET

0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO.

0–20 Filter resonance

LEVEL

0–100 Output level

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE

0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER

0–100 Master volume

TONE

–10 to +10 Tone

N. GATE

0–20 Noise reduction

274 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

AMP SIMULATE

One input, two output guitar amp simulator.

DYNA. FILTER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled ﬁlter.

Parameter Range Description

AMP TYPE

1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT

Guitar amp simulation type

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE

0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER

0–100 Master volume

BASS

0–100 Bass tone control

MIDDLE

0–100 Middle tone control

TREBLE

0–100 High tone control

CAB DEP

0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth

EQ F

100 Hz–8.0 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

N. GATE

0–20 Noise reduction

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE

INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE

0–100 Sensitivity

DIR.

UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s

(fs=96 kHz)

Filter frequency change decay speed

TYPE

LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type

OFFSET

0–100 Filter frequency offset

RESO.

0–20 Filter resonance

LEVEL

0–100 Output Level

Effects Parameters 275

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

DYNA. FLANGE

Two input, two output dynamically controlled ﬂanger.

DYNA. PHASER

Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser.

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE

INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE

0–100 Sensitivity

DIR.

UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s

(fs=96 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET

0–100 Delay time offset

FB GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G

–12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

EQ F

100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency

EQ G

–12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain

EQ Q

10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G

–12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE

INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity

SENSE

0–100 Sensitivity

DIR.

UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change

DECAY

1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s

(fs=96 kHz)

Decay speed

OFFSET

0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset

FB GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

STAGE

2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages

LSH F

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving ﬁlter frequency

LSH G

–12 to +12 dB Low shelving ﬁlter gain

HSH F

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving ﬁlter frequency

HSH G

–12 to +12 dB High shelving ﬁlter gain

276 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

REV+CHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel.

REV->CHORUS

One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Spread

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/CHO

0–100%

Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all cho-

rus)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH

0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH

0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Spread

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV BAL.

0–100%

Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused

reverb, 100% = all reverb)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH

0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH

0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Effects Parameters 277

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

REV+FLANGE

One input, two output reverb and ﬂanger effects in parallel.

REV->FLANGE

One input, two output reverb and ﬂanger effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Spread

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/FLG

0–100%

Reverb and ﬂange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all

ﬂange)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Spread

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV BAL.

0–100%

Reverb and ﬂanged reverb balance (0% = all ﬂanged reverb,

100% = all reverb)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

278 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

REV+SYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel.

REV->SYMPHO.

One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Spread

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV/SYM

0–100%

Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all

symphonic)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Spread

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV BAL.

0–100%

Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic

reverb, 100% = all reverb)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Effects Parameters 279

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

REV->PAN

One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Spread

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

REV BAL.

0–100%

Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb,

100% = all reverb)

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

DIR.

1. L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R

Panning direction

WAVE

Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

280 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

DELAY+ER.

One input, two output delay and early reﬂections effects in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L

0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY

0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY/ER

0–100%

Delay and early reﬂections balance (0% = all delay, 100% =

all early reﬂections)

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE

0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS

0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF.

0–10 Spread

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM.

1–19 Number of early reﬂections

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1. (Maximum value depends on the

tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel

DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right chan-

nel DELAY R

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

Effects Parameters 281

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

DELAY->ER.

One input, two output delay and early reﬂections effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L

0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY

0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY BAL.

0–100%

Delay and early reﬂected delay balance (0% = all early

reﬂected delay, 100% = all delay)

TYPE

S-Hall, L-Hall, Random,

Revers, Plate, Spring

Type of early reﬂection simulation

ROOMSIZE

0.1–20.0 Reﬂection spacing

LIVENESS

0–10 Early reﬂections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live)

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

DIFF.

0–10 Spread

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

ER NUM.

1–19 Number of early reﬂections

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1. (Maximum value depends on the

tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel

DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right chan-

nel DELAY R

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

282 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

DELAY+REV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L

0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY

0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI

0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY/REV

0–100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb)

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

REV HI

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Spread

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1. (Maximum value depends on the

tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel

DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right chan-

nel DELAY R

NOTE FB

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

Effects Parameters 283

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

DELAY->REV

One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series.

Parameter Range Description

DELAY L

0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time

DELAY R

0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time

FB. DLY

0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

DELAY HI

0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DLY BAL

0–100%

Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb,

100% = all delay)

INI. DLY

0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

REV HI

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Spread

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE L

1. (Maximum value depends on the

tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel

DELAY L

NOTE R

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right chan-

nel DELAY R

NOTE FB

*1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY

284 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

DIST->DELAY

One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series.

MULTI FILTER

Two input, two output 3-band multi-ﬁlter (24 dB/octave).

Parameter Range Description

DST TYPE

DST1, DST2, OVD1,

OVD2, CRUNCH

Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive)

DRIVE

0–100 Distortion drive

MASTER

0–100 Master volume

TONE

–10 to +10 Tone control

N. GATE

0–20 Noise reduction

DELAY

0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

DLY BAL

0–100%

Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all

delayed distortion)

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

DLY NOTE

1. (Maximum value depends on

the tempo setting)

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY

MOD NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

TYPE 1

HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

TYPE 2

HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

TYPE 3

HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass

FREQ. 1

28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency

FREQ. 2

28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency

FREQ. 3

28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency

LEVEL 1

0–100 Filter 1 level

LEVEL 2

0–100 Filter 2 level

LEVEL 3

0–100 Filter 3 level

RESO. 1

0–20 Filter 1 resonance

RESO. 2

0–20 Filter 2 resonance

RESO. 3

0–20 Filter 3 resonance

Effects Parameters 285

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

FREEZE

One input, one output basic sampler.

ST REVERB

Two input, two output stereo reverb.

Parameter Range Description

REC MODE

MANUAL, INPUT

In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC

and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is

engaged by pressing the REC button, and actual recording is

triggered by the input signal.

REC DLY

–1000 to +1000 ms

Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the

trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before

the trigger is received.

TRG LVL

–60 to 0 dB

Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger

recording or playback)

TRG MASK

0–1000 ms

Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are

ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time.

PLAY

MODE

MOMENT, CONT.,

INPUT

In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the

PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues

once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of

times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parame-

ter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal.

START

1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz), 0.0–2970.5 ms (fs=88.2 kHz),

0.0 ms–2729.1 ms (fs=96 kHz)

Playback start point in milliseconds

END

Playback end point in milliseconds

LOOP

Loop start point in milliseconds

LOOP NUM

0–100 Number of times the sample plays

START

[SAMPLE]

0–262000 Playback start point in samples

END

[SAMPLE]

0–262000 Playback end point in samples

LOOP

[SAMPLE]

0–262000 Loop start point in samples

PITCH

–12 to +12 semitones Playback pitch shift

FINE

–50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift ﬁne

MIDI TRG

OFF, C1–C6, ALL

PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off

messages.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

REV TYPE

Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type

INI. DLY

0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO

0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

E/R BAL.

0–100%

Balance of early reﬂections and reverb

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reﬂections)

286 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

REVERB 5.1

One input, six output reverb for 5.1 surround, with surround panning.

OCTA REVERB

Eight input, eight output reverb.

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

REV TYPE

Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

DIV.

0–100%

Divergence determines how the front center signal is fed to

the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 0%, it’s

fed only to the Left and Right channels (i.e., Phantom Cen-

ter). When set to 50%, it’s fed equally to the Left, Right, and

Center channels. When set to 100%, it’s fed to only the

Center channel (i.e., Real Center).

ROOMSIZE

0.1–20.0 Size of simulated room’s reverb

POS L/R

L63–R63 Left/right listening position

POS F/R

F63–R63 Front/rear listening position

POS CTRL

OFF, NOR, INV

1. When set to NOR, the position can be set by using the Joystick so long as the SELECTED CHANNEL

PAN/SURROUND [EFFECT] button’s indicator is on. When set to INV, the Joystick will work inverse-

ly. When set to OFF, Joystick control is off.

ER L/R

L63–R63 Left/right early reﬂections position

ER F/R

F63–R63 Front/rear early reﬂections position

ER LVL

0–100% Early reﬂections level

ER CTRL

OFF, NOR, INV

REV L/R

L63–R63 Left/right reverb position

REV F/R

F63–R63 Front/rear reverb position

REV LVL

0–100% Reverb level

REV CTRL

OFF, NOR, INV

Parameter Range Description

REV TIME

0.3–99.0 s Reverb time

REV TYPE

Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type

INI. DLY

0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins

HI. RATIO

0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio

LO. RATIO

0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio

DIFF.

0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread)

DENSITY

0–100% Reverb density

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

E/R BAL.

0–100%

Balance of early reﬂections and reverb

(0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reﬂections)

Effects Parameters 287

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

AUTO PAN 5.1

Six input, six output autopanner for 5.1 surround. You can reset to the pan position speci-

ﬁed by the OFFSET parameter by pressing the RESET button.

CHORUS 5.1

Six input, six output chorus for 5.1 surround.

Parameter Range Description

SOURCE

OFF, HOLD, INPUT,

MIDI

When set to OFF, the TRIGGER button is used to start auto-

pan. When set to HOLD, autopan runs continuously. When

set to INPUT, the input signal triggers autopan. When set to

MIDI, a MIDI Note On message can be used to trigger auto-

pan.

TRIG. LVL

–60 to 0 dB

Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger

panning when SOURCE set to INPUT)

TRG MASK

0–1000 ms

Trigger Mask speciﬁes the time from when a trigger is

received until the next trigger will be accepted.

TIME

0.1 s–10.0 s The time after which autopan starts once it’s been triggered

SPEED

0.05 Hz–40.00 Hz Autopan speed

DIR.

Turn L, Turn R Autopan direction

OFFSET

–180 to +180 degrees Pan offset

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

Parameter Range Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

AM DEPTH

0–100% Amplitude modulation depth

PM DEPTH

0–100% Pitch modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

288 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

FLANGE 5.1

Six input, six output ﬂanger for 5.1 surround.

SYMPHO 5.1

Six input, six output symphonic effect for 5.1 surround.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time

FB. GAIN

–99 to +99%

Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback,

minus values for reverse-phase feedback)

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Parameter Range Description

FREQ.

0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed

DEPTH

0–100% Modulation depth

MOD. DLY

0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time

WAVE

Sine, Tri Modulation waveform

HPF

THRU,

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz

High-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

LPF

50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz,

THRU

Low-pass ﬁlter cutoff frequency

SYNC

OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off

NOTE

Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ.

Effects Parameters 289

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

M. BAND DYNA.

Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction

metering for each band.

Parameter Range Description

LOW GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

MID GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

HI. GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

PRESENCE

–10 to +10

For positive values, the threshold of the high band is low-

ered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For

negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all

three bands are affected the same.

EXP. THRE

–54.0 dB to –24.0 dB Expander threshold

EXP. RAT

1:1 to ∞:1 Expander ratio

EXP. REL

1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s

(fs=96 kHz)

Expander release time

EXP. BYP

ON/OFF Expander bypass

CMP. THRE

–24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold

CMP. RAT

1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio

CMP. REL

Compressor release time

CMP. ATK

0–120 ms Compressor attack

CMP. KNEE

0–5 Compressor knee

CMP. BYP

ON/OFF Compressor bypass

LIM. THRE

–12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold

LIM. REL

Limiter release time

LIM. ATK

0–120 ms Limiter attack

LIM. KNEE

0–5 Limiter knee

LIM. BYP

ON/OFF Limiter bypass

LOOKUP

0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay

L–M XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE

–6 dB to –12 dB Filter slope

CEILING

–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Speciﬁes the maximum output level

290 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

COMP 5.1

Six input, six output compressor for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and

gain reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS),

center (C), or LFE channels.

Parameter Range Description

LOW GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

MID GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

HI. GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

PRESENCE

–10 to +10

For positive values, the threshold of the high band is low-

ered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For

negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all

three bands are affected the same.

THRE

–24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold

RATIO

1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio

ATTACK

0–120 ms Attack

RELEASE

1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s

(fs=96 kHz)

Expander release time

KNEE

0–5 Compressor knee

LOOKUP

0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay

CEILING

–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Speciﬁes the maximum output level

L–M XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE

–6 dB to –12 dB Filter slope

KEY LINK

2. 5.1: key-in of all inputs are linked. 5.0: key-in of the L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is indepen-

dent). 3+2: key-in of L, C, and R are linked, and LS and RS are linked. 2+2: key-in of L and R are

linked, and LS and RS are linked.

Key-in linking

Effects Parameters 291

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

COMPAND 5.1

Six input, six output compander for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and

gain reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS),

center (C), or LFE channels.

Parameter Range Description

LOW GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level

MID GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level

HI. GAIN

–96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level

PRESENCE

–10 to +10

For positive values, the threshold of the high band is low-

ered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For

negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all

three bands are affected the same.

THRE

–24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold

RATIO

1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio

ATTACK

0–120 ms Compressor attack

WIDTH

1–90 dB Width before the expander operates

TYPE

Soft, Hard Compander type

LOOKUP

0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay

CEILING

–6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Speciﬁes the maximum output level

L–M XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency

M–H XOVR

21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency

SLOPE

–6 dB to –12 dB Filter slope

KEY LINK

1. 5.1: key-in of all inputs are linked. 5.0: key-in of the L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is indepen-

dent). 3+2: key-in of L, C, and R are linked, and LS and RS are linked. 2+2: key-in of L and R are

linked, and LS and RS are linked.

Key-in linking

292 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Preset EQ Parameters

#Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

01 Bass Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz

1.2 10 0.9 —

02 Bass Drum 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF

+8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON

80 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz

1.4 4.5 2.2 —

03 Snare Drum 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB

132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz

1.2 4.5 0.11 —

04 Snare Drum 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

+1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB

180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz

—100.7 0.1

05 Tom-tom 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

+2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB

212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz

1.4 10 1.2 0.28

06 Cymbal

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB

106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz

—80.9 —

07 High Hat

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–4.0 dB –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB

95 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz

— 0.5 1 —

08 Percussion

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz

— 4.5 0.56 —

09 E. Bass 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz

—54.5 —

10 E. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB

112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz

0.1 5 6.3 —

Preset EQ Parameters 293

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

11 Syn. Bass 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB

85 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

0.1 8 4.5 —

12 Syn. Bass 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB

125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz

1.6 8 2.2 —

13 Piano 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

95 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz

—80.9 —

14 Piano 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz

5.6 10 0.7 —

15 E. G. Clean

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB

265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz

0.18 10 6.3 —

16 E. G. Crunch 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

+4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB

140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz

8 4.5 0.63 9

17 E. G. Crunch 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB

125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz

8 0.4 0.16 —

18 E. G. Dist. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz

—910—

19 E. G. Dist. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB

315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz

—10 4 —

20 A. G. Stroke 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB

106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz

0.9 4.5 3.5 —

21 A. G. Stroke 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz

—94.5 —

#Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

294 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

22 A. G. Arpeg. 1

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB

224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

— 4.5 4.5 0.12

23 A. G. Arpeg. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB

180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz

—74.5 —

24 Brass Sec.

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

2.8 2 0.7 7

25 Male Vocal 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB

190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11

26 Male Vocal 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB

170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz

0.11 10 5.6 —

27 Female Vo. 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB

118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz

0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14

28 Female Vo. 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB

112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz

— 0.16 0.2 —

29 Chorus & Harmo

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB

90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz

2.8 2 0.7 7

30 Total EQ 1

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB

95 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz

7 2.2 5.6 —

31 Total EQ 2

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB

95 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz

7 2.8 5.6 —

32 Total EQ 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB

67 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz

— 0.28 0.7 —

#Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

Preset EQ Parameters 295

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

33 Bass Drum 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

+3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz

2100.4 0.4

34 Snare Drum 3

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB

224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz

— 4.5 2.8 0.1

35 Tom-tom 2

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

90 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz

— 4.5 1.2 —

36 Piano 3

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

+4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB

100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz

8109—

37 Piano Low

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB

190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz

10 6.3 2.2 —

38 Piano High

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING

–5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB

190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz

10 6.3 2.2 0.1

39 Fine-EQ Cass

L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB

75 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz

— 4.5 1.8 —

40 Narrator

PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF

–4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB

106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz

470.63 —

#Title

Parameter

LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH

296 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)

Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz)

#Title Type Parameter Value

1 Gate

GATE

Threshold (dB) –26

Range (dB) –56

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 2.56

Decay (ms) 331

2 Ducking

DUCKING

Threshold (dB) –19

Range (dB) –22

Attack (ms) 93

Hold (ms) 1.20 S

Decay (ms) 6.32 S

3 A. Dr. BD

GATE

Threshold (dB) –11

Range (dB) –53

Attack (ms) 0

Hold (ms) 1.93

Decay (ms) 400

4 A. Dr. SN

GATE

Threshold (dB) –8

Range (dB) –23

Attack (ms) 1

Hold (ms) 0.63

Decay (ms) 238

#Title Type Parameter Value

1 Comp

COMP

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 60

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 250

2 Expand

EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 70

3 Compander (H)

COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 6

Release (ms) 250

4 Compander (S)

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 25

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 24

Release (ms) 180

Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) 297

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

5 A. Dr. BD

COMP

Threshold (dB) –24

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 5.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 58

6 A. Dr. BD

COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) –11

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) –1.5

Width (dB) 7

Release (ms) 192

7 A. Dr. SN

COMP

Threshold (dB) –17

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 12

8 A. Dr. SN

EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 151

9 A. Dr. SN

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 10

Release (ms) 128

10 A. Dr. Tom

EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –20

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 5.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

11 A. Dr. OverTop

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –24

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 38

Out gain (dB) –3.5

Width (dB) 54

Release (ms) 842

12 E. B. Finger

COMP

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 4.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 470

#Title Type Parameter Value

298 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

13 E. B. Slap

COMP

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 6

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 133

14 Syn. Bass

COMP

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 9

Out gain (dB) 3.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 250

15 Piano1

COMP

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 17

Out gain (dB) 1.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 238

16 Piano2

COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 174

17 E. Guitar

COMP

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 7

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 261

18 A. Guitar

COMP

Threshold (dB) –10

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 5

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 238

19 Strings1

COMP

Threshold (dB) –11

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 33

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 749

20 Strings2

COMP

Threshold (dB) –12

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 93

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 1.35 S

#Title Type Parameter Value

Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) 299

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

21 Strings3

COMP

Threshold (dB) –17

Ratio ( :1) 1.5

Attack (ms) 76

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 186

22 BrassSection

COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 18

Out gain (dB) 4.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 226

23 Syn. Pad

COMP

Threshold (dB) –13

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 58

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 238

24 SamplingPerc

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) –2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 238

25 Sampling BD

COMP

Threshold (dB) –14

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 2

Out gain (dB) 3.5

Knee 4

Release (ms) 35

26 Sampling SN

COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 4

Attack (ms) 8

Out gain (dB) 8.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 354

27 Hip Comp

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –23

Ratio ( :1) 20

Attack (ms) 15

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Width (dB) 15

Release (ms) 163

28 Solo Vocal1

COMP

Threshold (dB) –20

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 31

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 342

#Title Type Parameter Value

300 Appendix A: Parameter Lists

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

29 Solo Vocal2

COMP

Threshold (dB) –8

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 26

Out gain (dB) 1.5

Knee 3

Release (ms) 331

30 Chorus

COMP

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 1.7

Attack (ms) 39

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee 2

Release (ms) 226

31 Click Erase

EXPAND

Threshold (dB) –33

Ratio ( :1) 2

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) 2.0

Knee 2

Release (ms) 284

32 Announcer

COMPAND-H

Threshold (dB) –14

Ratio ( :1) 2.5

Attack (ms) 1

Out gain (dB) –2.5

Width (dB) 18

Release (ms) 180

33 Limiter1

COMPAND-S

Threshold (dB) –9

Ratio ( :1) 3

Attack (ms) 20

Out gain (dB) –3.0

Width (dB) 90

Release (ms) 3.90 s

34 Limiter2

COMP

Threshold (dB) 0

Ratio ( :1) ∞

Attack (ms) 0

Out gain (dB) 0.0

Knee hard

Release (ms) 319

35 Total Comp1

COMP

Threshold (dB) –18

Ratio ( :1) 3.5

Attack (ms) 94

Out gain (dB) 2.5

Knee hard

Release (ms) 447

36 Total Comp2

COMP

Threshold (dB) –16

Ratio ( :1) 6

Attack (ms) 11

Out gain (dB) 6.0

Knee 1

Release (ms) 180

#Title Type Parameter Value

General Spec 301

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Appendix B: Speciﬁcations

General Spec

Number of scene memories

Sampling Frequency

Internal

44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz

External

Normal rate: 44.1 kHz–10% to 48 kHz+6%

Double rate: 88.2 kHz–10% to 96 kHz+6%

Signal Delay

Less than 2.3 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT (fs=48 kHz)

Less than 1.2 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT (fs=96 kHz)

Fader

100 mm motorized with touch sense × 25

Fader Resolution

+10 to –96, –∞ dB (256 steps/100 mm) input faders

0 to –130, –∞ dB (256 steps/100 mm) master faders, stereo fader

Total Harmonic Distortion

(CH INPUT to STEREO OUT)

(Input Gain=Min.)

fs=48 kHz

Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 20 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω

Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +18 dB into 600 Ω

fs=96 kHz

Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 40 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω

Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +18 dB into 600 Ω

Frequency Response

(CH INPUT to STEREO OUT)

20 Hz–20 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω (fs=48 kHz)

20 Hz–40 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω (fs=96 kHz)

Dynamic Range

(maximum level to noise level)

110 dB typ. DA Converter (STEREO OUT)

108 dB typ. AD+DA (to STEREO OUT) @ fs=48 kHz

106 dB typ. AD+DA (to STEREO OUT) @ fs=96 kHz

Hum & Noise

(20 Hz–20 kHz)

Rs=150 Ω

Input Gain=Max.

Input Pad =0 dB

–128 dB Equivalent Input Noise

–92 dB residual output noise. STEREO OUT (STEREO OUT off)

–92 dB (96 dB S/N) STEREO OUT (STEREO fader at nominal level and

all CH INPUT faders at minimum level)

–64 dB (68 dB S/N) STEREO OUTPUT (STEREO fader at nominal level

and one CH INPUT fader at nominal level)

Maximum Voltage Gain

74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–24) to STEREO OUT/OMNI (BUS) OUT

74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–24) to OMNI (AUX) OUT (via pre input fader)

74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–24) to CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT (via

STEREO bus)

Crosstalk

(@ 1 kHz)

Input Gain=Min.

–80 dB adjacent input channels (CH1–24)

–80 dB input to output

AD Input (1–24: A/B)

Phantom switch

+48 V DC is supplied to A (XLR-3-31 type) input

Pad switch

0/26 dB attenuation

Gain control

44 dB (–60 to –16), detented

Peak indicator

LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping

Signal indicator

LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nomi-

nal

Insert

OUT, IN (pre AD converter)

Insert switch

on/off

AD converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=48 kHz)

Analog Input

(2TR IN ANALOG 1, 2)

AD converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=48 kHz)

Option Input (SLOT 1–6) Available cards

Optional digital interface cards (MY8, MY4 series)

Digital Input

(2TR IN DIGITAL 1–3)

SRC

On/off (1:3 and 3:1 maximum input to output sample rate ratio)

302 Appendix B: Specifications

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Input Channel CH1–96

Input patch

—

Phase

Normal/reverse

Gate-type

On/off

Key in: 12 ch Group (1–12, 13–24, 25–36, 37–48, 49–60, 61–72,

73–84, 85–96)/AUX1–12

Comp-type

On/off

Key in: self /Stereo Link

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ

On/off

Delay

0–43400 samples

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized (INPUT/AUX1–12)

Aux send

On/off

AUX1–12; pre fader/post fader

Solo

On/off

Pre fader/after pan

Pan

127 positions (Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63)

Surround pan

127 × 127 positions

LFE level

–∞, –96 dB to +10 dB (256 step)

Routing

STEREO, BUS1–8, DIRECT OUT

Direct out

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

TALKBACK

Level control

Analog rotary potentiometer

AD converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling

Talkback select

Built-in microphone/AD IN 1–24

On/off

—

Slate

On/off

OSCILLATOR

Level

0 to –96 dB (1 dB step)

On/off

—

Waveform

Sine 100 Hz, sine 1 kHz, sine 10 kHz, pink noise, burst noise

Routing

BUS1–8, AUX1–12, MATRIX 1L–4R, STEREO L, R

STEREO OUT DA converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling

OMNI OUT 1–8

Output patch

SURROUND MONITOR, STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–12, MATRIX 1L–4R,

DIRECT OUT 1–96, INSERT OUT (CH1–96, BUS1–8, AUX1–12,

MATRIX 1L–4R, STEREO)

DA converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling

CONTROL ROOM MONITOR

OUT (LARGE, SMALL)

Monitor select

STEREO, 2TR IN DIGITAL 1, 2TR IN DIGITAL 2, 2TR IN DIGITAL 3, 2TR

I N ANALOG 1, 2TR IN ANALOG 2, ASSIGN 1, 2 (BUS 1–8/AUX

1–12/MATRIX 1–4)

Solo contrast

–96 to 0 dB (1 dB step)

Mono

On/off

Dimmer

On/off

DA converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling

Level control

Analog rotary potentiometer

Phones level

Analog rotary potentiometer

Small trim

Analog rotary potentiometer

General Spec 303

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

STUDIO MONITOR OUT

Monitor select

CONTROL ROOM, STEREO, AUX 11, AUX 12

DA converter

24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling

Level control

Analog rotary potentiometer

2TR OUT DIGITAL 1–3

Dither

On/off

Word length 16, 20, 24-bit

Output patch

STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–12, MATRIX 1L–4R, DIRECT OUT 1–96,

INSERT OUT, CONTROL ROOM

SRC

On/off (1:3 and 3:1 maximum input to output sample rate ratio)

Option Output (SLOT 1–6)

Available card

Optional digital interface card (MY8, MY4 series)

Output patch

SURROUND MONITOR, STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–12, MATRIX 1L–4R,

DIRECT OUT 1–96, INSERT OUT (CH1–96, BUS1–8, AUX1–12,

MATRIX 1L–4R, STEREO)

Dither

On/off

Word length 16/20/24-bit

Memory card slot

SmartMedia

STEREO

Comp-type

On/off

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ

On/off

Fader

100 mm motorized

Balance

127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Delay

0–43400 samples

Matrix send

Pre fader/post fader

Level (–∞, –96 dB to +10 dB)

Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

BUS1–8

Comp-type

On/off

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Delay

0–43400 samples

Matrix send

Pre fader/post fader

Level (–∞, –96 dB to +10 dB)

Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Bus to stereo

Level (–∞, –130 dB to 0 dB)

On/off

Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

304 Appendix B: Specifications

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

AUX1–12

Comp-type

On/off

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Delay

0–43400 samples

Matrix send

Pre fader/post fader

Level (–∞, –96 dB to +10 dB)

Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

MATRIX 1L–4R

Comp-type

On/off

Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader

Attenuator

–96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step)

4-band PEQ

On/off

—

Fader

100 mm motorized

Balance

127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63)

Delay

0–43400 samples

Metering

Displayed on LCD

Peak hold on/off

SURROUND MONITOR

Mute

On/off

Solo

On/off

Source

BUS1–8, SLOT 1–6

Monitor to C-R

On/off

Oscillator

Pink noise/500–2 kHz/1 kHz

Monitor matrix

5.1→5.1, 5.1→3-1, 5.1→ST, 3.1→3.1, 3.1→ST

Bass

management

5 presets

Monitor

alignment

ATT (–12.0 dB to 12 dB 0.1 dB step), Delay (0–30.0 msec, 0.01 msec

step)

INTERNAL EFFECTS

(EFFECT 1–8)

Bypass

On/off

In/out

8-in, 8-out (EFFECT1–2): depends on effects type

2-in, 2-out (EFFECT3–8): depends on effects type

Effect-in from

AUX1–12/INSERT OUT/effect-out

Effect-out to

Input patch/effect-in

GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS

(GEQ 1–6)

On/off

—

Band number

Limit

±15 dB, ±12 dB, ±6 dB, –24 dB

Insert position

BUS1–8/AUX1–12/STEREO L, R/MATRIX 1L–4R

Power Requirements

U.S./Canada

120 V, 60 Hz 300 W

Other

220–240 V, 50/60 Hz 300 W

Dimensions (H x D x W)

257 x 821 x 906 mm (10.1" x 32.3" x 35.7")

Net weight

43 kg (94.8 lbs)

Operating free-air temperature range

10–35°C (50–95°F)

Storage temperature range

–20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F)

General Spec 305

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

EQ Parameters

Gate Parameters

Supplied Accessories

AC Cable

CD-ROM (Studio Manager)

Options

Digital interface card (MY8, MY4 series)

PEAK METER BRIDGE: MB2000

SIDE PANEL: SP2000

1. Total harmonic distortion is measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 80 kHz.

2. Hum & Noise are measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave

attenuation.

3. See “Gate Parameters” on page 305.

4. See “Comp Parameters” on page 306.

5. See “EQ Parameters” on page 305.

LOW/HPF L-MID H-MID HIGH /LPF

0.1–10.0

(41 points)

low shelving

HPF

0.1–10.0

(41 points)

0.1–10.0

(41 points)

high shelving

LPF

21.2 Hz–20 kHz (1/12 oct step)

±18 dB

(0.1 dB step)

HPF: on/off

±18 dB

(0.1 dB step)

±18 dB

(0.1 dB step)

LPF: on/off

Gate

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Range

–70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Hold

0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz

0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz

0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz

0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Decay

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Ducking

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Range

–70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Hold

0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz

0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz

0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz

0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Decay

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

306 Appendix B: Specifications

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Comp Parameters

Compressor

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)

Out gain

0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)

Knee

Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Expander

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)

Out gain

0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step)

Knee

Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 points)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Compander H

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points)

Out gain

–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Width

1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Compander S

Threshold

–54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Ratio (x :1)

x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points)

Out gain

–18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step)

Width

1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step)

Attack

0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step)

Release

5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz

6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz

3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz

3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz

Controls 307

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Controls

Analog Section

Digital Section

INPUT 1–24

+48 V switch ON/OFF

PAD switch 0/26 dB

GAIN control –16 to –60 dB

INSERT switch ON/OFF

TALKBACK

TALKBACK LEVEL control

STUDIO MONITOR OUT

STUDIO LEVEL control

CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT

CONTROL ROOM LEVEL control

CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT SMALL

SMALL TRIM control

PHONES

PHONES LEVEL control

FADER MODE Section

MATRIX SELECT

DISPLAY button

MATRIX 1, MATRIX 2, MATRIX 3, MATRIX 4 buttons (w/LED)

AUX SELECT

DISPLAY button

AUX 1, AUX 2, AUX 3, AUX 4, AUX 5, AUX 6, AUX 7, AUX 8,

AUX 9, AUX 10, AUX 11, AUX 12 buttons (w/LED)

FADER MODE

FADER, AUX/MTRX button (w/LED)

ENCODER MODE

DISPLAY button

PAN, AUX/MTRX, ASSIGN 1, ASSIGN 2, ASSIGN 3, ASSIGN 4

buttons (w/LED)

DISPLAY CONTROL Section

DISPLAY buttons

DATA, DIO, SETUP, UTILITY, MIDI, REMOTE, METER, VIEW,

PAIR, GROUP, INPUT PATCH, OUTPUT PATCH

EFFECTS/PLUG-INS

DISPLAY access, π, †

INTERNAL EFFECTS, GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS, PLUG-INS,

CHANNEL INSERTS, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8

Parameter control: 1, 2, 3, 4

Others

√, F1, F2, F3, F4, ® buttons

LCD contrast control

308 Appendix B: Specifications

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

SELECTED CHANNEL Section

ROUTING

DISPLAY button

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, STEREO, DIRECT, FOLLOW PAN buttons

(w/LED)

PHASE/INSERT

DISPLAY button

ø, INSERT ON buttons (w/LED)

DELAY

DISPLAY button

ON button (w/LED)

TIME control

MIX/FB control (w/SW)

AUX/MATRIX SEND

DISPLAY, BANK button

ON button (w/LED) x 4

LEVEL control (w/SW) x 4

DYNAMICS

DISPLAY, GATE /COMP buttons

GATE ON, COMP ON buttons (w/LED)

Parameter control x 5

PAN/SURROUND

DISPLAY button

L, R, LINK, GRAB, EFFECT buttons (w/LED)

Pan control

Joystick (Sound image position control)

EQUALIZER

DISPLAY button

EQ ON button (w/LED)

ATT control, GAIN controls: LOW, LOW-MID, HIGH-MID,

HIGH

FREQUENCY/Q controls: LOW, LOW-MID, HIGH-MID, HIGH

controls (w/SW)

CH COPY/PASTE

COPY, PASTE buttons

MONITOR Section

MONITOR

DISPLAY button

STUDIO

CONTROL ROOM, STEREO, AUX 11, AUX 12 buttons

(w/LED)

SOLO

CLEAR button

SOLO CONTRAST control

CONTROL ROOM

STEREO: 2TR D1, 2TR D2, 2TR D3, 2TR A1, 2TR A2, STEREO,

ASSIGN 1, ASSIGN 2 buttons (w/LED)

SURROUND

BUS, ASSIGN 1, ASSIGN 2 buttons (w/LED)

Others

SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control

MONO, DIMMER, SMALL buttons (w/LED)

TALKBACK

SLATE, TALKBACK buttons (w/LED)

SCENE MEMORY, AUTOMIX and

USER DEFINED KEYS section

SCENE MEMORY

DISPLAY button

π, †, STORE, RECALL buttons

AUTOMIX

DISPLAY button

ENABLE, REC, ABORT/UNDO, AUTOREC, RETURN, RELATIVE,

TOUCH SENSE buttons (w/LED)

OVERWRITE parameters: FADER, ON, PAN, SURROUND, AUX,

AUX ON, EQ buttons (w/LED)

USER DEFINED KEYS

DISPLAY button

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 buttons

(w/LED)

Indicators 309

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Indicators

Analog Section

Digital Section

MACHINE CONTROL Section

TRACK ARMING

DISPLAY, ALL CLEAR buttons

1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19,

20, 21, 22, 23, 24, MASTER, TRACK ARMING GROUP: A, B, C,

D buttons (w/LED)

LOCATOR

DISPLAY button

LOCATE MEMORY: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, AUDITION, PRE, IN,

OUT, POST, SET, MTR, RETURN TO ZERO, END, ONLINE,

LOOP, QUICK PUNCH, ROLL BACK, REHEARSAL, MASTER but-

tons (w/LED)

TRANSPORT

CONTROL

REW, FF, STOP, PLAY, REC, SHUTTLE, SCRUB (w/LED)

CHANNEL STRIP Section

Encoders

x 24 (1–24)

Buttons

AUTO x 24 (1–24), SEL x 24 (1–24), SOLO x 24 (1–24), ON x

24 (1–24)

Faders (w/ touch

sense)

x 24 (1–24)

MASTER Section

LAYER

Input CH: 1–24, 25–48, 49–72, 73–96, MASTER, REMOTE 1,

REMOTE 2, REMOTE 3, REMOTE 4 buttons (w/LED)

STEREO

AUTO, SEL, ON buttons (w/LED)

Fader (w/touch sense) x 1

DATA ENTRY Section

Buttons

DISPLAY HISTORY: BACK, FORWARD, INC, DEC,

π, †, √,

, ENTER buttons

Encoder

Parameter wheel

PEAK LED

x24 INPUT 1–24

SIGNAL LED

x24 INPUT 1–24

DISPLAY CONTROL Section DISPLAY

320 × 240 dot graphic LCD (w/contrast control potentiometer)

SELECTED CHANNEL Section

DELAY

MIX, FB LEDs x2

AUX / MATRIX SEND

BANK LEDs x3

DYNAMICS

GATE, COMP LEDs x2

PAN/SURROUND

Pan position LEDs x10

EQUALIZER

FREQUENCY, Q LEDs 2 × 4

dB, Hz, kHz 3 × 4

3-digit numeric LEDs x4 (parameter value)

MONITOR Section SOLO

LED x1

SCENE MEMORY section Scene memory number

2-digit numeric LED x1

CHANNEL STRIP Section

CH NAME, routing,

panning position, EQ,

INS, DLY, COMP, GATE:

on/ off, touch sense

status, etc

2 color VFD (FL) units x3

310 Appendix B: Specifications

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Libraries

Effect library (EFFECT 1–8)

Presets 52 (EFFECT 3–8: 44)

User memories 76

Compressor library

Presets 36

User memories 92

Gate library

Presets 4

User memories 124

EQ library

Presets 40

User memories 160

Channel library

Presets 2

User memories 127

GEQ library (GEQ 1–6)

Presets 1

User memories 128

Surround Monitor library

Presets 1

User memories 32

Input patch library

Presets 1

User memories 32

Output patch library

Presets 1

User memories 32

Bus to Stereo library

Presets 1

User memories 32

Analog Input Spec 311

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Analog Input Spec

In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.

For 2TR IN ANALOG 2 levels, 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 Vrms.

All input AD converters (except INSERT IN 1–24) are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling.

+48 V DC (phantom power) is supplied to CH INPUT (1–24) XLR type connectors via individual switches.

Analog Output Spec

STEREO OUT [L, R], 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 Vrms.

In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms.

All output DA converters (except INSERT OUT 1–24) are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling.

Input PAD GAIN

Actual Load

Impedance

For Use With

Nominal

Input level

Connector

Sensitivity

1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dB (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit

is set to maximum gain. (All faders and level controls are maximum position.)

Nominal

Max.

before clip

INPUT A/B 1–24

–60 dB

3k Ω

50–600 Ω

Mics & 600 Ω

Lines

–70 dB

(0.245 mV)

–60 dB

(0.775 mV)

–46 dB

(3.88 mV)

A: XLR-3-31 type

(Balanced)

2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

–16 dB

–26 dB

(38.8 mV)

–16 dB

(0.123 V)

–2 dB

(616 mV)

B: Phone jack (TRS)

(Balanced)

3. Phone jacks are balanced (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND).

0dB

(775 mV)

+10 dB

(2.45 V)

+24 dB

(12.28 V)

INSERT IN 1–24

— 10K Ω 600 Ω Lines

–6dB

(388 mV)

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+18 dB

(6.16 V)

Phone jack (TRS)

(Balanced)

2TR IN ANALOG 1

[L, R]

— 10K Ω 600 Ω Lines

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+18 dB

(6.16 V)

Phone jack (TRS)

(Balanced)

2TR IN ANALOG 2

[L, R]

— 10K Ω 600 Ω Lines

–10 dBV

(0.316 V)

–10 dBV

(0.316 V)

+4 dBV

(1.58 V)

Phono

(Unbalanced)

Output

Actual Source

Impedance

For Use

With

Nominal

GAIN SW

1. The maximum output level of each OMNI OUT can be set internally.

Output level

Connector

Nominal

Max.

before clip

STEREO OUT [L, R]

600 Ω 10k Ω Lines —

–10 dBV

(0.316 V)

+4 dBV

(1.58 V)

Phono (Unbalanced)

150 Ω 600 Ω Lines —

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+18 dB

(6.16 V)

XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)

2. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

STUDIO MONITOR OUT

[L, R]

150 Ω 10k Ω Lines —

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+18 dB

(6.16 V)

Phone Jack (TRS)

(Balanced)

3. Phone jacks are balanced (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND).

C-R MONITOR OUT LARGE

[L, R]

150 Ω 600 Ω Lines —

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+18 dB

(6.16 V)

XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)

C-R MONITOR OUT SMALL

[L, R]

150 Ω 600 Ω Lines —

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+18 dB

(6.16 V)

XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)

OMNI OUT 1–8

150 Ω 10k Ω Lines

+18 dB

(default)

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+18 dB

(6.16 V)

Phone Jack (TRS)

(Balanced)

+4 dB

–10 dB

(0.245 V)

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

INSERT OUT 1–24

150 Ω 10k Ω Lines —

+4 dB

(1.23 V)

+18 dB

(6.16 V)

Phone Jack (TRS)

(Balanced)

PHONES

100 Ω

8 Ω Phones — 4 mW 25 mW

Stereo Phone Jack (TRS)

(Unbalanced)

4. PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND).

40 Ω Phones — 12 mW 75 mW

312 Appendix B: Specifications

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Digital Input Spec

Digital Output Spec

Input Format Data length Level Connector

2TR IN DIGITAL

AES/EBU 24-bit RS422

XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)

1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

AES/EBU 24-bit RS422

XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)

IEC-60958 24-bit 0.5 Vpp/75 Ω PHONO

CASCADE IN

——RS422

D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P

(Female)

Output Format Data length Level Connector

2TR OUT DIGITAL

AES/EBU

Professional use

1. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1, 2

Type: 2 audio channels

Emphasis: NO

Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration

24-bit

2. Dither: word length 16/20/24 bit

RS422

XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)

3. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

AES/EBU

Professional use

24-bit

RS422

XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)

IEC-60958

Consumer use

4. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 3

Type: 2 audio channels

Category code: 2 channel PCM encoder/decoder

Copy prohibit: NO

Emphasis: NO

Clock accuracy: Level II (1000 ppm)

Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration

24-bit

0.5V pp/75 Ω Phono

CASCADE OUT

——RS422

D-SUB Half Pitch Connec-

tor 68P (Female)

I/O Slot Spec 313

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

I/O Slot Spec

Each I/O SLOT accepts a digital interface card. Only SLOT #1 has a serial interface.

Control I/O Spec

Card Name Function Accept Input Output

Number of

available cards

MY8-AT

ADAT YES 8 IN

8 OUT (depends on output

patch)

1. See the Digital I/O chapter.

Details depend on each interface card.

MY8-TD

TASCAM YES 8 IN

8 OUT (depends on output

patch)

MY8-AE

AES/EBU YES 8 IN

8 OUT (depends on output

patch)

MY4-AD

ANALOG IN YES 4 IN — 6

MY8-AD

ANALOG IN YES 8 IN — 6

MY4-DA

ANALOG OUT YES —

4 OUT (depends on output

patch)

MY8-AD24

ANALOG IN YES 8 IN — 6

MY8-AD96

ANALOG IN YES 8 IN — 6

MY8-DA96

ANALOG OUT YES —

8 OUT (depends on output

patch)

MY8-AE96S

AES/EBU YES 8 IN

8 OUT (depends on output

patch)

MY8-AE96

AES/EBU YES 8 IN

8 OUT (depends on output

patch)

I/O Port Format Level Connector in Console

TO HOST

Serial

— RS422 Mini DIN Connector 8P

USB

USB 1.1 0 V–3.3 V B type USB connector

MIDI

MIDI — DIN Connector 5P

OUT

MIDI — DIN Connector 5P

THRU

MIDI — DIN Connector 5P

TIME CODE IN

MTC

MIDI — DIN Connector 5P

SMPTE

SMPTE Nominal –10 dB/10k Ω

XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)

1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD).

WORD CLOCK

—

TTL/75 Ω (ON/OFF)

2. This switch is on the rear panel.

BNC Connector

OUT 1, 2

— TTL/75 Ω BNC Connector

CONTROL

——D-SUB Connector 25P (Female)

REMOTE

— RS422 D-SUB Connector 9P (Male)

KEYBOARD

PS/2 — DIN Connector 6P

STORAGE CARD

——SmartMedia slot

METER

— RS422 D-SUB Connector 15P (Female)

314 Appendix B: Specifications

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Connector Pin Assignments

CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT

Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 GND 35 GND 1 GND 35 GND

2 INPUT 1-2(+) 36 INPUT 1-2(–) 2 OUTPUT 1-2(+) 36 OUTPUT 1-2(–)

3 INPUT 3-4(+) 37 INPUT 3-4(–) 3 OUTPUT 3-4(+) 37 OUTPUT 3-4(–)

4 INPUT 5-6(+) 38 INPUT 5-6(–) 4 OUTPUT 5-6(+) 38 OUTPUT 5-6(–)

5 INPUT 7-8(+) 39 INPUT 7-8(–) 5 OUTPUT 7-8(+) 39 OUTPUT 7-8(–)

6 INPUT 9-10(+) 40 INPUT 9-10(–) 6 OUTPUT 9-10(+) 40 OUTPUT 9-10(–)

7 INPUT 11-12(+) 41 INPUT 11-12(–) 7 OUTPUT 11-12(+) 41 OUTPUT 11-12(–)

8 INPUT 13-14(+) 42 INPUT 13-14(–) 8 OUTPUT 13-14(+) 42 OUTPUT 13-14(–)

9 INPUT 15-16(+) 43 INPUT 15-16(–) 9 OUTPUT 15-16(+) 43 OUTPUT 15-16(–)

10 DTR IN(+) 44 DTR IN(–) 10 DTR OUT(+) 44 DTR OUT(–)

11 RTS OUT(+) 45 RTS OUT(–) 11 RTS IN(+) 45 RTS IN(–)

12 GND 46 GND 12 GND 46 GND

13 WORD CLOCK IN(+) 47 WORD CLOCK IN(–) 13 WORD CLOCK OUT(+) 47 WORD CLOCK OUT(–)

14 WORD CLOCK OUT(+) 48 WORD CLOCK OUT(–) 14 WORD CLOCK IN(+) 48 WORD CLOCK IN(–)

15 CONTROL IN(+) 49 CONTROL IN(–) 15 CONTROL OUT(+) 49 CONTROL OUT(–)

16 CONTROL OUT(+) 50 CONTROL OUT(–) 16 CONTROL IN(+) 50 CONTROL IN(–)

17 GND 51 ID6 IN 17 GND 51 ID6 OUT

18 GND 52 ID6 OUT 18 GND 52 ID6 IN

19 INPUT 17-18(+) 53 INPUT 17-18(–) 19 OUTPUT 17-18(+) 53 OUTPUT 17-18(–)

20 INPUT 19-20(+) 54 INPUT 19-20(–) 20 OUTPUT 19-20(+) 54 OUTPUT 19-20(–)

21 INPUT 21-22(+) 55 INPUT 21-22(–) 21 OUTPUT 21-22(+) 55 OUTPUT 21-22(–)

22 INPUT 23-24(+) 56 INPUT 23-24(–) 22 OUTPUT 23-24(+) 56 OUTPUT 23-24(–)

23 RESERVED 57 RESERVED 23 RESERVED 57 RESERVED

24 RESERVED 58 RESERVED 24 RESERVED 58 RESERVED

25 RESERVED 59 RESERVED 25 RESERVED 59 RESERVED

26 RESERVED 60 RESERVED 26 RESERVED 60 RESERVED

27 ID0 IN 61 ID1 IN 27 ID0 OUT 61 ID1 OUT

28 ID2 IN 62 ID3 IN 28 ID2 OUT 62 ID3 OUT

29 ID4 IN 63 ID5 IN 29 ID4 OUT 63 ID5 OUT

30 ID0 OUT 64 ID1 OUT 30 ID0 IN 64 ID1 IN

31 ID2 OUT 65 ID3 OUT 31 ID2 IN 65 ID3 IN

32 ID4 OUT 66 ID5 OUT 32 ID4 IN 66 ID5 IN

33 MSB IN 67 2CH/LINE IN 33 MSB OUT 67 2CH/LINE OUT

34 FG 68 FG 34 FG 68 FG

Connector Pin Assignments 315

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

REMOTE Port

CONTROL Port

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 GND 6

RX+/GND

RX–/RX–

1. RS422 (for AD824)/SONY 9-pin protocol (P2).

RTS/RX+

TX–/TX+

CTS/TX–

TX+/GND

9 GND

5 N.C.

Pin Signal Pin Signal

1 GPO0 14 GPO1

2 GPO2 15 GPO3

3 GPO4 16 GPO5

4 GPO6 17 GPO7

5 GND 18 GND

6 GND 19 GND

7 GND 20 GND

8 GND 21 +5V

9 +5V 22 GPI0

10 GPI1 23 N.C.

11 N.C. 24

SOLO

SMODE

1. For 02R SOLO control.

MAS/SLV

SPARE

316 Appendix B: Specifications

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Dimensions

Speciﬁcations and external appearance subject to change without notice.

For European Model

Purchaser/User Information speciﬁed in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2.

Inrush Current: 31 A

Conformed Environment: E1, E2, E3 and E4

883.2 mm

820.8 mm

371 mm

247 mm

900 mm

968 mm

CH01 CH02 CH03 CH04 CH05 CH06 CH07 CH08 CH09 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24

ROUTING

STEREOFOLLOW PAN DIRECT

GATEON COMP ON

GATE

COMP

RANGE

RATIO

ATTAC K

DECAY

RELEASETHRESHOLD

THRESHOLD HOLD

LINK GRAB EFFECT

EVEN

EQUALIZER

CHANNEL

COPY

PASTE

EQ ON

ATT.

kHz

LOW

SELECTED CHANNEL

PHASE / INSERT

INSERT ON

AUX/MATRIX SEND

DELAY

TIME

MIX

LEVEL

AUX 1/MATRIX1

AUX 5

AUX 9

AUX 2/MATRIX2

AUX 6

AUX 10

AUX 3/MATRIX3

AUX 7

AUX 11

AUX 4/MATRIX4

AUX 8

AUX 12

DYNAM ICS

PAN/SURROUND

HIGH

BANK

GATE/ COMP

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

kHz

GAIN

FREQUENCY

TALKBACK LEVEL

PAD

12 13 14 15

910 21 22 23 24

18 19 2 0

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

PHONES

LEVEL

PHONES

STUDIO

LEVEL

010

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SOLO

SEL

AUTO

SEL

INC

STUDIO

CONTROL

ROOM

STEREO

AUX 11 AU X 12

CONTROL ROOM

SOLO

CLEAR

SOLO CONTRAST

2TR D1 2TR A1

2TR D2 2TR A2

2TRD3STEREO

ASSIGN 1 ASSI GN2

DIMMER

SMALL

MONO

SURROUND

MONITOR LEVEL

SLATE

TALKBACK

REMOTE1

REMOTE2

REMOTE3

REMOTE4

LAYER

STERE O

MONITOR

STEREO

REC

REW

FF STOP PL AY

AUTO

ENTER

CONTROL ROOM LEVEL

DEC

DATA DIO SETUP UTILITY

MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW

PAIR GROUP INPUT

PATCH

OUTPUT

PATCH

DISPLAY ACCESS

INTERNAL

EFFECTS

1234

5678

F1 F2 F3

1234

CARD

3.3V

CHANNEL

INSERTS

BUS

GRAPHIC

EQUALIZERS

TALKBACK

USER DEFINED KEYS

STORERECALL

SCENE MEM ORY

OVERWRITE

AUTOMIX

ABCD MASTERALLCLEAR

12 45678

910 12131415

21 22 23 2417 18 2019

TRACK ARMING

TRACK ARMING GROUP

BACK FORWARD

SHUTTLE

DISPLAY HISTORY

SCRUB

12345678

910111213141516

FADER ON

PAN

EQAUX AUX

ENABLE

REC ABORT/

UNDO

AUTO-

REC

RETURN

RELATIVE

TOUCH

SENSE

AUX 2AUX1 AUX 3 AUX 4

AUX 6AUX5 AUX 7

AUX 10AUX 9 AUX 11

AUX 8

AUX 12

AUX SELECT

AUX/ MTR X

FADER

PAN

ASSIGN 4ASSIGN 3

MATRIX SELECT

DISPLAY

MATRIX2 MATRIX 4MATRIX 3

SUSPEND WRITE TOUCH LATCH READ TRIM OFF

ASSIGN 2ASSIGN 1

PAN SENDLEVEL

INSERTSEND ASSIGNOUTPUTINPUT

MASTER

ODD

PLUG INS

EFFECTS /PLUG INS

87654321

MATRIX1

910111213141516 1718192021222324

87654321 910111213141516 1718192021222324

HIGH MIDLOW MID

124

25 48

49 72

73 96

010

STEREO

SURROUND

LOCATE MEMORY

LOCATOR

12345678

ONLINE

AUDITION

LOOP

MASTER

PRE POST

ROLL

BACK

IN OUT MTR

END QUICK

PUNCH

REHEARSAL

SET

RETURN

TO ZERO

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

OFF

26dB

-16

-60

GAIN

PEAK

SIGNAL

INSERT

SMALL

TRIM

0010

ENCODER MODE

FADER MODE

48V

100

SURROUND

10.04.001.00125

Scene Memory to Program Change Table 317

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Appendix C: MIDI

Scene Memory to Program Change Table

Program

Change #

Initial

Scene #

User

Scene #

Program

Change #

Initial

Scene #

User

Scene #

Program

Change#

Initial

Scene #

User

Scene #

101 44448787

202 45458888

303 46468989

404 47479090

505 48489191

606 49499292

707 50509393

808 51519494

909 52529595

10 10 53 53 96 96

11 11 54 54 97 97

12 12 55 55 98 98

13 13 56 56 99 99

14 14 57 57 100 00

15 15 58 58 101 —

16 16 59 59 102 —

17 17 60 60 103 —

18 18 61 61 104 —

19 19 62 62 105 —

20 20 63 63 106 —

21 21 64 64 107 —

22 22 65 65 108 —

23 23 66 66 109 —

24 24 67 67 110 —

25 25 68 68 111 —

26 26 69 69 112 —

27 27 70 70 113 —

28 28 71 71 114 —

29 29 72 72 115 —

30 30 73 73 116 —

31 31 74 74 117 —

32 32 75 75 118 —

33 33 76 76 119 —

34 34 77 77 120 —

35 35 78 78 121 —

36 36 79 79 122 —

37 37 80 80 123 —

38 38 81 81 124 —

39 39 82 82 125 —

40 40 83 83 126 —

41 41 84 84 127 —

42 42 85 85 128 —

43 43 86 86

318 Appendix C: MIDI

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Initial Parameter to Control Change Table

# High Mid Low

0 NO ASSIGN

1FADER H CHANNEL INPUT1

2FADER H CHANNEL INPUT2

3FADER H CHANNEL INPUT3

4FADER H CHANNEL INPUT4

5FADER H CHANNEL INPUT5

6FADER H CHANNEL INPUT6

7FADER H CHANNEL INPUT7

8FADER H CHANNEL INPUT8

9FADER H CHANNEL INPUT9

10 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT10

11 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT11

12 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT12

13 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT13

14 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT14

15 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT15

16 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT16

17 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT17

18 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT18

19 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT19

20 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT20

21 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT21

22 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT22

23 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT23

24 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT24

25 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT25

26 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT26

27 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT27

28 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT28

29 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT29

30 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT30

31 FADER H CHANNEL INPUT31

32 NO ASSIGN

33 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT1

34 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT2

35 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT3

36 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT4

37 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT5

38 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT6

39 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT7

40 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT8

41 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT9

42 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT10

43 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT11

44 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT12

45 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT13

46 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT14

47 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT15

48 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT16

49 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT17

50 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT18

51 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT19

52 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT20

53 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT21

54 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT22

55 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT23

56 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT24

57 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT25

58 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT26

59 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT27

60 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT28

61 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT29

62 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT30

63 FADER L CHANNEL INPUT31

64 ON CHANNEL INPUT1

65 ON CHANNEL INPUT2

66 ON CHANNEL INPUT3

67 ON CHANNEL INPUT4

68 ON CHANNEL INPUT5

69 ON CHANNEL INPUT6

70 ON CHANNEL INPUT7

71 ON CHANNEL INPUT8

72 ON CHANNEL INPUT9

73 ON CHANNEL INPUT10

74 ON CHANNEL INPUT11

75 ON CHANNEL INPUT12

76 ON CHANNEL INPUT13

77 ON CHANNEL INPUT14

78 ON CHANNEL INPUT15

79 ON CHANNEL INPUT16

80 ON CHANNEL INPUT17

81 ON CHANNEL INPUT18

82 ON CHANNEL INPUT19

83 ON CHANNEL INPUT20

84 ON CHANNEL INPUT21

85 ON CHANNEL INPUT22

86 ON CHANNEL INPUT23

87 ON CHANNEL INPUT24

88 ON CHANNEL INPUT25

89 PAN CHANNEL INPUT1

90 PAN CHANNEL INPUT2

91 PAN CHANNEL INPUT3

92 PAN CHANNEL INPUT4

93 PAN CHANNEL INPUT5

94 PAN CHANNEL INPUT6

95 PAN CHANNEL INPUT7

96 PAN CHANNEL INPUT8

97 PAN CHANNEL INPUT9

98 PAN CHANNEL INPUT10

99 PAN CHANNEL INPUT11

100 PAN CHANNEL INPUT12

101 PAN CHANNEL INPUT13

102 PAN CHANNEL INPUT14

103 PAN CHANNEL INPUT15

104 PAN CHANNEL INPUT16

105 PAN CHANNEL INPUT17

106 PAN CHANNEL INPUT18

107 PAN CHANNEL INPUT19

108 PAN CHANNEL INPUT20

109 PAN CHANNEL INPUT21

110 PAN CHANNEL INPUT22

111 PAN CHANNEL INPUT23

112 PAN CHANNEL INPUT24

113 PAN CHANNEL INPUT25

114 PAN CHANNEL INPUT1

115 PAN CHANNEL INPUT2

116 PAN CHANNEL INPUT3

117 PAN CHANNEL INPUT4

118 PAN CHANNEL INPUT5

119 PAN CHANNEL INPUT6

# High Mid Low

MIDI Data Format 319

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

MIDI Data Format

1. CHANNEL MESSAGE

2. SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE

3. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE

Received only when the Automix TIME REFERENCE setting is

MIDI CLOCK.

4. EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE

4.1 Real Time System Exclusive

4.2 System Exclusive Message

4.2.1 Bulk Dump

The following data types of bulk dump are used on the DM2000.

4.2.2 PARAMETER CHANGE

The following data types of parameter change are used by the DM2000.

4.2.3 Card Filer

** tx means that the data can be transmitted from the DM2000. rx means

that the data can be received by the DM2000.

Format Details

1. NOTE OFF (8n)

Reception

Received when the [Rx CH] matches.

Used to control effects.

2. NOTE ON (9n)

Reception

Received when the [Rx CH] matches.

Used to control effects.

3. CONTROL CHANGE (Bn)

Reception

Received when [Control Change Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches.

However if [OMNI] is ON, this is received regardless of the channel. If

[Control Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed to MIDI OUT.

If [TABLE] is selected, parameters will be controlled according to the set-

tings of the [Control assign table]. The parameters that can be set are de-

fined in the CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN PARAMETER LIST. If

[NRPN] is selected, four messages are used to control the defined param-

eter: NRPN control numbers (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control num-

bers (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the CONTROL

CHANGE ASSIGN PARAMETER LIST.

Transmission

If [TABLE] is selected, operating the parameters specified in the [Control

assign table] will cause these messages to be transmitted on the [Tx CH] if

[Control Change TX] is ON. The parameters that can be specified are de-

fined in the CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN PARAMETER LIST.

If [NRPN] is selected, operating the specified parameters will cause data to

be transmitted on the [Tx CH] if [Control Change TX] is ON, using four

messages: NRPN control numbers (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control

numbers (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the CONTROL

CHANGE ASSIGN PARAMETER LIST.

Command rx/tx function

8n NOTE OFF rx Control the internal effects

9n NOTE ON rx Control the internal effects

Bn CONTROL CHANGE rx/tx Control parameters

Cn PROGRAM CHANGE rx/tx Switch scene memories

Command rx/tx function

F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER

FRAME

rx Used when TIME REFERENCE is

MIDI CLOCK.

F2 SONG POSITION POINTER rx Used when TIME REFERENCE is

MIDI CLOCK.

Command rx/tx function

F8 TIMING CLOCK rx MIDI clock

FA START rx* Start automix (from the

beginning)

FB CONTINUE rx* Start automix (from the

middle)

FC STOP rx* Stop automix

FE ACTIVE SENSING rx Check MIDI cable connections

FF RESET rx Clear running status

Command rx/tx function

F0 7F dd 06 MMC COMMAND tx MMC command (refer to

MMC speciﬁcation)

F0 7F dd 07 MMC RESPONSE rx MMC response (refer to MMC

speciﬁcation)

F0 7F dd 01 MIDI TIME CODE rx Used when TIME REFERENCE is

MTC.

Command rx/tx function

F0 43 0n 7E BULK DUMP DATA rx/tx BULK DUMP DATA

F0 43 2n 7E BULK DUMP REQUEST rx/tx BULK DUMP REQUEST

Data name tx/rx function

'm' tx/rx Scene Memory & Request

'S' tx/rx Setup Memory & Request

'a' tx/rx Automix data & Request

'R' tx/rx Input patch library & Request

'O' tx/rx Output patch library & Request

'H' tx/rx Channel library & Request

'G' tx/rx Gate library & Request

'Y' tx/rx Compressor library & Request

'Q' tx/rx Equalizer library & Request

'E' tx/rx Effect library & Request

'F' tx/rx GEQ library & Request

'J' tx/rx Bus to Stereo library & Request

'K' tx/rx Surround Monitor library & Request

'P' tx/rx Program change table & Request

'C' tx/rx Control change table & Request

'L' tx/rx User deﬁne layer & Request

'I' tx/rx Plug-in User deﬁne & Request

'V' tx/rx User deﬁne key & Request

'N' tx/rx Plug-in Effect Card Data & Request

Command rx/tx function

F0 43 1n 3E 06 PARAMETER

CHANGE

rx/tx DM2000-speciﬁc parameter

change

F0 43 3n 3E 06 PARAMETER

REQUEST

rx/tx DM2000-speciﬁc parameter

request

F0 43 1n 3E 7F PARAMETER

CHANGE

rx/tx General purpose digital mixer

parameter change

F0 43 3n 3E 7F PARAMETER

REQUEST

rx/tx General purpose digital mixer

parameter request

Type tx/rx function

1 tx/rx Edit buffer

2 tx/rx Patch data

3 tx/rx Setup data

4 tx/rx Backup data

16 tx/rx Function (recall, store, title, pair)

32 tx/rx Key remote

33 tx/rx remote meter

34 tx/rx remote counter

Command rx/tx Function

F0 43 5n CARD FILER rx/tx Packet for card ﬁler (refer to

Card Filer speciﬁcation)

STATUS 1000nnnn 8n

Note off message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note number

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity (ignored)

STATUS 1001nnnn 9n

Note on message

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Note number

0vvvvvvv vv

Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off)

320 Appendix C: MIDI

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

If [TABLE] is selected

If [NRPN] is selected

*1) There is no particular need to add the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th status

for transmission. However if these are present during recep-

tion, they should be received.

*2) Does not need to be transmitted if the parameter data fits

within 7 bits.

4. PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn)

Reception

This message is received if [Program Change RX] is ON and [Rx CH]

matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, this is received regardless of the chan-

nel.

A scene memory will be recalled according to the settings of the [Program

Change Table].

This message will be echoed if [Program Change ECHO] is ON.

Transmission

If [Program Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted according to

the settings of the [Program Change Table] on the [Tx CH] channel when

a scene memory is recalled.

If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number,

the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted. Transmission

to Studio Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed

since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Pa-

rameter Changes will always be used.)

5. SONG POSITION POINTER (F2)

Reception

If this is received when the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI

CLOCK, the automix will move to the song position that was received.

6. TIMING CLOCK (F8)

Reception

If the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, this message

is used to synchronize automix. It is also used to control effects. This mes-

sage is transmitted 24 times per quarter note.

7. START (FA)

Reception

This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI

CLOCK, and will start the automix. In actuality, automix will start when

the next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the START message.

8. CONTINUE (FB)

Reception

This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI

CLOCK, and will cause automix to start from the current song position. In

actuality, automix will start when the next TIMING CLOCK is received af-

ter receiving the CONTINUE message.

9. STOP (FC)

Reception

This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI

CLOCK, and will cause automix to stop.

10. ACTIVE SENSING (FE)

Reception

Once this message has been received, the failure to receive any message for

an interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initial-

ized, such as by clearing the Running Status.

11. SYSTEM RESET (FF)

Reception

When this message is received, MIDI communications will be cleared, e.g.,

by clearing the Running Status.

12. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0)

12.1 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL (MMC)

These messages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the

DM2000 is operated. For details, refer to the MMC specification.

12.2 BULK DUMP

This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored

within the DM2000.

The basic format is as follows.

For DUMP DATA

For DUMP REQUEST

A unique header (Model ID) is used to determine whether the device is a

DM2000.

CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT

(LOW) and end before CHECK SUM, taking the binary compliment of

this sum, and then setting bit 7 to 0.

Reception

This message is received if [Bulk RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the

device number included in the SUB STATUS.

When a bulk dump is received, it is immediately written into the specified

memory.

When a bulk dump request is received, a bulk dump is immediately trans-

mitted.

Transmission

This message is transmitted on the [Tx CH] by key operations in the [MI-

DI]-[BULK DUMP] screen.

A bulk dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] in response to a bulk dump

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 0ccccccc cc

Control number (0-95, 102-119)

0vvvvvvv vv

Control value (0-127)

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change

DATA 01100010 62

NRPN LSB

0vvvvvvv vv

LSB of parameter number

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *1

DATA 01100011 63

NRPN MSB

0vvvvvvv vv

MSB of parameter number

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *1

DATA 00100110 26

LSB of data entry

0vvvvvvv vv

LSB of parameter data

STATUS 1011nnnn Bn

Control change *1, *2

DATA 00000110 06

MSB of data entry *2

0vvvvvvv vv

MSB of parameter data *2

STATUS 1100nnnn Cn

Program change

DATA 0nnnnnnn nn

Program number (0-127)

STATUS 11110010 F2

Song position pointer

DATA 0vvvvvvv vv

Song position LSB

0vvvvvvv vv

Song position MSB

STATUS 11111000 F8

Timing clock

STATUS 11111010 FA

Start

STATUS 11111011 FB

Continue

STATUS 11111100 FC

Stop

STATUS 11111101 FE

Active sensing

STATUS 11111111 FF

System reset

F0 43 0n 7E cc cc <Model ID> tt mm mm [Data ...]

cs F7

F0 43 2n 7E <Model ID> tt mm mm F7

Device Number

cc cc

DATA COUNT (the number of bytes that follow this, ending

before the checksum)

Model ID (for the DM2000, this is 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31

32)

DATA TYPE

mm mm

DATA NUMBER

CHECK SUM

CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F

Format Details 321

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

request.

The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8-bit data into eight

words of 7-bit data.

[Conversion from actual data into bulk data]

d[0~6]: actual data

b[0~7]: bulk data

b[0] = 0;

for( I=0; I<7; I++){

if( d[I]&0x80){

b[0] |= 1<<(6-I);

}

b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F;

}

[Restoration from bulk data into actual data]

d[0~6]: actual data

b[0~7]: bulk data

for( I=0; I<7; I++){

b[0] <<= 1;

d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]);

}

12.2.1 Scene memory bulk dump format

The DM2000 can transmit and receive scene memories in compressed

form.

12.2.2 Scene memory bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the scene number

that is being requested. If this is 256, the data of the edit buffer will be

bulk-dumped.

12.2.3 Setup memory bulk dump format

Of the setup memory of the DM2000, this bulk-dumps data other than the

User define layer, User define plug-in, User define keys, Control change ta-

ble, and Program change table.

12.2.4 Setup memory bulk dump request format

12.2.5 User deﬁne layer bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank num-

ber.

Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)

change if the same bank is being used.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01101101 6D

'm'

0mmmmmmm mh

m=0-99, 256(Scene0-99, EDIT BUFFER)

0mmmmmmm ml

Receive is effective 1-99, 256

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Scene data of block[mm]

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01101101 6D

'm'

0mmmmmmm mh

m=0-99, 256(Scene0-99, EDIT BUFFER)

0mmmmmmm ml

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01010011 53

'S'

00000010 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Setup memory data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01010011 53

'S'

00000010 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

322 Appendix C: MIDI

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

12.2.6 User deﬁne layer bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank num-

ber.

12.2.7 User deﬁne plug-in bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank num-

ber.

Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)

change if the same bank is being used.

12.2.8 User deﬁne plug-in bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank num-

ber.

12.2.9 User Deﬁne Key bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank num-

ber.

Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases)

change if the same bank is being used.

12.2.10 User Deﬁne Key bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank num-

ber.

12.2.11 Control change table bulk dump format

DATA NAME 01001100 4C

'L'

00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-3(bank no.1-4)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

User deﬁne layer

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01001100 4C

'L'

00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-3(bank no.1-4)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01001001 49

'I'

00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-7(bank no.1-8)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

User deﬁne plug-in data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01001001 49

'I'

00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-7(bank no.1-8)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH cccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW cccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01010110 56

'V'

00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-3(bank no.A-D)

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

User deﬁne key data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01010110 56

'V'

BANK No. 00000000 00

0bbbbbbb bb

b=0-3(bank no.A-D)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

Format Details 323

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

12.2.12 Control change table bulk dump request

format

12.2.13 Program change table bulk dump format

12.2.14 Program change table bulk dump request

format

12.2.15 Equalizer library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank num-

ber.

0:Library no.1 - 199:Library no.200, 256:CH1 - 351:CH96, 384:BUS1 -

391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 - 523:AUX12, 640:MATRIX1L - 647:MATRIX4R,

768:STEREO L - 769:STEREO R

256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buff-

er.

For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (40-199, 256-)

12.2.16 Equalizer library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank num-

ber. (See above)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 00000011 ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 00010010 cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01000011 43

'C'

00000000 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Control change table data

(342/7)*8+(342%7)+1=391bytes→

unﬁxed

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01000011 43

'C'

00000000 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01010000 50

'P'

00000000 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Program change table data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01010000 50

'P'

00000000 02

00000000 00

No.256 = Current

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01010001 51

'Q'

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bb

0-199(EQ Library no.1-200),

256-(channel current data)

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bb

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

EQ Library data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

324 Appendix C: MIDI

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

12.2.17 Compressor library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.1 - 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 - 351:CH96, 384:BUS1 -

391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 - 523:AUX12, 640:MATRIX1L - 647:MATRIX4R,

768:STEREO L - 769:STEREO R

256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buff-

er.

For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (36-127, 256-)

12.2.18 Compressor library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber. (See above)

12.2.19 Gate library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.1 - 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 - 351:CH96

256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buff-

er.

For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (4-127, 256-)

12.2.20 Gate library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber. (See above)

12.2.21 Effect library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.1 - 127:Library no.128, 256:EFFECT1 - 263:EFFEC8

256-263 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer.

For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (52-127,

256-263)

DATA NAME 01010001 51

'Q'

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bb

0-199(EQ Library no.1-200),

256-(channel current data)

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bb

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01011001 59

'Y'

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bb

0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),

256-(channel current data)

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bb

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

COMP Library data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01011001 59

'Y'

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bb

0-127(COMP Library no.1-128),

256-(channel current data)

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bb

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI

Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01000111 47

'G'

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bh

0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),

256-351(channel current data)

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

GATE Library data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01000111 47

'G'

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bh

0-127(GATE Library no.1-128),

256-351(channel current data)

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01000110 46

'E'

Format Details 325

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

12.2.22 Effect library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber. (See above)

12.2.23 GEQ library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.0 - 128:Library no.128, 256:GEQ1 - 261:GEQ6

256-261 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer.

For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (1-128, 256-261)

12.2.24 GEQ library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber. (See above)

12.2.25 Channel library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.0 - 128:Library no.128,

256:CH1 - 351:CH96, 384:BUS1 - 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 - 523:AUX12,

640:MATRIX1L - 647:MATRIX4R, 768:STEREO L - 769:STEREO R

256 and following are the data for the corresponding channel of the edit

buffer.

For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (2-128, 256-)

12.2.26 Channel library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber. (See above)

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bh

0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),

256-263(Effect1-8 current)

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Effect Library data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01000110 46

'E'

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bh

0-127(Effect Library no.1-128),

256-263(Effect1-8 current)

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01000111 47

'F'

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bh

0-128(GEQ Library no.0-128),

256-261(GEQ1-6 Current)

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

GEQ Library data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01000111 47

'F'

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bh

0-128(GEQ Library no.0-128),

256-261(GEQ1-6 current)

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01001001 49

'H'

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bh

0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),

256-(current)

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

channel Library data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01001001 49

'H'

LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bh

0-128(Channel Library no.0-128),

256-(current)

326 Appendix C: MIDI

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

12.2.27 Input patch library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current input patch data

For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256)

12.2.28 Input patch library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current input patch data

12.2.29 Output patch library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current output patch data

For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256)

12.2.30 Output patch library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current output patch data

12.2.31 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current data

For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid.

LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01010010 52

'R'

0bbbbbbb bh

0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current

data)

0bbbbbbb bl

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Input Patch Library data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01010010 52

'R'

0bbbbbbb bh

0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current

data)

0bbbbbbb bl

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01001111 4F

'O'

0bbbbbbb bh

0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current

data)

00100000 bl

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Input Patch Library data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01001111 4F

'O'

0bbbbbbb bh

0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current

data)

0bbbbbbb bl

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01001010 4A

'J'

0bbbbbbb bh

0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current

data)

0bbbbbbb bl

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Input Patch Library data

0ddddddd de

Format Details 327

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

12.2.32 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump request format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current data

12.2.33 Surround Monitor library bulk dump format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current data

For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256)

12.2.34 Surround Monitor library bulk dump request

format

The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library num-

ber.

0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current data

12.2.35 Plug-in effect card bulk dump format

The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the slot number.

0:SLOT 1 - 5:SLOT 6

The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different

than the card that is installed in the slot.

The data is not transmitted if a valid plug-in effect card is not installed.

12.2.36 Plug-in effect card bulk dump request format

The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the library number.

0:SLOT 1 - 5:SLOT 6

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01001010 4A

'J'

0bbbbbbb bh

0-32 (Library no.0-32), 256 (Current

data)

0bbbbbbb bl

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01001011 4B

'K'

0bbbbbbb bh

0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current

data)

0bbbbbbb bl

BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt

total block number(minimum number

is 0)

0bbbbbbb bb

current block number(0-total block

number)

DATA 0ddddddd ds

Input Patch Library data

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01001011 4B

'K'

0bbbbbbb bh

0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current

data)

0bbbbbbb bl

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc ch

data count = ch * 128 + cl

COUNT LOW 0ccccccc cl

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01000001 41

'N'

0mmmmmmm mh

0-5 (SLOT1-6)

0mmmmmmm ml

DATA 0xxxxxxx xh

block count (High)

0xxxxxxx xl

block count (Low)

0yyyyyyy yh

total size (High)

0yyyyyyy yl

total size (Low)

0000iiii

Developer id (High)

0000iiii

Developer id (Low)

0000jjjj

Product id (High)

0000jjjj

Product id (Low)

0ddddddd ds

Plug-in Effect card memory data

(1024/7)*8+(1024%7)+1=1171bytes

0ddddddd de

CHECK SUM 0eeeeeee ee

ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

FORMAT No. 01111110 7E

Universal bulk dump

01001100 4C

'L'

01001101 4D

'M'

00100000 20

' '

00100000 20

' '

00111000 38

'8'

01000011 43

'C'

00110001 31

'1'

00110010 32

'2'

DATA NAME 01000001 41

'A'

0mmmmmmm mm

0-5 (SLOT1-6)

0mmmmmmm ml

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

328 Appendix C: MIDI

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

12.3 PARAMETER CHANGE

12.3.1 Parameter change basic format

For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size

will be transmitted.

12.3.2 Parameter Change basic format (Universal

format)

For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size

will be transmitted.

12.3.3 Parameter request basic format

12.3.4 Parameter request basic format (Universal

format)

12.3.5 Parameter Address

Consult your dealer for parameter address details.

12.3.6 Parameter change (Edit buffer)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.

Transmission

If [Parameter change TX] is ON and a parameter not specified in the

[Control assign table] is modified, this message will be transmitted with

the device number specified by the [Tx CH].

12.3.7 Parameter request (Edit buffer)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmit-

ted as a Parameter Change.

12.3.8 Parameter change (Patch data)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled.

12.3.9 Parameter request (Patch data)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmit-

ted as a Parameter Change.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 0ttttttt tt

Data type

0eeeeeee ee

Element No.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two

bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

DATA *) 0ddddddd dd

Data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 0ttttttt tt

Data type

0eeeeeee ee

Element No.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two

bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

DATA *) 0ddddddd dd

Data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 0ttttttt tt

Data type

0eeeeeee ee

Element No.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two

bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 0ttttttt tt

Data type

0eeeeeee ee

Element No.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two

bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00000001 01

Edit Buffer

0eeeeeee ee

Element No.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two

bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

DATA 0ddddddd dd

Data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 01111111 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00000001 01

Edit Buffer

0eeeeeee ee

Element No.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two

bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00000010 02

Patch data

0eeeeeee ee

Element No.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two

bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

DATA 0ddddddd dd

Data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

Format Details 329

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

12.3.10 Parameter change (Setup memory)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be con-

trolled.

12.3.11 Parameter request (Setup memory)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmit-

ted as a Parameter Change.

12.3.12 Parameter change (Backup memory)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be con-

trolled.

12.3.13 Parameter request (Backup memory)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmit-

ted as a Parameter Change.

12.3.14 Parameter change (Function call Library:

store/recall)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the specified memory/library will be stored/recalled.

Transmission

If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted

without change.

*1) 0:CH1 - 95:CH96, 128:BUS1 - 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 -

267:AUX12, 384:MATRIX1L - 391:MATRIX4R, 512:STEREO L

- 513:STEREO R

Use 256 if the recall destination or store source is a single data

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00000010 02

Patch data

0eeeeeee ee

Element No.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two

bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00000011 03

Setup memory

0eeeeeee ee

Element No.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two

bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

DATA 0ddddddd dd

Data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00000011 03

Setup memory

0eeeeeee ee

Element No.

(If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two

bytes)

0ppppppp pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00000100 04

Backup memory

0aaaaaaa ee

Element No.

0aaaaaaa pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

DATA 0ddddddd dd

Data

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00000100 04

Backup memory

0aaaaaaa ee

Element No.

0aaaaaaa pp

Parameter No.

0ccccccc cc

Channel No.

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010000 10

Address UU

00ffffff ff

Address UL (function)

0aaaaaaa aa

Address LU (number H)

0aaaaaaa aa

Address LL (number L)

DATA 0ddddddd dd

channel High

0ddddddd dd

channel Low

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function number channel*1) tx/rx

SCENE RECALL 0x00 0-99 256 tx*2)/r

EQ LIB RECALL 0x01 1-200 0-513 tx/rx

GATE LIB RECALL 0x02 1-128 0-95 tx/rx

COMP LIB RECALL 0x03 1-128 0-513 tx/rx

EFF LIB RECALL 0x04 1-128 0-7 tx/rx

GEQ LIB RECALL 0x05 0-128 0-5 tx/rx

CHANNEL LIB RECALL 0x06 0-128 0-513 tx/rx

INPATCH LIB RECALL 0x07 0-32 256 tx/rx

OUTPATCH LIB RECALL 0x08 0-32 256 tx/rx

Bus to Stereo LIB RECALL 0x09 0-32 256 tx/rx

Surround Monitor LIB RECALL 0x0A 0-32 256 tx/rx

AUTOMIX LIB RECALL 0x0B 1-16 256 tx/rx

SCENE STORE 0x20 1-99 256, 16383 tx/rx

EQ LIB STORE 0x21 41-200 0-513, 16383 tx/rx

GATE LIB STORE 0x22 5-128 0-96, 16383 tx/rx

COMP LIB STORE 0x23 37-128 0-513, 16383 tx/rx

EFF LIB STORE 0x24 53-128 0-7, 16383 tx/rx

GEQ LIB STORE 0x25 1-128 0-5, 16383 tx/rx

CHANNEL LIB STORE 0x26 3-128 0-513, 16383 tx/rx

INPATCH LIB STORE 0x27 1-32 256, 16383 tx/rx

OUTPATCH LIB STORE 0x28 1-32 256, 16383 tx/rx

Bus to Stereo LIB STORE 0x29 1-32 256, 16383 tx/rx

Surround Monitor LIB STORE 0x2A 1-32 256, 16383 tx/rx

AUTOMIX LIB STORE 0x2B 1-32 256, 16383 tx/rx

330 Appendix C: MIDI

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

item.

Effect is 0:Effect 1–7:Effect 8, GEQ is 0:GEQ1–5:GEQ6

If the store destination is 16383 (0x3FFF), this indicates that

the library data has been changed by a external cause (i.e.,

loading from SmartMedia)

(only transmitted by the DM2000)

*2) This is also transmitted when a program that has not been

assigned to the [Program change table] is recalled.

(Normally this would be transmitted as a program change

message.)

12.3.15 Parameter change (Function call: title)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be

changed

Transmission

In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted

on the [Rx CH].

If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted

without change.

12.3.16 Parameter request (Function call: title)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on

the [Rx CH].

Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers.

12.3.17 Parameter change (Function call: Scene/Library

Clear)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the specified memory/library will be stored/recalled.

Transmission

If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted

without change.

12.3.18 Parameter change (Function call: pair, copy)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Param-

eter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, pairing will be enabled/disabled for the specified

channel. (Items other than PAIR are reserved for future use.)

*1)0:CH1 - 95:CH96, 128:BUS1 - 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 -

267:AUX12, 384:MATRIX1L - 391:MATRIX4R, 512:STEREO L

- 513:STEREO R

Effect is 0:Effect 1–7:Effect 8, GEQ is 0:GEQ1–5:GEQ6

In the case of PAIR, you must specify channels for which pair-

ing is possible.

In the case of PAIR ON with COPY, you must specify Source

Channel as the copy source, and Destination Channel as the

copy destination.

12.3.19 Parameter change (Function call Event: Effect)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010000 10

Function call Library

0100aaaa 4a

Address UL (function)

0nnnnnnn nn

Address LU (number H)

0nnnnnnn nn

Address LL (number L)

DATA 0ddddddd dd

title 1

: :

0ddddddd dd

title x(depend on the library)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function number size

SCENE LIB TITLE 0x40 0-99, 256(0:response

only)

EQ LIB TITLE 0x41 1-200(1-40:response only) 16

GATE LIB TITLE 0x42 1-128(1-4:response only) 16

COMP LIB TITLE 0x43 1-128(1-36:response only) 16

EFF LIB TITLE 0x44 1-128(1-52:response only) 16

GEQ LIB TITLE 0x45 0-128(0:response only) 16

CHANNEL LIB TITLE 0x46 0-128(0-1:response only) 16

INPATCH LIB TITLE 0x47 0-32(0:response only) 16

OUTPATCH LIB TITLE 0x48 0-32(0:response only) 16

Bus to Stereo LIB TITLE 0x49 0-32(0:response only) 16

Surround Monitor LIB TITLE 0x4A 0-32(0:response only) 16

AUTOMIX LIB TITLE 0x4B 1-16 16

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010000 10

Function call Library

0100aaaa 4a

Address UL (function)

0nnnnnnn nn

Address LU (number H)

0nnnnnnn nn

Address LL (number L)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010000 10

Function call Library

0110aaaa 6a

Address UL (function)

0nnnnnnn nn

Address LU (number H)

0nnnnnnn nn

Address LL (number L)

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function number

SCENE LIB CLEAR 0x60 1-99

EQ LIB CLEAR 0x61 41-200

GATE LIB CLEAR 0x62 5-128

COMP LIB CLEAR 0x63 37-128

EFF LIB CLEAR 0x64 1-128

GEQ LIB CLEAR 0x65 0-128

CHANNEL LIB CLEAR 0x66 2-128

INPATCH LIB CLEAR 0x67 0-32

OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR 0x68 0-32

Bus to Stereo LIB CLEAR 0x69 0-32

Surround Monitor LIB CLEAR 0x6A 0-32

AUTOMIX LIB CLEAR 0x6B 1-16

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010001 11

Function call Pair

0000aaaa 0a

Function

DATA 0ddddddd dd

Source channel number H

0ddddddd dd

Source channel number L

0ddddddd dd

Destination channel number H

0ddddddd dd

Destination channel number L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function Channel

PAIR ON with COPY 0x00 *1)

PAIR ON with RESET BOTH 0x01 *1)

PAIR OFF 0x02 *1)

Format Details 331

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

When this is received, the corresponding effect’s function activates (de-

pending on the effect type).

• This does not activate when the effect type is different.

12.3.20 Parameter change (Key remote)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the same processing that is executed when the key

specified by Address is pressed (released). (Refer to the PARAMETER

CHANGE PARAMETER NUMBER LIST.)

Transmission

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

12.3.21 Parameter change (Remote Meter)

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter, the

specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds.

When you want to transmit meter information continuously, a Request

must be transmitted continuously within every 10 seconds.

Reception

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

Transmission

When transmission has been enabled by a Request, the parameter specified

by Address (see PARAMETER CHANGE PARAMETER NUMBER LIST)

will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at 50 msec intervals for a du-

ration of 10 seconds.

Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if

the PORT setting is changed.

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

Meter data uses the unmodified DECAY value of the DSP. For the inter-

pretation of the value, refer to the PARAMETER CHANGE PARAMETER

NUMBER LIST.

12.3.22 Parameter request (Remote Meter)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the parameter specified by Address (refer to PA-

RAMETER CHANGE PARAMETER NUMBER LIST) will be transmitted

on the [Rx CH] at 50 msec intervals for a duration of 10 seconds.

If Address UL= 0x7F is received, transmission of all meter data will be halt-

ed immediately. (disable)

Transmission

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

12.3.23 Parameter change (Remote Time Counter)

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time

Counter, the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 sec-

onds. When you want to transmit Counter information continuously, a

Request must be transmitted within every 10 seconds.

Reception

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

Transmission

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request, the Time Counter

information is transmitted on [RxCH] channel every 50 msec for 10 sec-

onds.

Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if

the PORT setting is changed.

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

12.3.24 Parameter request (Remote Time Counter)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When this is received, the Time Counter information is transmitted on the

[Rx CH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds.

When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission

will be halted immediately.

Transmission

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 7F

Universal

ADDRESS 00010010 12

Function call Event

0000aaaa 0a

Function

DATA 00000000 00

0ddddddd dd

Release:0, Press:1

00000000 00

0ddddddd dd

Destination Effect Number 0 - 7

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

function Channel

Freeze Play button 0x00 0:Effect1-7:Effect8

Freeze Record button 0x01 0:Effect1-7:Effect8

Auto Pan 5.1 Trigger Button 0x02 0:Effect1-1:Effect2

Auto Pan 5.1 Reset Button 0x03 0:Effect1-1:Effect2

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00100000 20

Address UU

0aaaaaaa aa

Address UL

0aaaaaaa aa

Address LU

0aaaaaaa aa

Address LL

DATA 0ddddddd dd

0:press, 1:release

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00100001 21

Address UU

0aaaaaaa aa

Address UL

0aaaaaaa aa

Address LU

0aaaaaaa aa

Address LL

DATA 0ddddddd dd

Data1 H

0ddddddd dd

Data1 L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00100001 21

Address UU

0aaaaaaa aa

Address UL

0aaaaaaa aa

Address LU

0aaaaaaa aa

Address LL

DATA 0cccccccccc

Count H

0ccccccccCc

Count L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00100001 22

Remote Time Counter

0000tttt 0t

0:Time Code, 1: Measure, Beat, Clock

DATA 0ddddddd dd

Hour / Measure H

0ddddddd dd

Min / Measure L

0ddddddd dd

Sec / Beat

0ddddddd dd

Frame / Clock

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

332 Appendix C: MIDI

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

change.

12.3.25 Parameter change (Automix Status)

When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Automix status,

the Automix Status data is transmitted every second for 10 seconds. When

you want to transmit the Automix Status information continuously, the

Request must be transmitted continuously minimum within 10 seconds

interval. The data is transmitted continuously while the transmission is en-

abled, even when the Automix Status on the DM2000 has been changed.

Reception

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

Transmission

When the transmission is set to enable by receiving a Request. The Auto-

mix Status data is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel every second for 10

seconds. The data is transmitted continuously while the transmission is

enabled, even when the Automix Status on the DM2000 has been changed.

Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if

the PORT setting is changed.

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

12.3.26 Parameter request (Automix Status)

Reception

This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches

the device number included in the SUB STATUS.

This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON.

When the data is received, the Automix Status data is transmitted on the

[Rx CH] every second for 10 seconds.

When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission

will be halted immediately (disable).

Transmission

If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without

change.

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00100001 22

Remote Time Counter

0aaaaaaa aa

0:Transmission request,

0x7F:Transmission stop request

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0001nnnn 1n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00100011 23

Automix Status

00000000 00

DATA 0000dddd 0d

Automix Status H

0000dddd 0d

Automix Status L

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

STATUS 11110000 F0

System exclusive message

ID No. 01000011 43

Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA)

SUB STATUS 0011nnnn 3n

n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel)

GROUP ID 00111110 3E

MODEL ID (digital mixer)

MODEL ID 00000110 06

DM2000

ADDRESS 00100011 23

Automix Status

0aaaaaaa aa

0:Transmission request,

0x7F:Transmission stop request

EOX 11110111 F7

End of exclusive

MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge 333

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Appendix D: Options

MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge

Installation

1 Attach the brackets to the meter bridge.

2 Screw the four ﬁxing screws into the DM2000, but don’t tighten them fully.

3 Align the meter bridge with the four screws, and then tighten the screws.

4 Connect the meter bridge cable to the DM2000’s METER port.

334 Appendix D: Options

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Meter Bridge Controls

Channel indicators

These indicators show which channels are currently being

metered: Input Channels 1–24, 25–48, 49–72, 73–96, or the Out-

put Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Sends 1–12, Matrix Sends 1–4).

B INPUT METERING POSITION button & indicators

This button is used to set the metering position for Input Channels

to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. It works in unison with the

PRE EQ, PRE FADER, and POST FADER buttons for Input

Channels on the Meter pages. The indicators show the current set-

ting.

C OUTPUT METERING POSITION button & indicators

This button is used to set the metering position for Output Chan-

nels to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. It works in unison with

the PRE EQ, PRE FADER, and POST FADER buttons for Output

Channels on the Meter pages. The indicators show the current set-

ting.

D PEAK HOLD button

This button is used to turn the Peak Hold function on and off. Its

indicator lights up when Peak Hold is on. It works in unison with

the PEAK HOLD buttons on the Meter pages.

E LAYER buttons

These button are used to select Layers for metering. The button

indicator for the currently selected Layer lights up. The [1–24],

[25–48], [49–72], and [73–96] buttons select the Input Layers.

The [MASTER] button selects the Master Layer. The REMOTE

[1–4] buttons select the Remote Layers. If the Meter Follow Layer

preference is on (see page 235), these Layers are selected automat-

ically when the LAYER buttons on the DM2000 are pressed.

The [1–48] button selects Input Channels 1–48, and the [49–96]

button selects Input Channels 49–96, allowing you to meter up to

48 channels simultaneously.

F TIMECODE counter

This counter displays the current timecode position. When the Pro

To ols Remote Layer is selected, it displays the Pro Tools timecode.

G Meters

These 12-segment LED meters display the signals levels of the

channels on the currently selected Layer.

H STEREO meters

These 32-segment meters display the signal levels of the Stereo

Out.

I CONTROL ROOM button

This button is used to display the level of the Control Room signal

on the STEREO meters. Its indicator lights up when the STEREO

meters are displaying Control Room levels.

J LAMP DIMMER knob

This knob is used to adjust the brightness of the optional LA1800

Light Goosenecks.

OVER

STEREO

CONTROL

ROOM

LAMP

DIMMER

234567891 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 2011 22 23 24

25 26 27 28 29 30

32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4031 42 43 44 45 46 47 48

49 50

51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60 61 62 63 64 65 67 68 69 70 7166 72

76 77 78 79 80

81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88

89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96

23456789112131415161718192011 22 23 24

10 25 26 27 28 29 30 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 4031 42 43 44 45 46 47 4841

49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 60

62 63 64 65 67 68 69 70 7166 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96

OVER

PRE EQ

INPUT METERING POSITION

PRE FADER

POST FADER

OUTPUT METERING POSITION

PRE EQ PRE FADER

POST FADER

MASTER

25 48

49 72

73 96

148

49 96

124

PEAK

HOLD

REMOTE 4

REMOTE 3

REMOTE 2

REMOTE 1

TIME CODE

BEAT

CLOCK

MEASURE

HM S F

BUS

8BUS 7BUS 5

BUS 4BUS 3BUS 2BUS 1 BUS 6 AUX 12 MATRIX 1 MATRIX 2 MATRIX 3 MATRIX 4AUX 11AUX 10AUX 9AUX 8AUX 7AUX 6AUX 5AUX 4AUX 3AU X 2AU X 1

SP2000 Wooden Side Panels 335

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

SP2000 Wooden Side Panels

Attach the left side panel as shown below. Attach the right side panel in the same way.

336

DM2000—Owner’s Manual

Index

Symbols

+48V ON/OFF switches 5

Numerics

1–24 button 18

25–48 button

2TR I/O

channel status

dithering outputs

patching digital outputs

patching direct outs

patching inputs

sampling rate conversion

2TR IN ANALOG 1 +4 dB (BAL)

2TR IN ANALOG 2 –10 dBV (UNBAL)

2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 & 2

2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 3

2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 & 2

2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 3

2TR OUT DIGITAL OUT PATCH page

3-1 surround mode

31-band GEQs

155

49–72 button

5.1 surround mode

73–96 button

96 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz,

selecting

ABORT/UNDO button 20

Absolute mode, automix

167

AC IN connector

AD inputs

connectors

in detail

patching

patching output channel insert ins

summary

talkback

138

AD824 control

229

channel strip displays

AD824 GAIN/PHANTOM CONTROL

page

229

Adat I/O card

AES/EBU I/O card

ALL CLEAR button

AMP SIMULATE

274

Analog I/O & the AD input section

chapter

Architecture

channels

I/O

ASSIGN 1 button, control room

surround

ASSIGN 1–4 buttons, encoder mode

ASSIGN 2 button, control room

surround

Assigning

control changes

186

parameters to encoders

program changes

185

Transcripción de documentos

Owner’s Manual Keep This Manual For Future Reference. E FCC INFORMATION (U.S.A.) 1. IMPORTANT NOTICE: DO NOT MODIFY THIS UNIT! This product, when installed as indicated in the instructions contained in this manual, meets FCC requirements. Modifications not expressly approved by Yamaha may void your authority, granted by the FCC, to use the product. 2. IMPORTANT: When connecting this product to accessories and/or another product use only high quality shielded cables. Cable/s supplied with this product MUST be used. Follow all installation instructions. Failure to follow instructions could void your FCC authorization to use this product in the USA. 3. NOTE: This product has been tested and found to comply with the requirements listed in FCC Regulations, Part 15 for Class “B” digital devices. Compliance with these requirements provides a reasonable level of assurance that your use of this product in a residential environment will not result in harmful interference with other electronic devices. This equipment generates/uses radio frequencies and, if not installed and used according to the instructions found in the users manual, may cause interference harmful to the operation of other electronic devices. Compliance with FCC regulations does not guarantee that interference will not occur in all installations. If this product is found to be the source of interference, which can be determined by turning the unit “OFF” and “ON”, please try to eliminate the problem by using one of the following measures: Relocate either this product or the device that is being affected by the interference. Utilize power outlets that are on different branch (circuit breaker or fuse) circuits or install AC line filter/s. In the case of radio or TV interference, relocate/reorient the antenna. If the antenna lead-in is 300 ohm ribbon lead, change the lead-in to coaxial type cable. If these corrective measures do not produce satisfactory results, please contact the local retailer authorized to distribute this type of product. If you can not locate the appropriate retailer, please contact Yamaha Corporation of America, Electronic Service Division, 6600 Orangethorpe Ave, Buena Park, CA 90620 The above statements apply ONLY to those products distributed by Yamaha Corporation of America or its subsidiaries. WARNING: THIS APPARATUS MUST BE EARTHED IMPORTANT THE WIRES IN THIS MAINS LEAD ARE COLOURED IN ACCORDANCE WITH THE FOLLOWING CODE: GREEN-AND-YELLOW : EARTH BLUE : NEUTRAL BROWN : LIVE As the colours of the wires in the mains lead of this apparatus may not correspond with the coloured markings identifying the terminals in your plug, proceed as follows: The wire which is coloured GREEN and YELLOW must be connected to the terminal in the plug which is marked by the letter E or by the safety earth symbol or coloured GREEN and YELLOW. The wire which is coloured BLUE must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter N or coloured BLACK. The wire which is coloured BROWN must be connected to the terminal which is marked with the letter L or coloured RED. ADVARSEL! Lithiumbatteri—Eksplosionsfare ved fejlagtig håndtering. Udskiftning må kun ske med batteri af samme fabrikat og type. Levér det brugte batteri tilbage til leverandoren. VARNING Explosionsfara vid felaktigt batteribyte. Använd samma batterityp eller en ekvivalent typ som rekommenderas av apparattillverkaren. Kassera använt batteri enligt fabrikantens instruktion. VAROITUS Paristo voi räjähtää, jos se on virheellisesti asennettu. Vaihda paristo ainoastaan laitevalmistajan suosittelemaan tyyppiin. Hävitä käytetty paristo valmistajan ohjeiden mukaisesti. * This applies only to products distributed by YAMAHA KEMBLE MUSIC (U.K.) LTD. NEDERLAND THE NETHERLANDS ● Dit apparaat bevat een lithium batterij voor geheugen back-up. ● This apparatus contains a lithium battery for memory back-up. ● Raadpleeg uw leverancier over de verwijdering van de batterij op het moment dat u het apparaat ann het einde van de levensduur afdankt of de volgende Yamaha Service Afdeiing: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Afdeiing Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel. 030-2828425 ● For the removal of the battery at the moment of the disposal at the end of the service life please consult your retailer or Yamaha Service Center as follows: Yamaha Music Nederland Service Center Address: Kanaalweg 18-G, 3526 KL UTRECHT Tel: 030-2828425 ● Gooi de batterij niet weg, maar lever hem in als KCA. ● Do not throw away the battery. Instead, hand it in as small chemical waste. i Important Information Warnings • • • • • • • • • • • • • • • Connect this unit’s power cord only to an AC outlet of the type stated in this Owner’s Manual or as marked on the unit. Failure to do so is a fire and electrical shock hazard. Do not allow water to enter this unit or allow the unit to become wet. Fire or electrical shock may result. Do not place heavy objects, including this unit, on top of the power cord. A damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard. In particular, be careful not to place heavy objects on a power cord covered by a carpet. Do not place a container with liquid or small metal objects on top of this unit. Liquid or metal objects inside this unit are a fire and electrical shock hazard. This unit is equipped with a dedicated ground connection to prevent electrical shock. Before connecting the power plug to an AC outlet, be sure to ground the unit. If the power cord has a three-pin plug, it will provide sufficient grounding so long as the AC outlet is grounded correctly. Do not scratch, bend, twist, pull, or heat the power cord. A damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard. Do not remove the unit’s cover. You could receive an electrical shock. If you think internal inspection, maintenance, or repair is necessary, contact your dealer. Do not modify the unit. Doing so is a fire and electrical shock hazard. If lightning begins to occur, turn off the power switch of the unit as soon as possible, and unplug the power cable plug from the electrical outlet. If there is a possibility of lightning, do not touch the power cable plug if it is still connected. Doing so may be an electrical shock hazard. Use only the included power cord for this unit. Using other types may be a fire and electrical shock hazard. The DM2000 has six rear-panel slots for installing mini-YGDAI cards. For technical reasons, certain card combinations are not supported. Before installing any cards, check the Yamaha web site to if your card is compatible. Installing cards that are not endorsed by Yamaha may cause electrical shock, fire, or damage to the unit. If the power cord is damaged (i.e., cut or a bare wire is exposed), ask your dealer for a replacement. Using the unit with a damaged power cord is a fire and electrical shock hazard. If you notice any abnormality, such as smoke, odor, or noise, or if a foreign object or liquid gets inside the unit, turn it off immediately. Remove the power cord from the AC outlet. Consult your dealer for repair. Using the unit in this condition is a fire and electrical shock hazard. Should this unit be dropped or the cabinet be damaged, turn the power switch off, remove the power plug from the AC outlet, and contact your dealer. If you continue using the unit without heeding this instruction, fire or electrical shock may result. Cautions • • • Keep this unit away from the following locations: — Locations exposed to oil splashes or steam, such as near cooking stoves, humidifiers, etc. — Unstable surfaces, such as a wobbly table or slope. — Locations exposed to excessive heat, such as inside a car with all the windows closed, or places that receive direct sunlight. — Locations subject to excessive humidity or dust accumulation. Hold the power cord plug when disconnecting it from an AC outlet. Never pull the cord. A damaged power cord is a potential fire and electrical shock hazard. Do not touch the power plug with wet hands. Doing so is a potential electrical shock hazard. DM2000—Owner’s Manual ii • • • • • • • • This unit has ventilation holes along the front underside and at the rear to prevent the internal temperature from rising too high. Do not block them. Blocked ventilation holes are a fire hazard. In particular, do not operate the unit while it’s on its side, is upside down, or while it’s covered with a cloth or dust sheet. If you are using the optional MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge, do not hold only the MB2000 when you move the entire unit. Otherwise, the meter angle may be deformed or damaged, the main unit may malfunction, or you may be injured if the unit falls. This unit is heavy. Use two or more people to carry it. When you transport or move the DM2000 with the MB2000 attached, do not permit impact or stress on the cable connector that connects the MB2000 to the DM2000. Otherwise, malfunction may occur. To relocate the unit, turn the power switch off, remove the power plug from the AC outlet, and remove all connecting cables. Damaged cables may cause fire or electrical shock. If you know you will not use this unit for a long period of time, such as when going on vacation, remove the power plug from the AC outlet. Leaving it connected is a potential fire hazard. The inside of the unit should be cleaned periodically. Dust accumulation inside the unit may cause malfunction and is a potential fire hazard. Consult your dealer for information about cleaning. To prevent electrical shock when cleaning the unit, remove the power plug from the AC outlet. Operating Notes • • • • • • • • • XLR-type connectors are wired as follows: pin 1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–). Insert TRS phone jacks are wired as follows: sleeve–ground, tip–send, and ring–return. The performance of components with moving contacts, such switches, rotary controls, faders, and connectors, deteriorates over time. The rate of deterioration depends on the operating environment and is unavoidable. Consult your dealer about replacing defective components. Using a mobile telephone near this unit may induce noise. If noise occurs, use the telephone away from the unit. If the message “WARNING Low Battery!” appears when you turn on this unit, contact your dealer as soon as possible about replacing the internal data backup battery. The unit will still operate correctly, but data other than the presets will be lost. Before replacing the batteries, back up your data to a memory card, or another unit by using MIDI Bulk Dump. The digital circuits of this unit may induce a slight noise into nearby radios and TVs. If noise occurs, relocate the affected equipment. When connecting D-sub cables, be sure to tighten the screws on both sides of the connector securely. To disconnect the cable, loosen the screws completely, then remove the cable by holding the connector part. Do not remove the plug by pulling the cable while the screws are still attached. Otherwise, the connector may be damaged, leading to malfunction. When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some devices may output noise, so turn down your power amps beforehand, otherwise your speakers may be damaged. DM2000—Owner’s Manual iii SmartMedia Handling Precautions • • • • • • • • • • • • • The CARD slot is for use with SmartMedia only. Never attempt to insert any other type of storage media. Use only SmartMedia of the type specified in this Owner’s Manual. Store SmartMedia in a place free from extreme temperatures, humidity, dust, and dirt. Always store SmartMedia in its original case. Write only on the designated area. When handling SmartMedia, be careful not to touch the gold contacts. Fingerprints, smudges, scratches, or dirt can affect performance. Fingerprints and dust should be removed by wiping gently using a soft, dry cloth. Do not use benzene, thinner, cleaning detergent, or a chemical cloth. If SmartMedia is stored in a cold place (e.g., overnight in a car), and then moved to a warmer environment, or if the temperature rises sharply, condensation may form on the surface, which may affect performance. In this case, the SmartMedia should be allowed to acclimatize for about one hour before use. Insert SmartMedia carefully into the CARD slot, with the gold contacts facing upward. Do not bend or twist SmartMedia. Do not under any circumstances attempt to use SmartMedia that is cracked or warped. Doing so may seriously damage the CARD slot. Do not remove SmartMedia while saving or loading data. Doing so may cause data lose. Data stored on SmartMedia can be protected against inadvertent overwriting by attaching a write-protect sticker (supplied with SmartMedia). Interference The DM2000 uses high-frequency digital circuits that may cause interference on radio and television equipment located nearby. If interference is a problem, relocate the affected equipment. Using a mobile telephone near the unit may induce noise. In this case use the telephone away from the unit. DM2000 Exclusion of Certain Responsibility Manufacturer, importer, or dealer shall not be liable for any incidental damages including personal injury or any other damages caused by improper use or operation of the DM2000. Trademarks ADAT MultiChannel Optical Digital Interface is a trademark and ADAT and Alesis are registered trademarks of Alesis Corporation. Apogee is a trademark of Apogee Electronics, Inc. Apple, Mac, and Power Macintosh are registered trademarks and Mac OS is a trademark of Apple Corporation, Inc. HUI is a trademark of Mackie Designs, Inc. Intel and Pentium are registered trademarks of Intel Corporation. Nuendo is a registered trademark of Steinberg Media Technologies AG. Pro Tools is a trademark or registered trademark of Digidesign and/or Avid Technology, Inc. SmartMedia is a trademark of Toshiba, Corp. Sony is a registered trademark of Sony Corporation, Inc. Tascam Digital Interface is a trademark and Tascam and Teac are registered trademarks of Teac Corporation. Microsoft and Windows are registered trademarks of Microsoft Corporation, Inc. Waves is a trademark of Waves, Inc. Yamaha is a trademark of Yamaha Corporation. All other trademarks are the property of their respective holders and are hereby acknowledged. Copyright No part of the DM2000, its software, or this Owner’s Manual may be reproduced or distributed in any form or by any means without the prior written authorization of Yamaha Corporation. © 2002 Yamaha Corporation. All rights reserved. DM2000—Owner’s Manual iv Yamaha Web Site Further information about the DM2000, related products, and other Yamaha professional audio equipment is available on the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at: <http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>. Package Contents • • • • DM2000 Digital Production Console CD-ROM Power cord This manual Optional Extras • • • • MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge SP2000 Wooden Side Panels LA1800 Light Gooseneck mini YGDAI I/O cards About this Owner’s Manual This Owner’s Manual covers the DM2000 Digital Production Console. All the information you need in order to operate the DM2000 Digital Production Console is contained in this manual. Use the table of contents to familiarize yourself with the manual’s organization and to locate tasks and topics, and use the index to locate specific information. Before diving in, it’s recommend that you read the “Operating Basics” chapter, starting on page 35. Each chapter of this manual discusses a specific section or function of the DM2000. The Input and Output Channels are explained in the following chapters: “Input Channels,” “Bus Outs,” “Aux Sends,” “Matrix Sends,” and “Stereo Out.” Where possible, these chapters have been organized in order of signal flow, from input through to output. Functions such as EQ and Delay are common to all channels. Rather than repeat the same information over and over, these functions are explained once in the “Common Channel Functions” chapter, which starts on page 103. The Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and Stereo Out chapters contain cross-references to the relevant sections of the “Common Channel Functions” chapter. Conventions Used in this Manual The DM2000 features two types of button: physical buttons that you can press (e.g., ENTER and DISPLAY) and buttons that appear on the display pages. References to physical buttons are enclosed in square brackets, for example, “press the [ENTER] button.” References to display page buttons are not emphasized, for example, “press the ENTER button.” Display pages can be selected by using the [DISPLAY] buttons or the Left Tab Scroll, Right Tab Scroll, and F1–4 buttons below the display. In order to simplify explanations, only the [DISPLAY] button method is mentioned in the procedures. See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 36 for details on all the ways in which pages can be selected. Installing the DM2000 The DM2000 should be placed on a strong and stable surface, somewhere that complies with the warnings and cautions listed in the previous sections. DM2000—Owner’s Manual v Contents 1 Welcome . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1 2 Control Surface & Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Control Surface . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Rear Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 29 3 Operating Basics . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 35 Connecting the Power Cord . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Turning On & Off the DM2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . About the Display . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Display Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Display Page Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Parameter Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Confirmation Messages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Title Edit Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using a Keyboard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Channel Strip Displays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Fader Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Encoder Modes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 Analog I/O & the AD Input Section . . . . . . . . . . . 48 AD Input Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Room Monitor Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Studio Monitor Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Omni Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2TR Analog INs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 48 49 49 49 49 49 Digital I/O & Cascading . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 50 Wordclocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2TR Digital Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2TR Digital Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2TR In/Out Sampling Rate Conversion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Slot I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dithering Digital Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Cascading Consoles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6 35 35 35 36 37 37 37 37 38 38 39 42 43 44 45 46 50 52 53 53 54 57 57 58 Input & Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 Input Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Output Patching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Input & Output Ports . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patch Select Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patching with the Encoders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 61 63 66 67 67 DM2000—Owner’s Manual vi 7 Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 68 Patching Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Reversing the Signal Phase . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Gating Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuating Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQ’ing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Input Channel EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Input Channel Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Input Channel Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delaying Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting Input Channels (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Input Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Input Channel Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Input Channel Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Surround Pan . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Input Channels to Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soloing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Direct Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pairing Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using MS Decoding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Input Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Input Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Input Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 68 68 68 69 70 70 71 71 71 72 72 72 73 74 74 75 76 77 80 81 81 81 81 81 81 81 Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 82 Stereo Out Connectors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Patching the Stereo Out to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing Input Channels to the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuating the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQ’ing the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Stereo Out Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressing the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting the Stereo Out (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Stereo Out Level . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending the Stereo Out to the Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delaying the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Stereo Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Stereo Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DM2000—Owner’s Manual 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 82 83 83 83 83 83 83 83 84 84 84 84 84 84 vii 9 Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 Patching Bus Outs to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Routing Input Channels to Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuating Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQ’ing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bus Out Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting Bus Outs (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Bus Out Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Bus Outs to Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delaying Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soloing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pairing Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Bus Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Bus Out Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Bus Outs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 85 86 86 86 86 86 86 86 86 86 87 87 87 87 10 Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 Patching Aux Send Masters to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting the Aux Send Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Aux Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting Aux Sends (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aux Send Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Aux Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuating Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQ’ing Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Aux Send Master Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressing Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting Aux Send Masters (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Settings Aux Send Master Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sending Aux Sends to Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delaying Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soloing Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pairing Aux Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Aux Send Master Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Aux Send Master Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Aux Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 88 88 88 89 90 90 92 94 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 95 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 96 DM2000—Owner’s Manual viii 11 Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 Patching Matrix Send Masters to Outputs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Matrix Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting Matrix Sends (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matrix Send Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Matrix Send Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Metering Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Monitoring Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuating Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . EQ’ing Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Matrix Send Master Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressing Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting Matrix Send Masters (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Matrix Send Master Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Master Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Balancing Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delaying Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soloing Matrix Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Inserting GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Matrix Send Master Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Matrix Send Master Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Matrix Send Masters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 97 97 97 98 98 99 99 100 100 100 100 100 100 100 101 101 101 101 101 101 102 102 102 102 102 102 12 Common Channel Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 Metering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Attenuating Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using EQ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Output Channel EQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Inserts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Compressing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Output Channel Compressors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delaying Channel Signals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soloing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pairing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Output Channel Faders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Channel Parameter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Viewing Channel Fader Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Copying Channel Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Naming Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 103 106 107 110 111 113 116 117 118 120 122 123 124 125 129 130 13 Monitoring & Talkback . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 132 Control Room Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Studio Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Surround Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Talkback & Slate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DM2000—Owner’s Manual 132 133 134 138 ix 14 Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 About the Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 General Library Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 139 Channel Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 140 Input Patch Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 Output Patch Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 141 GEQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Effects Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 142 Bus to Stereo Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 143 Gate Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 144 Comp Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 145 EQ Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 146 Automix Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 Surround Monitor Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 147 15 Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 About the Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Patching Effects Processors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Preset Effects & Types . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 148 Editing Effects . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 150 About Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Configuring Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 152 Editing Plug-Ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 153 About the GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 Editing GEQs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 155 16 Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 About Scene Memories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 157 Auto Scene Memory Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 158 Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . 159 Using the Scene Memory Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 160 Fading Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 161 Recalling Scenes Safely . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 162 Sorting Scenes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 163 17 Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 About Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 What’s Recorded in an Automix? . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 164 Automix Main Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 165 AUTOMIX Section . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 168 Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Automix Memory Page . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 169 Fader Edit Pages . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 170 Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 171 Creating a Time Signature Map . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Recording an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 172 Rerecording Events . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 173 Parameter Recording . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 174 Punching In & Out Individual Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 175 Playing Back an Automix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Editing Events Offline . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 177 DM2000—Owner’s Manual x 18 MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 MIDI & the DM2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI I/O . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Port Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Channel Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Scenes to Program Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Parameters to Control Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Using Bulk Dump . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 182 182 183 184 185 186 186 187 19 Pro Tools Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 188 Configuring Windows Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Macintosh Computers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring the DM2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Pro Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scrolling Windows . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Selecting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Inputs to Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Outputs to Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Channel Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Soloing Channels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Send Destinations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Configuring Sends as Pre or Post . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Setting Send Levels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Muting Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Panning Sends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Flip Mode . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Editing Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypassing Individual Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Bypassing all Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Resetting Faders, Sends, Panpots & Plug-ins . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Navigating the Edit Window . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Zooming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Making Fine Adjustments to the Selected Region . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Scrub & Shuttle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Automation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DM2000—Owner’s Manual 188 188 188 189 190 203 203 203 204 204 205 205 205 206 206 207 207 207 208 209 210 211 211 212 212 213 213 214 215 xi 20 Remote Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 About Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Assigning Targets to Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 217 Configuring User Defined Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 218 Using User Defined Remote Layers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 219 About Machine Control (MMC & P2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Configuring Machines . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 220 Configuring the REMOTE Port . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Transport Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 221 Using Shuttle & Scrub . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Using the Locator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 222 Setting the Locate Memories, Pre-roll, Post-roll & Roll-back . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 224 Arming Machine Tracks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 225 Configuring MTR Track Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Configuring Master Track Arming . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 226 Configuring Track Arming Groups . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 227 GPI (General Purpose Interface) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 228 Controlling AD824 A/D Converters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 229 21 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Using the User Defined Keys . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 230 Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 231 Setting Preferences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 234 Using the Oscillator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Checking the Battery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 238 Initializing the DM2000 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 239 Appendix A: Parameter Lists . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 USER DEFINED KEYS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 240 USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Input Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 242 Initial Input Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 246 Output Patch Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 247 Initial Output Patch Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 255 Initial Input Channel Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 256 Initial Output Channel Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 257 Initial Input Port Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 258 Initial Output Port Names . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 260 GPI Trigger Source List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 261 Effects Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 264 Preset EQ Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 292 Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 296 DM2000—Owner’s Manual xii Appendix B: Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 General Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Controls . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Libraries . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Analog Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Input Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Digital Output Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . I/O Slot Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Control I/O Spec . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Connector Pin Assignments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 301 307 309 310 311 311 312 312 313 313 314 316 Appendix C: MIDI . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 Scene Memory to Program Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Initial Parameter to Control Change Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MIDI Data Format . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Format Details . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 317 318 319 319 Appendix D: Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 333 SP2000 Wooden Side Panels . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 335 Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 336 DM2000—Owner’s Manual Welcome 1 1 Welcome Thank you for choosing the Yamaha DM2000 Digital Production Console. Designed with production in mind, the DM2000 Digital Production Console offers 24-bit/96 kHz digital audio processing without compromise, comprehensive surround mixing and monitoring, including bass management and down mixing, and hands-on control of popular DAW (Digital Audio Workstation) systems. Sonic Spec • • • • • Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling A/D converters Linear 24-bit, 128-times oversampling D/A converters 20 Hz–40 kHz (0.5, –1.5 dB) frequency response at 96 kHz sampling rate 108 dB typical dynamic range (AD Input to Stereo Out) 32-bit internal signal processing (58-bit accumulator) Channel Architecture • • • • • • • • 96 Input Channels, with Direct Outs 8 Bus Outs, with to Stereo Out routing for subgrouping 12 Aux Sends 4 stereo Matrix Sends (22 x 8 matrix) Stereo Out Channels can be named for easy identification Channel library with 127 user memories Copy and paste channel settings I/O Architecture • • 24 analog mic/line inputs on balanced XLRs and phone jacks (plus 48 V phantom) 24 analog inserts on individual in/out phone jacks • 48 inputs, 48 outputs via six mini-YGDAI slots and optional I/O cards, which offer a variety of analog and digital I/O options, with support for all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, Tascam TDIF-1, and mLAN. 8 assignable Omni outputs 2 AES/EBU, 1 Coaxial 2-track digital input 2 AES/EBU, 1 Coaxial 2-track digital output 2 analog 2-track inputs XLR and phone jack stereo outputs Large and small control room outputs Dedicated studio monitor outputs AES/EBU and Coaxial I/O sampling rate converters for connecting 44.1/48 kHz legacy digital audio equipment Double channel digital I/O for use with legacy 44.1/48 kHz multitrack recorders Cascade ports for cascading up to four DM2000s (i.e., 384 Input Channels) • • • • • • • • • • DM2000—Owner’s Manual 2 Chapter 1—Welcome I/O Patching • • • • Any available input port can be patched to the Input Channels, Insert Ins, or Effects inputs Direct Outs, Insert Outs, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out can be patched to any output port Input and output ports can be named for easy identification Patches can be stored in the Input and Output Patch libraries EQ & GEQ • • • • 4-band parametric EQ on all Input and Output Channels EQ library with 40 presets, 160 user memories Six 31-band graphic equalizers that can be patched into Output Channels GEQ library with 128 user memories Groups & Pairs • • • • • • Horizontal and vertical pairing of Input Channels Horizontal pairing of Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Surround Pan 8 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel Fader groups 8 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel Mute groups 4 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel EQ groups 4 Input Channel, 4 Output Channel Compressor groups Effects • • • • • • 8 internal effects processors Effects library with 52 presets, 76 user memories Multichannel effects for surround sound processing Joystick control of early reflections and reverb with the Reverb 5.1 effect Optional Waves 56K effects plug-in card User defined plug-ins for external effects control via MIDI, with Learn function Dynamics • • • • Gates on all 96 Input Channels Gate library with 4 presets, 124 user memories Compressors on all Input Channels and Out Channels (126 in total) Compressor library with 36 presets, 92 user memories Automation • • • • • • • • Dynamic automation of virtually all mix parameters, with 1/4-frame accuracy Automix library with 16 memories Snapshot style automation with 99 Scene memories, recallable via MIDI or Automix Individual fade time settings for all Input and Output faders Scene and library recalls Punch in/out entire channels with dedicated [AUTO] buttons, or individual parameters Editing fader moves with Fader Return, Fader Takeover, Absolute/Relative modes Offline event editing includes, erase, copy, move/merge, trim, duplicate, delete, and insert DM2000—Owner’s Manual Welcome 3 Surround Sound • • • • • • 3-1 and 5.1 Surround modes Joystick control Bass management Down mixing Surround monitor speaker alignment functions Surround monitor library with 32 user memories Remote Control • • • • • Control and manage your DM2000 from your Mac or PC by using the bundled Studio Manager software Remote Layers for external equipment control, including predefined targets for controlling DAW systems, and user defined targets for controlling MIDI equipment, with Learn function Comprehensive machine control via MMC or P2, including transport, track arming, jog/shuttle, and built-in locator with eight Locate memories, all with independent control of master and MTR machines Assignable GPI (General Purpose Interface) port for external control and “Recording” light Remote control of head amps and phantom on up to 12 Yamaha AD824 A/D Converters MIDI • • • Standard MIDI ports, USB TO HOST port, SERIAL TO HOST port, or mLAN MIDI I/O USB, SERIAL, and mLAN offer multiport operation Scene recall, mix parameter control, Bulk Dump, MTC and MIDI Clock for Automix synchronization, MMC for external machine control Control Surface • • • • • • • • • • • • • 25 touch-sensitive 100-mm motorized faders (touch sense used to select channels or punch faders in/out during Automix recording) Use the faders to set channel levels or Aux/Matrix Send levels Use the 24 Encoders to control Pan, Aux/Matrix Send levels, or user assigned parameters Channels arranged into four Input Layers, Master Layer, and four Remote Layers 320 x 240 dot LCD display with fluorescent backlight Fluorescent channel strip displays, showing channel names, Encoder status, routing, etc Complete hands-on control of all channel functions via the SELECTED CHANNEL section 2-digit Scene memory display 4 EQ displays for frequency, gain, and Q 16 user-definable buttons make light work of repetitive tasks Display History buttons for quick access to recently viewed display pages SmartMedia card slot for Automix, Scene, library, and setup data storage and transfer Optional PS/2-compatible keyboard for quick title entry DM2000—Owner’s Manual DM2000—Owner’s Manual EFFECTS/PLUG-INS (p. 9) ENCODER MODE (p. 7) FADER MODE (p. 8) AUX SELECT (p. 7) MATRIX SELECT (p. 6) SmartMedia CARD Slot (p. 6) PAD OFF ON 3.3V CARD INSERT AUX AUX 5 9 AUX AUX 10 6 2 ASSIGN 2 OUTPUT ASSIGN 1 INPUT ON 2 ON 1 12 8 4 ASSIGN 3 SEND ASSIGN SEL 3 ON SOLO 4 ON SOLO SEL AUTO INSERT ASSIGN 4 6 5 ON SOLO SEL AUTO DISPLAY OFF ON INSERT GROUP REMOTE DIO INPUT PATCH METER SETUP INSERT 5 SEL AUTO 6 ON SOLO 1 6 2 7 ON SOLO SEL AUTO 7 3 8 SIGNAL 8 ON SOLO SEL AUTO 8 4 2 20 10 20 10 10 1 15 5 15 5 10 5 5 0 60 40 60 40 70 50 3 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 4 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 6 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 7 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 8 Channel strips (p. 5) 70 50 50 30 50 30 30 40 20 50 30 15 40 20 30 15 40 20 15 10 0 5 10 5 5 0 10 0 0 10 5 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0 OUTPUT PATCH VIEW UTILITY OFF ON OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V INTERNAL GRAPHIC PLUG INS CHANNEL EFFECTS EQUALIZERS INSERTS EFFECTS / PLUG INS PAIR MIDI DATA 7 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V DISPLAY ACCESS INSERT SIGNAL OFF ON 5 INSERT SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V CH01 CH02 CH03 CH04 CH05 CH06 CH07 CH08 SEL SOLO SEL AUX AUX AUX FADER MODE 11 7 3 FADER AUX / MTRX AUX AUX AUX OFF ON MATRIX 4 INSERT 4 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V 9 ON SOLO SEL AUTO OFF ON INSERT 10 SIGNAL 10 ON SOLO SEL AUTO OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V 12 1 11 ON SOLO SEL AUTO F1 12 ON SOLO SEL AUTO 2 F2 INSERT SIGNAL 11 INSERT OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SIGNAL OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V 13 ON SOLO SEL AUTO 3 F3 INSERT 13 SIGNAL OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V 14 ON SOLO SEL AUTO F4 4 INSERT 14 SIGNAL SEL AUTO INSERT 15 SIGNAL ON 15 ON 16 16 10 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0 5 9 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 10 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 12 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 13 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 14 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 15 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 16 5 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 OFF ON OFF ON 6 8 5 7 COMP ON L 18 ON SOLO SEL AUTO EQ ON ATT. EQUALIZER 19 ON SOLO SEL AUTO R DISPLAY DISPLAY INSERT 20 SIGNAL INSERT INSERT ON AUX 9 AUX 5 FREQUENCY 20 ON SOLO SEL AUTO 125 kHz Hz dB GAIN LOW R 21 ON SOLO SEL AUTO 22 ON SOLO SEL AUTO 1.00 Q LINK 23 ON SOLO SEL AUTO kHz Hz dB GAIN LOW MID FREQUENCY EVEN ATTACK ATTACK DECAY 24 ON SOLO SEL AUTO 4.00 Q 10 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0 5 17 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 18 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 19 10 5 5 0 20 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 21 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 22 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 23 10 5 5 0 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 LAYER (p. 18) 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 24 ON LEVEL FB AUX 7 EFFECT GAIN HOLD AUX 11 5 0 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 kHz Hz dB GAIN ON LEVEL FREQUENCY 1 24 49 72 5 0 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 REMOTE 4 REMOTE 3 B 18 10 2 C 19 11 3 D 20 12 4 TRACK ARMING 2 3 11 END SCRUB SHUTTLE BACK FF 21 LATCH READ 4 13 5 ENTER FORWARD 5 QUICK PUNCH POST STOP LOOP OUT 4 RECALL MASTER 24 16 8 SET 7 15 7 AUX ON TRIM MTR 8 16 8 EQ OFF PLAY DEC REC ROLL REHEARSAL MASTER BACK 6 14 6 PAN SURROUND AUX 12 23 15 7 10 STUDIO LEVEL 0 RETURN RELATIVE TOUCH SENSE OVERWRITE TOUCH ABORT / AUTOUNDO REC 22 14 6 ALL CLEAR LOCATE MEMORY ONLINE IN 3 DISPLAY HISTORY REW RETURN TO ZERO AUDITION PRE 1 ON LOCATOR 2 10 9 DISPLAY REC WRITE 5 13 STORE USER DEFINED KEYS FADER SUSPEND ENABLE AUTOMIX 00 1 DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY SCENE MEMORY TRACK ARMING GROUP A 17 9 1 DISPLAY 10 SMALL TRIM 0 STEREO (p. 18) STEREO ON SEL AUTO STEREO MASTER 73 96 REMOTE 2 REMOTE 1 kHz Hz dB GAIN LAYER 10.0 Q HIGH AUX 12 AUX 8 AUX 4 / MATRIX 4 25 48 MIX AUX 3 / MATRIX 3 HIGH MID FREQUENCY GRAB RELEASE AUX 10 AUX 6 ON ON OFF ON TIME INSERT 24 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V DELAY OFF ON AUX 2 / MATRIX 2 LEVEL DISPLAY INSERT 23 SIGNAL ON LEVEL RATIO L OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUX 1 / MATRIX 1 THRESHOLD BANK AUX / MATRIX SEND RANGE COMP 22 SIGNAL GATE / COMP THRESHOLD ODD Q OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SELECTED CHANNEL INSERT 21 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V PHASE / INSERT OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V GATE OFF ON PAN / SURROUND GATE ON DYNAMICS DIRECT 4 3 STEREO 2 1 INSERT 19 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SELECTED CHANNEL Section (p. 12) CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 17 ON SOLO SEL AUTO PASTE COPY CHANNEL DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY OFF ON ROUTING INSERT 18 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V FOLLOW PAN DISPLAY INSERT 17 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V CHANNEL COPY (p. 17) 11 10 5 5 0 10 0 0 INSERT -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SIGNAL SOLO SEL AUTO OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SOLO OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V Display Section (p. 11) CH09 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 INSERT 9 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V DISPLAY ACCESS (p. 8) -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V MATRIX 3 AUTO SEND LEVEL PAN AUTO AUX/ MTRX PAN ENCODER MODE AUX AUX 1 AUX SELECT MATRIX 2 MATRIX SELECT MATRIX 1 SOLO AUTO DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY INSERT 3 1 INSERT -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 SIGNAL OFF ON -60 2 GAIN 26dB + 48V SIGNAL -16 ON OFF SIGNAL OFF ON -60 26dB + 48V PEAK GAIN ON OFF PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AD Input Section (p. 5) 10 MONITOR AUX 12 STEREO ASSIGN 2 STEREO 2TR A2 2TR A1 BUS ASSIGN 2 DIMMER INC TALKBACK SLATE TALKBACK LOCATOR (p. 21) USER DEFINED KEYS (p. 21) AUTOMIX (p. 20) SCENE MEMORY (p. 19) TRACK ARMING (p. 19) MONITOR Section (p. 26) Data Entry & Transport (p. 23) 0 10 CONTROL ROOM LEVEL SMALL MONO SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL ASSIGN 1 SURROUND ASSIGN 1 2TR D3 2TR D2 2TR D1 STEREO CONTROL ROOM CLEAR SOLO CONTRAST SOLO AUX 11 CONTROL ROOM STUDIO DISPLAY 10 PHONES LEVEL 0 PHONES TALKBACK LEVEL 0 Monitor, Phones & Talkback Section (p. 25) 4 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel 2 Control Surface & Rear Panel Control Surface Control Surface 5 AD Input Section AD Input #1 is shown here. A +48V ON/OFF switches These switches turn on and off the +48 V phantom power feed to each INPUT A (XLR-type connector). Phantom power is typically used to power condenser-type microphones or direct boxes. See “Phantom Power” on page 48 for more information. + 48V 1 2 3 4 5 6 ON OFF PAD B PAD switches These switches turn on and off the 26 dB pad (attenuator) for each AD Input. See “Pad” on page 48 for more information. 26dB -60 -16 GAIN PEAK C GAIN controls These controls adjust the gain of the AD Input Head Amps. They have an input sensitivity of –16 dB to –60 dB or +10 dB to –34 dB when Pad is on. See “Gain” on page 48 for more information. SIGNAL 1 OFF ON INSERT D PEAK indicators These indicators light up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping. See “PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators” on page 48 for more information. E SIGNAL indicators These indicators light up when the input signal level is 20 dB below nominal. See “PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators” on page 48 for more information. F INSERT ON/OFF switches These switches are for turning on and off the AD Input inserts. See “AD Inserts” on page 49 for more information. Channel strips Channel strip #1 is shown here. The function of each channel strip depends on the currently selected Layer. See “Selecting Layers” on page 42 for more information. 1 2 A Encoders These controls are used to edit Input and Output Channel parameters. Their exact operation depends on the currently selected Encoder mode and Layer. There are two preset Encoder modes, Pan and Aux/Mtrx, and four assignable modes, with over 40 parameters to choose from. See “Selecting Encoder Modes” on page 45 for more information. The Encoders feature push switches that are used to punch the parameter currently assigned to the Encoders in and out during Automix recording. See “Punching In & Out Individual Parameters” on page 175 for more information. AUTO 3 SEL 4 SOLO 5 ON 1 6 CH01 10 7 B AUTO buttons These buttons are used to set Automix recording and playback for each channel. Their exact operation depends on the currently selected Layer. Their indicators light up orange in Record-Ready mode, red while recording, and green during playback. See “Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons” on page 169 for more information. 0 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 20 15 30 20 40 30 50 C SEL buttons These buttons are used to select Input and Output Channels for editing with the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Their exact operation depends on the currently selected Layer. The [SEL] button indicator of the currently selected channel lights up. See “Selecting Channels” on page 43 for more information. They are also used to display the Long channel names. See “Channel Names” on page 41 for more information. The [SEL] buttons can also be used to pair channels, and to add and remove channels to and from the EQ, Comp, Fader, and Mute groups. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 6 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel D SOLO buttons These buttons are used to solo Channels. The [SOLO] button indicators of channels that are soloed light up. See “Soloing Channels” on page 118 for more information. E ON buttons These buttons are used to mute Input and Output Channels. Their exact operation depends on the currently selected Layer. The [ON] button indicators of channels that are on light up. F Channel strip displays These fluorescent displays graphically display the value of the Input or Output Channel parameter currently assigned to the Encoders. They also display routing settings, and the on/off status of the EQ, Insert, Delay, Comp, and Gate functions. They also display Long and Short channel names and indicate the currently selected channel. See “Channel Strip Displays” on page 39 for more information. G Channel faders These 100 mm touch-sensitive motorized faders are used to set the levels of Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Matrix Sends. Their exact operation depends on the currently selected Fader mode and Layer. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 44 for more information. Faders can be grouped for simultaneous operation. See “Grouping Input Channel Faders” on page 74 and “Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more information. Faders can also be used to select Input and Output Channels. See “Auto Channel Select & Touch Sense Select” on page 44 for more information. They can also be used to punch channels in and out during Automix recording. See “Punching In & Out Individual Parameters” on page 175 for more information. SmartMedia CARD Slot This CARD slot is for use with SmartMedia (3.3 V), which can be used to store DM2000 data, including Setups, Scenes, Automixes, Libraries, and so on. See “Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia” on page 231 for more information. 3.3V CARD MATRIX SELECT 1 MATRIX SELECT DISPLAY MATRIX 1 MATRIX 2 MATRIX 3 MATRIX 4 2 A MATRIX SELECT DISPLAY button This button is used to select the following pages: Matrix Send, Matrix Send Pan, and Matrix View. See “Matrix Sends” on page 97 for more information. B MATRIX 1–4 buttons These buttons are used to select Matrix Sends when sending Bus Out, Aux Send, and Stereo Out signals to Matrix Sends. The button indicator of the currently selected Matrix Send lights up. See “Matrix Sends” on page 97 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 7 AUX SELECT 1 AUX SELECT DISPLAY AUX 1 AUX 2 AUX 3 AUX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 AUX 9 AUX 10 AUX 11 AUX 12 2 A AUX SELECT DISPLAY button This button is used to select the following pages: Aux Send, Aux Send Pan, and Input Channel Aux View. See “Aux Sends” on page 88 for more information. B AUX 1–12 buttons These buttons are used to select Aux Sends when sending Input Channel signals to Aux Sends. The button indicator of the currently selected Aux Send lights up. If the currently selected Aux Send is paired, the indicator of its partner flashes. See “Aux Sends” on page 88 for more information. These buttons can also be used to pair Aux Sends. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information. ENCODER MODE 2 3 1 ENCODER MODE DISPLAY PAN AUX/ MTRX PAN SEND LEVEL ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 ASSIGN 3 ASSIGN 4 INPUT OUTPUT SEND ASSIGN INSERT 4 The small text labels below the ASSIGN buttons apply to the DAW Remote Layer. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. A ENCODER MODE DISPLAY button This button is used to select the Encoder Mode Assign page. See “Selecting Encoder Modes” on page 45 for more information. B PAN button This button is used to select the Pan Encoder mode. Its indicator lights up when this mode is selected. In this mode, the Encoders function as Pan controls when an Input Channel Layer is selected. When the Master Layer is selected, Encoders 21–24 function as Matrix Send Balance controls. The other Encoders are inactive. See “Selecting Encoder Modes” on page 45 for more information. C AUX/MTRX button This button is used to select the Aux/Mtrx Encoder mode. Its indicator lights up when this mode is selected. In this mode, the Encoders function as Aux Send level controls when an Input Channel Layer is selected. When the Master Layer is selected, Encoders 1–20 function as Matrix Send level controls. See “Selecting Encoder Modes” on page 45. D ASSIGN 1–4 buttons These buttons are used to select the assignable Encoder modes. The button indicator for the currently selected mode lights up. When an assignable mode is selected, the function of the Encoders depends on the assigned parameter. Up to four parameters, from a list of over 40, can be assigned to these four buttons. See “Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons” on page 46 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 8 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel FADER MODE FADER MODE FADER AUX/ MTRX 1 2 A FADER button This button selects Fader mode, in which the faders control Input or Output Channel levels, depending on the currently selected Layer. Its indicator lights up when this mode is selected. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 44 for more information. B AUX/MTRX button This button selects the Aux/Mtrx Fader mode, in which the faders control Aux Send or Matrix Send levels, depending on the currently selected Layer. Its indicator lights up when this mode is selected. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 44 for more information. DISPLAY ACCESS 1 2 3 4 DISPLAY ACCESS 5 6 DATA DIO SETUP UTILITY MIDI REMOTE METER VIEW PAIR GROUP INPUT PATCH OUTPUT PATCH 7 8 9 J K L A DATA button This button is used to select the Save, Load, and File pages, which are used to save and load DM2000 data to SmartMedia. See “Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia” on page 231 for more information. B DIO button This button is used to select the following pages: Word Clock Select, Dither, Cascade In, Cascade Out, Sampling Rate Converter, and Higher Sample Rate Data Format. See “Digital I/O & Cascading” on page 50 for more information. C SETUP button This button is used to select the following pages: Preferences 1, Preferences 2, Preferences 3, MIDI/TO HOST Setup, GPI Setup, Input Port Name, Output Port Name, Time Reference, Time Signature, and the Remote Port Setup. D UTILITY button This button is used to select the following pages: Oscillator, Channel Status Monitor, and Battery Check. E REMOTE button This button is used to select the Remote pages. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. F MIDI button This button is used to select the following pages: MIDI Setup, Program Change Assign Table, Control Change Assign Table, and Bulk Dump. See “MIDI” on page 182 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 9 G METER button This button is used to select the following pages: Input Channel Meter, Master Meter, Effect Input/Output Meter, Effect 1-2 Input/Output Meter, Effect 1–8 Input/Output Meter, Stereo Meter, and Metering Position. See “Metering” on page 103 for more information. H VIEW button This button is used to select the following pages: Parameter View, Fader View, and Channel Library. See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124, “Viewing Channel Fader Settings” on page 125, and “Channel Library” on page 140 for more information. I PAIR button This button is used to select the Input and Output Pair pages. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information. J GROUP button This button is used to select the following pages: Fader group, Mute group, Output Fader group, Output Mute group, Input Equalizer Link, Output Equalizer Link, Input Comp Link, and the Output Comp Link. K INPUT PATCH button This button is used to select the following pages: Input Channel Patch, Input Channel Insert In Patch, Effects 1-2 Input Patch, Effects 3–8 Input Patch, Input Channel Name, and Input Patch Library. See “Input Patching” on page 61 for more information. L OUTPUT PATCH button This button is used to select the following pages: Slot Output Patch, Omni Out Patch, Output Insert In Patch, Input Channel Direct Out Destination, 2TR Out Digital, Graphic Equalizer Insert, Output Channel Name, and Output Patch Library. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more information. EFFECTS/PLUG-INS 2 3 4 5 1 EFFECTS / PLUG INS DISPLAY INTERNAL GRAPHIC PLUG INS CHANNEL EFFECTS EQUALIZERS INSERTS 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 6 1 7 2 3 4 8 A EFFECTS/PLUG-INS DISPLAY button This button is used to select the following pages: Effects Edit, Effects Library, Graphic Equalizer Edit, Graphic Equalizer Library, Plug-In Setup, and Plug-In Edit. See “Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs” on page 148 for more information. B INTERNAL EFFECTS button This button is used to select the internal effects processors in conjunction with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] buttons. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Editing Effects” on page 150 for more information. C GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS button This button is used to select the GEQs in conjunction with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–6] buttons. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Editing GEQs” on page 155 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 10 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel D PLUG-INS button This button is used to select the Plug-Ins in conjunction with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] buttons. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Editing Plug-Ins” on page 153 for more information. E CHANNEL INSERTS button If an internal effects processor or Y56K card effects chain is inserted in the currently selected channel, the relevant Effects Edit or Plug-In Edit page appears when this button is pressed, and its indicator lights up. In addition, the corresponding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] button indicator flashes. If it’s a Y56K that is inserted, the [PLUG-INS] button indicator also flashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button indicator flashes. A warning message appears if there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected channel. See “Editing Effects” on page 150 and “Editing Plug-Ins” on page 153 for more information. F EFFECTS/PLUG-INS 1–8 buttons These buttons are used to select the internal effects processors, GEQs, and Plug-Ins in conjunction with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [INTERNAL EFFECTS], [GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS], and [PLUG-INS] buttons. The button indicator of the currently selected internal effects processor, GEQ, or Plug-In lights up. Since there are six GEQs, buttons [7] and [8] are inactive when the [GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS] button’s indicator is lit. When the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button indicator is lit, all of these buttons are inactive. G Parameter Up/Down buttons These buttons are used to select the rows of internal effects processor and Plug-In parameters for editing with Parameter controls 1–4. The parameters in the currently selected row appear highlighted. Up to 16 parameters can be displayed at a time. If more are available, an up or down arrow is displayed. See “Editing Effects” on page 150 and “Editing Plug-Ins” on page 153 for more information. H Parameter controls 1–4 These are rotary controls and push switches. The rotary controls are used to edit the parameters of the currently selected internal effects processor, Plug-In, or GEQ. When the Effects Edit page is selected, they control the currently selected row of parameters, rows being selected by the Parameter Up/Down buttons. When the Graphic Equalizer Edit page is selected, Parameter control #1 selects the frequency bands and Parameter control #4 sets the gain of the selected band. Parameter controls #2 and #3 are inactive. See “Editing Effects” on page 150, “Editing Plug-Ins” on page 153, and “Editing GEQs” on page 155 for more information. The push switches are used to punch the Effects or Plug-In parameters currently being controlled by the rotary controls in and out during Automix recording. See “Punching In & Out Individual Parameters” on page 175 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 11 Display Section 1 2 3 4 5 F1 F2 F3 F4 A Display This 320 x 240 dot display with fluorescent backlight displays pages, information on the currently selected Scene and channel, the sampling rate, and more. See “About the Display” on page 35 for more information. B Contrast control This control is used to adjust the contrast of the display. C F1–F4 buttons These buttons are used to select the pages whose tabs are currently visible. See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 36 for more information. D Left Tab Scroll button This button, which is active only when the left Tab Scroll arrow is displayed, is used to display the tabs of pages available to the left of the currently selected page. See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 36 for more information. E Right Tab Scroll button This button, which is active only when the right Tab Scroll arrow is displayed, is used to display the tabs of pages available to the right of the currently selected page. See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 36 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 12 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel SELECTED CHANNEL Section SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING PHASE / INSERT DELAY FB DISPLAY DISPLAY 1 DISPLAY 2 MIX ON INSERT ON TIME AUX / MATRIX SEND 3 4 DISPLAY FOLLOW PAN 5 6 7 8 STEREO LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL ON ON ON ON AUX 1 / MATRIX 1 AUX 2 / MATRIX 2 AUX 3 / MATRIX 3 AUX 4 / MATRIX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 AUX 9 AUX 10 AUX 11 AUX 12 BANK DIRECT DYNAMICS DISPLAY GATE / COMP THRESHOLD RANGE ATTACK DECAY HOLD THRESHOLD RATIO ATTACK RELEASE GAIN LINK GRAB EFFECT GATE COMP GATE ON COMP ON PAN / SURROUND DISPLAY L L R ODD EVEN R EQUALIZER LOW DISPLAY CHANNEL LOW MID FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY Q Q HIGH FREQUENCY Q Q GAIN GAIN COPY HIGH MID ATT. GAIN GAIN EQ ON dB dB 125 1.00 Hz 4.00 Hz kHz kHz PASTE dB Hz dB 10.0 kHz Hz kHz The subsections of the SELECTED CHANNEL section are explained below. ROUTING 1 ROUTING DISPLAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 STEREO DIRECT 5 2 FOLLOW PAN 3 4 A ROUTING DISPLAY button This button is used to select the following pages: Input Channel Routing, Bus to Stereo, and Bus to Stereo Library. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 and “Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out” on page 87 for more information. B FOLLOW PAN button This button determines whether or not the currently selected Input Channel’s pan setting is applied to the Bus Outs. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 for more information. C STEREO button This button is used to route the currently selected Input Channel to the Stereo Out. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 for more information. D DIRECT button This button is used to route the currently selected Input Channel to its Direct Out. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 13 E ROUTING 1–8 buttons These buttons are used to route the currently selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs. The button indicators of Bus Outs to which the Input Channel is routed light up. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 for more information. PHASE/INSERT 1 PHASE / INSERT DISPLAY INSERT ON 2 3 A PHASE/INSERT DISPLAY button This button is used to select the Input Channel Phase and Insert pages. See “Reversing the Signal Phase” on page 68 and “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information. B Phase [ ] button This button is used to reverse the signal phase of the currently selected Input Channel. Its indicator lights up when the phase is reversed. See “Reversing the Signal Phase” on page 68 for more information. C INSERT ON button This button is used to turn on and off the Insert of the currently selected channel. Its indicator lights up when the Insert is on. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information. DELAY 1 DELAY FB DISPLAY MIX ON TIME 2 3 45 A DELAY DISPLAY button This button is used to select the Delay pages. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information. B ON button This button is used to turn on and off the Delay of the currently selected channel. Its indicator lights up when the Delay function is on. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information. C TIME control This control is used to set the delay time of the currently selected channel’s Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information. D FB/MIX indicators These indicators show whether the FB/MIX control is set to control Feedback Gain or Feedback Mix. The FB indicator lights up when it’s set to control Feedback Gain; the MIX indicator, when its set to control Feedback Mix. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information. E FB/MIX control This is a rotary control and push switch. When the currently selected channel is an Input Channel, the push switch can be used to select either Feedback Gain (FB) or Feedback Mix (MIX). The rotary control is used to set the Feedback Gain or Feedback Mix, as selected by the push switch. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 14 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel AUX/MATRIX SEND 1 AUX / MATRIX SEND 4 DISPLAY LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL 5 2 BANK 3 ON ON ON ON AUX 1 / MATRIX 1 AUX 2 / MATRIX 2 AUX 3 / MATRIX 3 AUX 4 / MATRIX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 AUX 9 AUX 10 AUX 11 AUX 12 A AUX/MATRIX SEND DISPLAY button The pages selected by this button depends on the type of channel currently selected. If it’s an Input Channel, it selects the Aux Send, Aux Send Pan, and Input Channel Aux View pages. If it’s an Output Channel, it selects the Matrix Send, Matrix Send Pan, and Matrix View pages. B BANK button This button is used to select Aux 1–4/Matrix 1–4, Aux 5–8, or Aux 9–12 for use with the AUX/MATRIX LEVEL controls and [ON] buttons. When an Output Channel is selected, the Aux 1–4/Matrix 1–4 bank is selected automatically and cannot be changed. See “Using the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL Controls” on page 89 for more information. C Bank indicators These indicators show which bank of Aux/Matrix Sends has been selected by the [BANK] button. When an Output Channel is selected, the Aux 1–4/Matrix 1–4 bank is selected automatically and cannot be changed. D LEVEL controls These controls are used to set the levels of the Aux or Matrix Send currently selected by the [BANK] button. If the currently selected channel is an Input Channel, they control Aux Send levels. If it’s a Bus Out, Aux Send, or the Stereo Out, they control Matrix Send levels. See “Setting Aux Send Levels” on page 89 and “Setting Matrix Send Levels” on page 97 for more information. E ON buttons These buttons are used to mute the Aux/Matrix Sends currently selected by the [BANK] button. The button indicators of channels that are on light up. If the currently selected channel is an Input Channel, they mute Aux Sends. If the currently selected channel is a Bus Out, Aux Send, or the Stereo Out, they mute Matrix Sends. See “Muting Aux Sends (ON/OFF)” on page 90 and “Muting Matrix Sends (ON/OFF)” on page 98 for more information. DYNAMICS 2 1 3 DYNAMICS DISPLAY GATE / COMP THRESHOLD RANGE ATTACK DECAY HOLD THRESHOLD RATIO ATTACK RELEASE GAIN GATE COMP GATE ON COMP ON 4 5 6 A DYNAMICS DISPLAY button This button is used to select the following pages: Gate Edit, Gate Library, Comp Edit, and Comp Library. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69 and “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 15 B GATE/COMP button This button is used to set the rotary controls for either Gate or Compressor operation. When an Output Channel is selected, Compressor is selected automatically and cannot be changed. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69 and “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. C THRESHOLD, RANGE, ATTACK, DECAY, HOLD (THRESHOLD, RATIO, ATTACK, RELEASE, GAIN) controls When the GATE/COMP button is set to GATE, these controls set the Threshold, Range, Attack, Decay, and Hold parameters of the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate. When it’s set to COMP, they set the Threshold, Ratio, Attack, Release, and Gain parameters of the currently selected channel’s Compressor. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69 and “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. D GATE ON button This button is used to turn the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate on and off. Its indicator lights up when the Gate is on. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69 for more information. E COMP ON button This button is used to turn the currently selected channel’s Compressor on and off. Its indicator lights up when the Compressor is on. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. F GATE/COMP indicators These indicators show whether the rotary controls are set to control either a Gate or a Compressor. The GATE indicator lights up when they’re set to control a Gate; the COMP indicator, when they’re set to control a Compressor. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69 and “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. PAN/SURROUND 1 PAN / SURROUND DISPLAY L R ODD EVEN R L 2 3 4 LINK GRAB EFFECT 5 6 7 8 A PAN/SURROUND DISPLAY button This button is used to select the Input Channel Pan pages, the Surround Mode page, and the Surround Edit pages. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 76 and “Using Surround Pan” on page 77. B L & R buttons These buttons can be used to select horizontally or vertically partnered Input or Output Channels. They can be used to select the left and right channels when a Matrix Send or the Stereo Out is selected. For Input Channels, in Individual Pan mode, the [L] button indicator lights up when an odd/left channel is selected; the [R] button indicator, when an even/right channel is selected. In Gang or Inverse Gang Pan mode, the button indicator of the other channel in the pair flashes when its partner is selected. C PAN display This 10-segment display indicates the pan position of the currently selected Input Channel. When pan is set to center, the center two segments light up. When a Matrix Send or the Stereo Out is selected, it displays the balance. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 16 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel D PAN control This rotary control is used to pan the currently selected Input Channel. When a Matrix Send or the Stereo Out is selected, it is used to set the balance. For Input Channels in Gang or Inverse Gang Pan mode, horizontally or vertically paired Input Channels are panned simultaneously. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 76, “Balancing the Stereo Out” on page 84, and “Balancing Matrix Send Masters” on page 101. E LINK button This button, which is enabled only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected, is used to link the PAN control and the Joystick so that either control can be used for normal and surround panning. It’s a global setting that applies to all Input Channels. Its indicator lights up when the PAN control and Joystick are linked. If the Joystick is set to control effects (i.e., the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit), this button is disabled. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 76 and “Using Surround Pan” on page 77 for more information. F GRAB button This button, which is enabled only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected, is used to turn on and off Joystick control for the currently selected Input Channel. Its indicator lights up when Grab is on. When Grab is on, the Joystick can be used to control the currently selected Input Channel’s surround pan position. When turned off, the Joystick does not control surround pan. If the PAN control and the Joystick are linked (i.e., the [LINK] button indicator is lit), Grab is turned off if the PAN control is adjusted. If the Joystick is set to control effects (i.e., the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit), this button is disabled. G EFFECT button This button is used to select the Joystick for parameter control of the Reverb 5.1 effect. Its indicator lights up when Reverb 5.1 effect control is on, and the Joystick cannot be used for surround panning. See “REVERB 5.1” on page 286 for more information. H Joystick This control can be used for surround panning, normal panning, or parameter control of the Reverb 5.1 effect. When the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit, the Joystick controls the Reverb 5.1 effect. See “REVERB 5.1” on page 286 for more information. When the [EFFECT] button indicator is off and the [GRAB] button indicator is on, the Joystick controls surround panning of the currently selected Input Channel. When the [EFFECT] button and [GRAB] button indicators are both off, the Joystick can still be used for surround panning if the Auto Grab preference is on. See “Using Surround Pan” on page 77 for more information. When the [EFFECT] button indicator is off but the [GRAB] button and [LINK] button indicators are both on, the Joystick can be used for normal panning in unison with the PAN control. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 76 for more information. EQUALIZER 2 3 4 5 67 1 EQUALIZER LOW DISPLAY CHANNEL LOW MID FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY Q Q HIGH FREQUENCY Q GAIN GAIN COPY HIGH MID ATT. Q GAIN GAIN EQ ON dB dB 125 PASTE Hz kHz 1.00 Hz kHz dB 4.00 Hz kHz dB 10.0 Hz kHz A EQUALIZER DISPLAY button This button is used to select the following pages: Equalizer Edit, Equalizer Library, Input Channel Attenuator/Shifter, and Output Attenuator. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 17 B EQ ON button This button is used to turn the EQ of the currently selected channel on and off. Its indicator lights up when the EQ is on. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information. C ATT control This control is used to attenuate the pre-EQ signal of the currently selected channel. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for more information. D FREQUENCY/Q indicators These indicators show whether each FREQUENCY/Q control is set to control frequency or Q. The FREQUENCY indicator lights up when it’s set to control frequency; the Q indicator, when it’s set to control Q. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information. E FREQUENCY/Q controls These are rotary controls and push switches. The push switches are used to select either frequency or Q. The current setting is shown by the FREQUENCY/Q indicators. The rotary controls are used to set the frequency or Q, as selected by the push switches. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information. F EQ GAIN controls These controls are used to set the gain of each EQ band. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information. G EQ displays Normally these displays show the frequency of each band. When the GAIN is adjusted, the gain value is displayed. When the Q is adjusted, the Q value is displayed. If the gain or Q is not adjusted for two seconds, the frequency value reappears. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information. CHANNEL COPY CHANNEL 1 COPY 2 PASTE A COPY button This button is used to copy channel settings to the Copy buffer. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information. B PASTE button This button is used to paste the settings in the Copy buffer to the specified channel. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 18 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel LAYER LAYER 1 1 24 REMOTE 1 25 48 REMOTE 2 49 72 REMOTE 3 73 96 REMOTE 4 3 2 MASTER A 1–24, 25–48, 49–72 & 73–96 buttons These buttons select the Input Channel Layers, which determine which Input Channels are controlled by the channel strips. The LAYER button indicator for the currently selected Layer lights up. See “Selecting Layers” on page 42 for more information. B MASTER button This button selects the Master Layer, from which the channel strips control Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Matrix Sends. Its indicator lights up when the Master Layer is selected. See “Selecting Layers” on page 42 for more information. C REMOTE 1–4 buttons These buttons select the Remote Layers, which can be used to control external devices, including DAWs. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. The LAYER button indicator for the currently selected Remote Layer lights up. See “Selecting Layers” on page 42 for more information. STEREO STEREO 1 AUTO 2 SEL 3 ON 0 5 10 This button is used exclusively to set Automix recording and playback for the Stereo Out. Its indicator lights up orange in Record-Ready mode, red while recording, and green during playback. See “Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons” on page 169 for more information. B SEL button The Stereo Out [SEL] button is used exclusively to select the Stereo Out for editing with the SELECTED CHANNEL section. Its indicator lights up when the Stereo Out is selected. Each time it’s pressed, the selection toggles between the Stereo Out’s left and right channels. See “Selecting Channels” on page 43 for more information. It can also be used to add and remove the Stereo Out to and from EQ, Comp, Fader, and Mute groups. C ON button 15 4 A AUTO button This button is used exclusively to mute the Stereo Out. Its indicator lights up when the Stereo Out is on. See “Muting the Stereo Out (ON/OFF)” on page 83 for more information. 20 30 40 50 60 70 STEREO DM2000—Owner’s Manual D Fader This 100 mm touch-sensitive motorized fader is used exclusively to adjust the level of the Stereo Out. See “Setting the Stereo Out Level” on page 83 for more information. It can be grouped with other Output Channel faders for simultaneous operation. See “Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more information. It can also be used to select the Stereo Out, see “Auto Channel Select & Touch Sense Select” on page 44, or to punch the Stereo Out in and out during Automix recording. See “Punching In & Out Individual Parameters” on page 175 for more information. Control Surface 19 TRACK ARMING 1 TRACK ARMING DISPLAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 A B C D 2 ALL CLEAR MASTER 4 5 TRACK ARMING GROUP 3 A TRACK ARMING DISPLAY button This button is used to select the following pages: Track Arming Group, MTR Track Arming Configuration, and Master Track Arming Configuration. See “Arming Machine Tracks” on page 225 for more information. B TRACK ARMING 1–24 buttons These buttons are used to arm tracks on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Their indicators light up when tracks are armed. See “Arming Machine Tracks” on page 225 for more information. C TRACK ARMING GROUP A–D buttons These buttons are used to select the track arming groups A, B, C, and D. The indicator for the currently selected group lights up. See “Arming Machine Tracks” on page 225 for more information. D ALL CLEAR button This button is used to clear all track arming on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). See “Arming Machine Tracks” on page 225 for more information. E MASTER button This button is used to select Master or MTR machines for track arming. Its indicator lights up when Master is selected, and is off when MTR is selected. See “About Machine Control (MMC & P2)” on page 220 for more information. SCENE MEMORY 1 SCENE MEMORY DISPLAY 00 STORE 23 4 RECALL 5 6 A SCENE MEMORY DISPLAY button This button is used to select the following pages: Scene Memory, Input Channel Fade Time, Output Fade Time, Recall Safe, and Scene Memory Sort. See “Scene Memories” on page 157 for more information. B Scene memory display This displays the number of the currently selected Scene memory. See “Scene Memories” on page 157 for more information. C Edit indicator This indicates that the current mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was recalled last. See “Edit Buffer & Edit Indicator” on page 157 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 20 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel D STORE button This button is used to store the current Scene to the selected Scene memory. See “Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page 159. E Scene Up/Down buttons These buttons are used to select Scene memories. Pressing the Scene Up [ ] button increments the selection; pressing the Scene Down [ ] button decrements the selection. Holding down a button causes the selection to increment/decrement continuously. See “Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page 159. F RECALL button This button is used to recall the selected Scene memory. See “Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page 159. AUTOMIX 2345678 1 AUTOMIX DISPLAY ENABLE REC SUSPEND WRITE ABORT/ AUTOUNDO REC TOUCH LATCH RETURN RELATIVE TOUCH SENSE READ TRIM OFF AUX ON EQ OVERWRITE FADER ON PAN SURROUND AUX 9 The small text labels below the AUTOMIX buttons apply to the DAW Remote Layer. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. A AUTOMIX DISPLAY button This button is used to select the following pages: Automix Main, Automix Memory, Input Channel Fader Edit, Event Copy, and Event Edit. See “Automix” on page 164. B ENABLE button This button is used to enable and disable the Automix function. It works in unison with the ENABLED/DISABLED button on the Automix Main page. See “Automix Main Page” on page 165. C REC button This button is used with Automix recording. It works in unison with the REC button on the Automix Main page. See “REC” on page 168 for more information. D ABORT/UNDO button This button is used to abort Automix recording or playback. It works in unison with the ABORT button on the Automix Main page. See “ABORT” on page 168. When not recording or playing an Automix, it’s used to undo the Automix, in unison with the UNDO button on the Automix Main page. See “UNDO” on page 167 for more information. E AUTO-REC button This button is used to arm Automix Auto Recording function. It works in unison with the AUTO REC button on the Automix Main page. See “AUTO REC” on page 168 for more information. F RETURN button This button is used to select the Automix Edit Out mode. It works in unison with the EDIT OUT RETURN buttons on the Automix Main page. See “EDIT OUT” on page 166 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 21 G RELATIVE button This button is used to set the Automix Fader Edit mode. It works in unison with the FADER EDIT buttons on the Automix Main page. See “FADER EDIT” on page 167 for more information. H TOUCH SENSE button This button is used to turn on and off Fader Touch Sense for Automix recording. It works in unison with the TOUCH SENSE buttons on the Fader Edit pages. See “Fader Edit Pages” on page 170 for more information. I FADER, ON, PAN, SURROUND, AUX, AUX ON & EQ buttons These buttons are used to select the type of parameters that are recorded in an Automix. They work in unison with their counterparts on the Automix Main and Memory pages. See “OVERWRITE” on page 167 for more information. USER DEFINED KEYS 1 USER DEFINED KEYS DISPLAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 A USER DEFINED KEYS DISPLAY button This button is used to select the User Defined Key Assign page. See “Using the User Defined Keys” on page 230 for more information. B USER DEFINED KEYS 1–16 buttons Up to 16 functions, from a list of over 150, can be assigned to these buttons. See “Using the User Defined Keys” on page 230 for more information. These buttons have specific functions when the DAW Remote Layer is selected. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. LOCATOR 23456 1 78 LOCATOR LOCATE MEMORY DISPLAY 9 1 2 AUDITION PRE RETURN TO ZERO END 3 4 5 IN OUT POST ONLINE LOOP QUICK PUNCH 6 7 8 SET MTR ROLL REHEARSAL MASTER BACK JKLMNOPQ A LOCATOR DISPLAY button This button is used to select the Locate Memory and Machine Configuration pages. See “Setting the Locate Memories, Pre-roll, Post-roll & Roll-back” on page 224 and “Configuring Machines” on page 220 respectively for more information. B AUDITION button This button is used to turn on and off the Audition function on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up while the Audition function is on. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 22 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel C PRE button Pressing this button transmits a Locate command to the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2) in order to locate the Pre-Roll point. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed. The Pre-Roll point is a predefined number of seconds before the specified In point. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. D IN button Pressing this button transmits a Locate command to the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2) in order to locate the In point. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. E OUT button Pressing this button transmits a Locate command to the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2) in order to locate the Out point. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. F POST button Pressing this button transmits a Locate command to the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2) in order to locate the Post-Roll point. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed. The Post-Roll point is a predefined number of seconds after the specified Out point. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. G SET button This button is used when specifying the eight Locate points, In point, Out point, and Return to Zero point. Its indicator lights up while it’s pressed. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. H MTR button This button is used to select the MTR machine for Locator, Transport, Scrub, and Shuttle control (MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up when MTR is selected (the [MASTER] button indicator goes off). See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. I LOCATE MEMORY 1–8 buttons Pressing these buttons transmits Locate commands to the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2) in order to locate the Locate memory points. Their indicators light up momentarily when they’re pressed. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. J RETURN TO ZERO button Pressing this button transmits a Locate command to the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2) in order to locate the Return to Zero point. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. K END button Pressing this button transmits a Locate command when using the DAW Remote Layer in order to locate the end of the session. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. L ONLINE button This button is used to turn the Chase function on and off on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up while the Chase function is on. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. M LOOP button This button is used to turn on and off Loop Playback on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up when Loop Playback is on. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. N QUICK PUNCH button This button is used to turn on and off the Quick Punch function on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up when Quick Punch is on. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 23 O ROLL BACK button This button is used to roll back (i.e., rewind) the target machine (MMC or P2) from the current position by a predefined amount. Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. P REHEARSAL button This button is used to turn on and off the Rehearsal function on the target machine (MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up when Rehearsal is on. See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. Q MASTER button This button is used to select the Master machine for Locator, Transport, Scrub, and Shuttle control. Its indicator lights up when Master is selected (the [MTR] button indicator goes off). See “Using the Locator” on page 222 for more information. Data Entry & Transport 1 2 3 4 5 REW FF STOP PLAY REC 9 DISPLAY HISTORY 6 BACK FORWARD 7 DEC INC SHUTTLE 8 SCRUB ENTER J K L A REW button This button starts rewind on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up while rewinding is in progress. See “Transport Buttons” on page 221. B FF button This button starts fast forward on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up while fast forwarding is in progress. See “Transport Buttons” on page 221. C STOP button This button stops the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up momentarily when it’s pressed. See “Transport Buttons” on page 221. D PLAY button This button starts playback on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up while playback is in progress. See “Transport Buttons” on page 221. E REC button This button is used in conjunction with the [PLAY] button to start recording on the target machine (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up while recording is in progress. See “Transport Buttons” on page 221. F DISPLAY HISTORY BACK/FORWARD buttons These buttons work like the back and forward buttons on a Web browser, allowing you to return to recently displayed pages. See “Display History” on page 37 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 24 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel G SHUTTLE button This button is used to set the Parameter wheel to Shuttle mode for machine control (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up when Shuttle mode is on. See “Using Shuttle & Scrub” on page 222 for more information. H SCRUB button This button is used to set the Parameter wheel to Scrub mode for machine control (DAW, MMC or P2). Its indicator lights up when Scrub mode is on. See “Using Shuttle & Scrub” on page 222 for more information. I DEC & INC buttons These buttons are used to adjust parameter values. Pressing the [INC] button increases the value of the currently selected parameter by one. Pressing the [DEC] decreases it. Pressing and holding either button causes the parameter value to change continuously. These buttons can also be used to set on/off-type parameters, such as EQ ON/OFF. When such a parameter is selected, pressing the [DEC] button turns the function off, pressing the [INC] button turns it on. These buttons can also used to scroll through Scene and library lists. J ENTER button This button is used to select and finalize parameter settings, to set on/off-type parameters, such as EQ ON/OFF, and to enter characters when titling Scenes, Effects, and so on. When a Pan control is selected on a Pan display page, pressing this button resets the pan position to center. For certain parameters, the [ENTER] button supports double clicking (i.e., two quick presses). K Parameter wheel The Parameter wheel is used to edit parameter values, scroll through Scene and library lists, and to position the cursor when titling Scenes, Effects, and so on. Its detented action gives it a positive feel, allowing quick and accurate parameter editing. Turning it clockwise increases parameter values; turning it counterclockwise decreases them. Turning it fast allows quick parameter editing. The Parameter wheel is also used with the Shuttle and Scroll functions. See “Using Shuttle & Scrub” on page 222 for more information. L Cursor buttons These buttons are used to move the cursor around the display pages, selecting parameters and options. The cursor appears as a flashing box, making it easy to see which parameter or option is currently selected. Holding down a cursor button moves the cursor continuously in the respective direction. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 25 Monitor, Phones & Talkback Section 6 0 10 TALKBACK LEVEL 5 4 PHONES 0 10 0 10 0 10 SMALL TRIM STUDIO LEVEL PHONES LEVEL 1 2 3 A SMALL TRIM control This control is used to set the level of the SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. B STUDIO LEVEL control This control is used to set the level of the STUDIO MONITOR OUT. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 133 for more information. C PHONES LEVEL control This control is used to set the level of the PHONES. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. D PHONES jack This stereo TRS phone jack outputs the Control room signal for monitoring via a pair of stereo headphones. E Talkback mic Tip (left) 1/4" TRS phone plug Ring (right) Sleeve (ground) This built-in microphone is used for talkback. See “Using Talkback & Slate” on page 138 for more information. F TALKBACK LEVEL control This control is used to set the level of the built-in talkback microphone. See “Using Talkback & Slate” on page 138 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 26 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel MONITOR Section MONITOR The various subsections of the MONITOR section are explained below. DISPLAY STUDIO CONTROL ROOM STEREO AUX 11 AUX 12 STUDIO 1 MONITOR DISPLAY STUDIO SOLO 2 4 SOLO CONTRAST 3 CONTROL ROOM STEREO AUX 11 AUX 12 5 CLEAR CONTROL ROOM STEREO 2TR D1 2TR A1 2TR D2 2TR A2 2TR D3 STEREO ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 SURROUND BUS ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL MONO DIMMER SMALL A MONITOR DISPLAY button This button is used to select the following pages: Solo Setting, Control Room Setup, and Talkback Setup. See “Configuring Solo” on page 119, “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132, and “Using Talkback & Slate” on page 138 respectively for more information. When a Surround Pan mode is selected, the following pages can also be selected: Surround Monitor, Surround Monitor Setup, Surround Monitor Patch, and Surround Monitor Library. See “Surround Monitoring” on page 134 for more information. B CONTROL ROOM button This button selects the Control Room Monitor signal as the Studio Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 133 for more information. C STEREO button This button selects the Stereo Out signal as the Studio Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 133 for more information. D AUX 11 button 0 10 CONTROL ROOM LEVEL TALKBACK SLATE TALKBACK This button selects Aux Send #11 as the Studio Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 133 for more information. E AUX 12 button This button selects Aux Send #12 as the Studio Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 133 for more information. SOLO 1 2 SOLO SOLO CONTRAST 3 CLEAR A SOLO indicator This indicator flashes when one or more Channels are soloed, indicating that the Solo function is active. See “Soloing Channels” on page 118 for more information. B SOLO CONTRAST control This control is used to set the level balance between soloed Input Channels and the currently selected CONTROL ROOM source. It has no effect on soloed Output Channels. See “Soloing Channels” on page 118 for more information. C CLEAR button This button can be used to unsolo all soloed Channels. See “Soloing Channels” on page 118 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface 27 CONTROL ROOM CONTROL ROOM STEREO 1 2 3 7 2TR D1 2TR A1 2TR D2 2TR A2 2TR D3 STEREO ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 4 5 6 8 K B STEREO 2TR D2 button This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 2 as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. N C STEREO 2TR D3 button This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 3 as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. SURROUND 9 BUS J ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 L SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL M MONO DIMMER O SMALL P 0 10 CONTROL ROOM LEVEL A STEREO 2TR D1 button This button selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. D STEREO 2TR A1 button This button selects the 2TR IN ANALOG 1 as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. E STEREO 2TR A2 button This button selects the 2TR IN ANALOG 2 as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. F STEREO button This button selects the Stereo Out as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. G STEREO ASSIGN 1 button This button is used to select the assigned Output Channel as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Setup” on page 133 for more information. H STEREO ASSIGN 2 button This button is used to select the assigned Output Channel as the Control Room Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Control Room Setup” on page 133 for more information. I SURROUND BUS button This button is used to select the Bus Outs as the Surround Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Surround Monitoring” on page 134 for more information. J SURROUND ASSIGN 1 button This button is used to select the assigned Slot’s Inputs as the Surround Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Surround Monitoring” on page 134 for more information. K SURROUND ASSIGN 2 button This button is used to select the assigned Slot’s Inputs as the Surround Monitor signal source. Its indicator lights up when this source is selected. See “Surround Monitoring” on page 134 for more information. L SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control This control is used to adjust the level of the Surround Monitor signals. See “Surround Monitoring” on page 134 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 28 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel M MONO button This button is used to switch the Control Room Monitor signal into mono. Its indicator lights up when mono is selected. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. N DIMMER button This button is used to dim the Control Room Monitor and Surround Monitor signals. Its indicator lights up when these signals are dimmed. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. O SMALL button This button is used to route the Control Room Monitor signal to either the SMALL or LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUTs. When it’s off (indicator off), the signal is routed through to the LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUTs, and when it’s on (indicator on), the signal is routed through to the SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUTs. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. P CONTROL ROOM LEVEL control This control is used to adjust the level of the Control Room Monitor signal. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. TALKBACK TALKBACK 1 SLATE 2 TALKBACK A SLATE button This button turns on the Slate function, which distributes the Talkback mic signal to all Bus Outs, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out. See “Using Talkback & Slate” on page 138 for more information. B TALKBACK button This button turns on the Talkback function, which distributes the Talkback mic signal to the Studio Monitor Outs and any Slot or Omni Outputs specified on the Talkback Setup page. See “Using Talkback & Slate” on page 138 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Power Section (p. 34) OMNI OUT Section (p. 31) Analog Master I/O Section (p. 30) Digital I/O & Control Section (p. 32) AD Input Section (p. 30) SLOT Section (p. 34) Rear Panel 29 Rear Panel DM2000—Owner’s Manual 30 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel AD Input Section A INPUT A & B (BAL) connectors 1 2 AD Inputs 1 through 24 feature balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors and balanced 1/4-inch phone jacks, both with a nominal input range of –60 dB to +10 dB. Phantom powering (+48 V) is supplied to the XLR-type connectors, with individual ON/OFF switches on each input. The phone jacks, which can also be used with unbalanced phone plugs, have priority over the XLR-type connectors, so when a phone plug is inserted, the XLR-type connector is disconnected. These inputs can be patched individually to the Input Channels or Insert Ins. With their high sensitivity and PAD switches, these inputs can handle a wide range of signals, from condenser microphones to “hot” line levels. See “AD Input Section” on page 48 for more information. Tip (hot) 1 (ground) 3 (cold) Male XLR plug 1/4" TRS phone plug 2 (hot) Ring (cold) Sleeve (ground) B INSERT IN & OUT +4dB (BAL) connectors These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks are used to insert external signal processors, etc., into AD Inputs 1 through 24. They are wired: sleeve–ground, ring–cold, tip–hot. The nominal signal level of both jacks is +4 dB. Inserts can be turned on and off individually by using the INSERT ON/OFF switches. See “AD Input Section” on page 48 for more information. Tip (hot) 1/4" TRS phone plug Ring (cold) Sleeve (ground) Analog Master I/O Section 1 2 3 6 4 5 7 A STUDIO MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL) Tip (hot) These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks, nominal output 1/4" TRS phone plug Ring (cold) level +4 dB, output the analog Studio Monitor signal for monitoring in the actual studio. The source, which is Sleeve (ground) selected by using the STUDIO buttons in the MONITOR section, can be Aux Send #11, Aux Send #12, the Stereo Out, or Control Room. The output level is controlled by the STUDIO LEVEL control. See “Studio Monitoring” on page 133 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 31 Rear Panel B STEREO OUT +4 dB (BAL) These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors, nominal Female XLR plug output level +4 dB, output the analog Stereo Out signal and are typically connected the stereo inputs of a 2-track recorder. They are wired pin 1–ground, pin 2–hot (+), and pin 3–cold (–). See “Stereo Out Connectors” on page 82. 2 (hot) 3 (cold) 1 (ground) C SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL) These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors, nominal output level +4 dB, output the analog Small Control Room Monitor signal and are typically used to feed the control room’s nearfield monitors. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. Female XLR plug 2 (hot) 3 (cold) 1 (ground) D LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL) These balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors, nominal output level +4 dB, output the analog Large Control Room Monitor signal and are typically used to feed the control room’s main monitors. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. Female XLR plug 2 (hot) 3 (cold) 1 (ground) E 2TR IN ANALOG 1 +4 dB (BAL) Tip (hot) These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks, nominal input 1/4" TRS phone plug Ring (cold) level +4 dB, are typically used to connect the analog stereo outputs of a 2-track recorder. Signals connected here can Sleeve (ground) be monitored via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT by pressing the CONTROL ROOM [2TR A1] button. In addition, this input can be patched to Input Channels or Insert Ins. See “2TR Analog INs” on page 49. F STEREO OUT –10 dBV (UNBAL) These unbalanced phono connectors, nominal output level –10 dBV, output the analog Stereo Out signal and are typically connected to the stereo inputs of a 2-track recorder. See “Stereo Out Connectors” on page 82. Phono plug Tip (hot) Sleeve (ground) G 2TR IN ANALOG 2 –10 dBV (UNBAL) Phono plug Tip (hot) These unbalanced phono connectors, nominal input level –10 dBV, are typically used to connect the analog stereo outputs of Sleeve (ground) a 2-track recorder. Signals connected here can be monitored via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUTs by pressing the CONTROL ROOM [2TR A2] button. In addition, this input can be patched to Input Channels or Insert Ins. See “2TR Analog INs” on page 49. OMNI OUT Section 1 A OMNI OUT +4dB (BAL) These balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks, nominal output level +4 dB, provide eight analog outputs that can be patched to the following: Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Insert Outs, Direct Outs, or Surround Monitor Channels. See “Omni Outs” on page 49. Tip (hot) 1/4" TRS phone plug Ring (cold) Sleeve (ground) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 32 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel Digital I/O & Control Section 1 2 N 3 4 O 5 6 7 8 9 P J K Q L M R A KEYBOARD connector A PS/2 compatible keyboard can be connected here for quick entry of scene and library titles and channel names. See “Using a Keyboard” on page 38 for more information. B SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT connector This balanced XLR-3-31-type connector is used to input SMPTE timecode for synchronizing the Automix function. See “Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate” on page 171. C MTC TIME CODE INPUT connector This 5-pin DIN connector is used to input MTC for synchronizing the Automix function. See “Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate” on page 171. D USB TO HOST port This USB port is for MIDI communication between the DM2000 and a host computer with a USB port. See “MIDI I/O” on page 182 for more information. E SERIAL TO HOST port This 8-pin mini DIN port is for MIDI communication between the DM2000 and a host computer with a serial port. See “MIDI I/O” on page 182 for more information. F WORD CLOCK OUT 2 connector This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal at half the clock rate of the DM2000 when using 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz. See “Wordclock Connections” on page 50 for more information. G WORD CLOCK OUT 1 connector This BNC connector outputs a wordclock signal at the same clock rate as the DM2000. See “Wordclock Connections” on page 50 for more information. H WORD CLOCK 75Ω ON/OFF termination switch This switch applies 75Ω termination to the WORD CLOCK IN. See “Terminating External Wordclocks” on page 52 for more information. I WORD CLOCK IN connector This BNC connector is for connecting an external wordclock signal. See “Selecting the Wordclock Source” on page 51 for more information. J 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 3 This phono connector outputs consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio, and is typically connected to the digital stereo input of a 2-track recorder. The following signals can be patched to this output: Stereo Out, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, Direct Outs, Insert Outs, and Control Room. The sampling rate of the digital audio output can be set independently of the DM2000 sampling rate by using the internal sampling rate converter. Dither can be applied for digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems. See “2TR Digital Outs” on page 52 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Rear Panel 33 K 2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 & 2 These XLR-3-32-type connectors output AES/EBU format digital audio, and are typically connected to the digital stereo inputs of 2-track recorders. The following signals can be patched to these outputs: Stereo Out, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, Direct Outs, Insert Outs, and Control Room. The sampling rate of the digital audio output can be set independently of the DM2000 sampling rate by using the internal sampling rate converters. Dither can be applied for digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems. See “2TR Digital Outs” on page 52 for more information. L 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 3 This phono connector accepts consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio, and is typically used to connect the digital stereo output of a 2-track recorder. Signals connected here can be monitored via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT by pressing the CONTROL ROOM [2TR D3] button. In addition, this input can be patched to Input Channels or Insert Ins. Unsynchronized digital audio signals can be converted by the internal sampling rate converters. See “2TR Digital Ins” on page 53 for more information. M 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 & 2 These XLR-3-31-type connectors accept AES/EBU format digital audio, and are typically used to connect the digital stereo outputs of 2-track recorders. Signals connected here can be monitored via the CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT by pressing the CONTROL ROOM [2TR D1] button or [2TR D2] button. In addition, these inputs can be patched Input Channels or Insert Ins. Unsynchronized digital audio signals can be converted by the internal sampling rate converters. See “2TR Digital Ins” on page 53 for more information. N METER port This 15-pin D-sub connector is for connecting the optional MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge. O CONTROL port This 25-pin D-sub connector provides access to the GPI (General Purpose Interface) through which external equipment can be triggered when specified DM2000 faders or USER DEFINE KEYS are operated. It can also be used to control a “RECORDING” light outside of a studio, to trigger the Solo function of an 02R Digital Recording Console, or to turn on Talkback from an external device. See “GPI (General Purpose Interface)” on page 228 for more information. P REMOTE port This 9-pin D-sub connector can be used to connect an optional Yamaha AD824 AD Converter, providing remote and recallable control of its head amp settings. Machines that support the Sony P2 protocol can also be controlled from the DM2000 via this port. A straight cable should be used to connect a P2 device; a reversed cable for an AD824. See “Controlling AD824 A/D Converters” on page 229 and “About Machine Control (MMC & P2)” on page 220 for more information. Q MIDI IN, OUT & THRU ports These standard MIDI IN, OUT, and THRU ports are used to connect the DM2000 to other MIDI equipment. Supported MIDI messages include Program Changes for Scene recall, Control Changes and Parameter Changes for real-time parameter control, Bulk Dump for data storage, MIDI Clock, MTC, and MMC. See “MIDI I/O” on page 182 for more information. R CASCADE IN & OUT ports These 64-pin connectors can be used to cascade up to four DM2000s to create a multiple-unit mixing system. The DM2000 can also be cascaded with an 02R Digital Recording Console. See “Cascading Consoles” on page 58 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 34 Chapter 2—Control Surface & Rear Panel Power Section 1 4 2 3 A POWER ON/OFF switch This switch is used to turn on the power to the DM2000. See “Turning On & Off the DM2000” on page 35 for more information. B Grounding screw For electrical safety reasons, and correct operation of the touch-sensitive faders, it’s important that the DM2000 is grounded properly. The supplied power cord has a three-pin plug, and if the ground terminal of the AC outlet is grounded, then the unit will be grounded sufficiently through the power cord. If the AC outlet does not provide a suitable ground, this screw must be connected to a suitable ground point. Grounding is also an effective method for eliminating hum, interference, and other noise. C AC IN connector This connector is used to connect the DM2000 to an AC outlet via the supplied power cord. See “Connecting the Power Cord” on page 35 for more information. D Cooling fan The cooling fan expels air out through this outlet. If the airflow is restricted, the DM2000 may overheat, so make sure this outlet is not blocked. SLOT Section 1 A SLOT 1–6 These six slots are for use with optional mini YGDAI cards, which offer a variety of analog and digital I/O options. See “Slot I/O” on page 54 for more information. Slot inputs can be patched to Input Channels or Insert Ins. See “Input Patching” on page 61 for more information. The following signals can be patched to the Slot Outputs: Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, Stereo Out, Insert Outs, Direct Outs, and Surround Monitor Channels. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Operating Basics 35 3 Operating Basics Connecting the Power Cord Warning: Turn off all equipment connected to the DM2000 before making any power connections. Connect the socket-end of the supplied power cord to the AC IN on the rear panel of the DM2000. Connect the plug-end to a suitable AC wall outlet, one that conforms to the power supply requirements stated on the DM2000’s rear panel. Turning On & Off the DM2000 1 2 To prevent loud clicks and thumps in your speakers, turn on your audio equipment in the following order (reverse this order when turning off)—sound sources, multitrack and master recorders, DM2000, monitoring power amplifiers. To turn on the DM2000, press the [POWER] switch. The startup page appears for a while, and then the last selected display page appears. To turn off the DM2000, press the [POWER] switch again. About the Display All DM2000 mix parameters can be edited on the various display pages. EDIT indicator MIDI indicator Current Scene Sampling rate Selected DISPLAY Page title Page # Selected channel Channel name Page area Page tab scroll arrow Page tabs Current Scene: The number and title of the currently selected Scene memory are displayed here. See “Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons” on page 159 for more information. If the selected Scene is write-protected, a padlock icon appears. See “Using the Scene Memory Page” on page 160 for more information. MIDI indicator: This indicator appears when the DM2000 is receiving MIDI data via the MIDI IN port, USB TO HOST port, or SERIAL TO HOST port. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 36 Chapter 3—Operating Basics EDIT indicator: This indicator appears when the current mix settings no longer match those of the Scene that was recalled last. It works in unison with the Edit indicator dot on the SCENE MEMORY display. See “Edit Buffer & Edit Indicator” on page 157 for more information. Selected DISPLAY: This indicates the currently selected display page group, for example, AUX, EQ, or AUTOMIX. Display page groups are selected by using the [DISPLAY] buttons. Sampling rate: This indicates the current sampling rate—44.1 kHz (44k), 48 kHz (48k), 88.2 kHz (88k), or 96 kHz (96k). Selected channel: The Input or Output Channel currently selected by the [SEL] buttons is indicated here. See “Selecting Channels” on page 43. The first four characters are the Channel ID (e.g., CH1–CH96, BUS1–BUS8, AUX1–AUX9, AX10–AX12, MT1L–MT4R, ST-L, ST-R. The second four, are the channel’s Short name. See “Naming Channels” on page 130. Channel name: Depending on the currently selected page, this is the Long name of either the currently selected channel or the channel selected by the cursor buttons. On some pages, the Aux Send pages, for example, it’s possible to edit Aux Send levels without having to select each Input Channel. Instead, Input Channel Aux Sends can be selected by using the cursor buttons. In this case, the name displayed here is different to the name displayed in the upper-right corner of the display. Page title: This is the title of the currently selected page. Page #: Depending on the group of pages currently selected, page numbers are displayed here. For example, although you can view only one Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page at a time, there are in fact 12 Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send pages, one for each of the 12 Aux Sends. Page numbers are also displayed when the following page groups are selected: Matrix Sends, Effects, and GEQ. Page area: This area of the display is where the various display pages appear. Page tabs: These tabs are used when selecting pages. Up to four tabs are visible at a time. See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 36 for more information. Page tab scroll arrows: These arrows indicate that there are more pages available. See “Selecting Display Pages” on page 36 for more information. Selecting Display Pages • • • • Display pages are grouped by function, and each group of pages can be selected by using the following [DISPLAY] buttons: MATRIX SELECT, AUX SELECT, DISPLAY ENCODER MODE, EFFECTS/PLUG-INS, ROUTING, PHASE/INSERT, DELAY, AUX/MATRIX SEND, DYNAMICS, PAN/SURROUND, EQUALIZER, TRACK ARMING, SCENE MEMORY, AUTOMIX, USER DEFINED KEYS, LOCATOR, MONITOR. Further page groups can be selected by using the DISPLAY ACCESS buttons. The next page in the group can be selected by pressing the [DISPLAY] button. Previous pages can be selected by pressing and holding down the [DISPLAY] button. The first page in the group can be selected by double-clicking the [DISPLAY] button. Pages whose tabs are currently displayed can be selected by using the F1–F4 buttons. F1 Tab Scroll arrows Tab scroll buttons DM2000—Owner’s Manual F2 F3 F4 If there are more pages available than the four whose tabs are currently displayed, depending on whether they are located to the left or right, either the left or right Tab Scroll arrow appears. Pressing either the Left or Right Tab Scroll button displays the tabs of these pages, which can then be selected by using the F1–F4 buttons. Display History 37 When parameters are divided among several pages, for example, the Input Channel Attenuators, which are divided among four pages, the page containing the parameter for the currently selected channel is selected automatically when channels on different Layers are selected. For example, if the Input Channel 1–24 Attenuator page is currently selected, and then you select, say, Input Channel #25 by using the LAYER [25–48] button and [SEL] button #1, the Input Channel 25–48 Attenuator page is selected automatically. The currently selected page in a group, and the parameter selected on that page, are remembered when you select another group of pages, so when you return to that group, by pressing its [DISPLAY] button, that page is displayed with the same parameter selected. The Auto Display preferences can be set so that certain pages appear automatically when a corresponding control is adjusted. For example, if the “Auto EQUALIZER Display” preference is on, the EQ page appears automatically when a SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER control is operated. See page 234 for information on the Auto Display preferences. Display History The Display History function works like the history function on a Web browser, and allows you to return quickly to up to eight recently displayed pages. Each time you view a page for more than five secBACK FORWARD onds, it’s added to the Display History buffer. Pressing the DISPLAY HISTORY [BACK] button selects the previous page in the buffer. Pressing the DISPLAY HISTORY [FORWARD] button selects the next page in the buffer. If there are no pages in the buffer, nothing happens when these buttons are pressed. You can scroll forwards or backwards through all the pages in the buffer by pressing and holding the [BACK] or [FORWARD] button respectively. Scrolling like this continuously cycles through all the pages in the buffer. You can clear the Display History buffer by pressing the [BACK] and [FORWARD] buttons simultaneously. DISPLAY HISTORY Display Page Controls Operation of the various buttons, rotary controls, and faders that appear on the display pages is straightforward. The only items that require a special mention are the parameter boxes, such as the GEQ Insert parameter box shown here. Operation of these boxes consists of two steps. First you select a value, typically by using the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons. Second you confirm your selection, while the value is flashing, by pressing the [ENTER] button. If you select another parameter while the value is still flashing, it remains unchanged. Parameter Windows When a rotary control in the SELECTED CHANNEL section is operated, if the corresponding parameter does not appear on the currently selected page, a parameter window like the one shown here is displayed while the control is adjusted. If the control is not adjusted for awhile, the window closes automatically. If the Auto Display preference for the adjusted parameter is on, the page containing that parameter appears instead of this parameter window. Confirmation Messages For certain functions, the DM2000 prompts you for confirmation before executing them, as shown here. Press YES to execute the function, or press NO to cancel. If no action is taken for awhile, the confirmation window closes automatically and the function is not executed. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 38 Chapter 3—Operating Basics Title Edit Window The Title Edit window is used to enter titles for Scene and library memories, automixes, and so on. Depending on the item being titled, the number of characters that can be entered is either 4, 12, or 16. The following screen shots show the available characters. The one on the left shows uppercase characters and various punctuation marks. That on the right, lowercase characters and numbers. Use the cursor buttons to select characters, and the [ENTER] button to enter them into the title. The cursor moves to the right automatically as each character is entered. The Parameter wheel or the arrow buttons can be used to move the cursor within the title. Use the SHIFT LOCK button to select uppercase and lowercase characters, and use the SPC button to enter a space. To insert a space at the cursor position and move subsequent characters to the right, press the INS button. To delete the character at the cursor position, press the DEL button. When you’ve finished, press the OK button to enter the title, or press CANCEL to cancel title entry. Using a Keyboard A PS/2 compatible keyboard can be connected to the KEYBOARD port and used for quick title entry while the Title Edit window is displayed. Note that only 101 and 104-key U.S. keyboards are supported. Characters, including letters, numbers, and punctuation marks, supported by the DM2000 can be entered. Characters appear directly in the Title Edit window, the same as when they are entered on the DM2000. The following table shows how other keys correspond to Title Edit window functions. Key Title Edit Window function Description ESC CANCEL RETURN/ENTER OK Enters the specified title CAPS LOCK SHIFT LOCK Toggles between uppercase and lowercase SHIFT — Switches to uppercase characters Backspace — Deletes the character to the left Cursor (left/right) Left/right arrow buttons Moves the cursor within the title INSERT INS Toggles between insert and overwrite modes DELETE DEL Deletes the selected character SPACE bar SPACE Inserts a space at the current position DM2000—Owner’s Manual Cancels title entry Channel Strip Displays 39 Channel Strip Displays The fluorescent channel strip displays graphically display the value of the Input or Output Channel parameter currently assigned to the Encoders, routing settings, and the on/off status of the EQ, Insert, Delay, Comp, and Gate functions. They also display the Long and Short channel names and indicate the currently selected channel. You can adjust their brightness by using the Channel Strip Display Brightness preference on page 236. CH01 Selected Channel The border of the currently selected channel’s channel strip display lights up like this. Fader Touch Sense When fader knobs are touched, the corresponding Touch Sense indicators light up like this. Routing Indicators These indicators show to which Output Channels an Input Channel is being routed: 1 through 8 being the Bus Outs, “S” being the Stereo Out, and “D,” the Direct Out. EQ, Insert, Delay, Comp & Gate Indicators These indicators show whether a channel’s EQ, Insert, Delay, Comp, and Gate functions are on or off. Encoder Displays Operation of the Encoder displays depends on the parameter assigned to the Encoders, as follows. Pan Mode Hard left ( indicates center position) Other position Center ( indicates at center) Hard right Other position Nominal ( indicates at nominal) Maximum Nominal ( indicates at nominal) Maximum Aux/Mtrx Mode Minimum (–∞) ( indicates nominal position) Attenuator Parameter & Surr LFE Level Minimum (–96 dB) ( indicates nominal position) Other position DM2000—Owner’s Manual 40 Chapter 3—Operating Basics Delay Feedback Gain, Delay Mix & EQ Gain Parameters Negative value ( indicates 0%, ±0 dB) 0%, ±0 dB ( indicates at 0%, ±0 dB) Positive value On/Off & Pre/Post Parameters EQ On/Off, Phase On/Off, Insert On/Off, EQ Type, Gate On/Off, Comp On/Off, Aux Send On/Off, Matrix Send On/Off, Aux Send Pre/Post, Matrix Send Pre/Post. On/Pre Off/Post AD824 Input Gain, Insert In Gain & Scene Fade Time Parameters AD824 Input Gain, AD824 Insert In Gain, Scene Fade Time. Minimum (Off when Fade Time is minimum) Other value Maximum Other Parameters Delay Time, EQ Q, EQ Frequency, Comp Threshold, Comp Ratio, Comp Attack, Comp Release, Comp Out Gain, Comp Knee, Gate Threshold, Gate Range, Gate Attack, Gate Hold, Gate Decay, Compander Width. Minimum Other position Other position Maximum Surr Pan Wheel No Assign When the Encoders are assigned to the No Assign, Input Patch, Insert In Patch, Insert Out Patch, or Direct Out parameter, the Encoder displays are inactive. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Channel Strip Displays 41 Channel Names The channel strip displays also display the names or IDs of all the channels on the currently selected Layer. Each Input and Output Channel has a fixed Channel ID and Short and Long names that you can edit. See “Naming Channels” on page 130. You can choose whether the Short names or Channel IDs are displayed in the preferences. See “Channel ID/Channel” on page 236. CH01 1 To display a channel’s Long name, press and hold its [SEL] button. After about one second, the channel’s Short name, Long name, and Channel ID are displayed, as shown below. CH01 ACGT ACOU STIC GUIT AR Channel ID Short Name Long Name All other items in the displays are turned off while the [SEL] button is held down. 2 Release the [SEL] button when you’ve finished. The channel strip displays return to normal. Input Patch, Insert In Patch, Insert Out Patch & Direct Out When the Input Patch, Insert In Patch, Insert Out Patch, or Direct Out parameter is assigned to the Encoders, the Encoder displays show Port IDs. See “Patching with the Encoders” on page 67 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 42 Chapter 3—Operating Basics Selecting Layers Input and Output Channels are arranged into Layers, as illustrated below. There are nine Layers altogether: four Input Channel Layers, one Master Layer (or Output Layer), and four Remote Layers. Input Channels [1–24] Input Channels [25–48] Input Channels [49–72] Input Channels [73–96] Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends [MASTER] [REMOTE 1] [REMOTE 2] [REMOTE 3] [REMOTE 4] 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 To select Input and Output Channels for editing with the channel strip controls, you use the LAYER buttons to select a Layer. The LAYER button indicator for the currently selected Layer lights up, and the channel strip displays show the Short names/Channel IDs of the channels on the selected Layer. The currently selected Layer determines the function of the channel strip Encoders, [AUTO] buttons, [SEL] buttons, [SOLO] buttons, [ON] buttons, channel strip displays, and faders. For example, when Layer 1–24 is selected, [SEL] button #1 controls Input Channel #1. When Layer 25–48 is selected, it controls Input Channel #25. And when the Master Layer is selected, it controls Bus Out #1. The following table shows which Input and Output Channels are controlled by the channel strips for each Layer. Layers 1–8 9–16 Input Channels 1–24 25–48 Input Channels 25–48 49–72 Input Channels 49–72 73–96 Input Channels 73–96 REMOTE 1–4 1 24 REMOTE 1 25 48 REMOTE 2 49 72 REMOTE 3 73 96 REMOTE 4 MASTER Channel Strips 1-24 MASTER LAYER Bus Out masters 1–8 Aux Send masters 1–12 17–20 21–24 Matrix Send masters 1–4 Operation depends on the selected target. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. The exact function of each channel strip fader and Encoder also depends on the currently selected Fader mode and Encoder mode respectively. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 44 and “Selecting Encoder Modes” on page 45 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 43 Selecting Channels Selecting Channels 1 2 To select Input and Output Channels for editing with the SELECTED CHANNEL controls, you use the LAYER buttons to select a Layer, and the [SEL] buttons to select a channel on that Layer. Select a Layer, as explained on page 42. Use the [SEL] buttons to select an Input or Output Channel. The [SEL] button indicator for the currently selected channel lights up, and the SEL border of its channel strip display lights up (see page 39). In addition, the Channel’s ID and Short name appear in the upper right corner of the display (see page 36). The exact channel selected by each [SEL] button depends on the currently selected Layer. For example, when Layer 1–24 is selected, [SEL] button #1 selects Input Channel #1. When Layer 25–48 is selected, it selects Input Channel #25. And when the Master Layer is selected, it selects Bus Out #1, as shown in the following table. Layer [SEL] Button 1–8 9–16 1-24 Input Channels 1–24 25–48 Input Channels 25–48 49–72 Input Channels 49–72 73–96 Input Channels 73–96 MASTER REMOTE 1–4 Bus Outs 1–8 Aux Sends 1–12 17–20 21–24 Matrix Sends 1–41 Operation depends on the selected target. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. 1. Each time a [SEL] button is pressed, the selection toggles between the Matrix Send’s left and right channels. For paired Input or Output channels, the channel whose [SEL] button you press is selected, and its indicator lights up. The [SEL] button indicator of the other channel flashes. Vertical and horizontal Input and Output channel partners can also be selected by using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [L] and [R] buttons, which can also be used to select left and right channels when a Matrix Send or the Stereo Out is selected. If the currently displayed page contains a relevant parameter, when a channel’s [SEL] button is pressed, the cursor moves to that parameter automatically. If the currently displayed page contains no such parameter, the page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically. For example, if a Delay page for the Output Channels is selected when an Input Channel [SEL] button is pressed, the Delay page showing the relevant Input Channel Delay parameter is selected automatically. Stereo Out [SEL] Button The Stereo Out [SEL] button is used exclusively to select the Stereo Out for editing with the SELECTED CHANNEL controls. Its indicator lights up when the Stereo Out is selected. Each time it’s pressed, the selection toggles between the Stereo Out’s left and right channels. The SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [L] and [R] buttons can also be used to select the left and right channels. If the currently displayed page contains a Stereo Out parameter, that parameter is selected automatically when the Stereo Out [SEL] button is pressed. If the currently selected page contain no such parameter, the page that does contain such a parameter is selected automatically. For example, if a Delay page for the Input Channels is currently selected when the Stereo Out [SEL] button is pressed, the Delay page showing the Stereo Out Delay parameter is selected automatically. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 44 Chapter 3—Operating Basics Auto Channel Select & Touch Sense Select While the Auto Channel Select preference is on (see page 235), channels can be selected by moving the corresponding fader or Encoder, or by turning on the corresponding [AUTO], [SOLO], or [ON] button. While the Touch Sense Select preference is on (see page 237), channels can be selected simply by touching the fader knobs. Selecting Fader Modes 1 2 The exact function of each fader depends on the selected Layer and Fader mode. Select a Layer, as explained on page 42. Use the FADER MODE buttons to select a Fader mode. FADER MODE [FADER]: Channel faders control Input Channel levels or Output Channel master levels, depending on the selected Layer. FADER AUX/ MTRX [AUX/MTRX]: Channel faders control Aux or Matrix Send levels, depending on the selected Layer. The indicator of the currently selected FADER MODE button lights up. The following table shows the channel fader functions for each Layer and Fader mode. Layer 1-24 25–48 49–72 73–96 Fader Mode Fader 1–8 Fader 17–20 CH 1–24: Aux Send level Fader CH 25–48: level Aux/Mtrx CH 25–48: Aux Send level Fader CH 49–72: level Aux/Mtrx CH 49–72: Aux Send level Fader CH 73–96 level Aux/Mtrx CH 73–96: Aux Send level Bus Out 1–8: master level Aux Send 1–12: master level Matrix Send 1–4: master level Aux Send 1–12: Matrix Send level No operation: Faders fixed at –∞ Master Aux/Mtrx Remote 1–4 DM2000—Owner’s Manual Fader Aux/Mtrx 21–24 CH 1–24: level Aux/Mtrx Fader 9–16 Bus Out 1–8: Matrix Send level Operation depends on the selected target. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. 45 Selecting Encoder Modes Selecting Encoder Modes 1 2 The exact function of each Encoder depends on the selected Layer and Encoder mode. There are two preset Encoder modes, Pan and Aux/Mtrx, and four assignable modes, for which you can choose from over 40 parameters. Select a Layer, as explained in page 42. Use the ENCODER MODE buttons to select ENCODER MODE an Encoder mode. DISPLAY [PAN]: Encoders function as Pan controls. PAN AUX/ MTRX [AUX/MTRX]: Encoders control Aux or Matrix Send levels, depending on the selected Layer. ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 ASSIGN 3 ASSIGN 4 [ASSIGN 1–4]: Encoders control the parameters assigned to the ASSIGN buttons. See “Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons” on page 46 for more information. The indicator of the currently selected ENCODER MODE button lights up. The following table shows the exact Encoder functions for each Layer and Encoder mode. Layer Encoder Mode 1–8 INSERT 21–24 CH 1–24: pan Assign 1–4 CH 1–24: assigned parameter CH 25–48: pan Aux/Mtrx CH 25–48: Aux Send level Assign 1–4 CH 25–48: assigned parameter CH 49–72: pan Aux/Mtrx CH 49–72: Aux Send level Assign 1–4 CH 49–72: assigned parameter CH 73–96 pan Aux/Mtrx CH 73–96: Aux Send level Assign 1–4 CH 73–96: assigned parameter No operation No operation Matrix 1–4: Balance Aux/Mtrx Bus Out 1–8: Matrix Send level Aux Send 1–12: Matrix Send level No operation Assign 1–4 Bus Out 1–8: assigned parameter Aux Send 1–12: assigned parameter Matrix Send 1–4: assigned parameter Pan Master SEND ASSIGN 17–20 CH 1–24: Aux Send level Pan 73–96 OUTPUT Aux/Mtrx Pan 49–72 INPUT 9–16 Pan 25–48 SEND LEVEL Encoder Pan 1-24 PAN Pan Remote 1–4 Aux/Mtrx Operation depends on the selected target. See “About Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. Assign 1–4 The values of the parameters being controlled by the Encoders are displayed graphically by the channel strip displays. See “Channel Strip Displays” on page 39 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 46 Chapter 3—Operating Basics Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons 1 Up to four parameters can be assigned to the four ENCODER MODE ASSIGN buttons. Initially, the following parameters are assigned to the ASSIGN buttons: [ASSIGN 1]: Input Patch [ASSIGN 2]: Direct Out [ASSIGN 3]: Surr. LFE Level [ASSIGN 4]: Surr. Pan Wheel Use the ENCODER MODE [DISPLAY] button to select the Encoder Mode Assign page. The names of the parameters currently assigned to each ASSIGN button are displayed in the left-hand box. The parameter currently assigned to the selected ASSIGN button appears highlighted in the right-hand box. 2 Press an ASSIGN button, or use the Up/Down cursor buttons, to select an ASSIGN button. 3 Use the Parameter wheel, or the INC/DEC buttons to select a parameter. A parameter is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. See the “Assignable Encoder Mode Parameter List” on page 47 for a complete list of assignable parameters. 4 Press the [ENTER] button to assign your choice. Once assigned, the selected parameter appears highlighted in the right-hand box. When channels that do not feature the currently assigned parameter are selected, the Encoders are inactive. For example, if the assigned Encoder parameter is “Phase,” and the Master Layer is selected, the Encoders are inactive, because the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Matrix Sends do not feature Phase parameters. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Assigning Parameters to the ENCODER MODE Assign Buttons 47 Assignable Encoder Mode Parameter List # Parameter 1 No Assign Encoder Operation 2 Attenuator Attenuator 3 Input Patch Input Channel patch Confirm patch selection 4 Insert In Patch Insert In patch Confirm patch selection 5 Insert Out Patch Insert Out patch Confirm patch selection 6 Direct Out Direct Out patch Confirm patch selection 7 Phase Phase: normal/reverse — 8 Insert On Insert on/off — 9 Aux pre/post Aux pre/post — 10 Delay On Delay on/off — 11 Delay Time Delay Time — 12 Delay FB.Gain Delay FB.Gain — 13 Delay Mix Delay Mix — 14 EQ On EQ on/off — 15 EQ Type EQ Type — 16 EQ Low Q EQ Low Q — 17 EQ Low F EQ Low Frequency — 18 EQ Low G EQ Low Gain — 19 EQ Low-Mid Q EQ Low-Mid Q — 20 EQ Low-Mid F EQ Low-Mid Frequency — 21 EQ Low-Mid G EQ Low-Mid Gain — 22 EQ High-Mid Q EQ High-Mid Q — 23 EQ High-Mid F EQ High-Mid Frequency — 24 EQ High-Mid G EQ High-Mid Gain — 25 EQ High Q EQ High Q — 26 EQ High F EQ High Frequency — 27 EQ High G EQ High Gain — 28 Gate On Gate on/off — 29 Gate Threshold Gate Threshold — 30 Gate Range Gate Range — 31 Gate Attack Gate Attack — 32 Gate Decay Gate Decay — 33 Gate Hold Gate Hold — 34 Comp On Comp on/off — 35 Comp Threshold Comp Threshold — 36 Comp Ratio Comp Ratio — 37 Comp Attack Comp Attack — 38 Comp Release Comp Release — 39 Comp Out Gain Comp Out Gain — 40 Comp Knee/Width Comp Knee/Width — 41 Surr. LFE Level Surround LFE level — 42 Surr. Pan Wheel Surround Pan Wheel — 43 Scene Fade Time Scene Fade Time — 44 AD824 Gain AD824 Gain — 45 Ins AD824 Gain AD824 Insert Gain — — Push Switch Operation — — DM2000—Owner’s Manual 48 Chapter 4—wAnalog I/O & the AD Input Section 4 wAnalog I/O & the AD Input Section AD Input Section The DM2000 features 24 AD Inputs for connecting microphone and line-level sources. AD Inputs can be patched to Input Channels or Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 61). They can also be patched to Output Channel Insert Ins (see page 64). AD Input Connectors AD Inputs feature balanced XLR-3-31-type connectors and balanced 1/4-inch phone jacks, both with a nominal input range of –60 dB to +10 dB. The phone jacks, which can also be used with unbalanced phone plugs, have priority over the XLR-type connectors, so when a phone plug is inserted, the XLR-type connector is disconnected. Phantom Power + 48V ON OFF AD Inputs feature switchable +48 V phantom powering for use with condenser-type microphones and direct boxes. Phantom power is supplied to the balanced XLR-3-31-type connector, and can be switched individually for each AD Input. Pad PAD 26dB AD Inputs feature pad switches, which attenuate input signals by 26 dB, allowing the Head Amps to work with high-level signals. Pad is typically used to attenuate “hot” signals from bass or snare drum microphones, or “hot” line-level signals. Gain -60 -16 GAIN AD Inputs feature detented rotary gain controls with an input sensitivity of –16 dB to –60 dB, or +10 dB to –34 dB when the Pad is on. The GAIN controls adjust the gain of the Head Amps, allowing you to optimize input signal levels for the best signal-to-noise performance. Ideally, the GAIN control should be set so that the signal level is relatively high, and it’s okay for the PEAK indicator to light up occasionally. If the PEAK indicator lights up often, however, you should back off the GAIN control a little, otherwise, signal clipping may occur. If the GAIN is set too low, the signal-to-noise performance will suffer. PEAK & SIGNAL Indicators PEAK SIGNAL DM2000—Owner’s Manual These indicators are used in conjunction with the GAIN controls and PAD switches to optimize signal levels. The SIGNAL indicator lights up when the input signal level is 20 dB below nominal. The PEAK indicator lights up when the input signal level is 3 dB below clipping. Stereo Out 49 AD Inserts AD Inputs feature switchable analog inserts with individual balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks for the send and return signals. They are wired: sleeve–ground, ring–cold, tip–hot. The nominal signal level for both connectors is +4 dB. OFF ON INSERT AD Input inserts can be turned on and off individually by using the INSERT ON/OFF switches, so you don’t have to disconnect your external equipment in order to remove an insert. Stereo Out See page 82 for information on the Stereo Out outputs. Control Room Monitor Outs See page 132 for information on the Control Room Monitor outputs. Studio Monitor Outs See page 133 for information on the Studio Monitor outputs. Omni Outs The DM2000 features assignable Omni Outs on balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks. Omni Outs can be patched to Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs, or Surround Monitor Channels (see page 64). In addition, Input Channel Direct Outs can be patched to the Omni Outs (see page 65). The maximum output level of each OMNI OUT can be set internally to either +4 dB (–10 dB operating level) or +18 dB (+4 dB operating level). Contact your dealer for further details. 2TR Analog INs The DM2000 features two sets of 2-track analog inputs: 2TR IN ANALOG 1 +4 dB (BAL) uses balanced 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks. 2TR IN ANALOG 2 –10 dBV (UNBAL) uses unbalanced phono jacks. These inputs can be monitored via the Control Room monitors by pressing the CONTROL ROOM [2TR A1] and [2TR A2] buttons. They can be patched to Input Channels (see page 61), Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 62), or Output Channel Insert Ins (see page 64). DM2000—Owner’s Manual 50 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading 5 Digital I/O & Cascading Wordclocks Unlike analog audio equipment, digital audio equipment must be synchronized when digital audio signals are transferred from one device to another, otherwise, signals may not be received correctly and audible noise, glitches, or clicks may occur. Synchronization is achieved using what’s called a wordclock, which is a clock signal for synchronizing all the digital audio signals in a system. Note that wordclocks are not the same as SMPTE/EBU or MTC timecode, which is typically used to synchronize tape machines, MIDI sequencers, and so on. Wordclock synchronization refers to the synchronization of the digital audio processing circuits inside each digital audio device. In a typical digital audio system, one device operates as the wordclock master, and the other devices operate as wordclock slaves, synchronizing to the wordclock master. Wordclock signals can be distributed via dedicated cables, typically BNC cables, or derived from digital audio connections, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam formats. If you’re connecting to the DM2000 using only analog inputs and outputs, no special wordclock settings are required, and the DM2000 can be set to use its own internally generated wordclock. If you’re connecting other equipment digitally, however, you must decide which device to use as the wordclock master and which devices to use as slaves. The DM2000 can be used as the wordclock master running at either 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, or 96 kHz, or slaved to an external wordclock source. External wordclock signals can be received via the Slot Inputs, 2TR Digital Inputs, the CASCADE IN port, or the dedicated BNC WORD CLOCK IN connector. In a system where all devices share a common wordclock, it’s important that all devices be turned on even if they’re not being used. Turn on the wordclock master first, and then the slaves. When shutting down the system, turn off the slaves first, and then the master. Before use, make sure that the wordclock slaves are correctly locked to the wordclock master. Most devices have front panel indicators to indicate this. Refer to the relevant owner’s manuals for more information. Wordclock Connections The DM2000 features one BNC wordclock input and two BNC wordclock outputs. External wordclock signals can be connected to the WORD CLOCK IN connector, and terminated by using the 75Ω ON/OFF switch (see page 52). WORD CLOCK OUT 1 outputs a wordclock signal at the same clock rate as the DM2000. WORD CLOCK OUT 2 outputs a wordclock signal at half the clock rate of the DM2000 when using 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz, so if the DM2000 is running at 96 kHz, a wordclock signal at 48 kHz is output here. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Wordclocks 51 Selecting the Wordclock Source The wordclock source can be selected as follows. Note: When you change the wordclock settings on any device in your digital audio system, some devices may output noise, so turn down your power amps beforehand, otherwise your speakers may be damaged. 1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Word Clock Select page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the sources, and press [ENTER] to set. The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O Cards. The IN and OUT columns indicate the number of inputs and outputs available for each installed I/O Card. The FS box in the lower-left corner displays the current wordclock status: 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, or Unlock. The following are possible wordclock sources: SLOT1–6 (1/2–15/16): These buttons select the Slot Inputs as the wordclock source. Inputs are selected in pairs, the number of pairs depending on the type of I/O Card installed. WC IN: This button selects the WORDCLOCK IN connector as the wordclock source. CAS. IN: This button selects the CASCADE IN port as the wordclock source. 2TRD1, 2TRD2, 2TRD3: These buttons select the 2TR Digital Inputs as the wordclock source. INT44.1k, INT48k, INT88.2k, INT96k: These buttons select the internal wordclock generator as the wordclock source. The source select buttons have the following indications: A usable wordclock signal is present at this input. No wordclock signal is present at this input. A wordclock signal is present, but it’s out of sync with the current DM2000 clock. This is the currently selected wordclock source. This input was selected as the wordclock source, but no usable signal was received. This cannot be selected as the wordclock source because a wordclock signal cannot be sourced from this input on this type of I/O Card, or no I/O Card is installed. If an external wordclock source fails for some reason, the DM2000 automatically switches to its internal wordclock generator at the closest frequency. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 52 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading Terminating External Wordclocks Wordclock signals distributed via BNC cables must be terminated correctly, otherwise, jitter and synchronization errors may result. Ideally, you should make a separate wordclock connection to each device and terminate it. The following examples show two ways in which wordclock signals can be distributed and how termination should be applied in each case. Normally the WORD CLOCK 75Ω ON/OFF switch should be set to ON. The OFF setting provides support for wordclock source devices with special specifications. Star Distribution In this example a dedicated wordclock distribution box is used to supply wordclock signals to each device individually. Termination is applied at each device. WC OUT (BNC) Wordclock master WC IN (BNC) Wordclock distribution box WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC IN (BNC) Device-A Device-B Device-C Device-D Termination = ON Termination = ON Termination = ON Termination = ON Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Daisy Chain Distribution In this example the wordclock signal is distributed in a “daisy-chain” fashion, with each device feeding the wordclock signal on to the next. This method of distribution is not recommended for larger systems. Wordclock master WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) WC OUT (BNC) WC IN (BNC) Device-A Device-B Device-C Termination = ON Termination = ON Termination = ON Wordclock slave Wordclock slave Wordclock slave 2TR Digital Outs The DM2000 features three sets of 2-track digital outputs: 2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 and AES/EBU 2 use XLR-3-32-type connectors and output AES/EBU format digital audio. 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 3 uses a phono connector and outputs consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. These outputs can be patched to the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs, or the Control Room signal (see page 65). They can also be patched to Direct Outs (see page 65). These outputs can output digital audio signals at sampling rates other than the current DM2000 rate by using the internal sampling rate converters (see page 53). Digital output signals can be dithered for transfer to lower-resolution systems (see page 57). DM2000—Owner’s Manual 2TR Digital Ins 53 2TR Digital Ins The DM2000 features three sets of 2-track digital inputs: 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 and AES/EBU 2 use XLR-3-31-type connectors and accept AES/EBU format digital audio. 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 3 uses a phono connector and accepts consumer format (IEC-60958) digital audio. These inputs can be monitored via the Control Room monitors by using the CONTROL ROOM [2TR D1], [2TR D2], and [2TR D3] buttons. They can be patched to Input Channels (see page 61), Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 62), or Output Channel Insert Ins (see page 64). Digital audio signals received at sampling rates other than the current DM2000 rate can be converted by the internal sampling rate converters (see page 53). You can monitor the Channel Status of digital signals present at these inputs on the Channel Status Monitor page (see page 57). 2TR In/Out Sampling Rate Conversion 1 2 The DM2000’s 2TR Digital Inputs and Outputs feature sampling rate converters so you can easily connect your legacy 44.1/48 kHz digital audio equipment. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Sampling Rate Converter page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them. The FS box in the lower-left corner displays the current wordclock status: 44.1kHz, 48kHz, 88.2kHz, 96kHz, or Unlock. 2TR IN D1–3: These buttons are used to turn on and off the sampling rate converter for each 2TR Digital Input. When on, the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the DM2000’s current sampling rate. The original sampling rate is displayed. 2TR OUT D1–3: These buttons are used to turn on and off the sampling rate converters for each 2TR Digital Output. When on, the sampling rate of the transmitted digital audio is converted to the specified rate, which can be set to either 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 54 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading Slot I/O The DM2000 features six Slots for installing optional mini-YGDAI (Yamaha General Digital Audio Interface) I/O Cards, which offer various analog I/O options and digital I/O interfaces in all the popular digital audio interconnect formats, including AES/EBU, ADAT, and Tascam. Slot Inputs can be assigned to Input Channels or Input Channel Insert Ins (see page 61), or to Output Channel Insert Ins (see page 64). Slot Outputs can be assigned to Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Insert Outs, or the Surround Monitor Channels (see page 63), or Direct Outs (see page 65). Slot outputs can be dithered for digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems (see page 57). Available Cards The following mini-YGDAI I/O Cards are currently available. See the Yamaha Professional Audio Web site at the following URL for up-to-date news on I/O Cards: <http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/>. In Out MY8-AD Card 8 — MY8-AD241 8 — 4 — MY4-AD Format Analog in Resolution/Sampling Rate 20-bit, 44.1/48 kHz Phone jack (balanced) x8 24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz XLR-3-31 type (balanced) x4 MY8-AD96 8 MY4-DA — 4 24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz — 8 24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz MY8-DA96 Analog out 24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz 25-pin D-sub MY8-AE2 MY8-AE96 Connectors XLR-3-32 type (balanced) x4 24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz 25-pin D-sub AES/EBU I/O 24-bit, 44.1/48/88.2/96 kHz MY8-AE96S3 MY8-AT2 ADAT I/O MY8-TD2 Tascam MY8-mLAN2 IEEE1394 8 8 Optical x2 24-bit, 44.1/48 kHz 25-pin D-sub BNC wordclock output 6-pin 1394 connector x2 1. This card supersedes the 20-bit MY8-AD card. 2. Can handle 24-bit/96 kHz in Double Channel mode. (Separate 96 kHz wordclock required.) 3. Same as MY8-AE96 except for onboard sampling rate converters. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Slot I/O 55 Installing I/O Cards Attention: For technical reasons, certain card combinations are not supported. Before installing any cards, check the Yamaha web site (see page 6) to see whether your card is compatible. http://www.yamahaproaudio.com/ Also check the total number of cards that can be installed in the unit. Installing cards that are not endorsed by Yamaha may cause electrical shock, fire, or damage to the unit. 1 This section explains how to install I/O Cards. Turn off the DM2000. 2 Undo the two fixing screws and remove the slot cover, as shown below. Keep the cover and fixing screws in a safe place for future use. 3 Insert the card between the guide rails and slide it all the way into the slot, as shown below. You may have to push firmly to plug the card into the internal connector. 4 Secure the card using the attached thumbscrews. Do not leave them loose, as the card will not be grounded correctly, which may cause the DM2000 to malfunction. You can check which I/O Cards are installed on the Word Clock Select page (see page 51). DM2000—Owner’s Manual 56 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading Setting the Transfer Format for Higher Sampling Rates 1 2 The data transfer format for the higher sampling rates can be set as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Higher Sample Rate Data Transfer Format page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them. The SLOT TYPE column displays the names of any installed I/O Cards. IN/OUT: These parameters are used to set the input and output data transfer format of I/O Cards when running at the higher sampling rates (i.e., 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) to either Double Channel or Double Speed. In Double Speed mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at the current higher sampling rate (i.e., 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz). In Double Channel mode, digital audio data is received and transmitted at a sampling rate that is exactly half the current higher sampling rate and data is handled by two channels, thereby reducing the total number of inputs or outputs for an eight channel I/O Card to four. In Double Channel mode, the even-numbered channels are disabled. Double Channel mode allows you to record 96 kHz audio to legacy 44.1/48 kHz digital multitrack recorders. The IN and OUT parameters are only available when a higher sampling rate (i.e., 88.2 kHz or 96 kHz) is selected. When the sampling rate is 44.1 kHz or 48 kHz, all parameters on this page are unavailable. As are individual parameters for Slots with analog I/O Cards installed, or no I/O Card installed. When a digital I/O card that does not support 88.2/96 kHz is installed, such as the MY8-AE, MY8-AT, or MY8-TD, its IN and OUT formats are fixed at Double Channel mode. SRC: These parameters are used to turn on and off the sampling rate converter for each pair of Slot Inputs. When on, the sampling rate of the received digital audio is converted to the DM2000’s current sampling rate. The original sampling rate is displayed. These parameters are available only when an I/O Card with onboard sampling rate converters is installed, such as the MY8-AE96S. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Dithering Digital Outputs 57 Dithering Digital Outputs 1 2 For digital audio transfer to lower-resolution systems, the 2TR Digital Outputs and Slot Outputs can be dithered to 16-bit, 20-bit, or 24-bit. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Dither page. Use the cursor buttons to select the Dither parameters, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them. The SLOT column displays the names of any installed I/O Cards. You can copy the currently selected setting to all Dither parameters by double-clicking the [ENTER] button. Monitoring Digital Input Channel Status 1 2 You can monitor the Channel Status of digital audio signals connected to the 2TR Digital Inputs and Slot Inputs as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button to locate the Channel Status Monitor page. Use the cursor buttons to select the SLOT 1–6 and 2TR IN buttons, and the press [ENTER]. Displayed Channel Status information includes sampling rate (FS), emphasis, category, and copy protection. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 58 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading Cascading Consoles Up to four DM2000s can be cascaded, offering a maximum of 384 Input Channels. Several functions are linked between all cascaded consoles, including Solo, Scene Recall and Store, so that all consoles work just like one big console. A single Yamaha 02R Digital Recording Console can be included in the cascade system. The CASCADE IN and CASCADE OUT ports are used to transmit and receive Cascade and control signals. Only use the optional dedicated Cascade cables for connecting. Linked Functions • • • • • • • • • • • • The following DM2000 functions are linked via the cascade ports: AUX SELECT MATRIX SELECT Display page selection Solo function FADER MODE ENCODER MODE Metering position setting Peak Hold On/Off Meter Fast Fall on/off Scene Store, Recall, and Title Edit When a Scene is recalled on the master console, that scene is recalled on all cascaded consoles. The following Automix functions: Make New Automix, Store, Recall, Undo, Title Edit, Transport (AutoREC, REC, PLAY, STOP, ABORT). The following Automix parameters: Automix Enable/Disable, Internal Start Time, Offset Time, Frame Rate, Overwrite (FADER, ON, PAN, SURR, AUX, AUX ON, EQ), Motor ON/OFF, Edit Out Mode OFF/RETURN/TAKEOVER, Return Time, Update To End On/Off, ABSOLUTE/RELATIVE Fader Edit Mode, Touch Sense Edit In On/Off, Touch Sense Edit Out On/Off. Function and parameter linking can be turned on or off by using the Cascade COMM Link preference (see page 235). The Solo function is always linked regardless of this preference. Note: When the Cascade COMM Link preference is on, do not make any MIDI connections between cascaded DM2000s. If two DM2000s are cascaded and connected via MIDI, and the Cascade COMM Link preference is on, when a store operation is performed on the master console, a loop will be created, causing both consoles to execute endless store operations. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Cascading Consoles 59 Cascade Hookup Examples Cascading Two DM2000s Master: Off Bi-directional: - Master: On Bi-directional: On CASCADE OUT CASCADE IN DM2000 #1 DM2000 #2 CASCADE IN CASCADE OUT Final signals can be output by the Slot Outputs or Omni Outs. Final signals can be output by the Slot Outputs or Omni Outs. Cascading Three or More DM2000s Master: Off Bi-directional: - Master: Off Bi-directional: CASCADE OUT CASCADE OUT CASCADE IN DM2000 #1 Master: On Bi-directional: On DM2000 #2/3 CASCADE OUT CASCADE IN DM2000 #4 CASCADE IN Final signals can be output by the Slot Outputs or Omni Outs. Final signals can be output by the Slot Outputs or Omni Outs. Cascading an 02R Digital Recording Console Master: Off Bi-directional: Cascade In from: 02R CASCADE OUT 02R CASCADE IN Master: On Bi-directional: Off CASCADE OUT DM2000 #1/2 Aux Sends 9–12 are cascaded between the DM2000s only. CASCADE IN DM2000 #3 Final signals can be output by the Slot Outputs or Omni Outs. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 60 Chapter 5—Digital I/O & Cascading Attenuating Cascade Inputs 1 2 Cascade Inputs can be attenuated, and the Cascade mode and Cascade source can be specified on the Cascade In page. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Cascade In page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them. CASCADE MODE: When you want to output the same signals from two DM2000s, turn on the BI-DIRECTIONAL button. In this case, the Cascade connections are looped. Turn on the CASCADE MASTER option on one of the DM2000s to make it the master console. When the BI-DIRECTIONAL button is off, the last DM2000 in the cascade is automatically configured as the master console and it output the final signals. CASCADE IN FROM: This is used to specify the type of device connected to the CASCADE IN port, either DM2000 or 02R. When a DM2000 is connected to the CASCADE IN port, DM2000 is specified automatically. CASCADE IN ATTENUATOR: These controls are used to attenuate Cascade Input signals. You can copy the currently selected setting to all Attenuator parameters by double-clicking the [ENTER] button. Turning On & Off Cascade Outputs 1 2 Individual Cascade Outputs can be turned on or off as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DIO] button to locate the Cascade Out page. Use the cursor buttons to select the ON/OFF buttons, and use the [ENTER] button to set them. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Input & Output Patching 61 6 Input & Output Patching Input Patching Signal sources for the Input Channels, Input Channel Insert Ins, and internal effects processors are selected on the Input Patch pages, which are selected by using the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button. Use the cursor buttons to select the patch parameters, use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a source, and press [ENTER] to set. Patch parameters display Short Port names. The Long Port name of the currently selected patch parameter is displayed in the upper-right corner of each page. Patching can also be done by using the Patch Select Window (see page 67). Input Channel Inputs, Insert Ins, and Insert Outs can also be patched by using the Encoders (see page 67). See page 242 for a complete list of input patch sources. See page 246 for a list of initial input patches. Input Patch settings can be stored in the Input Patch library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See “Input Patch Library” on page 141 for more information. Patching Input Channels AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects Processor outputs, Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs, Bus Outs, or Aux Sends can be patched to the Input Channel Inputs. The Input Channel Patch parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Patch page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same. When Vertical Input Channel pairing mode is selected, patch parameters for vertical partners are displayed, for example, CH1, CH25, CH2, CH26, and so on. In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the [SEL] buttons and the Input Layers. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 62 Chapter 6—Input & Output Patching Patching Input Channel Insert Ins AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects processor outputs, Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs can be patched to the Input Channel Insert Ins. The Input Channel Insert In Patch parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Insert In Patch page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same. When Vertical Input Channel pairing mode is selected, patch parameters for vertical partners are displayed, for example, CH1, CH25, CH2, CH26, and so on. In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the [SEL] buttons. Patching Effects Inputs Aux Sends, internal effects processor outputs, or Output Channel Insert Outs can be patched to the internal effects processor inputs. The internal effects processor Input Patch parameters are divided between two pages: One for Effects Processors #1 and #2, and one for Effects Processors 3–8. The effects type for each Effects Processor is displayed in the boxes. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Output Patching 63 Output Patching Signal sources for the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, Output Channel Inserts Ins, Direct Outs, 2TR Digital Outputs, and GEQs are selected on the Output Patch pages, which are selected by using the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button. Use the cursor buttons to select the patch parameters, use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a source, and press [ENTER] to set. Depending on the patch page, patch parameters display either Short Channel or Short Port names. The Long Channel or Port name of the currently selected patch parameter is displayed in the upper-right corner of each page. Signal sources can also be selected by using the Patch Select Window (see page 67). Insert Ins, Insert Outs, and Direct Outs can also be patched by using the Encoders (see page 67). See page 247 for a complete list of output patch sources. See page 255 for a list of initial output patches. Output Patch settings can be stored in the Output Patch library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See “Output Patch Library” on page 141 for more information. Patching Slot Outputs Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs, or Surround Monitor Channels can be patched to the Slot Outputs. Slot Outputs can be patched to Direct Outs on the Direct Out Destination pages (see page 65). The Slot Output Patch parameters for the six Slots are arranged into three pages. The Slot 1–2 Output Patch page is shown below. The layout of the other two pages is the same. When a Slot Output is patched to a Direct Out (see page 65), and that Direct Out is assigned on an Input Channel Routing page, the Slot Output patch cannot be changed here. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 64 Chapter 6—Input & Output Patching Patching Omni Outs Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs, or Surround Monitor Channels can be patched to the Omni Outs. Omni Outs can be patched to Direct Outs on the Direct Out Destination pages (see page 65). When an Omni Out is patched to a Direct out (see page 65), and that Direct Out is assigned on an Input Channel Routing page, the Omni Out patch cannot be changed here. Output Channel Inserts Ins AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects processor outputs, or Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs can be patched to the Output Channel Insert Ins. The left and right channels of the Matrix Sends and the Stereo Out can be patched individually. In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the [SEL] buttons and the Master Layer. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Output Patching 65 Patching Direct Outs Direct Outs can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or 2TR Digital Outputs. The Direct Out Destination parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Direct Out Destination page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same. In addition to using the cursor buttons, Patch parameters can also be selected by using the [SEL] buttons. Patching the 2TR Digital Outputs Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, Input or Output Channel Insert Outs, or the Control Room signal can be patched to the 2TR Digital Outputs. 2TR Digital Outputs can be patched to Direct Outs on the Direct Out Destination pages (see page 65). The left and right channels of each Digital Output can be patched individually. When a 2TR Digital Output is patched to a Direct out (see page 65), and that Direct Out is assigned on an Input Channel Routing page, the 2TR Digital Output patch cannot be changed here. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 66 Chapter 6—Input & Output Patching Patching the GEQs The six 31-band graphic equalizers can be inserted into the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, or the left or right channels of the Matrix Sends or Stereo Out on the Graphic Equalizer Insert page. GEQs can also be patched on the Graphic Equalizer Edit page (see page 155) or the Output Channel Insert page (see page 111). Naming Input & Output Ports 1 You can specify Long and Short names for the Input and Output Ports as follows. These names appear on the Input and Output Patch pages and the channel strip displays when patching with the Encoders. See page 258 for a list of the initial Input Port names; page 260 for Output Port names. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Input Port or Output Port Name page. 2 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the ports. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Long or Short name, and then press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, edit the port name, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. When the Name Input Auto Copy option is on, the first four characters of a newly entered Long name are automatically copied to the Short name and vice versa. You can reset all port names back to their initial values by pressing the INITIALIZE button. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Patch Select Window 67 Patch Select Window Input and Output patches can be made by using the Patch Select window, shown below, which appears when the [ENTER] button is pressed while a patch parameter is selected. Available input and output sources and destinations are displayed in a hierarchical format in three panes. The existing source or destination is displayed in the upper-right corner of the window. Use the cursor buttons to move the cursor to the pane on the left, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the top level item. Then move the cursor to the center pane, and select an item at the next level. Select an item in the right pane, if available, and then select the YES button and press [ENTER]. Patching with the Encoders 1 The following patches can be made by using the Encoders: Input Channel Inputs, Insert Outs, Insert Ins, and Direct Outs. Assign one of the above parameters to an Encoder ASSIGN button, as explained on page 46. To set the Input Channel Input or Direct Out patches, you must select an Input Channel Layer. For Insert Out or Insert In patches, you can select an Input Channel Layer or the Master Layer. 2 Press the ASSIGN button to which you assigned the patch parameter. If no further action is taken within five seconds, the channel strip displays return to normal, and you must press the ASSIGN button again. Depending on the Port ID/Port preference on page 143, the channel strip disAD1 plays show the Port IDs or Short Port names for the current patches. 3 Use the Encoders to select ports, and press the Encoder push switches to set them. If you don’t activate your selection within five seconds (i.e., while the Port ID or Short Channel name flashes), or you operate another Encoder, the selection is cancelled and the patch is left unchanged. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 68 Chapter 7—Input Channels 7 Input Channels Patching Input Channels AD Inputs, Slot Inputs, internal effects processor outputs, Digital or Analog 2TR Inputs, Bus Outs, or Aux Sends can be patched to the Input Channel Inputs. See “Patching Input Channels” on page 61 for more information. Metering Input Channels Input Channel signal levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103 for more information. Reversing the Signal Phase The signal phase of each Input Channel can be reversed as follows. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [ ] Button 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select Input Channels. 2 Use the Phase [ ] button to set the phase. Phase is reversed when the Phase [ ] button indicator is lit. Phase Pages 1 2 Phase settings can be viewed and set on the Phase pages. If the Auto PHASE/INSERT Display preference is on, these pages appear automatically when the Phase [ ] button in the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT section is pressed. See “Auto PHASE/INSERT Display” on page 234. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [DISPLAY] button to select the Phase pages. The Phase parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Phase page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same. Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the NOR/REV buttons, and the [ENTER] button and INC/DEC buttons to set them. The NOR/REV buttons can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL] buttons. GLOBAL NOR/REV: These buttons allow you to set the phase of all Input Channels simultaneously. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Gating Input Channels 69 Gating Input Channels Each Input Channel features a noise Gate for automatically shutting out unwanted noise. Gate settings can be stored in the Gate library, which contains 4 preset memories and 88 user memories. See “Gate Library” on page 144 for more information. Preset Gates & Types The following table lists the preset Gates and types. See page 296 for detailed parameter information. # Preset Name Type Description 1 Gate GATE Gate template 2 Ducking DUCKING Ducking template 3 A. Dr. BD GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic bass drums 4 A. Dr. SN GATE Gate preset for use with acoustic snare drums Using the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS Controls 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select Input Channels. 2 Use the [GATE ON] button to turn the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate on or off. DYNAMICS DISPLAY GATE / COMP THRESHOLD RANGE ATTACK DECAY HOLD THRESHOLD RATIO ATTACK RELEASE GAIN GATE COMP GATE ON 3 COMP ON Use the [GATE/COMP] button to set the DYNAMICS controls to GATE (GATE indicator lit), and use the THRESHOLD, RANGE, ATTACK, DECAY, and HOLD controls to set the Gate. Gate Edit Page 1 2 Gate settings can be viewed and set on the Gate Edit page. If the Auto DYNAMICS Display preference is on, this page appears automatically when a gate control in the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is operated. Use the LAYER buttons to select Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select Input Channels. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Gate Library page, and then recall a Gate preset that contains the gate type that you want. See “Gate Library” on page 144 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 70 Chapter 7—Input Channels 3 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Gate Edit page. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. KEYIN SOURCE: This determines the trigger source for the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate. Trigger sources include SELF (the Gate’s own input signal), CHANNEL (another Input Channel), or AUX (an Aux Send from 1–12). Input Channel trigger sources are selectable in blocks of 12 channels. For example, if Input Channel #1 is currently selected, an Input Channel from 1–12 can be selected as the trigger source. However, if Input Channel #13 is currently selected, an Input Channel from 13–24 can be selected. STEREO LINK: This allows you to pair Gates for stereo operation even when Input Channels are not paired. Input Channel Gates are paired either horizontally or vertically depending on the Pair mode setting for the currently selected Input Channel. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information on horizontal and vertical pairing. When Input Channels are paired, this parameter is turned on automatically and cannot be changed. CURVE: This displays the gate curve (i.e., input level vs. output level). TYPE: This is the gate type used by the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate. Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner. The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being applied by the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate. ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected Input Channel’s Gate on and off. It works in unison with the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [GATE ON] button. PARAMETER: These controls are used to set the Threshold, Range, Attack, Decay, and Hold parameters. Attenuating Input Channels Input Channels signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for more information. EQ’ing Input Channels Each Input Channel features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Grouping Input Channel EQs 71 Grouping Input Channel EQs 1 Input Channel EQs can be grouped, allowing you to control the EQ of several Input Channels simultaneously. There are four Input Channel EQ groups: a, b, c, and d. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Equalizer Link page. 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers. The corresponding group row is selected as each Input Channel Layer is selected. 3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select EQ groups a–d. The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box. 4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Input Channels to and from the selected group. The EQ settings of the first Input Channel added to the group are applied to all subsequently added Input Channels. When an Input Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up. Input Channel Inserts Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Input Channels by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information. Compressing Input Channels Each Input Channel features a Compressor. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 72 Chapter 7—Input Channels Grouping Input Channel Compressors 1 Input Channel Compressors can be grouped, allowing you to control the compression of several Input Channels simultaneously by operating any Compressor control in the group. There are four Input Channel Compressor groups: i, j, k, and l. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Comp Link page. 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers. The corresponding group row is selected as each Input Channel Layer is selected. 3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Comp groups i–l. The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box. 4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Input Channels to and from the selected group. The Compressor settings of the first Input Channel added to the group are applied to all subsequently added Input Channels. When an Input Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up. If an Input Channel Compressor’s Stereo Link option is on, it’s turned off when that Input Channel is added to a Comp group. Delaying Input Channels Each Input Channel features a Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information. Muting Input Channels (ON/OFF) 1 2 Input Channels can be muted as follows. Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers. Use the [ON] buttons to mute the Input Channels on the selected Layer. The [ON] button indicators of channels that are on are lit. ON DM2000—Owner’s Manual Grouping Input Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) 73 Grouping Input Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) 1 Input Channel Mutes can be grouped, allowing you to mute several Input Channels simultaneously. There are eight Input Channel Mute groups: I, J, K, L, M, N, O, and P. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Channel Mute Group pages. The Mute group parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Mute Group page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same. 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers. The corresponding Mute Group page and group row is selected as each Input Channel Layer is selected. 3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Mute groups I–P. The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box. 4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove mutes to and from the selected group. When an Input Channel is added to a Mute group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up. ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups. Mute groups may contain a combination of channels that are on and channels that are off. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 74 Chapter 7—Input Channels Setting Input Channel Levels 1 Input Channel levels can be set as follows. Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers. 2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER] button to select Fader mode. 3 Use the faders to set the Input Channel levels. Refer to the legend on the left side of the faders when setting Input Channel levels. Fader positions can be viewed on the Fader View pages. See “Viewing Channel Fader Settings” on page 125 for more information. 10 0 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 20 15 30 20 40 30 50 40 60 50 70 Grouping Input Channel Faders 1 Input Channel faders can be grouped, allowing you to control the level of several Input Channels simultaneously. There are eight Input Channel Fader groups: A, B, C, D, E, F, G, and H. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Input Channel Fader Group pages. The Fader Group parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Fader Group page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same. 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers. The corresponding Fader Group page and group row is selected as each Input Channel Layer is selected. 3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Fader groups A–H. The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box. 4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove faders to and from the selected group. When an Input Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up. ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups. You can temporarily disable a Fader group in order to make adjustments to individual faders by operating the desired channel fader while holding down its [SEL] button. Fader groups are active only in Fader mode (i.e., when the FADER MODE [FADER] button indicator is on). See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 44 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 75 Routing Input Channels Routing Input Channels Each Input Channel can be routed to the Bus Outs, Stereo Out, or its own Direct Out. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING Controls 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select the Input Channels. ROUTING DISPLAY 1 2 2 Use the [1–8], [STEREO], and [DIRECT] buttons to route the currently selected Input Channel. [1–8]: These buttons route the currently selected Input Channel to the Bus Outs. [STEREO]: This button routes the currently selected Input Channel to the Stereo Out. DIRECT: This button routes the currently selected Input Channel to its Direct Out. [FOLLOW PAN]: This determines whether the Input Channel’s Pan control setting is applied to the Bus Outs. When off, the levels of the signals fed to the odd and even Bus Outs is the same. When on, the levels of the signals fed to the odd and even Bus Outs follows the Pan control. FOLLOW PAN 3 4 5 6 7 8 STEREO DIRECT Routing Pages 1 2 Input Channel routing settings can be viewed and set on the Routing pages. If the Auto ROUTING Display preference is on, these pages appear automatically when a button in the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING section is pressed. See “Auto ROUTING Display” on page 234. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button to select the Routing pages. The Routing parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided among four pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Routing page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the same. Use the cursor buttons and Parameter wheel to select the parameters, and use the [ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons to set them. Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL] buttons. ALL STEREO: This button assigns all Input Channels to the Stereo Out. ALL BUS: This button assigns all Input Channels to all Bus Outs ALL CLEAR: This button clears all routing assignments. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 76 Chapter 7—Input Channels The currently selected Surround mode is displayed in the lower-left corner. When Stereo mode is selected, the Bus Out routing buttons display numbers from 1 through 8. When a Surround Pan mode is selected, they display abbreviations of the Surround Channel names, as shown in the following table. See “Using Surround Pan” on page 77 for more information. Bus Outs Surround Mode 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 Stereo 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 3-1 L R C S 5 6 7 8 C E1 7 8 5.1 L R Ls Rs 1. Short for LFE (Low frequency Effects). Panning Input Channels Input Channels can be panned between the left and right channels of the Stereo Out. Using the Encoders 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers. 2 Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] button to select the Pan Encoder mode. 3 Use the Encoders to pan the input channels. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND Controls 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select the Input Channels. PAN / SURROUND DISPLAY L 2 R L R ODD EVEN LINK GRAB EFFECT Use the Pan control to pan the currently selected Input Channel. The pan display indicates the pan position of the currently selected Input Channel. When pan is set to center, the center two segments light up. You can use the [L] and [R] buttons to select horizontal or vertical Input Channel partners. The [LINK] button, which is enabled only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected, is used to link the Pan control and the Joystick so that either control can be used for panning. It’s a global setting that applies to all Input Channels. For this to work, the [EFFECT] button indicator must be off and the [GRAB] and [LINK] button indicators must be on. Pan Pages 1 Pan settings can be viewed and set on the Pan pages. If the Auto PAN/SURROUND Display preference is on, these pages appear automatically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND section is operated. If both the [LINK] and [GRAB] button indicators are on, these pages will also appear when the Joystick is operated. See “Auto PAN/SURROUND Display” on page 234. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select the Input Channel Pan pages. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 77 Using Surround Pan The Pan parameters for the 96 Input Channels are arranged into four pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Pan page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the same. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the Pan controls, and use the Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons to set them. Pan parameters can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL] buttons. The currently selected Pan control can be set to center by pressing [ENTER]. MODE: There are three Pan modes that determine how horizontally and vertically paired Input Channels are panned: Individual, Gang, and Inverse Gang. This is a global setting that applies to all paired Input Channels. In individual mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate independently. In Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison. In Inverse Gang mode, paired Input Channel pan controls operate in unison but move in opposite directions. Aux Send Pan controls can be linked to Input Channel Pan controls so that operating an Input Channel Pan control also operates the corresponding Aux Send Pan control, and vice versa (see page 94). While linked, the Pan mode can be set on the Aux Pan page or the Input Channel Pan page. Using Surround Pan The DM2000 supports 3-1 and 5.1 Surround modes. Surround pan is independent of normal panning. Normal panning determines how the Input Channel signal is panned between the left and right channels of the Stereo out. Whereas surround panning determines how the Input Channel signal is panned among the Surround channels (i.e., the Bus Outs). The following table shows how Surround channels are handled by the Bus Outs. Surround Mode Bus Outs 1 2 3 4 5 6 3-1 Left Right Center Surround — — 5.1 Left Right Left Surround Right Surround Center LFE See page 134 for information on surround monitoring. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 78 Chapter 7—Input Channels Selecting Surround Pan Modes 1 2 The Surround mode can be selected as follows. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select the Surround Mode page. Use the cursor buttons to select the surround mode buttons, and press [ENTER] to activate the selected mode. The 3-1 Surround mode page is shown on the left; the 5.1 page on the right. The diagram on each page shows the typical sound image placement and the Surround channel to Bus Out configuration. Using the Joystick 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select the Input Channels. PAN / SURROUND DISPLAY L 2 R L R ODD EVEN LINK GRAB EFFECT Press the [GRAB] button to grab the current Joystick position, and then use the Joystick to set the surround pan. The [GRAB] button, which is enabled only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected, is used to turn on and off Joystick surround pan control for the currently selected Input Channel. While Grab is on, the Joystick can be used to set the surround pan position of the currently selected Input Channel. If the Joystick is set to control effects (i.e., the [EFFECT] button indicator is lit), the [GRAB] button is disabled. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Using Surround Pan 79 Selected Channel Surround Edit Page 1 Surround pan settings can be viewed and set on the Input Channel Surround Edit page. If the Auto PAN/SURROUND Display preference is on, and a Surround Pan mode other than Stereo is selected, this page appears automatically when a PAN/SURROUND control other than the [EFFECT] button is operated. See “Auto PAN/SURROUND Display” on page 234. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select the Surround Edit page. 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select the Input Channels. The Surround Edit page displays surround pan parameters for the currently selected Input Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner. The current surround pan position of each Input Channel is indicated by a small circle. It’s also indicated numerically next to each Input Channel number, for example, “CH1 (L9, R10).” The graph of the currently selected Input Channel displays a small square, which indicates the current position of the Joystick. If the Auto Grab preference is on (see page 235), when the Joystick is moved to the current surround pan position, the Joystick kicks in as surround pan control and the small square disappears. The number of speaker icons and meters around the surround graph depends on the currently selected Surround mode. The meters indicate Bus Out signal levels. You can move the surround pan directly to one of the speaker icons, including the box icons without speakers, by selecting its icon, and then pressing [ENTER]. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. LFE: This sets the level of the LFE (Low Frequency Effects) Channel (5.1 mode only). DIV (divergence): This determines how the Center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 0, the Center signal is fed only to the Left and Right channels (i.e., Phantom Center). When set to 50, the Center signal is fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 100, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center). Patterns: These buttons are used to select the seven patterns that determine how the surround pan moves by the Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons. FAST: This sets the speed of surround pan control when using the Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons. WIDTH: This sets the left-to-right width of the selected pattern. DEPTH: This sets the front-to-rear depth of the selected pattern. WIDTH OFFSET: This can be used to offset the left-to-right direction of the selected pattern. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 80 Chapter 7—Input Channels DEPTH OFFSET: This can be used to offset the front-to-rear direction of the selected pattern. ST LINK: This can be used to link the surround pan parameters of the currently selected Input Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner regardless of whether they are paired. PATTERN: When Input Channels are linked, the seven patterns selectable here determine how the linked surround pan moves by the Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons. Input Channel Surround Pages 1 2 Surround pan positions can be viewed and set on the Surround pages. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [DISPLAY] button to select the Input Channel Surround pages. The Surround parameters for the 96 Input Channels are arranged into four pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Surround page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the same. Use the cursor buttons to select the Surround parameters, and use the Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons to set them. Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL] buttons. The graph for the currently selected Input Channel displays a small square, which indicates the current position of the Joystick. L/R: These parameters are used to set the left/right surround position. While selected, they can quickly be set to center by pressing [ENTER]. F/R: These parameters are used to set the front/rear surround position. While selected, they can quickly be set to center by pressing [ENTER]. You can jump to the more detailed Surround Edit page by pressing [ENTER] while an Input Channel’s surround graph is selected. Sending Input Channels to Aux Sends Input Channel signals can be sent to Aux Sends 1–12. See “Setting Aux Send Levels” on page 89, “Muting Aux Sends (ON/OFF)” on page 90, and “Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Aux Sends” on page 88. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Soloing Input Channels 81 Soloing Input Channels Input Channels can be soloed. See page 118 for more information. Direct Outs Each Input Channel features a Direct Out, which can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. Direct Out signals can be sourced pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. See “Patching Direct Outs” on page 65 and “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 for more information. Pairing Input Channels Horizontal or vertical Input Channel partners can be paired for stereo operation. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information. Using MS Decoding When Input Channels are paired, MS Decoding can be used to decode signals from microphones arranged as MS pairs. MS Decoding is set on the Input Channel Pair pages. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information. Viewing Input Channel Settings Parameter and fader settings for each Input Channel can be viewed on the View pages. See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124 and “Viewing Channel Fader Settings” on page 125 for more information. Copying Input Channel Settings Input Channel settings can be copied to other Input Channels by using the Channel Copy function. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information. Naming Input Channels Input Channels can be named for easy identification. See “Naming Channels” on page 130 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 82 Chapter 8—Stereo Out 8 Stereo Out Stereo Out Connectors The Stereo Out is output by the STEREO OUT +4 dB (BAL) balanced XLR-3-32-type connectors and the STEREO OUT –10 dBV (UNBAL) unbalanced phono connectors. Patching the Stereo Out to Outputs The left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more information. Routing Input Channels to the Stereo Out Input Channels can be routed and panned to the Stereo Out. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 for more information. Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out Bus Out signals can be sent to the Stereo Out. See “Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out” on page 87 for more information. Metering the Stereo Out Stereo Out signal levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103 for more information. Monitoring the Stereo Out The Stereo Out can be monitored via the LARGE and SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUTs and the PHONES (see page 132) or the STUDIO MONITOR OUT (see page 133). Attenuating the Stereo Out Stereo Out signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for more information. EQ’ing the Stereo Out The Stereo Out features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information. Grouping Master EQs The Stereo Out EQ can be grouped with the EQs of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel EQs” on page 110 for more information. Stereo Out Inserts Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Stereo Out by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 83 Compressing the Stereo Out Compressing the Stereo Out Signal dynamics can be controlled by using the Stereo Out Compressor. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. Grouping Master Compressors The Stereo Out Compressor can be grouped with the Compressors of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Compressors” on page 116 for more information. Muting the Stereo Out (ON/OFF) ON The Stereo Out can be muted by using the STEREO [ON] button, which is used exclusively for this task and is not affected by the Layers. Its indicator lights up when the Stereo Out is on. Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) The Stereo Out Mute can be grouped with the Mutes of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)” on page 123 for more information. Setting the Stereo Out Level The Stereo Out level is set by using the STEREO fader, which is used exclusively for this task and is not affected by the Layers or Fader modes. 0 5 10 15 20 30 40 50 60 70 Grouping Master Faders STEREO The Stereo Out fader can be grouped with the faders of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more information. Sending the Stereo Out to the Matrix Sends The left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be sent individually to the Matrix Sends. See “Matrix Sends” on page 97 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 84 Chapter 8—Stereo Out Balancing the Stereo Out 1 The left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be balanced as follows. Press the STEREO [SEL] button to select the Stereo Out. PAN / SURROUND DISPLAY L 2 L R ODD EVEN R Use the Pan control to set the balance. The pan display indicates the balance. When the balance is set to center, the center two segments light up. Balance can be set to center by pressing [ENTER]. The Stereo Out balance can also be set on the Stereo Fader View page. See “Viewing Channel Fader Settings” on page 125 for more information. Delaying the Stereo Out The left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be delayed independently by using the Stereo Out Delay. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information. Inserting GEQs Internal GEQs can be inserted into the left and right channels of the Stereo Out. See “About the GEQs” on page 155 for more information. Viewing Stereo Out Settings Parameter and fader settings for the Stereo Out can be viewed and set on the View pages. See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124 and “Viewing Channel Fader Settings” on page 125 for more information. Copying Stereo Out Settings Settings can be copied between the left and right channels of the Stereo Out by using the Channel Copy function. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information. Naming the Stereo Out The Stereo Out can be named for easy identification. See “Naming Channels” on page 130 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Bus Outs 85 9 Bus Outs Patching Bus Outs to Outputs Bus Outs can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more information. Routing Input Channels to Bus Outs Input Channels can be routed to the Bus Outs. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 for more information. Metering Bus Outs Bus Out signal levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103 for more information. Monitoring Bus Outs Bus Outs can be assigned to the CONTROL ROOM [ASSIGN 1] or [ASSIGN 2] button for monitoring. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. Attenuating Bus Outs Bus Out signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for more information. EQ’ing Bus Outs Each Bus Out features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information. Grouping Master EQs Bus Out EQs can be grouped with the EQs of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel EQs” on page 110 for more information. Bus Out Inserts Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Bus Outs by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information. Compressing Bus Outs Signal dynamics can be controlled by using the Bus Out Compressors. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. Grouping Master Compressors Bus Out Compressors can be grouped with the Compressors of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Compressors” on page 116 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 86 Chapter 9—Bus Outs Muting Bus Outs (ON/OFF) 1 2 Bus Outs can be muted by using the channel strip [ON] buttons. Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer. Use channel strip [ON] buttons 1–8 to mute the Bus Outs. The [ON] button indicators of Bus Outs that are on light up. ON Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) Bus Out Mutes can be grouped with the Mutes of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)” on page 123 for more information. Setting Bus Out Levels 1 Bus Out levels can be set as follows. Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer. 2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER] button to select Fader mode. 3 Use faders 1–8 to set the Bus Out levels. Refer to the legend on the right side of the faders when setting Bus Out levels. 10 0 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 20 15 30 20 40 30 50 40 60 50 70 Grouping Master Faders Bus Out faders can be grouped with the faders of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more information. Sending Bus Outs to Matrix Sends Bus Out signals can be sent to the Matrix Sends. See “Matrix Sends” on page 97 for more information. Delaying Bus Outs Each Bus Out features a Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information. Inserting GEQs Internal GEQs can be inserted into the Bus Outs. See “About the GEQs” on page 155 for more information. Soloing Bus Outs Bus Outs can be soloed. See page 118 for more information. Pairing Bus Outs Bus Outs can be paired for stereo operation. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out 87 Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out 1 2 Bus Outs can be routed to the Stereo Out buses as follows. Bus Out to Stereo Out settings can be stored in the Bus to Stereo library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See “Bus to Stereo Library” on page 143 for more information. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING [DISPLAY] button to locate the Bus to Stereo page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. PAN: These controls are used to pan the Bus Out signals between the left and right Stereo Out buses. The currently selected Pan control can be set to center by pressing [ENTER]. ON/OFF: These buttons are used to turn on and off the Bus Out to Stereo Out routing. Faders: These faders are used to set the Bus Out to Stereo Out levels. Fader knobs appear highlighted when faders are set to 0.0 dB. Viewing Bus Out Settings Parameter and fader settings for each Bus Out can be viewed and set on the View pages. See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124 and “Viewing Channel Fader Settings” on page 125 for more information. Copying Bus Out Settings Bus Out settings can be copied to other Bus Outs by using the Channel Copy function. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information. Naming Bus Outs Bus Outs can be named for easy identification. See “Naming Channels” on page 130 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 88 Chapter 10—Aux Sends 10 Aux Sends Patching Aux Send Masters to Outputs Aux Send Masters can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more information. Setting the Aux Send Mode 1 Aux Sends have two operating modes—Variable and Fixed—which can be set individually for each of the 12 Aux Sends. In Variable mode, Aux Send levels are variable and the signal source point can be either pre-fader or post-fader. In Fixed mode, Aux Send levels are fixed at nominal and the signal source point is fixed to post-fader. Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Send pages. The Aux Send parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided among four pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page is shown below: Variable mode on the left, Fixed mode on the right. The layout of the other three pages is the same. On the Fixed mode page, “GLOBAL POST” is displayed in the lower-right corner, indicating that the Aux Send Pre/Post parameter is fixed at Post. 2 Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–12. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the FIXED and VARIABLE buttons, and press [ENTER] to select a mode. When the Aux mode is changed, the parameters of the selected Aux Send are set as follows. Parameters Level Change from Variable to Fixed Change from Fixed to Variable All set to nominal All set to –∞ Pre/Post On/Off All set to Post All turned off All turned on Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Aux Sends Aux Sends can be configured individually as either pre-fader or post-fader on the Aux Send pages (see page 90) or the Aux View pages (see page 93). DM2000—Owner’s Manual 89 Setting Aux Send Levels Setting Aux Send Levels Aux Send levels can be set by using the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL controls, the faders, or the Encoders. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL Controls 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select Input Channels. 2 Use the [BANK] button to select Aux 1–4, Aux 5–8, or Aux 9–12. 3 Use the LEVEL controls to set the Aux Send levels. AUX / MATRIX SEND DISPLAY LEVEL BANK LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL ON ON ON ON AUX 1 / MATRIX 1 AUX 2 / MATRIX 2 AUX 3 / MATRIX 3 AUX 4 / MATRIX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 AUX 9 AUX 10 AUX 11 AUX 12 Using the Faders 1 2 3 4 10 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers. Press the FADER MODE [AUX/MTRX] button to select the Aux/Mtrx Fader mode. Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–12. Use the faders to set the Aux Send levels. Refer to the legend on the left side of the faders when setting Aux Send levels. 0 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 20 15 30 20 40 30 50 40 60 50 70 Using the Encoders 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers. 2 Press the ENCODER MODE [AUX/MTRX] button to select the Aux/Mtrx Encoder mode. 3 Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–12. 4 Use the Encoders to set the Aux Send levels. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 90 Chapter 10—Aux Sends Muting Aux Sends (ON/OFF) 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select the Input Channels. 2 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND [BANK] button to select Aux 1–4, Aux 5–8, or Aux 9–12. 3 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND [ON] buttons to turn the Aux Sends of the selected Input Channel on or off. AUX / MATRIX SEND DISPLAY LEVEL BANK LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL ON ON ON ON AUX 1 / MATRIX 1 AUX 2 / MATRIX 2 AUX 3 / MATRIX 3 AUX 4 / MATRIX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 AUX 9 AUX 10 AUX 11 AUX 12 Aux Send Pages You can view and set the Aux Send parameters of all Input Channels on the Aux Send pages. Operation of the Aux Send pages in Variable and Fixed mode is explained separately. Variable Mode 1 See page 88 for information on how to select Variable Aux mode. Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Send pages. The Aux Send parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided among four pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page in Variable mode is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the same. 2 Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–12. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Input Channel Aux Send controls. Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL] buttons. 4 To turn Aux Sends on and off, select the rotary controls, and press [ENTER]. The rotary controls of Aux Sends that are turned off, appear gray, and “OFF” appears in place of the level value. Aux Send levels can still be changed even when Aux Sends are off. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Aux Send Pages 91 5 To set Aux Send levels, select the rotary controls, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons. 6 To set the Pre/Post parameters, select the PRE/POST buttons, and use the [ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons. 7 To set all Input Channels for the selected Aux Send to pre-fader or post-fader simultaneously, select the GLOBAL PRE or POST button, and then press [ENTER]. The PRE or POST button appears highlighted, and remains highlighted until the Pre/Post setting of one or more channels is changed, so you can quickly see if all Input Channels are set to either pre-fader or post-fader. Fixed Mode 1 See page 88 for information on how to select Fixed Aux mode. Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Send pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Aux Send page in Fixed mode is shown below. The layout of the other three Aux Send pages in Fixed mode is the same. 2 Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select Aux Sends 1–12. 3 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the Aux Send buttons. Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL] buttons. 4 Use the [ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons to turn Aux Sends on and off. If the Fader mode is set to Aux/Mtrx, the faders provide a visual indication of the On/Off status of each Input Channel for the currently selected Aux Send. For Aux Sends that are on, faders move to the nominal position. Aux Sends that are off, they move to the –∞ position. On/Off settings cannot be changed by using the faders. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 92 Chapter 10—Aux Sends Viewing Aux Send Settings You can view and set settings of all Aux Sends on the Aux View pages. Level and Pre/Post parameters are displayed separately. If the Auto AUX/MATRIX Display preference is on, and an Input Channel is currently selected, these pages appear automatically when a SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND control is operated. See “Auto AUX/MATRIX Display” on page 234 for more information. Level Parameters 1 In Level mode, the Aux View pages display Aux Send Level and On/Off parameters. Fixed mode Aux Sends can be turned on and off only. Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux View pages. 2 Select the DISPLAY LEVEL button, and press [ENTER]. The Aux View parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided among four pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Aux View page is shown below in Level mode. The layout of the other three pages is the same. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Input Channel Aux Sends. Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL] buttons. Aux Sends can also be selected by using the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons. 4 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set the Aux Send levels. 5 Use the [ENTER] button to turn on and off the selected Aux Send. The various Aux View page indicators are as follows: Send level set to –∞, or Fixed mode Aux Send set to off. Send level bar. Send set to off. Send level set to nominal. Send off, level set to nominal. Fixed mode Aux Send set to on. In Variable Aux mode, the Level and On/Off parameter values for the selected Aux Send are displayed in the lower-right corner of the page, for example, “LEVEL: –2.0 dB ON/OFF: ON.” In Fixed Aux mode, the On/Off parameter values for the selected Aux Send are displayed in the lower-right corner of the page, for example, “LEVEL: FIXED ON/OFF: ON.” DM2000—Owner’s Manual Viewing Aux Send Settings 93 Pre/Post Parameters 1 In Pre/Post mode, the Aux View pages display Aux Send Pre/Post parameters. Fixed mode Aux Sends can be turned on and off only. Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux View pages. 2 Select the DISPLAY PRE/POST button, and press [ENTER]. The Input Channel 1–24 Aux View page is shown below in Pre/Post mode. The layout of the other three Aux View pages in Pre/Post mode is the same. 3 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the Input Channel Aux Sends. Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL] buttons. Aux Sends can also be selected by using the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons. 4 Use the [ENTER] button or INC/DEC buttons to set the selected Aux Send to either pre-fader or post-fader. The various Aux View page indicators are as follows: Aux Send configured pre-fader. Aux Send configured post-fader. Fixed mode Aux Send. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 94 Chapter 10—Aux Sends Panning Aux Sends 1 When Aux Sends are paired, Aux Sends can be panned between the paired Aux buses. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information. If the selected Aux Send is not paired, the message “AUXx–x are not paired” appears. If the currently selected pair of Aux Send Masters is set to Follow Surround on the Output Pair page, Aux Sends follow the Input Channel Surround Pan settings and cannot be set here, in which case the message “Now AUXx-x PAN Following Surround” appears. See “Pairing Aux Sends” on page 96 for more information. Use the AUX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Aux Pan pages. The Aux Pan parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided among four pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Aux Pan page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the same. 2 Use the AUX SELECT [1–12] buttons to select the Aux Sends 1–12. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select Input Channel Aux Send pan controls, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them. Input Channels can also be selected by using the Input Channel Layer buttons and [SEL] buttons. The currently selected Pan control can be set to center by pressing [ENTER]. MODE: There are three Pan modes that determine how paired Aux Sends are panned: Individual, Gang, and Inverse Gang. This is a global setting that applies to all paired Aux Send Masters. In individual mode, Aux Send pan controls operate independently. In Gang mode, the Aux Send pan controls of paired Input Channels operate in unison. In Inverse Gang mode, the Aux Send pan controls of paired Input Channels operate in unison but move in opposite directions. INPUT PAN LINK: This is used to link Aux Send Pan controls to Input Channel Pan controls so that operating an Input Channel Pan control also operates the corresponding Aux Send Pan control, and vice versa. This can be set individually for each pair of Aux Send Masters. When a link is established, the pan positions and Pan mode of the Input Channels are copied to the Aux Sends. While linked, the Pan mode can be set from either the Aux Pan page or the Input Channel Pan page (see page 76). DM2000—Owner’s Manual Metering Aux Send Masters 95 Metering Aux Send Masters Aux Send Master levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103 for more information. Monitoring Aux Send Masters Aux Send Masters can be assigned to the CONTROL ROOM [ASSIGN 1] or [ASSIGN 2] button for monitoring. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. Aux 11 and Aux 12 can be monitored via the STUDIO MONITOR OUT (see page 133). Attenuating Aux Send Masters Aux Send Master signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for more information. EQ’ing Aux Send Masters Each Aux Send Master features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information. Grouping Master EQs Aux Send Master EQs can be grouped with the EQs of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel EQs” on page 110 for more information. Aux Send Master Inserts Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Aux Send Masters by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information. Compressing Aux Send Masters Signal dynamics can be controlled by using the Aux Send Master Compressors. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. Grouping Master Compressors Aux Send Master Compressors can be grouped with the Compressors of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Compressors” on page 116 for more information. Muting Aux Send Masters (ON/OFF) 1 2 Aux Send Masters can be muted as follows. Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer. Use channel strip [ON] buttons 9–20 to mute the Aux Send Masters. The [ON] button indicators of Aux Send Masters that are on light up. ON Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) Aux Send Master Mutes can be grouped with the Mutes of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)” on page 123 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 96 Chapter 10—Aux Sends Settings Aux Send Master Levels 1 Aux Send Master levels can be set as follows. Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer. 2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER] button to select the Fader mode. 3 Use faders 9–20 to set the Aux Send Master levels. Refer to the legend on the right side of the faders when setting Aux Send Master levels. Grouping Master Faders 10 0 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 20 15 30 20 40 30 50 40 60 50 70 Aux Send Master faders can be grouped with the faders of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more information. Sending Aux Sends to Matrix Sends Aux Send Master signals can be sent to the Matrix Sends. See “Matrix Sends” on page 97 for more information. Delaying Aux Send Masters Each Aux Send Master features a Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information. Inserting GEQs Internal GEQs can be inserted into the Aux Send Masters. See “About the GEQs” on page 155 for more information. Soloing Aux Sends Aux Sends can be soloed. See page 118 for more information. Pairing Aux Sends Aux Sends can be paired for stereo operation. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information. Viewing Aux Send Master Settings Parameter and fader settings for each Aux Send Master can be viewed and set on the View pages. See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124 and “Viewing Channel Fader Settings” on page 125 for more information. Copying Aux Send Master Settings Aux Send Master settings can be copied to other Aux Sends by using the Channel Copy function. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information. Naming Aux Send Masters Aux Send Masters can be named for easy identification. See “Naming Channels” on page 130 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 97 Matrix Sends 11 Matrix Sends Patching Matrix Send Masters to Outputs The left and right channels of the Matrix Send Masters can be patched to the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, or the 2TR Digital Outputs. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more information. Pre-Fader or Post-Fader Matrix Sends Matrix Sends can be configured globally as either pre-fader or post-fader on the Matrix View page. See “Viewing Matrix Send Settings” on page 99 for more information. Setting Matrix Send Levels Matrix Send levels can be set by using the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL controls, the faders, or the Encoders. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL Controls 1 Use the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer. 2 Use [SEL] buttons 1–20 to select the Bus Outs and Aux Sends, and use the STEREO [SEL] button to select the Stereo Out. The Matrix Sends for the left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be set individually. Use the STEREO [SEL] button to select the left and right channels. 3 Use the LEVEL controls to set the Matrix Send levels. AUX / MATRIX SEND DISPLAY LEVEL BANK LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL ON ON ON ON AUX 1 / MATRIX 1 AUX 2 / MATRIX 2 AUX 3 / MATRIX 3 AUX 4 / MATRIX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 AUX 9 AUX 10 AUX 11 AUX 12 Using the Faders 1 2 10 Stereo Out Matrix Sends cannot be set using the faders. Use the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer. Press the FADER MODE [AUX/MTRX] button to select the Aux/Mtrx Fader mode. 3 Use the MATRIX SELECT [1–4] buttons to select Matrix Sends 1–4. 4 Use faders 1–20 to set the Matrix Send levels. Faders 21–24 are inactive because Matrix Send Masters do not feature Matrix Send controls. Refer to the legend on the left side of the faders when setting Matrix Send levels. 0 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 20 15 30 20 40 30 50 40 60 50 70 Using the Encoders 1 2 Stereo Out Matrix Sends cannot be set using the Encoders. Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer. Press the ENCODER MODE [AUX/MTRX] button to select the Aux/Mtrx Encoder mode. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 98 Chapter 11—Matrix Sends 3 Use the MATRIX SELECT [1–4] buttons to select Matrix Sends 1–4. 4 Use Encoders 1–20 to set the Matrix Send levels. Encoders 21–24 are inactive because Matrix Send Masters do not feature Matrix Send controls. Muting Matrix Sends (ON/OFF) 1 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer. 2 Use [SEL] buttons 1–20 to select the Bus Outs and Aux Sends, and use the STEREO [SEL] button to select the Stereo Out. The Matrix Sends for the left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be muted individually. Use the STEREO [SEL] button to select the left and right channels. 3 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND [ON] buttons to turn the Matrix Sends on the selected Output Channel on and off. AUX / MATRIX SEND DISPLAY LEVEL BANK LEVEL LEVEL LEVEL ON ON ON ON AUX 1 / MATRIX 1 AUX 2 / MATRIX 2 AUX 3 / MATRIX 3 AUX 4 / MATRIX 4 AUX 5 AUX 6 AUX 7 AUX 8 AUX 9 AUX 10 AUX 11 AUX 12 Matrix Send Pages 1 Matrix Send parameters for the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo Out can be viewed and set on the Matrix Send page. Use the MATRIX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Matrix Send page. 2 Use the Matrix SELECT [1–4] buttons to select Matrix Sends 1–4. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Output Channel Matrix Send controls. If the Master Layer is selected, [SEL] buttons 1–20 can also be used to select Output Channels. 4 To turn Matrix Sends on and off, select the rotary controls, and press [ENTER]. The rotary controls of Matrix Sends that are turned off, appear gray, and “OFF” appears in place of the level value. Matrix Send levels can still be changed even when Matrix Sends are off. 5 To set Matrix Send levels, select the rotary controls, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Panning Matrix Sends 99 Panning Matrix Sends 1 Matrix Sends can be panned on the Matrix Send Pan page. The Matrix Sends for the left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be panned individually. Use the MATRIX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Matrix Send Pan page. 2 Use the MATRIX SELECT [1–4] buttons to select Matrix Sends 1–4. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select Output Channel Matrix Send pan controls, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them. If the Master Layer is currently selected, [SEL] buttons 1–20 can also be used to select Output Channels. The currently selected Pan control can quickly be set to center by pressing [ENTER]. Viewing Matrix Send Settings 1 You can view and set the Matrix Send Level and On/Off parameters of all Matrix Sends on the Matrix View page. If the Auto AUX/MATRIX Display preference is on, and a Bus Out, Aux Send, or the Stereo Out is currently selected, this page appears automatically when a SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND control is operated. See “Auto AUX/MATRIX Display” on page 234 for more information. Use the MATRIX SELECT [DISPLAY] button to select the Matrix Send View page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the PRE FADER and POST FADER buttons, and press [ENTER] to set all Matrix Sends to either pre-fader or post-fader. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Output Channel Matrix Sends. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 100 Chapter 11—Matrix Sends If the Master Layer is currently selected, [SEL] buttons 1–20 can also be used to select Output Channels. Matrix Sends can also be selected by using the MATRIX SELECT [1–4] buttons. 4 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set the levels of the Matrix Sends. 5 Use the [ENTER] button to turn on and off the selected Matrix Send. The various Matrix View page indicators are as follows: Send level set to –∞. Send level bar. Send set to off. Send level set to nominal. Send off, level set to nominal. The level in dB and the on/off values of the currently selected Matrix Send are displayed in the lower-right corner of the page. Metering Matrix Send Masters Matrix Send Master levels can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103 for more information. Monitoring Matrix Send Masters Matrix Send Masters can be assigned to the CONTROL ROOM [ASSIGN 1] or [ASSIGN 2] button for monitoring. See “Control Room Monitoring” on page 132 for more information. Attenuating Matrix Send Masters Matrix Send Master signals can be attenuated pre-EQ. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for more information. EQ’ing Matrix Send Masters Each Matrix Send Master features 4-band parametric EQ. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information. Grouping Master EQs Matrix Send Master EQs can be grouped with the EQs of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel EQs” on page 110 for more information. Matrix Send Master Inserts Internal effects processors and external signal processors can be patched into the Matrix Send Masters by using the Inserts. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information. Compressing Matrix Send Masters Signal dynamics can be controlled by using the Matrix Send Master Compressors. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Grouping Master Compressors 101 Grouping Master Compressors Matrix Send Master Compressors can be grouped with the Compressors of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Compressors” on page 116 for more information. Muting Matrix Send Masters (ON/OFF) 1 2 Matrix Send Masters can be muted as follows. Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer. Use channel strip [ON] buttons 21–24 to mute the Matrix Sends Masters. The [ON] button indicators of Matrix Send Masters that are on light up. ON Grouping Master Mutes (ON/OFF) Matrix Send Master Mutes can be grouped with the Mutes of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF)” on page 123 for more information. Setting Matrix Send Master Levels 1 Matrix Send Master levels can be set as follows. Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer. 2 Press the FADER MODE [FADER] button to select the Fader mode. 3 Use faders 21–24 to set the Matrix Send Master levels. Refer to the legend on the right side of the faders when setting Matrix Send Master levels. 10 0 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 20 15 30 20 40 30 50 40 60 50 70 Grouping Master Faders Matrix Send Master faders can be grouped with the faders of other Output Channels. See “Grouping Output Channel Faders” on page 122 for more information. Balancing Matrix Send Masters 1 The left and right channels of the Matrix Send Masters can be balanced as follows. Press the LAYER [MASTER] button to select the Master Layer, and use [SEL] buttons 21–24 to select the Matrix Send Masters. PAN / SURROUND DISPLAY L 2 L R ODD EVEN R Use the Pan control to set the balance of the currently selected Matrix Send Master. The pan display indicates the balance. When the balance is set to center, the center two segments light up. Balance can be set to center by pressing [ENTER]. Matrix Send Master balance can also be set on the Matrix Fader View pages. See “Viewing Channel Fader Settings” on page 125 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 102 Chapter 11—Matrix Sends Delaying Matrix Send Masters Each Matrix Send Master features a Delay function. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information. Soloing Matrix Sends Matrix Sends can be soloed. See page 118 for more information. Inserting GEQs Internal GEQs can be inserted into the left and right channels of the Matrix Send Masters. See “About the GEQs” on page 155 for more information. Viewing Matrix Send Master Settings Parameter and fader settings for each Matrix Send Master can be viewed and set on the View pages. See “Viewing Channel Parameter Settings” on page 124 and “Viewing Channel Fader Settings” on page 125 for more information. Copying Matrix Send Master Settings Matrix Send Master settings can be copied to other Matrix Sends by using the Channel Copy function. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129 for more information. Naming Matrix Send Masters Matrix Send Masters can be named for easy identification. See “Naming Channels” on page 130 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Common Channel Functions 103 12 Common Channel Functions Metering Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, the Stereo Out, and the Effects processors can be metered on the various Meter pages, which are located by using the DISPLAY ACCESS [METER] button. Input and Output Channel Meter pages also display fader positions numerically. The Peak Hold function, which applies to all level meters, can be turned on or off on any of the Meter pages. Setting the Metering Position Input and Output Channels can be metered pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. This setting, which can be set independently for the Input and Output Channels, can be set on the Metering Position page shown below, or any of the Input and Output Channel Meter pages. PRE EQ: Channels are metered pre-EQ. PRE FADER: Channels are metered pre-fader. POST FADER: Channels are metered post-fader. Metering Input Channels There are two types of Input Channel Meter page: 24-channel and 48-channel. There are four 24-channel Meter pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Meter page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the same. These pages feature two level meters for each Input Channel. When Input Channels are vertically paired, both meters operate. When Input Channels are horizontally paired, only the left-hand meter operates. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 104 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions There are two 48-channel Meter pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Meter page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same. Metering Output Channels Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out can all be metered on the Master Meter page. Metering Effects There are two Effects Input/Output Meter pages: Effects 1–8 and Effects 1–2. The Effects 1–8 Input/Output Meter page features two input and output level meters for each of the internal effects processors. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Metering 105 The Effects 1–2 Input/Output Meter page features individual level meters for the eight inputs and outputs of internal effects processors #1 and #2. Metering the Stereo out The Stereo Out can be metered on the Stereo Meter page. Peak signal levels for the left and right channels are displayed numerically. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 106 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions Attenuating Signals Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature pre-EQ attenuation, which is useful for attenuating “hot” signals before EQ’ing. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER ATT Control 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. 2 Use the ATT control to set the amount of attenuation. Attenuator Pages 1 ATT. Attenuator settings can be viewed and set on the Attenuator pages. Use the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button to select the Attenuator pages. The Attenuator parameters for the 96 Input Channels are arranged into four pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Attenuator/Shifter page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the same. The attenuator parameters for the Output Channels appear on the Output Attenuator page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the channels, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set the amount of attenuation. Input and Output Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER and [SEL] buttons. You can copy the currently selected Input or Output Channel attenuation setting to all Input or Output Channels respectively by double-clicking the [ENTER] button. For Input Channels, you can also set the amount of attenuation in bits from +2 bits to –24 bits. Use the cursor buttons to select the bit shift parameters, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them. The rotary attenuators and the bit shift parameters can be set independently. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Using EQ 107 Using EQ Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature 4-band parametric EQ. The LOW-MID and HIGH-MID bands are peaking type. The LOW and HIGH bands can be set to shelving, peaking, or HPF and LPF respectively. EQ settings can be stored in the EQ library, which contains 40 preset memories and 160 user memories. See “EQ Library” on page 146 for more information. Preset EQs The following table lists the preset EQs. See page 292 for detailed parameter information. # Preset Name Description Bass Drum 1 Emphasizes the low range of a bass drum and the attack created by the beater. 2 Bass Drum 2 Creates a peak around 80 Hz, producing a tight, stiff sound. 3 Snare Drum 1 Emphasizes “snappy” and rimshot sounds. 4 Snare Drum 2 Emphasizes various ranges for that classic rock snare drum sound. 5 Tom-tom 1 Emphasizes the attack of tom-toms, and creates a long, “leathery” decay. 6 Cymbal Emphasizes the attack of crash cymbals, extending the “sparkling” decay. 7 High Hat Use on a tight high-hat, emphasizing the mid to high range. 8 Percussion Emphasizes attack and adds clarity to the high-range of instruments, such as shakers, cabasas, and congas. 9 E. Bass 1 Produces a tight electric bass sound by cutting very low frequencies. 1 10 E. Bass 2 Unlike preset 9, this preset emphasizes the low range of an electric bass. 11 Syn. Bass 1 Use on a synth bass with emphasized low range. 12 Syn. Bass 2 Emphasizes the attack that is peculiar to synth bass. 13 Piano 1 Makes pianos sound brighter. 14 Piano 2 Used in conjunction with a compressor, this preset emphasizes the attack and low range of pianos. 15 E. G. Clean Use for line-level recording of an electric or semi-acoustic guitar to get a slightly harder sound. 16 E. G. Crunch 1 Adjusts the tonal quality of a slightly distorted guitar sound. 17 E. G. Crunch 2 A variation on preset 16. 18 E. G. Dist. 1 Makes a heavily distorted guitar sound clearer. 19 E. G. Dist. 2 A variation on preset 18. 20 A. G. Stroke 1 Emphasizes the bright tones of acoustic guitars. 21 A. G. Stroke 2 A variation on preset 20. You can also use it with gutsy guitar sounds. 22 A. G. Arpeg. 1 Ideal for arpeggio playing on acoustic guitars. 23 A. G. Arpeg. 2 A variation on preset 22. 24 Brass Sec. Use with trumpets, trombones, or saxes. When used with a single instrument, try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID frequency. 25 Male Vocal 1 An EQ template for male vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID parameters according to the voice quality. 26 Male Vocal 2 A variation on preset 25. 27 Female Vo. 1 An EQ template for female vocals. Try adjusting the HIGH or HIGH-MID parameters according to the voice quality. 28 Female Vo. 2 A variation on preset 27. 29 Chorus&Harmo An EQ template for brightening choruses. 30 Total EQ 1 Use on a stereo mix during mixdown. Sounds even better when used with a compressor. 31 Total EQ 2 A variation on preset 30. 32 Total EQ 3 A variation on preset 30. Can also be used with paired Input or Output Channels. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 108 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions # Preset Name Description 33 Bass Drum 3 A variation on preset 1, with low and mid range reduced. 34 Snare Drum 3 A variation on preset 3, creating a thicker sound. 35 Tom-tom 2 A variation on preset 5, emphasizing the mid and high ranges. 36 Piano 3 A variation on preset 13. 37 Piano Low Emphasizes the low range of pianos recorded in stereo. 38 Piano High Emphasizes the high range of pianos recorded in stereo. 39 Fine-EQ Cass Add clarity when recording to or from cassette tape. 40 Narrator Ideal for recording narration. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER Controls 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. EQUALIZER LOW DISPLAY CHANNEL LOW MID FREQUENCY FREQUENCY Q FREQUENCY Q GAIN COPY HIGH MID HIGH ATT. FREQUENCY Q Q GAIN GAIN GAIN EQ ON dB 125 Hz dB 1.00 kHz PASTE Hz dB 4.00 kHz Hz dB 10.0 kHz Hz kHz 2 Use the [EQ ON] button to turn the EQ on or off. 3 Use the GAIN controls to set the gain of each band. When a GAIN control is adjusted, the gain in dB is displayed on the corresponding EQ display. If the GAIN control is not adjusted for two seconds, the EQ display returns to displaying the frequency. 4 To set the frequency, press a FREQUENCY/Q control so that the FREQUENCY indicator lights up, and use the FREQUENCY/Q control to set the frequency. The frequency is displayed by the corresponding EQ display. 5 To set the Q, press a FREQUENCY/Q control so that the Q indicator lights up, and use the FREQUENCY/Q control to set the Q. The Q value is displayed by the corresponding EQ display. If the Q control is not adjusted for two seconds, the EQ display returns to displaying the frequency. To reset an individual gain control, hold down the corresponding FREQUENCY/Q control. To reset all gain controls, press the LOW and HIGH FREQUENCY/Q controls. The EQ parameter ranges are as follows. Parameter LOW LOW-MID Gain HIGH –18.0 dB to +18.0 dB (0.1 dB steps)1 Frequency Q HIGH-MID 21.2 Hz to 20.0 kHz (120 steps per 1/12 octave) HPF, 10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps), L.SHELF 10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps) LPF, 10.0 to 0.10 (41 steps), H.SHELF 1. The LOW and HIGH GAIN controls function as filter on/off controls when Q is set to HPF or LPF respectively. The initial EQ parameter settings are as follows. Parameter LOW LOW-MID Gain HIGH 4.00 kHz 10.0 kHz 0 dB Frequency 125 Hz Q L.SHELF DM2000—Owner’s Manual HIGH-MID 1.00 kHz 0.70 H.SHELF Using EQ 109 EQ Edit Pages 1 EQ parameters can also be set on the EQ Edit page. If the Auto EQUALIZER Display preference is on, this page appears automatically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER section is operated. See “Auto EQUALIZER Display” on page 234. Use the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button to select the EQ Edit page. 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel and INC/DEC buttons to set them. EQ ON: This turns the EQ on and off. The [ENTER] button can be used to turn this on and off so long as any parameter other than TYPE is selected. TYPE: This selects the type of EQ: TYPE I (the EQ type used on legacy Yamaha digital mixing consoles) or TYPE II (a newly developed algorithm). ATT: This can be used to attenuate signals pre-EQ. It’s the same Attenuator parameter that appears on the Attenuator pages. See “Attenuating Signals” on page 106 for more information. CURVE: This displays the EQ curve of the currently selected Input Channel. Level meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner. LOW, L-MID, H-MID, HIGH: These are the Q, Frequency (F), and Gain (G) parameters for the four bands. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 110 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions Grouping Output Channel EQs 1 The Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out EQs can be grouped, allowing you to control the EQ of several Output Channels simultaneously. There are four Output Channel EQ groups: e, f, g, and h. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Equalizer Link page. 2 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button. 3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select EQ groups e–h. The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box. 4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channels to and from the selected group. The EQ settings of the first Output Channel added to the group are applied to all subsequently added Output Channels. When an Output Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Using Inserts 111 Using Inserts Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature assignable Inserts. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [INSERT ON] Button 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. 2 Use the [INSERT ON] button to turn the currently selected channel’s Insert on or off. INSERT ON Insert Pages 1 Inserts can be configured on the Insert page. If the Auto PHASE/INSERT Display preference is on, this page appears automatically when the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [INSERT ON] button is operated. See “Auto PHASE/INSERT Display” on page 234. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [DISPLAY] button to select the Insert page. The Insert page for the Input Channels is shown on the left; the Insert page for the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and the Stereo out, on the right. The Insert page for the Matrix Sends is shown below. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 112 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. INSERT ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected channel’s Insert on and off. It works in unison with the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [INSERT ON] button. INSERT POSITION: This determines the position of the Insert within the channel, and can be set to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. INSERT OUT: This selects the destination for the Insert Out, which can be a Slot Output, Omni Out, 2TR Digital Output, or the input to an internal effects processor. See page 242 and page 247 for Input and Output patch parameter lists. The Port ID of the currently selected destination is displayed below the currently selected channel’s Long name in the upper-right corner of the page. The destination port can also be selected by using the Patch Select window (see page 67), which is accessed by pressing [ENTER] while this parameter is selected. Insert Outs can also be patched on the Output Patch pages. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more information. INSERT IN: This selects the source for the Insert In, which can be an AD Input, Slot Input, 2TR Digital or Analog Input, or the output of an internal effects processor. See page 242 for a list of Input Channel Insert In sources; page 247 for a list of Output Channel Insert In sources. The Port ID of the currently selected source is displayed below the currently selected channel’s Long name in the upper-right corner of the page. The source port can also be selected by using the Patch Select window (see page 67), which is accessed by pressing [ENTER] while this parameter is selected. Insert Ins can also be patched on the Input Channel Insert In Patch pages. See “Patching Input Channel Insert Ins” on page 62 for more information. COMP ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected channel’s Compressor on and off. It works in unison with the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [COMP ON] button, and the ON/OFF button on the Comp Edit page. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. COMP POSITION: This determines the position of the Compressor within the channel, and can be set to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. It works in unison with the POSITION parameter on the Comp Edit page. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. COMP ORDER: If the Insert and Compressor are set to the same position in the channel (i.e., INSERT POSITION and COMP POSITION are the same), you can use this parameter to set the order of the Insert and Compressor to either Comp->Ins or Ins->Comp. GEQ: This parameter allows you to insert a GEQ into the output of the currently selected Output Channel. This parameter can also be set on the Graphic Equalizer Edit page (see page 155) and the Graphic Equalizer Insert page (see page 66). When a Y56K card effect, or an internal effects processor is inserted in the currently selected channel, when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button is pressed, the corresponding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] button indicator flashes, and the corresponding Effects, or Plug-In edit page appears. If it’s a Y56K card that’s inserted, the [PLUG-INS] button indicator also flashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button indicator also flashes. This applies only to effects that are inserted into channels. If there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected channel, a message appears. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Compressing Channels 113 Compressing Channels Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature a Compressor. Settings can be stored in the Comp library, which contains 36 preset memories and 88 user memories. See “Comp Library” on page 145 for more information. Preset Comps & Types The following table lists the preset Comps and types. See page 296 for detailed parameter information. # Preset Name Type Description 1 Comp COMP Compressor intended to reduce the overall volume level. Use it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired Input or Output Channels. 2 Expand EXPAND Expander template. 3 Compander (H) COMPAND-H Hard-kneed compressor template. 4 Compander (S) COMPAND-S Soft-kneed compressor template. 5 A. Dr. BD COMP Compressor for use with acoustic bass drum. 6 A. Dr. BD COMPAND-H Hard-kneed compander for use with acoustic bass drum. 7 A. Dr. SN COMP Compressor for use with acoustic snare drum. 8 A. Dr. SN EXPAND Expander for use with acoustic snare drum. 9 A. Dr. SN COMPAND-S Soft-kneed compander for use with acoustic snare drum. EXPAND Expander for use with acoustic tom toms, which automatically reduces the volume when the tom toms are not played, improving mic separation. 11 A. Dr. OverTop COMPAND-S Soft-kneed compander for emphasizing the attack and ambience of cymbals recorded with overhead mics. It automatically reduces the volume when the cymbals are not played, improving mic separation. 12 E. B. Finger COMP Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a finger-picked electric bass guitar. 13 E. B. Slap COMP Compressor for leveling the attack and volume of a slapped electric bass guitar. 14 Syn. Bass COMP Compressor for controlling or emphasizing the level of a synth bass. 15 Piano1 COMP Compressor for brightening the tonal color of a piano. 16 Piano2 COMP A variation on preset 15, using a deep threshold to change the overall attack and level. 17 E. Guitar COMP Compressor for electric guitar “cutting” or arpeggio-style backing. The sound color can be varied by playing different styles. 18 A. Guitar COMP Compressor for acoustic guitar “stroke” or arpeggio-style backing. 19 Strings1 COMP Compressor for use with strings. 20 Strings2 COMP A variation on preset 19, intended for violas or cellos. 21 Strings3 COMP A variation on preset 20, intended for string instruments with a very low range, such as cellos or contrabass. 22 BrassSection COMP Compressor for brass sounds with a fast and strong attack. 23 Syn. Pad COMP Compressor for synth pad, intended to prevent diffusion of the sound. 24 SamplingPerc COMPAND-S Compressor for making sampled percussion sound like real acoustic percussion. 25 Sampling BD COMP A variation on preset 24, intended for sampled bass drum sounds. 26 Sampling SN COMP A variation on preset 25, intended for sampled snare drum sounds. 10 A. Dr. Tom DM2000—Owner’s Manual 114 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions # Preset Name Type Description 27 Hip Comp COMPAND-S A variation on preset 26, intended for sampled loops and phrases. 28 Solo Vocal1 COMP Compressor for use with main vocals. 29 Solo Vocal2 COMP A variation on preset 28. 30 Chorus COMP A variation on preset 28, intended for choruses. 31 Click Erase EXPAND Expander for removing a click track that may bleed through from a musicians headphones. 32 Announcer COMPAND-H Hard-kneed compander for reducing the level of the music when an announcer speaks. 33 Limiter1 COMPAND-S A soft-kneed compander with a slow release. 34 Limiter2 COMP A “peak-stop” compressor. 35 Total Comp1 COMP Compressor for reducing the overall volume level. Use it on the stereo output during mixdown, or with paired Input or Output Channels. 36 Total Comp2 COMP A variation on preset 35, but with more compression. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS Controls 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. 2 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [COMP ON] button to turn the currently selected channel’s Compressor on or off. DYNAMICS DISPLAY GATE / COMP THRESHOLD RANGE ATTACK DECAY HOLD THRESHOLD RATIO ATTACK RELEASE GAIN GATE COMP GATE ON 3 COMP ON Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [GATE/COMP] button to set the DYNAMICS controls to COMP (COMP indicator lit), and use the THRESHOLD, RATIO, ATTACK, RELEASE, and GAIN controls to set the Compressor. While an output Channel is selected, the [GATE/COMP] button is fixed at COMP. Comp Edit Page 1 2 Compressor settings can be viewed and set on the Comp Edit page. If the Auto DYNAMICS Display preference is on, this page appears automatically when a Compressor control in the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is operated. See “Auto DYNAMICS Display” on page 234. Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Comp Library page, and recall a preset Compressor that contains the comp type that you want. See “Comp Library” on page 145 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Compressing Channels 115 3 Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Comp Edit page. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. POSITION: This determines the position of the Compressor within the channel, and can be set to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. It works in unison with the COMP POSITION parameter on the Insert page. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information. STEREO LINK: This allows you to pair Comps for stereo operation even when channels are not paired. Input Channel Comps are paired either horizontally or vertically depending on the Pair mode setting for the currently selected Input Channel. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information on horizontal and vertical pairing. When channels are paired, this parameter is turned on automatically and cannot be changed. CURVE: This displays the Compressor curve (i.e., input level vs. output level). TYPE: This is the comp type used by the currently selected channel’s Compressor. Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner. The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being applied by the currently selected channel’s Compressor. ON/OFF: This turns the currently selected channel’s Compressor on and off. It works in unison with the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS [COMP ON] button. PARAMETER: These controls are used to set the Threshold, Ratio, Attack, Release, Out Gain, and Knee parameters. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 116 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions Grouping Output Channel Compressors 1 The Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out Compressors can be grouped, allowing you to control the compression of several Output Channels simultaneously. There are four Output Channel Compressor groups: m, n, o, and p. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Comp Link page. 2 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button. 3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Comp groups m–p. The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box. 4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channels to and from the selected group. The Compressor settings of the first Output Channel added to the group are applied to all subsequently added Output Channels. When an Output Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Delaying Channel Signals 117 Delaying Channel Signals Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out all feature independent Delay functions. Input Channel Delays feature feedback, with independent Mix and Gain parameters. Using the SELECTED CHANNEL DELAY Controls 1 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use DELAY the [SEL] buttons to select channels. Use the STEREO [SEL] button to toggle between the left and right channels of the Stereo Out. On the Master Layer, use [SEL] buttons 21–24 to toggle between the left and right channels of the Matrix Sends. FB DISPLAY MIX ON TIME 2 Use the [ON] button to turn the Delay function on and off. 3 Use the TIME control to set the delay time. If the currently selected channel is an Input Channel, you can also set the Feedback Gain (FB) and Feedback Mix (MIX) parameters. Use the FB/MIX push switch to select either FB or MIX, and use the FB/MIX control to set it. Delay Pages 1 Delay settings can be viewed and set on the Delay pages. If the Auto DELAY Display preference is on, these pages appear automatically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL DELAY section is operated. See “Auto DELAY Display” on page 234. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL DELAY [DISPLAY] button to select the Delay pages. The Delay parameters for the 96 Input Channels are arranged into four pages. The Input Channel 1–24 Delay page is shown below. The layout of the other three pages is the same. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 118 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions The Delay parameters for the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out appear on the Output Delay page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the Delay parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. Input and Output Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER and [SEL] buttons. DELAY SCALE: These buttons determine the units of the delay value shown below the msec value. Units can be set to meters, feet, samples, beats, or timecode frames. GANG: When this option is turned on, the delay time for paired channels can be set simultaneously. Ganging is relative, so any delay time difference between the two channels is maintained when this is turned on. ON/OFF: These buttons turn the individual Delay functions on and off. The [ENTER] button can be used to turn a Delay on and off regardless of which parameter is selected. msec: This sets the delay time in milliseconds. The delay time can also be set by using the parameter below, which is the delay time in the units selected by the DELAY SCALE buttons. You can copy the currently selected Input or Output Channel delay setting to all Input or Output Channels respectively by double-clicking the [ENTER] button. MIX: This parameter, available only on the Input Channel Delay pages, sets the mix of dry and wet signals. FB.GAIN: This parameter, available only on the Input Channel Delay pages, sets the amount of feedback. Soloing Channels 1 2 Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Matrix Sends can be soloed as follows. Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers if you want to solo Input Channels, or select the Master Layer if you want to solo Output Channels. Input and Output Channels cannot be soloed simultaneously. Soled Input Channels will be unsoled when an Output Channel is soloed, and vice versa. Use the [SOLO] buttons to solo the channels on the selected Layer. The [SOLO] button indicators of channels that are soloed light up. SOLO The SOLO indicator in the MONITOR section flashes when the Solo function is active. You can unsolo all soloed channels by pressing the SOLO [CLEAR] button. You can adjust the level contrast between the soloed channels and the currently selected Control Room Monitor source by adjusting the SOLO CONTRAST control. DM2000—Owner’s Manual SOLO SOLO CONTRAST CLEAR Soloing Channels 119 Configuring Solo 1 2 The Solo function is configured on the Solo Setup page. If the Auto SOLO Display preference is on, this page appears automatically when a channel is soloed. See “Auto SOLO Display” on page 234. Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Solo Setup page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. SOLO: This is used to enable and disable the Solo function. STATUS: This determines the Solo mode: Recording or Mixdown. In Recording Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Solo bus and output via the Control Room Outputs. Other buses are unaffected by this mode. If the Listen parameter is set to AFTER PAN, the signal source for Input Channels that are off, is pre fader. In Mixdown Solo mode, soloed Input Channel signals are fed to the Stereo bus and output via the Stereo Out and Control Room Outputs. Unsoloed Input Channels are muted and their [ON] button indicators flash (unless they are Solo Safe enabled). Only Input Channels that are routed to the Stereo Out can be soloed in this mode. Input Channels that are off are temporarily turned on when they are soloed. SEL MODE: This determines the Solo Select mode: Mix Solo or Last Solo. In Mix Solo mode, any number of channels can be soloed simultaneously. In Last Solo mode, only one channel can be soloed at a time. LISTEN: This determines the source of the Input Channel Solo signal: Pre Fader or After Pan. This parameter does not affect Mixdown Solo mode. Output Channels are fixed at After Pan. SOLO TRIM: This is used to trim the level of the Solo signal. This parameter does not affect Mixdown Solo mode. SOLO SAFE CHANNEL: For Mixdown Solo mode, Input Channels can be configured individually so that they are not muted when other Input Channels are soloed. Use the [SEL] buttons, cursor buttons, or Parameter wheel to select the SOLO SAFE CHANNEL buttons. Use the [ENTER] or INC/DEC buttons to set Solo Safe for each Input Channel. These settings do not affect Recording Solo mode. You can clear all Solo Safe settings by selecting the ALL CLEAR button and pressing [ENTER]. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 120 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions Pairing Channels Input Channels, Bus Outs, and Aux Sends can be paired for stereo operation. Input Channels can be paired either horizontally, that is, adjacent odd-even channels on the same Layer (e.g., 1-2, 3-4, 5-6, etc) or vertically, that is, counterpart channels on adjacent Layers (e.g., 1-25, 2-26, 49-73, 50-74, etc). Bus Outs and Aux Sends can be paired only horizontally. Pairing Channels by Using the [SEL] Buttons 1 2 Only horizontal pairing can be set by using the [SEL] buttons. Use the LAYER buttons to select the Layer containing the channels that you want to pair. While holding down the [SEL] button of the first channel, press the [SEL] button of the second channel. The settings of the first channel are copied to the second channel and the channels are paired. The [SEL] button indicator of the currently selected channel lights up, while the [SEL] button indicator of the other channel flashes. Aux Sends can also be paired by using the AUX SELECT buttons. To cancel a pair, while holding down the [SEL] button of the first channel, press the [SEL] button of the second channel. The following channel parameters are copied, and controlled together, when channels are paired: Fader, On/Off, Insert On/Off, Aux/Matrix On/Off, Aux/Matrix Send Level, Aux/Matrix Pre/Post, Gate parameters, Compressor parameters, Comp Position, EQ parameters, Fader group, Mute group, EQ group, Comp group, Solo, Solo Safe, [AUTO] button, Fade Time, Recall Safe, Bus to Stereo On/Off, Bus to Stereo Level. The following channel parameters are not copied, or controlled together, when channels are paired: Input Patch, Insert Patch, Output Patch, Phase, Delay On/Off, Delay Time, Delay Feedback, Delay Mix, Routing, Pan, Follow Pan, Surround Pan, Bus to Stereo Pan, Aux/Matrix Send Pan, Balance. When channels are paired, the Attenuator value is copied, but the channels are not controlled together. Pairing Channels by Using the Pair Pages 1 Both horizontal and vertical pairing can be set on the Pair pages. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [PAIR] button to locate the Pair pages. The Pair parameters for the 96 Input Channels are divided between two pages. The Input Channel 1–48 Pair page is shown below. The layout of the other page is the same. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Pairing Channels 2 121 To set the pair mode, select the PAIR MODE HORIZONTAL or VERTICAL buttons, and press [ENTER]. The Pair mode can be set independently for Input Channels 1–48 and Input Channels 49–96. The Input Channel 1–48 Pair page in Vertical mode is shown below. Pair parameters for the Bus Outs and Aux Sends appear on the Output Pair page. 3 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the channel pair buttons, and press [ENTER] to make or break pairs. Input and Output Channels can also be selected by using the LAYER and [SEL] buttons. A dialog box appears with options for copying the settings of the first channel to the second channel, the second channel to the first channel, and for resetting both channels to their initial settings. Choose the option required, and then press [ENTER]. On other display pages, paired channels have a heart icon, or a dash between their channel numbers. When Input Channels are paired, MS Decoding can be used to decode signals from microphones arranged as MS pairs. MS Decoding is set on the Input Channel Pair pages. This can be turned on and off for each pair of channels by using the MS buttons. The Output Pair page displays the currently selected Surround mode (i.e., Stereo, 3-1, or 5.1), which can be set on the Surround Mode page (see page 77). When a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected, the names of the Surround channels are shown below the Bus Out and Aux Send pair buttons, as shown in the following table. Surround Mode Bus Out/Aux Send 1 2 3 4 5 6 3-1 L R C S — — 5.1 L R Ls Rs C LFE DM2000—Owner’s Manual 122 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions When a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected, Aux Sends can be set to follow the same Input Channel Surround Pan that applies to the Bus Outs, which is useful for feeding Surround channel signals to external effects processors. This is turned on and off by using the F.S buttons that appear below the Aux Send Pair buttons. When a pair of Aux Sends are set to follow Surround Pan, their Aux Send Pair button is unavailable, and their Aux Pan parameters (see page 94) are unavailable. Grouping Output Channel Faders 1 The Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out faders can be grouped, allowing you to control the level of several Output Channels simultaneously. There are four Output Channel Fader groups: Q, R, S, and T. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Fader Group page. 2 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button. 3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Fader groups Q–T. The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box. 4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channel faders to and from the selected group. When an Output Channel is added to a group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up. ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups. You can temporarily disable a Fader group in order to make adjustments to individual faders by operating the desired channel fader while holding down its [SEL] button. Fader groups are active only in Fader mode. See “Selecting Fader Modes” on page 44 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) 123 Grouping Output Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) 1 The Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out mutes can be grouped, allowing you to mute several Output Channels simultaneously. There are four Output Channel Mute groups: U, V, W, and X. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [GROUP] button to locate the Output Mute Group page. 2 Press the LAYER [MASTER] button. 3 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select Mute groups U–X. The selected group is highlighted by a flashing cursor box. 4 Use the [SEL] buttons to add and remove Output Channels to and from the selected group. When an Output Channel is added to a Mute group, its [SEL] button indicator lights up. ENABLE: These buttons are used to enable and disable the groups. Mute groups may contain a combination of channels that are on and channels that are off. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 124 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions Viewing Channel Parameter Settings 1 The parameter setting of the currently selected Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, or the Stereo Out can be viewed and set on the Parameter View pages. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button to select the Parameter View page. 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] buttons to set them. Input Channels This is the Parameter View page for the Input Channels. GATE: The following Gate parameters for the currently selected Input Channel can be set: Gate On/Off, Threshold, Range, Attack, Decay, and Hold. The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being applied by the Gate. Also displayed are the gate curve and gate type. See “Gating Input Channels” on page 69 for more information. COMP: The following Compressor parameters for the currently selected channel can be set: Comp On/Off, Threshold, Ratio, Attack, Release, Gain, and Knee. The GR meter indicates the amount of gain reduction being applied by the Compressor. Also displayed are the comp curve and comp type. See “Compressing Channels” on page 113 for more information. INSERT: The currently selected channel’s Insert can be turned on and off and patched. See “Using Inserts” on page 111 for more information. EQ: The currently selected channel’s EQ and Attenuator can be set. Also displayed is the EQ curve of the currently selected Input Channel. See “Using EQ” on page 107 for more information. Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected channel and its horizontal or vertical partner. Phase: The signal phase of the currently selected Input Channel can be reversed. See “Reversing the Signal Phase” on page 68 for more information. DELAY: The currently selected channel’s Delay function can be set. See “Delaying Channel Signals” on page 117 for more information. PAIR: This heart icon indicates whether or not channels are paired. See “Pairing Channels” on page 120 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Viewing Channel Fader Settings 125 Output Channels This is the Parameter View page for the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out. Parameters are the same as for the Input Channel Parameter View page, minus the GATE and Phase sections and the DELAY MIX and FB GAIN parameters. The parameter settings of the left and right channels of the Matrix Sends and Stereo Out can be viewed individually. Use the [SEL] buttons to toggle between the left and right channels. Viewing Channel Fader Settings 1 The fader-related settings of the currently selected Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, or the Stereo Out can be viewed and set on the Fader View pages. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button to select the Fader View page. 2 Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] buttons to set them. Pan and Balance controls can be set to center by pressing [ENTER] while they’re selected. Input Channels This is the Fader View page for the Input Channels. PAN: This is the currently selected Input Channel’s Pan parameter. See “Panning Input Channels” on page 76 for more information. ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the currently selected Input Channel. See “Muting Input Channels (ON/OFF)” on page 72 for more information. Fader: This indicates the fader position of the currently selected Input Channel. The fader knob appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed DM2000—Owner’s Manual 126 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions numerically below the fader. See “Setting Input Channel Levels” on page 74 for more information. SURROUND PAN: The Surround pan parameters for the currently selected Input Channel are displayed only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected. See “Using Surround Pan” on page 77 for more information. BUS ROUTING: This section contains Routing and Follow Pan buttons for the currently selected Input Channel. See “Routing Input Channels” on page 75 for more information. The Direct Out output patch can also be set. See “Patching Direct Outs” on page 65 for more information. AUX: These are the currently selected Input Channel’s Aux Send Level, On/Off, and Pre/Post parameters. While a rotary control is selected, the Aux Send can be turned on and off by pressing [ENTER]. See “Aux Sends” on page 88 for more information. Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner. The metering position is displayed below them. GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the currently selected Input Channel is in. Bus Outs This is the Fader View page for the Bus Outs. ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the currently selected Bus Out. See “Muting Bus Outs (ON/OFF)” on page 86 for more information. Fader: This indicates the fader position of the currently selected Bus Out. The fader knob appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numerically below the fader. See “Setting Bus Out Levels” on page 86 for more information. TO ST PAN, ON/OFF & Fader: These are the Bus Out to Stereo Out Pan, On/Off, and Fader parameters for the currently selected Bus Out. The fader knob appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numerically below the fader. See “Sending Bus Outs to the Stereo Out” on page 87 for more information. MATRIX PAN: These are the Matrix Send Pan controls for the currently selected Bus Out. See “Panning Matrix Sends” on page 99 for more information. MATRIX SEND: These are the Matrix Send Level controls for the currently selected Bus Out. While a rotary control is selected, the Matrix Send can be turned on and off by pressing [ENTER]. See “Setting Matrix Send Levels” on page 97 for more information. Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Bus Out and its partner. The metering position is displayed below them. GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the currently selected Bus Out is in. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Viewing Channel Fader Settings 127 Aux Sends Below is the Fader View page for the Aux Sends. ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the currently selected Aux Send. See “Muting Aux Sends (ON/OFF)” on page 90 for more information. Fader: This indicates the fader position of the currently selected Aux Send. The fader knob appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numerically below the fader. See “Settings Aux Send Master Levels” on page 96 for more information. MATRIX PAN: These are the Matrix Send Pan controls for the currently selected Aux Send. See “Panning Matrix Sends” on page 99 for more information. MATRIX SEND: These are the Matrix Send Level controls for the currently selected Aux Send. While a rotary control is selected, the Matrix Send can be turned on and off by pressing [ENTER]. See “Setting Matrix Send Levels” on page 97 for more information. Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Aux Send and its partner. The metering position is displayed below them. GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the currently selected Aux Send is in. Matrix Sends Below is the Fader View page for the Matrix Sends. The settings of the left and right channels of the Matrix Sends can be viewed individually. Use [SEL] buttons 1–24 to toggle between the left and right channels. BAL: This is the Balance parameter for the currently selected Matrix Send. See “Balancing Matrix Send Masters” on page 101 for more information. ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the currently selected Matrix Send. See “Muting Matrix Sends (ON/OFF)” on page 98 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 128 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions Fader: This indicates the fader position of the currently selected Matrix Send. The fader knob appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numerically below the fader. See “Setting Matrix Send Master Levels” on page 101 for more information. Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Matrix Send and its partner. The metering position is displayed below them. GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the currently selected Matrix Send is in. Stereo Out Below is the Fader View page for the Stereo Out. The settings of the left and right channels of the Stereo Out can be viewed individually. Use the STEREO [SEL] button to toggle between the left and right channels. BAL: This is the Balance parameter for the Stereo Out. See “Balancing the Stereo Out” on page 84 for more information. ON/OFF: This is the On/Off parameter of the Stereo Out. See “Muting the Stereo Out (ON/OFF)” on page 83 for more information. Fader: This indicates the fader position of the Stereo Out. The fader knob appears highlighted when the fader is set to 0.0 dB. The fader position is displayed numerically below the fader. See “Setting the Stereo Out Level” on page 83 for more information. MATRIX PAN: These are the Matrix Send Pan controls for the Stereo Out. They can be set independently for the Stereo Out’s left and right channels. See “Panning Matrix Sends” on page 99 for more information. MATRIX SEND: These are the Matrix Send Level controls for the Stereo Out. They can be set independently for the Stereo Out’s left and right channels. While a rotary control is selected, the Matrix Send can be turned on and off by pressing [ENTER]. See “Setting Matrix Send Levels” on page 97 for more information. Meters: These meters indicate the levels of the Stereo Out. The metering position is displayed below them. GROUP: These buttons indicate which Fader, Mute, EQ, or Comp group, if any, the Stereo Out is in. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Copying Channel Settings 129 Copying Channel Settings The settings of Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo CHANNEL Out can be copied among channels of the same type by using the Channel Copy function. You can even copy to and from channels in Scenes without recalling COPY them. For the Matrix Sends and Stereo Out, the left and right channels are copied and pasted independently. PASTE The Channel Copy Parameter buttons on the Preferences 2 page allow you to specify which channel settings will be copied. See “Channel Copy Parameter” on page 236. Copying Channel Settings in the Same Scene 1 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the source channel. 2 Press the CHANNEL [COPY] button. The settings of the currently selected channel are copied to the Copy buffer. For paired channels, only the settings of the currently selected channel are copied. 3 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the destination channel. 4 Press the CHANNEL [PASTE] button. If the destination channel is of the same type as the source channel, the settings in the Copy buffer are pasted to the destination channel and its settings are updated accordingly. Copying Channel Settings from the Current Scene to Other Scenes 1 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the source channel. 2 Press the CHANNEL [COPY] button. 3 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the destination Scene. The number of the destination Scene flashes on the SCENE MEMORY display. 4 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the destination channel. 5 Press the CHANNEL [PASTE] button. A confirmation message appears. Choose YES to copy the source channel settings to the destination channel. Copying Channel Settings from Other Scenes to the Current Scene 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the source Scene. The number of the source Scene flashes on the SCENE MEMORY display. 2 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the source channel. 3 Press the CHANNEL [COPY] button. 4 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the current Scene. The number of the current Scene does not flash on the SCENE MEMORY display. 5 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the destination channel. 6 Press the CHANNEL [PASTE] button. The source channel settings are copied to the destination channel. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 130 Chapter 12—Common Channel Functions Copying Channel Settings Between Noncurrent Scenes 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the source Scene. The number of the source Scene flashes on the SCENE MEMORY display. 2 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the source channel. 3 Press the CHANNEL [COPY] button. 4 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select the destination Scene. The number of the destination Scene flashes on the SCENE MEMORY display. 5 Use the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the destination channel. 6 Press the CHANNEL [PASTE] button. A confirmation message appears. Choose YES to copy the source channel settings to the destination channel. Naming Channels You can specify Long and Short names for the Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out as follows. See page 256 for a list of initial Input Channel names; page 257 for Output Channel names. Input Channels 1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button to locate the Input Channel Name page. 2 Use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or the LAYER and [SEL] buttons to select the Input Channels. When Vertical Input Channel pairing mode is selected, Input Channels are listed in order of vertical partners, for example, CH1, CH25, CH2, CH26, and so on. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Input Channel’s Long or Short name, and then press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, edit the Input Channel name, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. You can reset all Input Channel names back to their initial values by pressing the INITIALIZE button. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Naming Channels 131 Output Channels 1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button to locate the Output Channel Name page 2 Use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or the Master Layer and [SEL] buttons to select the Output Channels. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Output Channel’s Long or Short name, and then press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, edit the Output Channel name, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. You can reset all Output Channel names back to their initial values by pressing the INITIALIZE button. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 132 Chapter 13—Monitoring & Talkback 13 Monitoring & Talkback Control Room Monitoring The DM2000 features independent outputs and level controls for two sets of studio monitors. The LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL) XLR-3-32-type connectors are intended to feed to the control room’s main monitors. The SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL) XLR-3-32-type connectors are intended to feed to the control room’s nearfield monitors. The Control Room Monitor signal source is selected by using the CONTROL ROOM STEREO buttons. [2TR D1]: Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1. [2TR D2]: Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 2. [2TR D3]: Selects the 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 3. [2TR A1]: Selects the 2TR IN ANALOG 1. [2TR A2]: Selects the 2TR IN ANALOG 2. [STEREO]: Selects the Stereo Out. [ASSIGN 1]: Selects the Output Channel assigned to this button on the Control Room Setup page. See “Control Room Setup” on page 133. [ASSIGN 2]: Selects the Output Channel assigned to this button on the Control Room Setup page. See “Control Room Setup” on page 133. STEREO The level of the Control Room Monitor signal can be set by using the CONTROL ROOM LEVEL control. You can toggle between the LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT and SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT by using the CONTROL ROOM [SMALL] button, whose indicator is off when LARGE is selected, and on when SMALL is selected. The Control Room Monitor signal can be switched into mono by using the CONTROL ROOM [MONO] button. The [DIMMER] button activates the Dimmer function, which dims the Control Room Monitor and Surround Monitor signals by the amount specified on the Control Room Setup page (page 133). The Dimmer function is activated automatically when the Slate, Talkback, or Oscillator function is active. 0 10 SMALL TRIM PHONES 0 10 PHONES LEVEL DM2000—Owner’s Manual 2TR D1 2TR A1 2TR D2 2TR A2 2TR D3 STEREO ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 MONO DIMMER SMALL 0 10 CONTROL ROOM LEVEL The level of the SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT can be set by using the SMALL TRIM control. When set at maximum, the level is the same as that of the LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT. The Control Room Monitor signal is also fed to the PHONES jack, the level of which is set by using the PHONES LEVEL control. Studio Monitoring 133 Control Room Setup 1 Control room monitoring is configured on the Control Room Setup page. Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Control Room Setup page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the ASSIGN buttons in the left-hand box, and use the Parameter wheel to select an Output Channel in the right-hand box. Bus Outs, Aux Sends, or Matrix Sends can be assigned to the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons. 3 Press [ENTER] to assign the selected Output Channel. Once assigned, the selected Output Channel appears highlighted in the right-hand box. The other parameters on this page are as follows. CONTROL ROOM DIMMER LEVEL: This determines the amount of attenuation applied to the Control Room Monitor and Surround Monitor signals by the Dimmer function. Use the cursor buttons to select it, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set it from. MONO: This button, which works in unison with the CONTROL ROOM [MONO] button, can be used to switch the Control Room Monitor signal into mono. Studio Monitoring The DM2000 features dedicated outputs, source selection, and level control. The Studio Monitor signal is output by the STUDIO MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL) 1/4-inch TRS phone jacks. STUDIO CONTROL ROOM STEREO AUX 11 AUX 12 0 10 The Studio Monitor signal source is selected by using the STUDIO buttons. [CONTROL ROOM]: Selects the Control Room Monitor. [STEREO]: Selects the Stereo Out. [AUX 11]: Selects Aux Send #11. [AUX 12]: Selects Aux Send #12. The level of the Studio Monitor signal can be set by using the STUDIO LEVEL control. STUDIO LEVEL DM2000—Owner’s Manual 134 Chapter 13—Monitoring & Talkback Surround Monitoring The DM2000 features comprehensive surround monitoring functions, including a pink noise generator for speaker setup, Bass Management, and down mixing. The Surround pages explained in this section are available only when a Surround mode other than Stereo is selected (see page 78). The Surround Monitor signal source is selected by using the SURROUND buttons. The [BUS] button selects the Bus Outs as the source. The [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons select the Inputs of the Slots specified on the Surround Monitor page as the source. Surround mixes from up to six multitrack recorders can be monitored by patching Slot Inputs to Surround Monitor Channels (see page 137) and selecting with the [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons. The level of the Surround Monitor can be set by using the SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control. Surround monitor speakers can be aligned by using the individual Attenuator and Delay parameters on each Surround Monitor Channel. In addition to the standard Ls and Rs speakers, the DM2000 supports Ls2 and Rs2 speakers, with independent Attenuator and Delay parameters, for a more diffused surround monitoring environment. See “Configuring Surround Monitoring” on page 135 for more information. Surround Monitor Channels can be patched to Slot Outputs or Omni Outputs. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more information. Surround Monitor settings can be stored in the Surround Monitor library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See “Surround Monitor Library” on page 147 for more information. General surround monitoring is performed on the Surround Monitor page. Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Surround Monitor page. SURROUND BUS ASSIGN 1 ASSIGN 2 SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL 1 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. The number of speaker icons and meters shown on the Surround Monitor page depends on the currently selected Surround mode. The meters indicate Bus Out signal levels. MUTE/SOLO: These parameters are used to mute and solo Surround Channels. A Surround Channel is on when its speaker icon is highlighted. Speaker icons can be selected by using the cursor buttons. When SOLO is on, Surround Channels can be soloed by selecting speaker icons and pressing [ENTER]. SETTING: These buttons are used to select which Slot’s Inputs are monitored when the SURROUND [ASSIGN 1] and [ASSIGN 2] buttons are pressed. Up to six Slots can be assigned to each ASSIGN button, in which case the signals are mixed. Individual Slot Inputs can be patched to Surround Monitor Channels on the Surround Monitor Patch page (see page 137). DM2000—Owner’s Manual Surround Monitoring 135 When the MONITOR L/R to C-R button is on, the Left and Right Surround Monitor Channels are fed to the Control Room Monitors. This is useful when you want to use the same speakers for Left and Right Surround Monitors and Control Room Monitors. STATUS: SURROUND MODE indicates the currently selected Surround mode, which is set on the Surround Mode page (see page 78). MONITOR LEVEL indicates the volume setting of the SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control, which can be calibrated to 85 dB SPL, the cinema standard for setting up Surround Channel Monitor speakers. To do this, output pink noise from the built-in Oscillator (see page 135), set the SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control and the level controls on the Surround Monitor speaker amps so that the total output is 85 dB SPL, then press the SET SPL85 button. The MONITOR LEVEL indication will then display the volume setting relative to 85 dB SPL. Press the SET SPL85 button again to return to the normal volume indication. Configuring Surround Monitoring 1 2 Surround monitoring, including speaker setup, monitor matrix, Bass Management, and monitor alignment, is configured on the Surround Monitor Setup page. Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Surround Monitor Setup page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. SPEAKER SETUP: These parameters are for setting the volume balance of the surround monitor speakers. Select the OSC (Oscillator) parameter and choose from PINK NOISE, 500-2K (pink noise through a 500 Hz to 2 kHz BPF), 1K (1 kHz sinewave), or 50 Hz (50 Hz sinewave). Use the ON/OFF button to turn the Oscillator on and off. When on, the Oscillator outputs a signal at –20 dB to the Surround Channels whose icons are highlighted. You can turn on and off Oscillator output for speakers individually. Speaker icons can be selected by using the cursor buttons. The signal phase of the LFE Channel can be reversed by using the SW Phase button. When ROTATE is on, the Oscillator signal is output by each speaker in turn in a clockwise direction (3 second signal, 2 second pause). SURR. MODE: This indicates the currently selected Surround mode, which is set on the Surround Mode page (see page 78). DM2000—Owner’s Manual 136 Chapter 13—Monitoring & Talkback MONITOR MATRIX: This is used to select the Surround Monitor Matrix. In 5.1 Surround mode, you can select 5.1, 3-1, or ST. In 3-1 Surround mode, you can select 3-1 or ST. When a down mix Monitor Matrix is selected, you can attenuate signals by using the ATT parameters. The following diagrams, which show the Monitor Matrixes available in each Surround mode, are displayed when this parameter is selected. 3-1 to 3-1 3-1 to ST 5.1 to 5.1 5.1 to 3-1 5.1 to ST BASS MANAGE: This parameter is used to select the five preset Bass Management modes for use with 5.1 Surround mode and the 5.1 Monitor Matrix. The presets cannot be selected when other Surround modes or Monitor Matrixes are selected. Use the ON/OFF button to turn Bass Management on and off. When off, the Bass Management filters are set to THRU and the discrete 5.1 channel-to-LFE feeds are muted. The Bass Management diagram and parameters shown here are displayed when this parameter is selected. Bass Management parameters can be set as follows. Parameter Range HPF THRU, 80-12, 80-12L, 80-24, 80-24L LPF1 THRU, 80-24, 80-24L, 120-42 LPF2 THRU, 80–24, 80-24L, MUTE ATT 0 to –12 dB (1 dB steps) AMP 0 to +12 dB (1 dB steps) “80-12” means a cutoff frequency of 80 Hz and a filter response of –12 dB/octave. “L” means Linkwitz filter. Other filters are Butterworth. The following table lists the Bass Management preset parameter values (“w/BS” means with Bass Management). SMALL speakers are assumed for the presets. Presets # Title Parameters HPF LPF1 LPF2 ATT AMP 1 DVD Mix w/BS 80-12 80-24 80-24 0 10 2 DVD Author w/BS 80-12 120-42 80-24 0 10 3 Film Mix w/BS 80-12 80-24 80-24 –3 10 4 Film Author w/BS 80-12 120-42 80-24 –3 10 5 Bypass THRU THRU MUTE 0 0 DM2000—Owner’s Manual Surround Monitoring 137 MONITOR ALIGNMENT ATT & DLY ON/OFF: These buttons are used to turn on and off the Monitor Alignment Attenuator and Delay parameters of all Surround speakers. The MONITOR ALIGNMENT diagram and Surround Channel Attenuator and Delay parameters, which are displayed when either of these buttons are selected, allow you to align the surround monitor speakers by attenuating and delaying Surround Channels as necessary. The Attenuator parameters can be set from –12 dB to +12 dB in 0.1 dB steps. The Delay parameters can be set from 0.0 to 30.0 msec in 0.02 msec steps. Patching Slot Inputs to Surround Channels 1 2 Individual Slot Inputs can be patched to Surround Monitor Channels as follows. Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Surround Monitor Patch page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. SLOT/CH: This patching matrix is used to patch Inputs 1–8 from each of the six Slots to Surround Monitor Channels 1–8. Each Slot Input can be patched to only one Surround Monitor Channel. LEVEL: These parameters are used to set the monitor level of each Slot. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 138 Chapter 13—Monitoring & Talkback Using Talkback & Slate The Talkback function distributes the Talkback mic signal to the Studio Monitor Outs and any Slot or Omni Outputs specified on the Talkback Setup page. The TALKBACK LEVEL control sets the level of the built-in talkback microphone. 0 10 TALKBACK LEVEL The [TALKBACK] button has two modes of operation: If it’s pressed once (i.e., for less than 300 ms), the Talkback function is turned on and remains on when the button is released. This is Latched mode (this mode can be disabled on the Talkback Setup page). If it’s pressed and held for longer, the Talkback TALKBACK function is turned on, but turns off when the button is released. This is Unlatched mode. The [TALKBACK] button indicator flashes while the Talkback function is active. The Slate function distributes the Talkback mic signal to all Bus Outs, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out. The [SLATE] button has two modes of operation: If it’s pressed once (i.e., for less than 300 ms), the Slate function is turned on and remains on when the SLATE button is released. This is Latched mode. If it’s pressed and held for longer, the Slate function is turned on, but turns off when the button is released. This is Unlatched mode. The [SLATE] button indicator flashes while the Slate function is active. Talkback Setup 1 Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Talkback Setup page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. OUTPUT ASSIGN: These buttons are used to assign the Talkback mic signal to Slot and Omni Outputs. TALKBACK DIMMER LEVEL: When the Talkback function is active, this determines the amount of attenuation applied to sound sources assigned to the Studio Monitors and selected for Talkback. USE AD IN x AS TALKBACK: This allows you to select an AD Input as the Talkback signal source. Use the check box to turn this option on and off, and use the number parameter to specify the number of the AD Input. The signal from the specified AD Input is mixed with the Talkback mic signal. Turn down the TALKBACK LEVEL if you do not want to use the Talkback mic. NEVER LATCH TALKBACK: This options allows you to disable Talkback latching. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Libraries 139 14 Libraries About the Libraries The DM2000 features 11 libraries for storing Automix, Effects, Channel, Input Patch, Output Patch, GEQ, Bus to Stereo, Gate, Comp, EQ, and Surround Monitor data. Library data can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187). It can also be stored to SmartMedia (see page 231). General Library Operation 1 Since most library functions are the same for each library, rather than explain them several times, they’re explained only here for conciseness. Locate the various library pages as explained in the following sections. The Input Patch Library page shown below is used here for explanation purposes. 2 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the memories. A memory is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the following page buttons. TITLE EDIT: To edit the title of the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, edit the title, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. RECALL: To recall the contents of the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER]. If the Recall Confirmation preference is on, a confirmation window appears before the contents are recalled. STORE: To store settings to the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a title, and press OK. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. You can stop the Title Edit window from appearing by turning off the Store Confirmation preference on page 235. CLEAR: To delete the contents and title of the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER]. A confirmation window appears before the memory is cleared. Read-only preset memories have an “R” icon next to their name. You cannot store, clear, or edit the title of these memories. Empty memories have the title “No Data!” Memory #0 is a read-only memory that you can recall to reset settings to their initial values. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 140 Chapter 14—Libraries Memory #U is a special read-only memory that allows you to undo and redo memory recall and store operations. After recalling a memory, you can revert to the previously recalled memory by recalling memory #U. After storing a memory, you can revert it to its previous contents by recalling memory #U. You can redo either of these undo operations by recalling memory #U again. Channel Library 1 2 Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out channel settings can be stored in the Channel library, which contains 2 preset memories and 127 user memories. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [VIEW] button to select the Channel Library page. Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and the [SEL] buttons to select channels. When storing, the settings of the currently selected channel are stored to the selected memory. When recalling, the settings in the selected memory are applied to the currently selected channel. Only memories whose contents correspond to the currently selected channel can be recalled. For example, you can recall Input Channel settings to Input Channels, but not to Aux Sends. When the selected memory and currently selected channel don’t correspond, a warning triangle and the word “CONFLICT” appear in the STORED FROM box. Preset memory #0, “Reset(–∞dB),” resets all parameters of the currently selected channel to their initial values and sets the channel level to –∞ dB. Preset memory #1, “Reset (0dB),” also resets all parameters, but sets the channel level to 0 dB (i.e., nominal). SEL CH: This indicates the currently selected channel. CURRENT CONFIGURATION: If the currently selected channel is an Input Channel, Surround mode and Aux configuration information is displayed here. Level meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner. STORED FROM: This indicates the channel whose settings were originally stored in the selected memory. If the currently selected channel is an Input channel, Pan mode and Aux pairing information is also displayed. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 139. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Input Patch Library 141 Input Patch Library 1 Input Patch settings can be stored in the Input Patch library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See page 61 for information on Input Patch settings. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [INPUT PATCH] button to select the Input Patch Library page. When storing, the current Input Patch settings are stored to the selected memory. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 139. Output Patch Library 1 Output Patch settings can be stored in the Output Patch library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See page 63 for information on Output Patch settings. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [OUTPUT PATCH] button to select the Output Patch Library page. When storing, the current Output Patch settings are stored to the selected memory. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 139. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 142 Chapter 14—Libraries GEQ Library 1 2 GEQ settings can be stored in the GEQ library, which contains 1 preset memory and 128 user memories. See page 155 for information on using the GEQs. Use the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [DISPLAY] button to select the Graphic Equalizer Library page. Press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS] button, and use the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–6] buttons to select the GEQs. When storing, the settings of the currently selected GEQ, indicated in the upper-left corner, are stored to the selected memory. CURRENT CURVE: This is the response curve of the currently selected GEQ. CURVE: This displays the response curve in the currently selected memory. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 139. Effects Library 1 2 Effects settings can be stored in the Effects library, which contains 52 preset memories and 76 user memories. See page 148 for information on using the Effects. Use the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [DISPLAY] button to select the Effect Library page. Press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button, and use the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] buttons to select the internal effects processors. When storing, the settings of the currently selected internal effects processor, indicated in the upper-left corner, are stored to the selected memory. EFFECT NAME: This is the name of the previously recalled Effects memory. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Bus to Stereo Library 143 TYPE: This is the effects type used in the previously recalled Effects memory. Its I/O configuration is shown below this. Level meters: These meters indicate the output levels of the currently selected Effects processor. There are eight output meters for Effects processors #1 and #2, and two output meters for Effects processors #3 through #8. EFFECT TYPE: This is the effects type in the selected memory. Its I/O configuration is shown below this. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 139. Bus to Stereo Library 1 Bus to Stereo settings can be stored in the Bus to Stereo library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See page 87 for information on Bus to Stereo routing. Use the ROUTING [DISPLAY] button to select the Bus to Stereo Library page. When storing, the current Bus Out to Stereo Out settings are stored to the selected memory. CURRENT CONFIGURATION: Bus Out pairing information for the current configuration is displayed here. LIBRARY CONFIGURATION: Bus Out pairing information for the configuration stored in the currently selected memory is displayed here. Only memories whose Bus Out pairing configuration matches the current configuration can be recalled. When the current configuration and the selected memory don’t match, the word “CONFLICT” appear in the LIBRARY CONFIGURATION box. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 139. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 144 Chapter 14—Libraries Gate Library 1 2 Input Channel Gate settings can be stored in the Gate library, which contains 4 preset memories and 124 user memories. See page 69 for information on gating Input Channels. Use the DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to select the Gate Library page. Use the LAYER buttons to select the Input Channel Layers, and the [SEL] buttons to select Input Channels. When storing, the Gate settings of the currently selected Input Channel, indicated in the upper-right corner, are stored to the selected memory. When recalling, the Gate settings in the selected memory are applied to the currently selected Input Channel. CURRENT TYPE: This indicates the current Gate type of the currently selected channel. CURRENT CURVE: This is the Gate curve of the currently selected channel. GR meters: These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the Gate, and the levels of the currently selected channel and its adjacent channel. If Pair mode for the currently selected channel is set to Vertical, the level of its counterpart on the adjacent Layer is displayed. The type (Gate or Ducking) and curve of the currently selected memory is displayed to the right of the memory list. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 139. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Comp Library 145 Comp Library 1 2 Comp settings can be stored in the Comp library, which contains 36 preset memories and 92 user memories. See page 113 for information on the Comps. Use the DYNAMICS [DISPLAY] button to select the Comp Library page. Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and the [SEL] buttons to select channels. When storing, the Comp settings of the currently selected channel, indicated in the upper-right corner, are stored to the selected memory. When recalling, the Comp settings in the selected memory are applied to the currently selected channel. CURRENT TYPE: This indicates the current Comp type of the currently selected channel. CURRENT CURVE: This is the Comp curve of the currently selected channel. GR meters: These meters indicate the amount of gain reduction being applied by the Comp, and the levels of the currently selected channel and its adjacent channel. If Pair mode for the currently selected channel is set to Vertical, the level of its counterpart on the adjacent Layer is displayed. The type (Comp, Expand, Comp Soft, Comp Hard) and curve of the currently selected memory is displayed to the right of the memory list. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 139. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 146 Chapter 14—Libraries EQ Library 1 2 Input Channel, Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, and Stereo Out EQ settings can be stored in the EQ library, which contains 40 preset memories and 160 user memories. See page 107 for information on EQ’ing. Use the EQUALIZER [DISPLAY] button to select the EQ Library page. Use the LAYER buttons to select Layers, and the [SEL] buttons to select channels. When storing, the EQ settings of the currently selected channel, indicated in the upper-left and right corners, are stored to the selected memory. When recalling, the EQ settings in the selected memory are applied to the currently selected channel. CURRENT TYPE: This indicates the current EQ type (TYPE I or TYPE II) for the currently selected channel. CURRENT CURVE: This is the EQ curve of the currently selected channel. Level meters: These meters indicate the levels of the currently selected Input Channel and its horizontal or vertical partner. CURVE: This displays the EQ curve in the currently selected memory. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 139. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Automix Library 147 Automix Library 1 Up to 16 Automixes can be stored in the Automix library. See page 164 for information on using Automix. Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to select the Automix Memory page. When storing, the current Automix is stored to the selected memory. TITLE: This is the title of the current Automix. CURRENT: This is the size of the current Automix. FREE: This is the amount of free memory for storing the current Automix. SIZE: This is the size of the selected Automix memory. PROTECT: To protect the contents of the selected memory, select this and press [ENTER]. A padlock icon appears next to the titles of memories that are write-protected. Automixes cannot be stored to write-protected memories. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 139. Surround Monitor Library 1 Surround Monitor settings can be stored in the Surround Monitor library, which contains 1 preset memory and 32 user memories. See page 134 for information on Surround Monitoring. Use the MONITOR [DISPLAY] button to select the Surround Monitor Library page. When storing, the current Surround Monitor settings are stored to the selected memory. For details on the Store, Recall, Title Edit, and Clear functions, see “General Library Operation” on page 139. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 148 Chapter 15—Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs 15 Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs About the Effects The DM2000 features eight internal multi-effects processors, offering a whole host of effects types, including reverbs, delays, modulation-based effects, combination effects, and multichannel effects designed especially for use with surround sound. Effects processors 3–8 feature assignable stereo inputs and outputs. Processors #1 and #2, which are intended for use with the multichannel surround effects, feature eight assignable inputs and outputs. Processor inputs and outputs can be patched to various sources, including the inputs and outputs of other Effects processors, allowing you to chain processors together in series. The output signal levels of the currently selected Effects processor can be metered on the Effects Edit page. The input and output signal levels of all Effects processors can be metered on the Meter pages. See “Metering” on page 103 for more information. Effects settings can be stored in the Effects library, which contains 52 preset memories and 76 user memories. See “Effects Library” on page 142 for more information. Patching Effects Processors Effects processor inputs can be fed from the Aux Sends, Input and Output Channel Insert Outs, or the outputs of another Effects processor. See “Patching Effects Inputs” on page 62 for more information. Effects processor outputs can be patched to the Input Channels, Input and Output Channel Insert Ins, or the inputs of another Effects processor. See “Output Patching” on page 63 for more information. Preset Effects & Types The following tables list the preset effects and types. See page 264 for detailed parameter information. Reverbs # Preset Name Type Description 1 Reverb Hall REVERB HALL Concert hall reverberation simulation with gate 2 Reverb Room REVERB ROOM Room reverberation simulation with gate 3 Reverb Stage REVERB STAGE Reverb designed for vocals, with gate 4 Reverb Plate REVERB PLATE Plate reverb simulation with gate 5 Early Ref. EARLY REF. Early reflections without the subsequent reverb 6 Gate Reverb GATE REVERB Gated early reflections 7 Reverse Gate REVERSE GATE Gated reverse early reflections Delays # Preset Name Type Description 8 Mono Delay MONO DELAY Simple mono delay 9 Stereo Delay STEREO DELAY Simple stereo delay 10 Mod.delay MOD.DELAY Simple repeat delay with modulation 11 Delay LCR DELAY LCR 3-tap (left, center, right) delay 12 Echo ECHO Stereo delay with crossed left/right feedback DM2000—Owner’s Manual Preset Effects & Types 149 Modulation-based Effects # Preset Name Type Description 13 Chorus CHORUS Chorus 14 Flange FLANGE Flanger 15 Symphonic SYMPHONIC Proprietary Yamaha effect that produces a richer and more complex modulation than normal chorus 16 Phaser PHASER 16-stage stereo phase shifter 17 Auto Pan AUTO PAN Auto-panner 18 Tremolo TREMOLO Tremolo 19 HQ.Pitch HQ.PITCH Mono pitch shifter, producing stable results 20 Dual Pitch DUAL PITCH Stereo pitch shifter 21 Rotary ROTARY Rotary speaker simulation 22 Ring Mod. RING MOD. Ring modulator 23 Mod.Filter MOD.FILTER Modulated filter Guitar Effects # Preset Name Type Description 24 Distortion DISTORTION Distortion 25 Amp Simulate AMP SIMULATE Guitar amp simulation Dynamic Effects # Preset Name Type Description 26 Dyna.Filter DYNA.FILTER Dynamically controlled filter 27 Dyna.Flange DYNA.FLANGE Dynamically controlled flanger 28 Dyna.Phaser DYNA.PHASER Dynamically controlled phase shifter Combination Effects # Preset Name Type Description 29 Rev+Chorus REV+CHORUS Reverb and chorus in parallel 30 Rev->Chorus REV->CHORUS Reverb and chorus in series 31 Rev+Flange REV+FLANGE Reverb and flanger in parallel 32 Rev->Flange REV->FLANGE Reverb and flanger in series 33 Rev+Sympho. REV+SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in parallel 34 Rev->Sympho. REV->SYMPHO. Reverb and symphonic in series 35 Rev->Pan REV->PAN Reverb and auto-pan in series 36 Delay+ER. DELAY+ER. Delay and early reflections in parallel 37 Delay->ER. DELAY->ER. Delay and early reflections in series 38 Delay+Rev DELAY+REV Delay and reverb in parallel 39 Delay->Rev DELAY->REV Delay and reverb in series 40 Dist->Delay DIST->DELAY Distortion and delay in series DM2000—Owner’s Manual 150 Chapter 15—Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs Others # Preset Name Type Description 41 Multi.Filter MULTI.FILTER 42 Freeze FREEZE Simple sampler 43 Stereo Reverb ST REVERB Stereo reverb 441 Reverb 5.1 REVERB 5.12 6-channel reverb for 5.1 surround 3-band parallel filter (24 dB/octave) 451 Octa Reverb OCTA 461 Auto Pan 5.1 AUTO PAN 5.1 6-channel auto pan for 5.1 surround 471 Chorus 5.1 CHORUS 5.1 6-channel chorus for 5.1 surround 481 Flange 5.1 FLANGE 5.1 6-channel flanger for 5.1 surround 491 Sympho. 5.1 SYMPHO. 5.1 6-channel symphonic effect for 5.1 surround 50 M. Band Dyna. M. BAND DYNA. Multi-band dynamics processor 511 Comp 5.1 521 Compand 5.1 REVERB2 COMP 5.12 COMPAND 8-channel reverb for 7.1 surround Multi-band compressor for 5.1 surround 5.12 Multi-band compander for 5.1 surround 1. These effects can be recalled only to Effects processors #1 and #2. 2. Since these effects types require four DSPs, the total number of Effects processors is reduced by three when one of these types is used. For example, if REVERB 5.1 is used with Effects processor #1, only processors 2–5 are available. And if, for example, REVERB 5.1 is used with both Effects processor #1 and #2, then processors 3–8 are not available. Editing Effects 1 The internal effects processors can be edited as follows. Press the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button. 2 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [1–8] buttons to select the internal effects processors. 3 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Effects Library page, and recall a preset effects memory that contains the effects type that you want. See “Effects Library” on page 142 for more information. 4 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Effects Edit page. The available effects parameters depends on the effects type currently selected. See page 148 for detailed parameter information. 5 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them. EFFECT NAME: This is the name of the previously recalled Effects memory. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 151 Editing Effects TYPE: This is the effects type used in the previously recalled Effects memory. Its I/O configuration is shown below this. MIX BALANCE: This is used to set the balance between the wet and dry signals. When set to 0%, only the dry signal is heard. When set to 100%, only the wet signal is heard. BYPASS: This button is used to bypass the currently selected Effects processor. TEMPO: These parameters, which appear only when an effects type with a delay parameter, or a modulation-based effects type with a Frequency parameter is selected, are used to automatically calculate and set the delay time, or modulation frequency relative to the specified tempo and note length. Use the Note parameter to specify the note length, and use the BPM control to specify the tempo. You can also specify the tempo by tapping the TAP TEMPO button, which calculates the tempo based on the time interval between two taps. When the MIDI CLK button is on, the tempo is derived from the MIDI Clock information received at the specified MIDI Rx port. See “MIDI I/O” on page 182. Meters: These are output meters for the currently selected Effects processor. There are eight meters when processors #1 or #2 are selected; two when processors 3–8 are selected. Effects parameters can also be adjusted by using Parameter controls 1–4. Use the Parameter Up/Down buttons to select the rows of parameters. The parameters in the currently selected row appear highlighted. Up to 16 parameters can be displayed at a time, and if more are available, an up or down arrow is displayed. Parameter Up/Down 1 2 3 4 Parameter controls 1–4 When a Y56K card effect, or an internal effects processor is inserted in the currently selected channel, when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button is pressed, the corresponding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] button indicator flashes, and the corresponding Effects, or Plug-In edit page appears. If it’s a Y56K card that’s inserted, the [PLUG-INS] button indicator also flashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button indicator also flashes. This applies only to effects that are inserted into channels. If there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected channel, a message appears. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 152 Chapter 15—Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs About Plug-Ins There are two types of Plug-Ins: Waves Plug-Ins and User Defined Plug-Ins. Waves Plug-Ins are available on Y56K cards, which need to be installed in the DM2000’s mini YGDAI Slots (Slots 4–6 only). See your Yamaha dealer for details. User Defined Plug-Ins can be used to control up to 32 user definable parameters via MIDI Control Change or Parameter Change messages on an external MIDI device, such as an external effects processor. Plug-In parameters can be controlled by using the four Parameter controls below the display. Plug-In parameter settings are stored in Scenes, for snapshot-style automation. When installing Y56K cards, mini YGDAI Slots 4–6 correspond to Plug-Ins 4–6, so if you install, for example, a Y56K card in Slot #4, it’s automatically configured as Plug-In #4. DM2000 signals are patched through to the Y56K card’s effect chains just like any other signal is patched through to a Slot Input or Output. Slot Outputs (i.e., effect chain inputs) can be fed from the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, Stereo Out, or the Input and Output Channel Insert Outs. Slot Inputs (i.e., effect chain outputs) can be fed to the Input Channels, or the Input and Output Channel Insert Ins. See “Input & Output Patching” on page 61. Configuring Plug-Ins 1 Plug-Ins can be configured as follows. If you’ve installed a Y56K card into one of the Slots, the DM2000 configures itself automatically and no further configuration settings are required. Press the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [PLUG-INS] button. 2 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Plug-In Setup page. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. TARGET: These are used to assign a target to each of the eight Plug-Ins. Parameters for the specified target appear on the Plug-In Edit page when that Plug-In is selected by using the EFFECTS PLUG-INS [1–8] buttons. In addition to using the cursor buttons, Plug-Ins can also be selected on this page by using the EFFECTS PLUG-INS [1–8] buttons. TITLE: If a Y56K card is installed, its name is displayed here. If the target is set to USER DEFINED, the specified title of the bank currently selected on the Plug-In Edit page is displayed. PORT: If a Y56K card is installed, its Slot number is displayed here. If the target is set to USER DEFINED, you can specify the Plug-Ins MIDI port as MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, or SLOT1 1–8. Plug-In MIDI Ports can also be set on the MIDI/To Host Setup page. See “MIDI I/O” on page 182 for more information. Plug-In Setup settings are stored in the Setup data. See “Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia” on page 231 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Editing Plug-Ins 153 Editing Plug-Ins 1 Plug-Ins can be edited as follows. The settings of Waves Plug-Ins and User Defined Plug-In banks can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored to SmartMedia (see page 231). If you’ve installed a Y56K card into one of the Slots, display pages especially for the Waves card are displayed when the corresponding Plug-In is selected. See the Waves documentation for more information. The following explanation applies only to User Defined Plug-Ins. Press the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [PLUG-INS] button. 2 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [1–8] buttons to select the Plug-Ins. 3 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the Plug-In Edit page. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. TRANSMIT: This enables and disables MIDI data transmission for the currently selected Plug-In. INITIALIZE: This initializes the settings of the currently selected bank. BANK: These buttons are used to select the parameter banks of the currently selected Plug-In. Up to four parameter settings can be stored in each bank, making a total of 32 parameters per Plug-In. TITLE: This is used to enter a title (up to 16 characters long) for each bank. To enter a title for the currently selected bank, select this and press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a title, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. PARAMETER ID/NAME: This is used to select the four rotary controls at the bottom of the Plug-In Edit page for editing, and to enter a name (up to 16 characters long) for each control. Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a Parameter ID from 1–4, and then press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a title, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. DATA: This is used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be transmitted when each parameter control is adjusted. Use the PARAMETER ID/NAME parameter to select a Parameter ID from 1–4, and then edit as necessary. Data values can be set in hex from 00 to FF. The VAL setting is the value of the parameter control. The END setting specifies the end of the data. NOP means no data is transmitted. LEARN: This button is used to turn on and off the Learn function, which can be used to learn what MIDI messages are transmitted by external MIDI devices when their controls or parameters are adjusted. When on, received MIDI messages are displayed by the DATA parameter. Only the first 16 bytes of data, starting with a Status bit, are displayed. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 154 Chapter 15—Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs MIN/MAX: These parameters determine the minimum and maximum values of the MIDI data transmitted when each parameter control is adjusted. Use the PARAMETER ID/NAME parameter to select a Parameter ID from 1–4, and then edit as necessary. VAL: This is used to select the format for converting parameter control values to the DATA parameter’s VAL setting. It applies to the currently selected bank. The available options are listed in the following table. VAL Description VAL count One byte Transmit the lower 7 bits of the parameter value as 1 word Up to one VAL MSB/LSB Transmit the lower 14 bits of the parameter value in 7-bit units starting from the upper byte Up to two VAL’s LSB/MSB Transmit the lower 14 bits of the parameter value in 7-bit units starting from the lower byte Up to two VAL’s 2 Nibbles M Transmit the lower 8 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units, consecutively from the highest data Up to two VAL’s 3 Nibbles M Transmit the lower 12 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units, consecutively from the highest data Up to three VAL’s 4 Nibbles M Transmit the parameter value in 4 bit units, consecutively from the highest data Up to four VAL’s 2 Nibbles L Transmit the lower 8 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units, consecutively from the lowest data Up to two VAL’s 3 Nibbles L Transmit the lower 12 bits of the parameter value in 4-bit units, consecutively from the lowest data Up to three VAL’s 4 Nibbles L Transmit the parameter value in 4-bit units, consecutively from the lowest data Up to four VAL’s When the controls at the bottom of the Plug-In Edit page are operated, the specified MIDI data, along with the value of the parameter control, is transmitted. Plug-In parameters can also be adjusted by using Parameter controls 1–4, which correspond to the four parameters shown at the bottom of the Plug-In Edit page. 1 2 3 4 Parameter controls 1–4 When a Y56K card effect, or an internal effects processor is inserted in the currently selected channel, when the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [CHANNEL INSERTS] button is pressed, the corresponding EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [1–8] button indicator flashes, and the corresponding Effects, or Plug-In edit page appears. If it’s a Y56K card that’s inserted, the [PLUG-INS] button indicator also flashes. If it’s an internal effects processor, the [INTERNAL EFFECTS] button indicator also flashes. This applies only to effects that are inserted into channels. If there’s nothing inserted in the currently selected channel, a message appears. The parameter settings, and the target and bank for each Plug-In are stored in Scenes. When a Scene is recalled, if the Plug-In’s Target is the same as when the Scene was stored, the parameters are set accordingly and the corresponding MIDI data is transmitted (so long as the REMOTE parameter is set to ENABLED). If the Target is not the same, the parameters are set accordingly but no MIDI data is transmitted. DM2000—Owner’s Manual About the GEQs 155 About the GEQs The DM2000 features six 31-band graphic equalizers that can be inserted into the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, or the left or right channels of the Matrix Sends or Stereo Out. GEQs can be linked for simultaneous operation. GEQ settings can be stored in the GEQ library, which contains 1 preset memory and 128 user memories. See “GEQ Library” on page 142 for more information. Editing GEQs 1 GEQs can be edited as follows. Press the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS] button. 2 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [1–6] buttons to select the GEQs. 3 Use the EFFECTS/PLUG INS [DISPLAY] button to locate the GEQ Edit page. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. ON/OFF: This is used to turn on and off the currently selected GEQ. INSERT: This selects the Output Channel (Bus Out, Aux Send, or left or right channel of a Matrix Send or the Stereo Out) into which the GEQ is inserted. This parameter can also be set on the Output Channel Insert page (see page 111) or the Graphic Equalizer Insert page (see page 66). LINK: These buttons are used to link the currently selected GEQ with another GEQ for simultaneous operation. The buttons of GEQs that are already linked are unavailable. When you press a button to link to a GEQ, the settings of the currently selected GEQ are copied to that GEQ. LIMIT: This determines the maximum amount of boost and cut for the currently selected GEQ. It can be set to ±15 dB, ±12 dB, ±6 dB, or –24 dB. FLAT: Pressing this resets all bands of the currently selected GEQ to 0 dB. Meters: These meters display pre-GEQ and post-GEQ signal levels. CURVE: This graphically displays the settings of the currently selected GEQ. Faders: These are used to boost and cut the level of each band. The currently selected band can be reset to 0 dB by pressing [ENTER]. FREQUENCY: This indicates the frequency of the currently selected band. GAIN: This indicates the gain setting of the currently selected band. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 156 Chapter 15—Internal Effects, Plug-Ins & GEQs GEQ parameters can also be adjusted by using Parameter controls #1 and #4. Parameter control #1 selects the frequency bands. Parameter control #4 resets the gain of the selected band. Parameter controls #2 and #3 are inactive. 1 Band select DM2000—Owner’s Manual 2 3 4 Gain Scene Memories 157 16 Scene Memories About Scene Memories Scene memories allow you to store a snapshot of virtually every DM2000 mix setting in a Scene. There are 99 Scene memories, and they can be titled for easy identification. A fade time of up to 30 seconds can be set individually for each Input and Output Channel fader. Recall Safe can be used to exclude individual Input and Output Channels and certain parameters from Scene recalls. Stored Scenes can be sorted as necessary. Scenes can be stored and recalled by using the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] and [RECALL] buttons, or by using the Scene Memory page. Scenes can be assigned MIDI Program Change numbers and recalled remotely. See “Assigning Scenes to Program Changes” on page 185 for more information. When a Scene is recalled on the DM2000, the Program Change number assigned to that Scene is transmitted, which can be used to recall programs, effects, etc., on other MIDI equipment. In addition, manual Scene recalls can be recorded on-the-fly in an Automix. When that Automix is replayed, the Scenes are recalled automatically. See “Automix” on page 164 for more information. Scene memories can be stored to external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187). They can also be stored to SmartMedia (see page 231). What’s Stored in a Scene? The following items are stored in Scenes: Input and Output Channel settings, Effects settings, GEQ settings, Group and Pair settings, Fade Time settings, and Scene title. Edit Buffer & Edit Indicator The Edit Buffer is where the current mix settings (i.e., the current Scene) are stored. When a Scene is stored, the mix settings in the Edit Buffer are written to the selected Scene memory. When a Scene is recalled, the contents of the selected Scene memory are copied to the Edit Buffer, making them the current mix settings. When a parameter is adjusted after a Scene has been recalled, the Edit indicators—the dot on the SCENE MEMORY display and “EDIT” on the display—appear, indicating that the current mix settings (i.e., those in the Edit Buffer) no longer match those of the Scene that was recalled last, as illustrated below. 02 SCENE MEMORY display 02 Display Scene #2 has just been recalled, so the contents of the Edit Buffer match those of Scene #2 and the Edit indicators are off. A parameter has been adjusted since Scene #2 was recalled, so the Edit indicators appear, indicating that the contents of the Edit Buffer no longer match those of Scene #2. The contents of the Edit Buffer are retained while the DM2000 is turned off. Scene Memories #0 & #U Scene memory #0 is a special read-only memory that contains the initial settings of all mix parameters. It can be recalled, but not stored. When you want to reset all mix parameters to their initial, or default values, recall Scene memory #0. Input Channel faders are set to either –∞dB or nominal, depending on the Initial Data Nominal preference (see page 235). DM2000—Owner’s Manual 158 Chapter 16—Scene Memories Scene memory #U is a special read-only memory that allows you to undo and redo Scene memory recall and store operations. After recalling a Scene memory, you can revert to the previously recalled Scene memory by recalling Scene memory #U. After storing a Scene memory, you can revert it to its previous contents by recalling Scene memory #U. You can redo either of these undo operations by recalling Scene memory #U again. Auto Scene Memory Update Normally, when a Scene is recalled and then edited, that Scene must be stored again in order to save the edits. If the Scene MEM Auto Update preference on page 235 is on, however, those edits are stored automatically in a Shadow memory. There’s one Shadow memory for each Original Scene memory. The contents of the Original and Shadow memories can be recalled alternately, which is useful for doing A/B comparisons. When a Scene is recalled, the current mix settings are automatically stored in the Shadow memory of the Scene memory that was recalled last. When you return to that Scene, you can recall the Shadow or Original memory alternately. While the Scene MEM Auto Update preference is on, Shadow memories, not Original memories are recalled initially. To recall an Original memory, recall its Shadow memory first, and while the Edit indicators are both off, recall again. This time the Original memory is recalled. When recalling Original and Shadow memories, you can easily tell which is currently active by the Edit indicators, which are off when an Original memory is active, and on when a Shadow memory is active. Note that when a Scene is stored, the contents of the Original and Shadow memories will be the same and the Edit indicators will be off regardless of which memory is active. When storing data to SmartMedia, Shadow memories are automatically stored along with their Original memories. When recalling Scenes in an Automix, only the Original memories can be recalled. When recalling Scenes via MIDI Program Change messages, Original and Shadow memories can be recalled, and operation is the same as for recalling Scenes by using the DM2000’s SCENE MEMORY buttons or the Scene Memory page. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons 159 Storing & Recalling Scenes with the SCENE MEMORY Buttons As each Scene memory is selected, its number flashes on the SCENE MEMORY display, and its number and title flash in the Scene memory section of the display. These stop flashing when the selected Scene memory is either stored or recalled. Empty Scene memories have the title “No Data!” and cannot be recalled. You cannot store to Scene memories that are write-protected. Warning: When storing Scenes, make sure that there are no settings in the Edit Buffer that you do not want to store. Perhaps some settings have been adjusted accidentally, or by someone else. If you are not sure of the Edit Buffer’s exact contents, recall the last Scene, make the adjustments that you really want, and then store the Scene. You may want to store the current Scene to an unused Scene memory just in case. Storing Scenes 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene memory. 2 Press the [STORE] button. The Title Edit window appears. This window can be disabled by the Store Confirmation preference on page 235. 3 Enter a title. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. 4 Press OK on the Title Edit window. The current Scene is stored to the selected Scene memory. You can undo Scene stores, reverting to the previous mix settings, by recalling Scene memory #U (“Ud” on the SCENE MEMORY display). Recalling Scenes 1 Use the SCENE MEMORY Up [ ] and Down [ ] buttons to select a Scene memory. 2 Press the [RECALL] button. The contents of the selected Scene memory are recalled and all mix parameters are set accordingly. If the Recall Confirmation preference is on, a confirmation window appears before a Scene is recalled. You can undo Scene recalls, reverting to the previous mix settings, by recalling Scene memory #U (“Ud” on the SCENE MEMORY display). DM2000—Owner’s Manual 160 Chapter 16—Scene Memories Using the Scene Memory Page 1 On the Scene Memory page you can store, recall, write-protect, delete, and edit the titles of Scenes. Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate the Scene Memory page. 2 Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a Scene memory. A Scene memory is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the following buttons. TITLE EDIT: To edit the title of the selected Scene memory, select this and press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, edit the title, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. RECALL: To recall the contents of the selected Scene memory, select this and press [ENTER]. The contents of the selected Scene memory are recalled, all parameters are set accordingly, the Scene memory’s number and title stop flashing, and the Edit indicators go off. If the Recall Confirmation preference is on, a confirmation window appears before a Scene is recalled. STORE: To store the current Scene to the selected Scene memory, select this and press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a title, and press OK. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. When a Scene is stored, the Scene memory’s number and title stop flashing, and the Edit indicators go off. You can stop the Title Edit window from appearing by turning off the Store Confirmation preference on page 235. CLEAR: To delete the contents and title of the selected Scene memory, select this, press [ENTER], and the press YES when the confirmation window appears. PROTECT: To protect the contents of the selected Scene memory, select this and press [ENTER]. A padlock icon appears next to the titles of Scene memories that are write-protected. Scenes cannot be stored to write-protected Scene memories. While the PROTECT button is selected, the selected Scene memory can be protected and unprotected by using the INC/DEC buttons. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Fading Scenes 161 Fading Scenes 1 2 Fade times can be specified for individual Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out. The fade time determines the time it takes the Input and Output Channel faders to move to their new positions when a Scene is recalled. You must store these settings in a Scene beforehand in order for them to take effect. Fade time settings can be specified for each Scene individually. Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate a Fade Time page. The Fade Time parameters for Input Channels 1–48 appear on the Input CH1–48 Fade Time page, for Input Channels 49–96 appear on the Input CH49–96 Fade Time page, and those for the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out appear on the Output Fade Time page. Use the cursor buttons or [SEL] buttons to select the individual Fade Time parameters, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set them. You can copy the currently selected Input or Output Channel Fade Time setting to all Input or Output Channels respectively by double-clicking the [ENTER] button. The Long name of the channel whose Fade Time parameter is currently selected appears in the upper-right corner of the page. When a channel is selected by using the [SEL] buttons, its Long name also appears in the upper-right corner of the display. The Fade Time can be set from 0 to 30 seconds in 0.1 second steps. You can reset all Fade Time parameters to zero by selecting the ALL CLEAR button, and then pressing [ENTER]. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 162 Chapter 16—Scene Memories Recalling Scenes Safely 1 When a Scene is recalled, all mix parameters are set accordingly. In some situations, you may want to retain the settings of certain parameters on certain channels, and this can be achieved by using the Recall Safe function. Recall Safe can be set individually for Input Channels, Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out. Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate the Recall Safe page. 2 Select the SAFE ENABLED/DISABLED button, and use the [ENTER] button or the INC/DEC buttons to enable or disable the Recall Safe function. 3 Use the cursor buttons, [SEL] buttons, or Parameter wheel to select channels, and use the [ENTER] button or the INC/DEC buttons to set them as Safe channels. When a channel is selected by using the [SEL] buttons, its Long name appears in the upper-right corner of the display. When a channel is Safe, its number appears highlighted. 4 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the MODE parameters, and the [ENTER] button to set them. The MODE buttons determine which Safe channel parameters are unaffected by Scene recalls. ALL (all parameters. This option is mutually exclusive with the following options), FADER (faders), ON (On/Off parameters), PAN (Pan parameters), EQ (EQ parameters), COMP (Comp parameters), GATE (Gate parameters), AUX (Aux/Matrix Send levels), AUX ON (Aux/Matrix Send On/Off parameters). The EFFECT and GEQ buttons operate independently of the MODE buttons and can be used to make the effects and GEQs Safe. Recall Safe settings are stored in Scene memories. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Sorting Scenes 163 Sorting Scenes 1 Scene can be sorted by using the Scene Memory Sort function. Use the SCENE MEMORY [DISPLAY] button to locate the Scene Memory Sort page. 2 Use the cursor button to the select the SOURCE list, and use the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to select the Scene memory you want to move. 3 Use the cursor button to the select the DESTINATION list, and use the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to select the position to which you want to move the source Scene memory. 4 Press [ENTER] to move the source Scene memory to the specified destination. The [ENTER] button executes the Sort function regardless of its position. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 164 Chapter 17—Automix 17 Automix About Automix The DM2000’s Automix function allows dynamic automation of virtually all mix parameters, including Levels, Mutes, Pan, Surround Pan, Aux/Matrix Sends, Aux/Matrix Send Mutes, EQ, effects, and Plug-Ins. You can specify which of these parameters will be recorded, and punch channels in and out of recording on-the-fly. User Defined Remote Layer operations, and scene and library recall operations can also be automated, combining snap shot and dynamic mix automation. Events are recorded in real time and can be edited either offline, with 1/4 frame accuracy, or by rerecording with punch in/out. Automix can be synchronized to an external timecode source or to the internal timecode generator. Up to 16 Automixes can be stored in the Automix library. See “Automix Library” on page 147 for more information. They can also be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored to SmartMedia (see page 231). What’s Recorded in an Automix? The following parameters can be recorded in an Automix. Input Channels Bus Out Masters Aux Send Masters Matrix Send Masters Stereo Out Channel Levels (faders) O O O O O Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) O O O O O Pan O — — — — Surround Pan O — — — — EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off) O O O O O Parameter Aux Send 1–12 levels O — — — — Aux Send 1–12 mutes O — — — — Matrix Send 1–4 levels — O O — O Matrix Send 1–4 mutes — O O — O Scene recalls — EQ, Gate, Comp, Effects, Channel library recalls — Effect parameters (certain parameters) — User Defined Plug-Ins (parameters 1–4) — User Defined Remote Layers (faders, [ON], Encoders) — DM2000—Owner’s Manual Automix Main Page 165 Automix Main Page 1 2 This section explains the Automix Main page. Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Automix Main page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. TITLE: This is the title of the current Automix. DISABLED/ENABLED: This button is used to enable and disable the Automix function. It works in unison with the AUTOMIX [ENABLE] button. TIME CODE: This counter displays the current timecode position. If the optional MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, the current timecode position is also displayed on its TIME CODE counter. FREE: The amount of free Automix memory remaining is displayed here in kilobytes, percent, and graphically by a bargraph. SIZE: The size of the current Automix and the size of any Automix data in the undo buffer are displayed here in kilobytes. OFFSET: This parameter can be used to specify an offset relative to the external timecode source in hours, minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Specify a “+” value to move events forward relative to the incoming timecode. Specify a “–” value to move events backwards relative to the incoming timecode. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently selected digits to “00.” INT START TIME: This parameter is used to set the start time of the internal timecode generator in hours, minutes, seconds, frames, and subframes. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently selected digits to “00.” The internal timecode generator is selected on the Time Reference page (see page 171). UPDATE: This button determines the fate of events that exist beyond the point at which rerecording is stopped. When TO END is on, all events that exist beyond the point at which rerecording is stopped for parameters that have been edited during the current pass are erased. This function is useful when you want parameters to remain the same right through to the end of the Automix. Events are erased only when the current pass is actually stopped, not when a punch out occurs. When TO END is off, existing events are left as they are. When TO END is on, the way in which Fader events are processed depends on the currently selected Fader Edit mode and Edit Out mode. In the following table, the Fader Edit mode is set to Absolute. If the Fader Edit mode is set to Relative, and the Edit Out mode is set to either Takeover or Off, the fader will remain at a position relative to the position at which recording is stopped. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 166 Chapter 17—Automix TO END Return Takeover or Off At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader returns to the position specified by the existing fader data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter on the Fader Edit pages. At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader remains at the same position until the next Fader event in the existing data occurs. Existing data Existing data Return time OFF Fader edit Punch in Fader edit Time Time Stop recording Punch in At the point at which recording is stopped, the fader returns to the position specified by the existing fader data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter, and all subsequent events are erased so that the fader remains at that position right through to the end of the Automix. Stop recording At the point at which recording is stopped, all subsequent events are erased so that the fader remains at that position right through to the end of the Automix. Existing data Existing data Return time ON Fader edit Fader edit Punch in Time Time Stop recording Punch in Stop recording EDIT OUT: These buttons are used to set the Edit Out mode: Off, Takeover, or Return. The Edit Out mode determines how rerecorded fader moves align with existing fader data at the punch out point. Fader data includes Input Channel levels, Bus Out master levels, Aux Send master levels, Matrix Send master levels, the Stereo Out level, and User Defined Remote Layer faders. The Edit Out modes are explained in the following table. The Edit Out mode can also be set by using the AUTOMIX [RETURN] button. The Return Time is specified on the Fader Edit page (see page 171). Off At the punch out point, the fader remains at the same position until the next Fader event in the existing data occurs. Existing data Return Takeover At the punch out point, the fader returns to the position specified by the existing fader data, at the speed specified by the Time parameter on the Fader Edit pages. At the punch out point, recording continues until the fader position intersects the existing fader data. If you are still touching the fader knob at the actual punch out point, the fader is disabled until you release it. Existing data Existing data Return time Fader edit Fader edit Time Punch in Punch out Fader edit Time Punch in Punch out Time Punch in Punch out Actual punch out In this example, punch out was performed by pressing the [AUTO] button, and the fader was moved manually between the punch out and actual punch out points. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Automix Main Page 167 FADER EDIT: These buttons are used to set the Fader Edit mode: Absolute or Relative. The Fader Edit mode determines how fader moves are rerecorded. It has no effect during the first recording pass. In Absolute mode, fader moves are rerecorded as absolute values and existing fader data is erased. In Relative mode, fader moves are rerecorded relative to the existing fader data. Fader data includes Input Channel levels, Bus Out master levels, Aux Send master levels, Matrix Send master levels, Stereo Out level, and User Defined Remote Layer faders. The Fader Edit mode can also be set by using the AUTOMIX [RELATIVE] button. The following table explains Fader Edit mode operation (TO END: off. Edit Out: off) Absolute Relative Fader edits are recorded as absolute values and existing fader data between the punch in and out points is erased. Fader edits are rerecorded relative to the existing fader data. Existing data Existing data Fader edit Fader edit Time Punch in Punch out Time Punch in Punch out TIME REFERENCE: This section displays the current timecode source and frame rate. If you select this item and then press the [ENTER] button, you can jump directly to the Time Reference page (see page 171). OVERWRITE: These buttons determine which parameters can be recorded on the first pass, and rerecorded (i.e., overwritten) on subsequent passes. They can be set while recording is in progress. Parameters for which the corresponding OVERWRITE button is not set, cannot be edited while recording is in progress. They work in unison with the AUTOMIX [FADER], [ON], [PAN], [SURROUND], [AUX], [AUX ON] & [EQ] buttons. Parameter button Description FADER Channel faders (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Send masters, Matrix Send masters, the Stereo Out, and User Defined Layer faders) ON Channel Mutes (ON/OFF), User Defined Layer [ON] buttons PAN Input Channel Pan, User Defined Layer Encoders SURR Input Channel Surround pan, LFE level, DIV parameter AUX Aux/Matrix Send 1–12 levels AUX ON Aux/Matrix Send 1–12 mutes EQ EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off) Scene and library recalls, and internal effects processors and Plug-Ins parameters can be recorded regardless of the OVERWRITE settings. NEW: This button is used to create a new Automix. When a new Automix is created, a Scene recall event to recall the current Scene (i.e., the last Scene recalled) is automatically inserted at the start of the Automix. You can edit this event so that another Scene is recalled. This initial Scene is important because it sets all the mix parameters how you’d like them at the beginning of the Automix. Without it, mix parameters would remain the same as when Automix playback was stopped. UNDO: This button is used to undo various Automix operations. During each recording pass, when a new Automix is created, when an Automix is recalled, when an offline edit is performed, or when the Undo function is used, the current Automix data is copied to the Undo buffer, from which it can be retrieved by pressing UNDO while Automix is stopped. This button works in unison with the AUTOMIX [ABORT/UNDO] button. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 168 Chapter 17—Automix AUTO REC: This button works the same as the REC button except that it remains on when Automix recording is stopped. It appears highlighted while Auto Record mode is on. It works in unison with the AUTOMIX [AUTO-REC] button. REC: This button is used to engage Record-Ready mode, in which Automix recording starts automatically as soon as the specified timecode source starts. Unlike the AUTO REC button, however, it’s turned off when recording is stopped. It flashes in Record-Ready mode, and is highlighted during recording. This button can also be used to engage Automix recording during playback. To do this, while the PLAY button is highlighted (i.e., during playback), press the REC button (it flashes in Record-Ready mode). Then press the PLAY button to start recording. This button can also be used to stop recording. This button works in unison with the AUTOMIX [REC] button. PLAY: This button is used to start Automix recording and playback when the timecode source is set to internal. When an external timecode source is selected, while the external timecode is being received, recording and playback are started, and this button is turned on automatically. If Automix is stopped by pressing the STOP or ABORT button, recording or playback can be restarted by pressing this button so long as timecode is still being received. This button can also be used in conjunction with the REC button to punch in recording during Automix playback. STOP: This button is used to stop Automix playback and recording. It appears highlighted while Automix is stopped. ABORT: This button is used to abort the current recording without updating the existing Automix data. Automix recording can also be aborted by pressing the AUTOMIX [ABORT/UNDO] button. AUTOMIX Section Certain Automix functions and parameters can be controlled by using the buttons in the AUTOMIX section. AUTOMIX DISPLAY ENABLE REC SUSPEND WRITE ABORT/ AUTOUNDO REC TOUCH LATCH RETURN RELATIVE TOUCH SENSE READ TRIM OFF AUX ON EQ OVERWRITE FADER ON PAN SURROUND AUX [DISPLAY] button: This button is used to select the following Automix pages: Main, Memory, Fader Edit, Event Copy, and Event Edit. [ENABLE] button: This button is used to enable and disable the Automix function. It works in unison with the ENABLED/DISABLED button on the Automix Main page. [REC] button: This button can be used to engage Record-Ready mode from stop, engage recording during playback, and to stop recording. Its indicator flashes in Record-Ready mode, and lights continuously during recording. [ABORT/UNDO] button: This button is used to abort Automix recording or playback. While Automix is stopped, it performs the undo function, reverting to the Automix in the Undo buffer. It works in unison with the ABORT and UNDO buttons on the Automix Main and Memory pages. [AUTO-REC] button: This button is used to turn on and off Auto Recording. Its indicator lights up while Auto Record is on. It works in unison with the AUTO REC button on the Automix Main and Memory pages. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons 169 [RETURN] button: This button is used to set the Edit Out mode. It works in unison with the EDIT OUT RETURN buttons on the Automix Main and Memory pages. When its indicator is on, Return mode is set. When its indicator is flashing, Takeover mode is set. And when its indicator is off, neither mode is set. [RELATIVE] button: This button is used to set the Fader Edit mode. It works in unison with the FADER EDIT buttons on the Automix Main and Memory pages. When its indicator is off, Absolute mode is set. When its indicator is on, Relative mode is set. [TOUCH SENSE] button: This button is used to turn on and off Fader Touch Sense. It works in unison with the TOUCH SENSE buttons on the Fader Edit pages (see page 170). [FADER], [ON], [PAN], [SURROUND], [AUX], [AUX ON] & [EQ] buttons: These buttons determine which parameters can be recorded on the first pass, and rerecorded (i.e., overwritten) on subsequent passes. They work in unison with their counterparts on the Automix Main and Memory pages. Channel Strip [AUTO] Buttons • • • • • • The channel strip [AUTO] buttons are used to arm channels in Record-Ready mode, and to punch channels in and out during recording. AUTO The [AUTO] button indicators operate as follows: Off: Automix playback disabled Green: Automix stopped or playing Orange: Record-Ready mode Red: Recording (even for individual parameters, see page 175) Flashing red: Takeover in progress Flashing green: indicates that a fader is inactive, for example, when you continue touching a fader after actual punch out has occurred when using the Takeover Edit Out mode. Automix Memory Page 1 2 Automixes can be stored and recalled on the Automix Memory page. The lower half of this page is identical to the Automix Main page. Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Automix Memory page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. The Automix library functions are explained in “Automix Library” on page 147. The remaining items are the same as on the Main page and are explained on page 165. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 170 Chapter 17—Automix Fader Edit Pages 1 2 During playback, fader positions are displayed graphically as black bars on the Fader Edit page, of which there are two. The CH1–48 Fader Edit page displays Faders positions for Input Channel 1 through 48, the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Stereo Out. The CH49–96 Fader Edit page displays faders positions for Input Channel 49 through 96, the Bus Outs, Aux Sends, and Matrix Sends. When the Fader mode is set to Fader, Input and Output Channel levels are displayed. When it’s set to Aux/Mtrx mode, Aux/Matrix Send levels are displayed. During rerecording, arrows are displayed next to each fader bar. A downward arrow indicates that the current fader position is higher than that specified by the existing fader data. An upward arrow indicates that the current fader position is lower than that specified by the existing fader data. Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Fader Edit pages. The CH1–48 Fader Edit page is shown here. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. The counter in the upper-left corner displays the current timecode position. Edit Safe buttons: The numbered buttons below each fader bar are Channel Safe buttons, which can be used to prohibit automix recording on certain channels. A channel is set to safe when its button appears highlighted. You can make all channels safe by selecting one button and then double-clicking the [ENTER] button. A confirmation message appears and you can elect to make one channel safe or all channels. During recording, events cannot be recorded, or rerecorded on safe channels, although existing events are played back and faders, Encoders, [ON] buttons, and so on can still be used, which is useful for rehearsing mix moves. Channel safe settings cannot be changed during recording. ABSOLUTE & RELATIVE: These buttons are the same as those on the Main and Memory pages. See “Automix Main Page” on page 165 for more information. MOTOR: This button is used to turn the fader motors are on and off for Automix playback. The button appears highlighted when the motors are on. The motors cannot be turned off during recording, and are automatically turned on when recording starts. TOUCH SENSE: Touch sense allows you to punch faders in and out during recording simply by touching fader knobs. Touch sense IN and touch sense OUT can be turned on and off independently. Touch sense can also be turned on and off by using the AUTOMIX [TOUCH SENSE] button, which remembers the status of the individual IN and OUT buttons on this page. For example, if both the IN and OUT buttons on this page are on, the AUTOMIX [TOUCH SENSE] button will turn both IN and OUT on and off. However, if the IN button is on and the OUT button is off, the AUTOMIX [TOUCH SENSE] button will turn only the IN button on and off. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate 171 UPDATE: This button is the same as that on the Main and Memory pages. See “Automix Main Page” on page 165 for more information. EDIT OUT: The TAKEOVER and RETURN buttons are the same as those on the Main and Memory pages. See “Automix Main Page” on page 165 for more information. The TIME parameter determines the time it takes faders to return to levels specified by the existing Automix data when the Edit Out mode is set to Return. It can be set from 0.0 to 30.0 seconds in 0.1 second steps. Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate 1 2 The timecode source and frame rate for Automix can be set as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the Time Reference page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. TIME REFERENCE: The following timecode sources can be selected. Source Description INTERNAL Internally generated timecode SMPTE SMPTE timecode received via the SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT MIDI CLOCK MIDI Clock received via the MIDI IN port MTC MTC received via the MTC TIME CODE INPUT USB MTC received via the USB TO HOST port SERIAL MTC received via the SERIAL TO HOST port SLOT1 MTC received via Slot #1 (for use with an optional mLAN I/O Card installed in Slot #1) MIDI MTC received via the MIDI IN port For the USB, SERIAL, and SLOT1 sources, you must specify a port from 1–8. FRAMES: The frame rate can be set to: 30, 30D, 29.97, 29.97D, 25, or 24. An Automix will playback correctly even if the frame rate is different to that which was used when the Automix was originally recorded. The MIDI CLOCK source supports Song position Pointers, F8 TIMING CLOCK (timing info), FA START (starts Automix from beginning), FB CONTINUE (starts Automix from current position), and FC STOP (stops Automix). DM2000—Owner’s Manual 172 Chapter 17—Automix Creating a Time Signature Map 1 2 When using the MIDI CLOCK timecode source, you’ll also need to specify the initial time signature and any time signature changes that follow. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the Time Signature page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to specify the measure and time signature. To insert a time signature change, use the cursor buttons to select the next available entry, and press [ENTER], or turn the Parameter wheel. To delete a time signature change, select it, and then press [ENTER]. The initial time signature entry at measure #1 cannot be deleted. Recording an Automix 1 This section provides a general procedure for Automix recording. Select the timecode source and frame rate. See “Selecting the Timecode Source & Frame Rate” on page 171 for more information. 2 Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Automix Main page. 3 Press the AUTOMIX [ENABLE] button to enable the Automix function. The AUTOMIX [ENABLE] button indicator lights up, and the ENABLED/DISABLED button on the Automix main page appears highlighted. 4 Use the AUTOMIX OVERWRITE buttons to select which parameters you want to record. The corresponding AUTOMIX OVERWRITE button indicators light up, and the corresponding OVERWRITE buttons on the Automix Main and Memory pages appear highlighted. 5 Press the AUTOMIX [REC] button. The AUTOMIX [REC] button indicator flashes, and the REC button on the Automix Main and Memory pages flashes. Alternatively, you could press the AUTOMIX [AUTO-REC] button so that Automix recording starts automatically when timecode is received. The main difference between REC and AUTO REC is that the AUTO REC functions remains on when recording is stopped. Whereas REC must be pressed each and every time you want to start recording. Initially however, REC may be the safer option. 6 Use the [AUTO] buttons to arm channels for Automix recording. The [AUTO] button indicators of armed channels light up orange. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Rerecording Events 173 7 Start the timecode source. The AUTOMIX [REC] button indicator lights up continuously, and on the Automix Main and Memory pages, the REC and PLAY buttons appear highlighted. 8 Adjust the faders and other controls as necessary. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL section to edit the currently selected channel. Channels are selected automatically when the [AUTO] buttons are pressed. You can punch channels out of recording by using the [AUTO] buttons. 9 To stop Automix recording, stop the timecode source, or press the STOP button on the Automix Main or Memory page. A confirmation message appears asking if you want to update the existing Automix data (i.e., keep the edits just recorded). Rerecording Events Events can be rerecorded as many times as you like. Remember, however, that unlike the first pass, on subsequent passes, existing events for the currently punched in parameter are overwritten, so use the OVERWRITE buttons and [AUTO] buttons with care. Instead of using the [AUTO] buttons to punch in an entire channel, you can reduce the risk of overwriting important data by punching in and out individual parameters (see page 175). Use the Update To End option to determine how existing events are handled when rerecording is stopped (see page 165). Use the Edit Out (see page 166) and Fader Edit (see page 167) options to determine how Fader events are rerecorded. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 174 Chapter 17—Automix Parameter Recording The following table summarizes parameter recording operation for each parameter. Parameter adjustments made on the respective display pages are also recorded. Parameter Channel OVER WRITE Set Layer to input, Fader mode to Fader, use faders Input Channel Levels (faders) Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) Pan Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send Operation FADER Set Layer to Master, Fader mode to Fader, use faders Stereo Out Use Stereo Out fader Input Set Layer to input, use [ON] buttons Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send ON Set Layer to Master, use [ON] buttons Pair/Group Faders of paired channels and grouped faders are recorded together [ON] buttons of paired channels and grouped mutes are recorded together Stereo Out Use Stereo Out [ON] button Input PAN Set Layer to input, Encoder mode to Pan, use Encoders (Also use SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN control, or Joystick if [LINK] is on) If Pan mode is Gang or Inverse-Gang, paired channels are recorded together. If ST LINK button on Surround Edit page is on, adjacent channels are recorded together. Surround Pan Input SURR Use Joystick (If [LINK] is on, also use SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN control) (If a surround parameter is assigned to the Encoders, also use Encoders) EQ (F, Q, G, On/Off) Input, Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send, Stereo Out EQ Use SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER section (If EQ parameter assigned to an Encoder, also use Encoders) EQ of paired channels, and grouped EQs recorded together AUX Use SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL controls (If Layer is input and Fader mode is Aux/Mtrx, use faders. If Layer is input and Encoder mode is Aux/Mtrx, use Encoders) Aux send levels of paired channels recorded together. (If the selected Aux Send is paired, the send level to both Aux Sends is recorded.) AUX ON Use SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND [ON] buttons Aux send mutes of paired channels recorded together (If the selected Aux Send is paired, mutes for both Aux Sends recorded.) AUX If Layer is Master and Fader mode is Aux/Mtrx, use faders (If Layer is Master and Encoder mode is Aux /Mtrx, use Encoders) Aux send 1–12 levels Aux send 1–12 mutes Matrix send 1–4 levels Input Input Bus Out, Aux Send Bus Out, Aux Send, Stereo Out Use SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND controls Matrix send levels of paired Bus Outs or Aux Sends recorded together Matrix send 1–4 mutes Bus Out, Aux Send, Stereo Out AUX ON Use SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND [ON] buttons Matrix send mutes of paired Bus Outs or Aux Sends recorded together Scene recalls — — Use SCENE MEMORY section or Scene Memory page — Library recalls EQ, Gate, Comp, Effects, Channel — Use corresponding library page — Effect parameters (certain parameters) Effects processors 1–8 — Use Parameter controls 1–4 (push to punch in/out) — User Defined Plug-Ins (parameters 1–4) Plug-Ins 1–8 — Use Parameter controls 1–4 (push to punch in/out) — Faders FADER Select User Defined Remote Layer, use faders — [ON] buttons ON Select User Defined Remote Layer, use [ON] buttons — Encoders PAN Select User Defined Remote Layer, use Encoder — User Defined Remote Layers DM2000—Owner’s Manual Punching In & Out Individual Parameters 175 Punching In & Out Individual Parameters During Automix rerecording, channels can be punched in and out by pressing the channel strip [AUTO] buttons. Individual parameters can be punched in and out as follows. Parameter Channel OVER WRITE Set Layer to input, Fader mode to Fader Input Channel Levels (faders) Bus Out, Aux Send, Matrix Send Operation FADER Set Layer to Master, Fader mode to fader Punch In Punch Out Touch fader knob and Release fader adjust1 knob2 Stereo Out Stereo Out fader Pan Input PAN Set Layer to input, Encoder mode to Pan (Also use SELECTED CHANNEL section PAN control, or Joystick if [LINK] is on) Press Encoder and adjust Press Encoder Surround Pan Input SURR Select Input Layer and assign Surround LFE Level or Surround Pan Wheel to the Encoders Press Encoder and adjust Press Encoder Adjust control Press [AUTO] button EQ Turn on Auto EQ Edit In preference (see page 237). Use SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER section (If EQ parameter assigned to an Encoder, also use Encoders) Press EQ [ON] button Press [AUTO] button Touch fader knob and Release fader EQ (F, Q, G) All channels EQ On/Off Set Layer to input, Fader mode to Aux/Mtrx Aux send 1–12 levels Aux send 1–12 mutes Input Input AUX AUX ON Bus Out, Aux Send, Stereo Out AUX knob2 Set Layer to input, Encoder mode to Aux/Mtrx (Or use SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL controls) Press Encoder and adjust Press Encoder Set Layer to input Press SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND [ON] button Press [AUTO] button Set Layer to Master, Fader mode to Touch fader knob and Release fader Aux/Mtrx3 Matrix send 1–4 levels adjust1 adjust1 knob2 Set Layer to Master, Encoder mode to Aux/Mtrx (Also use SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND LEVEL controls) Press Encoder and adjust Press Encoder Press [AUTO] button Matrix send 1–4 mutes Bus Out, Aux Send, Stereo Out AUX ON Set Layer to master Press SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND [ON] button Effect parameters (certain parameters) Effects processors 1–8 — Select internal effects processors Push Parameter 1–4 control Push Parameter 1–4 control User Defined Plug-Ins (parameters 1–4) Plug-Ins 1–8 — Select Plug-Ins Push Parameter 1–4 control Push Parameter 1–4 control Faders FADER Select User Defined Remote Layer Touch fader knob and Release fader User Defined Remote Layers adjust1 Encoders PAN Select User Defined Remote Layer Press Encoder and adjust knob2 Press Encoder 1. TOUCH SENSE IN on Fader Edit page must be on. 2. TOUCH SENSE OUT on Fader Edit page must be on. 3. Cannot be used to control Stereo Out to Matrix Send levels. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 176 Chapter 17—Automix If during Automix recording you punch in an individual parameter by using the controls listed in the above table, even if some OVERWRITE buttons are on, only the existing data of that particular parameter will be overwritten. Likewise, when you punch out an individual parameter by using the controls listed above, only that particular parameter will be punched out. If during Automix recording you press an [AUTO] button to punch in a channel, the existing data of all parameters for which the corresponding OVERWRITE buttons are on will be overwritten. When you press the [AUTO] button to punch out of recording, all of those parameters will be punched out. When faders are grouped, if the OVERWRITE FADER button is on, pressing an [AUTO] button, or touching the fader knob of any fader in the group (if TOUCH SENSE on the Fader Edit page is on) puts all the corresponding channels into Record mode and all the [AUTO] button indicators light up red. The same applies to Mute (OVERWRITE ON button) and EQ (OVERWRITE EQ button) groups. Playing Back an Automix So long as the Automix function is enabled, the Automix function will chase the incoming timecode and play and stop the current Automix accordingly. Playback stops automatically when the end of the Automix data is reached. Playback can be stopped manually by pressing the STOP or ABORT button on the Automix Main or Memory pages, or the AUTOMIX [ABORT/UNDO] button. Playback will stop automatically if no timecode is received for a while, for example, if the timecode source is disconnected or turned off. If the timecode source is set to internal, use the PLAY button on the Automix Main or Memory page to start Automix playback, and the STOP button to stop it. You can disable Automix playback on individual channels by using the channel strip [AUTO] buttons. During playback, the [AUTO] button indicators appear green. When Automix playback for an individual channel is disabled, its [AUTO] button indicator goes out. During playback, faders move in accordance with recorded Fader events (so long as the corresponding Layer and Fader mode is selected). Fader movement can be disabled by turning off the fader motors (see page 170). Fader events can be viewed on the Fader Edit pages (see page 170). Other events are reflected by the channel strip displays and various other displays and button indicators. Recorded events of the currently selected channel are displayed by the SELECTED CHANNEL section controls and displays. If the effects type is different to that which was used when the effects parameter edits were recorded, the parameter edits will not be played back. However, they are not deleted. When you rerecord effects parameter edits, it’s recommended that you delete the existing effects events offline. See “Editing Events Offline” on page 177 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Editing Events Offline 177 Editing Events Offline Automix events can be edited offline on the Event Copy and Event Edit pages. Offline editing can be performed only while the Automix function is stopped. Event Copy Page 1 2 On the Event Copy page, specified events on specified channels between specified in and out points can be erased, copied, moved/merged, or trimmed. Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Event Copy page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. Channel buttons: These buttons are used to specify the Input and Output Channels whose Automix data you want to erase, copy, move/merge, or trim. In other words, the source data. A channel is specified when its button appears highlighted. Multiple channels can be specified. Channel buttons can be selected by using the Parameter wheel or the cursor buttons. You can specify all channels by double-clicking any channel button. A confirmation message appears and you can select one or all channels. It’s not necessary to select source channels when editing library or Scene recall events or effects or Plug-Ins events. SOURCE: These parameters are used to select the source Automix for copying and moving/merging. You can select CURRENT, i.e., the current Automix, or MEM and any Automix from 1 to 16. When MEM is selected, the MOVE button changes to MERGE. The Erase and Trim functions work only with the current Automix and ignore these settings. TIME SETTING: The IN and OUT parameters are used to specify the region of Automix data to be erased, copied, moved/merged, or trimmed. The IN and OUT points can be set on-the-fly by pressing the [ENTER] button while the IN or OUT button is selected. The captured timecode values can be edited by using the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently selected digits to “00.” Up to eight IN and OUT timecode values can be captured and stored in the eight Capture memories. Use the cursor buttons to select the Capture memory number, and use the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to select the Capture memories. The TO parameter is used to specify the point to which the specified data will be copied or moved/merged. The TO point can be set on-the-fly by pressing the [ENTER] button while the TO button is selected. The captured timecode value can be edited by using the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently selected digits to “00.” The DESTINATION parameter is used to specify the channel to which the specified data will be copied or moved/merged. The number of destination channels depends on the number of source channels specified. For example, if Input Channels 1 though 8 are specified as the source, then the number of destination channels will be eight. Destination channels are contiguous and only the first channel in the range can be specified. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 178 Chapter 17—Automix TRIM EDIT: These parameters are used to specify the TRIM IN and TRIM OUT times and the trim level, which can be set in 0.5 dB steps. The TRIM IN parameter determines the time in which the fader level must achieve the specified trim amount. The TIME SETTING IN point determines the point at which trimming starts. The TRIM OUT time determines the time from which the Fader level can start returning to the previous level. The TIME SETTING OUT point determines the point at which trimming ends. Existing data Trim: –x dB Trimmed data TRIM IN TRIM OUT IN Time OUT PARAM: Pressing this button opens the PARAMETERS window, which is used to specify which parameters will be erased, copied, moved/merged, or trimmed. A parameter is selected when its button appears highlighted. Multiple parameters can be specified. You can select all parameters by double-clicking any parameter button. A confirmation message appears and you can select one or all parameters. Button Events FADER Channel Fader events (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Send masters, Matrix Send masters, and the Stereo Out) ON Channel Mute events PAN Input Channel pan events SURR Input Channel surround pan, LFE level, and DIV parameter events EQ Channel EQ events LIB CH Channel library recall events GATE Gate library recall events COMP Comp library recall events EQ EQ library recall events SCENE Scene recall events FX LIB 1–8 Effects library recall events of each internal effects processor AUX 1–12 Level events of each Aux Send ON 1–12 Mute events of each Aux Send MATRIX 1–4 Level events of each Matrix Send ON 1–4 Mute events of each Matrix Send REMOTE 1–4 User Defined Remote Layer events EFFECT 1–8 Parameter events for each internal effects processor PLUG-IN 1–8 Parameter events for each Plug-In DM2000—Owner’s Manual Editing Events Offline 179 ERASE button: This button is used to erase the specified Automix data. Use the channel buttons to select the source channels. Use the IN and OUT parameters to specify the region to be erased. Use the PARAMETERS window to specify which Automix events are to be erased. Then select the ERASE button and press [ENTER]. COPY button: This button is used to copy the specified Automix data. Use the channel buttons to select the source channels. Use the IN and OUT parameters to specify the region to be copied. Use the TO parameter to specify the point to which the specified data is to be copied. Use the DESTINATION parameter to specify the channels to which the specified data is to be copied. Use the PARAMETERS window to specify which Automix events are to be copied. Then select the COPY button and press [ENTER]. Duplicate events at the specified destination will be erased. MOVE/MERGE button: This button is used to move/merge the specified Automix data. To move events, set the SOURCE to CURRENT. Use the channel buttons to select the source channels. Use the IN and OUT parameters to specify the region to be moved. Use the TO parameter to specify the point to which the specified data it to be moved. Use the DESTINATION parameter to specify the channels to which the specified data is to be moved. Use the PARAMETERS window to specify which Automix events are to be moved. Then select the MOVE button and press [ENTER]. To merge events from another Automix, select the SOURCE MEM option and specify the source Automix. Use the channel buttons to select the source channels. Use the IN and OUT parameters to specify the region to be merged. Use the TO parameter to specify the point to which the specified data it to be merged. Use the DESTINATION parameter to specify the channels to which the specified data is to be merged. Use the PARAMETERS window to specify which Automix events are to be merged. Then select the MERGE button and press [ENTER]. TRIM button: This button is used to trim the specified Automix data. Use the channel buttons to select the source channels. Use the IN and OUT parameters to specify the region to be trimmed. Use the TRIM EDIT IN and OUT parameters to specify the TRIM IN and OUT times, and set the trim amount. Use the PARAMETERS window to specify which Automix events are to be trimmed (see below). Then select the TRIM button and press [ENTER]. For trimming, you can select the following Fader events on the PARAMETERS window: FADER (i.e., Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Send masters, Matrix Send masters, and the Stereo Out), AUX 1–12 (i.e., Aux Send levels 1–12), and MATRIX 1–4 (i.e., Matrix Send levels 1–4). UNDO button: This button works the same as the UNDO button on the Automix Main page. See “UNDO” on page 167 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 180 Chapter 17—Automix Event Edit Page 1 2 On the Event Edit page, you can edit, duplicate, delete, and insert new events. Use the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] button to locate the Event Edit page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. Event list: Automix events are listed in chronological order. The type of events listed depends on the Event select buttons. Use the cursor buttons to select event parameters. While the cursor is on the DUPLICATE, DELETE, SELECTED CH, Event select, or SYNC buttons, you can use the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to scroll the list. While the cursor is inside the event list, you can use these controls to edit event parameters. The triangular cursor at the left side of the list indicates the currently selected event. When an event’s timecode value is edited, the list is resorted automatically. DUPLICATE button: This button is used to duplicate events. Use the Parameter wheel to select an event, select the DUPLICATE button, and then press [ENTER]. A duplicate event is inserted below the currently selected event. If there are no events in the list, you can use this button to insert a new event of the type specified by the Event select buttons. DELETE button: This button is used to delete events. Use the Parameter wheel to select an event, select the DELETE button, and then press [ENTER]. SELECTED CH: When this option is on, only events of the currently selected channel are displayed. All Scene recall and effects library recall events are displayed regardless of this option. For paired channels, only events of the currently selected channel are displayed. Event select buttons: These buttons are used to select the type of events to be displayed in the event list. Button Events Listed List Format SCENE/LIB Library and Scene recall events TIME CODE, CH, SCENE/LIB FADER Channel faders (Inputs Channels, Bus Out masters, Aux Send masters, Matrix Send masters, and the Stereo Out) TIME CODE, CH, dB, SEC ON Channel Mutes (ON/OFF) TIME CODE, CH, ON/OFF PAN Pan TIME CODE, CH, L-C-R SURR Surround pan TIME CODE, CH, SURR AUX Aux/matrix Send 1–12 levels TIME CODE, CH, AUX, dB AUX ON Aux/matrix Send 1–12 mutes TIME CODE, CH, AUX, ON/OFF SYNC button: This button is used to synchronize the list to the current timecode position. When pressed, events closest to the current timecode position are displayed. This function can be used during Automix playback. Timecode counter: This counter displays the current timecode position. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Editing Events Offline 181 CAPTURE button: This button is used to capture the current timecode position. Up to eight timecode values can be captured and stored in the eight Capture memories. Use the cursor buttons to select the Capture memory number, and use the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to select the Capture memories. Capture memories can be selected even while the CAPTURE, LOCATE, or INSERT button is selected. If the Auto Inc TC capture preference is on (see page 237), Capture memories increment automatically each time a timecode position is captured. If the Link Capture & Locate Memory preference is on (see page 237), the eight Capture memories are linked to the eight Locate memories so that, for example, edits made to Capture memory #1 are reflected on Locate memory #1, and vice versa. Capture memory display: This displays the captured timecode position. The captured timecode values can be edited by using the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons. Press the [ENTER] button to reset the currently selected digits to “00.” LOCATE button: This button is used to locate events at the Capture memory display position. INSERT button: This button is used to insert new events. Use the Event select buttons to select the type of event that you want to insert. Use the Captured timecode counter to specify the point at which you want to insert the new event. Select the INSERT button, and then press [ENTER]. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 182 Chapter 18—MIDI 18 MIDI MIDI & the DM2000 • • • • • • • • • • The DM2000 supports the following MIDI messages: Program Changes for recalling Scenes (see page 185) Control Changes for real-time parameter control (see page 186) System Exclusive Parameter Changes for real-time parameter control (see page 186) MIDI Note On/Off for Freeze effect (see page 285) Bulk Dump for transmitting Scene, library, and setup data (see page 187) MTC and MIDI Clock for Automix synchronization (see page 171) MMC for external machine control (see page 220) User Defined Plug-Ins transmit user-specified MIDI data when Parameter controls 1–4 are operated (see page 152) User Defined Remote Layers transmit user-specified MIDI data when the channel strip faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are operated (see page 217) Predefined Remote Layers for controlling popular DAWs (Digital Audio Workstations), including Pro Tools (see page 188) MIDI I/O • • • • The DM2000 features four types of interface for transmitting and receiving MIDI data: Standard MIDI ports TO HOST USB port TO HOST SERIAL port SLOT1 (for use with an optional mLAN I/O Card installed in Slot #1) TO HOST SERIAL, TO HOST USB, and SLOT1 are multiport interfaces, with eight ports each. When the DM2000 receives MIDI data via any of these interfaces, the MIDI indicator appears on the display (see page 35). If you are connecting a Windows computer to the TO HOST USB or TO HOST SERIAL port, you must install and use the YAMAHA CBX Driver for Windows and the YAMAHA USB Driver for Windows, which are included on the supplied CD-ROM. If you are connecting a Macintosh computer to the TO HOST USB or TO HOST SERIAL port, you must install and use the YAMAHA USB Driver for Macintosh and OMS 2.3.3, which are included on the supplied CD-ROM. DM2000—Owner’s Manual MIDI Port Setup 183 MIDI Port Setup 1 2 MIDI ports are configured as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the MIDI/TO HOST Setup page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. TO HOST SERIAL: These buttons are used to configure the TO HOST SERIAL port for use with either a Mac or PC. Caution: When a PC is connected to the TO HOST SERIAL port, do not set this to Mac because your PC may crash. GENERAL: These parameters are used to select ports for general MIDI data transmission and reception, including Program Changes for recalling Scenes, Control Changes for real-time parameter control, and Note On/Off for use with the Freeze effect. Available ports include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1 1–8. MIDI THRU: These parameters allow you to route the incoming MIDI data from one port through to another port. Available ports include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1 1–8. REMOTE1–4: These parameters are used to select ports for the Remote Layers. Available ports include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1 1–8. If Pro Tools is selected as the target for a Remote Layer, “Pro Tools” is displayed here and no settings can be made. Studio Manager: These parameters are used to select a port for use with the Studio Manager software and to assign the DM2000 an ID from 1 to 8. Available ports include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1 1–8. See the Studio Manager documentation for more information. DAW: These parameters are used to select ports for use with DAWs. Since three ports are required to control DAWs, ports are selected in groups of three, as follows: 1–3, 2–4, 3–5, 4–6, 5–7, 6–8. Available ports include: SERIAL, USB, and SLOT1. PLUG-IN1–8: These parameters are used to select ports for use with the Plug-Ins. If a Waves Plug-In card is installed in a Slot, the number of that Slot is displayed and no settings can be made. If the Plug-In target is set to USER DEFINED, you can select a port from MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, or SLOT1 1–8. Ports for User Defined Plug-Ins can also be set on the Plug-In Setup page (see page 152). Note: Some functions cannot share ports. If you try to assign a port that’s already assigned to such a function, the message “Change Port?” appears. If you select YES, the port will be assigned to the selected function and the previously assigned function will be set to “NO ASSIGN.” DM2000—Owner’s Manual 184 Chapter 18—MIDI MIDI Channel Setup 1 2 MIDI Channels for reception and transmission are specified as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the MIDI Setup page. Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the parameters, and use the INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to set them. RECEIVE: The Channel buttons are used to select a MIDI Channel for MIDI message reception. The Enable buttons are used to turn on and off reception of Program Change, Parameter Change, and Control Change messages. TRANSMIT: The Channel buttons are used to select a MIDI Channel for MIDI message transmission. The Enable buttons are used to turn on and off transmission of Program Change, Parameter Change, and Control Change messages. OMNI: These buttons determine whether the DM2000 responds to Program Change and Control Change messages only on the specified MIDI Receive Channel or on all Channels. ECHO: These buttons determine whether Program Change, Parameter Change, Control Change, and Other Commands received at the MIDI IN port are echoed through to the MIDI OUT port. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Assigning Scenes to Program Changes 185 Assigning Scenes to Program Changes DM2000 Scenes can be assigned to MIDI Program Changes for remote recall. When a Scene is recalled on the DM2000, the assigned Program Change number is transmitted. If that Scene is assigned to more than one Program Change, the lowest Program Change is transmitted. Likewise, when a Program Change message is received, the assigned Scene is recalled. You must set the MIDI Setup parameters in order to transmit and receive Program Change messages (see page 184). 1 Initially, Scenes 1 through 99 are assigned sequentially to Program Changes 1 through 99. Scene #0 is assigned to Program Changes #100. A Scene to Program Change assignment table, listing initial assignments and with space to note user assignments, is provided on page 317. This table can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored to SmartMedia (see page 231). Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the Program Change Assign Table page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the PGM CHG. column, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the Program Changes. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the SCENE No/TITLE column, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select Scenes. You can initialize the Scene to Program Change assignment table by selecting the INITIALIZE button, and then pressing [ENTER]. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 186 Chapter 18—MIDI Assigning Parameters to Control Changes 1 DM2000 parameters can be assigned to MIDI Control Changes for real-time control. When a parameter is adjusted on the DM2000, the assigned Control Change message is transmitted. Likewise, when a Control Change message is received, the assigned DM2000 parameter is set. You must set the MIDI Setup parameters in order to transmit and receive Control Change messages (see page 184). A Parameter to Control Change assignment table, listing the initial assignments, is provided on page 318. This table can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored to SmartMedia (see page 231). Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the Control Change Assign Table page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the MODE TABLE button, and press [ENTER]. In TABLE mode, when DM2000 parameters are adjusted, MIDI Control Change messages are transmitted in accordance with the assignments on this page. In NRPN mode, when DM2000 parameters are adjusted, predefined NRPNs (Non Registered Parameter Number) are transmitted. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the CTL CHG. column, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the Control Changes. 4 Use the cursor buttons to select the three PARAMETER columns, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the parameters. Parameters with more than 128 steps require two or more Control Change messages for MIDI transmission and reception. Certain Delay parameters and the faders are divided into L and H parameters. Delay Time parameters are divided into LOW, MID, and HIGH parameters. For accurate transmission, all parameters (e.g., both L and H for faders) must be assigned to individual Control Changes. You can initialize the Parameter to Control Change assignment table by selecting the INITIALIZE button, and then pressing [ENTER]. Controlling Parameters by Using Parameter Changes DM2000 parameters can be controlled in real time by using Parameter Change messages, which are System Exclusive messages. When a parameter is adjusted on the DM2000, a Parameter Change message is transmitted. Likewise, when a Parameter Change message is received, a DM2000 parameter is adjusted. See “MIDI Data Format” on page 319 for detailed information. You must set the MIDI Setup parameters in order to transmit and receive Parameter Change messages (see page 184). DM2000—Owner’s Manual Using Bulk Dump 187 Using Bulk Dump 1 DM2000 data can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [MIDI] button to locate the Bulk Dump page. 2 To transmit data, use the CATEGORY parameters to select the type of data you want to transmit, select the TRANSMIT button, and then press [ENTER]. 3 To receive data, use the CATEGORY parameters to select the type of data you want to receive, select the REQUEST button, and then press [ENTER]. The INTERVAL parameter sets the interval between data packets during transmission. The CATEGORY parameters can be set as follows: ALL: All data. SCENE MEM: ALL Scenes, individual Scenes, or current (i.e., the Edit buffer). AUTOMIX: ALL Automixes, individual Automixes, or the current Automix. LIBRARY: The following libraries: EQ, Gate, Comp, Channel, Effects, GEQ, Bus to Stereo, Input Patch, Output Patch, Surround Monitor. For each library you can specify ALL user memories, individual user memories, and for the Bus to Stereo, Input Patch, Output Patch, Surround Monitor libraries you can also specify the current settings. BANK: User Defined Remote Layer banks, User Defined Plug-Ins banks, or the User Defined Keys banks. For each item you can specify ALL or individual banks. SETUP MEM: DM2000 setup data (i.e., system settings). PGM TABLE: Scene to MIDI Program Change table. See “Assigning Scenes to Program Changes” on page 185. CTL TABLE: Parameter to MIDI Control Change table. See “Assigning Parameters to Control Changes” on page 186. PLUG-IN: The settings of any installed Y56K cards. You can specify ALL Slots or Slots 4–6 individually. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 188 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer 19 Pro Tools Remote Layer The DM2000 features a Remote Layer target especially designed for controlling Pro Tools. If an optional MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge is installed, Pro Tools channel levels are displayed by the meters, and timecode is displayed on the TIME CODE counter. Configuring Windows Computers 1 Connect your PC. The DM2000 can be connected to your Windows PC by connecting the TO HOST SERIAL port to a suitable RS232 serial port on your PC, or by connecting the TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your PC. If you use the TO HOST SERIAL port, make sure that the TO HOST SERIAL parameter on the MIDI/TO HOST Setup page is set to PC-2 (see page 183). 2 Install the necessary drivers. Once your PC is connected, you’ll need to install the TO HOST SERIAL or TO HOST USB drivers included on the DM2000 CD-ROM. Configuring Macintosh Computers 1 Connect your Mac. The DM2000 can be connected to your Mac by connecting the TO HOST SERIAL port to either the Printer or Modem port on your Mac, or by connecting the TO HOST USB port to a USB port on your Mac. If you use the TO HOST SERIAL port, make sure that the TO HOST SERIAL parameter on the MIDI/TO HOST Setup page is set to Mac (see page 183). 2 Install OMS. The DM2000 communicates with Pro Tools via OMS (Open Music System) software. If you already have OMS installed on your Mac, there’s no need to install it again and you can move on to the next section. If you don’t already have OMS installed, it’s included on the DM2000 CD-ROM. Refer to the OMS documentation included on the DM2000 CD-ROM for more information on installing. 3 Install Yamaha USB MIDI driver 1.04 or later. If you are using the TO HOST USB port, you must also install the Yamaha USB MIDI driver included on the DM2000 CD-ROM. See the included documentation for more information. Configuring the DM2000 1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the MIDI/TO HOST Setup page, and use the DAW parameter to specify the port to which Pro Tools is connected. See “MIDI Port Setup” on page 183 for more information. 2 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate the Remote pages, and assign Pro Tools to a Remote Layer. See “Assigning Targets to Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. 3 Use the LAYER [REMOTE] buttons to select the Pro Tools Remote Layer. When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, the DM2000’s control surface controls Pro Tools, not the DM2000. In order to control the DM2000, you need to select an Input Channel Layer or the Master Layer. Audio mixing on the Input and Master Layers, and Automix continues while the Pro Tools Layer is selected. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Configuring Pro Tools 189 Configuring Pro Tools 1 Pro Tools needs to be configured as follows. For more information, see your Pro Tools documentation. Launch Pro Tools. 2 Choose OMS Studio Setup from the Setups menu, and configure OMS as necessary. This screen shot shows the Yamaha USB MIDI driver with eight ports. An OMS-compatible device profile for the DM2000 is included on the DM2000 CD-ROM. See the included documentation for more information. 3 Choose Peripherals from the Setups menu. 4 When the Peripherals window appears, click the MIDI Controllers button. 5 Select HUI as the Type of controller. 6 Select the Receive From and Send To ports, and then click OK. The DM2000 can emulate up to three typical 8-channel Pro Tools MIDI controllers. A single MIDI port is required for every eight channels. So you must configure MIDI Controller #2 to use channels 9 through 16, and configure MIDI Controller #3 to use channels 17 through 24. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 190 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer This section explains the operation of the DM2000 control surface when the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected. DM2000 buttons and controls are referred to by the names printed on the DM2000 with the name of the corresponding Pro Tools function in parenthesis. For example, “Press the MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 1] (DEFAULT) button.” In keyboard shortcuts, the Pro Tools function names are left out for simplification. Display This is the Pro Tools Remote Layer page, the various sections of which are explained below. TARGET This parameter cannot be changed here. To change the target for this Layer, you must first select another Layer, and then use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate the Remote page for this Layer. See “Assigning Targets to Remote Layers” on page 217 for more information. COUNTER This counter works in unison with the timecode counter in Pro Tools. The display format is specified in Pro Tools. The three check boxes indicate the currently selected format, as follows: TIME CODE: Pro Tools timecode format set to “Time Code.” FEET: Pro Tools timecode format set to “Feet:Frames.” BEATS: Pro Tools timecode format set to “Bars:Beats.” When the Pro Tools timecode format is set to “Minutes:Seconds” or “Samples,” no check boxes are selected. CURSOR MODE The currently selected Cursor mode is displayed here: NAVIGATION, ZOOM, or SELECT. Cursor modes are selected by using the [INC] (CURSOR MODE) button. SELECT ASSIGN This indicates the current function of the Encoders. For example, Pan (PanR), SndA, SndB, SndC, SndD, or SndE. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 191 INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT ASSIGN: This indicator works in unison with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [5] (ASSIGN) button indicator. See “Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins” on page 209 for more information. COMPARE: This indicator works in unison with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [6] (COMPARE) button indicator. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 for more information. BYPASS: This indicator works in unison with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [7] (BYPASS) button indicator. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 and “Bypassing Individual Plug-ins” on page 211 for more information. INSERT: This indicator works in unison with the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [8] (INSERT/PARAM) button indicator. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 for more information. INSERT/PARAM Display This section displays mainly insert and plug-in-related information, although other messages are also displayed here. Encoder Display This section displays information about the Parameter controls 1–4. The SEL indicators show the on/off status of the Parameter control push-switches. The rotary control indicators show the positions of the Parameter controls. The “O” symbol below each Parameter control shows the automation status for each Parameter control. Channel Strips AUTO DM2000 channel strips correspond to Pro Tools channels from left to right, with the leftmost Pro Tools channel being handled by DM2000 channel strip #1. You can change the order of channel strips by dragging the channel select buttons in Pro Tools, in which case the DM2000 automatically reorders its channel strips. By using certain USER DEFINED KEYS, Pro Tools channels can be scrolled individually (see page 198), or in banks of 24 (see page 198). SEL SOLO ON DM2000—Owner’s Manual 192 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer Encoders & Push-Switches The Encoders are used to set pan and send levels and select I/O assignments. The Encoder push-switches are used to mute sends, reset send levels and panpots, and confirm I/O assignments. Their exact operation depends on the currently selected Encoder mode, as shown in the following table. Encoder Mode [PAN] [SEND LEVEL] [INPUT] [OUTPUT] [SEND ASSIGN] Encoder Push-switches Pan (see page 205) Reset pan (see page 212) Send levels (see page 207) Mute sends (see page 207) Send pre/post (see page 206) Reset send levels (see page 212) Select input source (see page 203) Select output destination (see page 204) Confirm selection Select send destination (see page 206) [AUTO] buttons These buttons are used in conjunction with the AUTOMIX section to set the Automation mode of each channel. See “Setting the Automation Mode” on page 215 for more information. [SEL] buttons These buttons are used to select channels (see page 203), to select inserts (see page 210), and to bypass inserts (see page 211). [SOLO] buttons These buttons are used to solo channels. See “Soloing Channels” on page 205 for more information. [ON] buttons These buttons are used to mute channels. See “Muting Channels” on page 205 for more information. Faders The faders are used to set channel levels (see page 204), or to set send levels in Flip mode (see page 208). DM2000—Owner’s Manual 10 0 5 5 0 10 5 15 10 20 15 30 20 40 30 50 40 60 50 70 Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 193 Channel Strip Displays Aud1 The fluorescent channel strip displays graphically display the value of the parameter currently assigned to the Encoders. The minimum and maximum segments do not work with the Pro Tools Remote Layer. Channel strip displays also display Pro Tools channel names in an abbreviated form. Various other information is also displayed here and this is explained in the relevant sections. Selected Channel The channel strip borders of currently selected channels light up like this. Fader Touch Sense When fader knobs are touched, the corresponding Touch Sense indicators light up like this. Insert Indicator The INS indicator shows whether a channel’s plug-ins are on or off. Pan Display Hard left ( indicates center position) Other position Center ( indicates at center) Hard right Send Level Minimum Other value Maximum DM2000—Owner’s Manual 194 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer MATRIX SELECT Section MATRIX SELECT MATRIX 1 MATRIX 2 (DEFAULT) (SEND MUTE) MATRIX 4 (INSERT BYPASS) [MATRIX 1] (DEFAULT) button This button is used in conjunction with other controls to reset faders, panpots, sends, and plug-ins to their default values. See “Resetting Faders, Sends, Panpots & Plug-ins” on page 212 for more information. [MATRIX 2] (SEND MUTE) button This button is used in conjunction with the Encoder push-switches to mute sends. See “Muting Sends” on page 207 for more information. [MATRIX 4] (INSERT BYPASS) button This button is used in conjunction with other controls to bypass plug-ins. See “Bypassing Individual Plug-ins” on page 211 for more information. AUX SELECT Section AUX SELECT AUX 1 (SEND A) AUX 2 (SEND B) AUX 3 (SEND C) AUX 4 (SEND D) AUX 5 (SEND E) AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] buttons are used to select sends A–E. The button indicator of the currently selected send lights up. ENCODER MODE Section ENCODER MODE PAN AUX/ MTRX PAN SEND LEVEL ASSIGN 1 INPUT ASSIGN 2 ASSIGN 3 ASSIGN 4 OUTPUT SEND ASSIGN INSERT [PAN] (PAN) button When this button is pressed, the Encoders work as channel panpots. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed. See “Panning Channels” on page 205 for more information. [AUX/MTRX] (SEND LEVEL) button When this button is pressed, the Encoders work as send level controls. Its indicator lights up when it’s pressed, and send A is selected automatically. If the Encoders are currently set to control pan, its indicator lights automatically when one of the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons is pressed. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 195 [ASSIGN 1] (INPUT) button This button is used in conjunction with other controls to set channel input sources. See “Assigning Inputs to Channels” on page 203 for more information. [ASSIGN 2] (OUTPUT) button This button is used in conjunction with other controls to set channel output destinations. See “Assigning Outputs to Channels” on page 204 for more information. [ASSIGN 3] (SEND ASSIGN) button This button is used in conjunction with other controls to set send destinations. See “Assigning Send Destinations” on page 206 for more information. [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button This button determines the operation of the [SEL] buttons. When its indicator is off, [SEL] buttons select channels (see page 203). When its indicator is on, they select inserts/plug-ins (see page 210). FADER MODE Section FADER MODE FADER AUX/MTRX [FADER] & [AUX/MTRX] buttons These buttons are used to select Flip mode, in which faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons can be used to control sends. See “Flip Mode” on page 208 for more information. DISPLAY ACCESS Section DISPLAY ACCESS METER [METER] button This button is used to reset the meter clip indicators and peak hold indicators. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 196 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer EFFECTS/PLUG-INS Section EFFECTS / PLUG INS DISPLAY (SHOW INSERT) (< SCROLL) 5 (ASSIGN) 6 7 8 (SCROLL >) 1 2 3 4 (COMPARE) (BYPASS) (INSERT/PARAM) [DISPLAY] (SHOW INSERT) button This button is used to open and close plug-in windows. [5] (ASSIGN) button This button is used in conjunction with other controls to assign inserts/plug-ins to channels. See “Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins” on page 209 for more information. [6] (COMPARE) button This button is used to compare plug-in edits before and after. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 for more information. [7] (BYPASS) button This button is used to bypass plug-ins. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 and “Bypassing Individual Plug-ins” on page 211 for more information. [8] (INSERT/PARAM) button This button is used in conjunction with other controls when editing plug-ins. See “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 for more information. Parameter Up (< SCROLL) & Parameter Down (SCROLL >) buttons These buttons are used to scroll parameters when assigning inserts and editing plug-ins. See “Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins” on page 209 and “Editing Plug-ins” on page 210 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 197 TRACK ARMING Section TRACK ARMING 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 MASTER (REC/RDY ALL) [1–24] (REC/RDY) buttons These buttons are used to arm Pro Tools channels for recording. The button indicators of channels that are armed flash. The button indicators of armed channels light continuously when recording starts. [MASTER] (REC/RDY ALL) button This button is used to arm all Pro Tools channels for recording. The button indicators of all channels flash when this button is pressed. All channels can be disarmed by pressing it again, in which case all button indicators go out. The number of channels that can be armed depends on the number of recordable tracks in the current Pro Tools session. The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Arm all channels (same as [MASTER] (REC/RDY ALL) button USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+TRACK ARMING [1–24] Arm all selected channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+TRACK ARMING [1–24] AUTOMIX Section AUTOMIX DISPLAY (AUTO STATUS) ENABLE REC SUSPEND WRITE ABORT/ AUTOUNDO REC TOUCH LATCH RETURN RELATIVE TOUCH SENSE READ TRIM OFF OVERWRITE FADER ON PAN AUX AUX ON EQ (FADER) (MUTE) PAN (SEND) (SEND MUTE) (PLUG-IN) [DISPLAY] (AUTO STATUS) button When this button is pressed, the Automation modes of all channels are displayed on the channel strip displays. See “Viewing the Automation Mode” on page 215 for more information. [ENABLE] (SUSPEND) button This button is used to suspend all automation recording and playback operations. Its button indicator flashes while automation is suspended. Level and other channel strip settings are left as they are while automation is suspended. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 198 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer [REC] (WRITE), [ABORT/UNDO] (TOUCH), [AUTOREC] (LATCH), [RETURN] (READ), [RELATIVE] (TRIM) & [TOUCH SENSE] (OFF) buttons These buttons are used to select the channel Automation modes. See “Setting the Automation Mode” on page 215 for more information. OVERWRITE [FADER] (FADER), [ON] (MUTE), [PAN] (PAN), [AUX] (SEND), [AUX ON] (SEND MUTE) & [EQ] (PLUG-IN) buttons These buttons are used to select parameters for automation recording and playback. See “Arming Parameters for Automation” on page 216 for more information. USER DEFINED KEYS Section USER DEFINED KEYS DISPLAY (STATUS) 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 (TRANSPORT) ( BANK) (BANK ) (SHIFT/ADD)(OPTION/ALL) (GROUP) (SUSPEND) (CREATE) 9 10 11 (MIX/EDIT) ( CH) (CH ) 12 13 14 15 (CTRL/ (Command (MONITOR) (UNDO) CLUTCH) ALT/FINE) 16 (SAVE) [DISPLAY] (STATUS) button This button is used to open and close the Session Setup window. [1] (TRANSPORT) button This button is used to open and close the Transport window. Its indicator lights up while the Transport window is open. [2] (< BANK) & [3] (BANK >) buttons These buttons are used to swap channel banks 24 channels at a time. [4] (SHIFT/ADD) & [5] (OPTION/ALL) buttons These buttons are used in conjunction with other buttons to modify function operation. They correspond to the Shift and Option modifier keys found on Macintosh keyboards. [6] (GROUP) button This button is used to display group information for all channels. While it’s pressed, the channel strip displays show the ID of any group in which each channel is assigned. [7] (SUSPEND) button This button is used to temporarily suspend all mix groups (not edit groups). Its indicator flashes while mix groups are suspended. [8] (CREATE) button This button is used to open the New Group window (Command-G in Pro Tools). [9] (MIX/EDIT) This button is used to toggle between the Mix and Edit windows. [10] (< CH) & [11] (CH >) buttons These buttons are used to scroll channels one at a time. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 199 [12] (CTRL/CLUTCH) & [13] (Command-ALT/FINE) buttons These buttons are used in conjunction with other buttons to modify function operation. They correspond to the Control and Command modifier keys found on Macintosh keyboards. [14] (MONITOR) button This button is used to display the monitor mode currently selected in the Pro Tools Operations menu. When the monitor mode is set to “Auto Input Monitor,” “Auto” is displayed. When it’s set to “Input Only Monitor,” “Inpt” is displayed. Aux Input channels always display “AUX.” Master fader channels always display “Mstr.” And MIDI Tracks always display “MIDI.” [15] (UNDO) button This button is used to undo and redo the last operation. Its indicator lights up when the last operation can be undone, and it flashes when the last operation can be redone. [16] (SAVE) This button is used to save the current session (same as Save Session command in the File menu). Its indicator lights up when there are unsaved changes, and goes out when there are no unsaved changes. When pressed, the indicator flashes and you can press it again to go ahead and save the current session, or press [ESC] to cancel. LOCATOR Section LOCATOR LOCATE MEMORY DISPLAY (MEM-LOC) 1 2 AUDITION PRE RETURN TO ZERO END 3 4 5 IN OUT POST ONLINE LOOP QUICK PUNCH 6 7 8 [DISPLAY] (MEM-LOC) button This button is used to open and close the Memory Locations window. LOCATE MEMORY [1–8] buttons These buttons perform the same transport-related functions as the 1–8 number keys on a Macintosh keyboard. If you set the Numeric keypad Mode in Pro Tools to “Classic” (Setups menu, Preferences), these buttons can be used to directly locate markers 1–8. • • • [AUDITION] button This button is used in conjunction with the [PRE], [IN], [OUT], and [POST] buttons for auditioning. Its indicator lights up while auditioning is on and operation is as follows: Press the [PRE] button to audition the section between the pre-roll point and the in point of the selected region. Press the [IN] button to audition from the in point of the selected region, continuing for the specified pre-roll time. Press the [OUT] button to audition the section before the out point of the selected region. The length of the section is determined by the post-roll time. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 200 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer • Press the [POST] button to audition from the out point of the selected region, continuing for the specified post-roll time. Auditioning stops at the end of the section, or when a transport button is pressed. [PRE] & [POST] buttons These buttons are used to turn on and off pre-roll and post-roll. While the [AUDITION] button indicator is lit, they are used for auditioning. [IN] & [OUT] buttons These buttons are used to set in and out points during playback. While the [AUDITION] button indicator is lit, they are used for auditioning. [RETURN TO ZERO] button Pressing this button moves the playback cursor to the beginning of the session. [END] button Pressing this button moves the playback cursor to the end of the session. [ONLINE] button This button is used to take Pro Tools online and offline (same as the Online command in the Operations menu). Its indicator lights up when Pro Tools is online. [LOOP] button This button is used to turn loop playback on and off (same as the Loop Playback command in the Operations menu). Its indicator lights up when loop playback is on. This button is mutually exclusive with the [QUICK PUNCH], [SHUTTLE], and [SCRUB] buttons. [QUICK PUNCH] button This button is used to turn quick punch on and off (same as the Quick Punch command in the Operations menu). Its indicator lights up when quick punch is on. This button is mutually exclusive with the [LOOP], [SHUTTLE], and [SCRUB] buttons. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Control Surface Operation with the Pro Tools Remote Layer 201 Data Entry & Transport Section REW FF STOP PLAY REC DISPLAY HISTORY BACK FORWARD (EDIT MODE) (EDIT TOOLS) DEC (ESC) SHUTTLE INC (CURSOR MODE) SCRUB ENTER [REW] button This button rewinds from the current cursor position (it’s non-latching). [FF] button This button fast forwards from the current cursor position (it’s non-latching). [STOP] button This button stops playback and recording. [PLAY] button This button starts playback from the current cursor position. [REC] button This button arms Pro Tools for recording ([REC] button indicator flashing), recording is started by pressing the [PLAY] button ([REC] button indicator lit continuously). [BACK] (EDIT MODE) button This button is used to select the following edit modes: Shuffle, Slip, Spot, and Grid. [FORWARD] (EDIT TOOLS) button This button is used to select the following edit tools: Zoomer, Trimmer, Selector, Grabber, SmartTool, Scrubber, and Pencil. Parameter Wheel The Parameter wheel is used for shuttling and scrubbing (see page 214). It’s also used for making fine adjustments to the selected region (see page 213). DM2000—Owner’s Manual 202 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer [SHUTTLE] & [SCRUB] buttons These buttons are used to select the Shuttle and Scrub modes. See “Scrub & Shuttle” on page 214 for more information. These buttons are mutually exclusive with the [QUICK PUNCH] and [LOOP] buttons. [ENTER] button This button works the same as the Enter key on your computer keyboard. Pressing it opens the New Memory Location dialog box. While a dialog box is open, pressing it performs the same action as clicking the OK button. [–/DEC] (ESC) button For the most part, this button works the same as the Esc key on your computer keyboard. While a dialog box is open, pressing it performs the same action as clicking the Cancel button. [INC] (CURSOR MODE) button This button is used to select the following cursor modes: Navigation (see page 212), Zoom (see page 213), and Select (see page 213). Cursor buttons These buttons can be used to scroll the Mix and Edit windows (see page 203), navigate the Edit window (see page 212), zoom waveforms (see page 213), and to make fine adjustments to the selected region (see page 213). Their exact operation depends on the currently selected cursor mode. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Scrolling Windows 203 Scrolling Windows The following shortcuts can be used to scroll the Mix and Edit windows. Scroll window to the left USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Left cursor button Scroll window to the right USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Right cursor button Scroll window up USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Up cursor button Scroll window down USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Down cursor button Scroll window to the beginning USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Left cursor button Scroll window to the end USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Right cursor button Scroll window to the top USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Up cursor button Scroll window to the bottom USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+Down cursor button Selecting Channels 1 2 Channels can be selected as follows. (Make sure the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button indicator is not lit before proceeding.) Use the [SEL] buttons to select channels. The [SEL] button indicators of selected channels light up. The border of the corresponding channel strip displays also light up. To select multiple channels in each eight-channel block (e.g., 1–8, 9–16, or 17–24), while holding down one [SEL] button, use the [SEL] buttons of the other channels in the same block to add and remove channels. The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Select multiple channels USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+[SEL] Select all channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+[SEL] Inverse the channel selection USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+[SEL] Assigning Inputs to Channels 1 Channels can be assigned to input sources as follows. The Pro Tools transport must be stopped in order to make these assignments. You can view the current input source assignment for each channel on the channel strip displays by pressing and holding the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 1] (INPUT) button. Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3] (SEND ASSIGN) button. Its button indicator flashes, and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “ASGN.” 2 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 1] (INPUT) button. Its button indicator lights up, and the channel strip displays show the current input source for each channel. 3 Use the Encoders to select input sources. The names of the input sources appear on the channel strip displays in abbreviated form. When you select a source other than the current, the ring of the corresponding channel strip display flashes. 4 To confirm your selection, press the Encoder’s push-switch. The channel strip display ring stops flashing. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 204 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Set all channels to the same input source ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 1], Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Encoder push-switch Set all selected channels to the same input source ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 1], Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+Encoder push-switch You can cancel this function by pressing the [–/DEC] (ESC) button. Assigning Outputs to Channels 1 Channels can be assigned to output destinations as follows. The Pro Tools transport must be stopped in order to make these assignments. You can view the current output destination assignment for each channel on the channel strip displays by pressing and holding the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 2] (OUTPUT) button. Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3] (SEND ASSIGN) button. Its indicator flashes, and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “ASGN.” 2 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 2] (OUTPUT) button. Its indicator lights up, and the channel strip displays show the current output destination for each channel. 3 Use the Encoders to select output destinations. The names of the output destinations appear on the channel strip displays in abbreviated form. When you select a destination other than the current, the ring of the corresponding channel strip display flashes. 4 To confirm your selection, press the Encoder’s push-switch. The channel strip display ring stops flashing. The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Set all channels to the same output destination ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 2], Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Encoder push-switch Set all selected channels to the same output destination ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 2], Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+Encoder push-switch You can cancel this function by pressing the [–/DEC] (ESC) button. Setting Channel Levels 1 Channel levels can be set as follows. (Make sure the FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX/MTRX] button indicators are not flashing before proceeding.) Use the faders to set channels levels. Faders in a mix group are controlled together. You can temporarily disable a mix group in order to make adjustments to individual faders by pressing and holding the USER DEFINED KEYS [12] (CTRL/CLUTCH) button. Alternatively, you can make adjustments to individual faders while touching the knob of at least one fader in that mix group. You can view channel levels in dB on the channel strip displays by holding down the USER DEFINED KEYS [13] (ALT/FINE) button while adjusting faders. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Muting Channels 205 Muting Channels 1 2 Channels can be muted as follows. Use the [ON] buttons to mute channels. The [ON] button indicators of muted channels go out. Press the [ON] buttons again to unmute channels. The [ON] button indicators of unmuted channels are lit. Grouped channels are muted together. You can temporarily disable a group in order to mute individual channels by pressing and holding the USER DEFINED KEYS [12] (CTRL/CLUTCH) button. The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Mute all channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+[ON] Mute all selected channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+[ON] Panning Channels 1 2 Channels can be panned as follows. Press the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button. Its indicator lights up. Use the Encoders to pan the channels. Pan positions are displayed by the channel strip displays. See “Pan Display” on page 193 for more information. You can view pan settings numerically on the channel strip displays by holding down the USER DEFINED KEYS [13] (ALT/FINE) button while adjusting the Encoders. For stereo aux input channels (i.e., channels with two panpots), use the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button to toggle between the left and right panpots, and pan with the Encoder. When the left panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button indicator is lit continuously and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “Pan.” When the right panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button indicator flashes and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “PanR.” Soloing Channels 1 2 Channels can be soloed as follows. Use the [SOLO] buttons to solo channels. The [SOLO] button indicators of soloed channels light up and the [ON] button indicators of unsoloed channels flash. Press the [SOLO] buttons again to unsolo channels. Grouped channels are soloed together. You can temporarily disable a mix group in order to solo individual channels by pressing and holding the USER DEFINED KEYS [12] (CTRL/CLUTCH) button. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 206 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer Assigning Send Destinations 1 Sends can be assigned to output destinations as follows. The Pro Tools transport must be stopped in order to make these assignments. You can view the current output destination assignment for each send on the channel strip displays by pressing and holding the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons. Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3] (SEND ASSIGN) button. Its indicator flashes, and the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “ASGN.” 2 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the sends. The button indicator of the selected send lights up, and the channel strip displays show the current send destinations of all channels. If the currently selected send is not assigned to a channel, “—” is displayed. 3 Use the Encoders to select send destinations. The names of the send destinations appear on the channel strip displays in abbreviated form. When you select a different destination, the ring of the corresponding channel strip display flashes. When a stereo send destination is selected, its name flashes and continues to flash even after its been confirmed. 4 To confirm your selection, press the Encoder’s push-switch. The channel strip display ring stops flashing. The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Set all channels to the same send destination ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5], Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Encoder push-switch Set all selected channels to the same send destination ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 3], AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5], Encoder, USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+Encoder push-switch You can cancel this function by pressing the [–/DEC] (ESC) button. Configuring Sends as Pre or Post 1 2 Sends can be configured as either pre or post as follows. (Make sure the MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 2] (SEND MUTE) button indicator is not lit before proceeding.) Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the sends. The ENCODER MODE [AUX/MTRX] (SEND LEVEL) button indicator lights up, as does the button indicator of the selected send. Use the Encoder push-switches to toggle between pre and post. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Setting Send Levels 207 Setting Send Levels 1 2 Send levels can be set as follows. Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the sends. The ENCODER MODE [AUX/MTRX] (SEND LEVEL) button indicator lights up, as does the button indicator of the selected send. The levels for the selected send are displayed by the channel strip displays. See “Send Level” on page 193 for more information. Use the Encoders to set the send levels. You can view send levels in dB on the channel strip displays by holding down the USER DEFINED KEYS [13] (ALT/FINE) button while adjusting the Encoders. Send levels can also be set by using the faders in Flip mode. See “Flip Mode” on page 208 for more information. Muting Sends 1 Sends can be muted as follows. Press the MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 2] (SEND MUTE) button. 2 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the sends. The ENCODER MODE [AUX/MTRX] (SEND LEVEL) button indicator lights up, as does the button indicator of the selected send. 3 Use the Encoder push-switches to mute the sends. When a send is muted, the ring of the corresponding channel strip display flashes. Sends can also be muted by using the [ON] buttons in Flip mode. See “Flip Mode” on page 208 for more information. Panning Sends Only sends assigned to stereo destinations can be panned. Sends can be panned by using the Encoders in Flip mode. See “Flip Mode” on page 208 for more information. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 208 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer Flip Mode In Flip mode, the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons can be used to control sends, as shown in the following table. Control Normal mode Flip mode Fader Channel level Send level Encoder Channel pan/send level Send pan [ON] button Channel mute Send mute 1 Press the FADER MODE [FADER] or [AUX/MTRX] button. The FADER MODE [FADER] and [AUX/MTRX] button indicators flash alternately, and both the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) and [AUX/MTRX] (SEND LEVEL) button indicators light up. The SELECT ASSIGN section of the display shows “FLIP.” 2 Use the AUX SELECT [AUX 1–5] (SEND A–E) buttons to select the sends. The button indicator of the selected send lights up. 3 Use the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons to control the currently selected send. For stereo aux input channels (i.e., channels with two send panpots), use the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button to toggle between the left and right panpots, and pan with the Encoder. When the left panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button indicator is lit continuously. When the right panpot is active, the ENCODER MODE [PAN] (PAN) button indicator flashes. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins 209 Assigning Inserts/Plug-ins 1 Inserts can be assigned to channels as follows. The Pro Tools transport must be stopped in order to make these assignments. Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button. Its indicator lights up and the [SEL] buttons are set to Insert Select mode. 2 Use the [SEL] buttons to select channels for insert assignment. The name of the selected channel appears in the INSERT/PARAM section of the display. The border of the corresponding channel name in the Pro Tools Mix window is highlighted red. 3 Press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [5] (ASSIGN) button. Its indicator flashes, as does the ASSIGN indicator on the display. 4 Use Parameter controls 1–4 to select inserts/plug-ins. The names of the inserts/plug-ins appear on the display in abbreviated form. When you select an insert/plug-in other than the current, the corresponding SEL button flashes on the display. 5 To confirm your selection, press the relevant Parameter control’s push-switch. The SEL button stops flashing. While the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [5] (ASSIGN) button indicator is still flashing, you can assign more inserts/plug-ins to the same channel. To set insert #5, press the Parameter Down (SCROLL >) button. Press the Parameter Up (< SCROLL) button to view inserts 1–4 again. To assign inserts/plug-ins to other channels, use the [SEL] buttons to select them. You’ll need to press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [5] (ASSIGN) button each time you select another channel. To assign the same insert/plug-in to all channels, while holding down the USER DEFINED KEYS [5] (OPTION/ALL) button, press the Parameter control push-switch. (The number of assignments possible depends on the available CPU power.) To assign the same insert/plug-in to a selection of channels, press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button (indicator off) so that the [SEL] buttons can be used to select channels. Select the channels as explained on page 203, then press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [5] (ASSIGN) button. While its indicator is flashing, use Parameter controls 1–4 to select an insert/plug-in, and while holding down the USER DEFINED KEYS [5] (OPTION/ALL) button and USER DEFINED KEYS [4] (SHIFT/ADD) button, press the Parameter control’s push-switch. (The number of assignments possible depends on the available CPU power.) You can cancel this function by pressing the [–/DEC] (ESC) button. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 210 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer Editing Plug-ins 1 Plug-ins can be edited as follows. (Make sure the MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 4] (INSERT BYPASS) button indicator is not lit before proceeding.) Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button. Its indicator lights up and the [SEL] buttons are set to Insert Select mode. 2 Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel whose plug-in you want to edit. That channel’s [SEL] button indicator lights up, and the border of the corresponding channel name in the Pro Tools Mix window is highlighted red. The names of the Plug-ins inserted in the channel are displayed in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section of the display. 3 Use the Parameter control 1–4 push-switches to select the plug-in that you want to edit. Plug-in Edit mode is set and the plug-in’s parameters are displayed in the INSERT ASSIGN/EDIT section of the display. The EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [8] (INSERT/PARAM) button indicator lights up and the PARAM indicator on the display appears highlighted. 4 Use Parameter controls 1–4 and their push-switches to edit the displayed parameters. Parameters displayed on the top row can be edited by using the push-switches. Parameters displayed on the bottom row can be edited by using the Parameter controls. 5 Use the Parameter Down (SCROLL >) button and Parameter Up (< SCROLL) button to select the parameter pages. When a parameter page is first selected, the number of the current parameter page and the total number of parameter pages is displayed momentarily. For example, “1/2” indicates that the first page of two is currently selected. While “3/4” indicates that the third page of four is currently selected. The title of the plug-in is also displayed. While editing a plug-in you can bypass it by pressing the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [7] (BYPASS) button. In which case, the BYPASS indicator on the display appears highlighted. As soon as you begin editing a plug-in, the COMPARE indicator on the display appears highlighted. You can compare your edits with the original settings by pressing the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [6] (COMPARE) button. The COMPARE indicator on the display appears highlighted while the original settings are active, and unhighlighted while your edits are active. 6 To edit another plug-in, press the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [8] (INSERT/PARAM) button (its indicator goes out), use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel (same as step #2), and use the Parameter control 1–4 push-switches to select the plug-in (same as step #3). DM2000—Owner’s Manual Bypassing Individual Plug-ins 211 Bypassing Individual Plug-ins 1 Individual plug-ins can be bypassed as follows. (Make sure the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [8] (INSERT/PARAM) button indicator is not lit before proceeding.) Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button. Its indicator lights up and the [SEL] buttons are set to Insert Select mode. 2 Use the [SEL] buttons to select plug-ins. 3 While holding down the EFFECTS/PLUG-INS [7] (BYPASS) button, use Parameter control 1–4 push switches to bypass the plug-ins. To bypass plug-in #5, press the Parameter Down (SCROLL >) button, and then perform step 3. Press the Parameter Up (< SCROLL) button to view plug-ins 1–4 again. The titles of bypassed plug-ins are displayed in uppercase characters. For example, the title of the plug in “D-Verb” appears as “d-verb” when it’s not bypassed, and appears as “D-VERB” when it is bypassed. Bypassing all Plug-ins 1 All plug-ins on a channel can be bypassed as follows. Press the MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 4] (INSERT BYPASS) button. Its indicator lights up. The INS indicators on the channel strip displays work as follows. INS indicator = off: None of the channel’s plug-ins are bypassed. INS indicator = lit: All of the channel’s plug-ins are bypassed. INS indicator = flashing: Some of the channel’s plug-ins are bypassed. 2 Press the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button. Its indicator flashes. 3 Use the [SEL] buttons to bypass all plug-ins on each channel. The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Bypass all plug-ins on all channels MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 4], ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4], USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+[SEL] Bypass all plug-ins on all selected channels MATRIX SELECT [MATRIX 4], ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4], USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+[SEL] DM2000—Owner’s Manual 212 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer Resetting Faders, Sends, Panpots & Plug-ins Faders, panpots, sends, and plug-ins can be reset to their default values as follows. For faders and send controls, this is “0.” For panpots, it’s center. Make sure that the ENCODER MODE [ASSIGN 4] (INSERT) button indicator is off before proceeding with these shortcuts. To do this... Do this! Reset a channel fader [MATRIX 1]+[SEL] Reset all channel faders USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+[MATRIX 1]+[SEL] Reset all selected channel faders USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+[MATRIX 1]+[SEL] Reset a channel panpot [PAN], [MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push] Reset all channel panpots [PAN], USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+[MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push] Reset all selected channel panpots [PAN], USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+[MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push] Reset a channel send level AUX SELECT [AUX1–5], [MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push] Reset all channel send levels AUX SELECT [AUX1–5], USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+[MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push] Reset all selected channel send levels AUX SELECT [AUX1–5], USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+[MATRIX 1]+[ENCODER push] Reset the currently selected plug-in [MATRIX 1]+EFFECTS PLUG-INS [6] While the [MATRIX 1] (DEFAULT) button is being pressed, its indicator flashes and “DFLT” appears in the SELECT ASSIGN section of the display. Grouped channels are reset together. You can temporarily disable a group by pressing and holding the USER DEFINED KEYS [12] (CTRL/CLUTCH) button before pressing the [MATRIX 1] (DEFAULT) button. Navigating the Edit Window 1 The cursor buttons can be used to navigate the Edit window as follows. Use the [INC] (CURSOR MODE) button to select Navigation cursor mode. The CURSOR MODE section of the display shows “NAVIGATION.” 2 To move the edit cursor to the previous region boundary, or to the previous marker, press the Left cursor button. 3 To move the edit cursor to the next region boundary, or to the next marker, press the Right cursor button. 4 To select the track above, press the Up cursor button. 5 To select the track below, press the Down cursor button. The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Extend the selection USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+Left or Right cursor button Select the previous region USER DEFINED KEYS [12]+Left cursor button Select the next region USER DEFINED KEYS [12]+Right cursor button Display the in point of the selected region in the center of the Edit window USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Left cursor button (or LOCATE MEMORY [IN] button) Display the out point of the selected region in the center of the Edit window USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Right cursor button (or LOCATE MEMORY [OUT] button) DM2000—Owner’s Manual Zooming 213 Zooming 1 • • • • The cursor buttons can be used to zoom the Edit window as follows. Use the [INC] (CURSOR MODE) button to select Zoom cursor mode. The CURSOR MODE section of the display shows “ZOOM.” In Zoom cursor mode, the cursor buttons work as follows: Left cursor button: Zoom out horizontally. Right cursor button: Zoom in horizontally. Up cursor button: Zoom in vertically. Down cursor button: Zoom out vertically. Making Fine Adjustments to the Selected Region 1 The cursor buttons can be used in conjunction with the Parameter wheel to make fine adjustments to the selected region. Use the [INC] (CURSOR MODE) button to select Select cursor mode. The CURSOR MODE section of the display shows “SELECT.” 2 While holding down the left cursor button, turn the Parameter wheel to make fine adjustments to the in point of the selected region. 3 While holding down the right cursor button, turn the Parameter wheel to make fine adjustments to the out point of the selected region. The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Move the edit cursor to the in point of the selected region Double-click the Left cursor button Move the edit cursor to the out point of the selected region Double-click the Right cursor button The following shortcuts can be used in either Navigation or Select cursor mode. To do this... Do this! Select the track/region below Down cursor button Select the track/region above Up cursor button Extend the selection to include the same region on the track below USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+Down cursor button Extend the selection to include the same region on the track above USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+Up cursor button Shorten the selection by unselecting the region on the lowest track USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Down cursor button Shorten the selection by unselecting the region on the highest track USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+Up cursor button Move the selection (not the audio) backwards or forwards Left cursor button+Right cursor button+Parameter wheel DM2000—Owner’s Manual 214 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer Scrub & Shuttle 1 The Parameter wheel can be used to scrub and shuttle as follows. Make sure that Pro Tools is stopped. 2 Press the [SCRUB] button if you want to scrub, press the [SHUTTLE] button if you want to shuttle. The corresponding button indicator lights up. The [REW] and [FF] button indicators also light up, and the cursor mode is set to Navigation (the CURSOR MODE section of the display shows “NAVIGATION”). 3 Turn the Parameter wheel clockwise to scrub/shuttle forwards. Turn it counterclockwise to scrub/shuttle backwards. Scrub/shuttle starts at the in point of the selected region. If no region is selected, the edit cursor position is used. If you hold down the USER DEFINED KEYS [5] (OPTION/ALL) button when pressing the [SCRUB] or [SHUTTLE] button, scrub/shuttle will start at the out point of the selected region. If the Edit Insertion Follows Scrub/Shuttle preference is turned on in Pro Tools (Setups menu, Preferences command, Operation page), the currently selected region will be cancelled when the [SCRUB] or [SHUTTLE] button is pressed. To maintain the currently selected region, hold down the USER DEFINED KEYS [4] (SHIFT/ADD) button when pressing the [SCRUB] or [SHUTTLE] button. You can toggle between scrub and shuttle by pressing the [SCRUB] and [SHUTTLE] buttons, in which case scrub or shuttle continues from the current position. 4 To expand or shrink the selected region, while holding down the USER DEFINED KEYS [4] (SHIFT/ADD) button, rotate the Parameter wheel. Press the left cursor button when you want to move the in point. Press the right cursor button, to move the out point. To start Scrub/Shuttle from the top of the selected region, while holding down the USER DEFINED KEYS [5] (OPTION/ALL) button, press the left cursor button. Similarly, to start Scrub/Shuttle from the end of the selected region, while holding down the USER DEFINED KEYS [5] (OPTION/ALL) button, press the right cursor button. 5 To stop scrub/shuttle, press the [SCRUB] or [SHUTTLE] button again, or press the [STOP] button. If you press the [REW], [FF], or [PLAY] button, scrub/shuttle operation is stopped before rewind, fast forward, or playback commences. While scrub/ shuttle is active, only the following Pro Tools/DM2000 controls can be used: [SCRUB] and [SHUTTLE] buttons, Parameter wheel, transport buttons, faders, [ON] buttons, and [SOLO] buttons. The current position can be stored as a marker by pressing the [ENTER] button. The scrub resolution depends on the current zoom setting, the more zoomed in you are, the higher the resolution. If you hold down the USER DEFINED KEYS [13] (ALT/FINE) button while scrubbing, you can scrub at the highest resolution regardless of the current zoom setting. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Automation 215 Automation Viewing the Automation Mode 1 The Automation mode setting of each channel can be viewed as follows. Press and hold a channel’s [AUTO] button. The channel’s Automation mode is displayed on the corresponding channel strip display while the [AUTO] button is pressed. Pro Tools Channel Strip Displays Auto write Wrt Auto touch Tch Auto latch Ltch Auto read Read Auto off [AUTO] Button Indicators Flashing red (Record Ready) Red (Recording) Green Off Off The Automation mode settings of all channels can be viewed as follows. 2 Press and hold the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] (AUTO STATUS) button. The Automation modes of all channels are displayed on the channel strip displays while the AUTOMIX [DISPLAY] (AUTO STATUS) button is pressed. Setting the Automation Mode 1 The Automation mode can be set as follows. While holding down a channel’s [AUTO] button, press the AUTOMIX [WRITE], [TOUCH], [LATCH], [TRIM], [READ], or [OFF] button. The channel’s Automation mode is displayed on the corresponding channel strip display while the [AUTO] button is pressed. Grouped channels are set together. You can temporarily disable a group in order to set individual channels by pressing and holding the USER DEFINED KEYS [12] (CTRL/CLUTCH) button. The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Set the Automation mode of all channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+AUTOMIX [WRITE], [TOUCH], [LATCH], [TRIM], [READ], or [OFF] Set the Automation mode of all selected channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+AUTOMIX [WRITE], [TOUCH], [LATCH], [TRIM], [READ], or [OFF] DM2000—Owner’s Manual 216 Chapter 19—Pro Tools Remote Layer Trim Mode 1 Trim mode can be set as follows. While holding down a channel’s [AUTO] button, press the AUTOMIX [RELATIVE] (TRIM) button. The channel’s Automation mode is displayed on the corresponding channel strip display while its [AUTO] button is pressed. Pro Tools Channel Strip Displays Auto trim/write TWrt Auto trim/touch TTch Auto trim/latch TLch Auto trim/read TRd [AUTO] Button Indicators Flashing red/orange (Record Ready) Orange (Recording) Flashing green/orange Grouped channels are set together. You can temporarily disable a group in order to set individual channels by pressing and holding the USER DEFINED KEYS [12] (CTRL/CLUTCH) button. The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Set Trim mode for all channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+AUTOMIX [RELATIVE] Set Trim mode of all selected channels USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+USER DEFINED KEYS [4]+AUTOMIX [RELATIVE] In Trim mode, you can display channel and send level values relatively (instead of absolute decibel values) on the channel strip displays by holding down the USER DEFINED KEYS [13] (ALT/FINE) button while adjusting the faders and Encoders. Arming Parameters for Automation Parameters can be selected for automation recording as follows. 1 Use the following AUTOMIX-OVERWRITE buttons to arm parameters. AUTOMIX-OVERWRITE Buttons Pro Tools [FADER] (FADER) Volume [ON] (MUTE) Mute [PAN] (PAN) Pan [AUX] (SEND) Send level [AUX ON] (SEND MUTE) Send mute [EQ] (PLUG-IN) Plug-in The button indicators for armed parameters light up. The following shortcuts apply. To do this... Do this! Arm all parameters USER DEFINED KEYS [5]+AUTOMIX-OVERWRITE [FADER], [ON], [PAN], [AUX], [AUX ON], or [EQ] Inverse armed parameter selection USER DEFINED KEYS [13]+AUTOMIX-OVERWRITE [FADER], [ON], [PAN], [AUX], [AUX ON], or [EQ] DM2000—Owner’s Manual Remote Control 217 20 Remote Control About Remote Layers The DM2000’s four Remote Layers allow you to control external MIDI equipment directly from the DM2000. The type of device to be controlled (i.e., the target) can be specified for each Remote Layer. There are three types of target: User Defined, Nuendo, and Pro Tools. User Defined targets allow you to specify the MIDI data that will be transmitted when the 24 channel strip faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are operated. These settings are stored in Scenes, for snapshot-style automation. The Nuendo and Pro Tools targets have been especially designed for controlling Nuendo and Pro Tools. Assigning Targets to Remote Layers 1 2 Targets are assigned to Remote Layers as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate the Remote 1–4 pages. Use the cursor buttons to select the TARGET parameter, use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a target, and then press [ENTER]. TARGET: This can be set to NO ASSIGN, USER DEFINED, Nuendo, or Pro Tools. Only one Remote Layer can be set to Nuendo or Pro Tools. See page 218 for more information on the User Defined target. See page 188 for more information on the Pro Tools target. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 218 Chapter 20—Remote Control Configuring User Defined Remote Layers 1 2 User Defined Remote Layers can be configured as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button to locate the Remote 1–4 pages. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. TARGET: This is used to select the target for the currently selected Remote Layer (the User Defined target is explained here). TRANSMIT: This enables and disables MIDI data transmission for the selected Remote Layer. INITIALIZE: This initializes the settings of the currently selected bank. BANK: These buttons are used to select banks 1, 2, 3, and 4. Each bank can contain MIDI settings for the 24 faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons. Banks can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored to SmartMedia (see page 231). Initially, bank 1 contains General MIDI (GM) volume and pan settings; bank 2, GM volume and effect; bank 3, XG volume and pan; bank 4, Nuendo VST mixer. ID/SHORT/LONG: On Remote Layers, channel strips 1–24 are identified by the fixed IDs RM01–RM24. You can enter a Short and Long name for each Remote channel strip. Short names appear on the channel strip displays. To enter a name, use the cursor buttons to select the SHORT or LONG name, use the [SEL] buttons, Parameter wheel, or INC/DEC buttons to select the channel strips, and then press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a name, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. ON: These parameters are used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be transmitted when an [ON] button is pressed. Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel strips, and then edit as necessary. When a value from 00 to FF is specified, that value is transmitted when an [ON] button is pressed. For the SW setting, data value 7F is transmitted when an [ON] button is turned on, and data value 00 is transmitted when an [ON] button is turned off. The END setting specifies the end of the data. NOP means no data is transmitted. UNLATCH/LATCH: This parameter determines the operation of the [ON] buttons: Latching or Non-latching. When set to UNLATCH, an ON value is transmitted when an buttons is pressed, and an OFF value is transmitted when it’s released. When set to LATCH, an ON value is transmitted when the button is pressed and that value is maintained when the button is released. The next time you press that button, the OFF value is transmitted. LEARN: This button is used to turn on and off the Learn function, which can be used to learn what MIDI messages are being transmitted by external MIDI devices when their controls or parameters are adjusted. When on, received MIDI messages are displayed in the DATA area. Only the first 16 bytes of data, starting with a Status bit, are displayed. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Using User Defined Remote Layers 219 ENCODER: These parameters are used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be transmitted when an Encoder is operated. Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel strips, and then edit as necessary. When a value from 00 to FF is specified, that value is transmitted when an Encoder is adjusted. For the ENC setting, the Encoder’s current value from 0–127 is transmitted when it’s adjusted. The END setting specifies the end of the data. NOP means no data is transmitted. LEARN: This works the same as the [ON] button Learn function above, except the received MIDI messages are displayed in the ENCODER DATA area. Only one Learn function can be used at a time. FADER: These parameters are used to specify the MIDI message (up to 16 bytes) to be transmitted when a fader is operated. Use the [SEL] buttons to select the channel strips, and then edit as necessary. When a value from 00 to FF is specified, that value is transmitted when a fader is adjusted. For the FAD setting, a fader’s current value from 0–127 is transmitted when it’s adjusted. The END setting specifies the end of the data. NOP means no data is transmitted. LEARN: This works the same as the [ON] button Learn function above, except the received MIDI messages are displayed in the FADER DATA area. Only one Learn function can be used at a time. Using User Defined Remote Layers 1 Once configured, User Defined Remote Layers can be used as follows. Use the LAYER REMOTE [1–4] buttons to select the User Defined Remote Layers. While a User Defined Remote Layer is selected, operating the channel strip faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons causes the specified MIDI data to be transmitted. When a User Defined Remote Layer is selected, the corresponding Remote page appears. Since this is the same page as that selected by the DISPLAY ACCESS [REMOTE] button, User Defined Remote Layers can be configured here as well, even the target can be changed. When a User Defined Remote Layer is selected, the channel strip displays show Remote channel strip Short names. The border of the currently selected channel’s channel strip display lights up. The Encoder displays indicate the positions of the Encoders. The settings of the channel strip faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons, and the current target and bank setting for each Remote Layer are stored in Scenes. When a Scene is recalled, if the Remote Layer’s target is the same as when the Scene was stored, the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are set accordingly and the corresponding MIDI data is transmitted (so long as the TRANSMIT parameter is set to ENABLED). If the target is not the same, the faders, Encoders, and [ON] buttons are set accordingly, but no MIDI data is transmitted. GM01 DM2000—Owner’s Manual 220 Chapter 20—Remote Control About Machine Control (MMC & P2) The DM2000 can control the transport, locate functions, track arming, and chase function of up to eight external recording machines that support the MMC or P2 control protocol. Machines can be specified as either MTR or Master and controlled independently. Machines that support the P2 protocol can be controlled by connecting them to the DM2000’s REMOTE port using a 9-pin straight cable. Wiring details are provided on page 315. The REMOTE port must be set for P2 control on the Remote Port Setup page (see page 221). Machines that support MMC can be controlled by connecting them to the DM2000’s MIDI, SERIAL, USB, or SLOT1 (with optional mLAN I/O Card installed in Slot #1). MMC and P2 protocol support varies from machine to machine. Some machines may not operate exactly as explained in this section. Configuring Machines 1 2 Up to eight machines can be configured as follows. Use the LOCATOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Machine Configuration page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. TYPE: This is used to specify the type of machine: MMC or P2. Only one machine can be set to P2. PORT: When the machine TYPE is MMC, use this parameter to specify the port for MMC communications. Available ports include: MIDI, SERIAL 1–8, USB 1–8, and SLOT1 1–8. DEVICE ID: When the machine TYPE is MMC, use this parameter to specify the device ID from 1 to 127 or ALL. The target machine must be set to the same ID. The same ID cannot be assigned to more than one SERIAL, USB, or SLOT1 port. TRANSPORT CONTROL: This parameter determines whether or not the DM2000’s transport buttons control the machine. Only one Master and one MTR machine can be enabled at a time. CHASE CONTROL: This parameter determines whether or not a Chase On/Off command is transmitted from the DM2000 to a machine when the LOCATOR [ONLINE] button is pressed. MASTER/MTR: This parameter is used to specify which machines are Masters and which are MTRs. Multiple machines can be set to Master and MTR. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Configuring the REMOTE Port 221 Configuring the REMOTE Port 1 2 If you are using the P2 protocol to control a machine, the REMOTE port must be configured as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the Remote Port Setup page. Use the cursor buttons to select the REMOTE FUNCTION P2 button, and then press [ENTER]. Transport Buttons The DM2000’s transport can be used to control external machines. Transport control can be enabled and disabled for individual machines on the Machine Configuration page (see page 220). REW FF STOP PLAY REC [REW] button This button starts rewind on the external machines. [FF] button This button starts fast forward on the external machines. [STOP] button This button stops the external machines. [PLAY] button This button starts playback on the external machines. It’s also used to punch out of recording. [REC] button This button is used in conjunction with the [PLAY] button to start recording on the external machines. Pressing the [REC] button on its own has no effect. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 222 Chapter 20—Remote Control Using Shuttle & Scrub The Parameter wheel can be used to shuttle and scrub the external machines. SHUTTLE SCRUB When the [SHUTTLE] button indicator is lit, the Parameter wheel can be used to shuttle. When the [SCRUB] button indicator is lit, the Parameter wheel can be used to scrub. Turn the Parameter wheel clockwise to shuttle/scrub forwards. Turn it counterclockwise to shuttle/scrub backwards. These buttons are mutually exclusive with the LOCATOR [QUICK PUNCH] and [LOOP] buttons. Using the Locator The LOCATOR section can be used to control the external machines. LOCATOR LOCATE MEMORY DISPLAY 1 2 AUDITION PRE RETURN TO ZERO 3 4 5 IN OUT POST ONLINE LOOP QUICK PUNCH 6 7 8 SET MTR ROLL REHEARSAL MASTER BACK LOCATE MEMORY [1–8] buttons These buttons are used to set and to locate to the eight Locate memories. Locate memories can be set on the Locate Memory page (see page 224). To set a locate memory on-the-fly, while holding down the [SET] button, press a LOCATE MEMORY [1–8] button. The DM2000 must be receiving timecode in order to do this. Once set, the stored position can be located by pressing the corresponding button. If the button is pressed while the machine is stopped, the stored position is located. If the button is pressed while the machine is playing, the stored position is located and then playback continues from that position. When using P2, locate operations are based on the control information received at the REMOTE port. In order to synchronize the MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge’s time counter, it’s recommended that you set the DM2000 to the same timecode source as the machine. • • • • [AUDITION] button This button is used in conjunction with the [PRE], [IN], [OUT], and [POST] buttons for auditioning. Its indicator lights up while auditioning is on and operation is as follows: Press the [PRE] button to locate and audition from the pre-roll point. Press the [IN] button to locate and audition from the in point. Press the [OUT] button to locate and audition from the out point. Press the [POST] button to locate and audition from the post-roll point. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Using the Locator 223 [PRE] & [POST] buttons These buttons are used to locate the pre-roll and post-roll points. If the [AUDITION] button indicator is lit, playback starts when a point is located. The pre-roll point is the in point minus the specified pre-roll time. The post-roll point is the out point plus the specified post-roll time. The pre-roll and post-roll times can be specified on the Locate Memory page (see page 224). If a button is pressed while the machine is stopped, the stored position is located. If a button is pressed while the machine is playing, the stored position is located and then playback continues from that position. [IN] & [OUT] buttons These buttons are used to set and to locate the in and out points. These points can be set on the Locate Memory page (see page 224). To set a point on-the-fly, while holding down the [SET] button, press the [IN] or [OUT] button. The DM2000 must be receiving timecode in order to do this. Once set, the stored position can be located by pressing the corresponding button. If the button is pressed while the machine is stopped, the stored position is located. If the button is pressed while the machine is playing, the stored position is located and then playback continues from that position. If the [AUDITION] button indicator is lit, playback starts when a point is located. [SET] button This button is used in conjunction with the LOCATE MEMORY [1–8], [IN], [OUT], and [RETURN TO ZERO] buttons to set the locate points. [RETURN TO ZERO] button This button is used to set and to locate the return to zero point. This point can be set on the Locate Memory page (see page 224). To set it on-the-fly, while holding down the [SET] button, press the [RETURN TO ZERO] button. The DM2000 must be receiving timecode in order to do this. Once set, the stored position can be located by pressing the [RETURN TO ZERO] button. If the button is pressed while the machine is stopped, the stored position is located. If the button is pressed while the machine is playing, the stored position is located and then playback continues from that position. [ONLINE] button This button is used to switch the external machines online and offline. Its indicator lights up when machines are online. Essentially, this turns the machine’s chase function on and off. This function can be enabled and disabled for individual machines on the Machine Configuration page (see page 220). When chase is on, the machine automatically chases its specified timecode source, and the following DM2000 controls are ineffective: transport, [SHUTTLE], [SCRUB], [PRE], [POST], [IN], [OUT], [RETURN TO ZERO], [LOOP], and [QUICK PUNCH]. [LOOP] button This button is used to turn loop playback on and off, in which playback cycles between the pre-roll and post-roll points. Its indicator lights up when loop playback is on. If Loop playback is turned on during playback, loop playback will not start until the post-roll point is reached. This button is mutually exclusive with the [QUICK PUNCH], [SHUTTLE], and [SCRUB] buttons. [QUICK PUNCH] button This button is used to turn quick punch (also known as auto punch) on and off. Its indicator lights up when quick punch is on. This button is mutually exclusive with the [LOOP], [SHUTTLE], and [SCRUB] buttons. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 224 Chapter 20—Remote Control • • When the [QUICK PUNCH] button indicator is lit, pressing the [PLAY] button will locate to the pre-roll point and start playback. At the post-roll point, the machine will stop playback, locate the pre-roll point, and then stop. When the [QUICK PUNCH] button indicator is lit, pressing the [PLAY] and [REC] buttons together will locate to the pre-roll point and start playback. At the in point, the machine switches to input monitor and starts recording. At the out point, the machine switches to playback monitor and stops recording. At the post-roll point, the machine locates the pre-roll point and then stops. If the [REHEARSAL] button indicator is lit, the machine goes into Record-Rehearsal mode between the in and out points (i.e., nothing is recorded). [ROLL BACK] button This button is used to roll back the machine by the amount specified on the Locate Memory page (see page 224). If its pressed while the machine is stopped, the machine rolls back the specified amount and stops. If its pressed during playback, the machine rolls back the specified amount and then continues playing. [REHEARSAL] button This button is used to turn Rehearsal mode on and off. Its indicator lights up when Rehearsal mode is on. In Rehearsal mode, the machine enters Record-Rehearsal mode instead of actually recording when the [PLAY] and [REC] buttons are pressed together. Rehearsal mode can also be used with quick punch. [MTR] & [MASTER] buttons These mutually exclusive buttons are used to select the MTR or Master machines for control with the LOCATOR section. When the [MTR] button indicator is lit, the LOCATOR section controls machines set to MTR. When the [MASTER] button indicator is lit, the LOCATOR section controls machines set to MASTER. See “Configuring Machines” on page 220. Setting the Locate Memories, Pre-roll, Post-roll & Roll-back 1 2 The locate points and the pre-roll, post-roll, and roll-back times can be set as follows. Use the LOCATOR [DISPLAY] button to locate the Locate Memory page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. LOCATE MEMORY 1–8, IN, OUT, and RTZ: These time values determine the points that will be located when the LOCATOR [1–8], [IN], [OUT], and [RTZ] buttons are pressed. Locate points can be specified in hours, minutes, seconds, and frames, the frame range being dependent on the frame rate setting on the Time Reference page (see page 171). DM2000—Owner’s Manual Arming Machine Tracks 225 These points can also be set on-the-fly, so long as the DM2000 is receiving timecode. To do this, while holding down the LOCATOR [SET] button, press the [1–8], [IN], [OUT], or [RTZ] button. PREROLL TIME: In conjunction with the in point, this determines the position that will be located when the LOCATOR [PRE] button is pressed. For example, if the in point is 00:01:00.00 and the pre-roll time is 5 seconds, 00:00:55.00 will be located. POSTROLL TIME: In conjunction with the out point, this determines the position that will be located when the LOCATOR [POST] button is pressed. For example, if the out point is 00:01:00.00 and the post-roll time is 5 seconds, 00:01:05.00 will be located. ROLLBACK TIME: This determines how many seconds the machines roll back from the current position when the LOCATOR [ROLL BACK] button is pressed. Arming Machine Tracks The TRACK ARMING section can be used to arm tracks on external machines. TRACK ARMING DISPLAY 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 A B C D ALL CLEAR MASTER TRACK ARMING GROUP [1–24] buttons These buttons are used to arm tracks on the external MTR and Master machines. Their indicators light up when tracks are armed. These buttons can be configured to arm any track of any machine. See “Configuring MTR Track Arming” on page 226 and “Configuring Master Track Arming” on page 226 for more information. TRACK ARMING GROUP [A–D] buttons These buttons are used to select track arming groups A, B, C, and D. The indicator of the currently selected group lights up. Track arming groups can be used only with P2 machines. See “Configuring Track Arming Groups” on page 227 for more information. [ALL CLEAR] button This button is used to clear all track arming on the external machines. [MASTER] button This button is used to select the MTR or Master machines for track arming. When its button indicator is off, the TRACK ARMING section controls machines set to MTR. When the button indicator is lit, the TRACK ARMING section controls machines set to MASTER. See “Configuring Machines” on page 220. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 226 Chapter 20—Remote Control Configuring MTR Track Arming 1 2 You can assign MTR machine tracks to the TRACK ARMING [1–24] buttons as follows. These assignments are effective only when the TRACK ARMING [MASTER] button indicator is off. Use the TRACK ARMING [DISPLAY] button to locate the MTR Track Arming Configuration page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. MACHINE: This parameter is used to specify the MTR machine whose track is to be armed when each TRACK ARMING button is pressed. Only machines configured as MTRs on the Machine Configuration page (see page 220) can be selected. TARGET TRACK: This parameter is used to specify the MTR machine track that is to be armed when each TRACK ARMING button is pressed. Configuring Master Track Arming 1 2 You can assign Master machine tracks to the TRACK ARMING [1–24] buttons as follows. These assignments are effective only when the TRACK ARMING [MASTER] button indicator is lit. Use the TRACK ARMING [DISPLAY] button to locate the Master Track Arming Configuration page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, and [ENTER] button to set them. MACHINE: This parameter is used to specify the Master machine whose track is to be armed when each TRACK ARMING button is pressed. Only machines configured as Masters on the Machine Configuration page (see page 220) can be selected. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Configuring Track Arming Groups 227 TARGET TRACK: This parameter is used to specify the Master machine track that is to be armed when each TRACK ARMING button is pressed. Configuring Track Arming Groups 1 2 Track arming groups A, B, C, and D provide a quick way to arm multiple MTR or Master machine tracks. Use the TRACK ARMING [DISPLAY] button to locate the Track Arming Group page. Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the track buttons, and use the INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to add and remove tracks from the groups. A track is in a group when its button appears highlighted, and tracks can be in multiple groups. The CLEAR buttons can be used to clear all assignments in each group. When a TRACK ARMING GROUP [A–D] button is pressed, that button’s indicator, and the button indicators of the tracks in that group light up. If one of those tracks is subsequently unarmed, or another track is armed, the TRACK ARMING GROUP [A–D] button indicator goes out. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 228 Chapter 20—Remote Control GPI (General Purpose Interface) 1 The DM2000’s CONTROL port (25-pin D-sub connector) provides a GPI (General Purpose Interface) for controlling external equipment. Pinouts are provided on page 315. The eight GPI outputs can be configured so that they output trigger signals when faders or USER DEFINED KEYS are operated. The GPI can also be used to control a “RECORDING” warning light outside a studio, or to trigger the Solo function of a Yamaha 02R Digital Recording Console. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the GPI page. The names of the parameters currently assigned to each GPI Output are displayed in the left-hand box. The parameter currently assigned to the selected GPI Output appears highlighted in the right-hand box. 2 Use the Up/Down cursor buttons to select a GPI Output. 3 Use the Parameter wheel or the INC/DEC buttons to select a function. A function is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. See the “GPI Trigger Source List” on page 261 for a complete list of assignable functions. 4 Press the [ENTER] button to assign your choice. Once assigned, the selected function appears highlighted in the right-hand box. Faders: Faders can be used to control external equipment. A FADER ON event occurs when a fader is moved up from –∞. A FADER OFF event occurs when a fader is moved down to –∞. When such an event occurs, the assigned GPI Output goes High (open) for approximately 250 msec. USER DEFINED KEYS: These buttons can be used as general-purpose triggers. For UNLATCH, when a USER DEFINED KEY is pressed, the assigned GPI Output goes High (open) for approximately 250 msec. For LATCH, when a USER DEFINED KEY is pressed, the assigned GPI Output goes High (open) and remains High until the USER DEFINED KEY is pressed again. REC LAMP: This source can be used to control a “RECORDING” warning light outside a studio. When the [REC] button indicator is lit, the assigned GPI Output goes High (open). POWER ON: While the DM2000 is powered up, the assigned GPI output is High (open). The DM2000 also features two fixed GPI inputs for use with talkback and dimmer. Each time the GPI0 input goes Low (ground), the TALKBACK button is turned on or off. Each time the GPI1 input goes Low (ground), the DIMMER button is turned on or off. Important note: GPI outputs are open collector outputs. GPI inputs have an internal pull-up to 5 V. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Controlling AD824 A/D Converters 229 Controlling AD824 A/D Converters You can control the Gain and Phantom On/Off parameters of up to 12 Yamaha AD824 A/D Converters from the DM2000 by connecting them to the DM2000’s REMOTE port using a 9-pin reversed cable. Pinouts are provided on page 315. Configuring the REMOTE Port & Assigning Slots to AD824 IDs 1 The REMOTE port can be configured, and Slots assigned to AD824 IDs as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to select the Remote Port Setup page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the REMOTE FUNCTION AD824 button, and then press [ENTER]. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the AD824 SLOT parameters, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select the Slots. The number of available IDs depends on the number of AD824s connected to the DM2000. Controlling AD824s from the DM2000 1 Connected AD824s are controlled from the AD824 Gain/Phantom Control page. Use the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [DISPLAY] button to select the AD824 Gain/Phantom Control page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the ID of the AD824 that you want to control, and then press [ENTER]. 3 Use the rotary controls to set the gain of each AD824 channel, and use the +48V buttons to turn phantom power on or off for each channel. Gain parameter settings (not Phantom) are stored in Scenes. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 230 Chapter 21—Other Functions 21 Other Functions Using the User Defined Keys USER DEFINED KEYS Up to 16 functions from a list of over 150 can be assigned to the USER DEFINED KEYS, and up to four assignment setups can be stored in banks A, B, C, and D. See page 240 for a list of initial bank assignments. Use the USER DEFINED KEYS [DISPLAY] button to locate the User defined Key Assigned page. DISPLAY 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the BANK buttons, A, B, C, and D, and press [ENTER] to select a bank. 3 Use the cursor buttons to select the Assign buttons in the left-hand box, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select a function. A function is selected when it appears inside the dotted box. See page 240 for a complete list of assignable functions. 4 Press [ENTER] to activate your selection. When you select a function that recalls a specific Scene or library memory, you need to specify the number of the memory that you want recalled when the USER DEFINED KEY is pressed. To do this, in the left-hand box, select the number parameter next to the Assign button, and use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to specify the number. You can initialize the assignments of the currently selected bank by selecting the INITIALIZE button, and pressing [ENTER]. User Defined Keys banks can be stored to an external MIDI device, such as a MIDI data filer, by using MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or stored to SmartMedia (see page 231). DM2000—Owner’s Manual Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia 231 Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia Saving 1 DM2000 Data can be saved to SmartMedia as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DATA] button to locate the Save page. 2 Insert your SmartMedia card into the CARD slot. If the card doesn’t have a “/YPE/DM2000” directory, a confirmation message appears and you should choose YES to make the directory. The LIST box displays files and directories alphabetically. Only files of the currently selected CATEGORY are displayed. All files are displayed when the CATEGORY is set to ALL. Use the cursor buttons to select the LIST box, and then use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to select files and directories. Directories have a small “D” next to their name. You can open the currently selected directory by pressing [ENTER]. To move up the directory structure, select “up,” and then press [ENTER]. You cannot move up beyond the “/YPE/DM2000” directory. The PATH box indicates the path of the currently selected file. The SmartMedia icon to the right of the PATH box indicates whether or not a SmartMedia card is inserted: “O” when a card is inserted, “X” when no card is inserted. 3 To save data, use the CATEGORY parameters to select the type of data you want to save, use the LIST box to select where you want to save the data, select the SAVE button, and then press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a filename, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. You can save data with a different name by using the SAVE AS button. When saving individual items, such as Scenes or library memories, you can use the SAVE OPTIONS APPEND and OVERWRITE to append individual memories to existing files or to overwrite them. The SAVE OPTIONS are unavailable when ALL, or SCENE MEM ALL, AUTOMIX ALL, LIBRARY ALL, BANK ALL, or PLUG IN ALL is selected. The CATEGORY parameters can be set as follows: ALL: Saves all data. SCENE MEM: Saves Scenes. You can save ALL Scenes, individual Scenes, or the Edit Buffer (i.e., the current Scene). AUTOMIX: Saves Automixes. You can save ALL Automixes, individual Automixes, or the current Automix. LIBRARY: Saves the following libraries: EQ, Gate, Comp, Channel, Effects, GEQ, Bus to Stereo, Input Patch, Output Patch, Surround Monitor. For each library you can select ALL DM2000—Owner’s Manual 232 Chapter 21—Other Functions user memories, individual user memories, and for the Bus to Stereo, Input Patch, Output Patch, Surround Monitor libraries you can also select the current settings. BANK: Saves the User Defined Remote banks, User Defined Plug-Ins banks, or the User Defined Keys banks. For each item you can select ALL or individual banks. SETUP MEM: Saves the DM2000 setup data (i.e., system settings). PGM TABLE: Saves the Scene to MIDI Program Change table. See “Assigning Scenes to Program Changes” on page 185. CTL TABLE: Saves the Parameter to MIDI Control Change table. See “Assigning Parameters to Control Changes” on page 186. PLUG-IN: Saves the settings of the effects processing cards installed in the Slots. You can save ALL Slots or individual Slots. Loading 1 DM2000 data can be loaded from SmartMedia as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DATA] button to locate the Load page. 2 Insert your SmartMedia card into the CARD slot. 3 To load data, use the buttons in the CATEGORY box to select the type of file you want to load, select a file in the LIST box, select the LOAD button, and then press [ENTER]. The FILE INFORMATION box displays the filename and the date when the currently selected file was last stored. See “Saving” on page 231 for information on the PATH and LIST boxes and the SmartMedia icon. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Saving DM2000 Data to SmartMedia 233 Managing Files & SmartMedia 1 Files stored on SmartMedia can be renamed and deleted as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [DATA] button to locate the File page. 2 Insert your SmartMedia card into the CARD slot. If the card doesn’t have a “/YPE/DM2000” directory, a confirmation message appears and you should choose YES to make the directory. The FILE INFORMATION box displays the filename and the date when the currently selected file was last stored. See “Saving” on page 231 for information on the PATH and LIST boxes and the SmartMedia icon. The STATUS box displays information about the currently inserted SmartMedia card, including, its Volume Label, total Capacity, amount of Used space, and amount of Free space. 3 To create a new directory, use the LIST box to select the directory in which you want to create the new directory, select the CREATE DIRECTORY button, and then press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a name for the new directory, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. 4 To rename a file or directory, use the LIST box to select that file or directory, select the RENAME button, and then press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, edit the name, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. 5 To delete a file or directory, use the LIST box to select that file or directory, select the DELETE button, and then press [ENTER]. 6 To format a SmartMedia card, select the FORMAT button, and press [ENTER]. When the Title Edit window appears, enter a volume label for the card, and press OK when you’ve finished. See “Title Edit Window” on page 38 for more information. The directory “/YPE/DM2000” is created automatically. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 234 Chapter 21—Other Functions Setting Preferences You can customize the operation of the DM2000 by using the preferences pages. Preferences 1 1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Preferences 1 page. 2 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the preferences, and use the INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to set them. Auto ROUTING Display: When this preference is on, the Routing pages appear automatically when a button in the SELECTED CHANNEL ROUTING section is pressed (see page 75). Auto PHASE/INSERT Display: When this preference is on, the Phase pages appear automatically when the Phase [ ] button in the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT section is pressed (see page 68), and the Insert page appears automatically when the SELECTED CHANNEL PHASE/INSERT [INSERT ON] button is pressed (see page 111). Auto DELAY Display: When this option is on, the Delay pages appear automatically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL DELAY section is operated (see page 117). Auto AUX/MATRIX Display: When this preference is on, the Aux View pages appear automatically when a SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND control is operated while an Input Channel is selected (see page 92), and the Matrix View page appears automatically when a SELECTED CHANNEL AUX/MATRIX SEND control is operated while a Bus Out, Aux Send, or the Stereo Out is selected (see page 99). Auto DYNAMICS Display: When this preference is on, the Gate Edit page appears automatically when a gate control in the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is operated (see page 69), and the Comp Edit page appears automatically when a Compressor control in the SELECTED CHANNEL DYNAMICS section is operated (see page 113). Auto PAN/SURROUND Display: When this preference is on, the Pan pages appears automatically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND section is operated (see page 76). Similarly, when a Surround Pan mode other than Stereo is selected, the Input Channel Surround Edit page appears automatically when the Joystick is operated (see page 79). Auto EQUALIZER Display: When this preference is on, the EQ Edit page appears automatically when a control in the SELECTED CHANNEL EQUALIZER section is operated (see page 109). Auto SOLO Display: When this option is on, the Solo Setup page appears automatically when an channel is soloed (see page 119). Auto WORD CLOCK Display: When this preference is on, the Word Clock Select page appears automatically if the currently selected external wordclock source fails (see page 51). DM2000—Owner’s Manual Setting Preferences 235 Auto Channel Select: When this preference is on, channels can be selected by moving the corresponding fader or Encoder, or by turning on the corresponding [AUTO], [SOLO], or [ON] button. Store Confirmation: When this preference is on, the Title Edit window appears when you store a Scene (page 159) or library memory (page 139). However, when you store an Automix library memory, the Title Edit window appears regardless of whether this preference is set to on or off. Recall Confirmation: When this preference is on, a confirmation message appears when you recall a Scene (page 159) or library memory (page 139). Patch Confirmation: When this preference is on, a confirmation message appears when you edit the Input and Output Patches (see page 61). L/R Nominal Pan: When this preference is on, left/odd and right/even signals will be at nominal level when Input Channels are panned hard left or hard right, and at –3 dB when panned center. When this preference is off, signals panned hard left or hard right will be at 3 dB, and at nominal level when panned center. Fast Meter Fall Time: When this preference is on, the level meters fall quicker. TC Drop Warning: When this preference is on, a warning message appears if a dropout is detected in the incoming timecode. DIO Warning: When this preference is on, a warning message appears if any errors are detected in digital audio signals received by the Slot Inputs or 2TR Digital Inputs. MIDI Warning: When this preference is on, a warning message appears if any errors are detected in the incoming MIDI messages. Initial Data Nominal: When this preference is on, Input Channel faders are set to nominal when Scene #0 is recalled. Meter Follow Layer: When this preference is on, the optional MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge automatically follows the Layer selection on the DM2000. Scene MEM Auto Update: When this preference is on, the Shadow Scene memories can be used (see page 158). Joystick Auto Grab: When this preference is on, the Joystick automatically kicks in as the surround pan control when it’s moved to the current surround pan position (see page 79). Cascade COMM Link: When this preference is on, various functions are linked between cascaded DM2000s (see page 58). When this preference is off, only digital audio signals are distributed among the cascaded DM2000s. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 236 Chapter 21—Other Functions Preferences 2 1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Preferences 2 page. 2 Use the cursor buttons to select the preferences, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC buttons, or [ENTER] button to set them. Channel ID/Channel: This preference setting determines how channels are represented on the channel strip displays. When the Channel ID preference is on, Channel IDs are displayed. When the Channel Short Name preference is on, Short channel names are displayed. See “Channel Names” on page 41. Port ID/Port: When the Port ID preference is on, the channel strip displays show Port IDs when the Encoders are used for patching. When the Port Short Name preference is on, they display Short Port names. See “Patching with the Encoders” on page 67. Channel Copy Parameter: These buttons allow you to choose which channel parameters are copied by the Channel Copy function: ALL parameters, or any combination of FADER, ON, PAN, SURR, AUX, AUX ON, and EQ. See “Copying Channel Settings” on page 129. Display Brightness: This preference is used to set the brightness of the fluorescent and LED displays and indicators. Fader Touch Sensitivity: This determines the touch sensitivity of the fader knobs when they are used for selecting channels. If you’re having trouble selecting channels because the fader knobs are not sensitive enough, try increasing this value. If they are too sensitive, try reducing it. It’s important that the DM2000 is grounded properly for Touch Select to work correctly. See “Grounding screw” on page 34 for more information. Date: These parameters are used to set the date and time that is applied to files when they stored to SmartMedia. Use the Parameter wheel or INC/DEC buttons to set the parameters, and then press the SET button, or press CANCEL to cancel. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Setting Preferences 237 Preferences 3 1 Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [SETUP] button to locate the Preferences 3 page. 2 Use the cursor buttons or Parameter wheel to select the preferences, and use the INC/DEC buttons or [ENTER] button to set them. Mix Update Confirmation: When this preference is on, a confirmation message asking if you want to update the current Automix with the latest edits appears when Automix recording is stopped. Auto EQ Edit In: When this preference is on, EQ is automatically punched into Automix recording when an EQ control is adjusted. Auto Inc TC Capture: When this preference is on, the Timecode Capture memory is incremented automatically each time a timecode address is captured on the Automix Event Edit page (see page 177). Link Capture & Locate Memory: When this preference is on, the eight Capture memories on the Automix Event Edit page are linked to the eight Locate memories so that, for example, edits made to Capture memory #1 are reflected on Locate memory #1, and vice versa. Show Compact Size: Automix data, except that in the Undo buffer, is compressed while recording. When this preference is on, the compressed size of the Automix is displayed on the Automix Main and Memory pages. When this preference is off, the uncompressed size is displayed. Automix Store Undo: When this preference is on, Automix Store operations can be undone by using the Undo function. Copy Initial Fader: When this preference is on, when Fader events are copied or moved on the Automix Event Copy page, the fader value at the specified IN point is copied to the specified TO point. This eliminates fader position matching problems when no fader event exists at the specified TO point. Touch Sense Control: When this preference is on, fader movements are ineffective when the touch sensors are not triggered (i.e., when fader knobs are moved by an insulated item, such as a fingernail, instead of a fingertip), allowing “cut-in” style operation. When this preference is off, fader movements are always recognized. Touch Sense Select: When this preference is on, channels can be selected simply by touching the fader knobs. Receive Full Frame Message: When this preference is on, MTC full frame messages are recognized and Automix follows them. Clear Edit Channel after REC: When this preference is on, when using Auto Rec, channels are automatically unarmed (i.e., [AUTO] buttons are turned off) when Automix recording stops. When this preference is off, channels remain armed when recording stops. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 238 Chapter 21—Other Functions Using the Oscillator 1 2 The DM2000 features an oscillator that can be used for calibration or diagnostic purposes. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button to locate the Oscillator page. Use the cursor buttons to select the parameters, and use the Parameter wheel, INC/DEC button, or [ENTER] button to set them. OSCILLATOR ON: This turns the Oscillator on or off. While the LEVEL parameter is selected, the [ENTER] button can be used to turn on and off the Oscillator. Note: To prevent any sudden tone burst surprises in your monitors or headphones, you may want to set the LEVEL parameter to minimum before turning on the oscillator. LEVEL: This sets the Oscillator output level, which is displayed by the adjacent meter. This parameter can be set by using the Parameter wheel regardless of which parameter is currently selected. WAVEFORM: These buttons are used to select the waveforms: SINE 100Hz, SINE 1kHz, SINE 10kHz, PINK NOISE, or BURST NOISE, which is 200 msec pink noise pulses at four second intervals. ASSIGN: These buttons are used to assign the Oscillator output to Bus Outs, Aux Sends, Matrix Sends, and the Stereo Out. Checking the Battery 1 The condition of the internal memory-backup battery can be checked as follows. Use the DISPLAY ACCESS [UTILITY] button to locate the Battery Check page. If the Status is “Okay,” the battery is okay. If the Status is “Getting Low,” ask your Yamaha dealer to replace the battery as soon as possible. Do not attempt to replace the battery yourself. Failure to replace a low battery may result in data loss. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Initializing the DM2000 239 Initializing the DM2000 The DM2000 can be initialized as follows. Warning: This procedure will clear all user memories and reset all settings to their initial values. You may want to back up any important data beforehand via MIDI Bulk Dump (see page 187), or to SmartMedia (see page 231). If you want to reset just the mix settings, recall scene memory #0 instead (see page 157). 1 Turn off the DM2000. 2 While holding down the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button, turn on the DM2000. 3 When the confirmation message appears, release the SCENE MEMORY [STORE] button, select YES, and press [ENTER]. The following message is displayed while initialization is in progress: “Loading Factory Presets & Calibrating the Faders... Do Not Touch the Faders!” It’s important that you do not touch the faders while this message is displayed, as the faders may not be calibrated correctly. The display returns to normal when initialization is complete. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 240 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Appendix A: Parameter Lists USER DEFINED KEYS # 0 Function No ASSIGN # Function 42 COMP Lib. Recall +1 Comp Lib+1 RCL. No Assign 43 COMP Lib. Recall –1 Comp Lib–1 RCL. COMP Lib. Recall No. XX Comp LibXXX RCL. Display Display 1 Scene MEM. Recall +1 Scene +1 Recall 44 2 Scene MEM. Recall –1 Scene –1 Recall 45 EQ Lib. Recall +1 EQ Lib+1 Recall 3 Scene MEM. Recall No. XX Scene XX Recall 46 EQ Lib. Recall –1 EQ Lib–1 Recall 4 Effect-1 Lib. Recall +1 Fx1 Lib+1 Recall 47 EQ Lib. Recall No. XX EQ LibXXX Recall 5 Effect-1 Lib. Recall –1 Fx1 Lib –1 Recall 48 GEQ1 Lib. Recall +1 GEQ1 Lib+1 RCL. 6 Effect-1 Lib. Recall No. XX Fx1 LibXXX RCL. 49 GEQ1 Lib. Recall –1 GEQ1 Lib–1 RCL. 7 Effect-2 Lib. Recall +1 Fx2 Lib+1 Recall 50 GEQ1 Lib. Recall No. XX GEQ1 LibXXX RCL. 8 Effect-2 Lib. Recall –1 Fx2 Lib–1 Recall 51 GEQ2 Lib. Recall +1 GEQ2 Lib+1 RCL. GEQ2 Lib. Recall –1 GEQ2 Lib–1 RCL. 9 Effect-2 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx2 LibXXX RCL. 52 10 Effect-3 Lib. Recall +1 Fx3 Lib+1 Recall 53 GEQ2 Lib. Recall No. XX GEQ2 LibXXX RCL. 11 Effect-3 Lib. Recall –1 Fx3 Lib–1 Recall 54 GEQ3 Lib. Recall +1 GEQ3 Lib+1 RCL. 12 Effect-3 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx3 LibXXX RCL. 55 GEQ3 Lib. Recall –1 GEQ3 Lib–1 RCL. 13 Effect-4 Lib. Recall +1 Fx4 Lib+1 Recall 56 GEQ3 Lib. Recall No. XX GEQ3 LibXXX RCL. 14 Effect-4 Lib. Recall –1 Fx4 Lib–1 Recall 57 GEQ4 Lib. Recall +1 GEQ4 Lib+1 RCL. 15 Effect-4 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx4 LibXXX RCL. 58 GEQ4 Lib. Recall –1 GEQ4 Lib–1 RCL. 16 Effect-5 Lib. Recall +1 Fx5 Lib+1 Recall 59 GEQ4 Lib. Recall No. XX GEQ4 LibXXX RCL. GEQ5 Lib. Recall +1 GEQ5 Lib+1 RCL. 17 Effect-5 Lib. Recall –1 Fx5 Lib–1 Recall 60 18 Effect-5 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx5 LibXXX RCL. 61 GEQ5 Lib. Recall –1 GEQ5 Lib–1 RCL. 19 Effect-6 Lib. Recall +1 Fx6 Lib+1 Recall 62 GEQ5 Lib. Recall No. XX GEQ5 LibXXX RCL. 20 Effect-6 Lib. Recall –1 Fx6 Lib–1 Recall 63 GEQ6 Lib. Recall +1 GEQ6 Lib+1 RCL. 21 Effect-6 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx6 LibXXX RCL. 64 GEQ6 Lib. Recall –1 GEQ6 Lib–1 RCL. 22 Effect-7 Lib. Recall +1 Fx7 Lib+1 Recall 65 GEQ6 Lib. Recall No. XX GEQ6 LibXXX RCL. 23 Effect-7 Lib. Recall –1 Fx7 Lib–1 Recall 66 GEQ-1 On/Off GEQ1 ON/OFF 24 Effect-7 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx7 LibXXX RCL. 67 GEQ-2 On/Off GEQ2 ON/OFF GEQ-3 On/Off GEQ3 ON/OFF 25 Effect-8 Lib. Recall +1 Fx8 Lib+1 Recall 68 26 Effect-8 Lib. Recall –1 Fx8 Lib–1 Recall 69 GEQ-4 On/Off GEQ4 ON/OFF 27 Effect-8 Lib. Recall No.XX Fx8 LibXXX RCL. 70 GEQ-5 On/Off GEQ5 ON/OFF 28 Effect-1 Bypass On/Off Fx1 Bypass 71 GEQ-6 On/Off GEQ6 ON/OFF 29 Effect-2 Bypass On/Off Fx2 Bypass 72 Surr.Mon L Mute 30 Effect-3 Bypass On/Off Fx3 Bypass SURR. MONI MUTE Mute L On/Off 31 Effect-4 Bypass On/Off Fx4 Bypass 73 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute R On/Off Surr.Mon R Mute 32 Effect-5 Bypass On/Off Fx5 Bypass 74 Surr.Mon Ls Mute 33 Effect-6 Bypass On/Off Fx6 Bypass SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Ls On/Off 34 Effect-7 Bypass On/Off Fx7 Bypass 75 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute Rs On/Off Surr.Mon Rs Mute 35 Effect-8 Bypass On/Off Fx8 Bypass 76 Surr.Mon C Mute 36 Channel Lib. Recall +1 CH Lib+1 Recall SURR. MONI MUTE Mute C On/Off 37 Channel Lib. Recall –1 CH Lib–1 Recall 77 SURR. MONI MUTE Mute LFE On/Off Surr.Mon LFEMute 38 Channel Lib. Recall No. XX CH LibXXX Recall 78 SURR. MONI SLOT1 ON/OFF Surr.SLOT1 ON 39 GATE Lib. Recall +1 Gate Lib+1 RCL. 79 SURR. MONI SLOT2 ON/OFF Surr.SLOT2 ON 40 GATE Lib. Recall –1 Gate Lib–1 RCL. 80 SURR. MONI SLOT3 ON/OFF Surr.SLOT3 ON 41 GATE Lib. Recall No. XX Gate LibXXX RCL. 81 SURR. MONI SLOT4 ON/OFF Surr.SLOT4 ON DM2000—Owner’s Manual USER DEFINED KEYS # Function Display 82 SURR. MONI SLOT5 ON/OFF Surr.SLOT5 ON 83 SURR. MONI SLOT6 ON/OFF Surr.SLOT6 ON 84 SURR. MONI BASS MANAGE ON/OFF Bass Manage ON 85 86 # Function 241 Display 127 Automix TAKEOVER Automix TAKEOVER 128 Automix RELATIVE Automix RELATIVE 129 Automix TOUCH SENSE Automix T.SENSE Input Fader Group Enable A IN Fader Group A 130 Overwrite FADER Overwrite FADER Input Fader Group Enable B IN Fader Group B 131 Overwrite ON Overwrite ON 87 Input Fader Group Enable C IN Fader Group C 132 Overwrite PAN Overwrite PAN 88 Input Fader Group Enable D IN Fader Group D 133 Overwrite SURROUND Overwrite SURR. 89 Input Fader Group Enable E IN Fader Group E 134 Overwrite EQ Overwrite EQ 90 Input Fader Group Enable F IN Fader Group F 135 Overwrite AUX Overwrite AUX 91 Input Fader Group Enable G IN Fader Group G 136 Overwrite AUX ON Overwrite AUX ON 92 Input Fader Group Enable H IN Fader Group H 137 Track Arming 1 ON/OFF Track Arming 1 93 Input MUTE Group Enable I IN Mute Group I 138 Track Arming 2 ON/OFF Track Arming 2 94 Input MUTE Group Enable J IN Mute Group J 139 Track Arming 3 ON/OFF Track Arming 3 95 Input MUTE Group Enable K IN Mute Group K 140 Track Arming 4 ON/OFF Track Arming 4 96 Input MUTE Group Enable L IN Mute Group L 141 Track Arming 5 ON/OFF Track Arming 5 97 Input MUTE Group Enable M IN Mute Group M 142 Track Arming 6 ON/OFF Track Arming 6 98 Input MUTE Group Enable N IN Mute Group N 143 Track Arming 7 ON/OFF Track Arming 7 99 Input MUTE Group Enable O IN Mute Group O 144 Track Arming 8 ON/OFF Track Arming 8 100 Input MUTE Group Enable P IN Mute Group P 145 Track Arming 9 ON/OFF Track Arming 9 101 Output Fader Group Enable Q OutFader Group Q 146 Track Arming 10 ON/OFF Track Arming 10 102 Output Fader Group Enable R OutFader Group R 147 Track Arming 11 ON/OFF Track Arming 11 103 Output Fader Group Enable S OutFader Group S 148 Track Arming 12 ON/OFF Track Arming 12 104 Output Fader Group Enable T OutFader Group T 149 Track Arming 13 ON/OFF Track Arming 13 105 Output MUTE Group Enable U Out Mute Group U 150 Track Arming 14 ON/OFF Track Arming 14 106 Output MUTE Group Enable V Out Mute Group V 151 Track Arming 15 ON/OFF Track Arming 15 107 Output MUTE Group Enable W Out Mute Group W 152 Track Arming 16 ON/OFF Track Arming 16 108 Output MUTE Group Enable X Out Mute Group X 153 Track Arming 17 ON/OFF Track Arming 17 109 PEAK HOLD On/Off Peak Hold 154 Track Arming 18 ON/OFF Track Arming 18 110 OSCILLATOR On/Off OSC. ON/OFF 155 Track Arming 19 ON/OFF Track Arming 19 111 SOLO Enable SOLO ENABLE 156 Track Arming 20 ON/OFF Track Arming 20 112 Input Patch Lib. Recall +1 IN Patch Lib+1 157 Track Arming 21 ON/OFF Track Arming 21 113 Input Patch Lib. Recall –1 IN Patch Lib–1 158 Track Arming 22 ON/OFF Track Arming 22 114 Input Patch Lib. Recall No. XX IN Patch LibXX 159 Track Arming 23 ON/OFF Track Arming 23 115 Output Patch Lib. Recall +1 Out Patch Lib+1 160 Track Arming 24 ON/OFF Track Arming 24 116 Output Patch Lib. Recall –1 Out Patch Lib–1 117 Output Patch Lib. Recall No. XX Out Patch LibXX 118 Channel Name ID/Short CH Name ID/Short 119 Port Name ID/Short PortNameID/Short 120 Automix REC Automix REC 121 Automix PLAY Automix PLAY 122 Automix STOP Automix STOP 123 Automix ABORT Automix ABORT 124 Automix AUTO REC Automix AUTOREC 125 Automix ENABLE Automix ENABLE 126 Automix RETURN Automix RETURN DM2000—Owner’s Manual 242 Appendix A: Parameter Lists USER DEFINED KEYS Initial Assignments # Bank A Bank B Bank C Bank D 1 SOLO ON Scene 1 Recall IN Fader Group A No Assign 2 No Assign Scene 2 Recall IN Fader Group B No Assign 3 No Assign Scene 3 Recall IN Fader Group C No Assign 4 No Assign Scene 4 Recall IN Fader Group D No Assign 5 No Assign Scene 5 Recall IN Fader Group E No Assign 6 Surr.Mon L Mute Scene 6 Recall IN Fader Group F No Assign 7 Surr.Mon C Mute Scene 7 Recall IN Fader Group G No Assign 8 Surr.Mon R Mute Scene +1 Recall IN Fader Group H No Assign IN Mute Group I No Assign 9 Bass Manage ON Scene 8 Recall 10 No Assign Scene 9 Recall IN Mute Group J No Assign 11 No Assign Scene 10 Recall IN Mute Group K No Assign 12 No Assign Scene 11 Recall IN Mute Group L No Assign 13 No Assign Scene 12 Recall IN Mute Group M No Assign 14 Surr.Mon Ls Mute Scene 13 Recall IN Mute Group N No Assign 15 Surr.Mon LFEMute Scene 14 Recall IN Mute Group O No Assign 16 Surr.Mon Rs Mute Scene –1 Recall IN Mute Group P No Assign Input Patch Parameters input Channel Inputs Port ID Input Channel insert Ins Description Port ID Internal Effects Processor Inputs Description Port ID Description NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE AD1 AD IN 1 AD1 AD IN 1 AUX1 AUX1 AD2 AD IN 2 AD2 AD IN 2 AUX2 AUX2 AD3 AD IN 3 AD3 AD IN 3 AUX3 AUX3 AD4 AD IN 4 AD4 AD IN 4 AUX4 AUX4 AD5 AD IN 5 AD5 AD IN 5 AUX5 AUX5 AD6 AD IN 6 AD6 AD IN 6 AUX6 AUX6 AD7 AD IN 7 AD7 AD IN 7 AUX7 AUX7 AD8 AD IN 8 AD8 AD IN 8 AUX8 AUX8 AD9 AD IN 9 AD9 AD IN 9 AUX9 AUX9 AD10 AD IN 10 AD10 AD IN 10 AUX10 AUX10 AD11 AD IN 11 AD11 AD IN 11 AUX11 AUX11 AD12 AD IN 12 AD12 AD IN 12 AUX12 AUX12 AD13 AD IN 13 AD13 AD IN 13 INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 AD14 AD IN 14 AD14 AD IN 14 INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 AD15 AD IN 15 AD15 AD IN 15 INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 AD16 AD IN 16 AD16 AD IN 16 INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 AD17 AD IN 17 AD17 AD IN 17 INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 AD18 AD IN 18 AD18 AD IN 18 INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 AD19 AD IN 19 AD19 AD IN 19 INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 AD20 AD IN 20 AD20 AD IN 20 INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 AD21 AD IN 21 AD21 AD IN 21 INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 AD22 AD IN 22 AD22 AD IN 22 INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 AD23 AD IN 23 AD23 AD IN 23 INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 AD24 AD IN 24 AD24 AD IN 24 INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 DM2000—Owner’s Manual Input Patch Parameters input Channel Inputs Port ID Input Channel insert Ins Description Port ID Description 243 Internal Effects Processor Inputs Port ID Description S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 S1-10 Slot1 CH10 IN S1-10 Slot1 CH10 IN INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 S1-11 Slot1 CH11 IN S1-11 Slot1 CH11 IN INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 S1-12 Slot1 CH12 IN S1-12 Slot1 CH12 IN INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 S1-13 Slot1 CH13 IN S1-13 Slot1 CH13 IN INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 S1-14 Slot1 CH14 IN S1-14 Slot1 CH14 IN INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 S1-15 Slot1 CH15 IN S1-15 Slot1 CH15 IN INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 S1-16 Slot1 CH16 IN S1-16 Slot1 CH16 IN INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36 S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37 S2-10 Slot2 CH10 IN S2-10 Slot2 CH10 IN INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38 S2-11 Slot2 CH11 IN S2-11 Slot2 CH11 IN INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39 S2-12 Slot2 CH12 IN S2-12 Slot2 CH12 IN INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40 S2-13 Slot2 CH13 IN S2-13 Slot2 CH13 IN INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41 S2-14 Slot2 CH14 IN S2-14 Slot2 CH14 IN INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42 S2-15 Slot2 CH15 IN S2-15 Slot2 CH15 IN INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43 S2-16 Slot2 CH16 IN S2-16 Slot2 CH16 IN INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44 S3-1 Slot3 CH1 IN S3-1 Slot3 CH1 IN INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45 S3-2 Slot3 CH2 IN S3-2 Slot3 CH2 IN INSCH46 InsertOut-CH46 S3-3 Slot3 CH3 IN S3-3 Slot3 CH3 IN INSCH47 InsertOut-CH47 S3-4 Slot3 CH4 IN S3-4 Slot3 CH4 IN INSCH48 InsertOut-CH48 S3-5 Slot3 CH5 IN S3-5 Slot3 CH5 IN INSCH49 InsertOut-CH49 S3-6 Slot3 CH6 IN S3-6 Slot3 CH6 IN INSCH50 InsertOut-CH50 S3-7 Slot3 CH7 IN S3-7 Slot3 CH7 IN INSCH51 InsertOut-CH51 S3-8 Slot3 CH8 IN S3-8 Slot3 CH8 IN INSCH52 InsertOut-CH52 S3-9 Slot3 CH9 IN S3-9 Slot3 CH9 IN INSCH53 InsertOut-CH53 S3-10 Slot3 CH10 IN S3-10 Slot3 CH10 IN INSCH54 InsertOut-CH54 S3-11 Slot3 CH11 IN S3-11 Slot3 CH11 IN INSCH55 InsertOut-CH55 S3-12 Slot3 CH12 IN S3-12 Slot3 CH12 IN INSCH56 InsertOut-CH56 S3-13 Slot3 CH13 IN S3-13 Slot3 CH13 IN INSCH57 InsertOut-CH57 S3-14 Slot3 CH14 IN S3-14 Slot3 CH14 IN INSCH58 InsertOut-CH58 S3-15 Slot3 CH15 IN S3-15 Slot3 CH15 IN INSCH59 InsertOut-CH59 S3-16 Slot3 CH16 IN S3-16 Slot3 CH16 IN INSCH60 InsertOut-CH60 S4-1 Slot4 CH1 IN S4-1 Slot4 CH1 IN INSCH61 InsertOut-CH61 S4-2 Slot4 CH2 IN S4-2 Slot4 CH2 IN INSCH62 InsertOut-CH62 S4-3 Slot4 CH3 IN S4-3 Slot4 CH3 IN INSCH63 InsertOut-CH63 S4-4 Slot4 CH4 IN S4-4 Slot4 CH4 IN INSCH64 InsertOut-CH64 S4-5 Slot4 CH5 IN S4-5 Slot4 CH5 IN INSCH65 InsertOut-CH65 S4-6 Slot4 CH6 IN S4-6 Slot4 CH6 IN INSCH66 InsertOut-CH66 DM2000—Owner’s Manual 244 Appendix A: Parameter Lists input Channel Inputs Port ID Input Channel insert Ins Description Port ID Description Internal Effects Processor Inputs Port ID Description S4-7 Slot4 CH7 IN S4-7 Slot4 CH7 IN INSCH67 InsertOut-CH67 S4-8 Slot4 CH8 IN S4-8 Slot4 CH8 IN INSCH68 InsertOut-CH68 S4-9 Slot4 CH9 IN S4-9 Slot4 CH9 IN INSCH69 InsertOut-CH69 S4-10 Slot4 CH10 IN S4-10 Slot4 CH10 IN INSCH70 InsertOut-CH70 S4-11 Slot4 CH11 IN S4-11 Slot4 CH11 IN INSCH71 InsertOut-CH71 S4-12 Slot4 CH12 IN S4-12 Slot4 CH12 IN INSCH72 InsertOut-CH72 S4-13 Slot4 CH13 IN S4-13 Slot4 CH13 IN INSCH73 InsertOut-CH73 S4-14 Slot4 CH14 IN S4-14 Slot4 CH14 IN INSCH74 InsertOut-CH74 S4-15 Slot4 CH15 IN S4-15 Slot4 CH15 IN INSCH75 InsertOut-CH75 S4-16 Slot4 CH16 IN S4-16 Slot4 CH16 IN INSCH76 InsertOut-CH76 S5-1 Slot5 CH1 IN S5-1 Slot5 CH1 IN INSCH77 InsertOut-CH77 S5-2 Slot5 CH2 IN S5-2 Slot5 CH2 IN INSCH78 InsertOut-CH78 S5-3 Slot5 CH3 IN S5-3 Slot5 CH3 IN INSCH79 InsertOut-CH79 S5-4 Slot5 CH4 IN S5-4 Slot5 CH4 IN INSCH80 InsertOut-CH80 S5-5 Slot5 CH5 IN S5-5 Slot5 CH5 IN INSCH81 InsertOut-CH81 S5-6 Slot5 CH6 IN S5-6 Slot5 CH6 IN INSCH82 InsertOut-CH82 S5-7 Slot5 CH7 IN S5-7 Slot5 CH7 IN INSCH83 InsertOut-CH83 S5-8 Slot5 CH8 IN S5-8 Slot5 CH8 IN INSCH84 InsertOut-CH84 S5-9 Slot5 CH9 IN S5-9 Slot5 CH9 IN INSCH85 InsertOut-CH85 S5-10 Slot5 CH10 IN S5-10 Slot5 CH10 IN INSCH86 InsertOut-CH86 S5-11 Slot5 CH11 IN S5-11 Slot5 CH11 IN INSCH87 InsertOut-CH87 S5-12 Slot5 CH12 IN S5-12 Slot5 CH12 IN INSCH88 InsertOut-CH88 S5-13 Slot5 CH13 IN S5-13 Slot5 CH13 IN INSCH89 InsertOut-CH89 S5-14 Slot5 CH14 IN S5-14 Slot5 CH14 IN INSCH90 InsertOut-CH90 S5-15 Slot5 CH15 IN S5-15 Slot5 CH15 IN INSCH91 InsertOut-CH91 S5-16 Slot5 CH16 IN S5-16 Slot5 CH16 IN INSCH92 InsertOut-CH92 S6-1 Slot6 CH1 IN S6-1 Slot6 CH1 IN INSCH93 InsertOut-CH93 S6-2 Slot6 CH2 IN S6-2 Slot6 CH2 IN INSCH94 InsertOut-CH94 S6-3 Slot6 CH3 IN S6-3 Slot6 CH3 IN INSCH95 InsertOut-CH95 S6-4 Slot6 CH4 IN S6-4 Slot6 CH4 IN INSCH96 InsertOut-CH96 S6-5 Slot6 CH5 IN S6-5 Slot6 CH5 IN INSBUS1 InsertOut-BUS1 S6-6 Slot6 CH6 IN S6-6 Slot6 CH6 IN INSBUS2 InsertOut-BUS2 S6-7 Slot6 CH7 IN S6-7 Slot6 CH7 IN INSBUS3 InsertOut-BUS3 S6-8 Slot6 CH8 IN S6-8 Slot6 CH8 IN INSBUS4 InsertOut-BUS4 S6-9 Slot6 CH9 IN S6-9 Slot6 CH9 IN INSBUS5 InsertOut-BUS5 S6-10 Slot6 CH10 IN S6-10 Slot6 CH10 IN INSBUS6 InsertOut-BUS6 S6-11 Slot6 CH11 IN S6-11 Slot6 CH11 IN INSBUS7 InsertOut-BUS7 S6-12 Slot6 CH12 IN S6-12 Slot6 CH12 IN INSBUS8 InsertOut-BUS8 S6-13 Slot6 CH13 IN S6-13 Slot6 CH13 IN INSAUX1 InsertOut-AUX1 S6-14 Slot6 CH14 IN S6-14 Slot6 CH14 IN INSAUX2 InsertOut-AUX2 S6-15 Slot6 CH15 IN S6-15 Slot6 CH15 IN INSAUX3 InsertOut-AUX3 S6-16 Slot6 CH16 IN S6-16 Slot6 CH16 IN INSAUX4 InsertOut-AUX4 FX1-1 Effect1 OUT 1 FX1-1 Effect1 OUT 1 INSAUX5 InsertOut-AUX5 FX1-2 Effect1 OUT 2 FX1-2 Effect1 OUT 2 INSAUX6 InsertOut-AUX6 FX1-3 Effect1 OUT 3 FX1-3 Effect1 OUT 3 INSAUX7 InsertOut-AUX7 FX1-4 Effect1 OUT 4 FX1-4 Effect1 OUT 4 INSAUX8 InsertOut-AUX8 FX1-5 Effect1 OUT 5 FX1-5 Effect1 OUT 5 INSAUX9 InsertOut-AUX9 FX1-6 Effect1 OUT 6 FX1-6 Effect1 OUT 6 INSAUX10 InsertOut-AUX10 FX1-7 Effect1 OUT 7 FX1-7 Effect1 OUT 7 INSAUX11 InsertOut-AUX11 FX1-8 Effect1 OUT 8 FX1-8 Effect1 OUT 8 INSAUX12 InsertOut-AUX12 FX2-1 Effect2 OUT 1 FX2-1 Effect2 OUT 1 INSMTX1L InsertOut-MTX1L DM2000—Owner’s Manual 245 Input Patch Parameters input Channel Inputs Port ID Description Input Channel insert Ins Port ID Description Internal Effects Processor Inputs Port ID Description FX2-2 Effect2 OUT 2 FX2-2 Effect2 OUT 2 INSMTX1R InsertOut-MTX1R FX2-3 Effect2 OUT 3 FX2-3 Effect2 OUT 3 INSMTX2L InsertOut-MTX2L FX2-4 Effect2 OUT 4 FX2-4 Effect2 OUT 4 INSMTX2R InsertOut-MTX2R FX2-5 Effect2 OUT 5 FX2-5 Effect2 OUT 5 INSMTX3L InsertOut-MTX3L FX2-6 Effect2 OUT 6 FX2-6 Effect2 OUT 6 INSMTX3R InsertOut-MTX3R FX2-7 Effect2 OUT 7 FX2-7 Effect2 OUT 7 INSMTX4L InsertOut-MTX4L FX2-8 Effect2 OUT 8 FX2-8 Effect2 OUT 8 INSMTX4R InsertOut-MTX4R FX3-1 Effect3 OUT 1 FX3-1 Effect3 OUT 1 INSSTL InsertOut-STL FX3-2 Effect3 OUT 2 FX3-2 Effect3 OUT 2 INSSTR InsertOut-STR FX4-1 Effect4 OUT 1 FX4-1 Effect4 OUT 1 FX1-1 Effect1 OUT 1 FX4-2 Effect4 OUT 2 FX4-2 Effect4 OUT 2 FX1-2 Effect1 OUT 2 FX5-1 Effect5 OUT 1 FX5-1 Effect5 OUT 1 FX2-1 Effect2 OUT 1 FX5-2 Effect5 OUT 2 FX5-2 Effect5 OUT 2 FX2-2 Effect2 OUT 2 FX6-1 Effect6 OUT 1 FX6-1 Effect6 OUT 1 FX3-1 Effect3 OUT 1 FX6-2 Effect6 OUT 2 FX6-2 Effect6 OUT 2 FX3-2 Effect3 OUT 2 FX7-1 Effect7 OUT 1 FX7-1 Effect7 OUT 1 FX4-1 Effect4 OUT 1 FX7-2 Effect7 OUT 2 FX7-2 Effect7 OUT 2 FX4-2 Effect4 OUT 2 FX8-1 Effect8 OUT 1 FX8-1 Effect8 OUT 1 FX5-1 Effect5 OUT 1 FX8-2 Effect8 OUT 2 FX8-2 Effect8 OUT 2 FX5-2 Effect5 OUT 2 2TD1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L 2TD1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L FX6-1 Effect6 OUT 1 2TD1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R 2TD1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R FX6-2 Effect6 OUT 2 2TD2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L 2TD2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L FX7-1 Effect7 OUT 1 2TD2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R 2TD2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R FX7-2 Effect7 OUT 2 2TD3L 2TR IN Dig.3 L 2TD3L 2TR IN Dig.3 L FX8-1 Effect8 OUT 1 2TD3R 2TR IN Dig.3 R 2TD3R 2TR IN Dig.3 R FX8-2 Effect8 OUT 2 2TA1L 2TR IN Analog1 L 2TA1L 2TR IN Analog1 L — — 2TA1R 2TR IN Analog1 R 2TA1R 2TR IN Analog1 R — — 2TA2L 2TR IN Analog2 L 2TA2L 2TR IN Analog2 L — — 2TA2R 2TR IN Analog2 R 2TA2R 2TR IN Analog2 R — — BUS1 BUS1 — — — — BUS2 BUS2 — — — — BUS3 BUS3 — — — — BUS4 BUS4 — — — — BUS5 BUS5 — — — — BUS6 BUS6 — — — — BUS7 BUS7 — — — — BUS8 BUS8 — — — — AUX1 AUX1 — — — — AUX2 AUX2 — — — — AUX3 AUX3 — — — — AUX4 AUX4 — — — — AUX5 AUX5 — — — — AUX6 AUX6 — — — — AUX7 AUX7 — — — — AUX8 AUX8 — — — — AUX9 AUX9 — — — — AUX10 AUX10 — — — — AUX11 AUX11 — — — — AUX12 AUX12 — — — — DM2000—Owner’s Manual 246 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Initial Input Patch Settings Input Channel Inputs Ch # Source Ch # Source Effects Processors inputs # Source 1 AD01 49 S4-01 1-1 AUX1 2 AD02 50 S4-02 1-2 NONE 3 AD03 51 S4-03 1-3 NONE 4 AD04 52 S4-04 1-4 NONE 5 AD05 53 S4-05 1-5 NONE 6 AD06 54 S4-06 1-6 NONE 7 AD07 55 S4-07 1-7 NONE 8 AD08 56 S4-08 1-8 NONE 9 AD09 57 S5-01 2-1 AUX2 10 AD10 58 S5-02 2-2 NONE 11 AD11 59 S5-03 2-3 NONE 12 AD12 60 S5-04 2-4 NONE 13 AD13 61 S5-05 2-5 NONE 14 AD14 62 S5-06 2-6 NONE 15 AD15 63 S5-07 2-7 NONE 16 AD16 64 S5-08 2-8 NONE 17 AD17 65 S6-01 3-1 AUX3 18 AD18 66 S6-02 3-2 NONE 19 AD19 67 S6-03 4-1 AUX4 20 AD20 68 S6-04 4-2 NONE 21 AD21 69 S6-05 5-1 AUX5 22 AD22 70 S6-06 5-2 NONE 23 AD23 71 S6-07 6-1 AUX6 24 AD24 72 S6-08 6-2 NONE 25 S1-01 73 FX1-1 7-1 AUX7 26 S1-02 74 FX1-2 7-2 NONE 27 S1-03 75 FX2-1 8-1 AUX8 28 S1-04 76 FX2-2 8-2 NONE 29 S1-05 77 FX3-1 30 S1-06 78 FX3-2 31 S1-07 79 FX4-1 32 S1-08 80 FX4-2 33 S2-01 81 FX5-1 34 S2-02 82 FX5-2 35 S2-03 83 FX6-1 36 S2-04 84 FX6-2 37 S2-05 85 FX7-1 38 S2-06 86 FX7-2 39 S2-07 87 FX8-1 40 S2-08 88 FX8-2 41 S3-01 89 2TD1L 42 S3-02 90 2TD1R 43 S3-03 91 2TD2L 44 S3-04 92 2TD2R 45 S3-05 93 2TA1L 46 S3-06 94 2TA1R 47 S3-07 95 2TA2L 48 S3-08 96 2TA2R DM2000—Owner’s Manual Output Patch Parameters 247 Output Patch Parameters Output patch parameters are split into two tables. The first table contains parameters for the Slot Outputs, Omni Outs, and Output Channel Insert Ins. The second table, Direct Outs, 2TR Digital Outputs, and the GEQs. Output Patch Table 1 Slot Outputs Source Omni Outs Description Source Output Channel Insert Ins Description Source Description NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE BUS1 BUS1 BUS1 BUS1 AD1 AD IN 1 BUS2 BUS2 BUS2 BUS2 AD2 AD IN 2 BUS3 BUS3 BUS3 BUS3 AD3 AD IN 3 BUS4 BUS4 BUS4 BUS4 AD4 AD IN 4 BUS5 BUS5 BUS5 BUS5 AD5 AD IN 5 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 AD6 AD IN 6 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 AD7 AD IN 7 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 AD8 AD IN 8 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AD9 AD IN 9 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AD10 AD IN 10 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AD11 AD IN 11 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AD12 AD IN 12 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AD13 AD IN 13 AUX6 AUX6 AUX6 AUX6 AD14 AD IN 14 AUX7 AUX7 AUX7 AUX7 AD15 AD IN 15 AUX8 AUX8 AUX8 AUX8 AD16 AD IN 16 AUX9 AUX9 AUX9 AUX9 AD17 AD IN 17 AUX10 AUX10 AUX10 AUX10 AD18 AD IN 18 AUX11 AUX11 AUX11 AUX11 AD19 AD IN 19 AUX12 AUX12 AUX12 AUX12 AD20 AD IN 20 MATRIX1L MATRIX1 L MATRIX1L MATRIX1 L AD21 AD IN 21 MATRIX1R MATRIX1 R MATRIX1R MATRIX1 R AD22 AD IN 22 MATRIX2L MATRIX2 L MATRIX2L MATRIX2 L AD23 AD IN 23 MATRIX2R MATRIX2 R MATRIX2R MATRIX2 R AD24 AD IN 24 MATRIX3L MATRIX3 L MATRIX3L MATRIX3 L S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN MATRIX3R MATRIX3 R MATRIX3R MATRIX3 R S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN MATRIX4L MATRIX4 L MATRIX4L MATRIX4 L S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN MATRIX4R MATRIX4 R MATRIX4R MATRIX4 R S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN STEREO-L STEREO L STEREO-L STEREO L S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN STEREO-R STEREO R STEREO-R STEREO R S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 S1-10 Slot1 CH10 IN INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 S1-11 Slot1 CH11 IN INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 S1-12 Slot1 CH12 IN INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 S1-13 Slot1 CH13 IN INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 S1-14 Slot1 CH14 IN INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 S1-15 Slot1 CH15 IN INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 S1-16 Slot1 CH16 IN INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN DM2000—Owner’s Manual 248 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Slot Outputs Source Description Omni Outs Source Output Channel Insert Ins Description Source Description INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 S2-10 Slot2 CH10 IN INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 S2-11 Slot2 CH11 IN INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 S2-12 Slot2 CH12 IN INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 S2-13 Slot2 CH13 IN INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 S2-14 Slot2 CH14 IN INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 S2-15 Slot2 CH15 IN INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 S2-16 Slot2 CH16 IN INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 S3-1 Slot3 CH1 IN INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 S3-2 Slot3 CH2 IN INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 S3-3 Slot3 CH3 IN INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 S3-4 Slot3 CH4 IN INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 S3-5 Slot3 CH5 IN INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 S3-6 Slot3 CH6 IN INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 S3-7 Slot3 CH7 IN INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 S3-8 Slot3 CH8 IN INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 S3-9 Slot3 CH9 IN INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36 INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36 S3-10 Slot3 CH10 IN INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37 INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37 S3-11 Slot3 CH11 IN INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38 INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38 S3-12 Slot3 CH12 IN INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39 INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39 S3-13 Slot3 CH13 IN INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40 INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40 S3-14 Slot3 CH14 IN INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41 INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41 S3-15 Slot3 CH15 IN INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42 INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42 S3-16 Slot3 CH16 IN INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43 INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43 S4-1 Slot4 CH1 IN INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44 INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44 S4-2 Slot4 CH2 IN INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45 INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45 S4-3 Slot4 CH3 IN INSCH46 InsertOut-CH46 INSCH46 InsertOut-CH46 S4-4 Slot4 CH4 IN INSCH47 InsertOut-CH47 INSCH47 InsertOut-CH47 S4-5 Slot4 CH5 IN INSCH48 InsertOut-CH48 INSCH48 InsertOut-CH48 S4-6 Slot4 CH6 IN INSCH49 InsertOut-CH49 INSCH49 InsertOut-CH49 S4-7 Slot4 CH7 IN INSCH50 InsertOut-CH50 INSCH50 InsertOut-CH50 S4-8 Slot4 CH8 IN INSCH51 InsertOut-CH51 INSCH51 InsertOut-CH51 S4-9 Slot4 CH9 IN INSCH52 InsertOut-CH52 INSCH52 InsertOut-CH52 S4-10 Slot4 CH10 IN INSCH53 InsertOut-CH53 INSCH53 InsertOut-CH53 S4-11 Slot4 CH11 IN INSCH54 InsertOut-CH54 INSCH54 InsertOut-CH54 S4-12 Slot4 CH12 IN INSCH55 InsertOut-CH55 INSCH55 InsertOut-CH55 S4-13 Slot4 CH13 IN INSCH56 InsertOut-CH56 INSCH56 InsertOut-CH56 S4-14 Slot4 CH14 IN INSCH57 InsertOut-CH57 INSCH57 InsertOut-CH57 S4-15 Slot4 CH15 IN INSCH58 InsertOut-CH58 INSCH58 InsertOut-CH58 S4-16 Slot4 CH16 IN INSCH59 InsertOut-CH59 INSCH59 InsertOut-CH59 S5-1 Slot5 CH1 IN INSCH60 InsertOut-CH60 INSCH60 InsertOut-CH60 S5-2 Slot5 CH2 IN INSCH61 InsertOut-CH61 INSCH61 InsertOut-CH61 S5-3 Slot5 CH3 IN INSCH62 InsertOut-CH62 INSCH62 InsertOut-CH62 S5-4 Slot5 CH4 IN INSCH63 InsertOut-CH63 INSCH63 InsertOut-CH63 S5-5 Slot5 CH5 IN INSCH64 InsertOut-CH64 INSCH64 InsertOut-CH64 S5-6 Slot5 CH6 IN DM2000—Owner’s Manual Output Patch Parameters Slot Outputs Source Description Omni Outs Source 249 Output Channel Insert Ins Description Source Description INSCH65 InsertOut-CH65 INSCH65 InsertOut-CH65 S5-7 Slot5 CH7 IN INSCH66 InsertOut-CH66 INSCH66 InsertOut-CH66 S5-8 Slot5 CH8 IN INSCH67 InsertOut-CH67 INSCH67 InsertOut-CH67 S5-9 Slot5 CH9 IN INSCH68 InsertOut-CH68 INSCH68 InsertOut-CH68 S5-10 Slot5 CH10 IN INSCH69 InsertOut-CH69 INSCH69 InsertOut-CH69 S5-11 Slot5 CH11 IN INSCH70 InsertOut-CH70 INSCH70 InsertOut-CH70 S5-12 Slot5 CH12 IN INSCH71 InsertOut-CH71 INSCH71 InsertOut-CH71 S5-13 Slot5 CH13 IN INSCH72 InsertOut-CH72 INSCH72 InsertOut-CH72 S5-14 Slot5 CH14 IN INSCH73 InsertOut-CH73 INSCH73 InsertOut-CH73 S5-15 Slot5 CH15 IN INSCH74 InsertOut-CH74 INSCH74 InsertOut-CH74 S5-16 Slot5 CH16 IN INSCH75 InsertOut-CH75 INSCH75 InsertOut-CH75 S6-1 Slot6 CH1 IN INSCH76 InsertOut-CH76 INSCH76 InsertOut-CH76 S6-2 Slot6 CH2 IN INSCH77 InsertOut-CH77 INSCH77 InsertOut-CH77 S6-3 Slot6 CH3 IN INSCH78 InsertOut-CH78 INSCH78 InsertOut-CH78 S6-4 Slot6 CH4 IN INSCH79 InsertOut-CH79 INSCH79 InsertOut-CH79 S6-5 Slot6 CH5 IN INSCH80 InsertOut-CH80 INSCH80 InsertOut-CH80 S6-6 Slot6 CH6 IN INSCH81 InsertOut-CH81 INSCH81 InsertOut-CH81 S6-7 Slot6 CH7 IN INSCH82 InsertOut-CH82 INSCH82 InsertOut-CH82 S6-8 Slot6 CH8 IN INSCH83 InsertOut-CH83 INSCH83 InsertOut-CH83 S6-9 Slot6 CH9 IN INSCH84 InsertOut-CH84 INSCH84 InsertOut-CH84 S6-10 Slot6 CH10 IN INSCH85 InsertOut-CH85 INSCH85 InsertOut-CH85 S6-11 Slot6 CH11 IN INSCH86 InsertOut-CH86 INSCH86 InsertOut-CH86 S6-12 Slot6 CH12 IN INSCH87 InsertOut-CH87 INSCH87 InsertOut-CH87 S6-13 Slot6 CH13 IN INSCH88 InsertOut-CH88 INSCH88 InsertOut-CH88 S6-14 Slot6 CH14 IN INSCH89 InsertOut-CH89 INSCH89 InsertOut-CH89 S6-15 Slot6 CH15 IN INSCH90 InsertOut-CH90 INSCH90 InsertOut-CH90 S6-16 Slot6 CH16 IN INSCH91 InsertOut-CH91 INSCH91 InsertOut-CH91 FX1-1 Effect1 OUT 1 INSCH92 InsertOut-CH92 INSCH92 InsertOut-CH92 FX1-2 Effect1 OUT 2 INSCH93 InsertOut-CH93 INSCH93 InsertOut-CH93 FX1-3 Effect1 OUT 3 INSCH94 InsertOut-CH94 INSCH94 InsertOut-CH94 FX1-4 Effect1 OUT 4 INSCH95 InsertOut-CH95 INSCH95 InsertOut-CH95 FX1-5 Effect1 OUT 5 INSCH96 InsertOut-CH96 INSCH96 InsertOut-CH96 FX1-6 Effect1 OUT 6 INSBUS1 InsertOut-BUS1 INSBUS1 InsertOut-BUS1 FX1-7 Effect1 OUT 7 INSBUS2 InsertOut-BUS2 INSBUS2 InsertOut-BUS2 FX1-8 Effect1 OUT 8 INSBUS3 InsertOut-BUS3 INSBUS3 InsertOut-BUS3 FX2-1 Effect2 OUT 1 INSBUS4 InsertOut-BUS4 INSBUS4 InsertOut-BUS4 FX2-2 Effect2 OUT 2 INSBUS5 InsertOut-BUS5 INSBUS5 InsertOut-BUS5 FX2-3 Effect2 OUT 3 INSBUS6 InsertOut-BUS6 INSBUS6 InsertOut-BUS6 FX2-4 Effect2 OUT 4 INSBUS7 InsertOut-BUS7 INSBUS7 InsertOut-BUS7 FX2-5 Effect2 OUT 5 INSBUS8 InsertOut-BUS8 INSBUS8 InsertOut-BUS8 FX2-6 Effect2 OUT 6 INSAUX1 InsertOut-AUX1 INSAUX1 InsertOut-AUX1 FX2-7 Effect2 OUT 7 INSAUX2 InsertOut-AUX2 INSAUX2 InsertOut-AUX2 FX2-8 Effect2 OUT 8 INSAUX3 InsertOut-AUX3 INSAUX3 InsertOut-AUX3 FX3-1 Effect3 OUT 1 INSAUX4 InsertOut-AUX4 INSAUX4 InsertOut-AUX4 FX3-2 Effect3 OUT 2 INSAUX5 InsertOut-AUX5 INSAUX5 InsertOut-AUX5 FX4-1 Effect4 OUT 1 INSAUX6 InsertOut-AUX6 INSAUX6 InsertOut-AUX6 FX4-2 Effect4 OUT 2 INSAUX7 InsertOut-AUX7 INSAUX7 InsertOut-AUX7 FX5-1 Effect5 OUT 1 INSAUX8 InsertOut-AUX8 INSAUX8 InsertOut-AUX8 FX5-2 Effect5 OUT 2 INSAUX9 InsertOut-AUX9 INSAUX9 InsertOut-AUX9 FX6-1 Effect6 OUT 1 INSAUX10 InsertOut-AUX10 INSAUX10 InsertOut-AUX10 FX6-2 Effect6 OUT 2 INSAUX11 InsertOut-AUX11 INSAUX11 InsertOut-AUX11 FX7-1 Effect7 OUT 1 DM2000—Owner’s Manual 250 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Slot Outputs Source INSAUX12 Omni Outs Description InsertOut-AUX12 Source INSAUX12 Output Channel Insert Ins Description InsertOut-AUX12 Source FX7-2 Description Effect7 OUT 2 INSMTX1L InsertOut-MTX1L INSMTX1L InsertOut-MTX1L FX8-1 Effect8 OUT 1 INSMTX1R InsertOut-MTX1R INSMTX1R InsertOut-MTX1R FX8-2 Effect8 OUT 2 INSMTX2L InsertOut-MTX2L INSMTX2L InsertOut-MTX2L 2TD1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L INSMTX2R InsertOut-MTX2R INSMTX2R InsertOut-MTX2R 2TD1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R INSMTX3L InsertOut-MTX3L INSMTX3L InsertOut-MTX3L 2TD2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L INSMTX3R InsertOut-MTX3R INSMTX3R InsertOut-MTX3R 2TD2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R INSMTX4L InsertOut-MTX4L INSMTX4L InsertOut-MTX4L 2TD3L 2TR IN Dig.3 L INSMTX4R InsertOut-MTX4R INSMTX4R InsertOut-MTX4R 2TD3R 2TR IN Dig.3 R INSSTL InsertOut-STL INSSTL InsertOut-STL 2TA1L 2TR IN Analog1 L INSSTR InsertOut-STR INSSTR InsertOut-STR 2TA1R 2TR IN Analog1 R Surr L Surround Monitor L Surr L Surround Monitor L 2TA2L 2TR IN Analog2 L Surr R Surround Monitor R Surr R Surround Monitor R 2TA2R 2TR IN Analog2 R Surr Ls Surround Monitor Ls Surr Ls Surround Monitor Ls — — Surr Rs Surround Monitor Rs Surr Rs Surround Monitor Rs — — Surr C Surround Monitor C Surr C Surround Monitor C — — Surr LFE Surround Monitor LFE Surr LFE Surround Monitor LFE — — Surr Ls2 Surround Monitor Ls2 Surr Ls2 Surround Monitor Ls2 — — Surr Rs2 Surround Monitor Rs2 Surr Rs2 Surround Monitor Rs2 — — DM2000—Owner’s Manual 251 Output Patch Parameters Output Patch Table 2 Direct Outs Source 2TR Digital Outs Description Source GEQs Description Source Description NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE S1-1 Slot1 CH1 OUT BUS1 BUS1 BUS1 BUS1 S1-2 Slot1 CH2 OUT BUS2 BUS2 BUS2 BUS2 S1-3 Slot1 CH3 OUT BUS3 BUS3 BUS3 BUS3 S1-4 Slot1 CH4 OUT BUS4 BUS4 BUS4 BUS4 S1-5 Slot1 CH5 OUT BUS5 BUS5 BUS5 BUS5 S1-6 Slot1 CH6 OUT BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 S1-7 Slot1 CH7 OUT BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 S1-8 Slot1 CH8 OUT BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 S1-9 Slot1 CH9 OUT AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 S1-10 Slot1 CH10 OUT AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 S1-11 Slot1 CH11 OUT AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 S1-12 Slot1 CH12 OUT AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 S1-13 Slot1 CH13 OUT AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 S1-14 Slot1 CH14 OUT AUX6 AUX6 AUX6 AUX6 S1-15 Slot1 CH15 OUT AUX7 AUX7 AUX7 AUX7 S1-16 Slot1 CH16 OUT AUX8 AUX8 AUX8 AUX8 S2-1 Slot2 CH1 OUT AUX9 AUX9 AUX9 AUX9 S2-2 Slot2 CH2 OUT AUX10 AUX10 AUX10 AUX10 S2-3 Slot2 CH3 OUT AUX11 AUX11 AUX11 AUX11 S2-4 Slot2 CH4 OUT AUX12 AUX12 AUX12 AUX12 S2-5 Slot2 CH5 OUT MATRIX1L MATRIX1 L MATRIX1L MATRIX1 L S2-6 Slot2 CH6 OUT MATRIX1R MATRIX1 R MATRIX1R MATRIX1 R S2-7 Slot2 CH7 OUT MATRIX2L MATRIX2 L MATRIX2L MATRIX2 L S2-8 Slot2 CH8 OUT MATRIX2R MATRIX2 R MATRIX2R MATRIX2 R S2-9 Slot2 CH9 OUT MATRIX3L MATRIX3 L MATRIX3L MATRIX3 L S2-10 Slot2 CH10 OUT MATRIX3R MATRIX3 R MATRIX3R MATRIX3 R S2-11 Slot2 CH11 OUT MATRIX4L MATRIX4 L MATRIX4L MATRIX4 L S2-12 Slot2 CH12 OUT MATRIX4R MATRIX4 R MATRIX4R MATRIX4 R S2-13 Slot2 CH13 OUT STEREO-L STEREO L STEREO-L STEREO L S2-14 Slot2 CH14 OUT STEREO-R STEREO R STEREO-R STEREO R S2-15 Slot2 CH15 OUT INSCH1 InsertOut-CH1 — — S2-16 Slot2 CH16 OUT INSCH2 InsertOut-CH2 — — S3-1 Slot3 CH1 OUT INSCH3 InsertOut-CH3 — — S3-2 Slot3 CH2 OUT INSCH4 InsertOut-CH4 — — S3-3 Slot3 CH3 OUT INSCH5 InsertOut-CH5 — — S3-4 Slot3 CH4 OUT INSCH6 InsertOut-CH6 — — S3-5 Slot3 CH5 OUT INSCH7 InsertOut-CH7 — — S3-6 Slot3 CH6 OUT INSCH8 InsertOut-CH8 — — S3-7 Slot3 CH7 OUT INSCH9 InsertOut-CH9 — — S3-8 Slot3 CH8 OUT INSCH10 InsertOut-CH10 — — S3-9 Slot3 CH9 OUT INSCH11 InsertOut-CH11 — — S3-10 Slot3 CH10 OUT INSCH12 InsertOut-CH12 — — S3-11 Slot3 CH11 OUT INSCH13 InsertOut-CH13 — — S3-12 Slot3 CH12 OUT INSCH14 InsertOut-CH14 — — S3-13 Slot3 CH13 OUT INSCH15 InsertOut-CH15 — — S3-14 Slot3 CH14 OUT INSCH16 InsertOut-CH16 — — S3-15 Slot3 CH15 OUT INSCH17 InsertOut-CH17 — — S3-16 Slot3 CH16 OUT INSCH18 InsertOut-CH18 — — S4-1 Slot4 CH1 OUT INSCH19 InsertOut-CH19 — — DM2000—Owner’s Manual 252 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Direct Outs Source Description 2TR Digital Outs Source Description S4-2 Slot4 CH2 OUT INSCH20 InsertOut-CH20 — — S4-3 Slot4 CH3 OUT INSCH21 InsertOut-CH21 — — S4-4 Slot4 CH4 OUT INSCH22 InsertOut-CH22 — — S4-5 Slot4 CH5 OUT INSCH23 InsertOut-CH23 — — S4-6 Slot4 CH6 OUT INSCH24 InsertOut-CH24 — — S4-7 Slot4 CH7 OUT INSCH25 InsertOut-CH25 — — S4-8 Slot4 CH8 OUT INSCH26 InsertOut-CH26 — — S4-9 Slot4 CH9 OUT INSCH27 InsertOut-CH27 — — S4-10 Slot4 CH10 OUT INSCH28 InsertOut-CH28 — — S4-11 Slot4 CH11 OUT INSCH29 InsertOut-CH29 — — S4-12 Slot4 CH12 OUT INSCH30 InsertOut-CH30 — — S4-13 Slot4 CH13 OUT INSCH31 InsertOut-CH31 — — S4-14 Slot4 CH14 OUT INSCH32 InsertOut-CH32 — — S4-15 Slot4 CH15 OUT INSCH33 InsertOut-CH33 — — S4-16 Slot4 CH16 OUT INSCH34 InsertOut-CH34 — — S5-1 Slot5 CH1 OUT INSCH35 InsertOut-CH35 — — S5-2 Slot5 CH2 OUT INSCH36 InsertOut-CH36 — — S5-3 Slot5 CH3 OUT INSCH37 InsertOut-CH37 — — S5-4 Slot5 CH4 OUT INSCH38 InsertOut-CH38 — — S5-5 Slot5 CH5 OUT INSCH39 InsertOut-CH39 — — S5-6 Slot5 CH6 OUT INSCH40 InsertOut-CH40 — — S5-7 Slot5 CH7 OUT INSCH41 InsertOut-CH41 — — S5-8 Slot5 CH8 OUT INSCH42 InsertOut-CH42 — — S5-9 Slot5 CH9 OUT INSCH43 InsertOut-CH43 — — S5-10 Slot5 CH10 OUT INSCH44 InsertOut-CH44 — — S5-11 Slot5 CH11 OUT INSCH45 InsertOut-CH45 — — S5-12 Slot5 CH12 OUT INSCH46 InsertOut-CH46 — — S5-13 Slot5 CH13 OUT INSCH47 InsertOut-CH47 — — S5-14 Slot5 CH14 OUT INSCH48 InsertOut-CH48 — — S5-15 Slot5 CH15 OUT INSCH49 InsertOut-CH49 — — S5-16 Slot5 CH16 OUT INSCH50 InsertOut-CH50 — — S6-1 Slot6 CH1 OUT INSCH51 InsertOut-CH51 — — S6-2 Slot6 CH2 OUT INSCH52 InsertOut-CH52 — — S6-3 Slot6 CH3 OUT INSCH53 InsertOut-CH53 — — S6-4 Slot6 CH4 OUT INSCH54 InsertOut-CH54 — — S6-5 Slot6 CH5 OUT INSCH55 InsertOut-CH55 — — S6-6 Slot6 CH6 OUT INSCH56 InsertOut-CH56 — — S6-7 Slot6 CH7 OUT INSCH57 InsertOut-CH57 — — S6-8 Slot6 CH8 OUT INSCH58 InsertOut-CH58 — — S6-9 Slot6 CH9 OUT INSCH59 InsertOut-CH59 — — S6-10 Slot6 CH10 OUT INSCH60 InsertOut-CH60 — — S6-11 Slot6 CH11 OUT INSCH61 InsertOut-CH61 — — S6-12 Slot6 CH12 OUT INSCH62 InsertOut-CH62 — — S6-13 Slot6 CH13 OUT INSCH63 InsertOut-CH63 — — S6-14 Slot6 CH14 OUT INSCH64 InsertOut-CH64 — — S6-15 Slot6 CH15 OUT INSCH65 InsertOut-CH65 — — S6-16 Slot6 CH16 OUT INSCH66 InsertOut-CH66 — — OMNI1 OMNI OUT 1 INSCH67 InsertOut-CH67 — — OMNI2 OMNI OUT 2 INSCH68 InsertOut-CH68 — — OMNI3 OMNI OUT 3 INSCH69 InsertOut-CH69 — — OMNI4 OMNI OUT 4 INSCH70 InsertOut-CH70 — — OMNI5 OMNI OUT 5 INSCH71 InsertOut-CH71 — — DM2000—Owner’s Manual Source Description GEQs 253 Output Patch Parameters Direct Outs Source 2TR Digital Outs Description Source Description GEQs Source Description OMNI6 OMNI OUT 6 INSCH72 InsertOut-CH72 — — OMNI7 OMNI OUT 7 INSCH73 InsertOut-CH73 — — OMNI8 OMNI OUT 8 INSCH74 InsertOut-CH74 — — 2TD1L 2TR OUT Dig.1 L INSCH75 InsertOut-CH75 — — 2TD1R 2TR OUT Dig.1 R INSCH76 InsertOut-CH76 — — 2TD2L 2TR OUT Dig.2 L INSCH77 InsertOut-CH77 — — 2TD2R 2TR OUT Dig.2 R INSCH78 InsertOut-CH78 — — 2TD3L 2TR OUT Dig.3 L INSCH79 InsertOut-CH79 — — 2TD3R 2TR OUT Dig.3 R INSCH80 InsertOut-CH80 — — — — INSCH81 InsertOut-CH81 — — — — INSCH82 InsertOut-CH82 — — — — INSCH83 InsertOut-CH83 — — — — INSCH84 InsertOut-CH84 — — — — INSCH85 InsertOut-CH85 — — — — INSCH86 InsertOut-CH86 — — — — INSCH87 InsertOut-CH87 — — — — INSCH88 InsertOut-CH88 — — — — INSCH89 InsertOut-CH89 — — — — INSCH90 InsertOut-CH90 — — — — INSCH91 InsertOut-CH91 — — — — INSCH92 InsertOut-CH92 — — — — INSCH93 InsertOut-CH93 — — — — INSCH94 InsertOut-CH94 — — — — INSCH95 InsertOut-CH95 — — — — INSCH96 InsertOut-CH96 — — — — INSBUS1 InsertOut-BUS1 — — — — INSBUS2 InsertOut-BUS2 — — — — INSBUS3 InsertOut-BUS3 — — — — INSBUS4 InsertOut-BUS4 — — — — INSBUS5 InsertOut-BUS5 — — — — INSBUS6 InsertOut-BUS6 — — — — INSBUS7 InsertOut-BUS7 — — — — INSBUS8 InsertOut-BUS8 — — — — INSAUX1 InsertOut-AUX1 — — — — INSAUX2 InsertOut-AUX2 — — — — INSAUX3 InsertOut-AUX3 — — — — INSAUX4 InsertOut-AUX4 — — — — INSAUX5 InsertOut-AUX5 — — — — INSAUX6 InsertOut-AUX6 — — — — INSAUX7 InsertOut-AUX7 — — — — INSAUX8 InsertOut-AUX8 — — — — INSAUX9 InsertOut-AUX9 — — — — INSAUX10 InsertOut-AUX10 — — — — INSAUX11 InsertOut-AUX11 — — — — INSAUX12 InsertOut-AUX12 — — — — INSMTX1L InsertOut-MTX1L — — — — INSMTX1R InsertOut-MTX1R — — — — INSMTX2L InsertOut-MTX2L — — — — INSMTX2R InsertOut-MTX2R — — — — INSMTX3L InsertOut-MTX3L — — — — INSMTX3R InsertOut-MTX3R — — — — INSMTX4L InsertOut-MTX4L — — DM2000—Owner’s Manual 254 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Direct Outs 2TR Digital Outs Source Description — — INSMTX4R InsertOut-MTX4R — — INSSTL InsertOut-STL — — — — INSSTR InsertOut-STR — — — — CR-L Control Room L — — — — CR-R Control Room R — — DM2000—Owner’s Manual Source Description GEQs Source Description — — Initial Output Patch Settings Initial Output Patch Settings Slot Outputs Omni Outs # # Source Direct Outs Destinati on Source SLOT1-01 BUS1 1 AUX1 1 SLOT1-01 SLOT1-02 BUS2 2 AUX2 2 SLOT1-02 SLOT1-03 BUS3 3 AUX3 3 SLOT1-03 SLOT1-04 BUS4 4 AUX4 4 SLOT1-04 SLOT1-05 BUS5 5 AUX5 5 SLOT1-05 SLOT1-06 BUS6 6 AUX6 6 SLOT1-06 SLOT1-07 BUS7 7 AUX7 7 SLOT1-07 SLOT1-08 BUS8 8 AUX8 8 SLOT1-08 SLOT1-09 BUS1 — — 9 SLOT2-01 SLOT1-10 BUS2 — — 10 SLOT2-02 SLOT1-11 BUS3 — — 11 SLOT2-03 SLOT1-12 BUS4 — — 12 SLOT2-04 SLOT1-13 BUS5 — — 13 SLOT2-05 SLOT1-14 BUS6 — — 14 SLOT2-06 SLOT1-15 BUS7 — — 15 SLOT2-07 SLOT1-16 BUS8 — — 16 SLOT2-08 SLOT2-01 BUS1 — — 17 SLOT3-01 SLOT2-02 BUS2 — — 18 SLOT3-02 SLOT2-03 BUS3 — — 19 SLOT3-03 SLOT2-04 BUS4 — — 20 SLOT3-04 SLOT2-05 BUS5 — — 21 SLOT3-05 SLOT2-06 BUS6 — — 22 SLOT3-06 SLOT2-07 BUS7 — — 23 SLOT3-07 SLOT2-08 BUS8 — — 24 SLOT3-08 SLOT2-09 BUS1 — — 25 SLOT4-01 SLOT2-10 BUS2 — — 26 SLOT4-02 SLOT2-11 BUS3 — — 27 SLOT4-03 SLOT2-12 BUS4 — — 28 SLOT4-04 SLOT2-13 BUS5 — — 29 SLOT4-05 SLOT2-14 BUS6 — — 30 SLOT4-06 SLOT2-15 BUS7 — — 31 SLOT4-07 SLOT2-16 BUS8 — — 32 SLOT4-08 SLOT3-01 BUS1 — — 33 SLOT5-01 SLOT3-02 BUS2 — — 34 SLOT5-02 SLOT3-03 BUS3 — — 35 SLOT5-03 SLOT3-04 BUS4 — — 36 SLOT5-04 SLOT3-05 BUS5 — — 37 SLOT5-05 SLOT3-06 BUS6 — — 38 SLOT5-06 SLOT3-07 BUS7 — — 39 SLOT5-07 SLOT3-08 BUS8 — — 40 SLOT5-08 SLOT3-09 BUS1 — — 41 SLOT6-01 SLOT3-10 BUS2 — — 42 SLOT6-02 SLOT3-11 BUS3 — — 43 SLOT6-03 SLOT3-12 BUS4 — — 44 SLOT6-04 SLOT3-13 BUS5 — — 45 SLOT6-05 SLOT3-14 BUS6 — — 46 SLOT6-06 SLOT3-15 BUS7 — — 47 SLOT6-07 SLOT3-16 BUS8 — — 48 SLOT6-08 SLOT4-01 BUS1 — — 49 NONE Slot Outputs Omni Outs # # Source Source 255 Direct Outs Destinati on SLOT4-02 BUS2 — — 50 NONE SLOT4-03 BUS3 — — 51 NONE SLOT4-04 BUS4 — — 52 NONE SLOT4-05 BUS5 — — 53 NONE SLOT4-06 BUS6 — — 54 NONE SLOT4-07 BUS7 — — 55 NONE SLOT4-08 BUS8 — — 56 NONE SLOT4-09 BUS1 — — 57 NONE SLOT4-10 BUS2 — — 58 NONE SLOT4-11 BUS3 — — 59 NONE SLOT4-12 BUS4 — — 60 NONE SLOT4-13 BUS5 — — 61 NONE SLOT4-14 BUS6 — — 62 NONE SLOT4-15 BUS7 — — 63 NONE SLOT4-16 BUS8 — — 64 NONE SLOT5-01 BUS1 — — 65 NONE SLOT5-02 BUS2 — — 66 NONE SLOT5-03 BUS3 — — 67 NONE SLOT5-04 BUS4 — — 68 NONE SLOT5-05 BUS5 — — 69 NONE SLOT5-06 BUS6 — — 70 NONE SLOT5-07 BUS7 — — 71 NONE SLOT5-08 BUS8 — — 72 NONE SLOT5-09 BUS1 — — 73 NONE SLOT5-10 BUS2 — — 74 NONE SLOT5-11 BUS3 — — 75 NONE SLOT5-12 BUS4 — — 76 NONE SLOT5-13 BUS5 — — 77 NONE SLOT5-14 BUS6 — — 78 NONE SLOT5-15 BUS7 — — 79 NONE SLOT5-16 BUS8 — — 80 NONE SLOT6-01 BUS1 — — 81 NONE SLOT6-02 BUS2 — — 82 NONE SLOT6-03 BUS3 — — 83 NONE SLOT6-04 BUS4 — — 84 NONE SLOT6-05 BUS5 — — 85 NONE SLOT6-06 BUS6 — — 86 NONE SLOT6-07 BUS7 — — 87 NONE SLOT6-08 BUS8 — — 88 NONE SLOT6-09 BUS1 — — 89 NONE SLOT6-10 BUS2 — — 90 NONE SLOT6-11 BUS3 — — 91 NONE SLOT6-12 BUS4 — — 92 NONE SLOT6-13 BUS5 — — 93 NONE SLOT6-14 BUS6 — — 94 NONE SLOT6-15 BUS7 — — 95 NONE SLOT6-16 BUS8 — — 96 NONE DM2000—Owner’s Manual 256 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Initial Input Channel Names Input Channel ID CH01 CH02 CH03 Short Name CH01 CH02 CH03 Long Name CH01 CH02 CH03 CH04 CH04 CH04 CH05 CH05 CH05 CH06 CH07 CH08 CH09 CH10 CH11 CH06 CH07 CH08 CH09 CH10 CH11 CH06 CH07 CH08 CH09 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH12 CH12 CH13 CH13 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH14 CH15 CH16 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH14 CH15 CH16 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 CH20 CH20 CH21 CH21 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26 CH27 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26 CH27 CH22 CH23 CH24 CH25 CH26 CH27 CH28 CH28 CH28 CH29 CH29 CH29 CH30 CH31 CH32 CH33 CH34 CH35 CH30 CH31 CH32 CH33 CH34 CH35 CH30 CH31 CH32 CH33 CH34 CH35 CH36 CH36 CH36 CH37 CH37 CH37 CH38 CH39 CH40 CH41 CH42 CH43 CH38 CH39 CH40 CH41 CH42 CH43 CH38 CH39 CH40 CH41 CH42 CH43 CH44 CH44 CH44 CH45 CH45 CH45 CH46 CH46 CH46 CH47 CH47 CH47 CH48 CH48 CH48 DM2000—Owner’s Manual Input Channel ID Short Name Long Name CH49 CH49 CH49 CH50 CH50 CH50 CH51 CH51 CH51 CH52 CH52 CH52 CH53 CH53 CH53 CH54 CH54 CH54 CH55 CH55 CH55 CH56 CH56 CH56 CH57 CH57 CH57 CH58 CH58 CH58 CH59 CH59 CH59 CH60 CH60 CH60 CH61 CH61 CH61 CH62 CH62 CH62 CH63 CH63 CH63 CH64 CH64 CH64 CH65 CH65 CH65 CH66 CH66 CH66 CH67 CH67 CH67 CH68 CH68 CH68 CH69 CH69 CH69 CH70 CH70 CH70 CH71 CH71 CH71 CH72 CH72 CH72 CH73 CH73 CH73 CH74 CH74 CH74 CH75 CH75 CH75 CH76 CH76 CH76 CH77 CH77 CH77 CH78 CH78 CH78 CH79 CH79 CH79 CH80 CH80 CH80 CH81 CH81 CH81 CH82 CH82 CH82 CH83 CH83 CH83 CH84 CH84 CH84 CH85 CH85 CH85 CH86 CH86 CH86 CH87 CH87 CH87 CH88 CH88 CH88 CH89 CH89 CH89 CH90 CH90 CH90 CH91 CH91 CH91 CH92 CH92 CH92 CH93 CH93 CH93 CH94 CH94 CH94 CH95 CH95 CH95 CH96 CH96 CH96 Initial Output Channel Names 257 Initial Output Channel Names Output Channel ID Short Name Long Name BUS1 BUS1 BUS1 BUS2 BUS2 BUS2 BUS3 BUS3 BUS3 BUS4 BUS4 BUS4 BUS5 BUS5 BUS5 BUS6 BUS6 BUS6 BUS7 BUS7 BUS7 BUS8 BUS8 BUS8 AUX1 AUX1 AUX1 AUX2 AUX2 AUX2 AUX3 AUX3 AUX3 AUX4 AUX4 AUX4 AUX5 AUX5 AUX5 AUX6 AUX6 AUX6 AUX7 AUX7 AUX7 AUX8 AUX8 AUX8 AUX9 AUX9 AUX9 AX10 AX10 AUX10 AX11 AX11 AUX11 AX12 AX12 AUX12 MTX1 MTX1 MATRIX1 MTX2 MTX2 MATRIX2 MTX3 MTX3 MATRIX3 MTX4 MTX4 MATRIX4 ST ST STEREO DM2000—Owner’s Manual 258 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Initial Input Port Names Port PORT ID Short Name Long Name AD1 AD01 AD01 AD IN 1 AD2 AD02 AD02 AD IN 2 AD3 AD03 AD03 AD IN 3 AD4 AD04 AD04 AD IN 4 AD5 AD05 AD05 AD IN 5 AD6 AD06 AD06 AD IN 6 AD7 AD07 AD07 AD IN 7 AD8 AD08 AD08 AD IN 8 AD9 AD09 AD09 AD IN 9 AD10 AD10 AD10 AD IN 10 AD11 AD11 AD11 AD IN 11 AD12 AD12 AD12 AD IN 12 AD13 AD13 AD13 AD IN 13 AD14 AD14 AD14 AD IN 14 AD15 AD15 AD15 AD IN 15 AD16 AD16 AD16 AD IN 16 AD17 AD17 AD17 AD IN 17 AD18 AD18 AD18 AD IN 18 AD19 AD19 AD19 AD IN 19 AD20 AD20 AD20 AD IN 20 AD21 AD21 AD21 AD IN 21 AD22 AD22 AD22 AD IN 22 AD23 AD23 AD23 AD IN 23 AD24 AD24 AD24 AD IN 24 SLOT1-01 S1-1 S1-1 Slot1 CH1 IN SLOT1-02 S1-2 S1-2 Slot1 CH2 IN SLOT1-03 S1-3 S1-3 Slot1 CH3 IN SLOT1-04 S1-4 S1-4 Slot1 CH4 IN SLOT1-05 S1-5 S1-5 Slot1 CH5 IN SLOT1-06 S1-6 S1-6 Slot1 CH6 IN SLOT1-07 S1-7 S1-7 Slot1 CH7 IN SLOT1-08 S1-8 S1-8 Slot1 CH8 IN SLOT1-09 S1-9 S1-9 Slot1 CH9 IN SLOT1-10 S110 S110 Slot1 CH10 IN SLOT1-11 S111 S111 Slot1 CH11 IN SLOT1-12 S112 S112 Slot1 CH12 IN SLOT1-13 S113 S113 Slot1 CH13 IN SLOT1-14 S114 S114 Slot1 CH14 IN SLOT1-15 S115 S115 Slot1 CH15 IN SLOT1-16 S116 S116 Slot1 CH16 IN SLOT2-01 S2-1 S2-1 Slot2 CH1 IN SLOT2-02 S2-2 S2-2 Slot2 CH2 IN SLOT2-03 S2-3 S2-3 Slot2 CH3 IN SLOT2-04 S2-4 S2-4 Slot2 CH4 IN SLOT2-05 S2-5 S2-5 Slot2 CH5 IN SLOT2-06 S2-6 S2-6 Slot2 CH6 IN SLOT2-07 S2-7 S2-7 Slot2 CH7 IN SLOT2-08 S2-8 S2-8 Slot2 CH8 IN SLOT2-09 S2-9 S2-9 Slot2 CH9 IN SLOT2-10 S210 S210 Slot2 CH10 IN DM2000—Owner’s Manual Port PORT ID Short Name Long Name SLOT2-11 S211 S211 Slot2 CH11 IN SLOT2-12 S212 S212 Slot2 CH12 IN SLOT2-13 S213 S213 Slot2 CH13 IN SLOT2-14 S214 S214 Slot2 CH14 IN SLOT2-15 S215 S215 Slot2 CH15 IN SLOT2-16 S216 S216 Slot2 CH16 IN SLOT3-01 S3-1 S3-1 Slot3 CH1 IN SLOT3-02 S3-2 S3-2 Slot3 CH2 IN SLOT3-03 S3-3 S3-3 Slot3 CH3 IN SLOT3-04 S3-4 S3-4 Slot3 CH4 IN SLOT3-05 S3-5 S3-5 Slot3 CH5 IN SLOT3-06 S3-6 S3-6 Slot3 CH6 IN SLOT3-07 S3-7 S3-7 Slot3 CH7 IN SLOT3-08 S3-8 S3-8 Slot3 CH8 IN SLOT3-09 S3-9 S3-9 Slot3 CH9 IN SLOT3-10 S310 S310 Slot3 CH10 IN SLOT3-11 S311 S311 Slot3 CH11 IN SLOT3-12 S312 S312 Slot3 CH12 IN SLOT3-13 S313 S313 Slot3 CH13 IN SLOT3-14 S314 S314 Slot3 CH14 IN SLOT3-15 S315 S315 Slot3 CH15 IN SLOT3-16 S316 S316 Slot3 CH16 IN SLOT4-01 S4-1 S4-1 Slot4 CH1 IN SLOT4-02 S4-2 S4-2 Slot4 CH2 IN SLOT4-03 S4-3 S4-3 Slot4 CH3 IN SLOT4-04 S4-4 S4-4 Slot4 CH4 IN SLOT4-05 S4-5 S4-5 Slot4 CH5 IN SLOT4-06 S4-6 S4-6 Slot4 CH6 IN SLOT4-07 S4-7 S4-7 Slot4 CH7 IN SLOT4-08 S4-8 S4-8 Slot4 CH8 IN SLOT4-09 S4-9 S4-9 Slot4 CH9 IN SLOT4-10 S410 S410 Slot4 CH10 IN SLOT4-11 S411 S411 Slot4 CH11 IN SLOT4-12 S412 S412 Slot4 CH12 IN SLOT4-13 S413 S413 Slot4 CH13 IN SLOT4-14 S414 S414 Slot4 CH14 IN SLOT4-15 S415 S415 Slot4 CH15 IN SLOT4-16 S416 S416 Slot4 CH16 IN SLOT5-01 S5-1 S5-1 Slot5 CH1 IN SLOT5-02 S5-2 S5-2 Slot5 CH2 IN SLOT5-03 S5-3 S5-3 Slot5 CH3 IN SLOT5-04 S5-4 S5-4 Slot5 CH4 IN SLOT5-05 S5-5 S5-5 Slot5 CH5 IN SLOT5-06 S5-6 S5-6 Slot5 CH6 IN SLOT5-07 S5-7 S5-7 Slot5 CH7 IN SLOT5-08 S5-8 S5-8 Slot5 CH8 IN SLOT5-09 S5-9 S5-9 Slot5 CH9 IN SLOT5-10 S510 S510 Slot5 CH10 IN SLOT5-11 S511 S511 Slot5 CH11 IN SLOT5-12 S512 S512 Slot5 CH12 IN SLOT5-13 S513 S513 Slot5 CH13 IN Initial Input Port Names Port PORT ID Short Name 259 Long Name SLOT5-14 S514 S514 Slot5 CH14 IN SLOT5-15 S515 S515 Slot5 CH15 IN SLOT5-16 S516 S516 Slot5 CH16 IN SLOT6-01 S6-1 S6-1 Slot6 CH1 IN SLOT6-02 S6-2 S6-2 Slot6 CH2 IN SLOT6-03 S6-3 S6-3 Slot6 CH3 IN SLOT6-04 S6-4 S6-4 Slot6 CH4 IN SLOT6-05 S6-5 S6-5 Slot6 CH5 IN SLOT6-06 S6-6 S6-6 Slot6 CH6 IN SLOT6-07 S6-7 S6-7 Slot6 CH7 IN SLOT6-08 S6-8 S6-8 Slot6 CH8 IN SLOT6-09 S6-9 S6-9 Slot6 CH9 IN SLOT6-10 S610 S610 Slot6 CH10 IN SLOT6-11 S611 S611 Slot6 CH11 IN SLOT6-12 S612 S612 Slot6 CH12 IN SLOT6-13 S613 S613 Slot6 CH13 IN SLOT6-14 S614 S614 Slot6 CH14 IN SLOT6-15 S615 S615 Slot6 CH15 IN SLOT6-16 S616 S616 Slot6 CH16 IN 2TD1L 2TD1L 2D1L 2TR IN Dig.1 L 2TD1R 2TD1R 2D1R 2TR IN Dig.1 R 2TD2L 2TD2L 2D2L 2TR IN Dig.2 L 2TD2R 2TD2R 2D2R 2TR IN Dig.2 R 2TD3L 2TD3L 2D3L 2TR IN Dig.3 L 2TD3R 2TD3R 2D3R 2TR IN Dig.3 R 2TA1L 2TA1L 2A1L 2TR IN Analog1 L 2TA1R 2TA1R 2A1R 2TR IN Analog1 R 2TA2L 2TA2L 2A2L 2TR IN Analog2 L 2TA2R 2TA2R 2A2R 2TR IN Analog2 R DM2000—Owner’s Manual 260 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Initial Output Port Names Port SLOT1-01 SLOT1-02 SLOT1-03 SLOT1-04 SLOT1-05 SLOT1-06 SLOT1-07 SLOT1-08 SLOT1-09 SLOT1-10 SLOT1-11 SLOT1-12 SLOT1-13 SLOT1-14 SLOT1-15 SLOT1-16 SLOT2-01 SLOT2-02 SLOT2-03 SLOT2-04 SLOT2-05 SLOT2-06 SLOT2-07 SLOT2-08 SLOT2-09 SLOT2-10 SLOT2-11 SLOT2-12 SLOT2-13 SLOT2-14 SLOT2-15 SLOT2-16 SLOT3-01 SLOT3-02 SLOT3-03 SLOT3-04 SLOT3-05 SLOT3-06 SLOT3-07 SLOT3-08 SLOT3-09 SLOT3-10 SLOT3-11 SLOT3-12 SLOT3-13 SLOT3-14 SLOT3-15 SLOT3-16 SLOT4-01 SLOT4-02 SLOT4-03 SLOT4-04 SLOT4-05 SLOT4-06 Port ID S1-01 S1-02 S1-03 S1-04 S1-05 S1-06 S1-07 S1-08 S1-09 S1-10 S1-11 S1-12 S1-13 S1-14 S1-15 S1-16 S2-01 S2-02 S2-03 S2-04 S2-05 S2-06 S2-07 S2-08 S2-09 S2-10 S2-11 S2-12 S2-13 S2-14 S2-15 S2-16 S3-01 S3-02 S3-03 S3-04 S3-05 S3-06 S3-07 S3-08 S3-09 S3-10 S3-11 S3-12 S3-13 S3-14 S3-15 S3-16 S4-01 S4-02 S4-03 S4-04 S4-05 S4-06 DM2000—Owner’s Manual Short Name S101 S102 S103 S104 S105 S106 S107 S108 S109 S110 S111 S112 S113 S114 S115 S116 S201 S202 S203 S204 S205 S206 S207 S208 S209 S210 S211 S212 S213 S214 S215 S216 S301 S302 S303 S304 S305 S306 S307 S308 S309 S310 S311 S312 S313 S314 S315 S316 S401 S402 S403 S404 S405 S406 Long Name Slot1 CH1 OUT Slot1 CH2 OUT Slot1 CH3 OUT Slot1 CH4 OUT Slot1 CH5 OUT Slot1 CH6 OUT Slot1 CH7 OUT Slot1 CH8 OUT Slot1 CH9 OUT Slot1 CH10 OUT Slot1 CH11 OUT Slot1 CH12 OUT Slot1 CH13 OUT Slot1 CH14 OUT Slot1 CH15 OUT Slot1 CH16 OUT Slot2 CH1 OUT Slot2 CH2 OUT Slot2 CH3 OUT Slot2 CH4 OUT Slot2 CH5 OUT Slot2 CH6 OUT Slot2 CH7 OUT Slot2 CH8 OUT Slot2 CH9 OUT Slot2 CH10 OUT Slot2 CH11 OUT Slot2 CH12 OUT Slot2 CH13 OUT Slot2 CH14 OUT Slot2 CH15 OUT Slot2 CH16 OUT Slot3 CH1 OUT Slot3 CH2 OUT Slot3 CH3 OUT Slot3 CH4 OUT Slot3 CH5 OUT Slot3 CH6 OUT Slot3 CH7 OUT Slot3 CH8 OUT Slot3 CH9 OUT Slot3 CH10 OUT Slot3 CH11 OUT Slot3 CH12 OUT Slot3 CH13 OUT Slot3 CH14 OUT Slot3 CH15 OUT Slot3 CH16 OUT Slot4 CH1 OUT Slot4 CH2 OUT Slot4 CH3 OUT Slot4 CH4 OUT Slot4 CH5 OUT Slot4 CH6 OUT Port SLOT4-07 SLOT4-08 SLOT4-09 SLOT4-10 SLOT4-11 SLOT4-12 SLOT4-13 SLOT4-14 SLOT4-15 SLOT4-16 SLOT5-01 SLOT5-02 SLOT5-03 SLOT5-04 SLOT5-05 SLOT5-06 SLOT5-07 SLOT5-08 SLOT5-09 SLOT5-10 SLOT5-11 SLOT5-12 SLOT5-13 SLOT5-14 SLOT5-15 SLOT5-16 SLOT6-01 SLOT6-02 SLOT6-03 SLOT6-04 SLOT6-05 SLOT6-06 SLOT6-07 SLOT6-08 SLOT6-09 SLOT6-10 SLOT6-11 SLOT6-12 SLOT6-13 SLOT6-14 SLOT6-15 SLOT6-16 OMNI1 OMNI2 OMNI3 OMNI4 OMNI5 OMNI6 OMNI7 OMNI8 2TD1L 2TD1R 2TD2L 2TD2R 2TD3L 2TD3R Port ID S4-07 S4-08 S4-09 S4-10 S4-11 S4-12 S4-13 S4-14 S4-15 S4-16 S5-01 S5-02 S5-03 S5-04 S5-05 S5-06 S5-07 S5-08 S5-09 S5-10 S5-11 S5-12 S5-13 S5-14 S5-15 S5-16 S6-01 S6-02 S6-03 S6-04 S6-05 S6-06 S6-07 S6-08 S6-09 S6-10 S6-11 S6-12 S6-13 S6-14 S6-15 S6-16 OMNI1 OMNI2 OMNI3 OMNI4 OMNI5 OMNI6 OMNI7 OMNI8 2TD1L 2TD1R 2TD2L 2TD2R 2TD3L 2TD3R Short Name S407 S408 S409 S410 S411 S412 S413 S414 S415 S416 S501 S502 S503 S504 S505 S506 S507 S508 S509 S510 S511 S512 S513 S514 S515 S516 S601 S602 S603 S604 S605 S606 S607 S608 S609 S610 S611 S612 S613 S614 S615 S616 OMN1 OMN2 OMN3 OMN4 OMN5 OMN6 OMN7 OMN8 2D1L 2D1R 2D2L 2D2R 2D3L 2D3R Long Name Slot4 CH7 OUT Slot4 CH8 OUT Slot4 CH9 OUT Slot4 CH10 OUT Slot4 CH11 OUT Slot4 CH12 OUT Slot4 CH13 OUT Slot4 CH14 OUT Slot4 CH15 OUT Slot4 CH16 OUT Slot5 CH1 OUT Slot5 CH2 OUT Slot5 CH3 OUT Slot5 CH4 OUT Slot5 CH5 OUT Slot5 CH6 OUT Slot5 CH7 OUT Slot5 CH8 OUT Slot5 CH9 OUT Slot5 CH10 OUT Slot5 CH11 OUT Slot5 CH12 OUT Slot5 CH13 OUT Slot5 CH14 OUT Slot5 CH15 OUT Slot5 CH16 OUT Slot6 CH1 OUT Slot6 CH2 OUT Slot6 CH3 OUT Slot6 CH4 OUT Slot6 CH5 OUT Slot6 CH6 OUT Slot6 CH7 OUT Slot6 CH8 OUT Slot6 CH9 OUT Slot6 CH10 OUT Slot6 CH11 OUT Slot6 CH12 OUT Slot6 CH13 OUT Slot6 CH14 OUT Slot6 CH15 OUT Slot6 CH16 OUT OMNI OUT 1 OMNI OUT 2 OMNI OUT 3 OMNI OUT 4 OMNI OUT 5 OMNI OUT 6 OMNI OUT 7 OMNI OUT 8 2TR OUT Dig. 1L 2TR OUT Dig. 1R 2TR OUT Dig. 2L 2TR OUT Dig. 2R 2TR OUT Dig. 3L 2TR OUT Dig. 3R GPI Trigger Source List GPI Trigger Source List # Source 0 NO ASSIGN 1 2 CH1 FADER ON CH2 FADER ON 3 CH3 FADER ON 4 CH4 FADER ON 5 6 7 8 9 10 CH5 FADER ON CH6 FADER ON CH7 FADER ON CH8 FADER ON CH9 FADER ON CH10 FADER ON 11 CH11 FADER ON 12 CH12 FADER ON 13 14 15 16 17 18 CH13 FADER ON CH14 FADER ON CH15 FADER ON CH16 FADER ON CH17 FADER ON CH18 FADER ON 19 CH19 FADER ON 20 CH20 FADER ON 21 22 23 24 25 26 CH21 FADER ON CH22 FADER ON CH23 FADER ON CH24 FADER ON CH25 FADER ON CH26 FADER ON 27 CH27 FADER ON 28 CH28 FADER ON 29 30 31 32 33 34 CH29 FADER ON CH30 FADER ON CH31 FADER ON CH32 FADER ON CH33 FADER ON CH34 FADER ON 35 CH35 FADER ON 36 CH36 FADER ON 37 38 39 40 41 42 CH37 FADER ON CH38 FADER ON CH39 FADER ON CH40 FADER ON CH41 FADER ON CH42 FADER ON 43 CH43 FADER ON 44 CH44 FADER ON 45 CH45 FADER ON 46 CH46 FADER ON 47 CH47 FADER ON 48 49 50 CH48 FADER ON CH49 FADER ON CH50 FADER ON 51 CH51 FADER ON 52 CH52 FADER ON # Source 53 CH53 FADER ON 54 CH54 FADER ON 55 CH55 FADER ON 56 CH56 FADER ON 57 CH57 FADER ON 58 CH58 FADER ON 59 CH59 FADER ON 60 CH60 FADER ON 61 CH61 FADER ON 62 CH62 FADER ON 63 CH63 FADER ON 64 CH64 FADER ON 65 CH65 FADER ON 66 CH66 FADER ON 67 CH67 FADER ON 68 CH68 FADER ON 69 CH69 FADER ON 70 CH70 FADER ON 71 CH71 FADER ON 72 CH72 FADER ON 73 CH73 FADER ON 74 CH74 FADER ON 75 CH75 FADER ON 76 CH76 FADER ON 77 CH77 FADER ON 78 CH78 FADER ON 79 CH79 FADER ON 80 CH80 FADER ON 81 CH81 FADER ON 82 CH82 FADER ON 83 CH83 FADER ON 84 CH84 FADER ON 85 CH85 FADER ON 86 CH86 FADER ON 87 CH87 FADER ON 88 CH88 FADER ON 89 CH89 FADER ON 90 CH90 FADER ON 91 CH91 FADER ON 92 CH92 FADER ON 93 CH93 FADER ON 94 CH94 FADER ON 95 CH95 FADER ON 96 CH96 FADER ON 97 BUS1 FADER ON 98 BUS2 FADER ON 99 BUS3 FADER ON 100 BUS4 FADER ON 101 BUS5 FADER ON 102 BUS6 FADER ON 103 BUS7 FADER ON 104 BUS8 FADER ON 105 AUX1 FADER ON 106 AUX2 FADER ON 107 AUX3 FADER ON 261 DM2000—Owner’s Manual 262 # Appendix A: Parameter Lists Source # Source 108 AUX4 FADER ON 163 CH42 FADER OFF 109 AUX5 FADER ON 164 CH43 FADER OFF 110 AUX6 FADER ON 165 CH44 FADER OFF 111 AUX7 FADER ON 166 CH45 FADER OFF 112 AUX8 FADER ON 167 CH46 FADER OFF 113 AUX9 FADER ON 168 CH47 FADER OFF 114 AUX10 FADER ON 169 CH48 FADER OFF 115 AUX11 FADER ON 170 CH49 FADER OFF 116 AUX12 FADER ON 171 CH50 FADER OFF 117 MATRIX1 FADER ON 172 CH51 FADER OFF 118 MATRIX2 FADER ON 173 CH52 FADER OFF 119 MATRIX3 FADER ON 174 CH53 FADER OFF 120 MATRIX4 FADER ON 175 CH54 FADER OFF 121 STEREO FADER ON 176 CH55 FADER OFF 122 CH1 FADER OFF 177 CH56 FADER OFF 123 CH2 FADER OFF 178 CH57 FADER OFF 124 CH3 FADER OFF 179 CH58 FADER OFF 125 CH4 FADER OFF 180 CH59 FADER OFF 126 CH5 FADER OFF 181 CH60 FADER OFF 127 CH6 FADER OFF 182 CH61 FADER OFF 128 CH7 FADER OFF 183 CH62 FADER OFF 129 CH8 FADER OFF 184 CH63 FADER OFF 130 CH9 FADER OFF 185 CH64 FADER OFF 131 CH10 FADER OFF 186 CH65 FADER OFF 132 CH11 FADER OFF 187 CH66 FADER OFF 133 CH12 FADER OFF 188 CH67 FADER OFF 134 CH13 FADER OFF 189 CH68 FADER OFF 135 CH14 FADER OFF 190 CH69 FADER OFF 136 CH15 FADER OFF 191 CH70 FADER OFF 137 CH16 FADER OFF 192 CH71 FADER OFF 138 CH17 FADER OFF 193 CH72 FADER OFF 139 CH18 FADER OFF 194 CH73 FADER OFF 140 CH19 FADER OFF 195 CH74 FADER OFF 141 CH20 FADER OFF 196 CH75 FADER OFF 142 CH21 FADER OFF 197 CH76 FADER OFF 143 CH22 FADER OFF 198 CH77 FADER OFF 144 CH23 FADER OFF 199 CH78 FADER OFF 145 CH24 FADER OFF 200 CH79 FADER OFF 146 CH25 FADER OFF 201 CH80 FADER OFF 147 CH26 FADER OFF 202 CH81 FADER OFF 148 CH27 FADER OFF 203 CH82 FADER OFF 149 CH28 FADER OFF 204 CH83 FADER OFF 150 CH29 FADER OFF 205 CH84 FADER OFF 151 CH30 FADER OFF 206 CH85 FADER OFF 152 CH31 FADER OFF 207 CH86 FADER OFF 153 CH32 FADER OFF 208 CH87 FADER OFF 154 CH33 FADER OFF 209 CH88 FADER OFF 155 CH34 FADER OFF 210 CH89 FADER OFF 156 CH35 FADER OFF 211 CH90 FADER OFF 157 CH36 FADER OFF 212 CH91 FADER OFF 158 CH37 FADER OFF 213 CH92 FADER OFF 159 CH38 FADER OFF 214 CH93 FADER OFF 160 CH39 FADER OFF 215 CH94 FADER OFF 161 CH40 FADER OFF 216 CH95 FADER OFF 162 CH41 FADER OFF 217 CH96 FADER OFF DM2000—Owner’s Manual GPI Trigger Source List # Source # 263 Source 218 BUS1 FADER OFF 273 UDEF15 UNLATCH 219 BUS2 FADER OFF 274 UDEF16 UNLATCH 220 BUS3 FADER OFF 275 REC LAMP 221 BUS4 FADER OFF 222 BUS5 FADER OFF 223 BUS6 FADER OFF 224 BUS7 FADER OFF 225 BUS8 FADER OFF 226 AUX1 FADER OFF 227 AUX2 FADER OFF 228 AUX3 FADER OFF 229 AUX4 FADER OFF 230 AUX5 FADER OFF 231 AUX6 FADER OFF 232 AUX7 FADER OFF 233 AUX8 FADER OFF 234 AUX9 FADER OFF 235 AUX10 FADER OFF 236 AUX11 FADER OFF 237 AUX12 FADER OFF 238 MATRIX1 FADER OFF 239 MATRIX2 FADER OFF 240 MATRIX3 FADER OFF 241 MATRIX4 FADER OFF 242 STEREO FADER OFF 243 UDEF1 LATCH 244 UDEF2 LATCH 245 UDEF3 LATCH 246 UDEF4 LATCH 247 UDEF5 LATCH 248 UDEF6 LATCH 249 UDEF7 LATCH 250 UDEF8 LATCH 251 UDEF9 LATCH 252 UDEF10 LATCH 253 UDEF11 LATCH 254 UDEF12 LATCH 255 UDEF13 LATCH 256 UDEF14 LATCH 257 UDEF15 LATCH 258 UDEF16 LATCH 259 UDEF1 UNLATCH 260 UDEF2 UNLATCH 261 UDEF3 UNLATCH 262 UDEF4 UNLATCH 263 UDEF5 UNLATCH 264 UDEF6 UNLATCH 265 UDEF7 UNLATCH 266 UDEF8 UNLATCH 267 UDEF9 UNLATCH 268 UDEF10 UNLATCH 269 UDEF11 UNLATCH 270 UDEF12 UNLATCH 271 UDEF13 UNLATCH 272 UDEF14 UNLATCH DM2000—Owner’s Manual 264 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Effects Parameters REVERB HALL, REVERB ROOM, REVERB STAGE, REVERB PLATE One input, two output hall, room, stage, and plate reverb simulations, all with gates. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density E/R DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Delay between early reflections and reverb E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency GATE LVL OFF, –60 to 0 dB Level at which gate kicks in ATTACK 0–120 ms Gate opening speed HOLD 1 Gate open time DECAY 2 Gate closing speed 1. 0.02 ms–2.13 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.02 ms–1.96 s (fs=48 kHz), 0.01 ms–1.06 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.01 ms–981 ms (fs=96 kHz) 2. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) EARLY REF. One input, two output early reflections. Parameter Range Description TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 265 GATE REVERB, REVERSE GATE One input, two output early reflections with gate, and early reflections with reverse gate. Parameter Range Description TYPE Type-A, Type-B Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Reflection diffusion (left–right reflection spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reflection density HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency MONO DELAY One input, one output basic repeat delay. Parameter Range Description DELAY 0.0–2730.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY 1. (Max. value depends on tempo setting) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 266 Appendix A: Parameter Lists STEREO DELAY Two input, two output basic stereo delay. Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. G L –99 to +99% Left channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R –99 to +99% Right channel feedback (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) MOD. DELAY One input, two output basic repeat delay with modulation. Parameter Range Description DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth WAVE Sine/Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DLY NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) 2. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 267 DELAY LCR One input, two output 3-tap delay (left, center, right). Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–2730.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY C 0.0–2730.0 ms Center channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–2730.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–2730.0 ms Feedback delay time LEVEL L –100 to +100% Left channel delay level LEVEL C –100 to +100% Center channel delay level LEVEL R –100 to +100% Right channel delay level FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L NOTE C 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY C NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 268 Appendix A: Parameter Lists ECHO Two input, two output stereo delay with crossed feedback loop. Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. D L 0.0–1350.0 ms Left channel feedback delay time FB. D R 0.0–1350.0 ms Right channel feedback delay time FB. G L –99 to +99% Left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) FB. G R –99 to +99% Right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) L->R FB. G –99 to +99% Left to right channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) R->L FB. G –99 to +99% Right to left channel feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY L NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY R NOTE FBL 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D L NOTE FBR 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. D R 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) CHORUS Two input, two output chorus effect. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 269 FLANGE Two input, two output flange effect. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. SYMPHONIC Two input, two output symphonic effect. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off 1. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 270 Appendix A: Parameter Lists PHASER Two input, two output 16-stage phaser. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset PHASE 0.00–354.38 degrees Left and right modulation phase balance STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. AUTOPAN Two input, two output autopanner. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DIR. 1 Panning direction WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. L<->R, L—>R, L<—R, Turn L, Turn R 2. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 271 TREMOLO Two input, two output tremolo effect. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. HQ. PITCH One input, two output high-quality pitch shifter. Parameter Range Description PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Pitch shift FINE –50 to +50 cents Pitch shift fine DELAY 0.0–1000.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 272 Appendix A: Parameter Lists DUAL PITCH Two input, two output pitch shifter. Parameter Range Description PITCH 1 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #1 pitch shift FINE 1 –50 to +50 cents Channel #1 pitch shift fine LEVEL 1 –100 to +100% Channel #1 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) PAN 1 L63 to R63 Channel #1 pan DELAY 1 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #1 delay time FB. G 1 –99 to +99% Channel #1 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) PITCH 2 –24 to +24 semitones Channel #2 pitch shift FINE 2 –50 to +50 cents Channel #2 pitch shift fine LEVEL 2 –100 to +100% Channel #2 level (plus values for normal phase, minus values for reverse phase) PAN 2 L63 to R63 Channel #2 pan DELAY 2 0.0–1000.0 ms Channel #2 delay time FB. G 2 –99 to +99% Channel #2 feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) MODE 1–10 Pitch shift precision SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #1 delay NOTE 2 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine Channel #2 delay 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) ROTARY One input, two output rotary speaker simulator. Parameter Range Description ROTATE STOP, START Rotation stop, start SPEED SLOW, FAST Rotation speed (see SLOW and FAST parameters) SLOW 0.05–10.00 Hz SLOW rotation speed FAST 0.05–10.00 Hz FAST rotation speed DRIVE 0–100 Overdrive level ACCEL 0–10 Acceleration at speed changes LOW 0–100 Low-frequency filter HIGH 0–100 High-frequency filter DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 273 RING MOD. Two input, two output ring modulator. Parameter Range SOURCE Description OSC, SELF Modulation source: oscillator or input signal OSC FREQ 0.0–5000.0 Hz Oscillator frequency FM FREQ 0.05–40.00 Hz Oscillator frequency modulation speed FM DEPTH 0–100% Oscillator frequency modulation depth SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE FM 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FM FREQ 1. MOD. FILTER Two input, two output modulation filter. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth PHASE 0.00–354.38° Left-channel modulation and right-channel modulation phase difference TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type: low pass, high pass, band pass OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0–100 Output level SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ 1. DISTORTION One input, two output distortion effect. Parameter Range Description DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume TONE –10 to +10 Tone N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction DM2000—Owner’s Manual 274 Appendix A: Parameter Lists AMP SIMULATE One input, two output guitar amp simulator. Parameter Range Description AMP TYPE 1 Guitar amp simulation type DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume BASS 0–100 Bass tone control MIDDLE 0–100 Middle tone control TREBLE 0–100 High tone control CAB DEP 0–100% Speaker cabinet simulation depth EQ F 100 Hz–8.0 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction 1. STK-M1, STK-M2, THRASH, MIDBST, CMB-PG, CMB-VR, CMB-DX, CMB-TW, MINI, FLAT DYNA. FILTER Two input, two output dynamically controlled filter. Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 1 Filter frequency change decay speed TYPE LPF, HPF, BPF Filter type OFFSET 0–100 Filter frequency offset RESO. 0–20 Filter resonance LEVEL 0–100 Output Level 1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 275 DYNA. FLANGE Two input, two output dynamically controlled flanger. Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 1 Decay speed OFFSET 0–100 Delay time offset FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain EQ F 100 Hz–8.00 kHz EQ (peaking type) frequency EQ G –12 to +12 dB EQ (peaking type) gain EQ Q 10.0–0.10 EQ (peaking type) bandwidth HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain 1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) DYNA. PHASER Two input, two output dynamically controlled phaser. Parameter Range Description SOURCE INPUT, MIDI Control source: input signal or MIDI Note On velocity SENSE 0–100 Sensitivity DIR. UP, DOWN Upward or downward frequency change DECAY 1 Decay speed OFFSET 0–100 Lowest phase-shifted frequency offset FB GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) STAGE 2, 4, 6, 8, 10, 12, 14, 16 Number of phase shift stages LSH F 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low shelving filter frequency LSH G –12 to +12 dB Low shelving filter gain HSH F 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz High shelving filter frequency HSH G –12 to +12 dB High shelving filter gain 1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 276 Appendix A: Parameter Lists REV+CHORUS One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV/CHO 0–100% Reverb and chorus balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all chorus) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. REV->CHORUS One input, two output reverb and chorus effects in series. Parameter Range Description INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL. 0–100% Reverb and chorused reverb balance (0% = all chorused reverb, 100% = all reverb) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 277 REV+FLANGE One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV/FLG 0–100% Reverb and flange balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all flange) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. REV->FLANGE One input, two output reverb and flanger effects in series. Parameter Range Description INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL. 0–100% Reverb and flanged reverb balance (0% = all flanged reverb, 100% = all reverb) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 278 Appendix A: Parameter Lists REV+SYMPHO. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV/SYM 0–100% Reverb and symphonic balance (0% = all reverb, 100% = all symphonic) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. REV->SYMPHO. One input, two output reverb and symphonic effects in series. Parameter Range Description INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL. 0–100% Reverb and symphonic reverb balance (0% = all symphonic reverb, 100% = all reverb) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 279 REV->PAN One input, two output reverb and autopan effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency REV BAL. 0–100% Reverb and panned reverb balance (0% = all panned reverb, 100% = all reverb) FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DIR. 1 Panning direction WAVE Sine, Tri, Square Modulation waveform SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. L<–>R, L–>R, L<–R, Turn L, Turn R 2. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 280 Appendix A: Parameter Lists DELAY+ER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DLY/ER 0–100% Delay and early reflections balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all early reflections) TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 281 DELAY->ER. One input, two output delay and early reflections effects in series. Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DLY BAL. 0–100% Delay and early reflected delay balance (0% = all early reflected delay, 100% = all delay) TYPE S-Hall, L-Hall, Random, Revers, Plate, Spring Type of early reflection simulation ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Reflection spacing LIVENESS 0–10 Early reflections decay characteristics (0 = dead, 10 = live) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density ER NUM. 1–19 Number of early reflections SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 282 Appendix A: Parameter Lists DELAY+REV One input, two output delay and reverb effects in parallel. Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DLY/REV 0–100% Delay and reverb balance (0% = all delay, 100% = all reverb) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 283 DELAY->REV One input, two output delay and reverb effects in series. Parameter Range Description DELAY L 0.0–1000.0 ms Left channel delay time DELAY R 0.0–1000.0 ms Right channel delay time FB. DLY 0.0–1000.0 ms Feedback delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) DELAY HI 0.1–1.0 Delay high-frequency feedback ratio HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DLY BAL 0–100% Delay and delayed reverb balance (0% = all delayed reverb, 100% = all delay) INI. DLY 0.0–500.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time REV HI 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Spread DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE L 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine left channel DELAY L NOTE R *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine right channel DELAY R NOTE FB *1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FB. DLY 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 284 Appendix A: Parameter Lists DIST->DELAY One input, two output distortion and delay effects in series. Parameter Range Description DST TYPE DST1, DST2, OVD1, OVD2, CRUNCH Distortion type (DST = distortion, OVD = overdrive) DRIVE 0–100 Distortion drive MASTER 0–100 Master volume TONE –10 to +10 Tone control N. GATE 0–20 Noise reduction DELAY 0.0–2725.0 ms Delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency feedback ratio FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth DLY BAL 0–100% Distortion and delay balance (0% = all distortion, 100% = all delayed distortion) SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off DLY NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine DELAY MOD NOTE 2 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. (Maximum value depends on the tempo setting) 2. MULTI FILTER Two input, two output 3-band multi-filter (24 dB/octave). Parameter Range Description TYPE 1 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 1 type: high pass, low pass, band pass TYPE 2 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 2 type: high pass, low pass, band pass TYPE 3 HPF, LPF, BPF Filter 3 type: high pass, low pass, band pass FREQ. 1 28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 1 frequency FREQ. 2 28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 2 frequency FREQ. 3 28 Hz–16.0 kHz Filter 3 frequency LEVEL 1 0–100 Filter 1 level LEVEL 2 0–100 Filter 2 level LEVEL 3 0–100 Filter 3 level RESO. 1 0–20 Filter 1 resonance RESO. 2 0–20 Filter 2 resonance RESO. 3 0–20 Filter 3 resonance DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 285 FREEZE One input, one output basic sampler. Parameter Range Description REC MODE MANUAL, INPUT In MANUAL mode, recording is started by pressing the REC and PLAY buttons. In INPUT mode, Record-Ready mode is engaged by pressing the REC button, and actual recording is triggered by the input signal. REC DLY –1000 to +1000 ms Recording delay. For plus values, recording starts after the trigger is received. For minus values, recording starts before the trigger is received. TRG LVL –60 to 0 dB Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger recording or playback) TRG MASK 0–1000 ms Once playback has been triggered, subsequent triggers are ignored for the duration of the TRG MASK time. PLAY MODE MOMENT, CONT., INPUT In MOMENT mode, the sample plays only while the that the PLAY button is pressed. In CONT mode, playback continues once the PLAY button has been pressed. The number of times the sample plays is set using the LOOP NUM parameter. In INPUT mode, playback is triggered by the input signal. START 1 Playback start point in milliseconds END 1 Playback end point in milliseconds LOOP 1 Loop start point in milliseconds LOOP NUM 0–100 Number of times the sample plays START [SAMPLE] 0–262000 Playback start point in samples END [SAMPLE] 0–262000 Playback end point in samples LOOP [SAMPLE] 0–262000 Loop start point in samples PITCH –12 to +12 semitones Playback pitch shift FINE –50 to +50 cents Playback pitch shift fine MIDI TRG OFF, C1–C6, ALL PLAY button can be triggered by using MIDI Note on/off messages. 1. 0.0–5941.0 ms (fs=44.1 kHz), 0.0 ms–5458.3 ms (fs=48 kHz), 0.0–2970.5 ms (fs=88.2 kHz), 0.0 ms–2729.1 ms (fs=96 kHz) ST REVERB Two input, two output stereo reverb. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 286 Appendix A: Parameter Lists REVERB 5.1 One input, six output reverb for 5.1 surround, with surround panning. Parameter Range Description REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency DIV. 0–100% Divergence determines how the front center signal is fed to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 0%, it’s fed only to the Left and Right channels (i.e., Phantom Center). When set to 50%, it’s fed equally to the Left, Right, and Center channels. When set to 100%, it’s fed to only the Center channel (i.e., Real Center). ROOMSIZE 0.1–20.0 Size of simulated room’s reverb POS L/R L63–R63 Left/right listening position POS F/R F63–R63 Front/rear listening position POS CTRL OFF, NOR, INV 1 ER L/R L63–R63 Left/right early reflections position ER F/R F63–R63 Front/rear early reflections position ER LVL 0–100% Early reflections level ER CTRL OFF, NOR, INV 1 REV L/R L63–R63 Left/right reverb position REV F/R F63–R63 Front/rear reverb position REV LVL 0–100% Reverb level REV CTRL OFF, NOR, INV 1 1. When set to NOR, the position can be set by using the Joystick so long as the SELECTED CHANNEL PAN/SURROUND [EFFECT] button’s indicator is on. When set to INV, the Joystick will work inversely. When set to OFF, Joystick control is off. OCTA REVERB Eight input, eight output reverb. Parameter Range REV TIME 0.3–99.0 s Reverb time REV TYPE Hall, Room, Stage, Plate Reverb type INI. DLY 0.0–100.0 ms Initial delay before reverb begins HI. RATIO 0.1–1.0 High-frequency reverb time ratio LO. RATIO 0.1–2.4 Low-frequency reverb time ratio DIFF. 0–10 Reverb diffusion (left–right reverb spread) DENSITY 0–100% Reverb density HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency E/R BAL. 0–100% Balance of early reflections and reverb (0% = all reverb, 100% = all early reflections) DM2000—Owner’s Manual Description Effects Parameters 287 AUTO PAN 5.1 Six input, six output autopanner for 5.1 surround. You can reset to the pan position specified by the OFFSET parameter by pressing the RESET button. Parameter Range Description SOURCE OFF, HOLD, INPUT, MIDI When set to OFF, the TRIGGER button is used to start autopan. When set to HOLD, autopan runs continuously. When set to INPUT, the input signal triggers autopan. When set to MIDI, a MIDI Note On message can be used to trigger autopan. TRIG. LVL –60 to 0 dB Input trigger level (i.e., the signal level required to trigger panning when SOURCE set to INPUT) TRG MASK 0–1000 ms Trigger Mask specifies the time from when a trigger is received until the next trigger will be accepted. TIME 0.1 s–10.0 s The time after which autopan starts once it’s been triggered SPEED 0.05 Hz–40.00 Hz Autopan speed DIR. Turn L, Turn R Autopan direction OFFSET –180 to +180 degrees Pan offset HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency CHORUS 5.1 Six input, six output chorus for 5.1 surround. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed AM DEPTH 0–100% Amplitude modulation depth PM DEPTH 0–100% Pitch modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 288 Appendix A: Parameter Lists FLANGE 5.1 Six input, six output flanger for 5.1 surround. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time FB. GAIN –99 to +99% Feedback gain (plus values for normal-phase feedback, minus values for reverse-phase feedback) WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. SYMPHO 5.1 Six input, six output symphonic effect for 5.1 surround. Parameter Range Description FREQ. 0.05–40.00 Hz Modulation speed DEPTH 0–100% Modulation depth MOD. DLY 0.0–400.0 ms Modulation delay time WAVE Sine, Tri Modulation waveform HPF THRU, 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz High-pass filter cutoff frequency LPF 50.0 Hz–16.0 kHz, THRU Low-pass filter cutoff frequency SYNC OFF/ON Tempo parameter sync on/off NOTE 1 Used in conjunction with TEMPO to determine FREQ. 1. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 289 M. BAND DYNA. Two input, two output 3-band dynamics processor, with individual solo and gain reduction metering for each band. Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level PRESENCE –10 to +10 For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same. EXP. THRE –54.0 dB to –24.0 dB Expander threshold EXP. RAT 1:1 to ∞:1 Expander ratio EXP. REL 1 Expander release time EXP. BYP ON/OFF Expander bypass CMP. THRE –24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold CMP. RAT 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio CMP. REL 1 Compressor release time CMP. ATK 0–120 ms Compressor attack CMP. KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee CMP. BYP ON/OFF Compressor bypass LIM. THRE –12.0 dB to 0.0 dB Limiter threshold LIM. REL 1 Limiter release time LIM. ATK 0–120 ms Limiter attack LIM. KNEE 0–5 Limiter knee LIM. BYP ON/OFF Limiter bypass LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency SLOPE –6 dB to –12 dB Filter slope CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Specifies the maximum output level 1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 290 Appendix A: Parameter Lists COMP 5.1 Six input, six output compressor for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and gain reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS), center (C), or LFE channels. Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level PRESENCE –10 to +10 For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same. THRE –24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold RATIO 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio ATTACK 0–120 ms Attack RELEASE 1 Expander release time KNEE 0–5 Compressor knee LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Specifies the maximum output level L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency SLOPE –6 dB to –12 dB Filter slope KEY LINK 2 Key-in linking 1. 6.0 ms–46.0 s (fs=44.1 kHz), 5.0 ms–42.3 s (fs=48 kHz), 3 ms–23.0 s (fs=88.2 kHz), 3 ms–21.1 s (fs=96 kHz) 2. 5.1: key-in of all inputs are linked. 5.0: key-in of the L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent). 3+2: key-in of L, C, and R are linked, and LS and RS are linked. 2+2: key-in of L and R are linked, and LS and RS are linked. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Effects Parameters 291 COMPAND 5.1 Six input, six output compander for 5.1 surround, with individual solo for each band, and gain reduction metering of left and right (L+R), left surround and right surround (LS+RS), center (C), or LFE channels. Parameter Range Description LOW GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Low band level MID GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB Mid band level HI. GAIN –96.0 to +12.0 dB High band level PRESENCE –10 to +10 For positive values, the threshold of the high band is lowered and the threshold of the low band is increased. For negative values, the opposite will occur. When set to 0, all three bands are affected the same. THRE –24.0 dB to 0.0 dB Compressor threshold RATIO 1:1 to 20:1 Compressor ratio ATTACK 0–120 ms Compressor attack WIDTH 1–90 dB Width before the expander operates TYPE Soft, Hard Compander type LOOKUP 0.0–100.0 ms Lookup delay CEILING –6.0 dB to 0.0 dB, OFF Specifies the maximum output level L–M XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Low/mid crossover frequency M–H XOVR 21.2 Hz–8.00 kHz Mid/high crossover frequency SLOPE –6 dB to –12 dB Filter slope KEY LINK 1 Key-in linking 1. 5.1: key-in of all inputs are linked. 5.0: key-in of the L, C, R, LS, and RS are linked (LFE is independent). 3+2: key-in of L, C, and R are linked, and LS and RS are linked. 2+2: key-in of L and R are linked, and LS and RS are linked. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 292 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Preset EQ Parameters # 01 02 03 04 05 06 07 08 09 10 Parameter Title Bass Drum 1 Bass Drum 2 Snare Drum 1 Snare Drum 2 Tom-tom 1 Cymbal High Hat Percussion E. Bass 1 E. Bass 2 DM2000—Owner’s Manual LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB –3.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 100 Hz 265 Hz 1.06 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 1.2 10 0.9 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING LPF G +8.0 dB –7.0 dB +6.0 dB ON F 80 Hz 400 Hz 2.50 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 1.4 4.5 2.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +4.5 dB F 132 Hz 1.00 kHz 3.15 kHz 5.00 kHz Q 1.2 4.5 0.11 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +1.5 dB –8.5 dB +2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 335 Hz 2.36 kHz 4.00 kHz Q — 10 0.7 0.1 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +2.0 dB –7.5 dB +2.0 dB +1.0 dB F 212 Hz 670 Hz 4.50 kHz 6.30 kHz Q 1.4 10 1.2 0.28 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB F 106 Hz 425 Hz 1.06 kHz 13.2 kHz Q — 8 0.9 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –4.0 dB –2.5 dB +1.0 dB +0.5 dB F 95 Hz 425 Hz 2.80 kHz 7.50 kHz Q — 0.5 1 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –4.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 100 Hz 400 Hz 2.80 kHz 17.0 kHz Q — 4.5 0.56 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –7.5 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 35.5 Hz 112 Hz 2.00 kHz 4.00 kHz Q — 5 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.5 dB +0.5 dB F 112 Hz 112 Hz 2.24 kHz 4.00 kHz Q 0.1 5 6.3 — 293 Preset EQ Parameters # 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 Parameter Title Syn. Bass 1 Syn. Bass 2 Piano 1 Piano 2 E. G. Clean E. G. Crunch 1 E. G. Crunch 2 E. G. Dist. 1 E. G. Dist. 2 A. G. Stroke 1 A. G. Stroke 2 LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB +8.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB F 85 Hz 950 Hz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 0.1 8 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 180 Hz 1.12 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 1.6 8 2.2 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –6.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 95 Hz 950 Hz 3.15 kHz 7.50 kHz Q — 8 0.9 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +3.5 dB –8.5 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 224 Hz 600 Hz 3.15 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 5.6 10 0.7 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB –5.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.5 dB F 265 Hz 400 Hz 1.32 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 0.18 10 6.3 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +4.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB +2.0 dB F 140 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.60 kHz Q 8 4.5 0.63 9 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB 0.0 dB F 125 Hz 450 Hz 3.35 kHz 19.0 kHz Q 8 0.4 0.16 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +5.0 dB 0.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 355 Hz 950 Hz 3.35 kHz 12.5 kHz Q — 9 10 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +6.0 dB –8.5 dB +4.5 dB +4.0 dB F 315 Hz 1.06 kHz 4.25 kHz 12.5 kHz Q — 10 4 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +4.0 dB F 106 Hz 1.00 kHz 1.90 kHz 5.30 kHz Q 0.9 4.5 3.5 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –3.5 dB –2.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB F 300 Hz 750 Hz 2.00 kHz 3.55 kHz Q — 9 4.5 — DM2000—Owner’s Manual 294 # 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Parameter Title A. G. Arpeg. 1 A. G. Arpeg. 2 Brass Sec. Male Vocal 1 Male Vocal 2 Female Vo. 1 Female Vo. 2 Chorus & Harmo Total EQ 1 Total EQ 2 Total EQ 3 DM2000—Owner’s Manual LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB F 224 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 6.70 kHz Q — 4.5 4.5 0.12 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G 0.0 dB –5.5 dB 0.0 dB +4.0 dB F 180 Hz 355 Hz 4.00 kHz 4.25 kHz Q — 7 4.5 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 2.8 2 0.7 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB F 190 Hz 1.00 kHz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz Q 0.11 4.5 0.56 0.11 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +2.0 dB –5.0 dB –2.5 dB +4.0 dB F 170 Hz 236 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.70 kHz Q 0.11 10 5.6 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –1.0 dB +1.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB F 118 Hz 400 Hz 2.65 kHz 6.00 kHz Q 0.18 0.45 0.56 0.14 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –7.0 dB +1.5 dB +1.5 dB +2.5 dB F 112 Hz 335 Hz 2.00 kHz 6.70 kHz Q — 0.16 0.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –2.0 dB –1.0 dB +1.5 dB +3.0 dB F 90 Hz 850 Hz 2.12 kHz 4.50 kHz Q 2.8 2 0.7 7 PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –0.5 dB 0.0 dB +3.0 dB +6.5 dB F 95 Hz 950 Hz 2.12 kHz 16.0 kHz Q 7 2.2 5.6 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB +6.0 dB F 95 Hz 750 Hz 1.80 kHz 18.0 kHz Q 7 2.8 5.6 — L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +1.5 dB +0.5 dB +2.0 dB +4.0 dB F 67 Hz 850 Hz 1.90 kHz 15.0 kHz Q — 0.28 0.7 — 295 Preset EQ Parameters # 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 Parameter Title Bass Drum 3 Snare Drum 3 Tom-tom 2 Piano 3 Piano Low Piano High Fine-EQ Cass Narrator LOW L-MID H-MID HIGH PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G +3.5 dB –10.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 118 Hz 315 Hz 4.25 kHz 20.0 kHz Q 2 10 0.4 0.4 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G 0.0 dB +2.0 dB +3.5 dB 0.0 dB F 224 Hz 560 Hz 4.25 kHz 4.00 kHz Q — 4.5 2.8 0.1 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –9.0 dB +1.5 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 90 Hz 212 Hz 5.30 kHz 17.0 kHz Q — 4.5 1.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G +4.5 dB –13.0 dB +4.5 dB +2.5 dB F 100 Hz 475 Hz 2.36 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 8 10 9 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +6.0 dB 0.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 12.5 kHz Q 10 6.3 2.2 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING G –5.5 dB +1.5 dB +5.0 dB +3.0 dB F 190 Hz 400 Hz 6.70 kHz 5.60 kHz Q 10 6.3 2.2 0.1 L.SHELF PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –1.5 dB 0.0 dB +1.0 dB +3.0 dB F 75 Hz 1.00 kHz 4.00 kHz 12.5 kHz Q — 4.5 1.8 — PEAKING PEAKING PEAKING H.SHELF G –4.0 dB –1.0 dB +2.0 dB 0.0 dB F 106 Hz 710 Hz 2.50 kHz 10.0 kHz Q 4 7 0.63 — DM2000—Owner’s Manual 296 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Preset Gate Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) # 1 2 3 4 Title Gate Ducking A. Dr. BD A. Dr. SN Type GATE DUCKING GATE GATE Parameter Value Threshold (dB) –26 Range (dB) –56 Attack (ms) 0 Hold (ms) 2.56 Decay (ms) 331 Threshold (dB) –19 Range (dB) –22 Attack (ms) 93 Hold (ms) 1.20 S Decay (ms) 6.32 S Threshold (dB) –11 Range (dB) –53 Attack (ms) 0 Hold (ms) 1.93 Decay (ms) 400 Threshold (dB) –8 Range (dB) –23 Attack (ms) 1 Hold (ms) 0.63 Decay (ms) 238 Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) # 1 Title Comp Type COMP Parameter –8 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 60 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Knee 2 3 Expand Compander (H) EXPAND COMPAND-H 250 Threshold (dB) –23 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 1 Out gain (dB) 2 Release (ms) 70 Threshold (dB) –10 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Threshold (dB) DM2000—Owner’s Manual COMPAND-S 3.5 Knee Release (ms) Compander (S) 2 Release (ms) Width (dB) 4 Value Threshold (dB) 1 0.0 6 250 –8 Ratio ( :1) 4 Attack (ms) 25 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Width (dB) 24 Release (ms) 180 297 Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) # Title Type Parameter Threshold (dB) 5 6 A. Dr. BD A. Dr. BD COMP COMPAND-H A. Dr. SN COMP 3 Attack (ms) 9 Out gain (dB) A. Dr. SN EXPAND 2 Release (ms) 58 Threshold (dB) –11 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) COMPAND-S Threshold (dB) –17 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) A. Dr. Tom EXPAND 2 Release (ms) 12 Threshold (dB) –23 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) A. Dr. OverTop COMPAND-S E. B. Finger COMP 0 0.5 2 151 –8 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 11 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Width (dB) 10 Release (ms) 128 Threshold (dB) –20 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 2 2 5.0 2 Release (ms) 749 Threshold (dB) –24 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 38 Out gain (dB) –3.5 Width (dB) 54 Release (ms) 842 Threshold (dB) –12 Ratio ( :1) 12 2 Threshold (dB) Knee 11 8 3.5 Knee Ratio ( :1) 10 7 192 Release (ms) A. Dr. SN 1 –1.5 Release (ms) Knee 9 5.5 Knee Ratio ( :1) 8 –24 Ratio ( :1) Width (dB) 7 Value 2 Attack (ms) 15 Out gain (dB) 4.5 Knee Release (ms) 2 470 DM2000—Owner’s Manual 298 # 13 14 15 16 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Title E. B. Slap Syn. Bass Piano1 Piano2 Type COMP COMP COMP COMP Parameter Threshold (dB) –12 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 4.0 Knee hard Release (ms) 133 Threshold (dB) –10 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) COMP 3.0 Knee hard Release (ms) 250 Threshold (dB) –9 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 17 Out gain (dB) 1.0 Knee hard Release (ms) 238 Threshold (dB) –18 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) A. Guitar COMP Strings1 COMP –8 3.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) Strings2 COMP 4 261 Threshold (dB) –10 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 5 1.5 2 Release (ms) 238 Threshold (dB) –11 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 33 Out gain (dB) 1.5 2 Release (ms) 749 Threshold (dB) –12 Ratio ( :1) 1.5 Attack (ms) 93 Out gain (dB) 1.5 Knee Release (ms) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 7 2.5 Release (ms) Knee 20 2 174 Ratio ( :1) Knee 19 7 6.0 Threshold (dB) Knee 18 9 Out gain (dB) Release (ms) E. Guitar 6 Out gain (dB) Knee 17 Value 4 1.35 S 299 Preset Compressor Parameters (fs = 44.1 kHz) # 21 Title Strings3 Type COMP Parameter Threshold (dB) –17 Ratio ( :1) 1.5 Attack (ms) 76 Out gain (dB) 2.5 Knee 22 BrassSection COMP Syn. Pad COMP 186 Threshold (dB) –18 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 18 Out gain (dB) 4.0 25 SamplingPerc Sampling BD COMPAND-S COMP 226 Threshold (dB) –13 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 58 Out gain (dB) 2.0 27 28 Sampling SN Hip Comp Solo Vocal1 COMP COMPAND-S COMP 1 Release (ms) 238 Threshold (dB) –18 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 8 –2.5 Width (dB) 18 Release (ms) 238 Threshold (dB) –14 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 2 Out gain (dB) 3.5 Knee 4 Release (ms) 35 Threshold (dB) –18 Ratio ( :1) 26 1 Release (ms) Knee 24 2 Release (ms) Knee 23 Value Attack (ms) 4 8 Out gain (dB) 8.0 Knee hard Release (ms) 354 Threshold (dB) –23 Ratio ( :1) 20 Attack (ms) 15 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Width (dB) 15 Release (ms) 163 Threshold (dB) –20 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 31 Out gain (dB) 2.0 Knee Release (ms) 1 342 DM2000—Owner’s Manual 300 # 29 Appendix A: Parameter Lists Title Solo Vocal2 Type COMP Parameter Threshold (dB) –8 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) 26 Out gain (dB) 1.5 Knee Release (ms) 30 Chorus COMP Click Erase EXPAND –9 Ratio ( :1) 1.7 Attack (ms) 39 Out gain (dB) 2.5 Announcer COMPAND-H 226 Threshold (dB) –33 Ratio ( :1) 2 Attack (ms) 1 Out gain (dB) Limiter1 COMPAND-S Threshold (dB) –14 Ratio ( :1) 2.5 Attack (ms) Out gain (dB) 35 Total Comp1 COMP COMP 18 Release (ms) 180 Total Comp2 COMP 3 Attack (ms) 20 Out gain (dB) –3.0 90 3.90 s Threshold (dB) 0 Ratio ( :1) ∞ Attack (ms) 0 Out gain (dB) 0.0 Knee hard Release (ms) 319 Threshold (dB) –18 Ratio ( :1) 3.5 Attack (ms) 94 Out gain (dB) 2.5 Knee hard Release (ms) 447 Threshold (dB) –16 6 Attack (ms) 11 Out gain (dB) 6.0 Knee Release (ms) DM2000—Owner’s Manual –9 Ratio ( :1) Ratio ( :1) 36 1 –2.5 Width (dB) Release (ms) Limiter2 2 284 Width (dB) 34 2.0 Release (ms) Threshold (dB) 33 2 Release (ms) Knee 32 3 331 Threshold (dB) Knee 31 Value 1 180 General Spec 301 Appendix B: Specifications General Spec Number of scene memories 99 Internal Sampling Frequency External Normal rate: 44.1 kHz–10% to 48 kHz+6% Double rate: 88.2 kHz–10% to 96 kHz+6% Less than 2.3 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT (fs=48 kHz) Signal Delay Less than 1.2 ms CH INPUT to STEREO OUT (fs=96 kHz) 100 mm motorized with touch sense × 25 Fader +10 to –96, –∞ dB (256 steps/100 mm) input faders Fader Resolution Total Harmonic Distortion1 (CH INPUT to STEREO OUT) (Input Gain=Min.) 44.1 kHz, 48 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 96 kHz 0 to –130, –∞ dB (256 steps/100 mm) master faders, stereo fader fs=48 kHz Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 20 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +18 dB into 600 Ω fs=96 kHz Less than 0.05% 20 Hz to 40 kHz @ +14 dB into 600 Ω Less than 0.01% 1 kHz @ +18 dB into 600 Ω 20 Hz–20 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω (fs=48 kHz) Frequency Response (CH INPUT to STEREO OUT) 20 Hz–40 kHz, 0.5, –1.5 dB @ +4 dB into 600 Ω (fs=96 kHz) 110 dB typ. DA Converter (STEREO OUT) Dynamic Range (maximum level to noise level) 108 dB typ. AD+DA (to STEREO OUT) @ fs=48 kHz 106 dB typ. AD+DA (to STEREO OUT) @ fs=96 kHz –128 dB Equivalent Input Noise Hum & Noise2 (20 Hz–20 kHz) –92 dB residual output noise. STEREO OUT (STEREO OUT off) –92 dB (96 dB S/N) STEREO OUT (STEREO fader at nominal level and all CH INPUT faders at minimum level) Rs=150 Ω Input Gain=Max. Input Pad =0 dB –64 dB (68 dB S/N) STEREO OUTPUT (STEREO fader at nominal level and one CH INPUT fader at nominal level) 74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–24) to STEREO OUT/OMNI (BUS) OUT 74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–24) to OMNI (AUX) OUT (via pre input fader) Maximum Voltage Gain 74 dB CH INPUT (CH1–24) to CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT (via STEREO bus) Crosstalk (@ 1 kHz) –80 dB adjacent input channels (CH1–24) Input Gain=Min. –80 dB input to output Phantom switch +48 V DC is supplied to A (XLR-3-31 type) input Pad switch 0/26 dB attenuation Gain control 44 dB (–60 to –16), detented Peak indicator LED (red) turns on when post HA level reaches 3 dB below clipping Signal indicator LED (green) turns on when post HA level reaches 20 dB below nominal Insert OUT, IN (pre AD converter) Insert switch on/off AD converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=48 kHz) Analog Input (2TR IN ANALOG 1, 2) AD converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling (fs=48 kHz) Option Input (SLOT 1–6) Available cards Optional digital interface cards (MY8, MY4 series) Digital Input (2TR IN DIGITAL 1–3) SRC On/off (1:3 and 3:1 maximum input to output sample rate ratio) AD Input (1–24: A/B) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 302 Appendix B: Specifications Input patch — Phase Normal/reverse On/off Gate-type3 Key in: 12 ch Group (1–12, 13–24, 25–36, 37–48, 49–60, 61–72, 73–84, 85–96)/AUX1–12 On/off Comp-type4 Key in: self /Stereo Link Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader Attenuator EQ –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ5 On/off Input Channel CH1–96 Delay 0–43400 samples On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized (INPUT/AUX1–12) Aux send Solo OSCILLATOR STEREO OUT OMNI OUT 1–8 CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT (LARGE, SMALL) DM2000—Owner’s Manual AUX1–12; pre fader/post fader On/off Pre fader/after pan Pan 127 positions (Left= 1–63, Center, Right= 1–63) Surround pan 127 × 127 positions LFE level –∞, –96 dB to +10 dB (256 step) Routing STEREO, BUS1–8, DIRECT OUT Direct out Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader Metering TALKBACK On/off Displayed on LCD Peak hold on/off Level control Analog rotary potentiometer AD converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling Talkback select Built-in microphone/AD IN 1–24 On/off — Slate On/off Level 0 to –96 dB (1 dB step) On/off — Waveform Sine 100 Hz, sine 1 kHz, sine 10 kHz, pink noise, burst noise Routing BUS1–8, AUX1–12, MATRIX 1L–4R, STEREO L, R DA converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling Output patch SURROUND MONITOR, STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–12, MATRIX 1L–4R, DIRECT OUT 1–96, INSERT OUT (CH1–96, BUS1–8, AUX1–12, MATRIX 1L–4R, STEREO) DA converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling Monitor select STEREO, 2TR IN DIGITAL 1, 2TR IN DIGITAL 2, 2TR IN DIGITAL 3, 2TR I N ANALOG 1, 2TR IN ANALOG 2, ASSIGN 1, 2 (BUS 1–8/AUX 1–12/MATRIX 1–4) Solo contrast –96 to 0 dB (1 dB step) Mono On/off Dimmer On/off DA converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling Level control Analog rotary potentiometer Phones level Analog rotary potentiometer Small trim Analog rotary potentiometer General Spec STUDIO MONITOR OUT Monitor select CONTROL ROOM, STEREO, AUX 11, AUX 12 DA converter 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling Level control Analog rotary potentiometer Dither 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1–3 Option Output (SLOT 1–6) 303 On/off Word length 16, 20, 24-bit Output patch STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX 1–12, MATRIX 1L–4R, DIRECT OUT 1–96, INSERT OUT, CONTROL ROOM SRC On/off (1:3 and 3:1 maximum input to output sample rate ratio) Available card Optional digital interface card (MY8, MY4 series) Output patch SURROUND MONITOR, STEREO, BUS1–8, AUX1–12, MATRIX 1L–4R, DIRECT OUT 1–96, INSERT OUT (CH1–96, BUS1–8, AUX1–12, MATRIX 1L–4R, STEREO) Dither Memory card slot On/off Word length 16/20/24-bit SmartMedia Comp-type4 Attenuator EQ On/off Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ5 On/off On/off STEREO Fader 100 mm motorized Balance 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63) Delay 0–43400 samples Pre fader/post fader Matrix send Level (–∞, –96 dB to +10 dB) Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63) Metering Comp-type4 Attenuator EQ Displayed on LCD Peak hold on/off On/off Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ5 On/off BUS1–8 On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized Delay 0–43400 samples Pre fader/post fader Matrix send Level (–∞, –96 dB to +10 dB) Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63) Level (–∞, –130 dB to 0 dB) Bus to stereo On/off Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63) Metering Displayed on LCD Peak hold on/off DM2000—Owner’s Manual 304 Appendix B: Specifications Comp-type4 Attenuator EQ On/off Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ5 On/off AUX1–12 On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized Delay 0–43400 samples Pre fader/post fader Matrix send Level (–∞, –96 dB to +10 dB) Pan: 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63) Metering Comp-type4 Attenuator EQ Displayed on LCD Peak hold on/off On/off Pre EQ/pre fader/post fader –96.0 to +12.0 dB (0.1 dB step) 4-band PEQ5 On/off MATRIX 1L–4R On/off — Fader 100 mm motorized Balance 127 positions (Left=1–63, Center, Right=1–63) Delay 0–43400 samples Metering SURROUND MONITOR INTERNAL EFFECTS (EFFECT 1–8) GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS (GEQ 1–6) Power Requirements Dimensions Displayed on LCD Peak hold on/off Mute On/off Solo On/off Source BUS1–8, SLOT 1–6 Monitor to C-R On/off Oscillator Pink noise/500–2 kHz/1 kHz Monitor matrix 5.1→5.1, 5.1→3-1, 5.1→ST, 3.1→3.1, 3.1→ST Bass management 5 presets Monitor alignment ATT (–12.0 dB to 12 dB 0.1 dB step), Delay (0–30.0 msec, 0.01 msec step) Bypass On/off In/out 8-in, 8-out (EFFECT1–2): depends on effects type 2-in, 2-out (EFFECT3–8): depends on effects type Effect-in from AUX1–12/INSERT OUT/effect-out Effect-out to Input patch/effect-in On/off — Band number 31 Limit ±15 dB, ±12 dB, ±6 dB, –24 dB Insert position BUS1–8/AUX1–12/STEREO L, R/MATRIX 1L–4R U.S./Canada 120 V, 60 Hz 300 W Other 220–240 V, 50/60 Hz 300 W (H x D x W) 257 x 821 x 906 mm (10.1" x 32.3" x 35.7") Net weight 43 kg (94.8 lbs) Operating free-air temperature range 10–35°C (50–95°F) Storage temperature range –20 to 60°C (–4 to 140°F) DM2000—Owner’s Manual General Spec Supplied Accessories AC Cable CD-ROM (Studio Manager) Options Digital interface card (MY8, MY4 series) PEAK METER BRIDGE: MB2000 SIDE PANEL: SP2000 305 1. Total harmonic distortion is measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 80 kHz. 2. Hum & Noise are measured with a 6 dB/octave filter @ 12.7 kHz; equivalent to a 20 kHz filter with infinite dB/octave attenuation. 3. See “Gate Parameters” on page 305. 4. See “Comp Parameters” on page 306. 5. See “EQ Parameters” on page 305. EQ Parameters LOW/HPF L-MID H-MID 0.1–10.0 (41 points) low shelving HPF Q 0.1–10.0 (41 points) F HIGH /LPF 0.1–10.0 (41 points) high shelving LPF 21.2 Hz–20 kHz (1/12 oct step) ±18 dB (0.1 dB step) HPF: on/off G ±18 dB (0.1 dB step) ±18 dB (0.1 dB step) LPF: on/off Gate Parameters Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Range –70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz Gate Hold 0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz 0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz 0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Decay 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Range –70 dB to 0 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 0.02 ms–1.96 s (216 points) @ 48 kHz Ducking Hold 0.02 ms–2.13 s (216 points) @ 44.1 kHz 0.01 ms–981 ms (216 points) @ 96 kHz 0.01 ms–1.06 s (216 points) @ 88.2 kHz 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Decay 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz DM2000—Owner’s Manual 306 Appendix B: Specifications Comp Parameters Compressor Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points) Out gain 0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step) Knee Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Expander Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points) Out gain 0 dB to +18 dB (0.1 dB step) Knee Hard, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 (6 points) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Compander H Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20, ∞ (16 points) Out gain –18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Width 1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz Compander S Threshold –54 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Ratio (x :1) x=1, 1.1, 1.3, 1.5, 1.7, 2, 2.5, 3, 3.5, 4, 5, 6, 8, 10, 20 (15 points) Out gain –18 dB to 0 dB (0.1 dB step) Width 1 dB–90 dB (1 dB step) Attack 0 ms–120 ms (1 ms step) 5 ms–42.3 s (160 points) @ 48 kHz Release 6 ms–46.0 s (160 points) @ 44.1 kHz 3 ms–21.1 s (160 points) @ 96 kHz 3 ms–23.0 s (160 points) @ 88.2 kHz DM2000—Owner’s Manual Controls 307 Controls Analog Section +48 V switch INPUT 1–24 ON/OFF PAD switch 0/26 dB GAIN control –16 to –60 dB INSERT switch ON/OFF TALKBACK TALKBACK LEVEL control STUDIO MONITOR OUT STUDIO LEVEL control CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT CONTROL ROOM LEVEL control CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT SMALL SMALL TRIM control PHONES PHONES LEVEL control Digital Section MATRIX SELECT DISPLAY button MATRIX 1, MATRIX 2, MATRIX 3, MATRIX 4 buttons (w/LED) DISPLAY button AUX SELECT AUX 1, AUX 2, AUX 3, AUX 4, AUX 5, AUX 6, AUX 7, AUX 8, AUX 9, AUX 10, AUX 11, AUX 12 buttons (w/LED) FADER MODE FADER, AUX/MTRX button (w/LED) FADER MODE Section DISPLAY button ENCODER MODE PAN, AUX/MTRX, ASSIGN 1, ASSIGN 2, ASSIGN 3, ASSIGN 4 buttons (w/LED) DISPLAY buttons DATA, DIO, SETUP, UTILITY, MIDI, REMOTE, METER, VIEW, PAIR, GROUP, INPUT PATCH, OUTPUT PATCH DISPLAY access, π, † DISPLAY CONTROL Section EFFECTS/PLUG-INS INTERNAL EFFECTS, GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS, PLUG-INS, CHANNEL INSERTS, 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8 Parameter control: 1, 2, 3, 4 Others √, F1, F2, F3, F4, ® buttons LCD contrast control DM2000—Owner’s Manual 308 Appendix B: Specifications DISPLAY button ROUTING PHASE/INSERT 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, STEREO, DIRECT, FOLLOW PAN buttons (w/LED) DISPLAY button ø, INSERT ON buttons (w/LED) DISPLAY button DELAY ON button (w/LED) TIME control MIX/FB control (w/SW) DISPLAY, BANK button AUX/MATRIX SEND ON button (w/LED) x 4 LEVEL control (w/SW) x 4 SELECTED CHANNEL Section DISPLAY, GATE /COMP buttons DYNAMICS GATE ON, COMP ON buttons (w/LED) Parameter control x 5 DISPLAY button PAN/SURROUND L, R, LINK, GRAB, EFFECT buttons (w/LED) Pan control Joystick (Sound image position control) DISPLAY button EQ ON button (w/LED) EQUALIZER ATT control, GAIN controls: LOW, LOW-MID, HIGH-MID, HIGH FREQUENCY/Q controls: LOW, LOW-MID, HIGH-MID, HIGH controls (w/SW) CH COPY/PASTE COPY, PASTE buttons MONITOR DISPLAY button STUDIO CONTROL ROOM, STEREO, AUX 11, AUX 12 buttons (w/LED) SOLO MONITOR Section CLEAR button SOLO CONTRAST control CONTROL ROOM STEREO: 2TR D1, 2TR D2, 2TR D3, 2TR A1, 2TR A2, STEREO, ASSIGN 1, ASSIGN 2 buttons (w/LED) SURROUND BUS, ASSIGN 1, ASSIGN 2 buttons (w/LED) Others TALKBACK SCENE MEMORY SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control MONO, DIMMER, SMALL buttons (w/LED) SLATE, TALKBACK buttons (w/LED) DISPLAY button π, †, STORE, RECALL buttons DISPLAY button SCENE MEMORY, AUTOMIX and USER DEFINED KEYS section AUTOMIX ENABLE, REC, ABORT/UNDO, AUTOREC, RETURN, RELATIVE, TOUCH SENSE buttons (w/LED) OVERWRITE parameters: FADER, ON, PAN, SURROUND, AUX, AUX ON, EQ buttons (w/LED) DISPLAY button USER DEFINED KEYS DM2000—Owner’s Manual 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16 buttons (w/LED) Indicators 309 DISPLAY, ALL CLEAR buttons TRACK ARMING 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, 9, 10, 11, 12, 13, 14, 15, 16, 17, 18, 19, 20, 21, 22, 23, 24, MASTER, TRACK ARMING GROUP: A, B, C, D buttons (w/LED) DISPLAY button MACHINE CONTROL Section LOCATOR CHANNEL STRIP Section TRANSPORT CONTROL REW, FF, STOP, PLAY, REC, SHUTTLE, SCRUB (w/LED) Encoders x 24 (1–24) Buttons AUTO x 24 (1–24), SEL x 24 (1–24), SOLO x 24 (1–24), ON x 24 (1–24) Faders (w/ touch sense) x 24 (1–24) LAYER Input CH: 1–24, 25–48, 49–72, 73–96, MASTER, REMOTE 1, REMOTE 2, REMOTE 3, REMOTE 4 buttons (w/LED) MASTER Section STEREO Buttons DATA ENTRY Section LOCATE MEMORY: 1, 2, 3, 4, 5, 6, 7, 8, AUDITION, PRE, IN, OUT, POST, SET, MTR, RETURN TO ZERO, END, ONLINE, LOOP, QUICK PUNCH, ROLL BACK, REHEARSAL, MASTER buttons (w/LED) Encoder AUTO, SEL, ON buttons (w/LED) Fader (w/touch sense) x 1 DISPLAY HISTORY: BACK, FORWARD, INC, DEC, π, †, √, ®, ENTER buttons Parameter wheel Indicators Analog Section PEAK LED x24 INPUT 1–24 SIGNAL LED x24 INPUT 1–24 Digital Section DISPLAY CONTROL Section SELECTED CHANNEL Section DISPLAY 320 × 240 dot graphic LCD (w/contrast control potentiometer) DELAY MIX, FB LEDs x2 AUX / MATRIX SEND BANK LEDs x3 DYNAMICS GATE, COMP LEDs x2 PAN/SURROUND Pan position LEDs x10 FREQUENCY, Q LEDs 2 × 4 EQUALIZER dB, Hz, kHz 3 × 4 3-digit numeric LEDs x4 (parameter value) MONITOR Section SOLO LED x1 SCENE MEMORY section Scene memory number 2-digit numeric LED x1 CHANNEL STRIP Section CH NAME, routing, panning position, EQ, INS, DLY, COMP, GATE: on/ off, touch sense status, etc 2 color VFD (FL) units x3 DM2000—Owner’s Manual 310 Appendix B: Specifications Libraries Effect library (EFFECT 1–8) Compressor library Gate library EQ library Channel library GEQ library (GEQ 1–6) Surround Monitor library Input patch library Output patch library Bus to Stereo library DM2000—Owner’s Manual Presets 52 (EFFECT 3–8: 44) User memories 76 Presets 36 User memories 92 Presets 4 User memories 124 Presets 40 User memories 160 Presets 2 User memories 127 Presets 1 User memories 128 Presets 1 User memories 32 Presets 1 User memories 32 Presets 1 User memories 32 Presets 1 User memories 32 Analog Input Spec 311 Analog Input Spec Input PAD GAIN Actual Load For Use With Impedance Nominal Sensitivity1 0 3k Ω –16 dB Nominal Connector Max. before clip A: XLR-3-31 type –70 dB –60 dB –46 dB (0.245 mV) (0.775 mV) (3.88 mV) (Balanced)2 –60 dB INPUT A/B 1–24 Input level 50–600 Ω Mics & 600 Ω Lines 26 –26 dB (38.8 mV) –16 dB (0.123 V) B: Phone jack (TRS) –2 dB (616 mV) (Balanced)3 0dB (775 mV) +10 dB (2.45 V) +24 dB (12.28 V) INSERT IN 1–24 — 10K Ω 600 Ω Lines –6dB (388 mV) +4 dB (1.23 V) +18 dB (6.16 V) Phone jack (TRS) 2TR IN ANALOG 1 [L, R] — 10K Ω 600 Ω Lines +4 dB (1.23 V) +4 dB (1.23 V) +18 dB (6.16 V) Phone jack (TRS) 2TR IN ANALOG 2 [L, R] — 10K Ω 600 Ω Lines –10 dBV (0.316 V) –10 dBV (0.316 V) +4 dBV (1.58 V) Phono (Unbalanced) (Balanced)3 (Balanced)3 1. Sensitivity is the lowest level that will produce an output of +4 dB (1.23 V) or the nominal output level when the unit is set to maximum gain. (All faders and level controls are maximum position.) 2. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). 3. Phone jacks are balanced (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND). In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms. For 2TR IN ANALOG 2 levels, 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 Vrms. All input AD converters (except INSERT IN 1–24) are 24-bit linear, 128-times oversampling. +48 V DC (phantom power) is supplied to CH INPUT (1–24) XLR type connectors via individual switches. Analog Output Spec Actual Source Impedance For Use With Nominal 600 Ω 10k Ω Lines 150 Ω STUDIO MONITOR OUT [L, R] Output Output level GAIN SW1 Connector Nominal Max. before clip — –10 dBV (0.316 V) +4 dBV (1.58 V) Phono (Unbalanced) 600 Ω Lines — +4 dB (1.23 V) +18 dB (6.16 V) XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)2 150 Ω 10k Ω Lines — +4 dB (1.23 V) +18 dB (6.16 V) C-R MONITOR OUT LARGE [L, R] 150 Ω 600 Ω Lines — +4 dB (1.23 V) +18 dB (6.16 V) XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)2 C-R MONITOR OUT SMALL [L, R] 150 Ω 600 Ω Lines — +4 dB (1.23 V) +18 dB (6.16 V) XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)2 +18 dB (default) +4 dB (1.23 V) +18 dB (6.16 V) Phone Jack (TRS) +4 dB –10 dB (0.245 V) +4 dB (1.23 V) (Balanced)3 — +4 dB (1.23 V) +18 dB (6.16 V) Phone Jack (TRS) STEREO OUT [L, R] OMNI OUT 1–8 150 Ω INSERT OUT 1–24 150 Ω PHONES 100 Ω 10k Ω Lines 10k Ω Lines Phone Jack (TRS) (Balanced)3 (Balanced)3 8 Ω Phones — 4 mW 25 mW Stereo Phone Jack (TRS) 40 Ω Phones — 12 mW 75 mW (Unbalanced)4 1. The maximum output level of each OMNI OUT can be set internally. 2. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). 3. Phone jacks are balanced (Tip=HOT, Ring=COLD, Sleeve=GND). 4. PHONES stereo phone jack is unbalanced (Tip=LEFT, Ring=RIGHT, Sleeve=GND). STEREO OUT [L, R], 0 dBV is referenced to 1.00 Vrms. In these specifications, when dB represents a specific voltage, 0 dB is referenced to 0.775 Vrms. All output DA converters (except INSERT OUT 1–24) are 24-bit, 128-times oversampling. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 312 Appendix B: Specifications Digital Input Spec Input 2TR IN DIGITAL Format Data length Level 1 AES/EBU 24-bit RS422 XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)1 2 AES/EBU 24-bit RS422 XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)1 3 IEC-60958 24-bit — — CASCADE IN Connector 0.5 Vpp/75 Ω PHONO RS422 D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P (Female) 1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). Digital Output Spec Output 2TR OUT DIGITAL Format Data length Level Connector 1 AES/EBU1 Professional use 24-bit2 RS422 XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)3 2 AES/EBU1 Professional use 24-bit2 RS422 XLR-3-32 type (Balanced)3 3 IEC-609584 Consumer use 24-bit2 — — CASCADE OUT 1. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1, 2 Type: 2 audio channels Emphasis: NO Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration 2. Dither: word length 16/20/24 bit 3. XLR-3-32 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). 4. Channel status of 2TR OUT DIGITAL 3 Type: 2 audio channels Category code: 2 channel PCM encoder/decoder Copy prohibit: NO Emphasis: NO Clock accuracy: Level II (1000 ppm) Sampling rate: depends on the internal configuration DM2000—Owner’s Manual 0.5V pp/75 Ω Phono RS422 D-SUB Half Pitch Connector 68P (Female) I/O Slot Spec 313 I/O Slot Spec Each I/O SLOT accepts a digital interface card. Only SLOT #1 has a serial interface. Card Name Function Accept Input MY8-AT ADAT YES 8 IN MY8-TD TASCAM YES 8 IN MY8-AE AES/EBU YES 8 IN MY4-AD ANALOG IN YES 4 IN MY8-AD ANALOG IN YES 8 IN Number of available cards Output 8 OUT (depends on output 6 patch)1 8 OUT (depends on output 6 patch)1 8 OUT (depends on output 6 patch)1 — 6 — 6 4 OUT (depends on output MY4-DA ANALOG OUT YES — MY8-AD24 ANALOG IN YES 8 IN — 6 MY8-AD96 ANALOG IN YES 8 IN — 6 MY8-DA96 ANALOG OUT YES — MY8-AE96S AES/EBU YES 8 IN MY8-AE96 AES/EBU YES 8 IN 6 patch)1 8 OUT (depends on output 6 patch)1 8 OUT (depends on output 4 patch)1 8 OUT (depends on output 6 patch)1 1. See the Digital I/O chapter. Details depend on each interface card. Control I/O Spec I/O Port TO HOST MIDI TIME CODE IN WORD CLOCK CONTROL REMOTE Serial USB Format Level — RS422 Connector in Console Mini DIN Connector 8P USB 1.1 0 V–3.3 V IN MIDI — DIN Connector 5P OUT MIDI — DIN Connector 5P THRU MIDI — DIN Connector 5P MTC MIDI — DIN Connector 5P SMPTE SMPTE B type USB connector Nominal –10 dB/10k Ω XLR-3-31 type (Balanced)1 IN — TTL/75 Ω (ON/OFF)2 BNC Connector OUT 1, 2 — TTL/75 Ω BNC Connector — — D-SUB Connector 25P (Female) — RS422 PS/2 — DIN Connector 6P STORAGE CARD — — SmartMedia slot METER — RS422 KEYBOARD D-SUB Connector 9P (Male) D-SUB Connector 15P (Female) 1. XLR-3-31 type connectors are balanced (1=GND, 2=HOT, 3=COLD). 2. This switch is on the rear panel. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 314 Appendix B: Specifications Connector Pin Assignments CASCADE IN Pin Signal Pin CASCADE OUT Signal Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 GND 35 GND 1 GND 35 GND 2 INPUT 1-2(+) 36 INPUT 1-2(–) 2 OUTPUT 1-2(+) 36 OUTPUT 1-2(–) 3 INPUT 3-4(+) 37 INPUT 3-4(–) 3 OUTPUT 3-4(+) 37 OUTPUT 3-4(–) 4 INPUT 5-6(+) 38 INPUT 5-6(–) 4 OUTPUT 5-6(+) 38 OUTPUT 5-6(–) 5 INPUT 7-8(+) 39 INPUT 7-8(–) 5 OUTPUT 7-8(+) 39 OUTPUT 7-8(–) 6 INPUT 9-10(+) 40 INPUT 9-10(–) 6 OUTPUT 9-10(+) 40 OUTPUT 9-10(–) 7 INPUT 11-12(+) 41 INPUT 11-12(–) 7 OUTPUT 11-12(+) 41 OUTPUT 11-12(–) 8 INPUT 13-14(+) 42 INPUT 13-14(–) 8 OUTPUT 13-14(+) 42 OUTPUT 13-14(–) 9 INPUT 15-16(+) 43 INPUT 15-16(–) 9 OUTPUT 15-16(+) 43 OUTPUT 15-16(–) 10 DTR IN(+) 44 DTR IN(–) 10 DTR OUT(+) 44 DTR OUT(–) 11 RTS OUT(+) 45 RTS OUT(–) 11 RTS IN(+) 45 RTS IN(–) 12 GND 46 GND 12 GND 46 GND 13 WORD CLOCK IN(+) 47 WORD CLOCK IN(–) 13 WORD CLOCK OUT(+) 47 WORD CLOCK OUT(–) 14 WORD CLOCK OUT(+) 48 WORD CLOCK OUT(–) 14 WORD CLOCK IN(+) 48 WORD CLOCK IN(–) 15 CONTROL IN(+) 49 CONTROL IN(–) 15 CONTROL OUT(+) 49 CONTROL OUT(–) 16 CONTROL OUT(+) 50 CONTROL OUT(–) 16 CONTROL IN(+) 50 CONTROL IN(–) 17 GND 51 ID6 IN 17 GND 51 ID6 OUT 18 GND 52 ID6 OUT 18 GND 52 ID6 IN 19 INPUT 17-18(+) 53 INPUT 17-18(–) 19 OUTPUT 17-18(+) 53 OUTPUT 17-18(–) 20 INPUT 19-20(+) 54 INPUT 19-20(–) 20 OUTPUT 19-20(+) 54 OUTPUT 19-20(–) 21 INPUT 21-22(+) 55 INPUT 21-22(–) 21 OUTPUT 21-22(+) 55 OUTPUT 21-22(–) 22 INPUT 23-24(+) 56 INPUT 23-24(–) 22 OUTPUT 23-24(+) 56 OUTPUT 23-24(–) 23 RESERVED 57 RESERVED 23 RESERVED 57 RESERVED 24 RESERVED 58 RESERVED 24 RESERVED 58 RESERVED 25 RESERVED 59 RESERVED 25 RESERVED 59 RESERVED 26 RESERVED 60 RESERVED 26 RESERVED 60 RESERVED 27 ID0 IN 61 ID1 IN 27 ID0 OUT 61 ID1 OUT 28 ID2 IN 62 ID3 IN 28 ID2 OUT 62 ID3 OUT 29 ID4 IN 63 ID5 IN 29 ID4 OUT 63 ID5 OUT 30 ID0 OUT 64 ID1 OUT 30 ID0 IN 64 ID1 IN 31 ID2 OUT 65 ID3 OUT 31 ID2 IN 65 ID3 IN 32 ID4 OUT 66 ID5 OUT 32 ID4 IN 66 ID5 IN 33 MSB IN 67 2CH/LINE IN 33 MSB OUT 67 2CH/LINE OUT 34 FG 68 FG 34 FG 68 FG DM2000—Owner’s Manual Connector Pin Assignments 315 REMOTE Port Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 GND 6 RX+/GND1 2 RX–/RX–1 7 RTS/RX+1 3 TX–/TX+1 8 CTS/TX–1 4 TX+/GND1 9 GND 5 N.C. 1. RS422 (for AD824)/SONY 9-pin protocol (P2). CONTROL Port Pin Signal Pin Signal 1 GPO0 14 GPO1 2 GPO2 15 GPO3 3 GPO4 16 GPO5 4 GPO6 17 GPO7 5 GND 18 GND 6 GND 19 GND 7 GND 20 GND 8 GND 21 +5V 9 +5V 22 GPI0 10 GPI1 23 N.C. 11 N.C. 24 SOLO1 12 SMODE1 25 MAS/SLV1 13 SPARE1 1. For 02R SOLO control. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 247 mm 371 mm PAD DM2000—Owner’s Manual MATRIX 2 6 AUX 8 4 12 AUX AUX MATRIX 4 FADER MODE 11 7 3 3 DIO GROUP REMOTE SETUP INPUT PATCH METER 1 2 3 12 F2 OFF ON 8 7 COMP ON L INSERT ON FREQUENCY FREQUENCY FREQUENCY 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 1 70 50 2 50 30 50 30 60 40 50 20 30 30 15 40 20 30 15 40 20 15 40 20 10 20 10 10 10 5 5 0 15 5 5 70 50 60 40 10 0 15 5 0 10 5 5 10 0 5 0 3 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 4 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 5 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 6 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 7 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 8 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0 5 9 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 10 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 11 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 12 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 13 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 14 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 15 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 883.2 mm 820.8 mm Specifications and external appearance subject to change without notice. For European Model Purchaser/User Information specified in EN55103-1 and EN55103-2. Inrush Current: 31 A Conformed Environment: E1, E2, E3 and E4 70 60 50 40 30 20 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0 5 10 17 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 18 968 mm 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 19 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 20 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 21 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 22 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 23 10 70 50 60 40 50 30 40 20 30 15 20 10 15 5 10 0 5 5 0 0 24 5 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 CH17 CH18 CH19 CH20 CH21 CH22 CH23 CH24 17 900 mm 16 5 15 10 10 9 10 8 CH09 CH10 CH11 CH12 CH13 CH14 CH15 CH16 7 CH01 CH02 CH03 CH04 CH05 CH06 CH07 CH08 6 70 60 50 40 30 20 15 10 5 0 2 1 5 ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON 4 73 96 MASTER SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO SOLO 3 49 72 SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL SEL STEREO ON SEL AUTO STEREO REMOTE 4 REMOTE 2 REMOTE 3 25 48 AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO AUTO SEL REMOTE 1 AUTO 1 24 kHz Hz dB GAIN LAYER 10.0 Q FREQUENCY SEL kHz Hz dB GAIN HIGH AUTO 4.00 Q EFFECT HIGH MID SEL kHz Hz dB GAIN GRAB GAIN HOLD AUX 12 AUX 8 AUX 4 / MATRIX 4 AUTO 1.00 Q LINK LOW MID DECAY RELEASE AUX 7 AUX 11 ON LEVEL SEL kHz Hz dB GAIN R EVEN ATTACK ATTACK MIX AUX 3 / MATRIX 3 ON LEVEL FB AUTO 125 LOW RATIO AUX 10 AUX 6 AUX 2 / MATRIX 2 AUX 9 AUX 5 ON OFF ON TIME INSERT 24 SIGNAL DELAY OFF ON AUX 1 / MATRIX 1 LEVEL DISPLAY INSERT 23 SIGNAL ON RANGE L OFF ON ON THRESHOLD BANK LEVEL AUX / MATRIX SEND GATE / COMP THRESHOLD COMP ODD Q INSERT 22 SIGNAL SEL R OFF ON SELECTED CHANNEL INSERT 21 SIGNAL PHASE / INSERT OFF ON AUTO EQ ON ATT. EQUALIZER DISPLAY DISPLAY INSERT 20 SIGNAL GATE OFF ON PAN / SURROUND GATE ON DYNAMICS DIRECT 6 5 STEREO 2 4 1 3 INSERT 19 SIGNAL SEL PASTE COPY CHANNEL DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY OFF ON ROUTING INSERT 18 SIGNAL FOLLOW PAN DISPLAY INSERT 17 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUTO OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SEL 0 INSERT 16 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUTO OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SEL INSERT 15 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUTO 4 OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SEL F4 INSERT 14 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUTO 3 F3 OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SEL 2 INSERT 13 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUTO F1 OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SEL 1 INSERT SIGNAL OFF ON 11 INSERT SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUTO OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SEL INSERT 10 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUTO 8 4 OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SEL 7 INSERT 9 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUTO 6 OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SEL 5 0 OUTPUT PATCH VIEW UTILITY INSERT 8 SIGNAL INTERNAL GRAPHIC PLUG INS CHANNEL EFFECTS EQUALIZERS INSERTS EFFECTS / PLUG INS PAIR MIDI DATA OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUTO 4 DISPLAY INSERT 7 SIGNAL DISPLAY ACCESS OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SEL INSERT ASSIGN 6 INSERT SIGNAL OFF ON 5 INSERT SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUTO SEND ASSIGN ASSIGN FADER AUX/ MTRX AUX AUX AUX MATRIX 3 OFF ON -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V SEL OUTPUT 2 SEND LEVEL ASSIGN AUX/ MTRX PAN INPUT ASSIGN 1 PAN ENCODER MODE AUX 10 AUX 5 AUX 9 AUX AUX 2 AUX 1 AUX SELECT MATRIX 1 INSERT 4 SIGNAL -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 26dB + 48V AUTO DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY OFF ON 3.3V CARD INSERT MATRIX SELECT INSERT 3 1 INSERT -60 ON OFF GAIN PEAK -16 SIGNAL OFF ON -60 2 GAIN 26dB + 48V SIGNAL -16 ON OFF SIGNAL OFF ON -60 26dB + 48V PEAK GAIN ON OFF PEAK -16 26dB + 48V B 18 10 2 C 19 11 3 D 20 12 4 TRACK ARMING 10 9 1 2 3 FF ONLINE IN SCRUB SHUTTLE BACK 5 LATCH ENTER FORWARD 6 READ 12 13 5 4 OUT 5 POST QUICK PUNCH STOP LOOP 23 8 RECALL MASTER 24 16 SET 7 15 7 AUX ON TRIM MTR 8 16 8 EQ OFF PLAY DEC REC ROLL REHEARSAL MASTER BACK 6 14 6 PAN SURROUND AUX 4 7 15 10 STUDIO LEVEL 0 RETURN RELATIVE TOUCH SENSE ALL CLEAR 22 14 OVERWRITE TOUCH ABORT/ AUTOUNDO REC STORE 21 13 LOCATE MEMORY DISPLAY HISTORY REW END AUDITION PRE RETURN TO ZERO 11 3 LOCATOR 2 DISPLAY ON WRITE REC USER DEFINED KEYS FADER SUSPEND ENABLE AUTOMIX 00 SCENE MEMORY 1 DISPLAY DISPLAY DISPLAY TRACK ARMING GROUP A 17 9 1 DISPLAY 10 SMALL TRIM 0 0 10 CONTROL ROOM AUX 12 STEREO 2TR A1 2TR A2 ASSIGN 2 STEREO BUS ASSIGN 2 DIMMER INC TALKBACK SLATE TALKBACK 0 10 CONTROL ROOM LEVEL SMALL MONO SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL ASSIGN 1 SURROUND ASSIGN 1 2TR D3 2TR D2 2TR D1 STEREO CONTROL ROOM CLEAR SOLO CONTRAST SOLO AUX 11 10 MONITOR STUDIO DISPLAY PHONES LEVEL 0 PHONES TALKBACK LEVEL 316 Appendix B: Specifications Dimensions Scene Memory to Program Change Table 317 Appendix C: MIDI Scene Memory to Program Change Table Program Change # Initial Scene # 1 2 User Scene # Program Change # Initial Scene # 01 44 02 45 3 03 4 04 5 User Scene # Program Change# Initial Scene # 44 87 87 45 88 88 46 46 89 89 47 47 90 90 05 48 48 91 91 6 06 49 49 92 92 7 07 50 50 93 93 8 08 51 51 94 94 9 09 52 52 95 95 10 10 53 53 96 96 11 11 54 54 97 97 12 12 55 55 98 98 13 13 56 56 99 99 14 14 57 57 100 00 15 15 58 58 101 — 16 16 59 59 102 — 17 17 60 60 103 — 18 18 61 61 104 — 19 19 62 62 105 — 20 20 63 63 106 — 21 21 64 64 107 — 22 22 65 65 108 — 23 23 66 66 109 — 24 24 67 67 110 — 25 25 68 68 111 — 26 26 69 69 112 — 27 27 70 70 113 — 28 28 71 71 114 — 29 29 72 72 115 — 30 30 73 73 116 — 31 31 74 74 117 — 32 32 75 75 118 — 33 33 76 76 119 — 34 34 77 77 120 — 35 35 78 78 121 — 36 36 79 79 122 — 37 37 80 80 123 — 38 38 81 81 124 — 39 39 82 82 125 — 40 40 83 83 126 — 41 41 84 84 127 — 42 42 85 85 128 — 43 43 86 86 User Scene # DM2000—Owner’s Manual 318 Appendix C: MIDI Initial Parameter to Control Change Table # 0 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 20 21 22 23 24 25 26 27 28 29 30 31 32 33 34 35 36 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 47 48 49 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 High NO ASSIGN FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H FADER H NO ASSIGN FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L Mid Low CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT26 INPUT27 DM2000—Owner’s Manual # 60 61 62 63 64 65 66 67 68 69 70 71 72 73 74 75 76 77 78 79 80 81 82 83 84 85 86 87 88 89 90 91 92 93 94 95 96 97 98 99 100 101 102 103 104 105 106 107 108 109 110 111 112 113 114 115 116 117 118 119 High FADER L FADER L FADER L FADER L ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON ON PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN PAN Mid CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL CHANNEL Low INPUT28 INPUT29 INPUT30 INPUT31 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 INPUT7 INPUT8 INPUT9 INPUT10 INPUT11 INPUT12 INPUT13 INPUT14 INPUT15 INPUT16 INPUT17 INPUT18 INPUT19 INPUT20 INPUT21 INPUT22 INPUT23 INPUT24 INPUT25 INPUT1 INPUT2 INPUT3 INPUT4 INPUT5 INPUT6 MIDI Data Format 319 MIDI Data Format 1. CHANNEL MESSAGE Command 8n NOTE OFF 9n NOTE ON Bn CONTROL CHANGE Cn PROGRAM CHANGE 4.2.2 PARAMETER CHANGE rx/tx rx rx rx/tx rx/tx function Control the internal effects Control the internal effects Control parameters Switch scene memories 2. SYSTEM COMMON MESSAGE Command F1 MIDI TIME CODE QUARTER FRAME F2 SONG POSITION POINTER rx/tx rx rx function Used when TIME REFERENCE is MIDI CLOCK. Used when TIME REFERENCE is MIDI CLOCK. 3. SYSTEM REALTIME MESSAGE Command F8 TIMING CLOCK FA START rx/tx rx rx* FB CONTINUE rx* FC STOP FE ACTIVE SENSING FF RESET rx* rx rx function MIDI clock Start automix (from the beginning) Start automix (from the middle) Stop automix Check MIDI cable connections Clear running status Received only when the Automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK. 4. EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE Command F0 43 1n 3E 06 PARAMETER CHANGE F0 43 3n 3E 06 PARAMETER REQUEST F0 43 1n 3E 7F PARAMETER CHANGE F0 43 3n 3E 7F PARAMETER REQUEST rx/tx rx/tx rx/tx rx/tx rx/tx function DM2000-specific parameter change DM2000-specific parameter request General purpose digital mixer parameter change General purpose digital mixer parameter request The following data types of parameter change are used by the DM2000. Type 1 2 3 4 16 32 33 34 tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx function Edit buffer Patch data Setup data Backup data Function (recall, store, title, pair) Key remote remote meter remote counter 4.2.3 Card Filer Command F0 43 5n CARD FILER rx/tx rx/tx Function Packet for card filer (refer to Card Filer specification) ** tx means that the data can be transmitted from the DM2000. rx means that the data can be received by the DM2000. Format Details 4.1 Real Time System Exclusive Command F0 7F dd 06 MMC COMMAND rx/tx tx F0 7F dd 07 MMC RESPONSE rx F0 7F dd 01 MIDI TIME CODE rx function MMC command (refer to MMC specification) MMC response (refer to MMC specification) Used when TIME REFERENCE is MTC. 1. NOTE OFF (8n) Reception Received when the [Rx CH] matches. Used to control effects. STATUS DATA 1000nnnn 8n Note off message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (ignored) 4.2 System Exclusive Message 2. NOTE ON (9n) 4.2.1 Bulk Dump Command rx/tx F0 43 0n 7E BULK DUMP DATA rx/tx F0 43 2n 7E BULK DUMP REQUEST rx/tx function BULK DUMP DATA BULK DUMP REQUEST The following data types of bulk dump are used on the DM2000. Data name 'm' 'S' 'a' 'R' 'O' 'H' 'G' 'Y' 'Q' 'E' 'F' 'J' 'K' 'P' 'C' 'L' 'I' 'V' 'N' tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx function Scene Memory & Request Setup Memory & Request Automix data & Request Input patch library & Request Output patch library & Request Channel library & Request Gate library & Request Compressor library & Request Equalizer library & Request Effect library & Request GEQ library & Request Bus to Stereo library & Request Surround Monitor library & Request Program change table & Request Control change table & Request User define layer & Request Plug-in User define & Request User define key & Request Plug-in Effect Card Data & Request Reception Received when the [Rx CH] matches. Used to control effects. STATUS DATA 1001nnnn 9n Note on message 0nnnnnnn nn Note number 0vvvvvvv vv Velocity (1-127:on, 0:off) 3. CONTROL CHANGE (Bn) Reception Received when [Control Change Rx] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, this is received regardless of the channel. If [Control Change ECHO] is ON, these messages are echoed to MIDI OUT. If [TABLE] is selected, parameters will be controlled according to the settings of the [Control assign table]. The parameters that can be set are defined in the CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN PARAMETER LIST. If [NRPN] is selected, four messages are used to control the defined parameter: NRPN control numbers (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control numbers (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN PARAMETER LIST. Transmission If [TABLE] is selected, operating the parameters specified in the [Control assign table] will cause these messages to be transmitted on the [Tx CH] if [Control Change TX] is ON. The parameters that can be specified are defined in the CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN PARAMETER LIST. If [NRPN] is selected, operating the specified parameters will cause data to be transmitted on the [Tx CH] if [Control Change TX] is ON, using four messages: NRPN control numbers (62h, 63h) and DATA ENTRY control numbers (06h, 26h). Parameter settings are defined in the CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN PARAMETER LIST. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 320 Appendix C: MIDI 8. CONTINUE (FB) If [TABLE] is selected STATUS DATA 1011nnnn Bn Control change 0ccccccc cc Control number (0-95, 102-119) 0vvvvvvv vv Control value (0-127) If [NRPN] is selected STATUS DATA STATUS DATA STATUS DATA STATUS DATA 1011nnnn 01100010 0vvvvvvv 1011nnnn 01100011 0vvvvvvv 1011nnnn 00100110 0vvvvvvv 1011nnnn 00000110 0vvvvvvv Bn 62 vv Bn 63 vv Bn 26 vv Bn 06 vv STATUS Control change 9. STOP (FC) LSB of parameter number Control change *1 Reception This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, and will cause automix to stop. *1 STATUS NRPN MSB MSB of parameter number Control change 11111100 FC Stop LSB of data entry LSB of parameter data Control change *1, *2 MSB of data entry *2 MSB of parameter data *2 4. PROGRAM CHANGE (Cn) Reception This message is received if [Program Change RX] is ON and [Rx CH] matches. However if [OMNI] is ON, this is received regardless of the channel. A scene memory will be recalled according to the settings of the [Program Change Table]. This message will be echoed if [Program Change ECHO] is ON. Transmission If [Program Change TX] is ON, this message is transmitted according to the settings of the [Program Change Table] on the [Tx CH] channel when a scene memory is recalled. If the recalled scene has been assigned to more than one program number, the lowest-numbered program number will be transmitted. Transmission to Studio Manager using Program Change messages will not be performed since there is no guarantee that the contents of the tables will match. (Parameter Changes will always be used.) 1100nnnn Cn Program change 0nnnnnnn nn Program number (0-127) 5. SONG POSITION POINTER (F2) Reception If this is received when the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, the automix will move to the song position that was received. STATUS DATA 11111011 FB Continue NRPN LSB *1) There is no particular need to add the 2nd, 3rd, and 4th status for transmission. However if these are present during reception, they should be received. *2) Does not need to be transmitted if the parameter data fits within 7 bits. STATUS DATA Reception This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, and will cause automix to start from the current song position. In actuality, automix will start when the next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the CONTINUE message. 11110010 F2 Song position pointer 0vvvvvvv vv Song position LSB 0vvvvvvv vv Song position MSB 10. ACTIVE SENSING (FE) Reception Once this message has been received, the failure to receive any message for an interval of 400 ms or longer will cause MIDI transmission to be initialized, such as by clearing the Running Status. STATUS 11111101 FE Active sensing 11. SYSTEM RESET (FF) Reception When this message is received, MIDI communications will be cleared, e.g., by clearing the Running Status. STATUS 11111111 FF System reset 12. SYSTEM EXCLUSIVE MESSAGE (F0) 12.1 MIDI MACHINE CONTROL (MMC) These messages are transmitted when the Machine Control section of the DM2000 is operated. For details, refer to the MMC specification. 12.2 BULK DUMP This message sends or receives the contents of various memories stored within the DM2000. The basic format is as follows. For DUMP DATA F0 43 0n 7E cc cc <Model ID> tt mm mm [Data ...] cs F7 For DUMP REQUEST F0 43 2n 7E <Model ID> tt mm mm F7 Device Number n DATA COUNT (the number of bytes that follow this, ending cc cc before the checksum) <Model ID> Model ID (for the DM2000, this is 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 tt mm mm cs 32) DATA TYPE DATA NUMBER CHECK SUM 6. TIMING CLOCK (F8) Reception If the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, this message is used to synchronize automix. It is also used to control effects. This message is transmitted 24 times per quarter note. STATUS A unique header (Model ID) is used to determine whether the device is a DM2000. CHECK SUM is obtained by adding the bytes that follow BYTE COUNT (LOW) and end before CHECK SUM, taking the binary compliment of this sum, and then setting bit 7 to 0. 11111000 F8 Timing clock CHECK SUM = (-sum)&0x7F 7. START (FA) Reception This message is received if the automix TIME REFERENCE setting is MIDI CLOCK, and will start the automix. In actuality, automix will start when the next TIMING CLOCK is received after receiving the START message. STATUS 11111010 FA Start Reception This message is received if [Bulk RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. When a bulk dump is received, it is immediately written into the specified memory. When a bulk dump request is received, a bulk dump is immediately transmitted. Transmission This message is transmitted on the [Tx CH] by key operations in the [MIDI]-[BULK DUMP] screen. A bulk dump is transmitted on the [Rx CH] in response to a bulk dump DM2000—Owner’s Manual Format Details request. The data area is handled by converting seven words of 8-bit data into eight words of 7-bit data. [Conversion from actual data into bulk data] d[0~6]: actual data b[0~7]: bulk data b[0] = 0; for( I=0; I<7; I++){ if( d[I]&0x80){ b[0] |= 1<<(6-I); } b[I+1] = d[I]&0x7F; } [Restoration from bulk data into actual data] d[0~6]: actual data b[0~7]: bulk data for( I=0; I<7; I++){ b[0] <<= 1; d[I] = b[I+1]+(0x80&b[0]); } 12.2.1 Scene memory bulk dump format The DM2000 can transmit and receive scene memories in compressed form. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01101101 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt DATA CHECK SUM EOX F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 6D mh ml tt EOX STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01010011 00000010 00000000 BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01101101 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 6D mh ml F7 STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. m=0-99, 256(Scene0-99, EDIT BUFFER) Receive is effective 1-99, 256 Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'm' m=0-99, 256(Scene0-99, EDIT BUFFER) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'S' No.256 = Current : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive 12.2.4 Setup memory bulk dump request format 'm' System exclusive message n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) CHECK SUM EOX '2' : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 total block number(minimum number is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) 0ddddddd ds Scene data of block[mm] : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 System exclusive message DATA data count = ch * 128 + cl 'L' F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 53 02 00 tt total block number(minimum number is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) 0ddddddd ds Setup memory data Universal bulk dump The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the scene number that is being requested. If this is 256, the data of the edit buffer will be bulk-dumped. DATA NAME Of the setup memory of the DM2000, this bulk-dumps data other than the User define layer, User define plug-in, User define keys, Control change table, and Program change table. Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) 12.2.2 Scene memory bulk dump request format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. 12.2.3 Setup memory bulk dump format System exclusive message n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 321 DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01010011 00000010 00000000 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 53 02 00 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'S' No.256 = Current End of exclusive 12.2.5 User define layer bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases) change if the same bank is being used. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' End of exclusive DM2000—Owner’s Manual 322 Appendix C: MIDI DATA NAME 01001100 00000000 0bbbbbbb BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt 4C 'L' 00 bb b=0-3(bank no.1-4) tt total block number(minimum number 12.2.6 User define layer bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. 12.2.9 User Define Key bulk dump format DATA is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) 0ddddddd ds User define layer CHECK SUM EOX : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01001100 00000000 0bbbbbbb 11110111 : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 4C 00 bb F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'L' b=0-3(bank no.1-4) End of exclusive The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases) change if the same bank is being used. 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01001001 00000000 0bbbbbbb BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 49 00 bb tt 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'I' b=0-7(bank no.1-8) End of exclusive The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. Be aware that the state of the transmission destination will (in some cases) change if the same bank is being used. Universal bulk dump 12.2.7 User define plug-in bulk dump format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 49 00 bb F7 Universal bulk dump FORMAT No. 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01001001 00000000 0bbbbbbb EOX 11110111 STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 cccccccc cccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01010110 00000000 0bbbbbbb BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'I' DATA CHECK SUM EOX : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive data count = ch * 128 + cl 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'V' b=0-3(bank no.A-D) : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive 12.2.10 User Define Key bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. b=0-7(bank no.1-8) total block number(minimum number is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) 0ddddddd ds User define plug-in data Universal bulk dump CHECK SUM EOX data count = ch * 128 + cl '' n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 Universal bulk dump 'M' Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) DATA Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) 'L' System exclusive message total block number(minimum number is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) 0ddddddd ds User define key data System exclusive message n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 56 00 bb tt DATA NAME BANK No. 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01010110 00000000 0bbbbbbb 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 56 00 bb F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'V' b=0-3(bank no.A-D) 12.2.8 User define plug-in bulk dump request format EOX The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. 12.2.11 Control change table bulk dump format STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) DM2000—Owner’s Manual End of exclusive Format Details FORMAT No. 01111110 7E COUNT HIGH 00000011 ch COUNT LOW 00010010 cl 01001100 4C 01001101 4D 00100000 20 00100000 20 00111000 38 01000011 43 00110001 31 00110010 32 DATA NAME 01000011 43 00000000 02 00000000 00 BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt DATA data count = ch * 128 + cl 'L' 'M' '' : 'C' '1' '2' 'C' No.256 = Current (342/7)*8+(342%7)+1=391bytes→ unfixed 0ddddddd de 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F 11110111 F7 End of exclusive DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01000011 00000000 00000000 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 43 02 00 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'C' No.256 = Current End of exclusive 12.2.13 Program change table bulk dump format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01010000 00000000 00000000 BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 50 02 00 tt STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. '8' 12.2.12 Control change table bulk dump request format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. 12.2.14 Program change table bulk dump request format '' total block number(minimum number is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) 0ddddddd ds Control change table data : CHECK SUM EOX Universal bulk dump System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01010000 00000000 00000000 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 50 02 00 F7 STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01010001 LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb '2' 'P' No.256 = Current DATA total block number(minimum number is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) 0ddddddd ds Program change table data CHECK SUM EOX : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'P' No.256 = Current End of exclusive F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 51 bb System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'Q' 0-199(EQ Library no.1-200), 256-(channel current data) is 0) number) 'M' '1' Universal bulk dump 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block 'L' 'C' n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bb BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number DATA '8' Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) 12.2.15 Equalizer library bulk dump format data count = ch * 128 + cl '' System exclusive message The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. 0:Library no.1 - 199:Library no.200, 256:CH1 - 351:CH96, 384:BUS1 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 - 523:AUX12, 640:MATRIX1L - 647:MATRIX4R, 768:STEREO L - 769:STEREO R 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer. For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (40-199, 256-) Universal bulk dump '' 323 CHECK SUM EOX 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 ds EQ Library data : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive 12.2.16 Equalizer library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the bank number. (See above) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' DM2000—Owner’s Manual 324 Appendix C: MIDI DATA NAME 01010001 51 'Q' LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bb 0-199(EQ Library no.1-200), ID No. 01000011 SUB STATUS 0000nnnn 43 Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) 0n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI FORMAT No. 01111110 COUNT HIGH 0ccccccc COUNT LOW 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01000111 LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 47 bh LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt bl tt total block number(minimum number 256-(channel current data) LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bb EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 12.2.17 Compressor library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.1 - 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 - 351:CH96, 384:BUS1 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 - 523:AUX12, 640:MATRIX1L - 647:MATRIX4R, 768:STEREO L - 769:STEREO R 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer. For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (36-127, 256-) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01011001 LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 59 bb System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' '' '8' 'C' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'G' 0-127(GATE Library no.1-128), 256-351(channel current data) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 ds GATE Library data : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive number) DATA CHECK SUM EOX The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) 'Y' 0-127(COMP Library no.1-128), 256-(channel current data) : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive 12.2.18 Compressor library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01000111 LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 47 bh System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'G' 0-127(GATE Library no.1-128), 256-351(channel current data) LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 12.2.21 Effect library bulk dump format 'L' The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.1 - 127:Library no.128, 256:EFFECT1 - 263:EFFEC8 256-263 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer. For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (52-127, 256-263) 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'Y' 0-127(COMP Library no.1-128), 256-(channel current data) LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bb EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 12.2.19 Gate library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.1 - 127:Library no.128, 256:CH1 - 351:CH96 256 and following are data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer. For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (4-127, 256-) DM2000—Owner’s Manual '' 12.2.20 Gate library bulk dump request format CHECK SUM EOX 11110000 '' '2' : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 STATUS 'M' '1' DATA F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 59 bb 'L' is 0) '' is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) 0ddddddd ds COMP Library data 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01011001 LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb data count = ch * 128 + cl data count = ch * 128 + cl LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bb BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. Channel) Universal bulk dump F0 System exclusive message DATA NAME 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01000110 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 46 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'E' Format Details LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bh 0-127(Effect Library no.1-128), 256-263(Effect1-8 current) LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) DATA CHECK SUM EOX 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 ds Effect Library data : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive 12.2.22 Effect library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01000110 LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 46 bh System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'E' 0-127(Effect Library no.1-128), 256-263(Effect1-8 current) LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 12.2.23 GEQ library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 - 128:Library no.128, 256:GEQ1 - 261:GEQ6 256-261 are the data for the corresponding area of the edit buffer. For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (1-128, 256-261) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01000111 LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 47 bh System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl ID No. 01000011 43 Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) SUB STATUS 0010nnnn 2n n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) FORMAT No. 01111110 7E Universal bulk dump 01001100 4C 'L' 01001101 4D 'M' 00100000 20 ' ' 00100000 20 ' ' 00111000 38 '8' 01000011 43 'C' 00110001 31 '1' 00110010 32 '2' DATA NAME 01000111 47 'F' LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb bh 0-128(GEQ Library no.0-128), 256-261(GEQ1-6 current) LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 12.2.25 Channel library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 - 128:Library no.128, 256:CH1 - 351:CH96, 384:BUS1 - 391:BUS8, 512:AUX1 - 523:AUX12, 640:MATRIX1L - 647:MATRIX4R, 768:STEREO L - 769:STEREO R 256 and following are the data for the corresponding channel of the edit buffer. For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (2-128, 256-) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01001001 LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 49 bh System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'H' 0-128(Channel Library no.0-128), 256-(current) LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block 'L' 'M' '' number) DATA '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'F' 0-128(GEQ Library no.0-128), 256-261(GEQ1-6 Current) LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number DATA is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) 0ddddddd ds GEQ Library data CHECK SUM EOX : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive 12.2.24 GEQ library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) STATUS 325 11110000 F0 System exclusive message CHECK SUM EOX 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 ds channel Library data : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive 12.2.26 Channel library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. (See above) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 DATA NAME 01001001 LIB. No. H 0bbbbbbb F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 49 bh System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'H' 0-128(Channel Library no.0-128), 256-(current) DM2000—Owner’s Manual 326 Appendix C: MIDI LIB. No. L 0bbbbbbb bl EOX 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 12.2.27 Input patch library bulk dump format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current input patch data For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01010010 0bbbbbbb F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 52 bh DATA NAME Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 'M' 'C' '1' '2' 'R' 0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) DATA CHECK SUM EOX : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 CHECK SUM EOX DATA NAME EOX System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. DATA NAME EOX DM2000—Owner’s Manual 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 ds Input Patch Library data : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01001111 0bbbbbbb F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 4F bh System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'O' 0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) 0bbbbbbb bl 11110111 F7 End of exclusive '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'R' STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current output patch data For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256) F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current data For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. 0bbbbbbb bl 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 'O' 12.2.31 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump format 12.2.29 Output patch library bulk dump format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW '2' The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current output patch data The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current input patch data F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 52 bh '1' 12.2.30 Output patch library bulk dump request format : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive 12.2.28 Input patch library bulk dump request format 'C' number) 'L' '8' '8' is 0) DATA '' '' 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block data count = ch * 128 + cl '' '' 00100000 bl BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number Universal bulk dump is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) 0ddddddd ds Input Patch Library data 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01010010 0bbbbbbb 20 20 38 43 31 32 4F bh System exclusive message 0bbbbbbb bl BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01001111 0bbbbbbb DATA NAME System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'J' 0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) is 0) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block number) data count = ch * 128 + cl DATA 'M' F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 4A bh 0bbbbbbb bl BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number Universal bulk dump 'L' 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01001010 0bbbbbbb 0ddddddd ds Input Patch Library data : : 0ddddddd de Format Details CHECK SUM EOX 0eeeeeee ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 12.2.32 Bus to Stereo library bulk dump request format The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current data STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. DATA NAME EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01001010 0bbbbbbb F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 4A bh DATA NAME System exclusive message DATA NAME 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'J' 0-32 (Library no.0-32), 256 (Current data) System exclusive message STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW DATA NAME n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump DATA data count = ch * 128 + cl 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'K' 0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) is 0) number) CHECK SUM EOX ds Input Patch Library data : de ee ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F F7 End of exclusive CHECK SUM EOX F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 0-32(Library no.0-32), 256(Current data) 0bbbbbbb bl 11110111 F7 End of exclusive System exclusive message STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. DATA NAME Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01000001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 0xxxxxxx 0xxxxxxx 0yyyyyyy 0yyyyyyy 0000iiii 0000iiii 0000jjjj 0000jjjj 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 41 mh ml xh xl yh yl System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump data count = ch * 128 + cl 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'N' 0-5 (SLOT1-6) block count (High) block count (Low) total size (High) total size (Low) Developer id (High) Developer id (Low) Product id (High) Product id (Low) ds : de ee F7 Plug-in Effect card memory data (1024/7)*8+(1024%7)+1=1171bytes ee=(Invert('L'+...+de)+1)&0x7F End of exclusive The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the library number. 0:SLOT 1 - 5:SLOT 6 The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current data 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 'K' 12.2.36 Plug-in effect card bulk dump request format 12.2.34 Surround Monitor library bulk dump request format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. '2' The second byte of the DATA NAME indicates the slot number. 0:SLOT 1 - 5:SLOT 6 The data is not received if the Developer ID and Product ID are different than the card that is installed in the slot. The data is not transmitted if a valid plug-in effect card is not installed. Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) 0bbbbbbb bb current block number(0-total block 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 0eeeeeee 11110111 '1' 12.2.35 Plug-in effect card bulk dump format Universal bulk dump 0bbbbbbb bl BLOCK INFO. 0ttttttt tt total block number(minimum number DATA 'C' n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) The second and third bytes of the DATA NAME indicate the library number. 0:Library no.0 - 32:Library no.32, 256:current data For reception by the DM2000, only the user area is valid. (1-32, 256) F0 43 0n 7E ch cl 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 4B bh '8' EOX 0bbbbbbb bl 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 11110000 01000011 0000nnnn 01111110 0ccccccc 0ccccccc 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01001011 0bbbbbbb 38 43 31 32 4B bh Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) 12.2.33 Surround Monitor library bulk dump format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS FORMAT No. COUNT HIGH COUNT LOW 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01001011 0bbbbbbb 327 EOX 11110000 01000011 0010nnnn 01111110 01001100 01001101 00100000 00100000 00111000 01000011 00110001 00110010 01000001 0mmmmmmm 0mmmmmmm 11110111 F0 43 2n 7E 4C 4D 20 20 38 43 31 32 41 mm ml F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Universal bulk dump 'L' 'M' '' '' '8' 'C' '1' '2' 'A' 0-5 (SLOT1-6) End of exclusive 'L' 'M' '' '' DM2000—Owner’s Manual 328 Appendix C: MIDI 12.3 PARAMETER CHANGE 12.3.1 Parameter change basic format STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 0ttttttt 0eeeeeee F0 43 1n 3E 06 tt ee System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Data type Element No. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter No. DATA *) EOX 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 cc Channel No. dd Data : F7 End of exclusive Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled. Transmission If [Parameter change TX] is ON and a parameter not specified in the [Control assign table] is modified, this message will be transmitted with the device number specified by the [Tx CH]. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS System exclusive message 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 0ttttttt 0eeeeeee F0 43 1n 3E 7F tt ee 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 cc Channel No. dd Data : F7 End of exclusive Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Data type Element No. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter No. DATA *) EOX DATA EOX F0 43 3n 3E 06 tt ee STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Data type 0ccccccc cc Channel No. 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 12.3.4 Parameter request basic format (Universal format) STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 01111111 0ttttttt 0eeeeeee F0 43 3n 3E 7F tt ee (Edit buffer) 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 01111111 00000001 0eeeeeee F0 43 3n 3E 7F 01 ee System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Edit Buffer 0ccccccc cc Channel No. 11110111 F7 End of exclusive STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS Universal DATA Consult your dealer for parameter address details. (Edit buffer) System exclusive message 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00000010 0eeeeeee F0 43 1n 3E 06 02 ee 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 cc Channel No. dd Data : F7 End of exclusive Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Patch data Element No. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter No. MODEL ID (digital mixer) Data type (Patch data) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the specified parameter will be controlled. n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) 12.3.5 Parameter Address DM2000—Owner’s Manual Edit Buffer 12.3.8 Parameter change Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) 0ccccccc cc Channel No. 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 12.3.6 Parameter change EOX System exclusive message Element No. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter No. EOX Universal n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Element No. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter No. EOX MODEL ID (digital mixer) Element No. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter No. System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) cc Channel No. dd Data : F7 End of exclusive n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter Change. 12.3.3 Parameter request basic format 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00000110 0ttttttt 0eeeeeee 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) 12.3.7 Parameter request For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be transmitted. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS F0 43 1n 3E 7F 01 ee Element No. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter No. For parameters with a data size of 2 or more, data for that size will be transmitted. 12.3.2 Parameter Change basic format (Universal format) System exclusive message 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 01111111 00000001 0eeeeeee EOX 12.3.9 Parameter request (Patch data) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter Change. STATUS 11110000 F0 System exclusive message Format Details ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00000110 00000010 0eeeeeee 43 3n 3E 06 02 ee Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Patch data Element No. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter No. EOX 0ccccccc cc Channel No. 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 12.3.10 Parameter change (Setup memory) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be controlled. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS System exclusive message 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00000011 0eeeeeee F0 43 1n 3E 06 03 ee 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : 11110111 cc Channel No. dd Data : F7 End of exclusive Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Setup memory Element No. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter No. DATA EOX 12.3.11 Parameter request (Setup memory) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter Change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00000110 00000011 0eeeeeee F0 43 3n 3E 06 03 ee System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 0ccccccc cc Channel No. 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 12.3.12 Parameter change (Backup memory) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be controlled. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00000100 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ccccccc 0ddddddd : F0 43 1n 3E 06 04 ee pp cc dd : 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 12.3.13 Parameter request (Backup memory) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the value of the specified parameter will be transmitted as a Parameter Change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00000110 00000100 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ccccccc 11110111 F0 43 3n 3E 06 04 ee pp cc F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Backup memory Element No. Parameter No. Channel No. End of exclusive 12.3.14 Parameter change (Function call Library: store/recall) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the specified memory/library will be stored/recalled. Transmission If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00010000 00ffffff 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 7F 10 ff aa aa dd dd F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Address UU Address UL (function) Address LU (number H) Address LL (number L) channel High channel Low End of exclusive function SCENE RECALL 0x00 number 0-99 channel*1) 256 EQ LIB RECALL GATE LIB RECALL COMP LIB RECALL EFF LIB RECALL GEQ LIB RECALL CHANNEL LIB RECALL INPATCH LIB RECALL OUTPATCH LIB RECALL Bus to Stereo LIB RECALL Surround Monitor LIB RECALL AUTOMIX LIB RECALL 0x01 0x02 0x03 0x04 0x05 0x06 0x07 0x08 0x09 0x0A 0x0B 1-200 1-128 1-128 1-128 0-128 0-128 0-32 0-32 0-32 0-32 1-16 0-513 0-95 0-513 0-7 0-5 0-513 256 256 256 256 256 tx/rx tx*2)/r x tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx SCENE STORE EQ LIB STORE GATE LIB STORE COMP LIB STORE EFF LIB STORE GEQ LIB STORE CHANNEL LIB STORE INPATCH LIB STORE OUTPATCH LIB STORE Bus to Stereo LIB STORE Surround Monitor LIB STORE AUTOMIX LIB STORE 0x20 0x21 0x22 0x23 0x24 0x25 0x26 0x27 0x28 0x29 0x2A 0x2B 1-99 41-200 5-128 37-128 53-128 1-128 3-128 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-32 1-32 256, 16383 0-513, 16383 0-96, 16383 0-513, 16383 0-7, 16383 0-5, 16383 0-513, 16383 256, 16383 256, 16383 256, 16383 256, 16383 256, 16383 tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx tx/rx Setup memory Element No. (If ‘ee’ is 0, ‘ee’ is expanded to two bytes) 0ppppppp pp Parameter No. EOX EOX System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Backup memory Element No. Parameter No. 329 Channel No. Data *1) 0:CH1 - 95:CH96, 128:BUS1 - 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 267:AUX12, 384:MATRIX1L - 391:MATRIX4R, 512:STEREO L - 513:STEREO R Use 256 if the recall destination or store source is a single data DM2000—Owner’s Manual 330 Appendix C: MIDI item. Effect is 0:Effect 1–7:Effect 8, GEQ is 0:GEQ1–5:GEQ6 If the store destination is 16383 (0x3FFF), this indicates that the library data has been changed by a external cause (i.e., loading from SmartMedia) (only transmitted by the DM2000) *2) This is also transmitted when a program that has not been assigned to the [Program change table] is recalled. (Normally this would be transmitted as a program change message.) 12.3.15 Parameter change (Function call: title) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the title of the specified memory/library will be changed 12.3.17 Parameter change (Function call: Scene/Library Clear) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the specified memory/library will be stored/recalled. Transmission If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS Transmission In response to a request, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the [Rx CH]. If [Parameter change ECHO] is ON, this message will be retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00010000 0100aaaa 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 0ddddddd : 0ddddddd 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 7F 10 4a nn nn dd : dd F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call Library Address UL (function) Address LU (number H) Address LL (number L) title 1 EOX function SCENE LIB CLEAR EQ LIB CLEAR GATE LIB CLEAR COMP LIB CLEAR EFF LIB CLEAR GEQ LIB CLEAR CHANNEL LIB CLEAR INPATCH LIB CLEAR OUTPATCH LIB CLEAR Bus to Stereo LIB CLEAR Surround Monitor LIB CLEAR AUTOMIX LIB CLEAR EQ LIB TITLE GATE LIB TITLE COMP LIB TITLE EFF LIB TITLE GEQ LIB TITLE CHANNEL LIB TITLE INPATCH LIB TITLE OUTPATCH LIB TITLE Bus to Stereo LIB TITLE Surround Monitor LIB TITLE AUTOMIX LIB TITLE 0x41 0x42 0x43 0x44 0x45 0x46 0x47 0x48 0x49 0x4A 0x4B number 0-99, 256(0:response only) 1-200(1-40:response only) 1-128(1-4:response only) 1-128(1-36:response only) 1-128(1-52:response only) 0-128(0:response only) 0-128(0-1:response only) 0-32(0:response only) 0-32(0:response only) 0-32(0:response only) 0-32(0:response only) 1-16 size 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 16 STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 12.3.16 Parameter request (Function call: title) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, a Parameter Change message will be transmitted on the [Rx CH]. Refer to the above table for the Functions and Numbers. EOX Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call Library Address UL (function) Address LU (number H) Address LL (number L) End of exclusive 0x60 0x61 0x62 0x63 0x64 0x65 0x66 0x67 0x68 0x69 0x6A 0x6B number 1-99 41-200 5-128 37-128 1-128 0-128 2-128 0-32 0-32 0-32 0-32 1-16 Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, pairing will be enabled/disabled for the specified channel. (Items other than PAIR are reserved for future use.) DATA F0 43 3n 3E 7F 10 4a nn nn F7 System exclusive message 12.3.18 Parameter change (Function call: pair, copy) End of exclusive 0x40 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00000110 00010000 0100aaaa 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 7F 10 6a nn nn F7 title x(depend on the library) function SCENE LIB TITLE STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00010000 0110aaaa 0nnnnnnn 0nnnnnnn 11110111 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call Library Address UL (function) Address LU (number H) Address LL (number L) End of exclusive EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00010001 0000aaaa 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 function PAIR ON with COPY PAIR ON with RESET BOTH PAIR OFF F0 43 1n 3E 7F 11 0a dd dd dd dd F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal Function call Pair Function Source channel number H Source channel number L Destination channel number H Destination channel number L End of exclusive 0x00 0x01 0x02 Channel *1) *1) *1) *1)0:CH1 - 95:CH96, 128:BUS1 - 135:BUS8, 256:AUX1 267:AUX12, 384:MATRIX1L - 391:MATRIX4R, 512:STEREO L - 513:STEREO R Effect is 0:Effect 1–7:Effect 8, GEQ is 0:GEQ1–5:GEQ6 In the case of PAIR, you must specify channels for which pairing is possible. In the case of PAIR ON with COPY, you must specify Source Channel as the copy source, and Destination Channel as the copy destination. 12.3.19 Parameter change (Function call Event: Effect) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. DM2000—Owner’s Manual Format Details When this is received, the corresponding effect’s function activates (depending on the effect type). STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00010010 0000aaaa 00000000 0ddddddd 00000000 0ddddddd 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 7F 12 0a 00 dd 00 dd F7 function Freeze Play button Freeze Record button Auto Pan 5.1 Trigger Button Auto Pan 5.1 Reset Button System exclusive message n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) Universal 12.3.22 Parameter request (Remote Meter) Function Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the parameter specified by Address (refer to PARAMETER CHANGE PARAMETER NUMBER LIST) will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] at 50 msec intervals for a duration of 10 seconds. If Address UL= 0x7F is received, transmission of all meter data will be halted immediately. (disable) Release:0, Press:1 Destination Effect Number 0 - 7 End of exclusive 0x00 0x01 0x02 0x03 Channel 0:Effect1-7:Effect8 0:Effect1-7:Effect8 0:Effect1-1:Effect2 0:Effect1-1:Effect2 Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the same processing that is executed when the key specified by Address is pressed (released). (Refer to the PARAMETER CHANGE PARAMETER NUMBER LIST.) Transmission If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. DATA EOX F0 43 1n 3E 06 20 aa aa aa dd F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Address UU Address UL Address LU Address LL 0:press, 1:release End of exclusive 12.3.21 Parameter change (Remote Meter) When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote meter, the specified meter information is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When you want to transmit meter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted continuously within every 10 seconds. Reception This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. Transmission When transmission has been enabled by a Request, the parameter specified by Address (see PARAMETER CHANGE PARAMETER NUMBER LIST) will be transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel at 50 msec intervals for a duration of 10 seconds. Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the PORT setting is changed. If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00100001 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ddddddd F0 43 1n 3E 06 21 aa aa aa dd Meter data uses the unmodified DECAY value of the DSP. For the interpretation of the value, refer to the PARAMETER CHANGE PARAMETER NUMBER LIST. Function call Event 12.3.20 Parameter change (Key remote) 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00100000 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0aaaaaaa 0ddddddd 11110111 0ddddddd dd Data1 L : 11110111 F7 End of exclusive Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) • This does not activate when the effect type is different. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 331 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Address UU Address UL Address LU Address LL Data1 H Transmission If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 F0 01000011 43 0011nnnn 3n 00111110 3E 00000110 06 00100001 21 0aaaaaaa aa 0aaaaaaa aa 0aaaaaaa aa 0cccccccccc 0ccccccccCc 11110111 F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Address UU Address UL Address LU Address LL Count H Count L End of exclusive 12.3.23 Parameter change (Remote Time Counter) When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Remote Time Counter, the Time Counter data is transmitted every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When you want to transmit Counter information continuously, a Request must be transmitted within every 10 seconds. Reception This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. Transmission When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request, the Time Counter information is transmitted on [RxCH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds. Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the PORT setting is changed. If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00100001 0000tttt 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 0ddddddd 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 06 22 0t dd dd dd dd F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Remote Time Counter 0:Time Code, 1: Measure, Beat, Clock Hour / Measure H Min / Measure L Sec / Beat Frame / Clock End of exclusive 12.3.24 Parameter request (Remote Time Counter) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When this is received, the Time Counter information is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel every 50 msec for 10 seconds. When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be halted immediately. Transmission If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without DM2000—Owner’s Manual 332 Appendix C: MIDI change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00000110 00100001 0aaaaaaa F0 43 3n 3E 06 22 aa System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Remote Time Counter 0:Transmission request, 0x7F:Transmission stop request 11110111 F7 End of exclusive 12.3.25 Parameter change (Automix Status) When transmission is enabled by receiving a Request of Automix status, the Automix Status data is transmitted every second for 10 seconds. When you want to transmit the Automix Status information continuously, the Request must be transmitted continuously minimum within 10 seconds interval. The data is transmitted continuously while the transmission is enabled, even when the Automix Status on the DM2000 has been changed. Reception This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. Transmission When the transmission is set to enable by receiving a Request. The Automix Status data is transmitted on the [Rx CH] channel every second for 10 seconds. The data is transmitted continuously while the transmission is enabled, even when the Automix Status on the DM2000 has been changed. Transmission will be disabled if the power is turned off and on again, or if the PORT setting is changed. If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS DATA EOX 11110000 01000011 0001nnnn 00111110 00000110 00100011 00000000 0000dddd 0000dddd 11110111 F0 43 1n 3E 06 23 00 0d 0d F7 System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Automix Status Automix Status H Automix Status L End of exclusive 12.3.26 Parameter request (Automix Status) Reception This is received if [Parameter change RX] is ON and the [Rx CH] matches the device number included in the SUB STATUS. This is echoed if [Parameter change ECHO] is ON. When the data is received, the Automix Status data is transmitted on the [Rx CH] every second for 10 seconds. When the second byte of Address is received on 0x7F, data transmission will be halted immediately (disable). Transmission If [Parameter Change ECHO] is ON, this message is retransmitted without change. STATUS ID No. SUB STATUS GROUP ID MODEL ID ADDRESS EOX 11110000 01000011 0011nnnn 00111110 00000110 00100011 0aaaaaaa F0 43 3n 3E 06 23 aa System exclusive message Manufacture's ID number (YAMAHA) n=0-15 (Device number=MIDI Channel) MODEL ID (digital mixer) DM2000 Automix Status 0:Transmission request, 0x7F:Transmission stop request 11110111 F7 End of exclusive DM2000—Owner’s Manual MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge 333 Appendix D: Options MB2000 Peak Meter Bridge Installation 1 Attach the brackets to the meter bridge. 2 Screw the four fixing screws into the DM2000, but don’t tighten them fully. 3 Align the meter bridge with the four screws, and then tighten the screws. 4 Connect the meter bridge cable to the DM2000’s METER port. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 334 Appendix D: Options Meter Bridge Controls BEAT S CLOCK F LAMP DIMMER J H CONTROL ROOM TIME CODE MEASURE M 6 72 L STEREO 36 56 42 18 30 24 48 49 96 1 48 MASTER This button is used to set the metering position for Output Channels to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. It works in unison with the PRE EQ, PRE FADER, and POST FADER buttons for Output Channels on the Meter pages. The indicators show the current setting. 47 48 95 96 45 46 93 94 43 44 91 92 39 40 87 88 37 38 85 86 AUX 9 33 34 81 82 AUX 10 35 36 83 84 AUX 12 AUX 11 41 42 89 90 D PEAK HOLD button This button is used to turn the Peak Hold function on and off. Its indicator lights up when Peak Hold is on. It works in unison with the PEAK HOLD buttons on the Meter pages. 31 32 79 80 OVER 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 24 30 36 48 29 30 77 78 AUX 8 27 28 75 76 25 26 73 74 19 20 67 68 17 18 65 66 21 22 69 70 23 24 71 72 AUX 7 AUX 6 AUX 5 AUX 4 AUX 3 AUX 2 AUX 1 BUS 8 15 16 63 64 BUS 7 13 14 61 62 OVER 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 24 30 36 48 8 32 56 80 7 31 55 79 BUS 6 11 12 59 60 BUS 5 9 10 57 58 5 6 53 54 3 4 51 52 OVER 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 24 30 36 48 BUS 1 1 2 49 50 BUS 3 BUS 2 BUS 4 7 8 55 56 6 30 54 78 3 27 51 75 1 25 49 73 2 26 50 74 4 28 52 76 5 29 53 77 1 DM2000—Owner’s Manual B INPUT METERING POSITION button & indicators This button is used to set the metering position for Input Channels to pre-EQ, pre-fader, or post-fader. It works in unison with the PRE EQ, PRE FADER, and POST FADER buttons for Input Channels on the Meter pages. The indicators show the current setting. C OUTPUT METERING POSITION button & indicators 4 REMOTE 73 96 10 8 OVER 0 3 6 9 12 15 18 24 30 36 48 MATRIX 4 MATRIX 3 MATRIX 1 MATRIX 2 24 48 72 96 23 47 71 95 22 46 70 94 21 45 69 93 20 44 68 92 19 43 67 91 18 42 66 90 17 41 65 89 16 40 64 88 15 39 63 87 14 38 62 86 12 36 60 84 11 35 59 83 10 34 58 82 9 33 57 81 INPUT METERING POSITION 14 3 REMOTE 49 72 12 REMOTE 2 25 48 8 R 9 13 37 61 85 POST FADER PRE FADER PRE EQ 2 PRE FADER POST FADER OUTPUT METERING POSITION PRE EQ 3 6 4 2 OVER 0 1 REMOTE 1 24 PEAK HOLD 5 4 A Channel indicators These indicators show which channels are currently being metered: Input Channels 1–24, 25–48, 49–72, 73–96, or the Output Channels (Bus Outs 1–8, Aux Sends 1–12, Matrix Sends 1–4). 7 E LAYER buttons These button are used to select Layers for metering. The button indicator for the currently selected Layer lights up. The [1–24], [25–48], [49–72], and [73–96] buttons select the Input Layers. The [MASTER] button selects the Master Layer. The REMOTE [1–4] buttons select the Remote Layers. If the Meter Follow Layer preference is on (see page 235), these Layers are selected automatically when the LAYER buttons on the DM2000 are pressed. The [1–48] button selects Input Channels 1–48, and the [49–96] button selects Input Channels 49–96, allowing you to meter up to 48 channels simultaneously. F TIMECODE counter This counter displays the current timecode position. When the Pro Tools Remote Layer is selected, it displays the Pro Tools timecode. G Meters These 12-segment LED meters display the signals levels of the channels on the currently selected Layer. H STEREO meters These 32-segment meters display the signal levels of the Stereo Out. I CONTROL ROOM button This button is used to display the level of the Control Room signal on the STEREO meters. Its indicator lights up when the STEREO meters are displaying Control Room levels. J LAMP DIMMER knob This knob is used to adjust the brightness of the optional LA1800 Light Goosenecks. SP2000 Wooden Side Panels 335 SP2000 Wooden Side Panels Attach the left side panel as shown below. Attach the right side panel in the same way. DM2000—Owner’s Manual 336 Index Symbols +48V ON/OFF switches 5 Numerics 1–24 button 18 25–48 button 18 2TR I/O channel status 57 dithering outputs 57 patching digital outputs 65 patching direct outs 65 patching inputs 61 sampling rate conversion 53 2TR IN ANALOG 1 +4 dB (BAL) 31 2TR IN ANALOG 2 –10 dBV (UNBAL) 31 2TR IN DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 & 2 33 2TR IN DIGITAL COAXIAL 3 33 2TR OUT DIGITAL AES/EBU 1 & 2 33 2TR OUT DIGITAL COAXIAL 3 32 2TR OUT DIGITAL OUT PATCH page 65 3-1 surround mode 77 31-band GEQs 155 49–72 button 18 5.1 surround mode 77 73–96 button 18 96 kHz, 88.2 kHz, 48 kHz, 44.1 kHz, selecting 51 A ABORT/UNDO button 20 Absolute mode, automix 167 AC IN connector 34 AD inputs connectors 30 in detail 48 patching 61 patching output channel insert ins 64 summary 5 talkback 138 AD824 control 229 channel strip displays 40 AD824 GAIN/PHANTOM CONTROL page 229 Adat I/O card 54 AES/EBU I/O card 54 ALL CLEAR button 19 AMP SIMULATE 274 Analog I/O & the AD input section chapter 48 Architecture channels 1 I/O 1 ASSIGN 1 button, control room 27 ASSIGN 1 button, control room surround 27 ASSIGN 1–4 buttons, encoder mode 7 DM2000—Owner’s Manual ASSIGN 2 button, control room 27 ASSIGN 2 button, control room surround 27 Assigning control changes 186 parameters to encoders 46 program changes 185 See also Routing targets to remote layers 217 user defined keys 230 ATT control 17 ATTACK control 15 Attenuating cascade inputs 60 channel signals 106 AUDITION button 21 Auto AUX/MATRIX Display preference 234 AUTO buttons about 5 in detail 169 Pro Tools 192 STEREO 18 using 172 Auto channel select 44 Auto Channel Select preference 235 Auto DELAY Display preference 234 Auto DYNAMICS Display preference 234 Auto EQ Edit In preference 237 Auto EQUALIZER Display preference 234 Auto Inc TC Capture preference 237 AUTO PAN 5.1 287 Auto PAN/SURROUND Display preference 234 Auto PHASE/INSERT Display preference 234 Auto ROUTING Display preference 234 Auto scene memory update 158 Auto SOLO Display preference 234 Auto WORD CLOCK Display preference 234 Automix about 164 absolute mode 167 AUTO buttons 169 cascading consoles 58 copying events 177 deleting events 180 duplicating events 180 erasing events 177 EVENT COPY page 177 EVENT EDIT page 180 event list 180 FADER EDIT pages 170 features 2 inserting events 180 library 147 MAIN page 165 MEMORY page 169 merging events 177 motors on/off 170 moving events 177 offline editing 177 overwrite parameters 167 parameter recording 174 playback 176 protecting memories 147 punching individual parameters 175 recording 172 relative mode 167 rerecording 173 return mode 166 storing to smartmedia 231 storing via bulk dump 187 takeover mode 166 time signature map 172 timecode offset 165 timecode source 171 touch sense in/out 170 trim edit 178 undo 167 update to end 165 what’s recorded 164 Automix chapter 164 AUTOMIX MAIN page 165 AUTOMIX MEMORY page 169 AUTOMIX page 147 AUTOMIX section about 20 automix 168 Pro Tools 197 Automix Store Undo preference 237 AUTOPAN 270 AUTO-REC button 20 AUX 11 button 26 AUX 1–12 buttons 7 AUX 12 button 26 AUX button, automix 21 AUX FADER VIEW page 127 AUX ON button, automix 21 AUX PAN CH pages 94 AUX SELECT section about 7 Pro Tools 194 using 88 AUX SEND CH pages 90 Aux sends attenuating 106 automix 164 channel library 140 channel strip displays 39 compressors 113 copying 129 delay 117 EQ 107 fixed mode 88 follow surround pan 121 grouping faders 122 grouping mutes 123 inserts 111 link pan to input channels 94 master level setting 96 metering 104 muting 90, 95 337 naming 130 pairing 120 pan modes 94 panning 94 patching GEQs 66 patching to 2TR digital outputs 65 patching to effects 62 patching to input channels 61 patching to omni outs 64 patching to slot outputs 63 pre/post fader 88 scene recall safe 162 setting levels 89 soloing 118 variable mode 88 viewing fader settings 125 viewing parameter settings 124 viewing settings 92 Aux sends chapter 88 AUX/MATRIX SEND section about 14 muting aux sends 90 muting matrix sends 98 setting aux send levels 89 setting matrix send levels 97 AUX/MTRX button, encoder mode 7 AUX/MTRX button, fader mode 8 B BACK button 23 Balance matrix sends 101 stereo out 84 BANK button 14 BANK indicators 14 Bars, time signature map 172 BASS MANAGE 136 Battery check 238 BATTERY CHECK page 238 BI-DIRECTIONAL, cascade setting 60 Bit shift attenuation 106 Bulk dump 187 BULK DUMP page 187 BUS button, control room surround 27 BUS FADER VIEW page 126 Bus outs attenuating 106 automix 164 bus to stereo library 143 channel library 140 compressors 113 copying 129 delay 117 EQ 107 grouping faders 122 grouping mutes 123 inserts 111 level setting 86 metering 104 muting 86 naming 130 pairing 120 patching GEQs 66 patching to 2TR digital outputs 65 patching to input channels 61 patching to omni outs 64 patching to slot outputs 63 routing to 75 routing to stereo out 87 scene recall safe 162 soloing 118 viewing fader settings 125 viewing parameter settings 124 Bus outs chapter 85 BUS TO STEREO LIBRARY page 143 BUS TO STEREO page 87 Bypassing effects 151 C CARD Slot. See Smartmedia Cascade COMM Link preference 235 CASCADE IN page 60 CASCADE IN port 33 CASCADE IN port pin assignments 314 CASCADE OUT page 60 CASCADE OUT port 33 CASCADE OUT port pin assignments 314 Cascading consoles about 58 attenuating cascade inputs 60 hookup examples 59 linked functions 58 master setting 60 turning off cascade outputs 60 Category, channel status 57 CH DIRECT OUT DESTINATION pages 65 CH EQUALIZER LIBRARY page 146 CH FADER EDIT pages 170 CH FADER VIEW page 125 CH GATE EDIT page 69 CH PARAMETER VIEW page 124 CH SURROUND EDIT page 79 Channel Copy Parameter preference 236 CHANNEL COPY section about 17 using 129 Channel ID/Channel preference 236 Channel IDs 41 CHANNEL INSERTS button 10 CHANNEL LIBRARY page 140 Channel names assigning 130 displaying 41 Channel status monitor 57 CHANNEL STATUS MONITOR page 57 Channel strip displays about 6 displaying channel names 41 in detail 39 Pro Tools 193 user defined remote layers 219 Channel strips about 5 Pro Tools 191 selecting layers 42 user defined remote layers 218 CHORUS 268 CHORUS 5.1 287 CLEAR button 26 Clear Edit Channel after REC preference 237 Clearing library memories 139 Clearing scene memories 160 Combination effects 149 Common channel functions chapter 103 COMP 5.1 290 COMP EDIT page 114 COMP indicator 15 COMP LIBRARY page 145 COMP ON button 15 COMPAND 5.1 291 Compander 113 Compressors channel strip displays 39 grouping input channels 72 grouping output channels 116 library 145 order 112 parameter table 306 presets 113 using 113 Confirmation messages 37 Contrast control 11 CONTROL CHANGE ASSIGN TABLE page 186 Control changes assignments 186 echoing 184 omni 184 receive enable 184 storing assignments to smartmedia 231 storing assignments via bulk dump 187 transmit enable 184 CONTROL port 33 CONTROL port pin assignments 315 Control room dimmer level 133 monitoring 132 patching to 2TR digital outputs 65 setup 133 CONTROL ROOM button 26 CONTROL ROOM LEVEL control 28 CONTROL ROOM SETUP page 133 Control surface features 3 illustration 4 Control surface & rear panel chapter 4 Cooling fan 34 COPY button 17 Copy Initial Fader preference 237 Copy, channel status 57 Copying automix events 177 Copying channels 129 Current scene display 35 DM2000—Owner’s Manual 338 Currently selected channel display 36 name display 36 selecting 43 Currently selected page page number display 36 selecting 36 title display 36 Cursor buttons 24 D DATA button 8 Data entry & transport section about 23 machine transport 221 Pro Tools 201 Date preference 236 DAW MIDI port setup 183 See Pro tools DEC button 24 DECAY control 15 DEL, title edit window 38 Delay effects 148 DELAY LCR 267 DELAY SCALE 118 DELAY section about 13 using 117 DELAY+ER. 280 DELAY+REV 282 DELAY->ER. 281 DELAY->REV 283 Delaying channel signals channel strip displays 39 how to 117 Deleting automix events 180 Digital I/O & cascading chapter 50 Dimensions 316 DIMMER button 28 Dimmer level, control room 133 Dimmer level, talkback 138 DIO button 8 DIO Warning preference 235 DIRECT button 12 Direct outs patching 65 routing to 75 Display about 11 confirmation messages 37 history function 37 in detail 35 items 37 parameter windows 37 Pro Tools 190 DISPLAY ACCESS section about 8 Pro Tools 195 Display Brightness preference 236 DISPLAY buttons AUTOMIX 20 AUX SELECT 7 DM2000—Owner’s Manual AUX/MATRIX SEND 14 DELAY 13 DYNAMICS 14 EFFECTS/PLUG-INS 9 ENCODER MODE 7 EQUALIZER 16 LOCATOR 21 MATRIX SELECT 6 MONITOR 26 PAN/SURROUND 15 PHASE/INSERT 13 ROUTING 12 SCENE MEMORY 19 TRACK ARMING 19 USER DEFINED KEYS 21 DISPLAY HISTORY buttons 23 DIST->DELAY 284 DISTORTION 273 DITHER page 57 Dithering digital outputs 57 DIV (divergence) 79 Double channel 56 Double speed 56 DUAL PITCH 272 Ducking, input channels 69 Duplicating automix events 180 DYNA. FILTER 274 DYNA. FLANGE 275 DYNA. PHASER 275 Dynamic effects 149 DYNAMICS section about 14 compressors 114 gates 69 Dynamics. See Gates and Compressors E EARLY REF. 264 ECHO 268 Edit buffer 157 Edit indicators display 36 SCENE MEMORY section 157 Editing automix events 177 compressors 113 effects 150 gates 69 GEQs 155 library memory titles 139 plug-ins 153 scene memory titles 160 EFFECT button 16 EFFECT EDIT page 150 EFFECT INPUT PATCH pages 62 EFFECT INPUT/OUTPUT METER page 104 EFFECT LIBRARY page 142 Effects about 148 automix 164 bypassing 151 editing 150 features 2 library 142 metering 104 parameter tables 264 patching inputs 62 patching output channel insert ins 64 patching outputs 61 presets 148 tempo 151 EFFECTS/PLUG-INS 1–8 buttons 10 EFFECTS/PLUG-INS section about 9 editing effects 150 editing GEQs 155 editing plug-ins 153 Pro Tools 196 Emphasis, channel status 57 ENABLE button 20 ENCODER MODE ASSIGN page 46 ENCODER MODE section about 7 Pro Tools 194 using 45 Encoder modes, selecting 45 Encoders about 5 assignable parameter list 47 assigning parameters 46 automix punch in/out 175 channel strip displays 39 panning input channels 76 patching inputs & outputs 67 Pro Tools 192 selecting encoder modes 45 setting aux send levels 89 setting matrix send levels 97 user defined remote layers 218 END button 22 ENTER button 24 EQ automix 164 channel strip displays 39 EQUALIZER EDIT page 109 features 2 frequency 108 gain 108 grouping input channels 71 grouping output channels 110 library 146 presets 107 Q 108 using 107 EQ button, automix 21 EQ displays 17 EQ GAIN controls 17 EQ ON button 17 EQUALIZER EDIT page 109 EQUALIZER section about 16 using 108 Erasing automix events 177 EVENT COPY page 177 339 EVENT EDIT page 180 Event editing 177 Event list, automix 180 Expander 113 F F1–F4 buttons 11 FADER button 8 FADER button, automix 21 Fader edit mode 167 FADER MODE section about 8 Pro Tools 195 using 44 Fader Touch Sensitivity preference 236 Faders about 6 auto channel select 44 automix punch in/out 175 aux send master levels 96 bus out levels 86 fader edit mode 167 grouping input channels 74 grouping output channels 122 input channel levels 74 matrix send master levels 101 motors on/off 170 Pro Tools 192 selecting fader modes 44 setting aux send levels 89 setting matrix send levels 97 STEREO 18 stereo out level 83 touch sense in/out, automix 170 touch sense select 44 user defined remote layers 218 Fading scenes 161 Fast Meter Fall Time preference 235 FB/MIX control 13 FB/MIX indicators 13 Features 1 FF button 23 FILE page 233 Fixed mode, aux sends 88 FLANGE 269 FLANGE 5.1 288 Fluorescent displays 6 FOLLOW PAN button 12 Follow surround pan, aux sends 121 Formatting smartmedia 233 FORWARD button 23 Frame rate, automix 171 FREQUENCY controls 17 FREQUENCY indicators 17 FX 148 G GAIN control, dynamics 15 GAIN controls, AD inputs 5 Gang mode aux send pan 94 input channel pan 77 GATE indicator 15 GATE LIBRARY page 144 GATE ON button 15 GATE REVERB 265 GATE/COMP button 15 Gates channel strip displays 39 library 144 parameter table 305 presets 69 using 69 GEQs about 155 editing 155 features 2 library 142 linking 155 patching 66 GPI 228 GPI SETUP page 228 GR meters compressors 115 gates 70 GRAB button 16 GRAPHIC EQUALIZER EDIT page 155 GRAPHIC EQUALIZER INSERT page 66 GRAPHIC EQUALIZER LIBRARY page 142 GRAPHIC EQUALIZERS button 9 Grounding screw 34 GROUP button 9 Grouping features 2 input channel compressors 72 input channel EQs 71 input channel faders 74 input channel mutes 73 output channel compressors 116 output channel EQs 110 output channel faders 122 output channel mutes 123 track arming 227 Guitar effects 149 H HIGH EQ 107 HIGHER SAMPLE RATE DATA TRANSFER FORMAT page 56 HIGH-MID EQ 107 History function 37 HOLD control 15 Horizontal pairing 120 HQ. PITCH 271 I IEEE1394 54 IN button 22 INC button 24 Individual mode aux send pan 94 input channel pan 77 Initial Data Nominal preference 235 Initializing the DM2000 239 Input & output patching chapter 61 INPUT A & B (BAL) connectors 30 INPUT CH ATTENUATOR/SHIFTER pages 106 INPUT CH AUX VIEW pages 92 INPUT CH DELAY pages 117 INPUT CH FADE TIME pages 161 INPUT CH FADER GROUP page 74 INPUT CH INSERT IN PATCH pages 62 INPUT CH METER page 103 INPUT CH MUTE GROUP page 73 INPUT CH PAIR pages 120 INPUT CH PAN pages 76 INPUT CH PHASE pages 68 INPUT CH ROUTING pages 75 INPUT CH SURROUND pages 80 INPUT CHANNEL NAME page 130 Input channels attenuating 106 automix 164 channel library 140 compressors 113 copying 129 delay 117 EQ 107 gating 69 grouping compressors 72 grouping EQs 71 grouping faders 74 grouping mutes 73 inserts 111 level setting 74 metering 103 muting 72 naming 130 pairing 120 panning 76 patching 61 reversing phase 68 selecting layers 42 soloing 118 viewing fader settings 125 viewing parameter settings 124 Input channels chapter 68 INPUT COMP LINK page 72 INPUT EQUALIZER LINK page 71 INPUT PATCH button 9 INPUT PATCH LIBRARY page 141 INPUT PATCH pages 61 Input patching 61 INPUT PORT NAME page 66 Input port naming 66 INS, title edit window 38 INSERT IN & OUT +4dB (BAL) connectors 30 INSERT ON button 13 INSERT ON/OFF switches 5 INSERT pages 111 Inserting automix events 180 Inserts AD insert on/off switches 5 channel strip displays 39 DM2000—Owner’s Manual 340 Joystick about 16 panning input channels 76 reverb 5.1 effect 286 surround pan 78 Joystick Auto Grab preference 235 EQ 146 gate 144 GEQ 142 input patch 141 output patch 141 specifications 310 storing to smartmedia 231 storing via bulk dump 187 surround monitor 147 using 139 Libraries chapter 139 LINK button 16 Link Capture & Locate Memory preference 237 LISTEN, solo 119 LOAD page 232 Loading from smartmedia 232 LOCATE MEMORY 1–8 buttons 22 LOCATE MEMORY page 224 LOCATOR section about 21 Pro Tools 199 using 222 Long channel names assigning 130 displaying 41 Long port names 66 LOOP button 22 LOW EQ 107 LOW-MID EQ 107 K M KEYBOARD connector 32 Keyboard, using 38 Keyin source 70 M. BAND DYNA. 289 MACHINE CONFIGURATION page 220 Machine control about 220 arming tracks 225 locator 222 machine configuration 220 master track arming 226 MTR track arming 226 pre-roll, post-roll, roll-back 224 REMOTE port setup 221 scrub & shuttle 222 setting locate memories 224 track arming groups 227 transport buttons 221 Macintosh configuring for Pro Tools 188 MIDI port setup 183 USB driver 182 Managing smartmedia 233 MASTER button, layer 18 MASTER button, locator 23 MASTER button, track arming 19 Master layer, selecting 42 MASTER METER page 104 MASTER PARAMETER VIEW page 125 MASTER TRACK ARMING CONFIGURATION page 226 MATRIX 1–4 buttons 6 MATRIX FADER VIEW page 127 order 112 patching input channel insert ins 62 patching insert outs to effects inputs 62 patching insert outs to omni outs 64 patching insert outs to slot outputs 63 patching output channel insert ins 64 patching outs to 2TR digital outputs 65 using 111 Installing I/O cards 55 INTERNAL EFFECTS button 9 Internal effects, plug-ins & GEQs chapter 148 Internal timecode source 171 Internet, yamaha web site iv Inverse gang mode aux send pan 94 input channel pan 77 Inverting input channel phase 68 J L L button 15 L/R Nominal Pan preference 235 LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL) 31 Last solo mode 119 LAYER section about 18 selecting layers 42 Layers encoder modes 45 fader modes 44 selecting 42 selecting channels 43 Learn function user defined plug-ins 153 user defined remote layers 218 Left Tab Scroll button 11 LEVEL controls, aux/matrix sends 14 LFE 79 Libraries about 139 automix 147, 164 bus to stereo 143 channel 140 compressor 145 effects 142 DM2000—Owner’s Manual MATRIX PAN page 99 MATRIX SELECT section about 6 Pro Tools 194 using 97 MATRIX SEND pages 98 Matrix sends attenuating 106 automix 164 balance 101 channel library 140 channel strip displays 39 compressors 113 copying 129 delay 117 EQ 107 grouping faders 122 grouping mutes 123 inserts 111 level setting 101 metering 104 muting 98, 101 naming 130 panning 99 patching GEQs 66 patching to 2TR digital outputs 65 patching to omni outs 64 patching to slot outputs 63 pre/post fader 97 scene recall safe 162 setting levels 97 soloing 118 viewing fader settings 125 viewing parameter settings 124 viewing settings 99 Matrix sends chapter 97 MATRIX VIEW page 99 MB2000 peak meter bridge 333 Measures, time signature map 172 Merging automix events 177 METER button 9 Meter Follow Layer preference 235 METER port 33 Meter, time signature map 172 Metering effects 104 input channels 103 metering position 103 output channels 104 stereo out 105 METERING POSITION page 103 MIDI bulk dump 187 control change messages 186 data format 319 features 3 I/O ports 182 MIDI SETUP page 184 parameter change messages 186 port setup 183 ports 33 program change messages 185 supported messages 182 341 MIDI button 8 MIDI chapter 182 MIDI clock automix timecode source 171 Tap tempo, effects 151 MIDI SETUP page 184 MIDI Warning preference 235 MIDI/TO HOST SETUP page 183 mini YGDAI. See Slots Mix solo mode 119 Mix Update Confirmation preference 237 Mixdown, solo status 119 mLAN I/O card 54 MMC. See Machine control MOD. DELAY 266 MOD. FILTER 273 Modulation-based effects 149 MONITOR ALIGNMENT 137 MONITOR MATRIX 136 MONITOR section 26 Monitoring configuring surround monitoring 135 control room 132 control room setup 133 studio 133 surround 134 Monitoring & talkback chapter 132 MONO button 28 MONO DELAY 265 Motors on/off 170 Moving automix events 177 MS decoding 121 MTC TIME CODE INPUT connector 32 MTC, timecode source 171 MTR button 22 MTR TRACK ARMING CONFIGURATION page 226 MULTI FILTER 284 Multi-effects 148 Muting automix 164 aux sends 90, 95 bus outs 86 grouping input channels 73 grouping output channels 123 input channels 72 matrix sends 98, 101 stereo out 83 N Naming channels 130 Naming library memories 139 Naming scene memories 159 NEVER LATCH TALKBACK 138 O OCTA REVERB 286 Offline editing 177 Offsetting automix timecode 165 OMNI OUT +4dB (BAL) 31 OMNI OUT PATCH page 64 Omni outs about 49 patching 64 patching direct outs 65 Omni, MIDI 184 OMS configuring for Pro Tools 189 installing for Pro Tools 188 ON button, automix 21 ON button, delay section 13 ON buttons Pro Tools 192 See also Grouping See also Muting STEREO 18 user defined remote layers 218 ON buttons, aux/matrix sends 14 ONLINE button 22 Operating basics chapter 35 Options iv Order, inserts/compressors 112 Oscillator 238 OSCILLATOR page 238 Other functions chapter 230 OUT button 22 OUTPUT ATTENUATOR page 106 OUTPUT CHANNEL NAME page 131 Output channels attenuating 106 compressors 113 copying 129 delay 117 EQ 107 grouping compressors 116 grouping EQs 110 grouping faders 122 grouping mutes 123 inserts 111 library 140 metering 104 naming 130 pairing 120 selecting master layer 42 soloing 118 viewing fader settings 125 viewing parameter settings 124 OUTPUT COMP LINK page 116 OUTPUT DELAY page 117 OUTPUT EQUALIZER LINK page 110 OUTPUT FADE TIME page 161 OUTPUT FADER GROUP page 122 OUTPUT INSERT IN PATCH page 64 OUTPUT MUTE GROUP page 123 OUTPUT PAIR page 120 OUTPUT PATCH button 9 OUTPUT PATCH LIBRARY page 141 Output patching 63 OUTPUT PORT NAME page 66 Output port naming 66 Overwrite parameters 167 P P2. See Machine control Package contents iv PAD switches 5 Pages history function 37 page number display 36 page tab scroll arrows 36 selecting 36 tabs 36 title display 36 PAIR button 9 Pairing channels 120 features 2 pan modes 77 PAN button 7 PAN button, automix 21 PAN control 16 PAN display 15 PAN/SURROUND section about 15 joystick and surround pan 78 panning input channels 76 Panning automix 164 aux sends 94 channel strip displays 39 input channels 76 matrix sends 99 modes 77 Parameter boxes 37 Parameter change messages 186 Parameter controls 1–4 10 Parameter Up/Down buttons 10 Parameter wheel 24 Parameter windows 37 PASTE button 17 Patch Confirmation preference 235 Patch select window 67 Patching 2TR digital outputs 65 direct outs 65 effects inputs 62 features 2 GEQs 66 input channel insert ins 62 input channels 61 input library 141 inputs 61 omni outs 64 output channel insert ins 64 output library 141 outputs 63 patch select window 67 slot outputs 63 surround monitor 137 with the encoders 67 Patterns 79 PC configuring for Pro Tools 188 MIDI port setup 183 USB driver 182 Peak hold 103 DM2000—Owner’s Manual 342 PEAK indicators 5 Phantom power switches 5 Phase button 13 Phase, input channel phase reverse 68 PHASE/INSERT section about 13 reversing phase 68 using inserts 111 PHASER 270 Phone jacks 29 PHONES jack 25 PHONES LEVEL control 25 Phono connectors 29 Picture of control surface 4 PLAY button, automix 168 PLAY button, transport 23 Playing back an automix 176 PLUG-IN EDIT page 153 PLUG-IN SETUP page 152 Plug-ins about 152 configuring 152 editing 153 MIDI port setup 183 storing to smartmedia 231 storing via bulk dump 187 PLUG-INS button 10 Port ID/Port preference 236 Port IDs 66 Port names 66 Position, compressors 112, 115 Position, inserts 112 POST button 22 Post/pre. See Pre/post Post-roll, machine control 224 Power cord 35 POWER switch 34 Powering up the DM2000 35 PRE button 22 Pre/post aux sends 88 matrix sends 97 metering 103 solo 119 PREFERENCES1 page 234 PREFERENCES2 page 236 PREFERENCES3 page 237 Pre-roll, machine control 224 Presets compressors 113 effects 148 EQ 107 gates 69 Pro tools arming parameters for automation 216 assigning inputs to channels 203 assigning inserts/plug-ins 209 assigning outputs to channels 204 assigning send destinations 206 automation 215 AUTOMIX section 197 AUX SELECT section 194 DM2000—Owner’s Manual bypassing all plug-ins 211 bypassing individual plug-ins 211 channel strip displays 193 channel strips 191 configuring 189 configuring Macintosh computers 188 configuring sends as pre or post 206 configuring the DM2000 188 configuring Windows computers 188 control surface operation 190 data entry & transport section 201 display 190 DISPLAY ACCESS section 195 editing plug-ins 210 EFFECTS/PLUG-INS section 196 ENCODER MODE section 194 FADER MODE section 195 flip mode 208 LOCATOR section 199 making fine adjustments to the selected region 213 MATRIX SELECT section 194 muting channels 205 muting sends 207 navigating the edit window 212 OMS 188 panning channels 205 panning sends 207 resetting faders, sends, panpots & plug-ins 212 scrolling windows 203 scrub & shuttle 214 selecting channels 203 setting channel levels 204 setting send levels 207 setting the automation mode 215 soloing channels 205 TRACK ARMING section 197 trim mode 216 USER DEFINED KEYS section 198 zooming 213 Pro tools remote layer chapter 188 PROGRAM CHANGE ASSIGN TABLE page 185 Program changes assignments 185 echoing 184 omni 184 receive enable 184 storing assignments to smartmedia 231 storing assignments via bulk dump 187 transmit enable 184 Protecting automix memories 147 Protecting scene memories 160 PS/2 keyboard 38 Punch in/out, individual parameters 175 Q Q controls 17 Q indicators 17 Q, EQ 108 QUICK PUNCH button 22 R R button 15 RANGE control 15 RATIO control 15 RCA connectors 29 Read-only memories 139 Rear panel 29 REC button, automix 20 REC button, transport 23 RECALL button 20 Recall Confirmation preference 235 RECALL SAFE page 162 Recalling memory libraries 139 scene memories 159 Receive channel 184 Receive Full Frame Message preference 237 Recording an automix 172 Recording, solo status 119 REHEARSAL button 23 RELATIVE button 21 Relative mode, automix 167 RELEASE control 15 REMOTE 1–4 buttons 18 REMOTE button 8 Remote control chapter 217 Remote layers about 217 assigning targets 217 MIDI port setup 183 Pro Tools 188 selecting 42 REMOTE page 217 REMOTE page, Pro Tools 190 REMOTE page, user defined 218, 219 REMOTE port 33 REMOTE port pin assignments 315 REMOTE PORT SETUP page 221, 229 Requesting bulk dump 187 Rerecording an automix 173 RETURN button 20 Return mode, automix 166 RETURN TO ZERO button 22 REV+CHORUS 276 REV+FLANGE 277 REV+SYMPHO. 278 REV->CHORUS 276 REV->FLANGE 277 REV->PAN 279 REV->SYMPHO. 278 REVERB 5.1 286 Reverb effects 148 REVERB HALL 264 REVERB PLATE 264 REVERB ROOM 264 REVERB STAGE 264 REVERSE GATE 265 Reversing input channel phase 68 343 REW button 23 Right Tab Scroll button 11 RING MOD. 273 ROLL BACK button 23 Roll-back, machine control 224 ROTARY 272 Routing channel strip displays 39 input channels 75 ROUTING 1–8 buttons 13 ROUTING section about 12 using 75 S Safe channels, automix 170 Safe channels, scene memories 162 Safe channels, solo 119 Sampling rate 2TR I/O SRC 53 display 36 setting 51 slot SRC 56 SAMPLING RATE CONVERTER page 53 SAVE page 231 Saving to smartmedia 231 Scene down button 20 Scene MEM Auto Update preference 235 Scene memories about 157 auto scene memory update 158 automix 164 cascading consoles 58 current scene display 35 edit buffer 157 edit indicator 157 fading scenes 161 memory #0 157 MIDI program changes 185 protecting 160 recalling 159 safe channels 162 sorting 163 storing 159 storing to smartmedia 231 storing via bulk dump 187 undo memory 157 what’s stored 157 Scene memories chapter 157 Scene memory display 19 SCENE MEMORY page 160 SCENE MEMORY section about 19 using 159 SCENE MEMORY SORT page 163 Scene up button 20 Scroll arrows, pages 36 SCRUB button 24 SEL buttons about 5 displaying long channel names 41 pairing channels 120 Pro Tools 192 selecting channels 43 STEREO 43 SEL MODE, solo 119 SELECTED CHANNEL section 12 Selecting encoder modes 45 fader modes 44 layers 42 pages 36 Selecting channels auto channel select 44 channel strip displays 39 how to 43 touch sense select 44 SERIAL TO HOST port 32 MIDI 182 timecode source 171 SET button 22 SET SPL85 135 Setting levels aux send masters 96 aux sends 89 bus outs 86 input channels 74 matrix send masters 101 matrix sends 97 stereo out 83 SETUP button 8 Shadow memories 158 SHIFT LOCK, title edit window 38 Short channel names 130 Short port names 66 Show Compact Size preference 237 SHUTTLE button 24 SIGNAL indicators 5 Slate 138 SLATE button 28 SLOT OUTPUT PATCH pages 63 Slots about 34, 54 available cards 54 card restrictions 54 channel status 57 dithering outputs 57 double channel 56 double speed 56 installing cards 55 MIDI 182 patching direct outs 65 patching inputs 61 patching output channel insert ins 64 patching outputs 63 timecode source 171 SMALL button 28 SMALL CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL) 31 SMALL TRIM control 25 Smartmedia card slot 6 formatting 233 handling iii loading 232 managing 233 saving 231 SMPTE TIME CODE INPUT connector 32 Solo cascading consoles 58 configuring 119 safe channels 119 sel mode 119 status 119 trim 119 using 118 SOLO buttons about 6 Pro Tools 192 using 118 SOLO CONTRAST control 26 SOLO indicator 26 SOLO SETUP page 119 SOLO TRIM 119 Soloing channels 118 Sonic Spec 1 Sorting scene memories 163 SP2000 wooden side panels 335 SPEAKER SETUP 135 Specifications 301 SRC. See Sampling rate STATUS, solo 119 STEREO 2TR A1 button 27 STEREO 2TR A2 button 27 STEREO 2TR D1 button 27 STEREO 2TR D2 button 27 STEREO 2TR D3 button 27 STEREO button, control room 27 STEREO button, routing 12 STEREO button, studio 26 STEREO DELAY 266 STEREO fader 18 STEREO FADER VIEW page 128 Stereo link, compressors 115 Stereo link, gates 70 Stereo link, surround pan 80 STEREO METER page 105 Stereo out attenuating 106 automix 164 balance 84 channel library 140 compressors 113 copying 129 delay 117 EQ 107 grouping faders 122 grouping mutes 123 inserts 111 level setting 83 metering 104, 105 muting 83 naming 130 patching GEQs 66 patching to 2TR digital outputs 65 patching to omni outs 64 DM2000—Owner’s Manual 344 patching to slot outputs 63 routing to 75 scene recall safe 162 viewing fader settings 125 viewing parameter settings 124 STEREO OUT +4 dB (BAL) 31 STEREO OUT –10 dBV (UNBAL) 31 Stereo out chapter 82 STEREO section 18 STOP button, automix 168 STOP button, transport 23 STORE button 20 Store Confirmation preference 235 Storing library memories 139 scene memories 159 see also Smartmedia STUDIO LEVEL control 25 Studio manager port setup 183 STUDIO MONITOR OUT +4 dB (BAL) 30 Studio monitoring 133 SURROUND button, automix 21 SURROUND MODE SELECT page 78 SURROUND MONITOR LEVEL control 27 SURROUND MONITOR LIBRARY 147 SURROUND MONITOR page 134 SURROUND MONITOR PATCH page 137 SURROUND MONITOR SETUP page 135 Surround monitoring 134 configuring 135 library 147 patching slot inputs 137 patching to omni outs 64 patching to slot outputs 63 Surround pan automix 164 aux send pan 121 channel page 80 edit page 79 features 3 joystick 78 selecting modes 78 using 77 Switching on the DM2000 35 SYMPHO 5.1 288 SYMPHONIC 269 T Tabs, pages 36 Takeover mode, automix 166 Talkback AD inputs 138 dimmer level 138 mic 25 setup 138 using 138 TALKBACK button 28 TALKBACK LEVEL control 25 TALKBACK SETUP page 138 DM2000—Owner’s Manual Tascam I/O card 54 TC Drop Warning preference 235 Tempo, effects 151 Terminating wordclocks 52 THRESHOLD control 15 TIME control 13 TIME REFERENCE page 171 Time signature map, automix 172 TIME SIGNATURE page 172 Timecode automix source 171 capturing, automix 180 capturing, locate memories 224 display 165 offset 165 Title edit window 38 Titling library memories 139 Titling scene memories 159 TO END 165 TOUCH SENSE button 21 Touch Sense Control preference 237 Touch sense in/out, automix 170 Touch sense select channel strip displays 39 using 44 Touch Sense Select preference 237 TRACK ARMING 1–24 buttons 19 TRACK ARMING GROUP A–D buttons 19 TRACK ARMING GROUP page 227 TRACK ARMING section about 19 Pro Tools 197 using 225 Transmit channel 184 Transmitting bulk dump 187 Transport. See Data entry & transport section TREMOLO 271 Trimming automix events 178 Turning channels on or off. See Muting Turning on the DM2000 35 Type I/II EQ 109 using 219 User defined plug-ins about 152 automix 164 configuring 152 editing 153 storing to smartmedia 231 storing via bulk dump 187 UTILITY button 8 V Variable mode, aux sends 88 Vertical pairing 120 VIEW button 9 Viewing channel fader settings input channels 125 output channels 125 Viewing channel parameter settings input channels 124 output channels 124 W Waves Y56K plug-ins effects card 152 Web site iv Welcome chapter 1 Windows configuring for Pro Tools 188 MIDI port setup 183 USB driver 182 WORD CLOCK 75Ω ON/OFF termination switch 32 WORD CLOCK IN connector 32 WORD CLOCK OUT 1 connector 32 WORD CLOCK OUT 2 connector 32 WORD CLOCK SELECT page 51 Wordclocks about 50 connections 50 selecting the source 51 terminating 52 X XLR connectors 29 U Undo automix 167 Undo scene memory 157 UPDATE 165 USB TO HOST port 32 drivers 182 MIDI 182 timecode source 171 USER DEFINED KEY ASSIGN page 230 USER DEFINED KEYS 1–16 buttons 21 USER DEFINED KEYS section about 21 Pro Tools 198 using 230 User defined layers automix 164 configuring 218 storing to smartmedia 231 storing via bulk dump 187 Y Y56K plug-ins effects card 152 Yamaha web site iv YGDAI. See Slots DM2000 Block Diagram (Gain Reduction) (Out Meter) INPUT 1(...96) GAIN METER (Out Meter) METER PAD 0 26 INSERT OFF AD IN 1(...24) AD Input 1-24 AD INSERT IN GATE ON SLOT1 16 SLOT2 16 SLOT3 16 SLOT4 16 SLOT5 16 SLOT6 96 TO SURROUND MONITOR METER FX1 SEND 1-8 ATT 4BAND EQ SLOT1 Input 1-16 SLOT2 Input 1-16 SLOT3 Input 1-16 SLOT4 Input 1-16 SLOT5 Input 1-16 SLOT6 Input 1-16 INPUT DELAY (Gain Reduction) (Out Meter) METER METER COMP METER METER PRE/POST ON AUX COMP Keyin Self or Stereo Link 32 FX3 SEND 1-2 FX4 SEND 1-2 FX5 SEND 1-2 Sur2 Return 1-8 Sur1-2 FX2 Return 1-2 FX3 Return 1-2 FX4 Return 1-2 FX5 Return 1-2 FX6 Return 1-2 FX7 Return 1-2 FX8 Return 1-2 FX6 SEND 1-2 FX7 SEND 1-2 FX8 SEND 1-2 4BAND EQ ATT DIRECT OUT 1(...96) INSERT METER INSERT 2 AES/EBU PRE/POST 2TRD1 L/R SRC 2TRD2 L/R AES/EBU 2 COAXIAL GEQ 1(...6) METER ON METER LEVEL ON AUX1(...12) TO INPUT PATCH (Gain Reduction) (Out Meter) METER METER COMP LEVEL PAN To CASCADE OUTPUT INSERT METER CASCADE IN ATT isolate INSERT GEQ OUTPUT DELAY 4BAND EQ MATRIX 1L(...4L) GEQ Same Above from BUS1(...8) MATRIX 1R(...4R) USE AD IN (1-24) AS TALKBACK 2TRD3 L/R SRC from AUX1(...12) 2TR OUT DIGITAL PATCH Same Above SLATE AD CONTROL ROOM 2 TB AUX11 2TRA1 L/R STEREO 2TR D1 2TR D2 2TR D3 2TR A1 2TR A2 R L 2TRA2 L/R AD RCA R 10 +18dB +4dB TO MONITOR SELECT 12 DA AUX1-12 BUS1-8 AUX1-12 MATRIX1-4 for each OMNI OUT 1 DA CONTROL ROOM AUX12 AUX12 SOLO R TRS 2 2 2 2 2 2 MONITOR SELECT L R ASSIGN1 8 12 8 STEREO BUS1-8 INPUT PATCH SURROUND MONITOR STEREO BUS1-8 AUX1-12 MTRX1L-4R DIRECT OUT 1-96 INSERT OUT 8 2 8 12 8 L STUDIO MONITOR OUT DA R PHONES LEVEL DA DA SOLO LOGIC PHONES DA L DA DA 4 OMNI OUT 96 126 SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 SLOT6 R SMALL TRIM L ASSIGN2 R 3 DA 5 DA 6 DA 7 DA 8 SLOT1 Input 1-8 SLOT2 Input 1-8 SLOT3 Input 1-8 SLOT4 Input 1-8 SLOT5 Input 1-8 SLOT6 Input 1-8 8 8 8 8 8 8 BUS1-8 8 8x8 Patch 8 8 8 8 8 8 SLOT L PINK NOISE R 500-2kHz BPF Ls/S 1kHz Rs C BUS LFE HPF DELAY HPF DELAY HPF DELAY HPF DELAY HPF DELAY LPF1 DELAY DELAY 16 16 16 16 16 16 DITHER DITHER DITHER DITHER DITHER DITHER SLOT1 SLOT2 SLOT3 SLOT4 SLOT5 SLOT6 DELAY TO OUTPUT PATCH R STEREO OUT DA DA CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT LARGE CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT SMALL SURROUND MONITOR ATT LEVEL LPF2 L STEREO R 2TR OUT DIGITAL 3 DITHER SRC DA C-R LEVEL 8 STEREO L 2TR OUT DIGITAL 2 2 SURROUND MONITOR to C-R DA OMNI 1 OMNI 2 OMNI 3 OMNI 4 OMNI 5 OMNI 6 OMNI 7 OMNI 8 TALKBACK DIMM 8 2TR OUT DIGITAL 1 DITHER SRC 2 STUDIO LEVEL 2 STEREO 8 12 8 2 STEREO L STEREO R OUTPUT PATCH BUS1-8 DITHER SRC 2 AUX11 L AD 2 8 12 8 96 126 STEREO BUS1-8 AUX1-12 MTRX1L-4R DIRECTOUT1-96 INSERT OUT Same Above SOLO L AUX1-12 METER INSERT ON LEVEL BAL CASCADE OUT AD IN 1-24 2TR IN ANALOG 2 AUX1(...12) Same Above OSCILLATOR SINE 100Hz SINE 1kHz SINE 10kHz Pink Noise Burst Noise BUS 1(...8) BUS to STEREO GEQ STEREO GEQ RETURN AUX1-12 GEQ RETURN BUS1-8 GEQ RETURN MATRIX1-4 GEQ RETURN 31BAND GEQ LEVEL PAN TALK BACK 2TR IN ANALOG 1 BUS 1(...8) Same Above 2 2TR IN DIGITAL 2 2TR IN DIGITAL 3 SRC GEQ OUTPUT DELAY off 2TR IN DIGITAL 1 METER INSERT ON LEVEL TO INPUT PATCH FX1 Return 1-2 FX1-8 STEREO R Same as stereo master L MATRIX1L MATRIX1R MATRIX2L MATRIX2R MATRIX3L MATRIX3R MATRIX4L MATRIX4R 126 SELECT INSERT OUT FX2 SEND 1-8 12 STEREO L GEQ PAN Sur1 Return 1-8 AUX1-12 GEQ OUTPUT DELAY PRE/POST LFE (Gain Reduction)(Out Meter) STEREO GEQ SEND AUX1-12 GEQ SEND BUS1-8 GEQ SEND MATRIX1-4 GEQ SEND EFFECT INSERT ON LEVEL PAN Keyin 12ch Group(1-12,13-24....) AUX 1-12 Mono in x 96 TO TALKBACK SELECT 16 ATT METER INSERT 4BAND EQ TB DIMM INSERT OUT SOLO DIMM B METER (Gain Reduction) METER INSERT ON LEVEL BAL INSERT METER MONO INPUT INSERT L R DIMM SIGNAL SMALL PEAK AUX 12 ON A COMP AUX 1 +48V PHANTOM SOLO L SOLO R x 24 STEREO L STEREO R OFF BUS1 (L) BUS2 (R) BUS3 (L/C/Ls) BUS4 (R/S/Rs) BUS5 (L/C) BUS6 (R/LFE) BUS7 BUS8 METER METER DM2000 Level Diagram Analog Analog dBu Digital dBFS PAD GAIN INSERT 0 –10 +4 0 –20 –10 PHASE GATE INSERT ATT. EQ INSERT COMP DELAY ON LEVEL INSERT PAN CASCADE IN BUS Adder INSERT ATT. EQ INSERT COMP MASTER ON MASTER LEVEL INSERT BAL DELAY GEQ OUTPUT PATCH [+18dBu] 2 [+10dBu] 3 Nominal Input 5 [+4dBu] GAIN MIN., PAD ON –20 –50 –30 7 –40 –50 –80 –60 –70 –80 –110 –90 Max. Input –100 –40 13 15 –50 Nominal Input [–60dBu] –60 GAIN MAX., PAD OFF –70 17 –80 18 –90 20 –100 21 –130 –110 –140 –120 22 –110 23 –120 24 –150 –130 25 –130 26 –160 –140 –170 27 –140 28 29 –150 –180 –160 –150 30 –160 31 –190 –170 –200 –180 32 33 34 –210 –190 [0dBu = 0.775Vrms] [0dBFS = Full Scale] –10 [–46dBu] 19 –120 +4 0 –30 16 –100 +10 –20 12 14 –90 Nominal Output [+4dBu] 10 11 –70 +24 +20 8 9 –60 Max. Output [+18dBu] CONTROL ROOM MONITOR OUT STEREO OUT STUDIO MONITOR OUT OMNI OUT (default setting) 6 –40 Analog DA CASCADE OUT Digital Clipping Level 0 4 –30 INPUT PATCH Analog dBu 1 +10 AD Digital Bit Max. Input [+24dBu] +24 +20 Digital DSP Noise Floor –170 –180 35 36 –190 YAMAHA [Digital Mixing Console-Internal Parameters] Model: DM2000 Function... Date: Feb 01, 2002 MIDI Implementation Chart Version: 1.0 Transmitted Recognized Remarks 1–16 1–16 1–16 1–16 Memorized Memorized Basic Channel Default Changed Mode Default Messages Altered X X ************** OMNI off/OMNI on X X Note Number :True Voice X ************** 0–127 X Velocity Note On Note Off X X O O After Touch Key’s Ch’s X X X X X X O O Assignable 0–127 ************** 0–127 0–99 Assignable O O *1 Pitch Bend Control Change Prog Change 0-95,102-119 :True# System Exclusive Effect Control System Common :Song Pos :Song Sel :Tune X X X O X X Automix System Real Time :Clock :Commands X X O O Automix, Effect Control Aux Messages :Local ON/OFF :All Notes OFF :Active Sense :Reset X X X X X X O O Notes MTC quarter frame message is recognized.(MTC IN & MIDI IN) *1: Bulk Dump/Request, Parameter Change/Request, and MMC. For MIDI Remote, ALL messages can be transmitted. Mode 1: OMNI ON, POLY Mode 3: OMNI OFF, POLY Mode 2: OMNI ON, MONO Mode 4: OMNI OFF, MONO O: Yes X: No YAMAHA CORPORATION V642910 R2 1 IP 364 02 08 1000 AP Printed in Japan Pro Audio & Digital Musical Instrument Division P.O. Box 3, Hamamatsu, 430-8651, Japan